JP2016043130A - Game machine - Google Patents

Abstract

PROBLEM TO BE SOLVED: To provide a game machine which includes a performance using a reel and can prevent game amusement from being decreased.SOLUTION: A main CPU decides whether to carry out a first reel performance or not and whether to carry out a second reel performance or not. When the main CPU has decided to carry out the first reel performance, the main CPU carries out the first reel performance in a game after a game in which the decision was made. When the main CPU has decided to carry out the second reel performance, the main CPU carries out the second reel performance in a game in which the decision was made. When the main CPU has decided to carry out the second reel performance in a game in which the first reel performance is carried out, the main CPU restricts the first reel performance and carries out the second reel performance.SELECTED DRAWING: Figure 96

Description

  The present invention relates to a gaming machine.

  Conventionally, a plurality of reels having a plurality of symbols drawn on the peripheral surface, and a display window for displaying a part of the symbols drawn on the peripheral surfaces of the plurality of reels, the game value such as a medal by the player A gaming machine (a so-called “pachi-slot”) in which symbols are stopped and displayed on the display window by rotating all reels based on the loading operation and starting operation on the start lever, and stopping each reel based on the stop button operation by the player. )It has been known. Such a gaming machine is a player when a predetermined combination of symbols is stopped and displayed on a predetermined line (hereinafter referred to as “effective line”) among symbols displayed on the display window. A privilege (for example, a medal) is given to.

  In addition, such a gaming machine detects the operation of the start lever by the player, extracts a predetermined random number value based on the detection of the operation of the start lever, and extracts the extracted random number value for each winning combination. The winning combination is determined based on the winning combination determination table in which the lottery value is defined, and reel stop control is performed based on the determined winning combination and the stop button operation by the player. Here, depending on the determined winning combination, it may be permitted to display a plurality of symbol combinations on the active line among predetermined symbol combinations.

  At this time, when “losing” is determined as the winning combination, a combination of symbols that can receive a privilege is not displayed regardless of the operation of the stop button at any timing. In addition, if the stop button is not operated at an appropriate timing, the winning combination will not be displayed on the active line in combination with the winning combination, or if the stop button is operated at any timing, There is a winning combination in which such a combination of symbols is stopped and displayed on the active line.

  In other words, if the winning combination is determined as a winning combination that does not stop and display the combination of symbols related to the winning combination unless the stop button is operated at the appropriate timing, the stop operation is performed at the appropriate timing. Since it is necessary to do this, the player is required to have a certain skill regarding the operation of the stop button.

  Further, in such a gaming machine, when a predetermined condition is satisfied in a normal state that is disadvantageous to the player, a state advantageous to the player compared to the normal state (hereinafter referred to as “specific state”). ”) Is performed. Here, the “specific state” is a bonus game in which a probability that a combination of symbols from which medals are paid out (hereinafter referred to as “a combination of symbols related to winning a prize”) is displayed on the active line is improved as compared to the normal state. (“RB (regular bonus)”, “BB (big bonus)”, “CB (challenge bonus)”, “MB (middle bonus)”, etc.) If the symbol combination is not displayed (or if the stop button is not operated in the appropriate order, the symbol combination related to the winning combination with the smaller number of medals will be displayed) In addition, “AT (assist time)” that informs the appropriate operation order of the stop button, etc., and operating the start lever without performing the medal insertion operation More re-game the player is started to improve the probability that is determined as a winning combination "RT (replay time)", AT and RT is activated at the same time there is a such as "ART (assisted replay time)". Therefore, the player plays a game while desiring to shift to a specific state advantageous to the player.

  Recently, in such gaming machines, those that perform various effects using a reel (rotor) are the mainstream. For example, there is one that performs a lottery execution of a freeze effect that temporarily delays the start of a reel (rotating cylinder) based on operating a start lever (for example, Patent Document 1).

  In addition to the above-described freeze effect, there is an effect that provides an effect of rotating (for example, reversely rotating) a reel (rotating drum) in a mode different from normal rotation (for example, Patent Document 2).

  In the gaming machine of this patent document 2, when the above-mentioned effect is won, the execution of the effect is set in a reserved state over a predetermined number of games, and when a bonus game lottery opportunity occurs in this reserved state, a reservation is made. The production related to is performed.

  In recent gaming machines, it has been possible to improve the entertainment interest by attracting players by installing such a performance using a spinning cylinder.

JP 2010-104402 A JP2013-128549A

  By the way, when both the above-mentioned freeze effect and the effect of making a reservation are installed, the effect execution game related to the reservation and the winning and execution game of the freeze effect may overlap.

  In this case, depending on the player, whether the effect performed based on operating the start lever is an effect performed based on a reservation or an effect performed based on winning a freeze effect. It is difficult to make a judgment, and there is a risk that the game interest will be lowered due to the complicated game characteristics.

  In view of such circumstances, an object of the present invention is to prevent a decrease in gaming interest in a gaming machine having an effect using a rotating drum.

  In order to solve such a problem, a gaming machine according to the present invention includes a symbol display means for variably displaying and stopping a plurality of symbols, a start operation detecting means for detecting a start operation by a player, and the start operation. A winning combination determining means for determining a winning combination based on the detection of the start operation by the detecting means, a first winding effect determining means for determining whether or not to execute the first rotating effect, When it is determined by the second timeline effect determining means to determine whether or not to execute the second timeline effect, and when the first timeline effect determining means determines to execute the first timeline effect, In a game after the game determined to execute the first spinning effect, the first spinning effect execution control means for executing and controlling the first spinning effect and the second spinning effect determination means perform the first. When it is decided to perform the second round effect In addition, in the game determined to execute the second rotation effect, the second rotation effect execution control means for executing and controlling the second rotation effect and the first rotation effect execution control means include When the game for controlling the execution of the first torso effect overlaps with the game for controlling the execution of the second torso effect by the second torso effect execution control unit, the first torso effect execution control is performed. Priority control means for limiting execution control of the first spinning effect by means and giving priority to execution control of the second spinning effect by the second spinning effect execution control means, To do.

  Here, the “first spinning effect” means an effect of performing control for rotating the reel in a manner different from normal rotation, an effect of performing temporary stop control of the reel, or an effect of performing control by combining these. Say.

  In addition, the “second spinning effect” is a spinning effect different from the first spinning effect, and an effect of performing control to rotate the reel in a manner different from the normal rotation, temporary stop of the reel An effect of performing control, or an effect of performing control by combining these.

  In addition, the “first waist effect” executed and controlled by the “first waist effect execution control means” is executed and controlled in a game subsequent to the game for which the execution of the “first waist effect” is determined. Alternatively, execution control may be performed in a game in which a plurality of games have elapsed since the game in which the execution of the “first spinning effect” was determined. Moreover, execution control may be performed in a game that satisfies a predetermined condition.

  According to the present invention, in a gaming machine provided with an effect using a spinning cylinder, it is possible to prevent a decrease in gaming interest.

It is a figure which shows an example of the front view of a gaming machine. It is a figure which shows an example of the internal structure of a cabinet. It is a figure which shows an example of the back surface of a front door. It is a figure which shows an example of the block diagram of the whole gaming machine. It is a figure which shows an example of the movable aspect of a production | presentation apparatus. It is a figure which shows an example of the structure of a stepping motor. It is a figure which shows an example of a sequence data table. It is a figure which shows an example of the symbol combination table in case a symbol combination group is "00". It is a figure which shows an example of the symbol combination table in case a symbol combination group is "01". It is a figure which shows an example of the symbol combination table in case a symbol combination group is "02". It is a figure which shows an example of the symbol combination table in case a symbol combination group is "03". It is a figure which shows an example of the symbol combination table in case a symbol combination group is "04". It is a figure which shows an example of the relationship of a winning combination, the operation order of a stop button, and winning a prize. It is a figure which shows an example of the 1st winning combination determination table for non-RT game states. It is a figure which shows an example of the 1st winning combination determination table for 1st RT gaming states. It is a figure which shows an example of the 1st winning combination determination table for 2nd RT gaming states. It is a figure which shows an example of the 1st winning combination determination table for 3RT gaming states. It is a figure which shows an example of the 1st winning combination determination table for 4th RT gaming states. It is a figure which shows an example of the 1st winning combination determination table for 5RT gaming states. It is a figure which shows an example of the 1st winning combination determination table for 6RT gaming states. It is a figure which shows an example of the 2nd winning combination determination table. It is a figure which shows an example of the reel lock production | presentation lottery table for 1st RT game states. It is a figure which shows an example of the 3RT gaming state reel lock production | presentation lottery table. It is a figure which shows an example of the 4RT gaming state reel lock production | presentation lottery table. It is a figure which shows an example of the 1st RT gaming state spinning effect lottery table. It is a figure which shows an example of the 4th gaming state spinning effect lottery table. It is a figure which shows an example of the 5th gaming state spinning effect lottery table. It is a figure which shows an example of a reel lock map table. It is a figure which shows an example of a rotation effect production | presentation map table. It is a figure which shows an example of a rotation effect correction map table. It is a figure which shows an example of a RUSH stock lottery table. It is a figure which shows an example of a continuation rate determination table. It is a figure which shows an example of a continuous lottery table. It is a figure which shows an example of a point lottery table. It is a figure which shows an example of the effect block table for reel locks. It is a figure which shows an example of the effect block table for a spinning effect. It is a figure which shows an example of the effect block table for rotation effect correction. It is a figure which shows an example of the effect phase table for reel locks. It is a figure which shows an example of the rotation phase effect production phase table. It is a figure which shows an example of the rotation phase effect correction effect phase table. It is a figure which shows an example of an effect data table. It is a figure which shows an example of an output pulse table. It is a figure which shows an example of a game state transition diagram. It is a figure which shows an example of the list of the states managed by a sub control board. It is a figure which shows an example of the transition diagram of the state managed by a sub control board. It is a figure which shows an example of an effect determination table. It is a figure which shows an example of a mode lottery table. It is a figure which shows an example of the 1st chance state lottery mode determination table. It is a figure which shows an example of the point acquisition lottery table for normal states. It is a figure which shows an example of the rare game initial stage game number determination table. It is a figure which shows an example of a 1st chance state transfer lottery table. It is a figure which shows an example of the 2nd chance state transfer lottery table. It is a figure which shows an example of a chance state transfer lottery table. It is a figure which shows an example of a precursor lottery table. It is a figure which shows an example of a precursor game number lottery table. It is a figure which shows an example of the high probability game number lottery table. It is a figure which shows an example of the lottery table for 1st chance states. It is a figure which shows an example of the lottery table for 2nd chance states. It is a figure which shows an example of a judge lottery table. It is a figure which shows an example of the said 2nd chance state point acquisition lottery table. It is a figure which shows an example of the lottery table for 3rd chance states. It is a figure which shows an example of the 4th chance state lottery table. It is a figure which shows an example of a Bonus preparation state transfer lottery table. It is a figure which shows an example of a Bonus state distribution lottery table. It is a figure which shows an example of the advance promotion lottery table. It is a figure which shows an example of the promotion screen lottery table for confirmation screens. It is a figure which shows an example of the table for ART state transfer. It is a figure which shows an example of an ART state high probability lottery table. It is a figure which shows an example of the 2nd addition state transfer lottery table. It is a figure which shows an example of a winning stock lottery table. It is a figure which shows an example of the state transfer lottery table for ART state. It is a figure which shows an example of the point acquisition lottery table for ART state. It is a figure which shows an example of the lottery table for preparation states. It is a figure which shows an example of the lottery table for fall waiting states. It is a figure which shows an example of the 1st addition state lottery table. It is a figure which shows an example of the lottery table for chance states during ART. It is a figure which shows an example of the 2nd addition state point acquisition lottery table. It is a figure which shows an example of the lottery table for RUSH states. It is a figure which shows an example of the point acquisition lottery table for turning effect RE5. It is a figure which shows an example of the lottery table for battle states. It is a figure which shows an example of the 1st Bonus state lottery table. It is a figure which shows an example of the lottery table for 2nd Bonus states. It is a figure which shows an example of the game number determination table for 3rd Bonus states. It is a figure which shows an example of the program start process in a main control board. It is a figure which shows an example of the main loop process in a main control board. It is a figure which shows an example of the medal reception start process in a main control board. It is a figure which shows an example of the medal management process in a main control board. It is a figure which shows an example of the medal insertion check process in a main control board. It is a figure which shows an example of the storage medal insertion process in a main control board. It is a figure which shows an example of the start lever check process in a main control board. It is a figure which shows an example of the internal lottery process in a main control board. It is a figure which shows an example of the symbol code setting process in a main control board. It is a figure which shows an example of the effect lottery process in a main control board. It is a figure which shows an example of the reel production | presentation lottery management process in a main control board. It is a figure which shows an example of the effect determination process in a main control board. It is a figure which shows an example of the production type setting process in a main control board. It is a figure which shows an example of the production state management process in a main control board. It is a figure which shows an example of the reel rotation start preparation process in a main control board. It is a figure which shows an example of the effect setting process in a main control board. It is a figure which shows an example of the process during rotation effect RE5 execution in a main control board. It is a figure which shows an example of the rotation effect process in a main control board. It is a figure which shows an example of the excitation image setting process for effects in a main control board. It is a figure which shows an example of the correction timer calculation process for effects in a main control board. It is a figure which shows an example of the reel stop pre-process in a main control board. It is a figure which shows an example of the process during reel rotation in a main control board. It is a figure which shows an example of the display determination process in a main control board. It is a figure which shows an example of the payout process in a main control board. It is a figure which shows an example of the game state transfer process in a main control board. It is a figure which shows an example of RT game state transfer process in a main control board. It is a figure which shows an example of the terminal board signal output process in a main control board. It is a figure which shows an example of the interruption process in a main control board. It is a figure which shows an example of the external signal output process in a main control board. It is a figure which shows an example of the main process in a sub control board. It is a figure which shows an example of the main board | substrate communication process in a sub control board. It is a figure which shows an example of the command analysis process in a sub control board. It is a figure which shows an example of the process according to command in a sub control board. It is a figure which shows an example of the process at the time of the conditional device command reception in a sub control board. It is a figure which shows an example of the process for normal states in a sub control board. It is a figure which shows an example of the process for 1st chance precursor states in a sub control board | substrate. It is a figure which shows an example of the process for 2nd chance precursor states in a sub control board | substrate. It is a figure which shows an example of the process for 3rd chance precursor state in a sub control board | substrate. It is a figure which shows an example of the process in the 3rd and 4th chance precursor state in a sub control board | substrate. It is a figure which shows an example of the process for 4th chance precursor state in a sub control board | substrate. It is a figure which shows an example of the process for 5th chance precursor states in a sub control board | substrate. It is a figure which shows an example of the process for Bonus precursor state in a sub control board. It is a figure which shows an example of the process for 1st chance states in a sub control board | substrate. It is a figure which shows an example of the process for 2nd chance states in a sub control board | substrate. It is a figure which shows an example of the process in the 2nd chance state in a sub control board | substrate. It is a figure which shows an example of the process for 3rd chance states in a sub control board | substrate. It is a figure which shows an example of the process for 4th chance states in a sub control board | substrate. It is a figure which shows an example of the process for Bonus preparation states in a sub control board. It is a figure which shows an example of the process for 1st Bonus states in a sub control board. It is a figure which shows an example of the process in 1st Bonus state in a sub control board | substrate. It is a figure which shows an example of the process for 2nd Bonus states in a sub control board. It is a figure which shows an example of the process for 1st fall standby states in a sub control board | substrate. It is a figure which shows an example of the process for ART preparation states in a sub control board. It is a figure which shows an example of the process for ART states in a sub control board | substrate. It is a figure which shows an example of the process for the warning sign state of ART in a sub control board. It is a figure which shows an example of the process for the winning stock precursor state in a sub control board. It is a figure which shows an example of the process for the 1st addition state in a sub control board | substrate. It is a figure which shows an example of the process for a chance state in ART in a sub control board | substrate. It is a figure which shows an example of the process for the surrender sign state in a sub control board. It is a figure which shows an example of the process for the addition preparation state in a sub control board. It is a figure which shows an example of the process for the 2nd addition state in a sub control board. It is a figure which shows an example of the process for 2nd fall standby states in a sub control board | substrate. It is a figure which shows an example of the process for battle states in a sub control board. It is a figure which shows an example of the process in the battle state in a sub control board. It is a figure which shows an example of the process for RUSH preparation states in a sub control board | substrate. It is a figure which shows an example of the process for 1st RUSH states in a sub control board | substrate. It is a figure which shows an example of the process for 2nd RUSH states in a sub control board. It is a figure which shows an example of the process for 3rd Bonus states in a sub control board. It is a figure which shows an example of the process for 3rd fall standby states in a sub control board | substrate. It is a figure which shows an example of the process for 4th fall standby states in a sub control board | substrate. It is a figure which shows an example of the process at the time of the display determination command reception in a sub control board. It is a figure which shows an example of the process for Bonus preparation state at the time of the display determination command reception in a sub control board. It is a figure which shows an example of the process for 1st fall standby states at the time of the display determination command reception in a sub control board. It is a figure which shows an example of the process for ART preparation state at the time of the display determination command reception in a sub control board. It is a figure which shows an example of the process for an additional preparation state at the time of the display determination command reception in a sub control board. It is a figure which shows an example of the process for 2nd fall standby states at the time of the display determination command reception in a sub control board. It is a figure which shows an example of the process for RUSH preparation states at the time of the display determination command reception in a sub control board. It is a figure which shows an example of the process for 1st RUSH states at the time of the display determination command reception in a sub control board. It is a figure which shows an example of the process for 2nd RUSH states at the time of the display determination command reception in a sub control board. It is a figure which shows an example of the process for 3rd Bonus states at the time of the display determination command reception in a sub control board. It is a figure which shows an example of the process for 3rd fall standby states at the time of the display determination command reception in a sub control board. It is a figure which shows an example of the process for 4th fall standby states at the time of the display determination command reception in a sub control board. It is a figure which shows an example of the process during the turning effect RE5 in a sub control board. It is a figure which shows an example of the process at the time of receiving the rotation effect RE5 command in a sub control board. It is a figure which shows an example of the timing chart which shows the output of the signal of an external concentration terminal board. It is a figure which shows an example of the timing chart at the time of winning a 1st chance state and a 2nd chance state. It is a figure which shows an example of the timing chart at the time of winning a 1st chance state in the 5th chance precursor state. It is a figure which shows an example of the timing chart at the time of rotation effect suggestion effect execution. It is a figure which shows an example of the animation of the rotation effect RE1. It is a figure which shows an example of the animation of rotation effect RE2. It is a figure which shows an example of the animation of the rotation effect RE3. It is a figure which shows an example of the animation of the turning effect RE4. It is a figure which shows an example of the animation of the turning effect RE5. It is a figure which shows an example of the animation of a rotation effect suggestion effect. It is a figure which shows an example of the win / loss lottery table for battle states in 2nd Embodiment. It is a figure which shows an example of the ceiling number determination table for battle states in 2nd Embodiment. It is a figure which shows an example of the timing chart at the time of winning the 1st chance state and 2nd chance state in 2nd Embodiment. It is a figure which shows an example of the timing chart at the time of winning a 2nd chance state in the 3rd chance precursor state in 2nd Embodiment. It is a figure which shows an example of the animation of a reel lock effect. It is a figure which shows an example of the animation of a reel lock production (long freeze). It is a figure which shows another example (3rd Embodiment) of the production type setting process in a main control board. It is a figure which shows another example (4th Embodiment) of the production type setting process in a main control board. It is a figure which shows another example (5th Embodiment) of the process for ART states in a sub control board | substrate. It is a figure which shows another example (5th Embodiment) of the ART point addition lottery process in a sub control board. It is a figure which shows another example (5th Embodiment) of the reel lock effect addition lottery process in a sub control board. It is a figure which shows another example (5th Embodiment) of the spinning effect addition lottery process in a sub control board. It is a figure which shows an example of the timing chart at the time of reel lock production execution. It is a figure which shows an example of the timing chart at the time of rotation effect execution. It is a figure which shows an example of a timing chart in case the rotation effect production execution game based on reservation and a reel lock production winning game overlap.

(First embodiment)
The first embodiment of the present invention will be specifically described below with reference to the drawings.

(Composition of gaming machine)
First, the configuration of the gaming machine 1 according to the present invention will be specifically described with reference to FIGS. FIG. 1 is a diagram illustrating an example of a front view of a gaming machine, and FIG. 2 is a diagram illustrating an example of an internal structure of a cabinet 2. FIG. 3 is a diagram illustrating an example of the back surface of the front door 3.

(Game machine 1)
The gaming machine 1 in the present embodiment includes a cabinet 2 described later, a front door 3 and the like.

(Cabinet 2)
The cabinet 2 is a substantially rectangular box and has an opening on the front side. A plurality of components are attached to the cabinet 2.

(Front door 3)
The front door 3 is attached so as to close the opening on the front side of the cabinet 2. A plurality of components are attached to the front door 3.

(Hinge mechanism 4)
The hinge mechanism 4 is provided on the left side of the cabinet 2 as viewed from the front, and is provided to pivotally support the front door 3 so that it can be opened and closed.

(Keyhole 5)
The keyhole 5 is provided at the center right side of the front door 3 and is provided for unlocking the front door 3 by a locking device (not shown). Here, when a store clerk or the like of the game store performs maintenance work, changes a set value, or the like, the locking device (not shown) provided on the front door 3 is unlocked. First, a door key (not shown) is inserted into the keyhole 5 of the front door 3 and is unlocked by rotating it by a predetermined angle in the clockwise direction. Next, the front door 3 is opened, and work such as maintenance work and setting value change is performed. When the maintenance work, the change of the set value, etc. are completed, the front door 3 is closed and locked.

(Medal slot 6)
The medal slot 6 is provided on the upper left side of the keyhole 5 when viewed from the front, and is provided for a player to insert a medal.

(BET button 7)
The BET button 7 is provided below a start lamp 24, which will be described later, and is provided to use “1” medals among the stored medals for the game.

(MAXBET button 8)
The MAXBET button 8 is provided on the right side of the BET button 7 when viewed from the front, and is provided to use the maximum number of medals that can be used in one game ("1" game) among the stored (credit) medals. It has been. Here, in this embodiment, the maximum value of medals that can be used in one game is “3”.

(Checkout button 9)
The settlement button 9 is provided on the back side of the BET button 7 and is provided for settlement of medals stored (credited) among medals acquired by the player. In the present embodiment, the maximum number of medals that can be stored (credited) is “50”.

(Start lever 10)
The start lever 10 is provided below the BET button 7. In addition, the start lever 10 is provided for the player to perform a start operation that triggers the start of rotation of the left reel 18, the middle reel 19, and the right reel 20, which will be described later. Here, based on the detection of the start operation by the player, the main control board 300 described later starts processing for obtaining a hard random number and rotation of the left reel 18, the middle reel 19, and the right reel 20 described later. The processing to do is performed.

(Left stop button 11)
The left stop button 11 is provided on the right side of the start lever 10 in front view. The left stop button 11 is provided for the player to perform a stop operation that triggers the rotation of the left reel 18 to be described later.

(Intermediate stop button 12)
The middle stop button 12 is provided on the right side of the left stop button 11 when viewed from the front. Further, the middle stop button 12 is provided for the player to perform a stop operation that triggers the stop of the rotation of the middle reel 19 described later.

(Right stop button 13)
The right stop button 13 is provided on the right side of the middle stop button 12 when viewed from the front. The right stop button 13 is provided for the player to perform a stop operation that triggers the rotation of the right reel 20 to be described later.

(Return button 14)
The return button 14 is provided on the right side of the right stop button 13 when viewed from the front. The return button 14 is provided to return a jammed medal when a medal inserted into the medal slot 6 is jammed in a selector 15 described later.

(Selector 15)
The selector 15 is provided on the back side of the front door 3. The selector 15 is provided to determine whether or not the material or shape of the medal inserted into the medal insertion slot 6 is appropriate.

(Error cancel sensor 16s)
The error release sensor 16s is provided on the back side of the keyhole 5, and is provided to release an error that has occurred in the gaming machine 1. Here, the error release sensor 16s includes a light emitting part and a light receiving part, and when a door key (not shown) is inserted into the keyhole 5 and the door key (not shown) is rotated counterclockwise by a predetermined angle, A locking part (not shown) will rotate. And when the said lock | rock part rotates, a light-receiving part cannot receive the light light-emitted from the light emission part. As a result, the error release sensor 16s detects an error release operation for releasing an error that has occurred in the gaming machine 1.

(Door open / close sensor 17s)
The door opening / closing sensor 17s is provided on the back side of the keyhole 5, and is provided to detect whether or not the front door 3 is open. The door opening / closing sensor 17s includes a light emitting portion and a light receiving portion. When a door key (not shown) is inserted into the keyhole 5 and the door key (not shown) is rotated clockwise by a predetermined angle, the door opening / closing sensor 17s is locked. The part (not shown) will rotate. And when the said lock | rock part rotates, a light-receiving part cannot receive the light light-emitted from the light emission part. Thereby, the door open / close sensor 17s detects the opening of the front door 3.

(Left reel 18)
The left reel 18 is provided inside the cabinet 2 and has a cylindrical structure. Further, a translucent sheet is mounted on the peripheral surface of the cylindrical structure of the left reel 18, and a plurality of types of symbols are drawn in a row on the sheet. The left reel 18 is rotationally driven by a left stepping motor 151 described later, and a plurality of types of symbols are variably displayed.

(Middle reel 19)
The middle reel 19 is provided inside the cabinet 2 and has a cylindrical structure. Further, a translucent sheet is mounted on the peripheral surface of the cylindrical structure of the middle reel 19, and a plurality of types of symbols are drawn in a row on the sheet. The middle reel 19 is driven to rotate by a middle stepping motor 152, which will be described later, and a plurality of types of symbols are variably displayed.

(Right reel 20)
The right reel 20 is provided inside the cabinet 2 and has a cylindrical structure. In addition, a translucent sheet is mounted on the peripheral surface of the cylindrical structure of the right reel 20, and a plurality of types of symbols are drawn in a row on the sheet. The right reel 20 is rotationally driven by a right stepping motor 153, which will be described later, and a plurality of types of symbols are variably displayed.

(Direction button 21)
The effect button 21 is provided on the right side of the MAXBET button 8 when viewed from the front, and is provided for the player to operate at a predetermined timing. The effect button 21 is connected to an effect button sensor 710s described later. Here, the below-described sub control board 400 controls the later-described liquid crystal display device 46 and the like via the below-described effect control board 600 when an after-mentioned effect button sensor 710s detects an operation of the effect button 21. .

(Cross key 22)
The cross key 22 is provided on the right side of the production button 21 when viewed from the front. The cross key 22 includes (a) an upward button, (b) a downward button, (c) a left button, and (d) a right button. It is provided for a person to operate at a predetermined timing. In addition, a cross key board 711 described later is connected to the cross key 22. The sub-control board 400 described later controls the liquid crystal display device 46 described later via the effect control board 600 described later when the cross-key board 711 described later detects the operation of the cross key 22.

(Display window 23)
The display window 23 is provided on the front side of the left reel 18, middle reel 19, and right reel 20, and a plurality of symbols drawn on the peripheral surfaces of the left reel 18, middle reel 19, and right reel 20 can be visually recognized. Is provided to do. Specifically, “3” symbols drawn on the peripheral surface of the left reel 18, “3” symbols drawn on the peripheral surface of the middle reel 19, and drawn on the peripheral surface of the right reel 20. A total of “9” symbols of “3” symbols can be viewed through the display window 23.

(Start lamp 24)
The start lamp 24 is provided above the BET button 7 and is provided to notify whether or not the start operation can be received by the start lever 10. Specifically, the main control board 300 to be described later has (a) when the number of medals used in the game becomes “3” by the operation of the BET button 7 and the MAXBET button 8, and (b) the medal insertion slot. When “3” medals are inserted in 6, (c) the start lamp 24 is turned on when a combination of symbols related to “replay” to be described later is displayed on the active line in the previous game. Thus, a process of notifying that the start operation can be accepted by the start lever 10 is performed.

(First BET lamp 25)
The first BET lamp 25 is provided on the right side of the start lamp 24 when viewed from the front, and is provided to notify that the BET number is “1”. Specifically, in the main control board 300 described later, (a) when “1” medals are inserted into the medal slot 6, (b) “1” or more medals are stored (credited). In the state, when the BET button 7 is operated “1” times, the first BET lamp 25 is turned on.

(Second BET lamp 26)
The second BET lamp 26 is provided above the first BET lamp 25 and is provided to notify that the BET number is “2”. Specifically, in the main control board 300 described later, (a) when “2” medals are inserted into the medal insertion slot 6, (b) “2” or more medals are stored (credited). In the state, when the BET button 7 is operated “2” times, (c) in the state where “1” or more medals are stored (credit), the BET button 7 is operated “1” times and the medal insertion slot When “1” medals are inserted into 6, the second BET lamp 26 is turned on.

(3rd BET lamp 27)
The third BET lamp 27 is provided above the second BET lamp 26 and is provided to notify that the BET number is “3”. Specifically, in the main control board 300 described later, (a) when “3” medals are inserted into the medal insertion slot 6, (b) “3” or more medals are stored (credited). In the state, when the MAXBET button 8 is operated, (c) in a state where “3” or more medals are stored (credit), and when the BET button 7 is operated “3” times, (d) the medal is In a state where “1” or more are stored (credit), when the BET button 7 is operated “1” times and “2” medals are inserted into the medal slot 6, (e) the medal is “2”. "When the BET button 7 is operated" 2 "times and" 1 "medals are inserted into the medal insertion slot 6 in a state where more than""are stored (credits), (f) In the previous game, Related to "replay" If the combination of patterns is displayed on the pay line, it performs a process of lighting the first 3BET lamp 27.

(Storage number indicator 28)
The stored number indicator 28 is provided on the right side of the first BET lamp 25, the second BET lamp 26, and the third BET lamp 27 as viewed from the front. The stored number display 28 is provided to display the number of stored (credit) medals of the player stored in the gaming machine 1.

(Payout number display 29)
The payout number indicator 29 is provided on the right side of the stored number indicator 28 in front view. The payout number display 29 is provided for displaying the payout number of medals to be paid out according to the combination of symbols displayed on the active line. The payout number display 29 displays that the gaming machine 1 is in an error state when the gaming machine 1 is in an error state.

(Effective line)
Here, in the present embodiment, among the symbols displayed on the display window 23, the effective line is a symbol displayed on the upper stage of the left reel 18, a symbol displayed on the middle stage of the middle reel 19, and the right reel 20. Only the “down-right line” connecting the symbols displayed in the lower row with straight lines is the effective line.

  Here, in the present embodiment, among the symbols displayed on the display window 23, (a) the symbol displayed on the upper stage of the left reel 18, the symbol displayed on the upper stage of the middle reel 19, and the right reel 20. A line obtained by connecting the symbols displayed in the upper line with a straight line is referred to as an “upper line”. (B) The symbol displayed in the middle of the left reel 18, the symbol displayed in the middle of the middle reel 19, and the right reel 20. A line connecting the symbols displayed in the middle row with a straight line is referred to as a “middle row”. (C) The symbol displayed in the lower row of the left reel 18, the symbol displayed in the lower row of the middle reel 19, and the right reel A line formed by connecting the symbols displayed in the lower part of the line 20 with a straight line is referred to as a “lower line”. (D) The symbol displayed in the lower part of the left reel 18, the symbol displayed in the middle part of the middle reel 19, The pattern displayed on the top of the reel 20 is a straight line. The do's line of "upward-sloping line". The effective line may be the upper line, the middle line, the lower line, and the upper right line instead of the lower right line. In addition to the lower right line, the upper line, the middle line, the lower line, and the right line Lines may be applied.

(Putable indicator lamp 30)
The insertable display lamp 30 is provided on the right side of the payout number indicator 29 in front view. Here, the main control board 300, which will be described later, performs a process of turning on the insertable display lamp 30 when accepting the insertion of medals through the medal insertion slot 6. On the other hand, when the medal insertion slot 6 does not accept the insertion of medals, the main control board 300 to be described later performs a process of turning off the insertable display lamp 30. As a result, the player is notified through the medal slot 6 whether or not to accept medal insertion.

(Replay display lamp 31)
The replay display lamp 31 is provided below the throwable display lamp 30. Here, the main control board 300 described later performs a process of turning on the replay display lamp 31 when a combination of symbols related to “replay” described later is displayed on the active line. On the other hand, the main control board 300 described later displays the symbol combination related to “replay” described later on the active line in the next game in which the symbol combination related to “replay” described later is displayed on the active line. If not, processing for turning off the replay display lamp 31 is performed. As a result, (a) a combination of symbols related to “replay” is displayed on the active line, and (b) notification that the next game can be performed without using a medal is performed. .

(Bonus display unit 32)
The Bonus display part 32 is provided on the right side of the display window 23 when viewed from the front. The Bonus display unit 32 is provided with an LED. Here, when a state managed by the later-described sub-control board 400 becomes a Bonus state, the later-described sub-control board 400 passes through a later-described panel LED relay board 700 and a later-described Bonus display LED board 705. Processing to turn on the LED provided in the Bonus display unit 32 is performed. On the other hand, the sub control board 400 described later turns off the LED provided on the Bonus display unit 32 via the panel LED relay board 700 described later and the Bonus display LED board 705 described later when the Bonus state described below ends. To perform the process. Thus, (a) the player is informed of the transition to the Bonus state, and (b) the player is informed that the Bonus state has ended.

(ART display unit 33)
The ART display unit 33 is provided below the Bonus display unit 32. The ART display unit 33 is provided with an LED. Here, when a state managed by the later-described sub-control board 400 becomes an ART state, the later-described sub-control board 400 passes through a later-described panel LED relay board 700 and an later-described ART display LED board 706. Processing to turn on the LED provided in the ART display unit 33 is performed. On the other hand, the sub control board 400 described later turns off the LED provided on the ART display unit 33 via the panel LED relay board 700 described later and the ART display LED board 706 described later when the ART state described later ends. To perform the process. As a result, (a) the player is informed of the transition to the ART state, and (b) the player is notified that the ART state has ended.

(RUSH display unit 34)
The RUSH display unit 34 is provided on the left side of the display window 23 when viewed from the front. The RUSH display unit 34 is provided with an LED. Here, a sub-control board 400 described later is connected to a panel LED relay board 700 described later and a RUSH display described below when a state managed by the sub-control board 400 described below is the first RUSH state or the second RUSH state. Processing to turn on the LED provided on the RUSH display unit 34 via the LED substrate 707 is performed. On the other hand, when a later-described first RUSH state or second RUSH state ends, a later-described sub-control board 400 is connected to the RUSH display unit 34 via a later-described panel LED relay substrate 700 and a later-described RUSH display LED substrate 707. Processing to turn off the provided LED is performed. As a result, (a) the player is informed of the transition to the RUSH state, and (b) the player is notified that the RUSH state has ended.

(Stop button operation display unit 35)
The stop button operation display unit 35 is provided below the RUSH display unit 34. (a) A left stop button operation display unit 35L that emits light at a timing when it is optimal to operate the left stop button 11, and (b) ) Middle stop button operation display unit 35C that emits light at a timing when it is optimal to operate the middle stop button 12, and (c) Right stop button operation display that emits light at a timing that is optimal to operate the right stop button 13 35R, and is provided to notify the operation order of the left stop button 11, the middle stop button 12, and the right stop button 13. Each of the left stop button operation display unit 35L, the middle stop button operation display unit 35C, and the right stop button operation display unit 35R is provided with an LED. Here, when a state managed by the later-described sub-control board 400 is the ART state, when the operation of the left stop button 11 is at an optimal timing, the later-described sub-control board 400 is a later-described control panel. The optimal timing is to perform the process of turning on the LED provided on the left stop button operation display unit 35L via the LED relay board 700 and a stop button operation LED board 708, which will be described later, and to operate the middle stop button 12. In this case, a process is performed to turn on an LED provided on the middle stop button operation display unit 35C via a panel LED relay board 700 described later and a stop button operation LED board 708 described later, and the right stop button 13 is operated. Is the optimal timing, a panel LED relay board 700 described later and a stop button operation L described later. It performs processing of lighting the LED provided to the right stop button operation display unit 35R via the D substrate 708. On the other hand, the sub control board 400 to be described later performs a process of turning on the LED provided in the left stop button operation display unit 35L in the ART state to be described later, and then when the operation of the left stop button 11 is performed. The LED provided on the left stop button operation display unit 35L is turned off via the panel LED relay board 700 described later and the stop button operation LED substrate 708 described later, and provided on the middle stop button operation display unit 35C. When the operation of the middle stop button 12 is performed after the process of turning on the LED, the middle stop button operation display is performed via a panel LED relay board 700 described later and a stop button operation LED board 708 described later. The process of turning off the LED provided in the part 35C and the process of turning on the LED provided in the right stop button operation display part 35R were performed. When the operation of the right stop button 13 is performed, the LED provided on the right stop button operation display unit 35R is turned off via a panel LED relay board 700 described later and a stop button operation LED board 708 described later. Process. Thereby, when the state managed by the sub-control board 400 described later is the ART state, the optimal operation order of the left stop button 11, the middle stop button 12, and the right stop button 13 is notified.

(Left stop button operation display part 35L)
The left stop button operation display part 35L is provided to notify that it is the optimal timing to operate the left stop button 11. Here, when a state managed by the later-described sub-control board 400 is the ART state, when the operation of the left stop button 11 is the optimal timing, the later-described sub-control board 400 is described later. A process of turning on an LED provided on the left stop button operation display unit 35L via the panel LED relay board 700 and a stop button operation LED board 708 described later is performed. On the other hand, when the sub-control board 400 described later is not at the optimal timing to operate the left stop button 11, the sub-control board 400 stops left via a panel LED relay board 700 described later and a stop button operation LED board 708 described later. Processing to turn off the LED provided in the button operation display unit 35L is performed. This notifies that (a) it is the optimal timing to operate the left stop button 11 and (b) that the operation of the left stop button 11 is not the optimal timing.

(Intermediate stop button operation display part 35C)
The middle stop button operation display section 35C is provided to notify that it is the optimal timing to operate the middle stop button 12. Here, when a state managed by the sub-control board 400 to be described later is the ART state, the sub-control board 400 to be described later will be described later when the operation of the middle stop button 12 is the optimal timing. A process of turning on an LED provided on the middle stop button operation display unit 35C via the panel LED relay board 700 and a stop button operation LED board 708 described later is performed. On the other hand, when the sub-control board 400 described later is not at an optimal timing to operate the middle stop button 12, the sub-control board 400 performs middle stop via a panel LED relay board 700 described later and a stop button operation LED board 708 described later. Processing to turn off the LED provided in the button operation display unit 35C is performed. This notifies that (a) the operation of the middle stop button 12 is the optimum timing and (b) that the operation of the middle stop button 12 is not the optimum timing.

(Right stop button operation display part 35R)
The right stop button operation display unit 35R is provided to notify that it is an optimal timing to operate the right stop button 13. Here, when a state managed by the below-described sub control board 400 is an ART state, when the right control button 400 is operated at an optimal timing, the below-described sub control board 400 is described later. A process of turning on an LED provided on the right stop button operation display unit 35R via the panel LED relay board 700 and a stop button operation LED board 708 described later is performed. On the other hand, the sub-control board 400 described later stops right via the panel LED relay board 700 described later and the stop button operation LED board 708 described later when the right stop button 13 is not optimally operated. Processing to turn off the LED provided in the button operation display unit 35R is performed. This notifies that (a) it is the optimal timing to operate the right stop button 13 and (b) that it is not the optimal timing to operate the right stop button 13.

(Start lever LED36)
The start lever LED 36 is provided inside the start lever 10. Here, the below-described sub control board 400 performs a process of turning on or blinking the start lever LED 36 via the below-described panel LED relay board 700 and the below-described start lever LED board 709 at a predetermined timing. As a result, it is possible to perform a visual appeal to the player.

(Lumbar panel 37)
The waist panel 37 is provided below the left stop button 11, the middle stop button 12, and the right stop button 13, and is provided to allow the player to recognize the model name, motif, and the like of the gaming machine 1.

(Tray unit 38)
The saucer unit 38 is provided below the waist panel 37. Further, the tray unit 38 is provided for receiving and storing medals discharged from a medal payout port 39 which will be described later.

(Medal payout exit 39)
The medal payout opening 39 is provided below the waist panel 37 and is provided to discharge medals paid out by a hopper 202 described later when the medals are paid out. The medal payout port 39 is provided for discharging an improper medal when a selector sensor 15s described later determines that the medal inserted into the medal slot 6 is not an appropriate medal. Further, the medal payout opening 39 is inserted at a timing when it is impossible to accept the insertion of the medal when a medal is inserted into the medal insertion slot 6 at a timing when the medal insertion cannot be accepted. It is provided to eject medals.

(Upper left speaker 40)
The upper left speaker 40 is provided on the back side of the front door 3. The upper left speaker 40 is provided to output BGM, voice, sound effects, etc. when performing an effect.

(Lower left speaker 41)
The lower left speaker 41 is provided on the back side of the front door 3. The lower left speaker 41 is provided to output BGM, voice, sound effects, etc. when performing an effect.

(Upper right speaker 42)
The upper right speaker 42 is provided on the back side of the front door 3. The upper right speaker 42 is provided to output BGM, voice, sound effects, etc. when performing an effect.

(Lower right speaker 43)
The lower right speaker 43 is provided on the back side of the front door 3. The lower right speaker 43 is provided for outputting BGM, voice, sound effects, etc. when performing an effect.

(Setting display section 44)
The setting display unit 44 is provided on a main control board 300 which will be described later, and is provided for displaying a setting value of the gaming machine 1. Here, the main control board 300 described later is currently set when a setting change key (not shown) is inserted into a setting change key hole 48 described later and rotated clockwise by a predetermined angle. Processing for displaying the set value on the setting display unit 44 is performed.

(Setting change button 45)
The setting change button 45 is provided on a setting switch board 250 described later, and is provided to change a setting value. Here, the main control board 300 to be described later displays on the setting display unit 44 when an operation of the setting change button 45 is detected in a state where the setting value currently set is displayed on the setting display unit 44. A process of switching the displayed set value and displaying it is performed. Then, the main control board 300 described later performs a process of determining the set value when an operation of the start lever 10 is detected in a state where the currently set value is displayed on the setting display unit 44. . Note that the main control board 300 described later performs a process of canceling the error when an operation of the setting change button 45 is detected when an error occurs in the gaming machine 1. In other words, in the present embodiment, the setting change button 45 has (a) a function for switching a setting value and (b) a function for canceling an error.

  In the present embodiment, the setting values are set in the “6” stage from the setting “1” to the setting “6”. For this reason, when the operation of the setting change button 45 is detected in a state where the information indicating that the setting is “1” is displayed on the setting display unit 44, the setting display unit 44 indicates that the setting is “2”. The information is displayed, and thereafter, every time the setting change button 45 is operated, the set value displayed on the setting display unit 44 is added and displayed by “1”. However, when the setting change button 45 is operated in the state where the information indicating that the setting is “6” is displayed on the setting display unit 44, the information indicating that the setting is “1” is displayed on the setting display unit 44. Will be displayed.

  In the present embodiment, the setting values are set at the “6” stage from the setting “1” to the setting “6”. However, the setting value is not limited to this. For example, the set value may be the “2” stage, the “3” stage, the “4” stage, or the “5” stage.

(Liquid crystal display device 46)
The liquid crystal display device 46 is provided above the left reel 18, the middle reel 19, and the right reel 20, and is provided for displaying moving images, still images, and the like. Here, when a state managed by the later-described sub-control board 400 is the ART state, the later-described sub-control board 400 performs “push order bells A1 to A4” or “push-order bells” by an internal lottery process described later. When any one of “B1 to B4” is determined, processing for displaying the operation order of the left stop button 11, the middle stop button 12, and the right stop button 13 on the liquid crystal display device 46 via the effect control board 600. Do.

(External concentration terminal board 47)
The external concentration terminal board 47 is provided on the lower right side of the setting switch board 250, which will be described later, and (a) the number of medals used in the game with respect to the outside of the gaming machine 1 such as a hall computer (not shown). (B) a medal payout signal that can specify the number of medals paid out to the player, and (c) a state managed by a sub-control board 400 described later has shifted to the ART state. (D) A Bonus state signal that can specify that a state managed by a sub-control board 400 described later has shifted to a Bonus state, and (e) A state-control signal that is managed by a sub-control board 400 described later. Provided to transmit a RUSH state signal that can specify that the state has shifted to the RUSH state, and (f) a security signal that can specify that an illegal act has been performed. To have.

  More specifically, the “ART state signal” is a signal output when the state managed by the main control board 300 shifts to the fourth RT gaming state, and the “Bonus state signal” is This is a signal that is output when the state managed by the main control board 300 shifts to the third RT gaming state, and the “RUSH state signal” is the state that is managed by the main control board 300 shifts to the fifth RT gaming state. In this case, the signal is output.

(Setting change keyhole 48)
The setting change keyhole 48 is provided on a setting switch board 250, which will be described later, and is provided to change a setting value. A setting change key switch 49sw (described later) detects that the setting change key hole 48 is rotated clockwise by a predetermined angle with a setting change key (not shown) inserted in the setting change key hole 48. Is provided.

(Director 50)
The effect device 50 is provided on the front side of the liquid crystal display device 46. Here, when it is determined that the effect device 50 can be moved, the sub control board 400 performs a process of moving the effect device 50 in the vertical direction via the effect control board 600 and the effect device drive board 650. Do. Thereby, the effect which appeals visually to a player can be performed.

(Status board 100)
The status board 100 is provided on the back side of the front door 3 and below the display window 23. The status board 100 also includes a BET switch 7sw described later, a MAXBET switch 8sw described later, a settlement switch 9sw described later, a start switch 10sw described later, a left stop switch 11sw described later, a middle stop switch 12sw described later, and a right stop described later. A switch 13sw, a selector sensor 15s described later, an error release sensor 16s described later, a door opening / closing sensor 17s described later, a start lamp 24 described later, a first BET lamp 25 described later, a second BET lamp 26 described later, a third BET lamp 27 described later, A storage number display 28 described later, a payout number display 29 described later, an insertion possible display lamp 30 described later, and a re-game display lamp 31 described later are connected.

(Reel control board 150)
The reel control board 150 is provided above the left reel 18, the middle reel 19, and the right reel 20, and is provided to control the rotation and stop of the left reel 18, the middle reel 19, and the right reel 20. . The reel control board 150 includes a left stepping motor 151 to be described later, a middle stepping motor 152 to be described later, a right stepping motor 153 to be described later, a left reel sensor 154s to be described later, a middle reel sensor 155s to be described later, and a right reel sensor 156s to be described later. Is connected.

(Left stepping motor 151)
The left stepping motor 151 is provided inside the left reel 18 and is provided for controlling the left reel 18. The left stepping motor 151 has a configuration capable of stopping the rotation shaft at a specified angle. As a result, the left reel 18 rotates at a constant angle each time a pulse signal is output to the left stepping motor 151. The main control board 300 manages the rotation angle of the left reel 18 by counting the number of times the pulse signal is output to the left stepping motor 151 after detecting the reel index.

(Medium stepping motor 152)
The middle stepping motor 152 is provided inside the middle reel 19 and is provided for controlling the middle reel 19. Further, the middle stepping motor 152 has a configuration capable of stopping the rotation axis at a specified angle. As a result, the intermediate reel 19 rotates at a constant angle each time a pulse signal is output to the intermediate stepping motor 152. The main control board 300 manages the rotation angle of the middle reel 19 by counting the number of times the pulse signal is output to the middle stepping motor 152 after detecting the reel index.

(Right stepping motor 153)
The right stepping motor 153 is provided inside the right reel 20 and is provided for controlling the right reel 20. The right stepping motor 153 has a configuration capable of stopping the rotation shaft at a specified angle. As a result, the right reel 20 rotates at a constant angle each time a pulse signal is output to the right stepping motor 153. The main control board 300 manages the rotation angle of the right reel 20 by counting the number of times the pulse signal is output to the right stepping motor 153 after detecting the reel index.

(Left reel sensor 154s)
The left reel sensor 154s is provided inside the left reel 18, and is constituted by an optical sensor having a light emitting part and a light receiving part. The left reel sensor 154s is provided to detect a reel index indicating that the left reel 18 has rotated “1”.

(Medium reel sensor 155s)
The middle reel sensor 155s is provided inside the middle reel 19, and is constituted by an optical sensor having a light emitting part and a light receiving part. The middle reel sensor 155s is provided to detect a reel index indicating that the middle reel 19 has rotated “1”.

(Right reel sensor 156s)
The right reel sensor 156s is provided inside the right reel 20, and is configured by an optical sensor having a light emitting unit and a light receiving unit. The right reel sensor 156s is provided to detect a reel index indicating that the right reel 20 has rotated “1”.

(Power supply board 200)
The power supply board 200 is provided on the left side of the hopper 202, which will be described later, and is provided for performing control to supply power to the gaming machine 1. Further, a power switch 201sw described later, a hopper 202 described later, and an auxiliary storage sensor 203s described later are connected to the power supply board 200.

(Power button 201)
The power button 201 is provided on the left side of a front view of a hopper 202 described later, and is provided for performing an operation of supplying power to the gaming machine 1.

(Hopper 202)
The hopper 202 is provided on the right side of the power supply board 200 as viewed from the front, and is provided for paying out medals to the player. Here, the main control board 300, which will be described later, performs a process of driving the hopper 202 via the power supply board 200 when a combination of symbols for paying out medals is displayed on the active line. Process to pay out.

(Auxiliary storage 203)
The auxiliary storage 203 is provided on the right side of the hopper 202 as viewed from the front, and is provided to store the overflowing medals when the medals stored in the hopper 202 overflow.

(Setting switch board 250)
The setting switch board 250 is provided on the right side of the main control board 300 described later when viewed from the front. The setting switch board 250 is connected to a setting change switch 45sw described later and a setting change key switch 49sw described later.

(Main control board 300)
The main control board 300 is provided inside the cabinet 2 and on the left side of the setting switch board 250 when viewed from the front, and is provided for controlling the gaming machine 1. The main control board 300 includes a main CPU 301 described later, a main ROM 302 described later, a main RAM 303 described later, and a main random number generator 304. Further, the main control board 300 is connected with a setting display section 44, an external concentration terminal board 47, a status board 100, a reel control board 150, a power supply board 200, a setting switch board 250, and a sub control board 400 described later.

(Sub control board 400)
The sub-control board 400 is provided on the left side of the main control board 300 when viewed from the front, and is provided mainly for controlling the production. The sub control board 400 includes a sub CPU 401 described later, a sub ROM 402 described later, a sub RAM 403 described later, and a sub random number generator 404 described later. Further, the main control board 300, a backlight relay board 450 described later, an effect control board 600 described later, and a panel LED relay board 700 described later are connected to the sub control board 400.

(Backlight relay board 450)
The backlight relay board 450 is provided below the main control board 300, and relays between the sub control board 400, a left backlight board 451 described later, a middle backlight board 452 described later, and a right backlight board 453 described later. Is provided to do. In addition, a sub-control board 400, a later-described left backlight board 451, a later-described middle backlight board 452, and a later-described right backlight board 453 are connected to the backlight relay board 450.

(Left backlight substrate 451)
The left backlight substrate 451 is provided inside the left reel 18 and is connected to a left backlight 461 described later. Further, the left backlight substrate 451 is provided for performing light emission control of the left backlight 461 described later from the sub control substrate 400 via the backlight relay substrate 450.

  In FIG. 2, the illustration of the sheet mounted on the left reel 18 is omitted to describe the left stepping motor 151, the left reel sensor 154 s, and the left backlight substrate 451.

(Medium backlight substrate 452)
The middle backlight substrate 452 is provided inside the middle reel 19 and is connected to a middle backlight 462 described later. The middle backlight board 452 is provided for performing light emission control of the middle backlight 462, which will be described later, from the sub control board 400 via the backlight relay board 450.

(Right backlight substrate 453)
The right backlight substrate 453 is provided inside the right reel 20, and a right backlight 463 described later is connected thereto. Further, the right backlight substrate 453 is provided for performing light emission control of the right backlight 463 described later from the sub control substrate 400 via the backlight relay substrate 450.

(Amplifier board 500)
The amplifier board 500 is provided above the upper left speaker 40 and outputs BGM data, audio data, sound effect data, and the like from the upper left speaker 40, the lower left speaker 41, the upper right speaker 42, and the lower right speaker 43. It is provided to perform control. In addition, an upper left speaker 40, a lower left speaker 41, an upper right speaker 42, a lower right speaker 43, and an effect control board 600 described later are connected to the amplifier board 500.

(Production control board 600)
The effect control board 600 is provided below a top LED board 851, which will be described later, and is mainly provided for executing an effect. The effect control board 600 includes a liquid crystal display device 46, an amplifier board 500, a liquid crystal control CPU 601 described later, a liquid crystal control ROM 602 described later, a liquid crystal control RAM 603 described later, a CGROM 604 described later, a sound source IC 605 described later, and a sound source ROM 606 described later. A rendering device drive board 650 described later is connected.

(Director drive board 650)
The effect device drive board 650 is provided below an effect device drive relay board 750, which will be described later, and is provided for performing control to move the effect device 50. The effect device drive board 650 includes an effect device 50, an effect control board 600, a left effect device motor 651, which will be described later, an upper left effect device sensor 652s, which will be described later, a lower left effect device sensor 653s, which will be described later, and a right effect device motor 654, which will be described later. , Later described upper right effect device sensor 655s, later described lower right effect device sensor 656s, later described left liquid crystal lift motor 657, later described upper left liquid crystal lift sensor 658s, later described lower left liquid crystal lift sensor 659s, later described right liquid crystal lift motor 660, An upper right liquid crystal lift sensor 661s, which will be described later, a lower right liquid crystal lift sensor 662s, which will be described later, and an effect device drive relay board 750, which will be described later, are connected.

(Comparator LED relay board 700)
The panel LED relay board 700 is provided above the lower left speaker 41. The sub-control board 400, a MAXBET button LED board 701 described later, a stop button LED board 702 described later, an effect button LED board 703 described later, Lumbar panel LED substrate 704, Bonus display LED substrate 705 described later, ART display LED substrate 706 described later, RUSH display LED substrate 707 described later, stop button operation LED substrate 708 described later, start lever LED substrate 709 described later, described later An effect button sensor 710s is provided to relay a cross key substrate 711, which will be described later. The panel LED relay board 700 includes a sub control board 400, a MAXBET button LED board 701, which will be described later, a stop button LED board 702, which will be described later, an effect button LED board 703, which will be described later, a waist panel LED board 704, which will be described later. Bonus display LED board 705, later-described ART display LED board 706, later-described RUSH display LED board 707, later-described stop button operation LED board 708, later-described start lever LED board 709, later-described effect button sensor 710s, later-described cross key A substrate 711 is connected.

(Director drive relay board 750)
The effect device drive relay board 750 is provided above the effect control board 600, and is provided to relay the effect device drive board 650, the effect device control board 800 described later, and the LED control board 850 described later. . The effect device drive relay board 750 is connected to an effect device drive board 650, an effect device control board 800 described later, and an LED control board 850 described later.

(Top LED board 851)
The top LED board 851 is provided above the effect control board 600 and is provided to control the top LED 861 described later. The top LED board 851 is connected to a top LED 861 described later.

(Corner LED board 852)
The corner LED boards 852 are provided on the left and right sides of the rendering device drive relay board 750, and are provided for controlling the corner LEDs 862 described later. The corner LED substrate 852 is connected to a corner LED 862 described later.

(Side LED board 853)
The side LED boards 853 are provided on the back side of the front door 3 and on both the left and right sides of the display window 23, and are provided to control the side LEDs 863 described later. Further, a side LED 863 described later is connected to the side LED substrate 853.

(Tray side LED board 854)
The saucer side LED board 854 is provided on the back side of the front door 3, outside the left lower speaker 41 and outside the right lower speaker 43, and is provided to control a saucer side LED 864 described later. ing. In addition, a saucer side LED 864 described later is connected to the saucer side LED substrate 854.

(Receiver LED board 855)
The saucer LED substrate 855 is provided on the back side of the front door 3 and on the back side of the saucer unit 38, and is provided to control a saucer LED 865 described later. In addition, a tray LED 865 described later is connected to the tray LED substrate 855.

(Top LED861)
The top LED 861 is provided above the liquid crystal display device 46. Further, the top LED 861 is designed and designed with a shape, color, pattern, pattern and the like appealing to the player's vision. Here, the sub control board 400 performs a process of turning on and blinking the top LED 861 via the effect control board 600, the effect device drive board 650, the effect device drive relay board 750, and the top LED board 851. Thereby, the effect which appeals visually to a player can be performed.

(Corner LED 862)
The corner LEDs 862 are provided on both the left and right sides of the liquid crystal display device 46. In addition, the corner LED 862 is designed and designed with shapes, colors, patterns, patterns, etc. appealing to the player's vision. Here, the sub control board 400 performs a process of lighting and blinking the corner LED 862 via the effect control board 600, the effect device drive board 650, the effect device drive relay board 750, and the corner LED board 852. Thereby, the effect which appeals visually to a player can be performed.

(Side LED 863)
The side LEDs 863 are provided at the left and right ends of the gaming machine 1. The side LED 863 is designed and designed with shapes, colors, patterns, patterns, etc. appealing to the player's vision. Here, the sub control board 400 performs a process of lighting and blinking the side LED 863 via the effect control board 600, the effect device drive board 650, the effect device drive relay board 750, and the side LED board 853. Thereby, the effect which appeals visually to a player can be performed.

(Tray side LED864)
The saucer side LED 864 is provided below the side LED 863. In addition, the tray side LED 864 is designed and designed with shapes, colors, patterns, patterns, etc. appealing to the player's vision. Here, the sub control board 400 performs a process of lighting and blinking the saucer side LED 864 via the effect control board 600, the effect device drive board 650, the effect device drive relay board 750, and the saucer side LED board 854. Thereby, the effect which appeals visually to a player can be performed.

(Tray LED 865)
The saucer LED 865 is provided on the front side of the saucer unit 38 in front view. In addition, the tray LED 865 is designed and designed with shapes, colors, patterns, patterns, etc. appealing to the player's vision. Here, the sub control board 400 performs a process of lighting and blinking the saucer LED 865 via the effect control board 600, the effect device drive board 650, the effect device drive relay board 750, and the saucer LED board 855. Thereby, the effect which appeals visually to a player can be performed.

(Block diagram of the entire gaming machine)
Next, a block diagram of the entire gaming machine 1 will be described with reference to FIG.

  In the gaming machine 1, a status board 100, a reel control board 150, a power board 200, a setting switch board 250, and a sub control board 400 are connected to a main control board 300 that controls main operations of the gaming machine 1.

(BET switch 7sw)
The BET switch 7sw is a switch for detecting the operation of the BET button 7. Here, the status board 100 transmits a predetermined signal to the main control board 300 when an operation of the BET button 7 is detected by the BET switch 7sw. The main control board 300 performs a process of using “1” medals from the stored (credit) medals based on the reception of the predetermined signal from the status board 100.

(MAXBET switch 8sw)
The MAXBET switch 8sw is a switch for detecting the operation of the MAXBET button 8. Here, when the operation of the MAXBET button 8 is detected by the MAXBET switch 8sw, the status board 100 transmits a predetermined signal to the main control board 300. The main control board 300 performs processing of using “3” medals from the stored (credit) medals based on the reception of a predetermined signal from the status board 100.

(Settlement switch 9sw)
The settlement switch 9sw is a switch for detecting the operation of the settlement button 9. Here, the status board 100 transmits a predetermined signal to the main control board 300 when an operation of the payment button 9 is detected by the payment switch 9sw. Then, the main control board 300 performs a process of adjusting the stored medals based on the reception of a predetermined signal from the status board 100. Specifically, the main control board 300 transmits a signal to the effect that the stored medals are returned to the power supply board 200. Then, the power supply substrate 200 performs a process of returning the stored medals by driving the hopper 202.

(Start switch 10sw)
The start switch 10sw is a switch for detecting the operation of the start lever 10. Here, the status board 100 transmits a predetermined signal to the main control board 300 when an operation of the start lever 10 is detected by the start switch 10sw. The main control board 300 performs processing for starting rotation of the left reel 18, the middle reel 19, and the right reel 20 based on the reception of a predetermined signal from the status board 100.

(Left stop switch 11sw)
The left stop switch 11sw is a switch for detecting an operation of the left stop button 11. Here, the status board 100 transmits a predetermined signal to the main control board 300 when the operation of the left stop button 11 is detected by the left stop switch 11sw. The main control board 300 performs a process of stopping the rotating left reel 18 based on the reception of a predetermined signal from the status board 100.

(Intermediate stop switch 12sw)
The middle stop switch 12sw is a switch for detecting the operation of the middle stop button 12. Here, the status board 100 transmits a predetermined signal to the main control board 300 when the operation of the middle stop button 12 is detected by the middle stop switch 12sw. The main control board 300 performs a process of stopping the rotating middle reel 19 based on the reception of a predetermined signal from the status board 100.

(Right stop switch 13sw)
The right stop switch 13sw is a switch for detecting the operation of the right stop button 13. Here, the status board 100 transmits a predetermined signal to the main control board 300 when the operation of the right stop button 13 is detected by the right stop switch 13sw. The main control board 300 performs a process of stopping the rotating right reel 20 based on the reception of a predetermined signal from the status board 100.

(Selector sensor 15s)
The selector sensor 15 s is a sensor for detecting that an appropriate medal is inserted into the medal insertion slot 6. Here, the status board 100 transmits a predetermined signal to the main control board 300 when the selector sensor 15s detects the passage of a normal medal. Then, the main control board 300, based on the reception of a predetermined signal from the status board 100, (a) a process of adding “1” to the number of medals to be stored (credited) or (b) used for a game Processing to add “1” to the number of medals to be performed is performed.

  In addition to the selector sensor 15s, the selector 15 is provided with a fraud detection sensor (not shown) for detecting fraud. Here, the status board 100 transmits a predetermined signal to the main control board 300 when the cheating detection sensor detects cheating. Then, the main control board 300 performs processing upon detecting fraud based on receiving a predetermined signal from the status board 100.

(Setting change switch 45sw)
The setting change switch 45sw is a switch for detecting an operation of the setting change button 45. Here, the setting switch board 250 transmits a predetermined signal to the main control board 300 when the operation of the setting change button 45 is detected by the setting change switch 45sw. Then, the main control board 300 performs a process of updating and displaying the setting value displayed on the setting display unit 44 based on the reception of a predetermined signal from the setting switch board 250.

(Setting change key switch 49sw)
The setting change key switch 49sw is a switch for detecting that a setting change key (not shown) is rotated by a predetermined angle in a state where the setting change key (not shown) is inserted into the setting change key hole 48. Here, when it is detected that the setting switch board 250 is rotated by a predetermined angle with a setting change key (not shown) being inserted into the setting change key hole 48, the setting switch board 250 is connected to the main control board 300. To transmit a predetermined signal. Then, the main control board 300 performs a process of displaying the current setting value on the setting display unit 44 based on the reception of a predetermined signal from the setting switch board 250.

(Power switch 201sw)
The power switch 201sw is a switch for detecting an operation of the power button 201. Here, the power supply board 200 performs a process of supplying power to the gaming machine 1 when the operation of the power button 201 is detected by the power switch 201sw.

(Auxiliary storage sensor 203s)
The auxiliary storage sensor 203s is a sensor for detecting that medals stored in the auxiliary storage 203 are full. Here, the power supply board 200 transmits a predetermined signal to the main control board 300 when the auxiliary storage sensor 203s detects that the medals stored in the auxiliary storage 203 are full. . The main control board 300 performs error processing when the medals stored in the auxiliary storage 203 are full based on receiving a predetermined signal from the power supply board 200.

(Main CPU 301)
The main CPU 301 is connected to the main control board 300. Further, the main CPU 301 reads a program stored in a main ROM 302, which will be described later, and performs a predetermined arithmetic process in accordance with the progress of the game, so that the status board 100, the reel control board 150, the power board 200, and the sub control board. A predetermined signal is transmitted to 400.

(Main ROM 302)
The main ROM 302 is connected to the main control board 300. The main ROM 302 is provided for storing a control program executed by the main CPU 301, a data table, data for transmitting a command to the sub control board 400, and the like. Specifically, the main ROM 302 stores an array data table (see FIG. 7) described later, a symbol combination table (see FIG. 8) whose symbol combination group is “00”, and a symbol whose group combination group is “01”. A combination table (see FIG. 9), a symbol combination table whose reference symbol combination group is “02” (see FIG. 10), a symbol combination table whose reference symbol combination group is “03” (see FIG. 11), and a symbol combination which will be described later The symbol combination table (see FIG. 12) whose group is “04”, the first winning combination determination table for non-RT gaming state described later (see FIG. 14), and the first winning combination determination table for first RT gaming state described later (FIG. 15). 2) a first winning combination determination table for a second RT gaming state (see FIG. 16), which will be described later, and a first winning combination determination table for a third RT gaming state, which will be described later (see FIG. 17). 4 RT gaming state first winning combination determination table (see FIG. 18) described later, a fifth RT gaming state first winning combination determination table (see FIG. 19) described later, and a sixth RT gaming state first described later. A winning combination determination table (see FIG. 20), a second winning combination determination table (see FIG. 21), which will be described later, a reel lock effect lottery table for first RT gaming state, which will be described later (see FIG. 22), and a reel for third RT gaming state, which will be described later. A lock effect lottery table (see FIG. 23), a reel lock effect lottery table for a 4RT gaming state described later (see FIG. 24), a first RT gaming state spinning effect lottery table (see FIG. 25) described later, and a fourth RT described later. A gaming state spinning effect lottery table (see FIG. 26), a fifth RT gaming state spinning effect lottery table (see FIG. 27), which will be described later, and a reel lock map table, which will be described later (see FIG. 28). A later-described rotator effect map table (see FIG. 29), a later-described rotator effect correction map table (see FIG. 30), a RUSH stock lottery table (see FIG. 31) described later, and a continuation rate determination table (see FIG. 32) described later. ), A subsequent lottery table (see FIG. 33), a point lottery table (see FIG. 34), a reel lock effect block table (see FIG. 35), and a spinning effect block table (see FIG. 36). (See FIG. 37), a reel lock effect phase table (see FIG. 38), a spinning effect effect phase table (see FIG. 39), An effect phase table for rotating effect correction (see FIG. 40), an effect data table (see FIG. 41) described later, and an output pulse table (see FIG. 42) described later. Etc.) are stored.

(Main RAM 303)
The main RAM 303 is connected to the main control board 300. The main RAM 303 is provided for storing various data determined by the execution of the program by the main CPU 301. Specifically, the main RAM 303 includes (a) a setting change device operation abnormality flag storage area described later, (b) an effect transmission data storage area described later, (c) a setting value storage area described later, and (d) a later described setting value storage area. (E) stop control number storage area described later, (f) reel information storage area described later, (g) operable state flag storage area described later, (h) re-game in-operation flag storage area described later , (I) a timer counter described later, (j) a lamp-related data storage area described later, (k) a stored number counter described later, (l) a gaming state storage area described later, and (m) a spinning effect execution information storage described later. (N) a later-described spinning effect information storage area, (o) a later-described continuation rate information storage area, (p) a later-described guarantee number counter, (q) a later-described blue seven information storage area, and (r) an after-mentioned RUSH game number counter, after (s) (T) a third effect state game number counter described later, (u) a RUSH stock number counter described later, (v) a level storage area described later, and (w) reel lock effect information described later. Storage area, (x) Reel lock effect execution information storage area described later, (y) Second effect state point storage area described later, (z) Temporary timer counter described later, (aa) Revolving effect RE5 continuation flag described later (Ab) Last stop position storage area (described later), (ac) Retrieval priority storage area (described later), (ad) Press reference position storage area (described later), (ae) Acquired number counter (described later), (af) (described later) An external signal output time timer counter and the like are provided.

(Main random number generator 304)
The main random number generator 304 is connected to the main control board 300. The main random number generator 304 is provided to generate a random number used for a lottery or the like for determining a winning combination. Here, in the present embodiment, the main random number generator 304 generates a random number value in the range of “0” to “65535”.

(Sub CPU 401)
The sub CPU 401 is connected to the sub control board 400. In addition, the sub CPU 401 reads a program stored in a sub ROM 402 described later, and is predetermined based on information on a command received from the main control board 300, a signal input from the effect button sensor 710s and the cross key board 711. And the result of the calculation is provided to the effect control board 600, the amplifier board 500, and the like.

(Sub ROM 402)
The sub ROM 402 is connected to the sub control board 400. The sub ROM 402 is provided for storing a control program executed by the sub CPU 401, a data table, and the like. Specifically, the sub ROM 402 has an effect determination table described later (see FIG. 46), a mode lottery table described later (see FIG. 47), a first chance state lottery mode determination table described later (see FIG. 48), and a normal operation described later. State point acquisition lottery table (see FIG. 49), rare role initial game number determination table (see FIG. 50) described later, first chance state transition lottery table (see FIG. 51) described later, and second chance state transition described later. A lottery table (see FIG. 52), a chance state shift lottery table (see FIG. 53) described later, a precursor lottery table (see FIG. 54) described later, a precursor game number lottery table (see FIG. 55) described later, and a high-probability game described later. Number lottery table (see FIG. 56), first chance state lottery table (see FIG. 57), which will be described later, and second chance state lottery table, which will be described later (see FIG. 58). ), A judge lottery table described later (see FIG. 59), a second chance state point acquisition lottery table described later (see FIG. 60), a third chance state lottery table described later (see FIG. 61), and a second A 4-chance state lottery table (see FIG. 62), a Bonus preparation state shift lottery table (see FIG. 63), a Bonus state distribution lottery table (see FIG. 64), and a precursor promotion lottery table (see FIG. 65). (See FIG. 66), an ART state transition time table (see FIG. 67), an ART state high probability lottery table (see FIG. 68), and a second addition described later. State transition lottery table (see FIG. 69), below-mentioned winning stock lottery table (see FIG. 70), and ART state state transition lottery table (see FIG. 71). ), An ART state point acquisition lottery table (see FIG. 72), a preparation state lottery table (see FIG. 73), a fall standby state lottery table (see FIG. 74), and a first added state, described later. Lottery table (see FIG. 75), a chance state lottery table described later (see FIG. 76), a second point addition lottery table (see FIG. 77) described later, and a RUSH state lottery table (see FIG. 77). 78), a later-described point acquisition lottery table for the reeling effect RE5 (see FIG. 79), a battle state lottery table (see FIG. 80), a first Bonus state lottery table (see FIG. 81), which will be described later, A second Bonus state lottery table (see FIG. 82), a third Bonus state game number determination table (see FIG. 83) to be described later, and the like are stored.

(Sub RAM 403)
The sub RAM 403 is connected to the sub control board 400. The sub RAM 403 is provided for storing various data determined by the execution of the program by the sub CPU 401. Specifically, the sub RAM 403 is provided with various counters such as a Bonus precursor game number counter described later, and various storage areas such as a state storage area described later.

(Sub-random number generator 404)
The sub random number generator 404 is connected to the sub control board 400. The sub-random number generator 404 is provided for generating a random number used for a lottery or the like for determining an effect. Here, in the present embodiment, the sub-random number generator 404 generates a random value in the range of “0” to “65535”.

(Left backlight 461)
The left backlight 461 is provided on the left backlight substrate 451 and includes a plurality of LEDs. Here, the sub control board 400 performs a process of causing the left backlight 461 to emit light via the backlight relay board 450 and the left backlight board 451. Thereby, the visual recognition of the symbol of the left reel 18 becomes easy.

(Medium backlight 462)
The middle backlight 462 is provided on the middle backlight substrate 452 and includes a plurality of LEDs. Here, the sub-control board 400 performs a process of causing the middle backlight 462 to emit light via the backlight relay board 450 and the middle backlight board 452. Thereby, the visual recognition of the design of the middle reel 19 is facilitated.

(Right backlight 463)
The right backlight 463 is provided on the right backlight substrate 453 and includes a plurality of LEDs. Here, the sub-control board 400 performs a process of causing the right backlight 463 to emit light via the backlight relay board 450 and the right backlight board 453. Thereby, the visual recognition of the design of the right reel 20 is facilitated.

(LCD control CPU 601)
The liquid crystal control CPU 601 is connected to the effect control board 600. The liquid crystal control CPU 601 is provided for reading a program stored in a liquid crystal control ROM 602 described later and creating a display list based on a signal received from the sub control board 400. The liquid crystal control CPU 601 performs control to display image data stored in a CGROM 604 described later on the liquid crystal display device 46.

(LCD control ROM 602)
The liquid crystal control ROM 602 is connected to the effect control board 600. The liquid crystal control ROM 602 is provided to store a control program executed by the liquid crystal control CPU 601, a data table, and the like. Specifically, the liquid crystal control ROM 602 includes a control processing program of the liquid crystal control CPU 601, a display list generation program for generating a display list, a combination of animation scenes that are referred to when displaying an animation, and an animation scene display order. A weight frame indicating an image display time, various target data such as a sprite identification number and a transfer source address, various parameters such as a sprite display position and a transfer destination address, a drawing method, and the like are stored.

(Liquid crystal control RAM 603)
The liquid crystal control RAM 603 is connected to the effect control board 600. The liquid crystal control RAM 603 functions as a data work area when the liquid crystal control CPU 601 performs arithmetic processing, and is provided to temporarily store data read from the liquid crystal control ROM 602.

(CGROM604)
The CGROM 604 is connected to the effect control board 600. The CGROM 604 includes color number information for specifying a color number for each pixel in a predetermined range of pixels (for example, “32” pixels × “32” pixels) and an α value indicating the transparency of the image. It is provided for compressing and storing image data comprising a set.

(Sound source IC 605)
The sound source IC 605 is connected to the effect control board 600. The sound source IC 605 reads a program and data related to sound stored in a sound source ROM 606, which will be described later, and generates sound signals for driving the upper left speaker 40, lower left speaker 41, upper right speaker 42, and lower right speaker 43. It is provided for.

(Sound source ROM 606)
The sound source ROM 606 is connected to the effect control board 600. The sound source ROM 606 is provided for storing a program, data, and the like related to a sound output when performing an effect.

(VDP607)
The VDP 607 is a so-called image processor, and controls to read image data from the “display frame buffer area” out of the frame buffer areas of the first frame buffer area and the second frame buffer area based on an instruction from the liquid crystal control CPU 601. Do. Then, based on the read image data, a video signal (for example, an LVDS signal or an RGB signal) is generated, and thereby control for displaying an image on the liquid crystal display device 46 is performed. The VDP 607 includes a control register (not shown), a CG bus interface, a CPU interface, a clock generation circuit, an expansion circuit, a drawing circuit, a display circuit, a memory controller, and the like, which are connected by a bus.

(Left rendering device motor 651)
The left effect device motor 651 is connected to the effect device drive board 650. The left effect device motor 651 is provided to move the effect device 50 in the vertical direction together with a later-described right effect device motor 654.

(Upper left rendering device sensor 652s)
The upper left rendering device sensor 652s is connected to the rendering device drive board 650. The upper left effect device sensor 652s is provided together with an upper right effect device sensor 655s, which will be described later, to detect that the effect device 50 has moved to a predetermined position when the effect device 50 is moved upward. .

(Lower left rendering device sensor 653s)
The lower left rendering device sensor 653s is connected to the rendering device drive board 650. Also, the lower left effect device sensor 653s is provided together with the lower right effect device sensor 656s described later to detect that the effect device 50 has moved to a predetermined position when the effect device 50 is moved downward. Yes.

(Right effect device motor 654)
The right effect device motor 654 is connected to the effect device drive board 650. The right effect device motor 654 is provided together with the left effect device motor 651 to move the effect device 50 in the vertical direction.

(Upper right rendering device sensor 655s)
The upper right rendering device sensor 655s is connected to the rendering device drive board 650. The upper right effect device sensor 655s is provided together with the upper left effect device sensor 652s to detect that the effect device 50 has moved to a predetermined position when the effect device 50 is moved upward.

(Lower right rendering device sensor 656s)
The lower right rendering device sensor 656s is connected to the rendering device drive board 650. The lower right effect device sensor 656s is provided together with the lower left effect device sensor 653s to detect that the effect device 50 has moved to a predetermined position when the effect device 50 is moved downward.

(Left LCD lift motor 657)
The left liquid crystal lift motor 657 is connected to the rendering device drive board 650. The left liquid crystal lifting / lowering motor 657 is provided to move the liquid crystal display device 46 in the vertical direction together with the right liquid crystal lifting / lowering motor 660 described later.

(Upper left LCD lift sensor 658s)
The upper left liquid crystal lift sensor 658s is connected to the rendering device drive board 650. The upper left liquid crystal lift sensor 658s is provided together with an upper right liquid crystal lift sensor 661s described later to detect that the liquid crystal display device 46 has moved to a predetermined position when the liquid crystal display device 46 is moved upward. ing.

(Lower left LCD lift sensor 659s)
The lower left liquid crystal lift sensor 659s is connected to the rendering device drive board 650. The lower left liquid crystal lift sensor 659s is provided together with the lower right liquid crystal lift sensor 662s, which will be described later, to detect that the liquid crystal display device 46 has moved to a predetermined position when the liquid crystal display device 46 is moved downward. It has been.

(Right LCD lift motor 660)
The right liquid crystal lift motor 660 is connected to the rendering device drive board 650. The right liquid crystal lifting / lowering motor 660 is provided together with the left liquid crystal lifting / lowering motor 657 to move the liquid crystal display device 46 in the vertical direction.

(Upper right LCD lift sensor 661s)
The upper right liquid crystal lift sensor 661s is connected to the rendering device drive board 650. The upper right liquid crystal lift sensor 661s is provided together with the upper left liquid crystal lift sensor 658s to detect that the liquid crystal display device 46 has moved to a predetermined position when the liquid crystal display device 46 is moved upward. .

(Lower right LCD lift sensor 662s)
The lower right liquid crystal lift sensor 662s is connected to the rendering device drive board 650. The lower right liquid crystal lift sensor 662s is provided together with the lower left liquid crystal lift sensor 659s to detect that the liquid crystal display device 46 has moved to a predetermined position when the liquid crystal display device 46 is moved downward. Yes.

(MAXBET button LED board 701)
The MAXBET button LED substrate 701 is connected to a MAXBET button LED 721 described later, and is provided for performing processing of emitting a MAXBET button LED 721 described later. Here, when the operation of the MAXBET button 8 is valid, the sub-control board 400 performs a process of emitting a later-described MAXBET button LED 721 via the MAXBET button LED board 701 of the panel LED relay board 700. Thereby, notification that the operation of the MAXBET button 8 is effective is performed.

(Stop button LED board 702)
A stop button LED board 702 is connected to a stop button LED 722 to be described later, and is provided for performing a process of emitting light to a stop button LED 722 to be described later. Here, the sub-control board 400 performs a process of emitting a stop button LED 722 to be described later via the stop button LED board 702 of the panel LED relay board 700. Specifically, the sub control board 400 emits a stop button LED 722 (described later) provided inside the left stop button 11 via the stop button LED board 702 when the left stop button 11 is valid. When the middle stop button 12 is valid, a stop button LED 722 (described later) provided inside the middle stop button 12 is emitted via the stop button LED board 702, and the right stop button 13 is valid. In some cases, a process for emitting a later-described stop button LED 722 provided inside the right stop button 13 through the stop button LED substrate 702 is performed. Thereby, notification that the operation of the left stop button 11, the middle stop button 12, and the right stop button 13 is effective is performed.

(Production button LED board 703)
The effect button LED board 703 is connected to an effect button LED 723 described later, and is provided for performing processing of emitting an effect button LED 723 described later. Here, when the operation of the effect button 21 is valid, the sub control board 400 performs a process of emitting an effect button LED 723 described later via the effect button LED board 703 of the panel LED relay board 700. Thereby, it is notified that the operation of the effect button 21 is effective.

(Lumbar panel LED substrate 704)
The waist panel LED substrate 704 is connected to a waist panel LED 724, which will be described later, and is provided for performing a process of emitting light to the waist panel LED 724, which will be described later. Here, the sub-control board 400 performs a process of emitting a below-described waist panel LED 724 via the waist panel LED board 704 of the panel LED relay board 700. This makes it easier for the player to recognize the model name, motif, and the like of the gaming machine 1 drawn on the waist panel.

(Bonus display LED substrate 705)
The Bonus display LED substrate 705 is connected to the Bonus display unit 32 and is provided for performing a process of emitting light from the LED provided in the Bonus display unit 32. Here, the sub control board 400 is provided in the Bonus display unit 32 via the Bonus display LED board 705 of the panel LED relay board 700 at a timing when the state managed by the sub control board 400 shifts to the Bonus state. A process of emitting light from the LED is performed. Thereby, it notifies that it changed into the below-mentioned Bonus state.

(ART display LED substrate 706)
The ART display LED substrate 706 is connected to the ART display unit 33, and is provided for performing a process of emitting light from the LED provided in the ART display unit 33. Here, the sub control board 400 is provided in the ART display unit 33 via the ART display LED board 706 of the panel LED relay board 700 at a timing when the state managed by the sub control board 400 shifts to the ART state. A process of emitting light from the LED is performed. Thereby, it notifies that it changed to the below-mentioned ART state.

(RUSH display LED substrate 707)
The RUSH display LED substrate 707 is connected to the RUSH display unit 34 and is provided for performing a process of emitting light from the LED provided in the RUSH display unit 34. Here, the sub control board 400 is provided in the RUSH display unit 34 via the RUSH display LED board 707 of the panel LED relay board 700 at a timing when the state managed by the sub control board 400 shifts to the RUSH state. A process of emitting light from the LED is performed. Thereby, it notifies that it changed to the below-mentioned RUSH state.

(Stop button operation LED board 708)
The stop button operation LED board 708 is connected to the stop button operation display unit 35 and is provided for performing a process of emitting light from the LED provided in the stop button operation display unit 35. Here, the sub control board 400 performs a process of emitting light emitted from the LEDs provided in the stop button operation display unit 35 via the stop button operation LED board 708 of the panel LED relay board 700. Specifically, when the state managed by the sub control board 400 is the ART state and the operation of the left stop button 11 is the optimal timing, the sub control board 400 is the panel LED relay board. When it is the optimal timing to turn on the LED provided on the left stop button operation display unit 35L and operate the middle stop button 12 via the stop button operation LED board 708 of 700, the panel LED relay When it is the optimal timing to light the LED provided in the middle stop button operation display section 35C via the stop button operation LED board 708 of the substrate 700 and to operate the right stop button 13, the panel LED The stop button operation LED board 708 of the relay board 700 is provided on the right stop button operation display part 35R via the LED board 708. It performs processing for lighting the by that LED. Thereby, the optimal operation order of the left stop button 11, the middle stop button 12, and the right stop button 13 is notified.

(Start lever LED board 709)
The start lever LED substrate 709 is connected to the start lever LED 36 and is provided for performing a process of emitting light from the start lever LED 36. Here, the sub control board 400 performs a process of emitting light from the start lever LED 36 at a predetermined timing via the start lever LED board 709 of the panel LED relay board 700. Thereby, an effect appealing visually to the player is performed.

(Direction button sensor 710s)
The effect button sensor 710 s is connected to the effect button 21 and is provided to detect the operation of the effect button 21. Here, the effect button sensor 710 s transmits a predetermined signal to the sub control board 400 based on the detection of the operation of the effect button 21. Then, the sub-control board 400 performs processing when the effect button 21 is operated based on the reception of the predetermined signal.

(Cross key board 711)
The cross key board 711 is connected to the cross key 22 and is provided to detect the operation of the cross key 22. Here, the cross key board 711 transmits a predetermined signal to the sub-control board 400 based on the detection of the operation of the cross key 22. Then, the sub control board 400 performs processing when the cross key 22 is operated based on the reception of the predetermined signal.

(MAX BET button LED721)
The MAXBET button LED 721 is provided inside the MAXBET button 8 and is connected to the MAXBET button LED board 701. Here, the MAXBET button LED 721 is turned on when it is time to accept the operation of the MAXBET button 8, and is turned off when it is time to accept the operation of the MAXBET button 8. Thereby, it is notified that (a) it is time to accept the operation of the MAXBET button 8, and (b) it is time to accept the operation of the MAXBET button 8.

(Stop button LED722)
The stop button LED 722 includes (a) a left stop button LED 722L provided inside the left stop button 11, (b) a middle stop button LED 722C provided inside the middle stop button 12, and (c) a right stop. A right stop button LED 722R provided inside the button 13 is configured.

(Left stop button LED722L)
The left stop button LED 722L is provided to notify that it is time to accept the operation of the left stop button 11. Specifically, the left stop button LED 722L is turned on when it is time to accept the operation of the left stop button 11, and is turned off when it is time to not accept the operation of the left stop button 11. Accordingly, (a) it is time to accept the operation of the left stop button 11, and (b) notification that it is time to not accept the operation of the left stop button 11.

(Intermediate stop button LED722C)
The middle stop button LED 722C is provided to notify that it is time to accept the operation of the middle stop button 12. Specifically, the middle stop button LED 722C is turned on when it is time to accept the operation of the middle stop button 12, and turned off when it is time to not accept the operation of the middle stop button 12. Thereby, it is notified that it is the timing when the operation of the stop button 12 during (a) is received and the timing when the operation of the stop button 12 during (b) is not received.

(Right stop button LED722R)
The right stop button LED 722R is provided to notify that it is time to accept the operation of the right stop button 13. Specifically, the right stop button LED 722R is turned on when it is time to accept the operation of the right stop button 13, and is turned off when it is time to not accept the operation of the right stop button 13. Accordingly, (a) it is time to accept the operation of the right stop button 13, and (b) notification that it is time to not accept the operation of the right stop button 13.

(Direction button LED723)
The effect button LED 723 is provided to notify that it is time to accept the operation of the effect button 21. Specifically, the effect button LED 723 is turned on when it is time to accept the operation of the effect button 21, and is turned off when it is time to not accept the operation of the effect button 21. Thereby, (a) it is the timing which receives operation of the production button 21, and (b) it is alert | reported that it is timing which does not receive operation of the production button 21. FIG.

(Lumbar panel LED724)
The waist panel LED 724 is provided to make it easier for the player to recognize the model name, motif, and the like of the gaming machine 1 drawn on the waist panel 37. Here, the waist panel LED 724 is lit when power is supplied to the gaming machine 1. This makes it easier for the player to recognize the model name, motif, etc. of the gaming machine 1 drawn on the waist panel 37. Note that the lumbar panel LED 724 may be turned off based on the fact that a predetermined condition has been satisfied. Thereby, it can be notified to the player that a predetermined condition has been satisfied.

(Production device control board 800)
The effect device control board 800 is provided to control an upper left effect device 811 described later, a lower left effect device 812 described later, an upper right effect device 813 described later, and a lower right effect device 814 described later. The effect device control board 800 is connected to the effect device drive relay board 750, the upper left effect device board 801, the lower left effect device board 802, the upper right effect device board 803, and the lower right effect device board 804.

(Upper left rendering device substrate 801)
An upper left effect device substrate 801 is connected to an upper left effect device 811 described later, and is provided to emit an LED provided in the upper left effect device 811 described later. Here, the sub control board 400 is provided in an upper left effect device 811 described later via an effect control board 600, an effect device drive board 650, an effect device drive relay board 750, an effect device control board 800, and an upper left effect device board 801. The process which light-emits LED which is light is performed. Thereby, an effect appealing visually to the player is performed.

(Lower left rendering device board 802)
The lower left effect device substrate 802 is connected to a lower left effect device 812, which will be described later, and is provided to emit an LED provided in the lower left effect device 812, which will be described later. Here, the sub control board 400 is provided in the lower left effect device 812 described later via the effect control substrate 600, the effect device drive board 650, the effect device drive relay board 750, the effect device control board 800, and the lower left effect device board 802. The process which light-emits LED which is lighted is performed. Thereby, an effect appealing visually to the player is performed.

(Upper right rendering device board 803)
The upper right effect device substrate 803 is connected to an upper right effect device 813, which will be described later, and is provided to emit an LED provided in the upper right effect device 813, which will be described later. Here, the sub control board 400 is provided in an upper right effect device 813 described later via an effect control substrate 600, an effect device drive board 650, an effect device drive relay board 750, an effect device control board 800, and an upper right effect device board 803. The process which light-emits LED which performs is performed. Thereby, an effect appealing visually to the player is performed.

(Lower right rendering device board 804)
A lower right effect device substrate 804 is connected to a lower right effect device 814, which will be described later, and is provided to emit an LED provided in the lower right effect device 814, which will be described later. Here, the sub-control board 400 is transferred to the lower right effect device 814 (described later) via the effect control substrate 600, the effect device drive board 650, the effect device drive relay board 750, the effect device control board 800, and the lower right effect device board 804. The process which light-emits LED provided is performed. Thereby, an effect appealing visually to the player is performed.

(Upper left rendering device 811)
The upper left rendering device 811 is provided on the back side of the rendering device 50 and is connected to the upper left rendering device substrate 801. In addition, the upper left rendering device 811 has a built-in LED, and the LED built in the upper left rendering device 811 emits light when a predetermined condition is satisfied.

(Lower left rendering device 812)
The lower left rendering device 812 is provided on the back side of the rendering device 50 and is connected to the lower left rendering device substrate 802. Further, the lower left effect device 812 has an LED built therein, and the LED incorporated in the lower left effect device 812 emits light when executing a predetermined effect.

(Upper right rendering device 813)
The upper right effect device 813 is provided on the back side of the effect device 50 and is connected to the upper right effect device substrate 803. Further, the upper right rendering device 813 has a built-in LED, and the LED built in the upper right rendering device 813 emits light when a predetermined condition is satisfied.

(Lower right rendering device 814)
The lower right rendering device 814 is provided on the back side of the rendering device 50 and is connected to the lower right rendering device substrate 804. The lower right rendering device 814 has a built-in LED, and when the predetermined rendering is performed, the LED built in the lower right rendering device 814 emits light.

(LED control board 850)
The LED control board 850 is provided to control the top LED 861, the corner LED 862, the side LED 863, the saucer side LED 864, and the saucer LED 865. The LED control board 850 is connected to a top LED board 851, a corner LED board 852, a side LED board 853, a saucer side LED board 854, and a saucer LED board 855.

(Moving aspect of the rendering device 50)
Next, the movable aspect of the rendering device 50 will be described with reference to FIG.

  As shown in FIG. 5A, the rendering device 50 includes a base part 51, a handle part 52, and a sheath part 53.

(Base part 51)
The base portion 51 is a member that serves as a base of the effect device 50, and incorporates an LED in a portion covered with the sheath portion 53. Here, the sub-control board 400 performs a process of causing the LED built in the base unit 51 to emit light via the effect control board 600 and the effect device drive board 650 when executing a predetermined effect. In addition, an upper left effect device 811, a lower left effect device 812, an upper right effect device 813, and a lower right effect device 814 are provided on the back side of the base portion 51.

(Pattern 52)
The handle 52 is attached to the left side of the base 51 in front view. The handle 52 has a shape imitating a Japanese sword handle.

(Sheath 53)
The sheath portion 53 is attached to the right side of the base portion 51 as viewed from the front. The sheath portion 53 has a shape imitating the sheath of a Japanese sword. Moreover, the sheath part 53 is movable in the left-right direction.

  As shown in FIG. 5B, the sub control board 400 drives the left effect device motor 651 and the right effect device motor 654 via the effect control board 600 and the effect device drive board 650, thereby causing the effect device 50 to move. A process that moves upward is performed. Then, when it is detected by the upper left effect device sensor 652s and the upper right effect device sensor 655s that the effect device 50 has moved to a predetermined position, the effect device 50 by the left effect device motor 651 and the right effect device motor 654 is changed. The upward movement is stopped.

  As shown in FIG. 5C, after the effect device 50 is moved to a predetermined position, the sub control board 400 moves the sheath portion 53 in the right direction in front view via the effect control board 600 and the effect device drive board 650. While performing the movable process, the upper left effect device 811, the lower left effect device 812, the upper right effect device 813, and the lower right effect device 814 are moved via the effect control board 600, the effect device drive board 650, and the effect device control board 800. Process. In addition, the sub control board 400 performs a process of emitting the LED incorporated in the base part that is not covered by the movement of the sheath part 53 via the effect control board 600 and the effect device drive board 650, and Via the effect control board 600, the effect device drive board 650, and the effect device control board 800, the LED incorporated in the upper left effect device 811, the LED incorporated in the lower left effect device 812, and the upper right effect device 813. The LED and the LED incorporated in the lower right effect device 814 are processed to emit light.

  Note that, after the effect by the effect device 50 as shown in FIG. 5C is performed, the sub control board 400 passes through the effect control board 600 and the effect device drive board 650, the left effect device motor 651, and the right By driving the effect device motor 654, a process of moving the effect device 50 downward is performed. Then, when it is detected by the lower left effect device sensor 653s and the lower right effect device sensor 656s that the effect device 50 has moved to the original position before moving, the left effect device motor 651 and the right effect device motor 654 are detected. The downward movement of the rendering device 50 is stopped. Further, the sub-control board 400 performs a process of moving the sheath portion 53 in the left direction in the front view via the effect control board 600 and the effect device drive board 650 when moving the effect device 50 downward. Through the effect control board 600, the effect device drive board 650, and the effect device control board 800, processing for returning the upper left effect device 811, the lower left effect device 812, the upper right effect device 813, and the lower right effect device 814 to their original positions is performed. Further, the sub control board 400 performs a process of turning off the LED built in the base part covered with the sheath part 53 via the effect control board 600 and the effect device drive board 650, and the effect control board 600. The LED built in the upper left rendering device 811, the LED built in the lower left rendering device 812, and the LED built in the upper right rendering device 813 via the rendering device drive board 650 and the rendering device control board 800. Then, the process of turning off the LED built in the lower right effect device 814 is performed. Thereby, the rendering device 50 returns to the original position.

  In the present embodiment, there is a case where control is performed to move the handle 52 and the sheath 53 at the position shown in FIG. 5A without moving the effect device 50 upward. Specifically, the sub-control board 400 moves the handle 52 in the left direction in the front view via the effect control board 600 and the effect device drive board 650 when executing a predetermined effect, and the sheath part 53. Is controlled to move in the right direction of the front view. Thereafter, at a predetermined timing, the handle 52 is moved in the right direction when viewed from the front, and the sheath 53 is moved in the left direction when viewed from the front, whereby the handle 52 and the sheath 53 are returned to their original positions. . Further, the sub-control board 400 performs control to move the handle 52 in the left direction in the front view and move the sheath portion 53 in the right direction in the front view, and then controls to emit the LEDs provided in the base portion 51. I do.

(Stepping motor structure)
Next, the structure of the stepping motor will be described with reference to FIG.

  A left stepping motor 151 shown in FIG. 6A is connected to the left reel 18. Here, the structure of the stepping motor will be described using the left stepping motor 151, but the middle stepping motor 152 and the right stepping motor 153 also have the same structure.

  As shown in FIG. 6B, excitation layers “φ0”, “φ1”, “φ2”, and “φ3” are arranged in order in the clockwise direction at intervals of about 90 ° in the left stepping motor 151. In addition, a rotor is provided at the center of the excitation layers “φ0”, “φ1”, “φ2”, and “φ3”. Here, the main control board 300 determines output pulse data for the reel control board 150 based on an output pulse table (see FIG. 42) described later stored in the main ROM 302, and the determined pulse data. Based on the above, a pulse signal is output. The reel control board 150 is excited with respect to the excitation layers “φ0”, “φ1”, “φ2”, and “φ3” of the left stepping motor 151 when the pulse signal output from the main control board 300 is input. Output a signal. Thereby, the rotor rotates in a predetermined direction, and the left reel 18 rotates in the same direction as the rotor.

(Array data table)
Next, the array data table will be described with reference to FIG.

  The arrangement data table is provided in the main ROM 302, and the symbol position of the symbol displayed in the middle of the display window 23 when the left reel sensor 154s, the middle reel sensor 155s, and the right reel sensor 156s detect the reel index. Is defined as “00”. Also, symbol positions “00” to “20” are defined based on the symbol position “00”.

(The symbol combination table whose symbol combination group is “00”)
Next, the symbol combination table whose symbol combination group is “00” will be described with reference to FIG.

  The symbol combination table whose symbol combination group is “00” is stored in the main ROM 302, and includes a symbol combination name, a bit corresponding to the symbol combination name, a symbol bit name corresponding to the bit, and a symbol combination. The number of medals to be paid out to the player is defined.

  In addition, “preparation replay” is defined as the symbol bit name “REP01” in the bit “00000001” of the symbol combination table whose symbol combination group is “00”, and the symbol bit name “REP02” is included in the bit “00000010”. "First Bonus replay" is defined, bit "00000100" is defined as symbol bit name "REP03", "second Bonus replay" is defined, and bit "00001000" is defined as symbol bit name "REP04". "3rd Bonus Replay" is defined, "ART Replay" is defined as the symbol bit name "REP05" in the bit "00010000", and the symbol bit name "REP06" is defined in the bit "00100000". As "RUSH “Play” is specified, “Special Replay” is specified for the bit “01000000” as the symbol bit name “REP07”, and “Middle Replay” is specified for the bit “10000000” as the symbol bit name “REP08”. Is stipulated.

  Here, when the combination of symbols displayed along the active line matches the symbol combination specified in the symbol combination table, the main CPU 301 pays out medals, activates a re-game, and plays a game state. Control which gives privilege, such as transfer, is performed. For example, when the symbol combination “replay A”, “replay A”, and “BAR” is displayed on the active line, the main CPU 301 displays the symbol combination related to “preparation replay”. It determines with having been carried out, and the control which transfers to the below-mentioned 2RT gaming state is performed with the action | operation of a re-game. Note that if the symbol combination displayed along the active line does not match the symbol combination defined in the symbol combination table, it is “lost”.

(The symbol combination table whose symbol combination group is “01”)
Next, a symbol combination table whose symbol combination group is “01” will be described with reference to FIG.

  Similar to the symbol combination table whose symbol combination group is “00”, the symbol combination table whose symbol combination group is “01” is stored in the main ROM 302. The symbol combination name, the bit corresponding to the symbol combination name, The symbol bit name corresponding to the bit, the combination of symbols, and the number of medals to be paid out are defined.

  In addition, in the symbol combination table bit “00000001” of the symbol combination group “01”, “upward right replay” is defined as the symbol bit name “REP09”, and the symbol bit name “00000010” includes the symbol bit name “ “BAR replay” is defined as “REP10”, “upper watermelon play” is defined as symbol bit name “REP11” in bit “00000100”, and symbol bit name “REP12” is defined in bit “00001000”. "Lower watermelon play" is defined, bit "00010000" is defined as symbol bit name "REP13", "upper cherry replay" is defined, and bit "00100000" is defined as symbol bit name "REP14". "" “Rei” is defined, “First Chance Replay” is defined as the symbol bit name “REP15” in the bit “01000000”, and “Bit 16000000” is defined as the symbol bit name “REP16”. The “second chance replay” is defined.

  Here, in the present embodiment, “preparation replay”, “first Bonus replay”, “second Bonus replay”, “third Bonus replay”, “ART replay”, “special replay”, “RUSH replay”, “middle replay”. ”,“ Upward right replay ”,“ BAR replay ”,“ upper watermelon play ”,“ lower watermelon play ”,“ upper cherry replay ”,“ lower cherry replay ”,“ first chance replay ”,“ second chance ” When the symbol combination related to “Replay” is displayed on the active line, the re-game is activated.

(The symbol combination table whose symbol combination group is “02”)
Next, the symbol combination table whose symbol combination group is “02” will be described with reference to FIG.

  The symbol combination table with the symbol combination group “02” is stored in the main ROM 302 in the same manner as the symbol combination table with the symbol combination group “00” and the symbol combination table with the symbol combination group “01”. The combination name, the bit corresponding to the symbol combination name, the symbol bit name corresponding to the bit, the symbol combination, and the number of medals to be paid out are defined.

  Also, in the symbol combination table bit “00000001” of the symbol combination group “02”, “first push order bell” is defined as the symbol bit name “NML01”, and the symbol “00000010” includes the symbol bit. The name “NML02” is defined as “second push order bell”, the bit “00000100” is designated as the symbol bit name “NML03”, “third push order bell”, and the bit “00001000” is designated. “4th push order bell” is defined as the design bit name “NML04”, and “5th push order bell” is defined as the design bit name “NML05” in the bit “00010000”. “00100000” defines “sixth push order bell” as the symbol bit name “NML06”. The bit “01000000” defines the “seventh push order bell” as the symbol bit name “NML07”, and the bit “10000000” has the “eighth push order bell” as the symbol bit name “NML08”. It is prescribed.

(The symbol combination table whose symbol combination group is “03”)
Next, the symbol combination table whose symbol combination group is “03” will be described with reference to FIG.

  The symbol combination table with the symbol combination group “03” includes the symbol combination table with the symbol combination group “00”, the symbol combination table with the symbol combination group “01”, and the symbol combination table with the symbol combination group “02”. Similarly, it is stored in the main ROM 302 and defines the symbol combination name, the bit corresponding to the symbol combination name, the symbol bit name corresponding to the bit, the symbol combination, and the number of medals to be paid out. .

  In addition, in the symbol combination table bit “00000001” in which the symbol combination group is “03”, the symbol bit name “NML09” is defined as “9th push order bell”, and the symbol “00000010” includes symbol bits. “10th push order bell” is defined as the name “NML10”, “11th push order bell” is defined as the design bit name “NML11” in the bit “00000100”, and the bit “00001000” Is defined with the symbol bit name “NML12” as “12th pushing order bell”, the bit “00010000” is defined with the symbol bit name “NML13” as “correct answer bell”, and the bit “00100000”. Has a bit name “NML14” and “watermelon that goes up to the right” The bit “01000000” is defined as “Right-down watermelon” as the symbol bit name “NML15”, and the bit “10000000” is defined as “first chance” as the symbol bit name “NML16”. Yes.

(The symbol combination table whose symbol combination group is “04”)
Next, the symbol combination table whose symbol combination group is “04” will be described with reference to FIG.

  The symbol combination table whose symbol combination group is “04” is a symbol combination table whose symbol combination group is “00”, a symbol combination table whose symbol combination group is “01”, a symbol combination table whose symbol combination group is “02”, Similar to the symbol combination table whose symbol combination group is “03”, it is stored in the main ROM 302. The symbol combination name, the bit corresponding to the symbol combination name, the symbol bit name corresponding to the bit, It defines the combination and the number of medals to be paid out.

  In addition, in the symbol combination table with the symbol combination group “04”, the bit “00000001” defines “second chance” as the symbol bit name “NML17”, and the bit “00000010” includes the symbol bit name. “NML18” defines “first cherry”, bit “00000100” defines symbol bit name “NML19”, “second cherry”, and bit “00001000” includes symbol bit name “NML20” defines “middle stage cherry”, bit “00010000” defines symbol bit name “BLK01”, “first blank”, and bit “00100000” includes symbol bit name “ BLK02 "is defined as" second blank "and bit To 01000000 ", as the symbol bit name" BLK03 "" third blank "are defined, the bit" 10000000 "is" fourth blank "is defined as the symbol bit name" BLK04 ".

  Here, in this embodiment, “a combination of symbols relating to the first push order bell”, “a combination of symbols relating to the second push order bell”, “a combination of symbols relating to the third push order bell”, “ "Combination of symbols related to the 4th push order bell", "Combination of symbols related to the 5th push order bell", "Combination of symbols related to the 6th push order bell", "Combination of symbols related to the 7th push order bell", "Combination of symbols related to the 8th push order bell", "Combination of symbols related to the 9th push order bell", "Combination of symbols related to the 10th push order bell", "Combination of symbols related to the 11th push order bell "," Combination of symbols related to 12th push order bell "," Combination of symbols related to correct answer bell "," Combination of symbols related to right-up watermelon "," Combination of symbols related to right-down watermelon "," First "Combination of symbols related to the second cherry", "Combination of symbols related to the second chance", "Combination of symbols related to the first cherry", "Combination of symbols related to the second cherry", " When “combination” is displayed on the active line, medals are paid out.

  In addition, “a combination of symbols relating to the first push order bell”, “a combination of symbols relating to the second push order bell”, “a combination of symbols relating to the third push order bell”, “a symbol relating to the fourth push order bell” "Combination of symbols related to the fifth push order bell", "Combination of symbols related to the sixth push order bell", "Combination of symbols related to the seventh push order bell", "Eighth push order bell "Combination of symbols related to", "Combination of symbols related to 9th push order bell", "Combination of symbols related to 10th push order bell", "Combination of symbols related to 11th push order bell", "12th push order “Combination of symbols related to bell”, “Combination of symbols related to correct bell”, “Combination of symbols related to right-up watermelon”, “Combination of symbols related to right-down watermelon”, “Combination of symbols related to first chance” "Combination", "Combination of symbols related to second chance", "Combination of symbols related to first cherry", "Combination of symbols related to second cherry", and "Combination of symbols related to middle cherry" , "Combination of symbols related to winning".

  In addition, “a combination of symbols relating to the first push order bell”, “a combination of symbols relating to the second push order bell”, “a combination of symbols relating to the third push order bell”, “a symbol relating to the fourth push order bell” "Combination of symbols related to the fifth push order bell", "Combination of symbols related to the sixth push order bell", "Combination of symbols related to the seventh push order bell", "Eighth push order bell "Combination of symbols related to", "Combination of symbols related to 9th push order bell", "Combination of symbols related to 10th push order bell", "Combination of symbols related to 11th push order bell", "12th push order "Combination of symbols related to bell" is collectively referred to as "combination of symbols related to push order bell".

  In addition, “a combination of symbols relating to the first push order bell”, “a combination of symbols relating to the second push order bell”, “a combination of symbols relating to the third push order bell”, “a symbol relating to the fourth push order bell” "Combination of symbols related to the fifth push order bell", "Combination of symbols related to the sixth push order bell", "Combination of symbols related to the seventh push order bell", "Eighth push order bell "Combination of symbols related to", "Combination of symbols related to 9th push order bell", "Combination of symbols related to 10th push order bell", "Combination of symbols related to 11th push order bell", "12th push order The “combination of symbols related to the bell” and the “combination of symbols related to the correct bell” are collectively referred to as “the combination of symbols related to the bell”.

  In addition, “a combination of symbols related to a watermelon rising right” and “a combination of symbols related to a watermelon falling right” are collectively referred to as “a combination of symbols related to a watermelon”.

  Further, “a combination of symbols related to the first chance” and “a combination of symbols related to the second chance” are collectively referred to as “a combination of symbols related to the chance”.

  Further, “a combination of symbols related to the first cherry”, “a combination of symbols related to the second cherry”, and “a combination of symbols related to the middle cherry” are collectively referred to as “a combination of symbols related to the cherry”.

  In addition, “a combination of symbols related to the first blank”, “a combination of symbols related to the second blank”, “a combination of symbols related to the third blank”, and “a combination of symbols related to the fourth blank” This is referred to as “blank pattern combination”.

  On the other hand, “Combination of Symbols Related to Preparatory Replay”, “Combination of Symbols Related to First Bonus Replay”, “Combination of Symbols Related to Second Bonus Replay”, “Combination of Symbols Related to Third Bonus Replay”, “Related to ART Replay” "Combination of symbols", "Combination of symbols related to special replay", "Combination of symbols related to RUSH replay", "Combination of symbols related to middle replay", "Combination of symbols related to right-up replay", " "Combination of symbols related to the upper cherry replay", "Combination of symbols related to the upper cherry replay", "Combination of symbols related to the upper cherry replay", "Combination of symbols related to the lower cherry replay", “First chance replay related The combination of pattern ", collectively the" combination of symbols according to a second chance eyes Replay "," combination of symbols relating to the replay. "

  Further, “the combination of symbols related to the first Bonus replay”, “the combination of symbols related to the second Bonus replay”, and “the combination of symbols related to the third Bonus replay” are collectively referred to as “the combination of symbols related to the Bonus replay”.

  In addition, “the combination of symbols related to middle replay” and “the combination of symbols related to right-up replay” are collectively referred to as “the combination of symbols related to normal replay”.

  Further, “the combination of symbols related to the upper watermelon play” and “the combination of symbols related to the lower watermelon play” are collectively referred to as “the combination of symbols related to the watermelon play”.

  Further, “the combination of symbols related to the upper cherry replay” and “the combination of symbols related to the lower cherry replay” are collectively referred to as “the combination of symbols related to the cherry replay”.

  Further, “a combination of symbols related to the first chance replay” and “a combination of symbols related to the second chance replay” are collectively referred to as “a combination of symbols related to the chance replay”.

(Relationship between winning role, stop button operation order, winnings, etc.)
Next, based on FIG. 13, the relationship between the winning combination, the operation order of the stop button, and winnings will be described.

  In FIG. 13, the winning number corresponding to the winning combination, the contents of the winning number, the condition device corresponding to the winning combination, whether or not each game state can be determined as the winning combination, and the stop operation order are on the active line. The relationship with the combination of the symbols which can be displayed is shown.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 13, the condition device to be operated varies depending on the determined winning combination. For example, when the winning combination of the winning number “13” is determined by the internal lottery process described later, the condition devices that are to be activated are “REP08” and “REP09”. That is, when the winning combination of the winning number “13” is determined, one of the symbol combinations related to “middle replay” or “upward replay” is displayed on the active line. It becomes.

  In this embodiment, even if the left stop button 11, the middle stop button 12, and the right stop button 13 are operated at the same symbol position, the player operates the left stop button 11, the middle stop button 12, and the right stop button 13. Depending on the order, winning combinations with different combinations of symbols on the active line are provided. For example, when the “Bonus replay BR1” with the winning number “17” is determined as the winning combination by the internal lottery process described later, the conditional devices that are activated are “REP08”, “REP09”, “REP10”. , “REP12”, and “REP15”. In this case, when the left stop button 11 is operated for the first time, any one of the symbol combinations related to “middle replay”, “upward replay”, “BAR replay”, or “lower watermelon play” is selected. The combination of symbols will be displayed on the active line. Further, when the middle stop button 12 is operated first, the symbol combination related to “middle stage replay” is displayed on the active line. In addition, when the right stop button 13 is first operated, one of the symbol combinations related to “middle stage replay” or “BAR replay” is displayed on the active line. .

  However, in this case, when the left stop button 11 is operated for the first time, out of the symbol combinations related to “BAR replay”, the symbol combination allowed to be displayed on the effective line and the effective line There are combinations of symbols that are not allowed to be displayed. Similarly, even when the right stop button 13 is operated for the first time, among the symbol combinations related to “BAR replay”, the symbol combinations that are allowed to be displayed on the effective line and the symbol line are displayed on the effective line. There are combinations of symbols that are not allowed.

  On the other hand, a winning combination is provided in which the combination of symbols arranged on the active line does not differ regardless of the order of operation of the left stop button 11, the middle stop button 12, and the right stop button 13. For example, when the “common bell” of the winning number “31” is determined as the winning combination by the internal lottery process described later, the conditional devices that are activated are “NML01”, “NML02”, “NML03”, “NML03” NML04, “NML05”, “NML06”, “NML07”, “NML08”, “NML09”, “NML10”, “NML11”, “NML12”, and “NML13”. In this case, whether the left stop button 11 is operated first, the middle stop button 12 is operated first, or the right stop button 13 is operated first, the “first push Of the symbol combinations related to “order bell”, “second push order bell”, “third push order bell”, “fourth push order bell”, or “correct answer bell”, any of the symbol combinations is an effective line. Will be displayed above.

  In addition, the left stop button 11, the middle stop button 12, and the right stop button 13 are operated at an appropriate timing regardless of the order of operation of the left stop button 11, the middle stop button 12, and the right stop button 13. If not done, there is a case where the symbol combination related to winning is not displayed on the active line. For example, when the “watermelon” with the winning number “25” is determined as the winning combination by the internal lottery process described later, the condition devices that are activated are “NML14” and “NML15”. In this case, regardless of whether the left stop button 11 is first operated, the middle stop button 12 is first operated, or the right stop button 13 is first operated, ”Or“ Right-down watermelon ”, any symbol combination can be displayed on the active line, but the left stop button 11, middle stop button 12, right stop button 13 are displayed at an appropriate timing. If the above operation is not performed, any symbol combination among the symbol combinations related to the “right-up watermelon” or “right-down watermelon” is not displayed on the active line.

(First winning combination determination table for non-RT gaming state)
Next, the first winning combination determination table for non-RT gaming state will be described based on FIG.

  The non-RT gaming state first winning combination determination table is stored in the main ROM 302 and is used when determining a winning combination by an internal lottery process described later in a non-RT gaming state described later.

  Further, in the first winning combination determination table for the non-RT gaming state, the winning number, the contents of the winning number, the lottery value for each set value, and the lottery value of the winning combination corresponding to the winning number are all set common values. Whether or not is specified. Here, in the present embodiment, the first winning combination determination table for the non-RT gaming state includes the lottery value when the setting value is “1”, the lottery value when the setting value is “2”, and the setting value. The lottery value when “3”, the lottery value when the setting value is “4”, the lottery value when the setting value is “5”, and the lottery value when the setting value is “6” are defined respectively. Has been. In FIG. 14, the lottery value when the set value is “2”, the lottery value when the set value is “3”, the lottery value when the set value is “4”, and the set value is “5”. Illustration of lottery values in this case is omitted.

  In the first winning combination determination table for the non-RT gaming state, a lottery value is defined only for “normal replay” of the winning number “13”.

  That is, the lottery value other than these is “0”, and when the lottery is performed using the first winning combination determination table for the non-RT gaming state, the “preparation state transition replay JR1” with the winning number “01”, “Preparation state transfer replay JR2” with winning number “02”, “Preparation state transfer replay JR3” with winning number “03”, “Preparation state transfer replay JR4” with winning number “04”, “Direct hit” with winning number “05” “Bonus”, “Bonus rush replay BI1” with winning number “06”, “Bonus rush replay BI2” with winning number “07”, “Bonus rush replay BI3” with winning number “08”, “ART” with winning number “09” “Replay AR1”, “Replay AR2 during ART” with winning number “10”, “Replay AR3 during ART” with winning number “11”, “Replay AR3 during winning” “12” RT replay AR4 ”, winning number“ 14 ”“ RUSH replay R1 ”, winning number“ 15 ”“ RUSH replay R2 ”, winning number“ 16 ”“ state transition replay ”, winning number“ 17 ”“ Bonus ” “Medium Replay BR1”, Winning Number “18” “Bonus Replay BR2”, Winning Number “19” “Bonus Replay BR3”, Winning Number “20” “Watermelon Play”, Winning Number “21” “Weak” “Cherry Replay”, “Strong Cherry Replay” with the winning number “22”, and “Chance Eye Replay CR1” with the winning number “23” are not determined as the winning combination.

(First winning combination determination table for first RT gaming state)
Next, the first winning combination determination table for the first RT gaming state will be described based on FIG.

  The first RT game state first winning combination determination table is stored in the main ROM 302, and is used when determining a winning combination by an internal lottery process described later in the first RT gaming state described later.

  Further, in the first winning combination determination table for the first RT gaming state, the winning number, the contents of the winning number, the lottery value for each set value, and the lottery value of the winning combination corresponding to the winning number are all set common values. Whether or not is specified. Here, in the present embodiment, the first winning combination determination table for the first RT gaming state includes the lottery value when the setting value is “1”, the lottery value when the setting value is “2”, and the setting value. The lottery value when “3”, the lottery value when the setting value is “4”, the lottery value when the setting value is “5”, and the lottery value when the setting value is “6” are defined respectively. Has been. In FIG. 15, the lottery value when the setting value is “2”, the lottery value when the setting value is “3”, the lottery value when the setting value is “4”, and the setting value is “5”. Illustration of lottery values in this case is omitted.

  In addition, the first RT combination determination table for the first RT gaming state includes “preparation state transfer replay JR1” with a win number “01”, “preparation state transfer replay JR2” with a win number “02”, and “ Lottery values are defined for “preparation state transition replay JR3”, “preparation state transition replay JR4” with a winning number “04”, and “direct hit Bonus” with a winning number “05”.

  That is, the lottery value other than these is “0”, and when the lottery is performed using the first winning combination determination table for the first RT gaming state, “Bonus rush replay BI1” with the winning number “06”, winning “Bonus rush replay BI2” with the number “07”, “Bonus rush replay BI3” with the winning number “08”, “Replay during ART AR1” with the winning number “09”, “Replay AR2 during ART” with the winning number “10” The winning number “11” “ART replay AR3”, the winning number “12” “ART replay AR4”, the winning number “13” “normal replay”, the winning number “14” “RUSH replay R1”, “RUSH replay R2” with winning number “15”, “state transition replay” with winning number “16”, “Bonus replay BR1” with winning number “17” , “Replay BR2 during Bonus” with a winning number “18”, “Replay BR3 during Bonus” with a winning number “19”, “Watermelon play” with a winning number “20”, “Weak cherry replay” with a winning number “21”, The “strong cherry replay” with the winning number “22” and the “chance eye replay CR1” with the winning number “23” are not determined as the winning combination.

(First winning combination determination table for second RT gaming state)
Next, the first winning combination determination table for the second RT gaming state will be described based on FIG.

  The first winning combination determination table for the second RT gaming state is stored in the main ROM 302 and is used when determining the winning combination by an internal lottery process described later in the second RT gaming state described later.

  In the first RT combination determination table for the second RT gaming state, the winning number, the contents of the winning number, the lottery value for each set value, and the lottery value of the winning combination corresponding to the winning number are all set common values. Whether or not is specified. Here, in the present embodiment, the first winning combination determination table for the second RT gaming state includes the lottery value when the setting value is “1”, the lottery value when the setting value is “2”, and the setting value. The lottery value when “3”, the lottery value when the setting value is “4”, the lottery value when the setting value is “5”, and the lottery value when the setting value is “6” are defined respectively. Has been. In FIG. 16, the lottery value when the setting value is “2”, the lottery value when the setting value is “3”, the lottery value when the setting value is “4”, and the setting value is “5”. Illustration of lottery values in this case is omitted.

  Further, the first winning combination determination table for the second RT gaming state includes “Bonus rush replay BI1” with the winning number “06”, “Bonus rush replay BI2” with the winning number “07”, and “Bonus rush” with the winning number “08”. A lottery value is defined in “Replay BI3”.

  That is, the lottery value other than these is “0”, and when the lottery is performed using the first RT combination determination table for the second RT gaming state, “preparation state transition replay JR1” with the winning number “01”, “Preparation state transfer replay JR2” with winning number “02”, “Preparation state transfer replay JR3” with winning number “03”, “Preparation state transfer replay JR4” with winning number “04”, “Direct hit” with winning number “05” “Bonus”, “09 Replay AR1” with winning number “09”, “Replay AR2 during ART” with winning number “10”, “Replay AR3 during ART” with winning number “11”, “ART” with winning number “12” “Medium Replay AR4”, “Normal Replay” with Winning Number “13”, “RUSH Replay R1” with Winning Number “14”, “RUSH Replay R2” with Winning Number “15”, Winning "Status transition replay" of issue "16", "Replay BR1 during Bonus" with winning number "17", "Replay during Bonus BR2" with winning number "18", "Replay during Bonus BR3" with winning number "19", Winning number “20” “Watermelon Play”, Winning Number “21” “Weak Cherry Replay”, Winning Number “22” “Strong Cherry Replay”, Winning Number “23” “Chance Eye Replay CR1” Will not be determined as.

(First winning combination determination table for 3RT gaming state)
Next, the first winning combination determination table for the third RT gaming state will be described based on FIG.

  The first winning combination determination table for the third RT gaming state is stored in the main ROM 302 and is used when determining the winning combination by an internal lottery process described later in the third RT gaming state described later.

  In the first RT combination determination table for the 3RT gaming state, the winning number, the contents of the winning number, the lottery value for each set value, and the lottery value of the winning combination corresponding to the winning number are all set common values. Whether or not is specified. Here, in this embodiment, the first winning combination determination table for the 3RT gaming state includes a lottery value when the set value is “1”, a lottery value when the set value is “2”, and the set value is The lottery value when “3”, the lottery value when the setting value is “4”, the lottery value when the setting value is “5”, and the lottery value when the setting value is “6” are defined respectively. Has been. In FIG. 17, the lottery value when the setting value is “2”, the lottery value when the setting value is “3”, the lottery value when the setting value is “4”, and the setting value is “5”. Illustration of lottery values in this case is omitted.

  The first RT combination determination table for the 3RT gaming state includes “normal replay” with a winning number “13”, “state transition replay” with a winning number “16”, and “Bonus replay BR1” with a winning number “17”. , “Replay BR2 during Bonus” with a winning number “18”, “Replay BR3 during Bonus” with a winning number “19”, “Watermelon play” with a winning number “20”, “Weak cherry replay” with a winning number “21”, A lottery value is defined for “strong cherry replay” with a winning number “22” and “chance eye replay CR1” with a winning number “23”.

  That is, the lottery value other than these is “0”, and when the lottery is performed using the first winning combination determination table for the 3RT gaming state, “preparation state transition replay JR1” with the winning number “01”, “Preparation state transfer replay JR2” with winning number “02”, “Preparation state transfer replay JR3” with winning number “03”, “Preparation state transfer replay JR4” with winning number “04”, “Direct hit” with winning number “05” “Bonus”, “Bonus rush replay BI1” with winning number “06”, “Bonus rush replay BI2” with winning number “07”, “Bonus rush replay BI3” with winning number “08”, “ART” with winning number “09” “Replay AR1”, “Replay AR2 during ART” with winning number “10”, “Replay AR3 during ART” with winning number “11”, and “12” as winning number ART during the replay AR4 "," RUSH replay R1 "winning numbers" 14 "," RUSH replay R2 of the winning number "15" ", will not be determined as a winning combination.

(First winning combination determination table for 4RT gaming state)
Next, the first winning combination determination table for the fourth RT gaming state will be described based on FIG.

  The first winning combination determination table for the fourth RT gaming state is stored in the main ROM 302 and is used when determining the winning combination by an internal lottery process described later in the fourth RT gaming state described later.

  In the first RT winning state determination table for the 4RT gaming state, the winning number, the contents of the winning number, the lottery value for each set value, and the lottery value of the winning combination corresponding to the winning number are all set common values. Whether or not is specified. Here, in the present embodiment, the fourth RT gaming state first winning combination determination table includes a lottery value when the setting value is “1”, a lottery value when the setting value is “2”, and the setting value is The lottery value when “3”, the lottery value when the setting value is “4”, the lottery value when the setting value is “5”, and the lottery value when the setting value is “6” are defined respectively. Has been. In FIG. 18, the lottery value when the setting value is “2”, the lottery value when the setting value is “3”, the lottery value when the setting value is “4”, and the setting value is “5”. Illustration of lottery values in this case is omitted.

  In addition, the first winning combination determination table for the 4RT gaming state includes “Replay AR1 during ART” with a winning number “09”, “Replay AR2 during ART” with a winning number “10”, “During ART” with a winning number “11”. “Replay AR3”, “Replay AR4 during ART” with winning number “12”, “Normal replay” with winning number “13”, “Watermelon play” with winning number “20”, “Weak cherry replay” with winning number “21” A lottery value is defined for “strong cherry replay” with a winning number “22” and “chance eye replay CR1” with a winning number “23”.

  That is, the lottery value other than these is “0”, and when the lottery is performed using the first winning combination determination table for the 4RT gaming state, “preparation state transition replay JR1” with the winning number “01”, “Preparation state transfer replay JR2” with winning number “02”, “Preparation state transfer replay JR3” with winning number “03”, “Preparation state transfer replay JR4” with winning number “04”, “Direct hit” with winning number “05” “Bonus”, “Bonus rush replay BI1” with winning number “06”, “Bonus rush replay BI2” with winning number “07”, “Bonus rush replay BI3” with winning number “08”, “RUSH” with winning number “14” “Replay R1”, “RUSH Replay R2” with a winning number “15”, “State Transition Replay” with a winning number “16”, “Bonu” with a winning number “17” Medium replay BR1 "," Bonus in the Replay BR2 of the winning number "18" ", will not be determined as the" Bonus in the Replay BR3 "is the winning combination of winning numbers" 19 ".

(First winning combination determination table for the 5th RT gaming state)
Next, the first winning combination determination table for the fifth RT gaming state will be described based on FIG.

  The first winning combination determination table for the fifth RT gaming state is stored in the main ROM 302, and is used when determining the winning combination by an internal lottery process described later in the fifth RT gaming state described later.

  In the first RT combination table for the 5RT gaming state, the winning number, the contents of the winning number, the lottery value for each set value, and the lottery value of the winning combination corresponding to the winning number are all set common values. Whether or not is specified. Here, in the present embodiment, the first winning combination determination table for the fifth RT gaming state includes the lottery value when the setting value is “1”, the lottery value when the setting value is “2”, and the setting value. The lottery value when “3”, the lottery value when the setting value is “4”, the lottery value when the setting value is “5”, and the lottery value when the setting value is “6” are defined respectively. Has been. In FIG. 19, the lottery value when the setting value is “2”, the lottery value when the setting value is “3”, the lottery value when the setting value is “4”, and the setting value is “5”. Illustration of lottery values in this case is omitted.

  Further, the first RT combination table for the 5RT gaming state includes “RUSH replay R1” with a winning number “14”, “RUSH replay R2” with a winning number “15”, “Watermelon play” with a winning number “20”, Lottery values are defined for “weak cherry replay” with winning number “21”, “strong cherry replay” with winning number “22”, and “chance eye replay CR1” with winning number “23”.

  That is, the lottery value other than these is “0”, and when the lottery is performed using the first RT combination determination table for the fifth RT gaming state, “preparation state transition replay JR1” with the winning number “01” “Preparation state transfer replay JR2” with winning number “02”, “Preparation state transfer replay JR3” with winning number “03”, “Preparation state transfer replay JR4” with winning number “04”, “Direct hit” with winning number “05” “Bonus”, “Bonus rush replay BI1” with winning number “06”, “Bonus rush replay BI2” with winning number “07”, “Bonus rush replay BI3” with winning number “08”, “ART” with winning number “09” “Replay AR1”, “Replay AR2 during ART” with winning number “10”, “Replay AR3 during ART” with winning number “11”, and “12” as winning number "Replay AR4 during ART", "Normal replay" with winning number "13", "Status transition replay" with winning number "16", "Replay BR1 during Bonus" with winning number "17", "Bonus" with winning number "18" “Replay BR2” and “Bonus Replay BR3” with the winning number “19” are not determined as the winning combination.

(First winning combination determination table for 6RT gaming state)
Next, the first winning combination determination table for the sixth RT gaming state will be described based on FIG.

  The first winning combination determination table for the sixth RT gaming state is stored in the main ROM 302, and is used when determining the winning combination by the internal lottery process described later in the sixth RT gaming state described later.

  Further, in the first RT combination determination table for the 6RT gaming state, the winning number, the contents of the winning number, the lottery value for each setting value, and the lottery value of the winning combination corresponding to the winning number are all set common values. Whether or not is specified. Here, in the present embodiment, the sixth RT gaming state first winning combination determination table includes the lottery value when the set value is “1”, the lottery value when the set value is “2”, and the set value. The lottery value when “3”, the lottery value when the setting value is “4”, the lottery value when the setting value is “5”, and the lottery value when the setting value is “6” are defined respectively. Has been. In FIG. 20, the lottery value when the setting value is “2”, the lottery value when the setting value is “3”, the lottery value when the setting value is “4”, and the setting value is “5”. Illustration of lottery values in this case is omitted.

  In addition, the first winning combination determination table for the 6RT gaming state includes “Replay AR1 during ART” with a winning number “09”, “Replay AR2 during ART” with a winning number “10”, “During ART” with a winning number “11”. A lottery value is defined for “Replay AR3” and winning number “12” “Replay AR4 during ART”.

  That is, the lottery value other than these is “0”, and when the lottery is performed using the first RT combination determination table for the fifth RT gaming state, “preparation state transition replay JR1” with the winning number “01” “Preparation state transfer replay JR2” with winning number “02”, “Preparation state transfer replay JR3” with winning number “03”, “Preparation state transfer replay JR4” with winning number “04”, “Direct hit” with winning number “05” “Bonus”, “Bonus rush replay BI1” with winning number “06”, “Bonus rush replay BI2” with winning number “07”, “Bonus rush replay BI3” with winning number “08”, “Normal” with winning number “13” "Replay", "RUSH replay R1" with winning number "14", "RUSH replay R2" with winning number "15", "Status transition rep" with winning number "16" "Bonus replay BR1" with winning number "17", "Replay BR2 with Bonus" with winning number "18", "Replay BR3 in Bonus" with winning number "19", "Watermelon with winning number" 20 " “Replay”, “weak cherry replay” with a winning number “21”, “strong cherry replay” with a winning number “22”, and “chance eye replay CR1” with a winning number “23” are not determined as winning combinations.

  The first winning combination determination table for the non-RT gaming state, the first winning combination determination table for the first RT gaming state, the first winning combination determination table for the second RT gaming state, the first winning combination determination table for the third RT gaming state, The first winning combination determination table for the fourth RT gaming state, the first winning combination determination table for the fifth RT gaming state, and the first winning combination determination table for the sixth RT gaming state are collectively referred to as a “first winning combination determination table”.

  Note that “preparation state transfer replay JR1” with a winning number “01”, “preparation state transfer replay JR2” with a winning number “02”, “preparation state transfer replay JR3” with a winning number “03”, and a winning number “ 04 ”“ preparation state transition replay JR4 ”is collectively referred to as“ preparation state transition replay ”.

  Also, “Bonus rush replay BI1” with winning number “06”, “Bonus rush replay BI2” with winning number “07”, and “Bonus rush replay BI3” with winning number “08” are collectively referred to as “Bonus rush replay BI3”. "

  Also, the winning number “09” “ART replay AR1”, the winning number “10” “ART replay AR2”, the winning number “11” “ART replay AR3”, and the winning number “12”. “Replay during ART AR4” is collectively referred to as “replay during ART”.

  The winning number “14” “RUSH replay R1” and the winning number “15” “RUSH replay R2” are collectively referred to as “RUSH replay”.

  Also, “Replay BR1 during Bonus” with the winning number “17”, “Replay BR2 during Bonus” with the winning number “18”, and “Replay BR3 during Bonus” with the winning number “19” are collectively referred to as “Replay during Bonus”. "

  Also, “weak cherry replay” with a winning number “21” and “strong cherry replay” with a winning number “22” are collectively referred to as “cherry replay”.

(Second winning combination determination table)
Next, the second winning combination determination table will be described based on FIG.

  The second winning combination determination table is stored in the main ROM 302, and will be described later in a non-RT gaming state, a first RT gaming state, a second RT gaming state, a third RT gaming state, a fourth RT gaming state, a fifth RT gaming state, and a sixth RT. This is used when a winning combination is determined by an internal lottery process described later in the gaming state.

  Similarly to the first winning combination determination table, the second winning combination determination table includes all the winning numbers, the contents of the winning numbers, the lottery values for each set value, and the lottery values of the winning combinations corresponding to the winning numbers. Whether the value is a common setting value is defined. Here, in the present embodiment, the second winning combination determination table includes a lottery value when the setting value is “1”, a lottery value when the setting value is “2”, and a case where the setting value is “3”. The lottery value, the lottery value when the set value is “4”, the lottery value when the set value is “5”, and the lottery value when the set value is “6” are respectively defined. In FIG. 21, a lottery value when the setting value is “2”, a lottery value when the setting value is “3”, a lottery value when the setting value is “4”, and the setting value is “5”. Illustration of lottery values in this case is omitted.

  Further, the second winning combination determination table includes “chance eye replay CR2” with a winning number “24”, “watermelon” with a winning number “25”, “weak cherry” with a winning number “26”, and a winning number “27”. “Strong Cherry”, “Middle Cherry” with Winning Number “28”, “Chance Eye CN1” with Winning Number “29”, “Chance Eye CN2” with Winning Number “30”, “Common Bell” with Winning Number “31” , “Push Order Bell A1” with a winning number “32”, “Push Order Bell B1” with a winning number “33”, “Push Order Bell A2” with a winning number “34”, “Push Order Bell” with a winning number “35”. “B2”, “Push Order Bell A3” with a winning number “36”, “Push Order Bell B3” with a winning number “37”, “Push Order Bell A4” with a winning number “38”, “Press” A lottery value is defined for “order bell B4”.

  Here, the relationship between the first winning combination determination table and the second winning combination determination table will be described. When a lottery is performed using the first winning combination determination table, the winning combination is determined according to the current gaming state. There are rules regarding winning roles and winning roles that are not determined as winning roles. On the other hand, when a lottery is performed using the second winning combination determination table, a winning combination that can be determined as a winning combination in all game states is defined.

  The “chance eye replay CR1” with the winning number “23” and the “chance eye replay CR2” with the winning number “24” are collectively referred to as “chance eye replay”.

  Also, the “weak cherry” with the winning number “26”, the “strong cherry” with the winning number “27”, and the “middle cherry” with the winning number “28” are collectively referred to as “cherry”.

  The “chance eye CN1” with the winning number “29” and the “chance eye CN2” with the winning number “30” are collectively referred to as “chance eyes”.

  Also, the “common bell” of the winning number “31”, the “push order bell A1” of the winning number “32”, the “push order bell B1” of the winning number “33”, and the “push” of the winning number “34” "Sequence Bell A2", "Push Order Bell B2" with Winning Number "35", "Push Order Bell A3" with Winning Number "36", "Push Order Bell B3" with Winning Number "37", Winning Number The “push order bell A4” of “38” and the “push order bell B4” of the winning number “39” are collectively referred to as “bell”.

  In addition, the “push order bell A1” of the winning number “32”, the “push order bell B1” of the win number “33”, the “push order bell A2” of the win number “34”, and the win number “35”. “Push Order Bell B2”, “Push Order Bell A3” with a winning number “36”, “Push Order Bell B3” with a winning number “37”, “Push Order Bell A4” with a winning number “38”, The “push order bell B4” of the winning number “39” is collectively referred to as “push order bell”.

(Reel lock production lottery table for the first RT gaming state)
Next, the first RT gaming state reel lock effect lottery table will be described with reference to FIG.

  The first RT gaming state reel lock effect lottery table is stored in the main ROM 302 and is used when performing a lottery to determine whether or not to execute the reel lock effect in the first RT gaming state described later.

  In addition, the first RT gaming state reel lock production lottery table defines the production type and the lottery value corresponding to the winning combination. For example, when “direct hit Bonus” with a winning number “05” is determined as a winning combination by an internal lottery process described later, “losing” is determined with a probability of “66/251” and “10/251” It is determined to execute “reel lock SU0” with a probability, to execute “reel lock SU1” with a probability of “10/251”, and to “reel lock SU2” with a probability of “10/251”. It is determined to execute, “Reel lock SU3” is determined to be executed with a probability of “10/251”, “Reel lock SU4” is determined to be executed with a probability of “10/251”, and “ It is determined that “reel lock SU5” is executed with a probability of “10/251” and “long freeze” is executed with a probability of “125/251”.

  Here, “reel lock SU0”, “reel lock SU1”, “reel lock SU2”, “reel lock SU3”, “reel lock SU4”, “reel lock SU5”, “long freeze” will be described below. . In addition, when “losing” is determined as a result of performing lottery using the first RT gaming state reel lock production lottery table, the reel lock production is not executed.

(Reel lock SU0)
In the first RT gaming state described below, when the reel lock SU0 is determined as “direct hit Bonus” with the winning number “05” by the internal lottery process described later, the “chance eye replay CR2” with the winning number “24” is determined. If the winning number “25” “watermelon” is determined, the winning number “26” “weak cherry” is determined, or the winning number “27” “strong cherry” is determined In the case where the “middle cherry” of the winning number “28” is determined, the “chance eye CN1” of the winning number “29” is determined, or the “chance eye CN2” of the winning number “30” is determined This is a reel lock effect that can be determined. Here, in this embodiment, when the main control board 300 determines to execute “reel lock SU0”, the left reel 18, the middle reel 19, and the right reel 20 are reversed in the reverse direction by “1”. Execute the process of rotating only.

  Here, the “reverse direction” means that a symbol visible from the front when the gaming machine 1 is viewed from the front rotates from the lower direction to the upper direction. On the other hand, the “forward direction” means that a symbol that is visible from the front of the gaming machine 1 and visible through the display window 23 rotates from the upper direction to the lower direction.

(Reel lock SU1)
In the first RT gaming state described later, the reel lock SU1 determines “chance eye replay CR2” of the winning number “24” when the “direct hit Bonus” of the winning number “05” is determined by the internal lottery process described later. If the winning number “25” “watermelon” is determined, the winning number “26” “weak cherry” is determined, or the winning number “27” “strong cherry” is determined In the case where the “middle cherry” of the winning number “28” is determined, the “chance eye CN1” of the winning number “29” is determined, or the “chance eye CN2” of the winning number “30” is determined This is a reel lock effect that can be determined. Here, in this embodiment, when the main control board 300 decides to execute “reel lock SU1”, the main control board 300 moves the left reel 18, the middle reel 19, and the right reel 20 in the reverse direction as in the reel lock SU0. The process of rotating the symbol by “1” is executed.

(Reel lock SU2)
In the first RT gaming state, which will be described later, the reel lock SU2 is determined to have a “chance eye replay CR2” with a winning number “24” when a “direct hit Bonus” with a winning number “05” is determined by an internal lottery process described later. If the winning number “25” “watermelon” is determined, the winning number “26” “weak cherry” is determined, or the winning number “27” “strong cherry” is determined In the case where the “middle cherry” of the winning number “28” is determined, the “chance eye CN1” of the winning number “29” is determined, or the “chance eye CN2” of the winning number “30” is determined This is a reel lock effect that can be determined. Here, in this embodiment, when the main control board 300 determines to execute “reel lock SU2”, the left reel 18, the middle reel 19, and the right reel 20 are reversed by “1” in the reverse direction. After a predetermined time has elapsed, the left reel 18, the middle reel 19, and the right reel 20 are further rotated in the reverse direction by “1” symbols. Accordingly, the main control board 300 performs a process of rotating the left reel 18, the middle reel 19, and the right reel 20 in the reverse direction by “2” symbols.

(Reel lock SU3)
In the first RT gaming state, which will be described later, the reel lock SU3 is determined to have a “chance eye replay CR2” having a winning number “24” when a “direct hit Bonus” having a winning number “05” is determined by an internal lottery process described later. If the winning number “25” “watermelon” is determined, the winning number “26” “weak cherry” is determined, or the winning number “27” “strong cherry” is determined In the case where the “middle cherry” of the winning number “28” is determined, the “chance eye CN1” of the winning number “29” is determined, or the “chance eye CN2” of the winning number “30” is determined This is a reel lock effect that can be determined. Here, in this embodiment, when the main control board 300 decides to execute “reel lock SU3”, the left reel 18, the middle reel 19, and the right reel 20 are reversed by “1” in the reverse direction. After the predetermined time has elapsed, the left reel 18, the middle reel 19, and the right reel 20 are further rotated in the opposite direction by "1" symbols, and after the predetermined time has elapsed, the left reel 18, the middle reel 19. A process of further rotating the right reel 20 in the reverse direction by “1” symbols is executed. Therefore, the main control board 300 performs a process of rotating the left reel 18, the middle reel 19, and the right reel 20 in the reverse direction by “3” symbols.

(Reel lock SU4)
In the first RT gaming state, which will be described later, the reel lock SU4 is determined to have a “chance eye replay CR2” having a winning number “24” when a “direct hit Bonus” having a winning number “05” is determined by an internal lottery process described later. When the winning number “27” “strong cherry” is determined, when the winning number “28” “middle cherry” is determined, the winning number “29” “chance eye CN1” is determined. In this case, the reel lock effect can be determined when the “chance eye CN2” of the winning number “30” is determined. Here, in this embodiment, when the main control board 300 decides to execute “reel lock SU4”, the left reel 18, the middle reel 19, and the right reel 20 are reversed by “1” in the reverse direction. After the predetermined time has elapsed, the left reel 18, the middle reel 19, and the right reel 20 are further rotated in the opposite direction by "1" symbols, and after the predetermined time has elapsed, the left reel 18, the middle reel 19, the right reel 20 is further rotated in the reverse direction by “1” symbols, and after a predetermined time has elapsed, the left reel 18, the middle reel 19, and the right reel 20 are further rotated in the reverse direction by “1” symbols. Execute the process to rotate. Therefore, the main control board 300 performs a process of rotating the left reel 18, the middle reel 19, and the right reel 20 in the reverse direction by “4” symbols.

(Reel lock SU5)
In the first RT gaming state, which will be described later, the reel lock SU5 is determined to have a “direct hit Bonus” having a winning number “05” by an internal lottery process, which will be described later, and a “middle stage cherry” having a winning number “28” is determined. This is a reel lock effect that can be determined in some cases. Here, in this embodiment, when the main control board 300 decides to execute “reel lock SU5”, the left reel 18, the middle reel 19, and the right reel 20 are reversed in the opposite direction by “1”. After the predetermined time has elapsed, the left reel 18, the middle reel 19, and the right reel 20 are further rotated in the opposite direction by "1" symbols, and after the predetermined time has elapsed, the left reel 18, the middle reel 19, the right reel 20 is further rotated in the reverse direction by “1” symbols, and after a predetermined time has elapsed, the left reel 18, the middle reel 19, and the right reel 20 are further rotated in the reverse direction by “1” symbols. After a predetermined time has elapsed, the left reel 18, the middle reel 19, and the right reel 20 are further rotated in the reverse direction by “1” symbols. Therefore, the main control board 300 performs a process of rotating the left reel 18, the middle reel 19, and the right reel 20 in the reverse direction by “5” symbols.

(Long freeze)
The long freeze is a reel lock effect that can be determined when “direct hit Bonus” of the winning number “05” is determined by an internal lottery process described later in the first RT gaming state described later. Here, in this embodiment, when the main control board 300 decides to execute “long freeze”, the main control board 300 performs a process of rotating the left reel 18, the middle reel 19, and the right reel 20 in the reverse direction for a predetermined time. To do.

(3rd gaming state reel lock production lottery table)
Next, the third RT gaming state reel lock effect lottery table will be described with reference to FIG.

  The 3RT gaming state reel lock effect lottery table is stored in the main ROM 302, and is used when performing a lottery on whether or not to execute the reel lock effect in the third RT gaming state described later. Here, the reel lock effect lottery table for the 3RT gaming state includes “reel lock BRE1”, “reel lock BRE2”, “reel lock BRE2” according to “first level”, “second level”, and “third level” described later. Lottery values for “reel lock BRE3” and “reel lock BRE4” are defined. For example, in the case of “first level”, the loss is determined with a probability of “1/251”, “reel lock BRE1” is determined with the probability of “201/251”, and the probability of “39/251” "Reel lock BRE2" is determined, "Reel lock BRE3" is determined with a probability of "9/251", and "Reel lock BRE4" is determined with a probability of "1/251".

  Here, “reel lock effect BRE1”, “reel lock effect BRE2”, “reel lock effect BRE3”, and “reel lock effect BRE4” will be described below. Note that, when “losing” is determined as a result of performing the lottery using the third RT gaming state reel lock production lottery table, the reel lock production is not executed.

(Reel lock production BRE1)
In the 3rd RT gaming state described later, the reel lock effect BRE1 is determined to be “Replay BR1 during Bonus” with a winning number “17” or “Replay BR2 during Bonus” with a winning number “18” by an internal lottery process described later. This is a reel lock effect that can be determined if Here, in this embodiment, when the main control board 300 decides to execute “reel lock effect BRE1”, the main control board 300 rotates the left reel 18 in the reverse direction for a predetermined time, and then the left reel 18 and the middle reel. 19. A process of rotating the right reel 20 in the forward direction is executed.

(Reel lock production BRE2)
The reel lock effect BRE2 is determined to be “Replay BR1 during Bonus” with the winning number “17” or “Replay BR2 during Bonus” with the winning number “18” by the internal lottery process described later in the third RT gaming state described later. This is a reel lock effect that can be determined if Here, in this embodiment, when it is determined that the “reel lock effect BRE2” is to be executed, the main control board 300 first rotates the left reel 18 in the reverse direction for a predetermined time, and then the middle reel 19 Is rotated in the reverse direction for a predetermined time, and then the left reel 18, the middle reel 19, and the right reel 20 are rotated in the forward direction.

(Reel lock production BRE3)
In the 3rd RT gaming state described later, the reel lock effect BRE3 is determined to be “Replay BR1 during Bonus” with a winning number “17” or “Replay BR2 during Bonus” with a winning number “18” by an internal lottery process described later. This is a reel lock effect that can be determined if Here, in this embodiment, when it is determined that the “reel lock effect BRE3” is to be executed, the main control board 300 first rotates the left reel 18 in the reverse direction for a predetermined time, and then the middle reel 19 Is rotated in the reverse direction for a predetermined time, and then the right reel 20 is rotated in the reverse direction for a predetermined time, and then the left reel 18, the middle reel 19 and the right reel 20 are rotated in the forward direction.

(Reel lock production BRE4)
In the 3rd RT gaming state described later, the reel lock effect BRE4 is determined as “Replay BR1 during Bonus” with a winning number “17” or “Replay BR2 during Bonus” with a winning number “18” by an internal lottery process described later. This is a reel lock effect that can be determined if Here, in this embodiment, when the main control board 300 decides to execute “reel lock effect BRE4”, first, the left reel 18 is rotated in the reverse direction for a predetermined time, and then the middle reel 19 Is rotated in the reverse direction for a predetermined time, and then the right reel 20 is rotated in the reverse direction for a predetermined time, and then the left reel 18, the middle reel 19, and the right reel 20 are rotated in the reverse direction for a predetermined time, and then the left reel 18. A process of rotating the middle reel 19 and the right reel 20 in the forward direction for a predetermined time is executed.

(4th gaming state reel lock production lottery table)
Next, the fourth RT gaming state reel lock effect lottery table will be described with reference to FIG.

  The reel lock effect lottery table for the fourth RT gaming state is stored in the main ROM 302, and is used when performing a lottery to determine whether or not to execute the reel lock effect in the fourth RT gaming state described later.

  Further, in the fourth RT gaming state reel lock effect lottery table, the effect type and the lottery value corresponding to the winning combination are defined, similarly to the first RT gaming state reel lock effect lottery table. For example, when “chance eye replay CR2” of the winning number “24” is determined as a winning combination by an internal lottery process described later, “losing” is determined with a probability of “186/251” and “13/251” "Reel Lock SU0" is determined to be executed with a probability of "13/251" and "Reel Lock SU1" is determined to be executed with a probability of "13/251". "Reel Lock SU3" is determined to be executed with a probability of "13/251", and "Reel Lock SU4" is determined to be executed with a probability of "13/251". The Note that, when “chance eye replay CR2” with a winning number “24” is determined as a winning combination by an internal lottery process described later, it is not determined to execute “reel lock SU5”.

  Unlike the first RT gaming state reel lock effect lottery table, the fourth RT gaming state reel lock effect lottery table does not define a lottery value corresponding to “long freeze”. Accordingly, in the fourth RT gaming state, “long freeze” is not determined. It should be noted that the reel lock effect is not executed when “losing” is determined as a result of the lottery using the 4RT gaming state reel lock effect lottery table.

  Note that the reel lock SU0, reel lock SU1, reel lock SU2, reel lock SU3, reel lock SU4, reel lock SU5, long freeze, reel lock effect BRE1, reel lock effect BRE2, reel lock effect BRE3, reel shown above. The lock effect BRE4 constitutes the second spinning effect in the present invention. The second spinning effect may be described as “reel lock effect” in the following description.

(Rotating stage lottery table for the first RT gaming state)
Next, the first RT gaming state spinning effect lottery table will be described with reference to FIG.

  The first RT gaming state spinning effect lottery table is stored in the main ROM 302, and is used when performing a lottery on whether or not to execute the spinning effect in the first RT gaming state described later. Here, in the first RT gaming state, “rotation effect RE1”, “rotation effect RE2”, and “rotation effect RE3” can be determined.

  In addition, the first RT gaming state spinning effect lottery table defines an effect type and a lottery value corresponding to the winning combination. For example, when “chance eye replay CR2” with a winning number “24” is determined as a winning combination by an internal lottery process described later, “losing” is determined with a probability of “241/251” and “10/251” It is determined that the “rotor effect RE3” is executed with a probability of “. When “chance eye replay CR2” with a winning number “24” is determined as a winning combination by an internal lottery process to be described later, the “rotation effect RE1” is executed and the “rotation effect RE2” is executed. It is not determined to execute. In addition, when “losing” is determined as a result of performing the lottery using the first RT gaming state spinning effect lottery table, the spinning effect is not executed.

  Here, the “rotation effect RE1”, “rotation effect RE2”, and “rotation effect RE3” will be described below.

(Cylinder effect RE1)
The spinning effect RE1 is a spinning effect that can be determined when a “weak cherry” with a winning number “26” is determined by an internal lottery process described later in the first RT gaming state described later. Here, in the present embodiment, the main control board 300 determines to execute the “rotation effect RE1”, and when the symbol combination related to “weak cherry” is displayed on the active line, The right reel 20 is rotated before the left reel 18, the middle reel 19 and the right reel 20 of the game are rotated, and a process of temporarily stopping with a combination of symbols related to “strong cherry” is performed. Then, the rotation of the left reel 18, the middle reel 19, and the right reel 20 is started after a predetermined time has elapsed since the combination of symbols related to “strong cherry” is displayed.

  On the other hand, when the main control board 300 decides to execute the “rotor effect RE1” and the symbol combination related to “weak cherry” is not displayed on the active line, the left reel of the next game is displayed. 18, before the rotation of the middle reel 19 and the right reel 20 is started, the right reel 20 is rotated, and a temporary stop is performed with a predetermined symbol combination. Then, the rotation of the left reel 18, the middle reel 19, and the right reel 20 is started after a predetermined time has elapsed since the temporary stop with a predetermined symbol combination.

  In the present embodiment, the main control board 300 determines to execute the “rotation effect RE1”, and if the symbol combination related to “weak cherry” is not displayed on the active line, The process of temporarily stopping with a combination of predetermined symbols is performed before starting the rotation of the left reel 18, the middle reel 19 and the right reel 20 of this game, but is not limited to this. For example, before the rotation of the left reel 18, the middle reel 19, and the right reel 20 of the next game is started, the left reel 18 and the right reel 20 are rotated, and a temporary stop is performed with a combination of symbols related to “strong cherry”. . Then, the rotation of the left reel 18, the middle reel 19, and the right reel 20 may be started after a predetermined time has elapsed since the combination of symbols related to “strong cherry” is displayed. This makes it difficult for other players to know that the combination of symbols related to “Weak Cherry” could not be displayed on the active line, so even beginners unfamiliar with games actively It becomes easier to play games.

(Cylinder effect RE2)
The spinning effect RE2 is a spinning effect that can be determined when the “watermelon” of the winning number “25” is determined by the internal lottery process described later in the first RT gaming state described later. Here, in the present embodiment, the main control board 300 decides to execute the “rotating effect RE2”, and the combination of symbols related to the “right-up watermelon” or “right-down watermelon” is on the effective line. When displayed, the left reel 18, the middle reel 19 and the right reel 20 are rotated before the left reel 18, the middle reel 19 and the right reel 20 of the next game start to rotate, and the middle line is associated with "watermelon". A process of temporarily stopping after aligning the symbols is performed. Then, the rotation of the left reel 18, the middle reel 19, and the right reel 20 is started after a predetermined time has elapsed since the symbols related to “watermelon” are displayed on the middle line.

  On the other hand, the main control board 300 decides to execute the “rotating drum effect RE2”, and the combination of symbols related to “right-up watermelon” or “right-down watermelon” is not displayed on the active line. Similarly, the left reel 18, the middle reel 19, and the right reel 20 are rotated before starting the rotation of the left reel 18, the middle reel 19, and the right reel 20 in the next game, and a process of temporarily stopping with a combination of predetermined symbols is performed. . Then, the rotation of the left reel 18, the middle reel 19, and the right reel 20 is started after a predetermined time has elapsed since the temporary stop with a predetermined symbol combination.

  In the present embodiment, the main control board 300 determines to execute the “rotor effect RE2”, and when the symbol combination related to “watermelon” is not displayed on the active line, A process of temporarily stopping with a combination of predetermined symbols is performed before the rotation of the left reel 18, the middle reel 19, and the right reel 20 of the game is started. However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the left reel 18, the middle reel 19 and the right reel 20 are rotated before the rotation of the left reel 18, the middle reel 19 and the right reel 20 in the next game, and the “watermelon” symbols are aligned at the middle stage to temporarily stop. Perform the process. The rotation of the left reel 18, the middle reel 19, and the right reel 20 may be started after a predetermined time has elapsed since the symbols related to “watermelon” are aligned at the middle stage and temporarily stopped. This makes it difficult for other players to know that the combination of symbols related to "watermelon" could not be displayed on the active line, so even beginners unfamiliar with games actively It becomes easy to do.

(Cylinder effect RE3)
In the first RT gaming state, which will be described later, when the “chance eye replay CR2” with the winning number “24” is determined in the first RT gaming state, which is described later, the “strong cherry” with the winning number “27” is displayed. This is a spinning effect that can be determined when the “chance eye CN1” with the winning number “29” is determined, or when the “chance eye CN2” with the winning number “30” is determined. Here, in the present embodiment, the main control board 300 decides to execute the “rotation effect RE3”. For example, when a combination of symbols related to “strong cherry” is displayed on the effective line, The process of rotating the left reel 18, the middle reel 19 and the right reel 20 before starting the rotation of the left reel 18, the middle reel 19 and the right reel 20 of the next game and displaying the symbol combination relating to “strong cherry” again. I do. Then, the rotation of the left reel 18, the middle reel 19, and the right reel 20 is started after a predetermined time has elapsed since the symbol relating to “strong cherry” is displayed again.

  On the other hand, the main control board 300 decides to execute the “rotation effect RE3”. For example, when the symbol combination related to “strong cherry” is not displayed on the active line, the main game board 300 Before the left reel 18, the middle reel 19, and the right reel 20 start to rotate, the left reel 18, the middle reel 19, and the right reel 20 are rotated, and a combination of symbols stopped in the previous game is displayed. Then, rotation of the left reel 18, the middle reel 19, and the right reel 20 is started after a predetermined time has elapsed since the combination of symbols stopped in the previous game is displayed.

  In the present embodiment, the main control board 300 determines that the “rotation effect RE3” is to be executed, and when the symbol combination related to “strong cherry” is not displayed on the active line, The process of temporarily stopping with the combination of symbols stopped in the previous game before the rotation of the left reel 18, the middle reel 19, and the right reel 20 of the game is performed is not limited to this. For example, the left reel 18, the middle reel 19, and the right reel 20 are rotated before the left reel 18, the middle reel 19, and the right reel 20 of the next game start to rotate, and temporarily stop with a combination of symbols related to “strong cherry”. Process. The rotation of the left reel 18, the middle reel 19, and the right reel 20 may be started after a predetermined time has elapsed since the symbols related to “strong cherry” are aligned at the middle stage and temporarily stopped. Thus, the player can recognize that “strong cherry” has been won and the spinning effect RE3 has been executed.

(4th gaming state spinning effect lottery table)
Next, based on FIG. 26, the 4RT gaming state spinning effect lottery table will be described.

  The fourth RT gaming state spinning effect lottery table is stored in the main ROM 302 and is used when performing a lottery to determine whether or not to execute the spinning effect in the fourth RT gaming state described later. Here, in the fourth RT gaming state, similarly to the first RT gaming state, “rotation effect RE1”, “rotation effect RE2”, and “rotation effect RE3” can be determined.

  In addition, in the fourth RT gaming state spinning effect lottery table, the production type and the lottery value corresponding to the winning combination are defined. For example, in the case where “success play” with a winning number “20” is determined as a winning combination by an internal lottery process described later, “losing” is determined with a probability of “239/251” and “12/251” It is decided to execute the “rotor effect RE2” with probability. In addition, when “Watermelon Play” with a winning number “20” is determined as a winning combination by an internal lottery process described later, “Rotating effect RE1” is executed and “Rotating effect RE3” is executed. It is never decided to do. In addition, when “losing” is determined as a result of performing lottery using the fourth RT gaming state spinning effect lottery table, the spinning effect is not executed.

(Circulation effect lottery table for 5th gaming state)
Next, based on FIG. 27, the fifth RT gaming state spinning effect lottery table will be described.

  The fifth RT gaming state spinning effect lottery table is stored in the main ROM 302 and is used when performing a lottery on whether or not to execute the spinning effect in the fifth RT gaming state described later. Here, in the fifth RT gaming state, as in the first RT gaming state and the fourth RT gaming state, “rotation effect RE1”, “rotation effect RE2”, and “rotation effect RE3” may be determined. On the other hand, in the fifth RT gaming state, unlike the first RT gaming state and the fourth RT gaming state, the “rotation effect RE4”, the “rotation effect RE5”, the “rotation effect RE6”, and the “rotation effect RE7”. "Rotating effect RE8", "Rotating effect RE9", "Rotating effect RE10", "Rotating effect RE11", "Rotating effect RE12", "Rotating effect RE13", "Rotating effect RE14", “Rotation effect RE15”, “Rotation effect RE16”, “Rotation effect RE17”, “Rotation effect RE18”, “Rotation effect RE19”, and “Rotation effect RE20” may be determined.

  In addition, in the fifth RT gaming state spinning effect lottery table, the production type and the lottery value corresponding to the winning combination are defined. For example, when “RUSH replay R1” with a winning number “15” is determined as a winning combination by an internal lottery process described later, “losing” is determined with a probability of “250/251” and “1/251”. It is determined to execute the “rotor effect RE4” with the probability of In addition, when “RUSH replay R1” with the winning number “15” is determined as a winning combination by an internal lottery process to be described later, the “rotation effect RE1” is executed and the “rotation effect RE2” is executed. Performing "rotation effect RE3", executing "rotation effect RE5", executing "rotation effect RE6", executing "rotation effect RE7", "rotating effect" Execute effect RE8, execute "rotator effect RE9", execute "rotator effect RE10", execute "rotator effect RE11", execute "rotator effect RE12" , Executing “rotation effect RE13”, executing “rotation effect RE14”, executing “rotation effect RE15”, executing “rotation effect RE16”, “rotation effect” Execute "RE17" To run the "reel-performance RE18", to perform the "reel-performance RE19" and will not be decided to perform a "reel-director RE20". Note that, when “losing” is determined as a result of lottery using the fifth RT gaming state spinning effect lottery table, the spinning effect is not executed.

  Here, “rotation effect RE4”, “rotation effect RE5”, “rotation effect RE6”, “rotation effect RE7”, “rotation effect RE8”, “rotation effect RE9” not described above. "Rotating effect RE10", "Rotating effect RE11", "Rotating effect RE12", "Rotating effect RE13", "Rotating effect RE14", "Rotating effect RE15", "Rotating effect RE16", The “rotation effect RE17”, “rotation effect RE18”, “rotation effect RE19”, and “rotation effect RE20” will be described.

(Cylinder effect RE4)
When the “RUSH replay R1” with the winning number “14” is determined by the internal lottery process to be described later, the “RUSH replay R2” with the winning number “15” is determined for the spinning effect RE4. If it is determined, if “winning play” of the winning number “20” is determined, if “weak cherry replay” of the winning number “21” is determined, “strong cherry replay” of the winning number “22” is determined. If it is determined, “Chance Eye Replay CR1” with the winning number “23” is determined, “Chance Eye Replay CR2” with the winning number “24” is determined, and “Watermelon” with the winning number “25”. Is determined, “weak cherry” with the winning number “26” is determined, “strong cherry” with the winning number “27” is determined, “chan” with the winning number “29” is determined When “CN1” is determined, “Chance Eye CN2” of the winning number “30” is determined, “Common Bell” of the winning number “31” is determined, “Press” of the winning number “32” When “order bell A1” is determined, “push order bell B1” of winning number “33” is determined, “push order bell A2” of winning number “34” is determined, winning number “35” "Push order bell B2" is determined, "push order bell A3" of the winning number "36" is determined, "push order bell B3" of the winning number "37" is determined, This is a spinning effect that can be determined when the “push order bell A4” of the winning number “38” is determined or when the “push order bell B4” of the winning number “39” is determined. Here, in this embodiment, when it is determined that the “rotation effect RE4” is to be executed, the main control board 300 starts to rotate the left reel 18, the middle reel 19 and the right reel 20 of the next game. The left reel 18, the middle reel 19, and the right reel 20 are rotated before, and a process of displaying the symbols related to “blue seven” in alignment is performed. Then, the rotation of the left reel 18, the middle reel 19, and the right reel 20 is started after a predetermined time has elapsed since the symbols related to “Blue Seven” are displayed together.

  In the present embodiment, when the spinning effect RE4 is executed, the state managed by the sub-control board 400 shifts to a third Bonus state described later.

(Cylinder effect RE5)
In the fifth RT gaming state described later, the spinning effect RE5 is set to “strong cherry” with a winning number “27” when “chance eye replay CR2” with a winning number “24” is determined by an internal lottery process described later. This is a spinning effect that can be determined when the “chance eye CN1” with the winning number “29” is determined, or when the “chance eye CN2” with the winning number “30” is determined. Here, in this embodiment, when it is determined that the “rotation effect RE5” is to be executed, the main control board 300 starts to rotate the left reel 18, the middle reel 19 and the right reel 20 of the next game. The left reel 18, the middle reel 19, and the right reel 20 are rotated before, and a process of displaying the symbols related to “blue seven” in alignment is performed. Then, based on the continuation rate determined by the continuation rate determination table (see FIG. 32) described later and the continuation lottery table (see FIG. 33) described later, a lottery is performed as to whether or not to continue the spinning effect RE5. When it is decided to continue the spinning effect RE5, the left reel 18, the middle reel 19, and the right reel 20 are rotated in the reverse direction. On the other hand, when it is decided not to continue the spinning effect RE5, the rotation of the left reel 18, the middle reel 19, and the right reel 20 is started after a predetermined standby time has elapsed.

  Here, in the present embodiment, when the rotation effect RE5 is executed, a random value is extracted based on the detection of the operation of the start lever 10 by the start switch 10sw, and the extracted random value Based on the continuation rate determined by the continuation rate determination table described later (see FIG. 32) and the continuation lottery table described later (see FIG. 33), the lottery to determine whether or not to continue the spinning effect RE5 is performed. However, it is not limited to this. For example, instead of extracting the random number value based on the detection of the operation of the start lever 10 by the start switch 10sw, (a) the random number value based on the detection of the operation of the BET button 7 by the BET switch 7sw. (B) A random value may be extracted based on the detection of the operation of the MAXBET button 8 by the MAXBET switch 8sw, or (c) the checkout button 9 of the checkout button 9 by the checkout switch 9sw. A random number value may be extracted based on the detected operation, or (d) a random number value may be extracted based on the detected operation of the left stop button 11 by the left stop switch 11sw. (E) A random value may be extracted based on the operation of the middle stop button 12 being detected by the middle stop switch 12sw, or (f) A random value may be extracted based on the detection of the operation of the right stop button 13 by the stop switch 13sw, or (g) based on the detection of a normal medal passing by the selector sensor 15s. A random value may be extracted.

(Cylinder effect RE6)
In the fifth RT gaming state, which will be described later, the spinning effect RE6 is obtained when “weak cherry replay” with a winning number “21” is determined by an internal lottery process described later, or “weak cherry” with a winning number “26” is displayed. This is a spinning effect that can be determined when determined. Here, in this embodiment, when it is determined that the “rotation effect RE6” is to be executed, the main control board 300 executes the “rotation effect RE1” and then the “rotation effect RE3”. Perform the process to be executed. Specifically, the main control board 300, when the symbol combination related to “weak cherry” is displayed on the active line in the game in which it is determined to execute the “rotor effect RE6”, The process of displaying the symbol combination related to “strong cherry” by rotating the right reel 20 before starting the rotation of the left reel 18, the middle reel 19 and the right reel 20 of the game and executing the rotation effect RE1. Do. When the operation of the start lever 10 is detected after the rotation effect RE1 is executed, or when a predetermined time has elapsed after the rotation effect RE1 is executed, the left reel 18, the middle reel 19, The right reel 20 is rotated, and a process of displaying the symbol combination related to “strong cherry” again is performed. Then, the rotation of the left reel 18, the middle reel 19, and the right reel 20 is started after a predetermined time has elapsed since the symbol relating to “strong cherry” is displayed again.

(Cylinder effect RE7)
In the fifth RT gaming state, which will be described later, the spinning effect RE7 is obtained when “weak cherry replay” with a winning number “21” is determined by an internal lottery process, which will be described later, or “weak cherry” with a winning number “26”. This is a spinning effect that can be determined when determined. Here, in this embodiment, when it is determined that the “rotation effect RE7” is to be executed, the main control board 300 executes the “rotation effect RE1” and then the “rotation effect RE4”. Perform the process to be executed. Specifically, the main control board 300, when a combination of symbols related to “weak cherry” is displayed on the active line in a game in which it is determined to execute “rotation effect RE7”, Before the left reel 18, the middle reel 19 and the right reel 20 of the game are rotated, the right reel 20 is rotated to display a symbol combination related to “strong cherry”. When the operation of the start lever 10 is detected after the rotation effect RE1 is executed, or when a predetermined time has elapsed after the rotation effect RE1 is executed, the left reel 18, the middle reel 19, The right reel 20 is rotated to perform a process of displaying the symbols related to “Blue Seven” in alignment. Then, the rotation of the left reel 18, the middle reel 19, and the right reel 20 is started after a predetermined time has elapsed since the symbols related to “Blue Seven” are displayed together.

(Cylinder effect RE8)
The spinning effect RE8 is a spinning effect that can be determined when the “weak cherry” of the winning number “26” is determined by the internal lottery process described later in the fifth RT gaming state described later. Here, in this embodiment, when it is determined that the “rotation effect RE8” is to be executed, the main control board 300 executes the “rotation effect RE1” and then the “rotation effect RE5”. Perform the process to be executed. Specifically, the main control board 300, when the combination of symbols related to “weak cherry” is displayed on the active line in the game in which it is determined to execute the “rotor effect RE8”, Before the left reel 18, the middle reel 19 and the right reel 20 of the game are rotated, the right reel 20 is rotated to display a symbol combination related to “strong cherry”. When the operation of the start lever 10 is detected after the rotation effect RE1 is executed, or when a predetermined time has elapsed after the rotation effect RE1 is executed, the left reel 18, the middle reel 19, The right reel 20 is rotated to perform a process of displaying the symbols related to “Blue Seven” in alignment. Then, the left reel 18, the middle reel 19, and the right reel 20 are rotated to perform a process of displaying the symbols related to “blue seven” in alignment, and the continuation rate determined by a continuation rate determination table (see FIG. 32) described later. If the lottery effect RE5 is determined to be continued based on a continuous lottery table (see FIG. 33), which will be described later, and the reeling effect RE5 is determined to be continued, A process of rotating the middle reel 19 and the right reel 20 in the reverse direction is performed. On the other hand, when it is decided not to continue the spinning effect RE5, the rotation of the left reel 18, the middle reel 19, and the right reel 20 is started after a predetermined standby time has elapsed.

(Cylinder effect RE9)
In the fifth RT gaming state described later, the spinning effect RE9 is determined when “watermelon play” with a winning number “20” is determined by an internal lottery process described later, or “watermelon” with a winning number “25” is determined. This is a spinning effect that can be determined if Here, in this embodiment, when it is determined that the “rotation effect RE9” is to be executed, the main control board 300 executes the “rotation effect RE2” and then the “rotation effect RE3”. Perform the process to be executed. Specifically, the main control board 300 determines to execute the “rotating drum effect RE9”, and a combination of symbols related to “right-up watermelon” or “right-down watermelon” is displayed on the active line. In this case, the left reel 18, the middle reel 19 and the right reel 20 are rotated before starting the rotation of the left reel 18, the middle reel 19 and the right reel 20 of the next game, and the pattern related to "watermelon" is aligned on the middle line. Process to display. When the operation of the start lever 10 is detected after the rotation effect RE2 is executed, or when a predetermined time has elapsed since the rotation effect RE2 is executed, the left reel 18, the middle reel 19, The right reel 20 is rotated, and the process of aligning and displaying the symbols related to “watermelon” on the middle line is performed. Then, the rotation of the left reel 18, the middle reel 19, and the right reel 20 is started after a predetermined time has elapsed since the symbols related to "watermelon" are displayed again on the middle line.

(Cylinder effect RE10)
In the fifth RT gaming state described later, the spinning effect RE10 is determined when the “watermelon play” of the winning number “20” is determined by the internal lottery process described later or “watermelon” of the winning number “25” is determined. This is a spinning effect that can be determined if Here, in this embodiment, when it is determined that the “rotation effect RE10” is to be executed, the main control board 300 executes the “rotation effect RE2” and then the “rotation effect RE4”. Perform the process to be executed. Specifically, the main control board 300 determines to execute the “rotating drum effect RE10”, and a combination of symbols related to “right-up watermelon” or “right-down watermelon” is displayed on the active line. In this case, the left reel 18, the middle reel 19 and the right reel 20 are rotated before starting the rotation of the left reel 18, the middle reel 19 and the right reel 20 of the next game, and the pattern related to "watermelon" is aligned on the middle line. Process to display. When the operation of the start lever 10 is detected after the rotation effect RE2 is executed, or when a predetermined time has elapsed since the rotation effect RE2 is executed, the left reel 18, the middle reel 19, The right reel 20 is rotated to perform a process of displaying the symbols related to “Blue Seven” in alignment. Then, the rotation of the left reel 18, the middle reel 19, and the right reel 20 is started after a predetermined time has elapsed since the symbols related to “Blue Seven” are displayed together.

(Cylinder effect RE11)
The spinning effect RE11 is a spinning effect that can be determined when the “watermelon” of the winning number “25” is determined by the internal lottery process described later in the fifth RT gaming state described later. Here, in this embodiment, when it is determined that the “rotation effect RE11” is to be executed, the main control board 300 executes the “rotation effect RE2” and then the “rotation effect RE5”. Perform the process to be executed. Specifically, the main control board 300 decides to execute “rotating drum effect RE11”, and the combination of symbols related to “right-up watermelon” or “right-down watermelon” is displayed on the active line. In this case, the left reel 18, the middle reel 19 and the right reel 20 are rotated before starting the rotation of the left reel 18, the middle reel 19 and the right reel 20 of the next game, and the pattern related to "watermelon" is aligned on the middle line. Process to display. When the operation of the start lever 10 is detected after the rotation effect RE2 is executed, or when a predetermined time has elapsed since the rotation effect RE2 is executed, the left reel 18, the middle reel 19, The right reel 20 is rotated to perform the process of displaying the symbols related to “Blue Seven” in alignment, the continuation rate determined by the continuation rate determination table (see FIG. 32) described later, and the continuation lottery table (FIG. 33) described later. In the case where it is determined whether or not to continue the spinning effect RE5 based on the reference), the left reel 18, the middle reel 19, and the right reel 20 are moved in the reverse direction. The process to rotate is performed. On the other hand, when it is decided not to continue the spinning effect RE5, the rotation of the left reel 18, the middle reel 19, and the right reel 20 is started after a predetermined standby time has elapsed.

(Cylinder effect RE12)
In the fifth RT gaming state, which will be described later, when the “strong cherry replay” of the winning number “22” is determined by the internal lottery process described later, the spinning effect RE12 is “chance eye replay CR1” of the winning number “23”. Is determined, “Chance Eye Replay CR2” of the winning number “24” is determined, “Strong Cherry” of the winning number “27” is determined, “Chance Eye CN1” of the winning number “29” is determined ”Is determined, it is a spinning effect that can be determined when“ Chance Eye CN2 ”of the winning number“ 30 ”is determined. Here, in this embodiment, when it is determined that the “rotation effect RE12” is to be executed, the main control board 300 executes the “rotation effect RE3” and then again the “rotation effect RE3”. Process to execute. Specifically, the main control board 300, for example, decides to execute the spinning effect RE12, and when the combination of symbols related to “strong cherry” is displayed on the active line, the next game Before the rotation of the left reel 18, the middle reel 19, and the right reel 20, the left reel 18, the middle reel 19, and the right reel 20 are rotated, and the symbol combination relating to “strong cherry” is displayed again. When the operation of the start lever 10 is detected after the rotation effect RE3 is executed, or when a predetermined time has elapsed after the rotation effect RE3 is executed, the left reel 18, the middle reel 19, The right reel 20 is rotated, and the symbol combination related to “strong cherry” is displayed again. Then, the rotation of the left reel 18, the middle reel 19, and the right reel 20 is started after a predetermined time has elapsed since the combination of symbols relating to “strong cherry” is displayed again.

(Cylinder effect RE13)
In the fifth RT gaming state, which will be described later, when the “strong cherry replay” of the winning number “22” is determined by the internal lottery process described later, the spinning effect RE13 is “chance eye replay CR1” of the winning number “23”. Is determined, “Chance Eye Replay CR2” of the winning number “24” is determined, “Strong Cherry” of the winning number “27” is determined, “Chance Eye CN1” of the winning number “29” is determined ”Is determined, it is a spinning effect that can be determined when“ Chance Eye CN2 ”of the winning number“ 30 ”is determined. Here, in this embodiment, when it is determined that the “rotation effect RE13” is to be executed, the main control board 300 executes the “rotation effect RE3” and then the “rotation effect RE4”. Perform the process to be executed. Specifically, the main control board 300, for example, decides to execute the spinning effect RE13, and when the combination of symbols related to “strong cherry” is displayed on the active line, the next game Before the rotation of the left reel 18, the middle reel 19, and the right reel 20, the left reel 18, the middle reel 19, and the right reel 20 are rotated, and the symbol combination relating to “strong cherry” is displayed again. When the operation of the start lever 10 is detected after the rotation effect RE3 is executed, or when a predetermined time has elapsed after the rotation effect RE3 is executed, the left reel 18, the middle reel 19, The right reel 20 is rotated to perform a process of displaying the symbols related to “Blue Seven” in alignment. Then, the rotation of the left reel 18, the middle reel 19, and the right reel 20 is started after a predetermined time has elapsed since the symbols related to “Blue Seven” are displayed together.

(Cylinder effect RE14)
In the fifth RT gaming state, which will be described later, when the “strong cherry replay” of the winning number “22” is determined by the internal lottery process described later, the spinning effect RE14 is “chance eye replay CR1” of the winning number “23”. Is determined, “Chance Eye Replay CR2” of the winning number “24” is determined, “Strong Cherry” of the winning number “27” is determined, “Chance Eye CN1” of the winning number “29” is determined ”Is determined, it is a spinning effect that can be determined when“ Chance Eye CN2 ”of the winning number“ 30 ”is determined. Here, in this embodiment, when it is determined that the “rotation effect RE14” is to be executed, the main control board 300 executes the “rotation effect RE3” and then the “rotation effect RE5”. Perform the process to be executed. Specifically, the main control board 300, for example, decides to execute the spinning effect RE14, and when the symbol combination related to “strong cherry” is displayed on the active line, the next game Before the rotation of the left reel 18, the middle reel 19, and the right reel 20, the left reel 18, the middle reel 19, and the right reel 20 are rotated, and the symbol combination relating to “strong cherry” is displayed again. When the operation of the start lever 10 is detected after the rotation effect RE3 is executed, or when a predetermined time has elapsed after the rotation effect RE3 is executed, the left reel 18, the middle reel 19, The right reel 20 is rotated to perform the process of displaying the symbols related to “Blue Seven” in alignment, the continuation rate determined by the continuation rate determination table (see FIG. 32) described later, and the continuation lottery table (see FIG. In the case where it is determined whether or not to continue the spinning effect RE5 based on the reference), the left reel 18, the middle reel 19, and the right reel 20 are moved in the reverse direction. The process to rotate is performed. On the other hand, when it is decided not to continue the spinning effect RE5, the rotation of the left reel 18, the middle reel 19, and the right reel 20 is started after a predetermined standby time has elapsed.

(Cylinder effect RE15)
In the fifth RT gaming state, which will be described later, the spinning effect RE15 is obtained when “weak cherry replay” with a winning number “21” is determined by an internal lottery process, which will be described later, or “weak cherry” with a winning number “26”. This is a spinning effect that can be determined when determined. Here, in the present embodiment, when it is determined that the “rotation effect RE15” is to be executed, the main control board 300 executes the “rotation effect RE1” and the “rotation effect RE3”. After that, a process of executing the “rotor effect RE4” is performed. Specifically, the main control board 300, when a combination of symbols related to “weak cherry” is displayed on the active line in a game in which it is determined to execute the “rotor effect RE15”, Before the left reel 18, the middle reel 19 and the right reel 20 of the game are rotated, the right reel 20 is rotated to display a symbol combination related to “strong cherry”. When the operation of the start lever 10 is detected after the rotation effect RE1 is executed, or when a predetermined time has elapsed after the rotation effect RE1 is executed, the left reel 18, the middle reel 19, The right reel 20 is rotated, and a process of displaying the symbol combination related to “strong cherry” again is performed. When the operation of the start lever 10 is detected after the rotation effect RE3 is executed, or when a predetermined time has elapsed after the rotation effect RE3 is executed, the left reel 18, the middle reel 19, The right reel 20 is rotated to perform a process of displaying the symbols related to “Blue Seven” in alignment. Then, the rotation of the left reel 18, the middle reel 19, and the right reel 20 is started after a predetermined time has elapsed since the symbols related to “Blue Seven” are displayed together.

(Cylinder effect RE16)
In the fifth RT gaming state, which will be described later, the spinning effect RE16 is obtained when “weak cherry replay” with a winning number “21” is determined by an internal lottery process, which will be described later, or “weak cherry” with a winning number “26”. This is a spinning effect that can be determined when determined. Here, in this embodiment, when it is determined that the “rotation effect RE16” is to be executed, the main control board 300 executes the “rotation effect RE1” and the “rotation effect RE3”. After that, a process of executing the “rotor effect RE5” is performed. Specifically, the main control board 300, when a combination of symbols related to “weak cherry” is displayed on the active line in a game in which it is determined to execute the “rotor effect RE16”, Before the left reel 18, the middle reel 19 and the right reel 20 of the game are rotated, the right reel 20 is rotated to display a symbol combination related to “strong cherry”. When the operation of the start lever 10 is detected after the rotation effect RE1 is executed, or when a predetermined time has elapsed after the rotation effect RE1 is executed, the left reel 18, the middle reel 19, The right reel 20 is rotated, and a process of displaying the symbol combination related to “strong cherry” again is performed. When the operation of the start lever 10 is detected after the rotation effect RE3 is executed, or when a predetermined time has elapsed after the rotation effect RE3 is executed, the left reel 18, the middle reel 19, The right reel 20 is rotated to perform the process of displaying the symbols related to “Blue Seven” in alignment, the continuation rate determined by the continuation rate determination table (see FIG. 32) described later, and the continuation lottery table (see FIG. In the case where it is determined whether or not to continue the spinning effect RE5 based on the reference), the left reel 18, the middle reel 19, and the right reel 20 are moved in the reverse direction. The process to rotate is performed. On the other hand, when it is decided not to continue the spinning effect RE5, the rotation of the left reel 18, the middle reel 19, and the right reel 20 is started after a predetermined standby time has elapsed.

(Cylinder effect RE17)
In the fifth RT gaming state described later, the spinning effect RE17 is determined when “watermelon play” with a winning number “20” is determined by an internal lottery process described later, or “watermelon” with a winning number “25” is determined. This is a spinning effect that can be determined if In this embodiment, when it is determined that the “rotation effect RE17” is to be executed, the main control board 300 executes the “rotation effect RE2” and the “rotation effect RE3”. After that, a process of executing the “rotor effect RE4” is performed. Specifically, the main control board 300 determines to execute the “rotating drum effect RE17”, and a combination of symbols related to “right-up watermelon” or “right-down watermelon” is displayed on the active line. In this case, the left reel 18, the middle reel 19 and the right reel 20 are rotated before starting the rotation of the left reel 18, the middle reel 19 and the right reel 20 of the next game, and the pattern related to "watermelon" is aligned on the middle line. Process to display. When the operation of the start lever 10 is detected after the rotation effect RE2 is executed, or when a predetermined time has elapsed since the rotation effect RE2 is executed, the left reel 18, the middle reel 19, The right reel 20 is rotated, and the process of aligning and displaying the symbols related to “watermelon” on the middle line is performed. When the operation of the start lever 10 is detected after the rotation effect RE3 is executed, or when a predetermined time has elapsed after the rotation effect RE3 is executed, the left reel 18, the middle reel 19, The right reel 20 is rotated to perform a process of displaying the symbols related to “Blue Seven” in alignment. Then, the rotation of the left reel 18, the middle reel 19, and the right reel 20 is started after a predetermined time has elapsed since the symbols related to “Blue Seven” are displayed together.

(Cylinder effect RE18)
In the fifth RT gaming state described later, the spinning effect RE18 is determined when “Watermelon Play” with the winning number “20” is determined by the internal lottery process described later, or “Watermelon” with the winning number “25” is determined. This is a spinning effect that can be determined if Here, in this embodiment, when it is determined that the “rotation effect RE18” is to be executed, the main control board 300 executes the “rotation effect RE2” and the “rotation effect RE3”. After that, a process of executing the “rotor effect RE5” is performed. Specifically, the main control board 300 determines to execute the “rotating drum effect RE18”, and a combination of symbols related to “right-up watermelon” or “right-down watermelon” is displayed on the active line. In this case, the left reel 18, the middle reel 19 and the right reel 20 are rotated before starting the rotation of the left reel 18, the middle reel 19 and the right reel 20 of the next game, and the pattern related to "watermelon" is aligned on the middle line. Process to display. When the operation of the start lever 10 is detected after the rotation effect RE2 is executed, or when a predetermined time has elapsed since the rotation effect RE2 is executed, the left reel 18, the middle reel 19, The right reel 20 is rotated, and the process of aligning and displaying the symbols related to “watermelon” on the middle line is performed. When the operation of the start lever 10 is detected after the rotation effect RE3 is executed, or when a predetermined time has elapsed after the rotation effect RE3 is executed, the left reel 18, the middle reel 19, The right reel 20 is rotated to perform the process of displaying the symbols related to “Blue Seven” in alignment, the continuation rate determined by the continuation rate determination table (see FIG. 32) described later, and the continuation lottery table (see FIG. In the case where it is determined whether or not to continue the spinning effect RE5 based on the reference), the left reel 18, the middle reel 19, and the right reel 20 are moved in the reverse direction. The process to rotate is performed. On the other hand, when it is decided not to continue the spinning effect RE5, the rotation of the left reel 18, the middle reel 19, and the right reel 20 is started after a predetermined standby time has elapsed.

(Cylinder effect RE19)
In the fifth RT gaming state, which will be described later, when the “strong cherry replay” of the winning number “22” is determined by the internal lottery process described later, the spinning effect RE19 is “chance eye replay CR1” of the winning number “23”. Is determined, “Chance Eye Replay CR2” of the winning number “24” is determined, “Strong Cherry” of the winning number “27” is determined, “Chance Eye CN1” of the winning number “29” is determined ”Is determined, it is a spinning effect that can be determined when“ Chance Eye CN2 ”of the winning number“ 30 ”is determined. Here, in this embodiment, when it is determined that the “rotation effect RE19” is to be executed, the main control board 300 executes the “rotation effect RE3” and again performs the “rotation effect RE3”. After the execution, a process of executing the “rotor effect RE4” is performed. Specifically, the main control board 300, for example, decides to execute the spinning effect RE19, and when the combination of symbols related to “strong cherry” is displayed on the active line, the next game Before the rotation of the left reel 18, the middle reel 19, and the right reel 20, the left reel 18, the middle reel 19, and the right reel 20 are rotated, and the symbol combination relating to “strong cherry” is displayed again. When the operation of the start lever 10 is detected after the rotation effect RE3 is executed, or when a predetermined time has elapsed after the rotation effect RE3 is executed, the left reel 18, the middle reel 19, The right reel 20 is rotated, and the symbol combination related to “strong cherry” is displayed again. When the operation of the start lever 10 is detected after the rotation effect RE3 is executed again, or when a predetermined time has elapsed after the rotation effect RE3 is executed again, the left reel 18 and the middle reel. 19. Rotate the right reel 20 to perform a process of displaying the symbols related to “Blue Seven” in alignment. Then, the rotation of the left reel 18, the middle reel 19, and the right reel 20 is started after a predetermined time has elapsed since the symbols related to “Blue Seven” are displayed together.

(Cylinder effect RE20)
In the fifth RT gaming state, which will be described later, when the “strong cherry replay” of the winning number “22” is determined by the internal lottery process described later, the spinning effect RE20 is “chance eye replay CR1” of the winning number “23”. Is determined, “Chance Eye Replay CR2” of the winning number “24” is determined, “Strong Cherry” of the winning number “27” is determined, “Middle Cherry” of the winning number “28” This is a spinning effect that can be determined when the “chance eye CN1” of the winning number “29” is determined, or when the “chance eye CN2” of the winning number “30” is determined. Here, in this embodiment, when it is determined that the “rotation effect RE20” is to be executed, the main control board 300 executes the “rotation effect RE3” and again performs the “rotation effect RE3”. After the execution, a process of executing the “rotor effect RE5” is performed. Specifically, the main control board 300, for example, decides to execute the spinning effect RE20, and when the symbol combination related to “strong cherry” is displayed on the active line, the next game Before the rotation of the left reel 18, the middle reel 19, and the right reel 20, the left reel 18, the middle reel 19, and the right reel 20 are rotated, and the symbol combination relating to “strong cherry” is displayed again. When the operation of the start lever 10 is detected after the rotation effect RE3 is executed, or when a predetermined time has elapsed after the rotation effect RE3 is executed, the left reel 18, the middle reel 19, The right reel 20 is rotated, and a process of displaying the symbol combination related to “strong cherry” again is performed. When the operation of the start lever 10 is detected after the rotation effect RE3 is executed again, or when a predetermined time has elapsed after the rotation effect RE3 is executed again, the left reel 18 and the middle reel. 19. Rotate the right reel 20 to perform the process of aligning and displaying the symbols related to “Blue Seven”, the continuation rate determined by the continuation rate determination table (see FIG. 32) described later, and the continuation lottery table (described later) Based on FIG. 33), if it is determined whether or not to continue the spinning effect RE5 and it is decided to continue the spinning effect RE5, the left reel 18, the middle reel 19 and the right reel 20 are A process of rotating in the reverse direction is performed. On the other hand, when it is decided not to continue the spinning effect RE5, the rotation of the left reel 18, the middle reel 19, and the right reel 20 is started after a predetermined standby time has elapsed.

  It should be noted that the above described spinning effect RE1, spinning effect RE2, turning effect RE3, turning effect RE4, turning effect RE5, turning effect RE6, turning effect RE7, turning effect RE8, turning effect RE9, Revolving effect RE10, Revolving effect RE11, Revolving effect RE12, Revolving effect RE13, Revolving effect RE14, Revolving effect RE15, Revolving effect RE16, Revolving effect RE17, Revolving effect RE18, Revolving effect The RE 19, the turning effect RE 20, and the turning effect RE 21 constitute the first turning effect in the present invention. In addition, the first spinning effect may be described as “rotating effect” in the following description.

(Reel lock map table)
Next, the reel lock map table will be described with reference to FIG.

  The reel lock map table is provided in the main ROM 302, and is provided for selecting a reel lock effect block table when executing a reel lock effect. Specifically, the reel lock map table is defined for the effect type and the reel lock effect block table to be selected.

  More specifically, in the reel lock map table, when it is determined that (a) the reel lock SU0 is executed, the effect type is “1”, and the reel lock effect block table (T_REL_LOC) is selected. (B) When it is decided to execute the reel lock SU1, the effect type is “2”, the reel lock effect block table (T_REL_SF1) is selected, and (c) the reel lock SU2 is executed. Is determined, the effect type is “3”, the reel lock effect block table (T_REL_SF2) is selected, and (d) when it is determined to execute the reel lock SU3, the effect type is “4”, the reel lock effect block table (T_REL_SF3) is selected, and (e) reel When it is decided to execute the track SU4, the effect type becomes “5”, the reel lock effect block table (T_REL_SF4) is selected, and (f) the reel lock SU5 is determined to be executed. In this case, the effect type is “6”, the reel lock effect block table (T_REL_SF5) is selected, and (g) when it is determined to execute the long freeze, the effect type is “7”. When the reel lock effect block table (T_REL_LFZ) is selected and (h) the reel lock BRE1 is determined to be executed, the effect type is “8” and the reel lock effect block table (T_REL_BF1) is selected. (I) If it is decided to execute the reel lock BRE2, the production type is 9 ”, when the reel lock effect block table (T_REL_BF2) is selected and (j) the reel lock BRE3 is determined to be executed, the effect type is“ 10 ”, and the reel lock effect block table ( When T_REL_BF3) is selected and (k) reel lock BRE4 is determined to be executed, the effect type is “11” and the reel lock effect block table (T_REL_BF4) is selected. Yes.

(Cylinder effect map table)
Next, based on FIG. 29, a spinning drum effect map table will be described.

  The rotating effect map table is provided in the main ROM 302, and is provided for selecting a rotating effect effect block table when executing the rotating effect. Specifically, the spinning effect production map table is defined for the production type and the spinning effect production block table to be selected.

  More specifically, the rotation effect map table shows that (a) when it is determined to execute the rotation effect RE1, the effect type is “1” and the combination of symbols displayed on the active line Accordingly, when the rotation effect is corrected by the rotation effect correction map table and (b) the rotation effect RE2 is determined to be executed, the effect type is “2” and the effective line is displayed. When the rotation effect is corrected by the rotation effect correction map table in accordance with the combination of symbols displayed in (1) and (c) it is determined to execute the rotation effect RE3, the effect type is “ 3 ”, when the stage effect block table (T_REL_ORIK) is selected and (d) the stage effect RE4 is determined to be executed, the stage type is“ 4 ”, and the stage effect stage is produced. Block tape (E_Tel_MND1) is selected, (e) At the start of the turning effect RE5, the effect type is “5”, the turning effect effect block table (T_REL_MND1) is selected, and (f) the end of the turning effect RE5 Occasionally, the production type is “6”, the spinning production production block table (T_REL_MND2) is selected, and (g) as a result of the lottery by the continuous lottery table (see FIG. 33), if there is a guarantee, it is continued and no guarantee In the case of, in the case where it is decided to continue due to the lottery value ending, the effect type becomes “7”, the effect block table for spinning effect (T_REL_MND3) is selected, and (h) the continuous lottery table As a result of the lottery, if it is decided to continue with a lottery value that will continue both with and without guarantee The production type is “8”, the rotation production production block table (T_REL_MND3) is selected, and (i) as a result of lottery by the continuous lottery table, it is revived when there is a guarantee, and it is continuation when there is no guarantee. When it is determined that the continuation is determined by the lottery value, the production type is “9”, the rotation effect production block table (T_REL_MND4) is selected, and (j) the result of the lottery by the continuous lottery table is guaranteed. If it is determined to be continued by a lottery value that is continuation if there is no guarantee and revived if there is no guarantee, the production type becomes “10” and the production block table (T_REL_MND3) for the spinning production When it is selected and (k) the spinning effect RE21 is decided to be executed, the production type becomes “11” and the production block table for the spinning effect (T_REL_XREP) is selected.

  Here, the rotation effect RE21 will be described.

(Cylinder effect RE21)
In the 3RT gaming state, the revolving effect RE21 is determined as “Bonus replay BR1”, “Bonus replay BR2”, and “Bonus replay BR3” by the internal lottery process described later, and the symbol related to “BAR replay”. This is a spinning effect that can be executed when a combination of these is displayed on the active line. Specifically, the left reel 18, the middle reel 19, and the right reel 20 are rotated before starting the rotation of the left reel 18, the middle reel 19, and the right reel 20 in the next game, and the symbol combination related to “BAR replay” is selected. A process of temporarily stopping a plurality of times is performed. Then, the rotation of the left reel 18, the middle reel 19, and the right reel 20 is started after a predetermined time has elapsed since the combination of symbols related to “BAR replay” is displayed a plurality of times.

(Cylinder effect correction map table)
Next, based on FIG. 30, a rotating effect correction map table will be described.

  The rotation effect correction map table is provided in the main ROM 302, and is provided for selecting the rotation effect correction effect block table when the rotation effect is executed and correction is necessary. Yes. Specifically, the rotation effect correction map table is defined for the effect type and the effect block table for the rotation effect to be selected.

  More specifically, the spinning effect correction map table is (a) when it is determined to execute the spinning effect RE1, and the combination of symbols related to the first cherry is displayed on the effective line. In this case, the production type is “1”, the production block table for spinning production (T_REL_RYU2) is selected, and (b) it is decided to execute the spinning production production RE1, and the upper cherry replay is performed. When the combination of symbols is displayed on the active line, the effect type is “2”, the effect block table for the rotating effect (T_REL_RYU2) is selected, and (c) the rotating effect RE1 is executed. When it is determined and the combination of symbols related to the lower cherry replay is displayed on the active line, the effect type is “3”, and the effect is for the revolving effect. When the outgoing block table (T_REL_RYU1) is selected and it is determined that (d) the spinning effect RE2 is to be executed and the combination of symbols related to the right-up watermelon is displayed on the active line, The production type is “4”, the production block table for the spinning effect (T_REL_MAS1) is selected, and (e) the combination of symbols related to the waterfall that falls to the right is determined to execute the spinning production RE2. Is displayed on the active line, the effect type is “5”, the effect block table for the rotating effect (T_REL_MAS2) is selected, and (f) it is determined to execute the rotating effect RE2. When the combination of symbols related to the upper watermelon play is displayed on the active line, the production type is “6”, and the spinning performance When the production effect block table (T_REL_MAS3) is selected and (g) it is decided to execute the revolving effect RE2, and the combination of symbols related to the lower watermelon play is displayed on the active line When the production type is “7”, the production block table for spinning effect (T_REL_MAS4) is selected, and (h) it is decided to execute the spinning production RE1, the design related to the first cherry is shown. When the combination is not displayed on the active line, or when the symbol related to “cherry” is not displayed on the upper, middle, and lower stages of the left reel 18, the effect type becomes “8” and the spinning effect Effect block table (T_REL_RYU2) is selected, and (i) it is decided to execute the spinning effect RE2, and it goes to the right If the combination of symbols related to watermelon and watermelon that falls to the right is not displayed on the active line, or if the symbols related to “watermelon” are not displayed on the upper and lower lines, the production type is It is defined that “9” is selected, and the effect block table for the spinning effect (T_REL_MAS4) is selected.

(RUSH stock lottery table)
Next, the RUSH stock lottery table will be described with reference to FIG.

  The RUSH stock lottery table is stored in the main ROM 302, and is used when performing a lottery to determine whether or not to stock a first RUSH state managed by a sub-control board 400 described later in a fifth RT gaming state described later.

  In addition, the RUSH stock lottery table stores the first RUSH state managed by the sub-control board 400, which will be described later, and the first RUSH state managed by the sub-control board 400, which will be described later. A lottery value corresponding to the winning combination is defined for each of the lottery winners. For example, before winning the lottery for determining whether or not to stock the first RUSH state managed by the sub-control board 400 described later, “chance eye replay CR2” with the winning number “24” is won by the internal lottery processing described later. When determined as a winning combination, “lost” is determined with a probability of “188/251”, and it is determined to stock a first RUSH state managed by the sub-control board 400 described later with a probability of “63/251”. Is done. On the other hand, after winning the lottery of whether or not to stock the first RUSH state managed by the sub-control board 400 described later, “chance eye replay CR2” with the winning number “24” is won by the internal lottery processing described later. When determined as a combination, “lost” is determined with a probability of “220/251”, and it is determined to stock a first RUSH state managed by the sub-control board 400 described later with a probability of “31/251”. Is done. Therefore, after winning a lottery for determining whether or not to stock a first RUSH state managed by a sub-control board 400 described later, a lottery for determining whether or not to stock a first RUSH state managed by a sub-control board 400 described later. Compared to before winning, the RUSH state described later is less likely to be stocked.

(Continuation rate determination table)
Next, the continuation rate determination table will be described based on FIG.

  The continuation rate determination table is stored in the main ROM 302, and when the rotation effect RE5 is determined to be executed in the fifth RT gaming state to be described later, a continuation rate for continuing the rotation effect RE5 is determined. Used for.

  In the continuation rate determination table, a continuation rate for continuing the spinning effect RE5 and a lottery value corresponding to the continuation rate are defined. Specifically, the probability that “50%” is determined as the continuation rate for continuing the rotation effect RE5 is “63/251”, and “66%” is determined as the continuation rate for continuing the rotation effect RE5. The probability of being “63/251” and the probability of “75%” being determined as the continuation rate for continuing the rotation effect RE5 is “63/251”, and the continuation of continuing the rotation effect RE5 The probability that “89%” is determined as the rate is “62/251”.

(Continuous lottery table)
Next, the continuous lottery table will be described based on FIG.

  The continuous lottery table is stored in the main ROM 302, and in the fifth RT gaming state to be described later, when it is determined to execute the spinning effect RE5, a lottery is performed to determine whether or not to continue the spinning effect RE5. Used when.

  In the continuation lottery table, a lottery value is defined for each continuation rate determined based on a continuation rate determination table (see FIG. 32) provided in the main ROM 302. Here, in this embodiment, in order to prevent the player from being discouraged by immediately ending the spinning effect RE5 when it is determined to execute the spinning effect RE5, A guaranteed number of times is provided to guarantee the number of times that the rotating effect RE5 continues. For this reason, if the number of times that the rotation effect RE5 has been continued is less than the guaranteed number of times, there is a guarantee, and if the number of times that the rotation effect RE5 has been continued is equal to or greater than the number of times of guarantee, there is no guarantee.

  Therefore, for example, in the case where the continuation rate determined based on the continuation rate determination table (see FIG. 32) is “50%”, if there is a guarantee, the probability is “240 (125 + 104 + 11) / 251”. It is determined that the trunk effect RE5 is to be continued, and it is determined that the rotation effect RE5 is to be continued by the resurrection with a probability of “11/251”. That is, when there is a guarantee, the turning effect RE5 is always continued. On the other hand, for example, in the case where the continuation rate determined based on the continuation rate determination table (see FIG. 32) is “50%” and there is no guarantee, the probability is “115 (104 + 11) / 251”. It is determined that the trunk effect RE5 is to be continued, the recovery effect RE5 is determined to be continued by the resurrection with a probability of “11/251”, and the rotation effect RE5 is terminated with a probability of “125/251”. It is determined. That is, when there is no guarantee, the spinning effect RE5 continues with a probability of “126 (104 + 11 + 11) / 251” and ends with a probability of “125/251”.

(Point lottery table)
Next, the point lottery table will be described based on FIG.

  The point lottery table is stored in the main ROM 302 and is used when determining whether or not to acquire a point for determining a level when the state managed by the sub-control board 400 is a first bonus state described later. .

  In the point lottery table, lottery values corresponding to points acquired for each winning combination are defined. For example, when “Bonus Replay BR3” with a winning number “19” is determined by an internal lottery process described later, “60” points are acquired with a probability of “251/251”. On the other hand, when the “common bell” of the winning number “31” is determined by the internal lottery process described later, “1” points are obtained with a probability of “97/251”, and “83/251”. With the probability of “2” points, “3” points will be acquired with the probability of “47/251”, “5” points will be acquired with the probability of “16/251”, “ “10” points will be obtained with a probability of “8/251”.

(Reel lock production block table)
Next, the reel lock effect block table will be described with reference to FIG.

  The reel lock effect block table is stored in the main ROM 302 and is used when executing the reel lock effect. The reel lock effect block table includes a reel lock effect block table (T_REL_LOC), a reel lock effect block table (T_REL_SF1), a reel lock effect block table (T_REL_SF2), and a reel lock effect block table ( T_REL_SF3), reel lock effect block table (T_REL_SF4), reel lock effect block table (T_REL_SF5), reel lock effect block table (T_REL_LFZ), reel lock effect block table (T_REL_BF1), and reel lock Effect block table (T_REL_BF2), reel lock effect block table (T_REL_BF3), and reel lock effect block It is constituted by a click table (T_REL_BF4).

  The reel lock effect block table defines the correction target reel, the movable reel, and the address of a later-described reel lock effect phase table used when executing the reel lock effect.

(Correction reel)
The data corresponding to the correction target reel defined in the reel lock effect block table is composed of “3” bit data. When the bit “0” is ON, the right reel 20 is the correction target reel. When the bit “1” is ON, the middle reel 19 is the correction target reel. When the bit “2” is ON, the left reel 18 is the correction reel. . Further, the main CPU 301 performs control for correcting the rotation directions of the left reel 18, the middle reel 19, and the right reel 20 based on data corresponding to the correction target reel during the spinning effect.

(Movable reel)
The data corresponding to the movable reel defined in the production block data is composed of “3” bit data. When the bit “0” is ON, the right reel 20 is a movable reel. When the bit “1” is ON, it indicates that the middle reel 19 is a movable reel, and when the bit “2” is ON, it indicates that the left reel 18 is a movable reel. Accordingly, the main CPU 301 performs control to rotate the left reel 18, the middle reel 19, and the right reel 20 based on the data corresponding to the movable reel during the spinning effect.

  Hereinafter, each reel lock effect block table will be described.

(Reel lock effect block table (T_REL_LOC))
The reel lock effect block table (T_REL_LOC) is an effect block table referred to when the reel lock SU0 is executed.

(Reel lock effect block table (T_REL_SF1))
The reel lock effect block table (T_REL_SF1) is an effect block table referred to when the reel lock SU1 is executed.

(Reel lock effect block table (T_REL_SF2))
The reel lock effect block table (T_REL_SF2) is an effect block table referred to when the reel lock SU2 is executed.

(Reel lock effect block table (T_REL_SF3))
The reel lock effect block table (T_REL_SF3) is an effect block table referred to when the reel lock SU3 is executed.

(Reel lock effect block table (T_REL_SF4))
The reel lock effect block table (T_REL_SF4) is an effect block table referred to when the reel lock SU4 is executed.

(Reel lock effect block table (T_REL_SF5))
The reel lock effect block table (T_REL_SF5) is an effect block table referred to when the reel lock SU5 is executed.

(Reel lock effect block table (T_REL_LFZ))
The reel lock effect block table (T_REL_LFZ) is an effect block table that is referred to when long freeze is executed.

(Reel lock effect block table (T_REL_BF1))
The reel lock effect block table (T_REL_BF1) is stored in the game from the “31” game to the “40” game after the transition to the third RT gaming state, by an internal lottery process to be described later. When the reel-lock effect BRE1 that is executed when the “Replay BR1 during Bonus”, the “Replay BR2 during Bonus” with the winning number “18”, or the “Replay BR3 during Bonus” with the winning number “19” is determined is executed. It is an effect block table referred to.

(Reel lock effect block table (T_REL_BF2))
The reel lock effect block table (T_REL_BF2) is stored in the “31” game to the “40” game after the transition to the third RT game state, and the winning number “17” “ When the reel lock effect BRE2 that is executed when the “replay BR1 during Bonus”, the “replay BR2 during Bonus” with the winning number “18”, or the “replay BR3 during Bonus” with the winning number “19” is determined is executed. It is an effect block table referred to.

(Reel lock effect block table (T_REL_BF3))
The reel lock effect block table (T_REL_BF3) is stored in the “31” game to the “40” game after the transition to the third RT game state, and the winning number “17” “ When the reel lock effect BRE3, which is executed when the “Bonus replay BR1”, the “18 Bonus replay BR2”, or the “19 Bonus replay BR3” is determined, is executed. It is an effect block table referred to.

(Reel lock effect block table (T_REL_BF4))
The reel lock effect block table (T_REL_BF4) is stored in the “31” game to the “40” game after the transition to the third RT gaming state, and the “17” winning number “17” is obtained by an internal lottery process described later. When the reel lock effect BRE4, which is executed when the “Replay BR1 during Bonus”, the “Replay BR2 during Bonus” with the winning number “18”, or the “Replay BR3 during Bonus” with the winning number “19” is determined, is executed. It is an effect block table referred to.

(Direction block table for spinning effect)
Next, based on FIG. 36, an effect block table for spinning effect will be described.

  The effect block table for the spinning effect is stored in the main ROM 302 and is used when executing the spinning effect. Further, the effect block table for the spinning effect includes the effect block table for the spinning effect (T_REL_ORK), the effect block table for the spinning effect (T_REL_MND1), the effect block table for the spinning effect (T_REL_MND2), and the rotation effect. Effect block table (T_REL_MND3), a spinning effect production block table (T_REL_MND4), and a spinning effect production block table (T_REL_XREP).

  As with the reel lock effect block table, the rotation effect effect block table is the correction target reel, the movable reel, and the address of the later described rotation effect effect effect phase table used when executing the rotation effect. It is prescribed.

(Rotation effect production block table (T_REL_ORK))
The effect block table for spinning effect (T_REL_ORK) is an effect block table that is referred to when the spinning effect RE3 is executed.

(Circulation effect production block table (T_REL_MND1))
The effect block table for the spinning effect (T_REL_MND1) is an effect block table that is referred to when the spinning effect RE5 is started when the spinning effect RE4 is executed.

(Circulation effect production block table (T_REL_MND2))
The effect block table for the spinning effect (T_REL_MND2) is a performance block table that is referred to when the rotation effect RE5 is executed and it is determined not to continue the spinning effect RE5.

(Circulation effect production block table (T_REL_MND3))
The effect block table for the spinning effect (T_REL_MND3) is a performance block table that is referred to when the rotation effect RE5 is to be executed when the rotation effect RE5 is executed.

(Circulation effect production block table (T_REL_MND4))
The effect block table (T_REL_MND4) for the spinning effect is a production block table that is referred to when the rotation effect RE5 is executed and it is determined that the spinning effect RE5 is to be continued by reviving.

(Rotation effect production effect block table (T_REL_XREP))
The spinning block effect block table (T_REL_XREP) indicates that the winning number “17” is obtained by the internal lottery process described later in the games from the “31” game to the “40” game after the transition to the third RT gaming state. Performing the spinning effect RE21 that can be executed when “Replay BR1 during Bonus”, “Replay BR2 during Bonus” with the winning number “18”, or “Replay BR3 during Bonus” with the winning number “19” is determined. It is an effect block table referred when is determined.

(Circulation effect compensation block table)
Next, the effect block table for rotating effect correction will be described with reference to FIG.

  The rotation effect correction effect block table is stored in the main ROM 302 and is used when executing the rotation effect. In addition, the effect block table for the rotation effect correction includes an effect block table for the rotation effect correction (T_REL_RYU1), an effect block table for the rotation effect correction (T_REL_RYU2), and an effect block table for the rotation effect correction (T_REL_MAS1). A rotation effect correction effect block table (T_REL_MAS2), a rotation effect correction effect block table (T_REL_MAS3), and a rotation effect correction effect block table (T_REL_MAS4).

  Similar to the reel lock effect block table and the rotation effect effect block table, the rotation effect correction effect block table, which will be described later, is used when executing the correction target reel, the movable reel, and the rotation effect. The address of the rotation effect correction effect phase table is defined.

(Circulation effect correction effect block table (T_REL_RYU1))
The effect block table for turning effect correction (T_REL_RYU1) is referred to when the combination of symbols related to “lower cherry replay” is stopped on the active line when it is decided to execute the turning effect RE1. It is a production block table.

(Circulation effect correction effect block table (T_REL_RYU2))
The effect block table for turning effect correction (T_REL_RYU2) is displayed when the combination of symbols related to “first cherry” is displayed on the active line when it is determined to execute the turning effect RE1 or “ When the combination of symbols related to “upper cherry replay” is displayed on the active line, the effect block table referred to when the symbols related to “cherry” are not displayed in the upper, middle, and lower rows of the left reel 18 is there.

(Circulation effect correction effect block table (T_REL_MAS1))
Refer to the block diagram (T_REL_MAS1) for turning effect correction when the combination of symbols related to “rising watermelon” is stopped on the effective line when it is decided to execute the turning effect RE2. It is a production block table.

(Circulation effect correction effect block table (T_REL_MAS2))
Refer to the block diagram (T_REL_MAS2) for the rotation effect correction when the combination of symbols related to “downwardly falling watermelon” is stopped on the effective line when it is decided to execute the rotation effect RE2. It is a production block table.

(Circulation effect correction effect block table (T_REL_MAS3))
Refer to the effect block table for turning effect correction (T_REL_MAS3) when the combination of symbols related to “upper watermelon play” is stopped on the effective line when it is decided to execute the turning effect RE2. It is a production block table.

(Circulation effect correction effect block table (T_REL_MAS4))
When the reel lock effect block table (T_REL_MAS4) is determined to execute the spinning effect RE2, the combination of symbols related to “lower watermelon play” is stopped on the active line, or “ It is an effect block table that is referred to when the symbols relating to “watermelon” are not displayed on the upper line or the lower line.

(Reel lock production phase table)
Next, the reel lock effect phase table will be described with reference to FIG.

  The reel lock effect phase table is stored in the main ROM 302 and is used when executing the reel lock effect, and the effect data table described later is used when executing the reel lock effect. Address is specified.

  The reel lock effect phase table includes a reel lock effect phase table (T_REL_PTN_LOC), a reel lock effect phase table (T_REL_PTN_SF1), a reel lock effect phase table (T_REL_PTN_C2250), and a reel lock effect phase table ( T_REL_PTN_LFZ), a reel lock effect phase table (T_REL_PTN_BF1), a reel lock effect phase table (T_REL_PTN_BF2), a reel lock effect phase table (T_REL_PTN_F1500), and a reel lock effect phase table (T_REL_PTN_F2000). Yes.

(Number of executions)
The number of executions is the number of times control of the left stepping motor 151, the middle stepping motor 152, and the right stepping motor 153 is executed based on an effect data table (see FIG. 41) described later when executing the reel lock effect. For example, when the reel lock effect phase table (T_REL_PTN_LOC) is used, effect data in the effect data table (T_PTN_4BY1) described later is executed “24” times, and effect data in the effect data table (T_PTN_LFRZ) described later is “173” times. Will be executed.

(Direction phase table for spinning effect)
Next, based on FIG. 39, the spinning phase effect phase table will be described.

  The stage effect table for spinning effect is stored in the main ROM 302 and is used when the spinning effect is executed. Like the reel locking effect phase table, the number of executions and the spinning effect are displayed. The address of an effect data table, which will be described later, used for execution is defined.

  In addition, the stage effect table for the rotation effect includes the effect phase table for the rotation effect (T_REL_PTN_C800), the effect phase table for the rotation effect (T_REL_PTN_C1296), the effect phase table for the rotation effect (T_REL_PTN_C2250), and the rotation effect. Effect phase table (T_REL_PTN_ORK2), rotation effect production phase table (T_REL_PTN_ORK3), rotation effect production phase table (T_REL_PTN_ORK4), rotation effect production phase table (T_REL_PTN_F3000), and rotation effect production Phase table (T_REL_PTN_MND), stage effect stage for spinning effect (T_REL_PTN_MND3), stage stage effect for spinning stage (T_REL_PTN_MND4), an effect phase table for a rotating effect (T_REL_PTN_GT0), an effect phase table for a rotating effect (T_REL_PTN_GT1), an effect phase table for a rotating effect (T_REL_PTN_GT2), and an effect phase table (T_REL_PTN_GTN) ), A spinning effect production phase table (T_REL_PTN_GT4), and a spinning production production phase table (T_REL_PTN_GT5).

(Direction phase table for rotation effect correction)
Next, based on FIG. 40, an explanation will be given of the effect phase table for rotating effect correction.

  The rotation effect correction effect phase table is stored in the main ROM 302 and is used when executing the rotation effect, and is similar to the reel lock effect phase table and the rotation effect effect phase table. In addition, the number of executions and the address of an effect data table (to be described later) used when executing the spinning effect are defined.

  Further, the effect phase table for the rotation effect correction includes an effect phase table for the rotation effect correction (T_REL_PTN_RYU1), an effect phase table for the rotation effect correction (T_REL_PTN_SF1), and an effect phase table for the rotation effect correction (T_REL_PTN_FLR). , The rotation effect correction effect phase table (T_REL_PTN_C4900) and the rotation effect correction effect phase table (T_REL_PTN_FL0).

(Production data table)
Next, the effect data table will be described with reference to FIG.

  The effect data table is stored in the main ROM 302 and is used when executing the reel lock effect and the spinning effect, and is defined for the rotation direction, the all-phase OFF flag, and the number of times of excitation holding. Yes.

  The effect data table includes an effect data table (T_PTN_NML), an effect data table (T_PTN_GTGT), an effect data table (T_PTN_REDY), an effect data table (T_PTN_SCLR), an effect data table (T_PTN_LCLR), and an effect data table. (T_PTN_SFRZ), effect data table (T_PTN_LFRZ), effect data table (T_PTN_2BY1), effect data table (T_PTN_4BY1), effect data table (T_PTN_12BY2), effect data table (T_PTN_12BY3), PT data table B_T ), An effect data table (T_PTN_23BY2), and an effect data table (T_PTN_6) And Y1), is constituted by effect data table (T_PTN_BACK).

(Direction of rotation)
The data corresponding to the rotation direction defined in the effect data table is data related to the rotation direction of the left reel 18, the middle reel 19, and the right reel 20 when executing the reel lock effect or the spinning effect. Specifically, the rotation direction of the reel is corrected by adding data corresponding to the rotation direction to the current pulse offset value.

(All phase OFF flag)
The all-phase OFF flag defined in the effect data table turns off all the excitation phases of “φ0”, “φ1”, “φ2”, and “φ3” of the left stepping motor 151, the middle stepping motor 152, and the right stepping motor 153. It is a flag to make. Specifically, when the value of the all-phase OFF flag is “1”, the main control board 300 sets “φ0”, “φ1” of the left stepping motor 151, the middle stepping motor 152, and the right stepping motor 153, Processing to turn off all the excitation phases of “φ2” and “φ3” is performed.

(Excitation holding frequency)
Data corresponding to the number of times of excitation holding defined in the effect data table are values used to move the left stepping motor 151, the middle stepping motor 152, and the right stepping motor 153, and are “φ0” and “φ1”. , “Φ2”, “φ3” are values indicating the time for holding each excitation phase. For this reason, as the value of the number of times of excitation holding specified in the effect data table is larger, the left reel 18, the middle reel 19, and the right reel 20 are controlled to rotate in the above-described rotation direction for a longer time.

(Output pulse table)
Next, the output pulse table will be described with reference to FIG.

  The output pulse table is stored in the main ROM 302 and is defined for the pulse offset value and the output pulse data corresponding to the pulse offset value.

  Here, in this embodiment, the reel control board 150 causes the left reel 18, the middle reel 19, and the left stepping motor 151, the middle stepping motor 152, and the right stepping motor 153 to perform the “1”-“2” phase excitation. Control for driving the right reel 20 is performed. Specifically, the output pulse table includes output pulse data “φ0” and “φ1” when the pulse offset value is “0”, output pulse data “φ1” when the pulse offset value is “1”, and pulse offset Output pulse data “φ1” and “φ2” when the value is “2”, output pulse data “φ2” when the pulse offset value is “3”, output pulse data “φ2” when the pulse offset value is “4” Output pulse data “φ3” when the pulse offset value is “5”, output pulse data “φ3” and “φ0” when the pulse offset value is “6”, and the pulse offset value is “φ2” and “φ3” The output pulse data “φ0” in the case of “7” is defined, and these output pulse data are data for requesting excitation for the excitation phase. As described above, the data for requesting excitation for “1” excitation phase and the data for requesting excitation for “2” excitation phases are alternately defined. And the process which excites "2" excitation phases will be performed alternately.

  Here, the left reel 18 is excited by exciting the excitation phase in the order of the output pulse data from the output pulse data when the pulse offset value is “0” to the output pulse data when the pulse offset value is “7”. The middle reel 19 and the right reel 20 rotate in the forward direction. On the other hand, by exciting the excitation phase in the order of the output pulse data from the output pulse data when the pulse offset value is “7” to the output pulse data when the pulse offset value is “0”, the left reel 18, The middle reel 19 and the right reel 20 rotate in the reverse direction.

  In the present embodiment, the reel control board 150 is configured so that the left stepping motor 151, the middle stepping motor 152, and the right stepping motor 153 are excited by “1”-“2” phase excitation, and the left reel 18, the middle reel 19, Although control for driving the right reel 20 is performed, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, control for driving the left reel 18, the middle reel 19, and the right reel 20 by “2” phase excitation may be performed. In this case, in the output pulse table, the output pulse data when the pulse offset value is “0” is defined as “1” in “φ0” and “φ1”, and in “φ2” and “φ3”. The output pulse data when “0” is defined and the pulse offset value is “1” is defined as “1” for “φ1” and “φ2”, and “0” for “φ0” and “φ3”. ”And“ 1 ”are defined for“ φ2 ”and“ φ3 ”, and“ 0 ”is defined for“ φ0 ”and“ φ1 ”. The output pulse data when the pulse offset value is “3” is defined as “1” for “φ0” and “φ3”, and “0” for “φ1” and “φ2”. The

(Game state transition diagram)
Next, a game state transition diagram will be described based on FIG.

  The game state transition diagram defines a current game state, a transition condition that is a condition for transitioning the game state, and a game state of a transition destination.

  Here, in the case where the current gaming state is a non-RT gaming state, when any of the symbol combinations related to “blank” is displayed on the active line, the non-RT gaming state is Transition to the first RT gaming state.

  In addition, when the current gaming state is the first RT gaming state, when any of the symbol combinations related to “preparation replay” is displayed on the active line, the first RT gaming state is Transition to the second RT gaming state.

  On the other hand, when the current gaming state is the first RT gaming state, when one of the symbol combinations related to “Bonus Replay” is displayed on the active line, the first RT gaming state is Transition to the third RT gaming state.

  In addition, when the current gaming state is the second RT gaming state, when any of the symbol combinations related to “blank” is displayed on the active line, the second RT gaming state is changed to the second RT gaming state. Transition to the 1RT gaming state.

  On the other hand, when the current gaming state is the second RT gaming state, when any of the symbol combinations related to “Bonus Replay” is displayed on the active line, Transition to the third RT gaming state.

  On the other hand, in the case where the current gaming state is the second RT gaming state, when any of the symbol combinations related to “ART replay” is displayed on the active line, the second RT gaming state is Transition to the fourth RT gaming state.

  On the other hand, when the current gaming state is the second RT gaming state, when any of the symbol combinations related to “RUSH replay” is displayed on the active line, Transition to the fifth RT gaming state.

  In addition, when the current gaming state is the third RT gaming state, when any of the symbol combinations related to “blank” is displayed on the active line, the third RT gaming state is changed to the third RT gaming state. Transition to the 1RT gaming state.

  On the other hand, in the case where the current gaming state is the third RT gaming state, when any of the symbol combinations related to “ART replay” is displayed on the active line, Transition to the fourth RT gaming state.

  On the other hand, when the current gaming state is the third RT gaming state, when any of the symbol combinations related to “RUSH replay” is displayed on the active line, Transition to the fifth RT gaming state.

  In addition, when the current gaming state is the fourth RT gaming state, when any symbol combination among the symbol combinations related to “blank” is displayed on the activated line, the fourth RT gaming state is changed to the fourth RT gaming state. Transition to the 1RT gaming state.

  On the other hand, when the current gaming state is the fourth RT gaming state, when any symbol combination among the symbol combinations related to “preparation replay” is displayed on the activated line, the fourth RT gaming state is Transition to the second RT gaming state.

  On the other hand, when the current gaming state is the fourth RT gaming state, when any of the symbol combinations related to “RUSH replay” is displayed on the active line, the fourth RT gaming state Transition to the fifth RT gaming state.

  On the other hand, in the case where the current gaming state is the 4RT gaming state, when one of the symbol combinations related to “special replay” is displayed on the active line, Transition to the sixth RT gaming state.

  In addition, when the current gaming state is the fifth RT gaming state, when any of the symbol combinations related to “blank” is displayed on the active line, the fifth RT gaming state is changed to the fifth RT gaming state. Transition to the 1RT gaming state.

  On the other hand, when the current gaming state is the fifth RT gaming state, when any of the symbol combinations related to “Bonus Replay” is displayed on the active line, Transition to the third RT gaming state.

  On the other hand, when the current gaming state is the fifth RT gaming state, when any of the symbol combinations related to “ART replay” is displayed on the active line, Transition to the fourth RT gaming state.

  In addition, when the current gaming state is the sixth RT gaming state, when any symbol combination among the symbol combinations related to “blank” is displayed on the active line, the sixth RT gaming state is changed to the sixth RT gaming state. Transition to the 1RT gaming state.

  On the other hand, in the case where the current gaming state is the sixth RT gaming state, when any of the symbol combinations related to “ART replay” is displayed on the active line, from the sixth RT gaming state, Transition to the fourth RT gaming state.

(List of states managed by sub control board)
Next, a list of states managed by the sub control board will be described with reference to FIG.

  The list of states managed by the sub control board is defined for the state names and the numbers corresponding to the state names. Here, the states managed by the sub-control board in the present embodiment are the “normal state” with the state number “01”, the “first chance precursor state” with the state number “02”, and the state number “03”. “Second chance precursor state”, state number “04”, “third chance precursor state”, state number “05” “fourth chance precursor state”, and state number “06” “fifth chance” “Precursor state”, “Bonus precursor state” with state number “07”, “first chance state” with state number “08”, “second chance state” with state number “09”, state number “10” "Third chance state", state number "11" "fourth chance state", state number "12" "Bonus ready state", state number "13" "first Bonus state", state Number "14" "Second Bonus state , “First fall standby state” with a state number “15”, “ART ready state” with a state number “16”, “ART state” with a state number “17”, “ART” with a state number “18” "Precursor status", status number "19" "winning stock precursor status", status number "20" "first added status", status number "21" "art chance status", status number “22” “preliminary sign”, “23” “preparation to add” state, “24” “second add-on state”, “25” “second fall standby state” ”,“ Battle state ”with state number“ 26 ”,“ RUSH ready state ”with state number“ 27 ”,“ first RUSH state ”with state number“ 28 ”,“ second RUSH ”with state number“ 29 ” "Status", status number "30", "third bonus status", status Number of "third falling standby state" of "31", the state number is defined the "fourth falling standby state" of "32".

(State transition diagram managed by sub-control board)
Next, a state transition diagram managed by the sub control board will be described with reference to FIG.

  In the present embodiment, a plurality of states managed by the sub control board 400 are provided separately from the gaming state controlled by the main control board 300. Hereinafter, description of each state and conditions for transition to each state will be given.

(Normal state)
The normal state is a disadvantageous state for the player. Here, in the present embodiment, in addition to performing a lottery for shifting to the Bonus ready state, the normal state is shifted to the first chance state, the second chance state, or the like that is easier to shift to the Bonus state than the normal state. By performing the lottery, the interest in games in the normal state is improved.

  Specifically, in the normal state, when the third chance state transition lottery is won, the transition is made to the first chance precursor state or the second chance precursor state, and in the normal state, the fourth chance state transition lottery. In the case of winning, a transition is made to the first chance precursor state or the second chance precursor state. Further, in the normal state, when the winning lottery in the first chance state is won, the state shifts to the third chance precursor state or the fourth chance precursor state. In the normal state, if the winning lottery in the second chance state is won, the state shifts to the fifth chance precursor state.

  In the normal state, when the lottery for the Bonus preparation state is won, the state shifts to the Bonus precursor state. In addition, if the winning lottery in the first chance state is won, and if it does not shift to the third chance precursor state and the fourth chance state, it shifts to the first chance state and wins the second chance state transition lottery, If the state does not shift to the fifth chance precursor state, the state shifts to the second chance state. Further, in the normal state, if the winning lottery in the third chance state is won and the transition to the third chance state is not made and the transition to the third chance state is not made, the transition lottery in the fourth chance state is performed. If it is won and the state does not shift to the first chance precursor state and the second chance state, the state shifts to the fourth chance state.

  In the normal state, when the lottery for the Bonus preparation state is won, the state shifts to the Bonus precursor state. In the normal state, when the direct hit Bonus with the winning number “05” is determined as the winning combination by the internal lottery process described later, the state shifts to the third Bonus state.

(Prelude to first chance)
The first chance precursor state is a state that shifts from the normal state to the third chance state or the fourth chance state. Here, based on the fact that a predetermined number of games have been performed in the first chance precursor state, the state shifts to the third chance state or the fourth chance state.

  Further, in the first chance sign state, if the lottery of the Bonus preparation state is won, the state shifts to the Bonus sign state. In the first chance sign state, when the direct hit Bonus with the winning number “05” is determined as the winning combination by the internal lottery process described later, the state shifts to the third Bonus state.

(A sign of second chance)
Like the first chance state, the second chance precursor state is a state in which the transition is made before the transition from the normal state to the third chance state or the fourth chance state. Here, based on the fact that a predetermined number of games have been played in the second chance precursor state, the state transitions to the third chance state or the fourth chance state.

  Further, in the second chance precursor state, when the lottery for the Bonus preparation state is won, the state shifts to the Bonus precursor state. In the sign of the second chance, when the direct hit bonus with the winning number “05” is determined as the winning combination by the internal lottery process described later, the state shifts to the third bonus state.

  Here, the first chance precursor state and the second chance precursor state coincide with each other in that the transition is made before the transition from the normal state to the third chance state or the fourth chance state. In addition, in the normal state, the first chance predictor state is determined as “losing”, “replay”, “common bell”, “push order bell” as the winning combination, and shifts to the third chance state or the fourth chance state. In the normal state, the winning sign other than “losing”, “replay”, “common bell”, “push order bell” Is determined, and the transition is made to the third chance state or the fourth chance state.

  Note that (a) in the normal state, when it is determined to shift to the third chance state or the fourth chance state, the transition to the first chance precursor state may be facilitated, and (b) normal In the state, when it is determined to shift to the third chance state or the fourth chance state, it may be easy to shift to the second chance precursor state, or (c) shift to the third chance state. If it is determined, it may be easy to shift to the first chance precursor state. (D) If it is determined to shift to the fourth chance precursor state, the first chance precursor state is shifted. (E) When it is determined to shift to the third chance state, it may be easy to shift to the second chance precursor state, or (f) to the fourth chance state. If it is decided to migrate It may be easier to shift to the second chance omen state.

(A sign of third chance)
The third chance precursor state is a state in which the transition is made before the transition from the normal state to the first chance state. Here, based on the fact that a predetermined number of games have been played in the third chance precursor state, the state transitions to the first chance state. Further, in the sign of the third chance, when the lottery for whether to shift to the second chance state is won or not, the state shifts to the second chance state.

  Further, in the third chance sign state, when the lottery for the Bonus preparation state is won, the state shifts to the Bonus sign state. In the sign of the third chance, when the direct hit Bonus with the winning number “05” is determined as the winning combination by the internal lottery process described later, the state shifts to the third Bonus state.

(Precursor status of fourth chance)
The fourth chance precursor state is a state in which the transition is made before the transition from the normal state to the first chance state. Here, in the fourth chance precursor state, the game moves to the first chance state based on the fact that a predetermined number of games have been played. Further, in the fourth chance precursor state, when the lottery for whether or not to shift to the second chance state is won, the state shifts to the second chance state.

  Further, in the fourth chance precursor state, when the lottery of the Bonus preparation state is won, the state shifts to the Bonus precursor state. In the fourth chance sign state, when the direct hit Bonus with the winning number “05” is determined as the winning combination by the internal lottery process described later, the state shifts to the third Bonus state.

  Here, the third chance precursor state and the fourth chance precursor state coincide with each other in that they are transitioned before transitioning to the first chance state. Further, the third chance precursor state shifts when “losing”, “replay”, “common bell”, and “push order bell” are determined as the winning combination, and it is determined to shift to the first chance state. In the normal state, the winning chance other than “losing”, “replay”, “common bell”, and “push order bell” is determined in the normal state, and the first chance state is entered. It is different in that it is in a state of shifting when it is decided to do.

  Note that (a) when it is determined to shift to the first chance state, it may be easy to shift to the third chance precursor state, or (b) it is determined to shift to the first chance state. In such a case, it may be easy to shift to the fourth chance precursor state.

(5th chance sign)
The fifth chance precursor state is a state in which the transition is made before the transition to the second chance state. Here, based on the fact that a predetermined number of games have been played in the fifth chance precursor state, the state transitions to the second chance state. Further, when a lottery for determining whether or not to shift to the first chance state is won in the fifth chance precursor state, the state shifts to the first chance state.

  Further, in the fifth chance sign state, if the Bonus preparation state transition lottery is won, the state shifts to the Bonus sign state. In addition, in the fifth chance sign state, when the direct hit Bonus with the winning number “05” is determined as the winning combination by the internal lottery process described later, the state shifts to the third Bonus state.

(Bonus precursor state)
The Bonus precursor state is a state that shifts before the transition from the normal state to the Bonus preparation state. Here, based on the fact that a predetermined number of games have been played in the Bonus precursor state, the state transitions to the Bonus preparation state. In the Bonus precursor state, when the direct hit Bonus with the winning number “05” is determined as the winning combination by the internal lottery process described later, the state shifts to the third Bonus state.

(First chance state)
The first chance state is a state in which a normal state point to be described later is easily obtained as compared with the normal state. Here, in the first chance state, it was acquired in the normal state, the first chance precursor state, the second chance precursor state, the third chance precursor state, the fourth chance precursor state, the fifth chance precursor state, and the first chance state. It is determined whether or not to shift to the second chance state based on the later-described normal state point, and if it is determined to shift to the second chance state, or whether or not to shift to the second chance state When the lottery is won, the second chance state is entered. On the other hand, if it is determined not to shift to the second chance state, the first chance state ends.

  Here, at the end of the first chance state, if the value of the third chance state stock counter described later is equal to or greater than “1”, the state shifts to the third chance state, and the fourth chance state stock counter described later. When the value is “1” or more, the state shifts to the fourth chance state. When a value of a third chance state stock counter and a value of a fourth chance state stock counter, which will be described later, are “0”, the state shifts to a normal state.

  In the first chance state, when the lottery for the Bonus preparation state is won, the state shifts to the Bonus precursor state. In the first chance state, when the direct hit Bonus with the winning number “05” is determined as the winning combination by the internal lottery process described later, the state shifts to the third Bonus state.

(Second chance state)
The second chance state is a state in which whether or not to shift to the Bonus preparation state is drawn using points to be described later acquired in the normal state and the first chance state. Here, in the second chance state, when a lottery to determine whether or not to shift to the Bonus preparation state is won using points described later acquired in the normal state and the first chance state, the state shifts to the Bonus preparation state. . On the other hand, when the points described below acquired in the normal state and the first chance state are not won in the lottery to determine whether or not to shift to the bonus preparation state, and the value of the normal state point is less than “11” The second chance state ends.

  Here, at the end of the second chance state, if the value of the third chance state stock counter described later is equal to or greater than “1”, the state shifts to the third chance state, and the fourth chance state stock counter described later. When the value is “1” or more, the state shifts to the fourth chance state. When a value of a third chance state stock counter and a value of a fourth chance state stock counter, which will be described later, are “0”, the state shifts to a normal state.

  Further, in the second chance state, when the lottery for the Bonus preparation state is won, the state shifts to the Bonus precursor state. In the second chance state, when the direct hit Bonus with the winning number “05” is determined as the winning combination by the internal lottery process described later, the state shifts to the third Bonus state.

(3rd chance state)
The third chance state is a state in which a lottery for determining whether to shift to the ART preparation state or the RUSH preparation state is performed. Here, in the third chance state, when it is determined to shift to the ART preparation state by lottery of whether to shift to the ART preparation state or the RUSH preparation state, the state shifts to the ART preparation state. In addition, when it is determined to shift to the RUSH preparation state by lottery of whether to shift to the ART preparation state or the RUSH preparation state, the state shifts to the RUSH preparation state. On the other hand, if it is not decided to enter the ART preparation state or the RUSH preparation state by the lottery of whether or not to enter the ART preparation state or the RUSH preparation state, and a predetermined number of games are played. , Transition to normal state.

  In the third chance state, when the direct hit Bonus with the winning number “05” is determined as the winning combination by the internal lottery process described later, the state shifts to the third Bonus state.

(4th chance state)
The fourth chance state is a state in which a lottery for determining whether or not to shift to the RUSH preparation state is performed. Here, when it is determined by the lottery whether to shift to the RUSH preparation state or not to shift to the RUSH preparation state, the state shifts to the RUSH preparation state. On the other hand, if it is not determined to shift to the RUSH ready state due to the lottery whether or not to shift to the RUSH ready state, and if a predetermined number of games are played, the state shifts to the normal state.

  In the fourth chance state, when the direct hit Bonus with the winning number “05” is determined as the winning combination by the internal lottery process described later, the state shifts to the third Bonus state.

(Bonus ready state)
The Bonus preparation state is a state in which the transition is made before the transition to the Bonus state. Here, in the Bonus ready state, the first Bonus state is based on the fact that one of the symbol combinations related to the first Bonus replay, the second Bonus replay, or the third Bonus replay is displayed on the active line. , Transition to either the second Bonus state or the third Bonus state.

(First Bonus state)
The first Bonus state is configured by a total of “40” games including the “30” game of the first half part and the “10” game of the second half part. The first Bonus state is for displaying a combination of symbols related to the “correct answer bell” on the active line when the winning combination of the winning numbers “32” to “39” is determined by the internal lottery process described later. This is a state in which information is displayed on the stop button operation display unit 35 and the liquid crystal display device 46. Therefore, the first Bonus state is an advantageous state for the player compared to the normal state.

  Here, in the first Bonus state, when it is determined to shift to the ART ready state, when it is determined to shift to the ART ready state and shift to the RUSH ready state at the end of the first Bonus state. At the end of the first Bonus state, the RUSH preparation state is entered. In the first Bonus state, when it is not determined to shift to the ART ready state and to shift to the RUSH ready state, the state shifts to the normal state when the first Bonus state ends.

(Second Bonus state)
The second Bonus state is composed of a total of “35” games including the “30” game of the first half part and the “5” game of the second half part. The second Bonus state is for displaying a combination of symbols related to the “correct answer bell” on the active line when the winning combination of the winning numbers “32” to “39” is determined by the internal lottery process described later. This is a state in which information is displayed on the stop button operation display unit 35 and the liquid crystal display device 46. Therefore, the second Bonus state is an advantageous state for the player compared to the normal state.

  Here, in the second Bonus state, when it is determined to shift to the ART ready state, when it is determined to shift to the ART ready state and shift to the RUSH ready state when the second Bonus state ends. At the end of the second Bonus state, the RUSH preparation state is entered. In the second Bonus state, when it is not determined to shift to the ART preparation state and to shift to the RUSH preparation state, the state shifts to the normal state when the second Bonus state ends.

  In the present embodiment, the first Bonus state is more easily shifted to the ART preparation state or the RUSH preparation state as compared with the second Bonus state. For this reason, the second Bonus state is easier to shift to the first fall standby state than the first Bonus state. For this reason, the first Bonus state is an advantageous state compared to the second Bonus state.

(First fall standby state)
The first fall standby state is a state in which the first Bonus state or the second Bonus state is finished and the state is shifted to the normal state. Here, in the first fall standby state, when any of the symbol combinations related to “blank” is displayed on the active line, the normal state is entered. In the first fall state, when a predetermined lottery is won, the state shifts to the ART preparation state.

(ART ready state)
The ART ready state is a state in which the state is shifted before the state is shifted to the ART state. In the ART preparation state, when the winning combination of the winning number “16” is determined by the internal lottery process to be described later, information for displaying the combination of symbols related to the ART replay on the active line is a stop button operation. It is displayed on the display unit 35 and the liquid crystal display device 46. Then, in the ART preparation state, the state transitions to the ART state based on the fact that the symbol combination related to “ART replay” is displayed on the active line.

  In the ART preparation state, when the direct hit Bonus with the winning number “05” is determined as the winning combination by the internal lottery process described later, the state shifts to the third Bonus state.

(ART state)
In the ART state, when a winning combination of winning numbers “32” to “39” is determined by an internal lottery process described later, information for displaying a combination of symbols relating to “correct answer bell” on the active line is stopped. This is a state displayed on the button operation display unit 35 and the liquid crystal display device 46. Here, when it is determined that the state shifts to the first added state in the ART state, the state shifts to the precursor state during the ART, and when it is determined to acquire the winning stock described later in the ART state. , Move to the prevailing stock precursor.

  In the ART state, if the ART-in-chance state transition condition is satisfied, the state shifts to the ART-in-chance state. Further, in the ART state, when the second added state transition condition is satisfied and the number of games that can be played in the ART state is a value greater than “1”, the state shifts to the additional sign state, and the second added state transition condition Is satisfied and the number of games that can be played in the ART state is “1”, the state shifts to the additional preparation state. When the number of games that can be played in the ART state becomes “0”, the state shifts to the battle state.

(A precursor state of ART)
The ART warning sign state is a state in which the state shifts to the state before the transition to the first added state. Here, when a predetermined number of games are played in the ART warning sign state, the state shifts to the first additional state.

(Predictive stock sign)
The winning stock sign state is a state that is shifted to when winning a lottery using a winning stock lottery table (see FIG. 70) described later. Here, when a predetermined number of games are played in the winning stock sign state, a notification that the winning stock has been acquired is given, and then the state shifts to the ART state.

  In addition, in the winning stock sign state, when the second added state transition condition is satisfied and the number of games that can be played in the ART state is a value larger than “1”, the state shifts to the added sign state, and the second added state When the transition condition is satisfied and the number of games that can be played in the ART state is “1”, the state shifts to the additional preparation state.

(First addition state)
The first added state is a state where it is easier to acquire an ART point used in the battle state than the ART state. Here, in the first added state, when the first added state end condition is satisfied, the state shifts to the ART state.

(Chance state during ART)
The chance state during ART is a state in which it is easier to shift to the RUSH ready state than the ART state. Here, in the chance state during ART, when the RUSH preparation state transition condition is satisfied, the state transitions to the RUSH preparation state. Further, in the ART chance state, when the ART chance condition end condition is satisfied, the state shifts to the ART state.

(Precursor status)
The sign of adding sign is a state of shifting before shifting to the adding preparation state. Here, when a predetermined number of games have been played in the sign of adding up, the game shifts to an adding-up preparation state.

(Additional preparation state)
The addition preparation state is a state that shifts before the transition to the second addition state. Also, in the extra preparation state, “ART replay AR1” with a winning number “09”, “ART replay AR3” with a winning number “11”, “ART replay AR4” with a winning number “12” by an internal lottery process described later, Is determined, information for displaying the symbol combination related to “special replay” on the active line is displayed on the stop button operation display unit 35 and the liquid crystal display device 46. And in the addition preparation state, it transfers to a 2nd addition state based on the combination of the symbol which concerns on "special replay" being displayed on the effective line.

(Second addition state)
The second added state is a state in which ART points used in the battle state are easily obtained as compared to the ART state. Here, in the second added state, when the second added state end condition is satisfied, the state shifts to the second fall standby state.

(Second fall standby state)
The second fall standby state is a state in which the second addition state is finished and the state is shifted to the ART state. Here, when the symbol combination related to “ART replay” is displayed on the active line in the second fall standby state, the state shifts to the ART state.

(Battle state)
The battle state is a state in which, when the number of games that can be played in the ART state becomes “0”, the acquired ART points are used to determine whether to shift to the ART state. Here, in the battle state, when it is determined to shift to the ART state as a result of performing the lottery using the acquired ART points, the state shifts to the ART state. In addition, when it is determined that a transition to the first RUSH state or the second RUSH state is made as a result of performing a lottery using the acquired ART points, the state shifts to the RUSH preparation state.

  In addition, if it is not decided to shift to the ART state as a result of the lottery of whether or not to shift to the ART state until the acquired point becomes “0”, the state shifts to the fourth fall standby state. To do.

  When the winning stock has been acquired, the state is shifted to the ART state or the RUSH preparation state without using the acquired points. For this reason, since the player always shifts to the ART state or the RUSH preparation state when the winning stock is acquired, the player can play the game in the battle state with peace of mind.

(RUSH ready state)
The RUSH preparation state is a state in which the state is shifted to the first RUSH state or the second RUSH state. Here, in the RUSH preparation state, when the symbol combination related to “RUSH replay” is displayed on the active line, the state shifts to the first RUSH state or the second RUSH state.

(First RUSH state)
The first RUSH state is a state in which ART points used in the battle state can be easily obtained as compared to the ART state. Here, in the first RUSH state, when the third Bonus state transition condition is satisfied, the state transitions to the third Bonus state. Further, at the end of the first RUSH state, if the value of the first RUSH state stock counter described later is “1” or more and the value of the second RUSH state stock counter described later is “0”, the first RUSH state Migrate to In addition, when the value of the second RUSH state stock counter described later is “1” or more and the value of the first RUSH state stock counter described later is “0” at the end of the first RUSH state, the second RUSH state Migrate to When the value of a first RUSH state stock counter described later is “1” or more and the value of a second RUSH state stock counter described later is also “1” or more, the state shifts to the first RUSH state.

  In the first RUSH state, when the first RUSH state end condition is satisfied, the state transitions to the third fall standby state.

(Second RUSH state)
Similar to the first RUSH state, the second RUSH state is a state in which it is easier to acquire an ART point to be used in the battle state than the ART state. Here, in the second RUSH state, when the third Bonus state transition condition is satisfied, the state transitions to the third Bonus state. Further, at the end of the second RUSH state, if the value of the first RUSH state stock counter described later is “1” or more and the value of the second RUSH state stock counter described later is “0”, the first RUSH state Migrate to Also, at the end of the second RUSH state, if the value of the second RUSH state stock counter described later is “1” or more and the value of the first RUSH state stock counter described later is “0”, the second RUSH state Migrate to When the value of a first RUSH state stock counter described later is “1” or more and the value of a second RUSH state stock counter described later is also “1” or more, the state shifts to the first RUSH state.

  In the second RUSH state, when the second RUSH state end condition is satisfied, the state transitions to the third fall standby state.

  Here, in this embodiment, the 2nd RUSH state is easy to acquire the ART point used in a battle state compared with the 1st RUSH state. Therefore, the second RUSH state is an advantageous state compared to the first RUSH state.

  In the present embodiment, in the first RUSH state or the second RUSH state, after the transition to the third Bonus state, the state transitions to the RUSH preparation state when the third Bonus state ends. Thereby, in the 1st RUSH state or the 2nd RUSH state, although the 3rd Bonus state transfer condition is satisfied, the situation where it becomes disadvantageous than the case where the 3rd Bonus state transfer condition is not satisfied can be prevented.

(3rd Bonus state)
In the third Bonus state, when the winning combination of the winning numbers “32” to “39” is determined by the internal lottery process described later, information for displaying the combination of symbols related to “correct answer bell” on the active line is displayed. This is a state displayed on the stop button operation display unit 35 and the liquid crystal display device 46. Therefore, the third Bonus state is an advantageous state for the player compared to the normal state.

  Here, when it is determined to shift to the ART ready state in the third Bonus state, when it is determined to shift to the ART ready state and shift to the RUSH ready state at the end of the third Bonus state. At the end of the third Bonus state, the RUSH preparation state is entered.

  In the present embodiment, when the third Bonus state is completed, the state always shifts to either the ART preparation state or the RUSH preparation state. On the other hand, when the first Bonus state or the second Bonus state ends, the state shifts to an ART ready state, a RUSH ready state, or a first fall standby state. For this reason, the third Bonus state is an advantageous state as compared with the first Bonus state and the second Bonus state.

(Third fall standby state)
The third fall standby state is a state in which the first RUSH state or the second RUSH state ends and the state transitions to the ART state. Here, in the third fall standby state, when the symbol combination related to “ART replay” is displayed on the active line, the state shifts to the ART state.

(4th falling standby state)
The fourth fall standby state is a state in which the battle state ends and the state shifts to the normal state. Here, in the fourth fall standby state, when the combination of symbols related to “blank” is displayed on the active line, the normal state is entered. Further, in the fourth fall standby state, when it is determined to acquire an ART point by a lottery for determining whether or not to acquire an ART point, the state shifts to the ART state.

(Direction decision table)
Next, an effect determination table will be described based on FIG.

  The effect determination table is provided in the sub ROM 402, and is provided for determining effects to be performed in each state managed by the sub control board 400. Specifically, “production No.” and production contents corresponding to “production No.” are defined. The effect determination table defines conditions for executing effects such as a state managed by the sub control board 400.

  Here, in this embodiment, the effect determination table includes (a) a normal state effect determination table (see FIG. 46A) used when the state managed by the sub-control board 400 is the normal state, and ( b) The first chance precursor state effect determination table (see FIG. 46B) used when the state managed by the sub control board 400 is the first chance precursor state, and (c) managed by the sub control board 400. The second chance precursor state effect determination table (see FIG. 46C) used when the state to be performed is the second chance precursor state, and (d) the state managed by the sub-control board 400 is the third chance precursor. The third chance precursor state effect determination table (see FIG. 46D) used in the case of the state, and (e) the state managed by the sub-control board 400 is the fourth chance. The fourth chance precursor state effect determination table (see FIG. 46E) used in the case of the trillion state and (f) the second chance precursor state used when the state managed by the sub-control board 400 is the fifth chance precursor state. An effect determination table for a 5-chance precursor state (see FIG. 46 (F)), and (g) an effect determination table for a Bonus precursor state used when the state managed by the sub-control board 400 is a Bonus precursor state (not shown). ), (H) a first chance state effect determination table (not shown) used when the state managed by the sub control board 400 is the first chance state, and (i) managed by the sub control board 400. A second chance state effect determination table (not shown) used when the state is the second chance state, and (j) managed by the sub-control board 400. A third chance state effect determination table (not shown) used when the state is the third chance state, and (k) a fourth state used when the state managed by the sub-control board 400 is the fourth chance state. A chance state effect determination table (not shown), (l) a Bonus preparation state effect determination table (not shown) used when the state managed by the sub-control board 400 is the Bonus preparation state, and (m) ) A first Bonus state effect determination table (not shown) used when the state managed by the sub control board 400 is the first Bonus state, and (n) the state managed by the sub control board 400 is the second Bonus state. Second Bonus state effect determination table (not shown) used in the case, and (o) a state managed by the sub-control board 400 Is a first fall standby state effect determination table (not shown) used in the case of the first fall standby state, and (p) the ART preparation used when the state managed by the sub-control board 400 is the ART ready state. State effect determination table (not shown), (q) ART state effect determination table (not shown) used when the state managed by the sub-control board 400 is the ART state, and (r) sub-control An art warning state presentation determination table (not shown) used when the state managed by the board 400 is the ART warning sign state, and (s) the condition managed by the sub-control board 400 is the winning stock warning sign state. If the stage managed by the sub-control board 400 is the first added state, the winning stock precursor state effect determination table (not shown) used in the case A first added state effect determination table (not shown), and (u) an ART chance state effect determination table (not shown) used when the state managed by the sub-control board 400 is an ART chance state. And (v) an added sign state effect determination table (not shown) used when the state managed by the sub-control board 400 is the add-on sign state, and (w) managed by the sub-control board 400. An effect determination table for an additional preparation state (not shown) used when the state is an additional preparation state, and (x) a second additional state used when the state managed by the sub-control board 400 is the second additional state. Effect determination table (not shown) and (y) second fall standby used when the state managed by the sub-control board 400 is the second fall standby state A state effect determination table (not shown), (z) a battle state effect determination table (not shown) used when the state managed by the sub-control board 400 is a battle state, and (aa) sub-control RUSH preparation state effect determination table (not shown) used when the state managed by the substrate 400 is the RUSH preparation state, and (ab) used when the state managed by the sub-control substrate 400 is the first RUSH state. A first RUSH state effect determination table (not shown), and (ac) a second RUSH state effect determination table (not shown) used when the state managed by the sub-control board 400 is the second RUSH state, (Ad) The third Bonus state effect determination table used when the state managed by the sub-control board 400 is the third Bonus state. Bull (not shown), (ae) a third fall standby state effect determination table (not shown) used when the state managed by the sub-control board 400 is the third fall standby state, and (af) There is provided a fourth fall standby state effect determination table (not shown) used when the state managed by the sub-control board 400 is the fourth fall standby state.

(Mode lottery table)
Next, the mode lottery table will be described with reference to FIG.

  The mode lottery table is provided in the sub ROM 402. The mode lottery table includes (a) a setting change mode lottery table (see FIG. 47A) referred to when changing the setting value of the gaming machine 1, and (b) the first Bonus state or the first In the first fall standby state after the end of the 2 Bonus state, among the symbol combinations related to “blank”, the Bonus state end mode lottery table referred to when any of the symbol combinations is displayed (see FIG. 47 (B)), and (c) when the battle state is ended, and among the symbol combinations related to “blank”, the ART state end mode lottery referred to when any symbol combination is displayed. Table (see FIG. 47C), (d) Setting change mode lottery table (see FIG. 47A), Bonus state end mode lottery table (see FIG. 47B) ), Or a specific mode for determining the number of games when it is determined to shift to a specific mode as a result of performing a lottery using the ART state end mode lottery table (see FIG. 47C). A game number lottery table (see FIG. 47D) is provided.

(Mode change mode lottery table)
The setting change mode lottery table is provided in the sub ROM 402, and is provided to determine whether to set the normal mode or the specific mode when changing the setting value of the gaming machine 1. ing. Here, in the present embodiment, even when the same set value is set, it is determined whether to set the normal mode or the specific mode using the setting change mode lottery table. .

  Note that “when the same setting value is set” means, for example, that the setting change button 45 is operated by the setting change switch 45sw in a state where the setting value displayed on the setting display unit 44 is “1”. Is detected, the setting values displayed on the setting display unit 44 are switched and displayed as “2”, “3”, “4”, “5”, “6”. Then, in a state where the setting value displayed on the setting display section 44 has reached “1” in one cycle, when the operation of the start lever 10 is detected by the start switch 10 sw, the setting value is changed from “1”. It means something like “1”.

  In the setting change mode lottery table, a lottery value for setting the normal mode and a lottery value for setting the specific mode are defined for each set value. Here, in this embodiment, the higher the set value, the larger the value that is specified as the lottery value for setting the specific mode.

  The lottery value for setting the normal mode and the lottery value for setting the specific mode specified in the setting change mode lottery table can be set as appropriate. For example, (a) as the set value is higher, a larger value may be defined as the lottery value for setting the normal mode. (B) When the set value is an even number, the set value is an odd number A large value may be defined as the lottery value for setting the specific mode, and (c) when the set value is an odd number, the specific mode is compared with the case where the set value is an even number. A large value may be defined as the lottery value to be set. (D) When the set value is a predetermined value (for example, “4”) or more, it is compared with the case where the set value is less than the predetermined value. Thus, a large value may be defined as the lottery value for setting the specific mode, or (e) a common lottery value may be defined for all the setting values.

(Bonus state end mode lottery table)
The Bonus state end mode lottery table is provided in the sub-ROM 402, and the Bonus state ends, and in the first fall standby state, the symbol related to the first blank, the second blank, the third blank, or the fourth blank. When any one of the combinations of symbols is displayed, it is provided to determine whether to set the normal mode or the specific mode. In the Bonus state end mode lottery table, a lottery value for which the normal mode is set and a lottery value for which the specific mode is set are defined for each set value. Here, in this embodiment, the higher the set value, the larger the value that is specified as the lottery value for setting the specific mode.

  The lottery value for setting the normal mode and the lottery value for setting the specific mode specified in the Bonus state end mode lottery table can be set as appropriate. For example, (a) as the set value is higher, a larger value may be defined as the lottery value for setting the normal mode. (B) When the set value is an even number, the set value is an odd number A large value may be defined as the lottery value for setting the specific mode, and (c) when the set value is an odd number, the specific mode is compared with the case where the set value is an even number. A large value may be defined as the lottery value to be set. (D) When the set value is a predetermined value (for example, “4”) or more, it is compared with the case where the set value is less than the predetermined value. Thus, a large value may be defined as the lottery value for setting the specific mode, or (e) a common lottery value may be defined for all the setting values.

  In the present embodiment, the same Bonus state end time is used when the first Bonus state ends and shifts to the first fall standby state, and when the second Bonus state ends and shifts to the first fall standby state. Although the lottery is performed using the mode lottery table, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, (a) the Bonus state end mode lottery table that is different when the first Bonus state ends and shifts to the first fall standby state, and when the second Bonus state ends and shifts to the first fall standby state. (B) A lottery value for setting the normal mode when the first bonus state ends and the first fall standby state is entered in the bonus state end mode lottery table. The lottery value for setting the specific mode when the first Bonus state ends and the first fall standby state is entered, and the normal mode is set when the second Bonus state ends and the first fall standby state is entered. A lottery value and a lottery value for setting a specific mode when the second bonus state ends and the first fall-standby state is entered may be defined.

(Mode lottery table for ART state end)
The ART state end mode lottery table is provided in the sub-ROM 402, and the battle state ends when a point described later becomes “0”, and the first blank, the second blank, the third blank, or the fourth It is provided to determine whether to set the normal mode or the specific mode when any of the symbol combinations related to the blank is displayed. In the ART state end mode lottery table, a lottery value for which the normal mode is set and a lottery value for which the specific mode is set are defined for each set value. Here, in this embodiment, the higher the set value, the larger the value that is specified as the lottery value for setting the specific mode.

  The lottery value for setting the normal mode and the lottery value for setting the specific mode specified in the ART state end time mode lottery table can be set as appropriate. For example, (a) as the set value is higher, a larger value may be defined as the lottery value for setting the normal mode. (B) When the set value is an even number, the set value is an odd number A large value may be defined as the lottery value for setting the specific mode, and (c) when the set value is an odd number, the specific mode is compared with the case where the set value is an even number. A large value may be defined as the lottery value to be set. (D) When the set value is a predetermined value (for example, “4”) or more, it is compared with the case where the set value is less than the predetermined value. In addition, a large value may be defined as the lottery value for setting the specific mode. (E) In the case of a specific set value (for example, “6”), it is compared with a case other than the specific set value. A large value may be prescribed as a lottery value for setting a specific mode, f) a common lottery value in all of the settings may be defined.

(Specific mode game number lottery table)
The specific mode game number lottery table is provided in the sub ROM 402, and is provided for determining the number of games when it is determined to shift to the specific mode. Here, in the present embodiment, the mode change lottery table for changing settings (see FIG. 47A), the mode lottery table for closing the Bonus state (see FIG. 47B), or the mode lottery for terminating the ART state. As a result of performing the lottery using the table (see FIG. 47C), when it is determined to shift to the specific mode, the number of games is determined using the specific mode game number lottery table. Then, after the game of the number of games determined using the specific mode game number lottery table is performed, the bonus preparation state using the specific mode bonus preparation state transition lottery table (see FIG. 63B) described later. The lottery of whether to shift to will be performed. Therefore, when the specific mode is set, it is advantageous for the player as compared with the case where the normal mode is set.

(First chance state lottery mode determination table)
Next, the first chance state lottery mode determination table will be described with reference to FIG.

  The first chance state lottery mode determination table is provided in the sub ROM 402. Further, in the first chance state lottery mode determination table, (a) in the state of staying in the Low mode, it is determined whether or not to change the mode based on the winning combination determined by the internal lottery process described later. First chance state lottery mode determination table (when staying in Low mode) (see FIG. 48A) and (b) winning determined by internal lottery processing described later in the state of staying in High mode First chance state lottery mode determination table (when staying in High mode) (see FIG. 48 (B)) for determining whether or not to shift the mode based on the combination, and (c) staying in SP mode The first chance state lottery mode determination table for determining whether or not to change the mode based on the winning combination determined by the internal lottery process described later When the SP mode is staying (see FIG. 48C) and (d) in the state staying in the Low mode, it is determined whether or not to change the mode based on the fact that a predetermined condition is satisfied. First chance state lottery mode determination table (others when staying in Low mode) (see FIG. 48D) and (e) based on the fact that a predetermined condition is satisfied while staying in High mode The first chance state lottery mode determination table for determining whether or not to change the mode (others when staying in High mode) (see FIG. 48E), and (f) the state staying in the SP mode In FIG. 48, a first chance state lottery mode determination table for determining whether or not to change the mode based on the satisfaction of a predetermined condition (others when staying in the SP mode) (FIG. 48 ( ) Reference) are provided.

(First chance state lottery mode decision table (when staying in Low mode))
The first chance state lottery mode determination table (during stay in the Low mode) is provided in the sub ROM 402, and the mode is determined based on the winning combination determined by the internal lottery process described later in the state of staying in the Low mode. Is provided to determine whether or not to transition. Here, in the present embodiment, the first chance state lottery mode determination table (when staying in the Low mode) indicates that the “winning” is determined as the winning combination by the internal lottery process described later, and the “prepared state” The mode transition lottery is performed when “transition replay” is determined, when “push order bell” is determined as the winning combination, and when “common bell” is determined as the winning combination.

(First chance state lottery mode determination table (when staying in High mode))
The first chance state lottery mode determination table (during high mode stay) is provided in the sub-ROM 402, and the mode is determined based on the winning combination determined by the internal lottery process described later in the state of staying in the high mode. Is provided to determine whether or not to transition. Here, in the present embodiment, the first chance state lottery mode determination table (when staying in the High mode) includes a case where “losing” is determined as a winning combination by an internal lottery process described later, and a “ready state” The mode transition lottery is performed when “transition replay” is determined, when “push order bell” is determined as the winning combination, and when “common bell” is determined as the winning combination.

(First chance state lottery mode determination table (when staying in SP mode))
The first chance state lottery mode determination table (when the SP mode is staying) is provided in the sub ROM 402, and the mode is determined based on the winning combination determined by the internal lottery process described later while staying in the SP mode. Is provided to determine whether or not to transition. Here, in the present embodiment, the first chance state lottery mode determination table (when the SP mode is staying) shows that the case where “losing” is determined as the winning combination by the internal lottery process described later, The mode transition lottery is performed when “transition replay” is determined, when “push order bell” is determined as the winning combination, and when “common bell” is determined as the winning combination.

  Here, in this embodiment, the Low mode is a mode in which it is difficult to shift to the first chance state as compared with the High mode and the SP mode. Further, the High mode is a mode in which the transition to the first chance state is easier than in the Low mode. Further, the SP mode is a mode in which it is easier to shift to the first chance state than the Low mode or the High mode. Therefore, the most advantageous mode for the player is the SP mode, and the most unfavorable mode for the player is the Low mode.

  The Low mode, High mode, and SP mode are information related to the ease of transition to the first chance state, and are different concepts from the above-described specific mode and normal mode.

(First chance state lottery mode determination table (others when staying in Low mode))
The first chance state lottery mode determination table (other when staying in the Low mode) is provided in the sub-ROM 402, and the mode transition is performed based on the fact that a predetermined condition is satisfied while staying in the Low mode. It is provided to determine whether or not to do so. Here, in the present embodiment, the first chance state lottery mode determination table (others when staying in the Low mode) is (a) when the setting value of the gaming machine 1 is changed, and (b) after the first Bonus state ends. When the combination of symbols related to “blank” is displayed on the active line in the first fall standby state of (c), the symbol related to “blank” in the first fall standby state after the second Bonus state ends. When the combination of is displayed on the active line (d) In the fourth fall standby state, when the symbol combination related to “blank” is displayed on the active line, (e) the first chance state is terminated. It is used for mode transition lottery when transitioning to the normal state.

  In the present embodiment, when the setting value of the gaming machine 1 is changed, even if the mode before the setting value is changed is the High mode or the SP mode, the first chance state lottery mode determination table (Low) A lottery will be performed using the “Other” mode.

(First chance state lottery mode decision table (others when staying in High mode))
The first chance state lottery mode determination table (others when staying in the High mode) is provided in the sub-ROM 402, and the mode is shifted based on a predetermined condition being satisfied in the state of staying in the High mode. It is provided to determine whether or not to do so. Here, in the present embodiment, the first chance state lottery mode determination table (others when staying in the High mode) (a) in the first fall standby state after the end of the first Bonus state, When the combination is displayed on the active line, (b) In the first fall standby state after the end of the second Bonus state, when the symbol combination related to “blank” is displayed on the active line, (c) When the symbol combination related to “blank” is displayed on the active line in the fourth fall standby state, (e) the first chance state is completed and used for the mode transition lottery when the normal state is entered.

(First chance state lottery mode decision table (others when staying in SP mode))
The first chance state lottery mode determination table (other during SP mode stay) is provided in the sub-ROM 402, and the mode transition is performed based on a predetermined condition being satisfied in the state staying in the SP mode. It is provided to determine whether or not to do so. Here, in the present embodiment, the first chance state lottery mode determination table (other when staying in the SP mode) is (a) in the first fall standby state after the completion of the first bonus state, When the combination is displayed on the active line, (b) In the first fall standby state after the end of the second Bonus state, when the symbol combination related to “blank” is displayed on the active line, (c) When the symbol combination related to “blank” is displayed on the active line in the fourth fall standby state, (e) the first chance state is completed and used for the mode transition lottery when the normal state is entered.

(Normal point acquisition lottery table)
Next, the normal state point acquisition lottery table will be described with reference to FIG.

  The normal state point acquisition lottery table is provided in the sub ROM 402. In the normal state point acquisition lottery table, (a) first normal state point acquisition that is referred to when the number of games played since the transition to the normal state is from “1” game to “200” game. The lottery table (see FIG. 49A) and (b) second point acquisition for normal state which is referred to when the number of games played after shifting to the normal state is from “201” game to “400” game A lottery table (see FIG. 49B) and (c) third point acquisition for normal state that is referred to when the number of games played since the transition to the normal state is “401” game to “600” game A lottery table (see FIG. 49C) and (d) acquisition of fourth point for normal state which is referred to when the number of games played after shifting to the normal state is from “601” game to “800” game lottery Table (see FIG. 49D), and (e) a normal state fifth point acquisition lottery table (FIG. 49) that is referred to when the number of games played since the transition to the normal state is “801” or later. (See (E)), and (f) when performing a lottery to determine whether or not to give points for the normal state according to the number of games that have not won the predetermined winning combination since winning the predetermined winning combination last time And the normal state point acquisition lottery table (between rare roles) (see FIG. 49 (F)) and (g) the third chance state and the fourth chance state are finished, and it is decided to shift to the normal state. The normal state point acquisition lottery table (chance state failure) (see FIG. 49 (G)) and (h) a plurality of games. Continuous production performed over the years Finally, when it is informed that the state does not shift to a state advantageous to the player, a normal state point acquisition lottery table (continuous) used when performing a lottery as to whether or not to give a normal state point is given. (Production failure) (see FIG. 49 (H)) and (i) whether or not the point for normal state is to be given when the point to be described later becomes “0” and shifts from the fourth fall standby state to the normal state. Whether or not points are granted when the normal state point acquisition lottery table (ART state end) (see FIG. 49 (I)) used when the lottery is performed and (j) the setting value of the gaming machine 1 is changed. It is configured by a normal state point acquisition lottery table (when setting is changed) used when performing such lottery (see FIG. 49J).

(Normal state first point acquisition lottery table)
The normal state first point acquisition lottery table is provided in the sub ROM 402, and the number of games played after the transition to the normal state after the state advantageous to the player such as the Bonus state ends is “1”. It is a table used in the case of a “200” game, when lottery is performed to determine whether or not to give a normal state point based on a winning combination determined by an internal lottery process described later.

(Normal condition second point acquisition lottery table)
The normal state second point acquisition lottery table is provided in the sub ROM 402, and the number of games played after the transition to the normal state after the state advantageous to the player such as the Bonus state ends is “201”. It is a table used when lottery is performed to determine whether or not to give a point for a normal state based on a winning combination determined by an internal lottery process described later in the case of a “400” game. Here, when the normal state point is selected using the normal state second point acquisition lottery table, the normal state point is assigned using the normal state first point acquisition lottery table. Compared to the case where whether or not to perform the lottery, points for the normal state are easily given.

(Normal condition third point acquisition lottery table)
The normal state third point acquisition lottery table is provided in the sub ROM 402, and the number of games played after the transition to the normal state after the state advantageous to the player such as the Bonus state ends is “401”. It is a table used in the case of “600” game when lottery is performed to determine whether or not to give a point for a normal state based on a winning combination determined by an internal lottery process described later. Here, when the normal state point is selected using the normal state third point acquisition lottery table, the normal state point is provided using the normal state second point acquisition lottery table. Compared to the case where whether or not to perform the lottery, points for the normal state are easily given.

(Normal condition fourth point acquisition lottery table)
The normal state fourth point acquisition lottery table is provided in the sub-ROM 402, and the number of games played after the transition to the normal state after the state advantageous to the player such as the Bonus state ends is “601”. It is a table used in the case of “800” game, when lottery is performed to determine whether or not to give a normal state point based on a winning combination determined by an internal lottery process described later. Here, when the normal state point is selected using the normal state fourth point acquisition lottery table, the normal state point is assigned using the normal state third point acquisition lottery table. Compared to the case where whether or not to perform the lottery, points for the normal state are easily given.

(Normal condition fifth point acquisition lottery table)
The normal state fifth point acquisition lottery table is provided in the sub ROM 402, and after the state advantageous to the player such as the Bonus state ends, the number of games played after the transition to the normal state is “801” or later games. In this case, based on the winning combination determined by the internal lottery process to be described later, the table is used when lottery is performed to determine whether or not to give a normal state point. Here, when the normal state point is selected using the normal state fifth point acquisition lottery table, the normal state point is assigned using the normal state fourth point acquisition lottery table. Compared to the case where whether or not to perform the lottery, points for the normal state are easily given.

  In the present embodiment, as described above, the probability that the points for the normal state are given increases as the value of the number of games played after shifting to the normal state increases. In the present embodiment, as described above, the larger the value of the number of games played after shifting to the normal state, the more points for normal state are awarded. Thereby, the stress of the player who has stayed in the normal state for a long time can be reduced.

(Normal status point acquisition lottery table (between rare roles))
The normal state point acquisition lottery table (between rare roles) is provided in the sub-ROM 402, and lottery of normal state points to be given to the player according to the number of games that have not won the predetermined winning combination Used when performing. Here, in the present embodiment, the normal state point acquisition lottery table (between rare roles) has (a) the number of games that have not won the predetermined winning combination since the previous predetermined winning combination was won. The lottery value used in the case of a game, and (b) the lottery value used when the number of games that have not won the predetermined winning combination since the previous predetermined winning combination was won is a “200” game. And (c) a lottery value to be used when the number of games that have not won the predetermined winning combination since the previous winning winning combination is “300”. In addition, since the number of games that have not been selected for the predetermined winning combination since the previous predetermined winning combination was won for “300” games, after the predetermined predetermined winning combination for each “100” game, The lottery will be performed using the lottery value used when the number of games that have not won the predetermined winning combination is the “300” game.

  Here, in this embodiment, “chance eye replay CR2”, “watermelon”, “weak cherry”, “middle cherry”, “chance eye CN1”, or “chance eye CN2” is applied as a predetermined winning combination. However, the present invention is not limited to this and can be set as appropriate.

  In the present embodiment, the larger the value of the number of games that have not won the predetermined winning combination since the previous predetermined winning combination was won, the higher the probability that the normal state points will be given. Yes. Further, in the present embodiment, the larger the value of the number of games that have not won the predetermined winning combination since the previous predetermined winning combination was won, the more points for normal state are given. Become. Thereby, for a long time, it is possible to reduce the stress of a player who has continued a game in which a predetermined winning combination is not won.

(Normal state point acquisition lottery table (Chance state failure))
The normal state point acquisition lottery table (chance state failure) is provided in the sub ROM 402, and the third chance state or the fourth chance state ends, and the normal state does not shift to the ART preparation state or the RUSH preparation state. When it is decided to shift to the state, it is used when lottery points for the normal state to be given to the player are drawn. Here, in the normal state point acquisition lottery table (chance state failure), it is determined that (a) the third chance state ends and the normal state is not transferred to the ART ready state or the RUSH ready state. If it is determined that the player has chosen a lottery value corresponding to the point for the normal state to be given to the player, and (b) the fourth chance state ends, it is decided not to shift to the RUSH ready state but to shift to the normal state In this case, a lottery value corresponding to the points for the normal state to be given to the player is defined.

  In the present embodiment, when it is determined that the fourth chance state is finished and the transition to the normal state is made instead of the transition to the RUSH ready state, the third chance state is finished and the ART ready state or Compared with the case where it is decided not to shift to the RUSH ready state but to shift to the normal state, more points for the normal state are given. Thereby, when it is determined that the fourth chance state ends and the transition to the normal state is made without shifting to the RUSH preparation state, the player's stress can be reduced.

(Normal state point acquisition lottery table (continuous production failure))
The normal state point acquisition lottery table (continuous production failure) is provided in the sub ROM 402. When the continuous production is executed and it is finally notified that the player does not shift to a state advantageous to the player, It is used when the normal state points to be given to the person are drawn. Here, the first continuous effect defined in the normal state point acquisition lottery table (continuous effect failure) is a continuous effect that is difficult to select when it is determined to shift to a state advantageous to the player. Further, the second continuous effect is a continuous effect that is easily selected when it is determined to shift to a state advantageous to the player as compared to the first continuous effect. In addition, the third continuous effect is a continuous effect that is easily selected when it is determined to shift to a state advantageous to the player as compared to the second continuous effect. Further, the fourth continuous effect is a continuous effect that is easily selected when it is determined to shift to a state advantageous to the player as compared to the third continuous effect. In addition, the fifth continuous effect is a continuous effect that is easily selected when it is determined to shift to a state advantageous to the player as compared to the fourth continuous effect. Therefore, the continuous effect that can be most expected to shift to a state advantageous to the player is the fifth continuous effect, and the continuous effect that can be expected to shift to a state advantageous to the player next is The fourth continuous effect, the next continuous effect that can be expected to shift to a state advantageous to the player is the third continuous effect, and the next is expected to shift to a state advantageous to the player The continuous effect that can be performed is the second continuous effect, and the continuous effect that cannot be expected to shift to a state advantageous to the player is the first continuous effect.

  In this embodiment, the more the continuous production that can be expected to shift to a state advantageous to the player, the more the continuous production is executed, and finally the transition to the state advantageous to the player. When it is notified that it will not, many points for normal state will be awarded. As a result, a continuous performance that can be expected to shift to a state advantageous to the player is executed, and the player's stress when it is finally notified that the state does not shift to a advantageous state for the player is notified. Can be reduced.

(Normal state point acquisition lottery table (ART state end))
The normal state point acquisition lottery table (ART state end) is provided in the sub ROM 402, and the points for normal state to be given to the player when the point described later becomes “0” and the battle state ends. Used when performing the lottery. Here, in the normal state point acquisition lottery table (ART state end), after shifting to the ART state, the ART state is ended in the “40” game without the addition of the ART point, and the ART state is once from the battle state. The special case lottery value that is referred to when it is decided to shift to the normal state after shifting to the 4th falling standby state without shifting to, and the normal case lottery value when not falling into the special case are defined Has been.

  In the present embodiment, when the special case is applied, more normal state points are given compared to the case where the special case is applied. Thereby, a player's stress at the time of falling into a special case can be reduced. In the present embodiment, when the ART point described later is “0” and the battle state is ended, the normal state point is given using the normal state point acquisition lottery table (ART state end). When the transition from the fourth fall standby state to the normal state is made, it is possible to reduce the decrease in the willingness to continue the game.

(Normal point acquisition lottery table (when setting is changed))
The normal state point acquisition lottery table (when the setting is changed) is provided in the sub-ROM 402, and when the setting value of the gaming machine 1 is changed, when the lottery whether or not to give the normal state point is performed. Used. Here, in the normal state point acquisition lottery table (when the setting is changed), a lottery value corresponding to the normal state point is defined for each set value.

  In the present embodiment, when the set value of the gaming machine 1 is changed, the higher the set value after the change, the more points for the normal state are given. Thereby, when many points for normal states are provided at the time of opening of a game store, it can be expected that a set value is high. In addition, if the amusement store is closed with the normal state points acquired, the normal state points must be granted based on the normal state point acquisition lottery table (when the setting is changed) when the amusement store is opened the next day. Then, there is a problem that the player understands that the set value has been changed. On the other hand, it is difficult for the player to understand that the set value has been changed by giving the normal state point based on the normal state point acquisition lottery table (when the setting is changed).

(Rare role initial game number determination table)
Next, a rare role initial game number determination table will be described with reference to FIG.

  The rare role initial game number determination table is provided in the sub-ROM 402, and when the setting value of the gaming machine 1 is changed, the game that has not won the predetermined winning combination after the setting value is changed. It is provided to determine how many games the number is to be awarded with points for the normal state.

  In addition, when the set value of the gaming machine 1 is changed, when clearing the number of games that have not been won for the predetermined winning combination since the previous winning combination was won, If there is no lottery for whether or not points will be awarded until the number of games that are not won in the winning role is “100” games, it is highly likely that the set value has been changed. If the points for the normal state are given until the number of games that have not won the predetermined winning combination from the opening of the store reaches “100” games, it is highly likely that the set value has not been changed. Will be recognized. On the other hand, when the setting value of the gaming machine 1 is changed, the number of games that have not won the predetermined winning combination since the setting value was changed based on the rare game initial game number determination table. It is difficult for the player to recognize whether or not the set value of the gaming machine 1 has been changed by determining how many games will be awarded the normal state points.

(First chance state transition lottery table)
Next, the first chance state transition lottery table will be described with reference to FIG.

  The first chance state transition lottery table includes: (a) a first chance state transition lottery table (in Low mode & second chance state non-winning) used when not in the low chance state in the Low mode; ) In the Low mode, the first chance state transition lottery table used when the fifth chance precursor state is in effect (Low mode & second chance state being selected), and (c) In the High mode, when the fifth chance precursor state is not established First chance state transition lottery table (High mode & second chance state non-winning) used in (1) and (d) High chance mode first lottery state transition lottery table (High) Mode & 2nd chance status elected) and (e) 5th chance in SP mode First chance state transition lottery table (SP mode & second chance state not winning) used when not in trillion state, and (f) First chance state used in fifth mode pre-sign state in SP mode Consists of a transfer lottery table (SP mode & second chance state winning).

(First chance state transition lottery table (Low mode & second chance state not selected))
The first chance state transition lottery table (Low mode & second chance state not winning) is provided in the sub-ROM 402, and shifts to the first chance state when the fifth chance is not a precursor state in the Low mode. It is used when drawing whether or not. Specifically, in the first chance state transition lottery table (Low mode & second chance state non-winning), a lottery value indicating whether or not to shift to the first chance state is defined for each winning combination.

(First Chance State Transition Lottery Table (Low Mode & Second Chance State Winning))
The first chance state transition lottery table (Low mode & second chance state winning) is provided in the sub-ROM 402, and in the Low mode, whether the transition to the first chance state occurs when the fifth chance precursor state is established. Used when performing a lottery. Specifically, in the first chance state transition lottery table (Low mode & second chance state winning), a lottery value indicating whether or not to shift to the first chance state is defined for each winning combination.

  Here, in the present embodiment, the first chance state transition lottery table (Low mode & No. 2) is selected by using the first chance state transition lottery table (Low mode & second chance state not winning). The lottery value is defined so that it is easier to shift to the first chance state than when the lottery is performed using the “2 chance state winning”.

  Note that the first chance state transition lottery table (Low mode & second chance state not winning) is the first chance state transition lottery table (Low mode & second chance state not winning). The lottery value may be defined so that it is easier to shift to the first chance state than to perform the lottery using, the first chance state transition lottery table (Low mode & second chance state winning), the first The same lottery value may be defined in the chance state transition lottery table (Low mode & in the second chance state non-winning state).

(First Chance State Transition Lottery Table (High Mode & Second Chance State Not Selected))
A first chance state transition lottery table (High mode & second chance state not won) is provided in the sub-ROM 402, and transitions to the first chance state when the fifth chance is not a precursor state in the High mode. It is used when drawing whether or not. Specifically, in the first chance state transition lottery table (High mode & second chance state non-winning), a lottery value indicating whether or not to shift to the first chance state is defined for each winning combination.

(First Chance State Transition Lottery Table (High Mode & Second Chance State Winning))
The first chance state transition lottery table (high mode & second chance state winning) is provided in the sub-ROM 402, and in the high mode, whether the transition to the first chance state occurs when the fifth chance precursor state is established. Used when performing a lottery. Specifically, the lottery value indicating whether or not to shift to the first chance state is defined for each winning combination in the first chance state transition lottery table (High mode & second chance state being won).

  Here, in the present embodiment, the first chance state transition lottery table (High mode & second mode) is selected by using the first chance state transition lottery table (High mode & second chance state being won). The lottery value is defined so that it is easier to shift to the first chance state than when the lottery is performed using the chance state non-winning).

  If the lottery is performed using the first chance state transition lottery table (high mode & second chance state not won), the first chance state transition lottery table (high mode & second chance state won) The lottery value may be defined so that it is easier to shift to the first chance state than to perform the lottery using, the first chance state transition lottery table (High mode & second chance state being won), the first The same lottery value may be defined in the chance state transition lottery table (High mode & second chance state not being won).

(First chance state transition lottery table (SP mode & second chance state not winning))
The first chance state transition lottery table (SP mode & second chance state non-winning) is provided in the sub ROM 402, and transitions to the first chance state in the SP mode when it is not the fifth chance precursor state. It is used when drawing whether or not. Specifically, in the first chance state transition lottery table (SP mode & second chance state non-winning), a lottery value indicating whether or not to shift to the first chance state is defined for each winning combination.

(First chance state transition lottery table (SP mode & second chance state winning))
The first chance state transition lottery table (SP mode & second chance state winning) is provided in the sub-ROM 402, and in the SP mode, whether the transition to the first chance state occurs when the fifth chance precursor state is established. Used when performing a lottery. Specifically, in the first chance state transition lottery table (SP mode & second chance state winning), a lottery value indicating whether or not to shift to the first chance state is defined for each winning combination.

  Here, in the present embodiment, the first chance state transition lottery table (SP mode & second) is selected by using the first chance state transition lottery table (SP mode & second chance state being won). The lottery value is defined so that it is easier to shift to the first chance state than when the lottery is performed using the chance state non-winning).

  The first chance state transition lottery table (SP mode & second chance state non-winning) makes the first chance state transition lottery table (SP mode & second chance state winning). The lottery value may be defined so that it is easier to shift to the first chance state than using the lottery, and the first chance state transition lottery table (in SP mode & second chance state winning) and the first The same lottery value may be defined in the chance state transition lottery table (SP mode & second chance state not being won).

  In addition, a first chance state transition lottery table (Low mode & second chance state non-winning), a first chance state transition lottery table (High mode & second chance state non-winning), and a first chance state transition lottery Comparing the tables (SP mode & second chance state not winning), if the lottery is performed using the first chance state transition lottery table (SP mode & second chance state not winning), the first chance The first chance than when the lottery is performed using the state transition lottery table (Low mode & second chance state non-winning) or the first chance state transition lottery table (High mode & second chance state non-winning) It becomes easy to shift to the state.

  In addition, a first chance state transition lottery table (Low mode & second chance state winning), a first chance state transition lottery table (High mode & second chance state winner), and a first chance state transition lottery table ( Comparing SP mode & second chance state winning) When the lottery is performed using the first chance state transition lottery table (SP mode & second chance state winning), the first chance state transition lottery table It is easier to enter the first chance state than when a lottery is performed using the (Low mode & second chance state winning) or the first chance state transfer lottery table (High mode & second chance state winning). ing.

(Second chance state transition lottery table)
Next, the second chance state transition lottery table will be described with reference to FIG.

  The second chance state transition lottery table is (a) a second chance state transition lottery table (normal state: normal) used when the normal state points currently acquired are “0” to “32” in the normal state. (Point for state = 0 to 32) (see FIG. 52A), and (b) second chance used when the normal state points currently acquired are “33” to “76” in the normal state. State transition lottery table (normal state: normal state points = 33 to 76) (see FIG. 52B) and (c) normal state points currently acquired in the normal state are “77” to “109” ”Second chance state transition lottery table (normal state: normal state points = 77 to 109) (see FIG. 52C) and (d) the currently acquired communication in the normal state. The second chance state transition lottery table (normal state: normal state point = 110) (see FIG. 52D) used when the state point is “110”, and (e) in the first chance state, Second chance state transition lottery table used when the acquired normal state points are “0” to “32” (first chance state: normal state points = 0 to 32) (see FIG. 52E). ), And (f) in the first chance state, the second chance state transition lottery table (first chance state: for the normal state) used when the currently acquired points for the normal state are “33” to “76” (Point = 33 to 76) (see FIG. 52 (F)) and (g) in the first chance state, it is used when the normal state points currently acquired are “77” to “109”. Second chance state transition lottery table (first chance state: normal state points = 77 to 109) (see FIG. 52G), and (h) normal state points currently acquired in the first chance state Is a second chance state transition lottery table (first chance state: normal state point = 110) (see FIG. 52 (H)) used in the case of “110”.

(Second chance state transition lottery table (normal state: normal state points = 0 to 32))
The second chance state transition lottery table (normal state: normal state points = 0 to 32) is provided in the sub ROM 402. In the normal state, the value of the normal state points acquired by the player is “0”. ”To“ 32 ”, it is used when drawing whether or not to shift to the second chance state. Here, in the second chance state transition lottery table (normal state: normal state points = 0 to 32), a lottery value is defined for each winning combination. In the second chance state transition lottery table (normal state: normal state points = 0 to 32), different lottery values are defined for each set value.

(Second chance state transition lottery table (normal state: normal state points = 33 to 76))
The second chance state transition lottery table (normal state: normal state points = 33 to 76) is provided in the sub-ROM 402, and the normal state point value acquired by the player in the normal state is “33”. ”To“ 76 ”, it is used when drawing whether or not to shift to the second chance state. Here, in the second chance state transition lottery table (normal state: normal state points = 33 to 76), lottery values are defined for each winning combination. In the second chance state transition lottery table (normal state: normal state points = 33 to 76), different lottery values are defined for each set value.

(Second chance state transition lottery table (normal state: normal state points = 77 to 109))
The second chance state transition lottery table (normal state: normal state points = 77 to 109) is provided in the sub-ROM 402, and the normal state point value acquired by the player in the normal state is “77”. In the case of “109” to “109”, it is used when drawing whether or not to shift to the second chance state. Here, in the second chance state transition lottery table (normal state: normal state points = 77 to 109), a lottery value is defined for each winning combination. In the second chance state transition lottery table (normal state: normal state points = 77 to 109), different lottery values are defined for each set value.

(Second chance state transition lottery table (normal state: normal state point = 110))
The second chance state transition lottery table (normal state: normal state point = 110) is provided in the sub-ROM 402, and the normal state point value acquired by the player in the normal state is “110”. In this case, it is used when drawing whether or not to shift to the second chance state. Here, in the second chance state transition lottery table (normal state: normal state point = 110), a lottery value is defined for each winning combination. In the second chance state transition lottery table (normal state: normal state point = 110), different lottery values are defined for each set value.

  Here, the second chance state transition lottery table (normal state: normal state points = 0 to 32), the second chance state transition lottery table (normal state: normal state points = 33 to 76), and the second chance Comparing the state transition lottery table (normal state: normal state points = 77 to 109) with the second chance state transition lottery table (normal state: normal state points = 110), the normal state that the player has acquired The larger the value of the points for use, the easier it is to shift to the second chance state, and the lottery value is defined.

(Second chance state transition lottery table (first chance state: normal state points = 0 to 32))
The second chance state transition lottery table (first chance state: normal state points = 0 to 32) is provided in the sub-ROM 402, and in the first chance state, the normal state points acquired by the player are stored. When the value is “0” to “32”, it is used when drawing whether or not to shift to the second chance state. Here, in the second chance state transition lottery table (first chance state: normal state points = 0 to 32), lottery values are defined for each winning combination. In the second chance state transition lottery table (first chance state: normal state points = 0 to 32), different lottery values are defined for each set value.

(Second chance state transition lottery table (first chance state: normal state points = 33 to 76))
The second chance state transition lottery table (first chance state: normal state points = 33 to 76) is provided in the sub-ROM 402, and in the first chance state, the normal state points acquired by the player are stored. When the value is “33” to “76”, it is used when drawing whether or not to shift to the second chance state. Here, in the second chance state transition lottery table (first chance state: normal state points = 33 to 76), lottery values are defined for each winning combination. In the second chance state transition lottery table (first chance state: normal state points = 33 to 76), different lottery values are defined for each set value.

(Second chance state transition lottery table (first chance state: normal state points = 77 to 109))
The second chance state transition lottery table (first chance state: normal state points = 77 to 109) is provided in the sub ROM 402, and the normal state points that the player has acquired in the first chance state. When the value is “77” to “109”, it is used when drawing whether or not to shift to the second chance state. Here, in the second chance state transition lottery table (first chance state: normal state points = 77 to 109), lottery values are defined for each winning combination. In the second chance state transition lottery table (first chance state: normal state points = 77 to 109), different lottery values are defined for each set value.

(Second chance state transition lottery table (first chance state: normal state point = 110))
The second chance state transition lottery table (first chance state: normal state point = 110) is provided in the sub-ROM 402, and the value of the normal state point acquired by the player in the first chance state is set. In the case of “110”, it is used when drawing whether or not to shift to the second chance state. Here, in the second chance state transition lottery table (first chance state: normal state point = 110), a lottery value is defined for each winning combination. In the second chance state transition lottery table (first chance state: normal state point = 110), different lottery values are defined for each set value.

  Here, the second chance state transition lottery table (first chance state: normal state points = 0 to 32) and the second chance state transition lottery table (first chance state: normal state points = 33 to 76) When the second chance state transition lottery table (first chance state: normal state points = 77 to 109) and the second chance state transition lottery table (first chance state: normal state points = 110) are compared, The larger the value of the normal state points acquired by the person, the easier it is to shift to the second chance state, and the lottery value is defined.

(Chance state transition lottery table)
Next, the chance state transition lottery table will be described with reference to FIG.

  The chance state transition lottery table includes (A) chance state transition lottery table (when reaching the ceiling) (see FIG. 53A) and (B) chance state transition lottery table (when staying at high probability) (FIG. 53B). Reference).

(Chance state transition lottery table (when reaching the ceiling))
The chance state transition lottery table (at the time of reaching the ceiling) is provided in the sub-ROM 402, and in the first fall standby state, a combination of symbols related to “blank” is displayed on the active line, and then a game such as a bonus state is displayed. When a lottery is performed to determine whether to shift to the third chance state or the fourth chance state when the number of times of winning a predetermined winning combination reaches a predetermined number without shifting to a state advantageous to the player Used for. Here, in the chance state transition lottery table (at the time of reaching the ceiling), a lottery value relating to the transition of the third chance state for each winning combination and a lottery value relating to the transition of the fourth chance state for each winning combination are defined. .

(Chance state transition lottery table (high probability stay))
The chance state transition lottery table (at the time of high probability stay) is provided in the sub ROM 402, and performs a lottery to determine whether or not to shift to the third chance state and the fourth chance state in a state of staying with high probability. Used when. Here, in the chance state transition lottery table (at the time of high probability stay), a lottery value related to the transition of the third chance state for each winning combination and a lottery value related to the transition of the fourth chance state for each winning combination are defined. Yes.

(Signed lottery table)
Next, the precursor lottery table will be described with reference to FIG.

  The sign lottery table is provided in the sub ROM 402, and as a result of performing the lottery using the chance state transition lottery table (when reaching the ceiling) or the chance state transition lottery table (when staying at high probability), the third chance state is obtained. To determine whether to transition to the first chance precursor state or the second chance precursor state when it is determined to transition or when it is determined to transition to the fourth chance state Is provided. Here, in the sign lottery table, for each winning combination, a lottery value related to the transition to the first chance sign state and a lottery value related to the transition to the second chance sign state are defined.

(Sign game number lottery table)
Next, the precursor game number lottery table will be described with reference to FIG.

  The sign game number lottery table is provided in the sub ROM 402, and when it is determined based on the sign lottery table whether to shift to the first chance sign state or the second chance sign state, It is provided to determine the number of games until the transition to the 3-chance state or the fourth-chance state. Here, the sign game number lottery table indicates that when the third chance state is won, when it is determined to shift to the first chance sign state, when the third chance state is won, the second chance sign state If it is decided to shift to the fourth chance state, if it is decided to move to the first chance precursor state, if the fourth chance state is won, the second chance precursor state A lottery value is defined for each of the cases where it is decided to shift to.

(High probability game lottery table)
Next, the high probability game number lottery table will be described with reference to FIG.

  The high probability game number lottery table includes (a) a high probability game number lottery table (when the third chance state is first hit) (see FIG. 56A), and (b) a high probability game number lottery table (third chance state). (At the time of hitting) (see FIG. 56 (B)), (c) high-probability game number lottery table (at the time of the fourth chance state + reaching the ceiling) (see FIG. 56 (C)), and (d) a high-probability game The number lottery table (at the time of the fourth chance state transition) (see FIG. 56D) and (e) the high probability game number lottery table (at the time of high probability) (see FIG. 56E).

(High probability game number lottery table (at the time of the third chance state first hit))
The high-probability game number lottery table (when the third chance state is first hit) is provided in the sub ROM 402, and it is determined once to shift to the third chance state after the setting value of the gaming machine 1 is changed. In the case where it is determined that the transition to the third chance state has not been made, it is provided for drawing the number of games that stay with high probability. Here, the high-probability game number lottery table (at the first chance of the third chance state) defines a lottery value of the number of games that stay with high probability for each mode.

(High-probability number-of-games lottery table (when 3rd chance state is hit))
The high-probability game number lottery table (when the third chance state is already hit) is provided in the sub ROM 402, and after the setting value of the gaming machine 1 is changed, it is determined that the transition to the third chance state is made. In this case, when it is decided to shift to the third chance state, it is provided for drawing the number of games that stay with high probability. Here, in the high probability game number lottery table (when the third chance state is hit), lottery values of the number of games staying with high probability are defined for each mode.

(High probability game number lottery table (4th chance state transition + ceiling reached))
The high probability game number lottery table (at the time of the fourth chance state transition + ceiling arrival) is provided in the sub-ROM 402, and in the first fall standby state, the combination of symbols related to “blank” is displayed on the active line. In the case where it is decided not to shift to a state advantageous to the player but to shift to the fourth chance state after a predetermined number of games (for example, “1000” game) are played. It is provided to draw lots of games that stay with high probability. Here, in the high probability game number lottery table (at the time of the fourth chance state transition + ceiling arrival), a lottery value of the number of games that stay with high probability is defined for each mode.

(High probability game number lottery table (at the time of the 4th chance state transition))
The high probability game number lottery table (at the time of the fourth chance state transition) is provided in the sub-ROM 402, and when the transition to the fourth chance state is determined, the number of games staying at a high probability is selected. Is provided. Here, in the high probability game number lottery table (at the time of transition to the fourth chance state), lottery values of the number of games staying with high probability are defined for each mode.

(High probability game lottery table (high probability))
The high-probability game number lottery table (at the time of high probability) is provided in the sub-ROM 402, and is provided to perform a lottery for adding the number of games that stay with high probability when staying with high probability. ing. Here, in the high probability game number lottery table (at the time of high probability), lottery values of the number of games staying with high probability are defined for each mode.

(First chance state lottery table)
Next, the first chance state lottery table will be described with reference to FIG.

  The first chance state lottery table includes: (a) a first chance state point acquisition lottery table (FIG. 57A) that is used when lottery is performed to determine whether or not to acquire normal state points in the first chance state. And (b) when the set value of the gaming machine 1 is an odd number, the first used for lottery whether or not to continue the first chance state when staying in the first chance state. The chance chance continuation lottery table (odd number setting) (see FIG. 57B) and (c) when the set value of the gaming machine 1 is an even number, the first chance It is configured by a first chance state continuous lottery table (even number setting) (see FIG. 57 (C)) used when lottery of whether or not to continue the state.

(Point acquisition lottery table for the first chance state)
The first chance state point acquisition lottery table is provided in the sub ROM 402, and in the first chance state, whether or not to give the normal state point based on the winning combination determined by the internal lottery process described later. Used when drawing lots. Here, in the first chance state point acquisition lottery table, for each winning combination, a lottery value relating to a normal state point that the player will acquire is defined.

(First chance state continuous lottery table (odd number setting))
The first chance state continuous lottery table (odd number setting) is provided in the sub ROM 402, and when the setting value of the gaming machine 1 is an odd number, when the first chance state is staying, the first chance state It is used when drawing whether or not to continue. Here, in the first chance state continuous lottery table (odd number setting), a lottery value is defined for each winning combination.

(First chance state continuous lottery table (even number setting))
The first chance state continuous lottery table (even number setting) is provided in the sub ROM 402, and when the setting value of the gaming machine 1 is an even number, when the first chance state remains, the first chance state It is used when drawing whether or not to continue. Here, in the first chance state continuous lottery table (even number setting), a lottery value is defined for each winning combination.

(Second chance state lottery table)
Next, the second chance state lottery table will be described with reference to FIG.

  The second chance state lottery table includes (a) a second chance state character lottery table (see FIG. 58A) used when determining a character to be displayed on the liquid crystal display device 46 in the second chance state. (B) The second chance state point acquisition lottery table (see FIG. 58B) in which the second chance state points to be acquired in the second chance state are defined.

(Character lottery table for second chance state)
The second chance state character lottery table is provided in the sub ROM 402. In the second chance state, the character displayed on the liquid crystal display device 46 every time the player uses the normal state point acquired by the player. Is provided to determine. Here, the probability of selecting a pseudo-continuous effect described later differs depending on the character determined using the second chance state character lottery table. In the second chance state character lottery table, a lottery value is defined for each character.

  Here, the “pseudo-continuous effect” means that in the second chance state, “11” is used as the normal state point to determine whether or not to shift to the Bonus preparation state, and a plurality of games from the lottery game are selected. This is an effect that is performed until the game is played and the notification of whether or not to shift to the Bonus ready state is made.

(Point acquisition lottery table for second chance state)
The second chance state point acquisition lottery table is defined in the sub ROM 402, and is provided for determining the second chance state points to be acquired according to the pseudo-continuous effect selected in the second chance state. . Here, in the second chance state point acquisition lottery table, second chance state points to be acquired in correspondence with the pseudo-continuous effects are defined. For example, when “3” pseudo-continuous effects are selected, the second chance state point “10” is acquired in the first game. In the next game, the second chance state point “20” is acquired. In the next game, the second chance state point “20” is acquired. Finally, in the next game, the second chance state point “20” is acquired. Therefore, when “11” is used for the normal state points acquired by the player and “3” pseudo-continuous effects are selected, “70” is acquired as the second chance state points.

(Judge lottery table)
Next, the judge lottery table will be described with reference to FIG.

  The judge lottery table includes (a) a judge lottery table (no pseudo-continuous effect) (refer to FIG. 59A) referred to when pseudo-continuity is selected in the second chance state, and (b) second In the chance state, the judge lottery table (see “pseudo continuous effect“ 1 ”times”) (see FIG. 59B) that is referred to when the “1” pseudo continuous effect is selected, and (c) in the second chance state. In the judgment lottery table (pseudo continuous effect “2” times) (see FIG. 59C) referred to when the “2” pseudo continuous effect is selected, and (d) in the second chance state, This is constituted by a judge lottery table (pseudo-continuous effect “3” times) (see FIG. 59D) referred to when the effect “3” times is selected.

(Judge lottery table (no simulated rendition))
The judge lottery table (without pseudo-continuous production) is provided in the sub ROM 402, and is provided for drawing whether or not to shift to the Bonus preparation state when the pseudo-continuous production is not performed in the second chance state. ing. Specifically, the judge lottery table (without pseudo-continuous production) is “lost”, “win”, “pseudo-ream“ 4 ”times” for each cumulative second chance state point acquired by the player, A “reverse” lottery value is defined. Here, when “losing” is determined as a result of the lottery, the state does not shift to the Bonus preparation state, and when “win” is determined, the state shifts to the Bonus preparation state. When “4” times ”is determined, the pseudo-continuous effect is executed“ 4 ”times and then the Bonus preparation state is entered. When“ reverse ”is determined, after the reverse effect, It will shift to the Bonus ready state. In the present embodiment, the “pseudo sequence“ 4 ”times” can be determined only when the lottery is performed using the judge lottery table (pseudo sequence effect “3” times).

(Judge lottery table (pseudo-continuous production “1”))
The judge lottery table (pseudo-continuous production “1” times) is provided in the sub-ROM 402, and in the second chance state, when performing the pseudo-continuous production “1” times, it is determined whether or not to shift to the Bonus preparation state. It is provided for lottery. Specifically, the judge lottery table (pseudo-continuous production “1” times) has a “losing”, “winning”, “pseudo-reaming“ 4 ”for each cumulative second chance state point acquired by the player. “Lot” and “Reverse” lottery values are defined.

(Judge lottery table (pseudo-continuous production “2” times))
The judge lottery table (pseudo-continuous production “2” times) is provided in the sub-ROM 402. In the second chance state, when performing the pseudo-continuous production “2” times, it is determined whether or not to shift to the Bonus preparation state. It is provided for lottery. More specifically, the judge lottery table (pseudo-continuous production “2” times) includes “losing”, “winning”, “pseudo-continuous“ 4 ”for each cumulative second chance state point acquired by the player. “Lot” and “Reverse” lottery values are defined.

(Judge lottery table (pseudo-continuous production “3” times))
The judgment lottery table (pseudo-continuous production “3” times) is provided in the sub-ROM 402, and in the second chance state, when performing the pseudo-continuous production “3” times, it is determined whether or not to shift to the Bonus preparation state. It is provided for lottery. More specifically, the judge lottery table (pseudo-continuous production “3” times) has “losing”, “winning”, “pseudo-continuous“ 4 ”for each cumulative second chance state point acquired by the player. “Lot” and “Reverse” lottery values are defined.

(Point acquisition lottery table for the second chance state)
Next, the second chance state point acquisition lottery table will be described with reference to FIG.

  The second chance state point acquisition lottery table is (a) the second chance state used when performing the lottery to determine whether or not to acquire the second chance state point when the pseudo-continuous performance is not executed. Whether or not to acquire the second chance state points when the point acquisition lottery table (no pseudo-continuous effect) (see FIG. 60A) and (b) the pseudo-continuous effect is executed “1” times. The second chance state point acquisition lottery table (pseudo-continuous effect “1”) (see FIG. 60B) and (c) pseudo-continuous effect “2” times are used when the lottery is performed. In this case, the second chance state point acquisition lottery table (pseudo-continuous production “2” times) used when performing the lottery to determine whether or not to acquire the second chance state point (see FIG. 60C). ), And (d) the second chance state point acquisition lottery table used when performing the lottery to determine whether or not to acquire the second chance state point when the pseudo-continuous performance is executed “3” times. (Pseudo-continuous production “3” times) (see FIG. 60D).

(Point acquisition lottery table for the second chance state (no pseudo-continuous production))
The second chance state point acquisition lottery table (no pseudo-continuous effect) is provided in the sub-ROM 402, and when the pseudo-continuous effect is not executed, whether or not the player acquires the second chance state point. It is used when the lottery is performed. Here, the second chance state point acquisition lottery table (no pseudo-continuous production) is determined according to the winning combination and whether or not the main control board 300 performs the reel lock production or the spinning production production. Is stipulated. For example, when the winning combination is “chance eye replay CR2”, if the reel lock effect or the spinning effect is not executed, the game is performed with the second chance state point “30” with a probability of “45896/65536”. The second chance state point “50” is determined to be given to the player with a probability of “15478/65536”, and the probability of “3962/65536” is determined. It is determined that the second chance state point “100” is to be given to the player.

  Here, in the present embodiment, the second chance state point acquisition lottery table (no pseudo-continuous effect) is used regardless of whether the main control board 300 performs a reel lock effect or a spinning effect. Although the same lottery value is prescribed according to one winning combination, it is not limited to this. For example, when one winning combination is determined, the case where the reel lock effect is performed is more relevant to the player than when the reel locking effect is not performed when the one winning combination is determined. A lottery value may be defined so that the second chance state points can be easily given. In addition, when one winning combination is determined, when the spinning effect is executed, when one winning combination is determined, when the reel lock effect and the rotating effect are not executed, When the winning combination is determined, a lottery value may be defined so that it is easier to give the player the second chance state point than when performing the reel lock effect.

(Point acquisition lottery table for the second chance state (pseudo-continuous production “1” times))
The second chance state point acquisition lottery table (pseudo-continuous production “1” times) is provided in the sub-ROM 402, and when the pseudo-continuous production is executed “1” times, the player is in the second chance state. Used when performing lottery to determine whether or not to earn points. Here, the second chance state point acquisition lottery table (pseudo-continuous effect “1” times) depends on whether the reel lock effect or the spinning effect is executed by the main control board 300. The lottery value is specified. For example, when the winning combination is “chance eye replay CR2”, if the reel lock effect or the spinning effect is not executed, the game is performed with the second chance state point “30” with a probability of “45896/65536”. The second chance state point “50” is determined to be given to the player with a probability of “15478/65536”, and the probability of “3962/65536” is determined. It is determined that the second chance state point “100” is to be given to the player.

  Here, in the present embodiment, the second chance state point acquisition lottery table (pseudo-continuous effect “1” times) is used to determine whether or not the main control board 300 performs a reel lock effect or a spinning effect. Regardless, although the same lottery value is prescribed according to one winning combination, it is not limited to this. For example, when one winning combination is determined, the case where the reel lock effect is performed is more relevant to the player than when the reel locking effect is not performed when the one winning combination is determined. A lottery value may be defined so that the second chance state points can be easily given. In addition, when one winning combination is determined, when the spinning effect is executed, when one winning combination is determined, when the reel lock effect and the rotating effect are not executed, When the winning combination is determined, a lottery value may be defined so that it is easier to give the player the second chance state point than when performing the reel lock effect.

(Second chance state point acquisition lottery table (pseudo-continuous production “2” times))
The second chance state point acquisition lottery table (pseudo-continuous production “2” times) is provided in the sub-ROM 402, and when the pseudo-continuous production is executed “2” times, the player can perform the second chance state. Used when performing lottery to determine whether or not to earn points. Here, the second chance state point acquisition lottery table (pseudo-continuous effect “2” times) depends on whether the reel lock effect or the spinning effect is executed by the main control board 300. The lottery value is specified. For example, when the winning combination is “chance eye replay CR2”, if the reel lock effect or the spinning effect is not executed, the game is performed with the second chance state point “30” with a probability of “45896/65536”. The second chance state point “50” is determined to be given to the player with a probability of “15478/65536”, and the probability of “3962/65536” is determined. It is determined that the second chance state point “100” is to be given to the player.

  Here, in the present embodiment, the second chance state point acquisition lottery table (pseudo-continuous effect “2” times) is used to determine whether or not the main control board 300 performs a reel lock effect or a spinning effect. Regardless, although the same lottery value is prescribed according to one winning combination, it is not limited to this. For example, when one winning combination is determined, the case where the reel lock effect is performed is more relevant to the player than when the reel locking effect is not performed when the one winning combination is determined. A lottery value may be defined so that the second chance state points can be easily given. In addition, when one winning combination is determined, when the spinning effect is executed, when one winning combination is determined, when the reel lock effect and the rotating effect are not executed, When the winning combination is determined, a lottery value may be defined so that it is easier to give the player the second chance state point than when performing the reel lock effect.

(Point acquisition lottery table for the second chance state (pseudo-continuous production “3” times))
The second chance state point acquisition lottery table (pseudo-continuous production “3” times) is provided in the sub-ROM 402, and when the pseudo-continuous production is executed “3” times, the player can play the second chance state. Used when performing lottery to determine whether or not to earn points. Here, the second chance state point acquisition lottery table (pseudo-continuous effect “3” times) depends on whether the reel lock effect or the spinning effect is executed by the main control board 300. The lottery value is specified. For example, when the winning combination is “chance eye replay CR2”, if the reel lock effect or the spinning effect is not executed, the game is performed with the second chance state point “30” with a probability of “45896/65536”. The second chance state point “50” is determined to be given to the player with a probability of “15478/65536”, and the probability of “3962/65536” is determined. It is determined that the second chance state point “100” is to be given to the player.

  Here, in the present embodiment, the second chance state point acquisition lottery table (pseudo-continuous effect “3” times) is used to determine whether the main control board 300 performs a reel lock effect or a spinning effect. Regardless, although the same lottery value is prescribed according to one winning combination, it is not limited to this. For example, when one winning combination is determined, the case where the reel lock effect is performed is more relevant to the player than when the reel locking effect is not performed when the one winning combination is determined. A lottery value may be defined so that the second chance state points can be easily given. In addition, when one winning combination is determined, when the spinning effect is executed, when one winning combination is determined, when the reel lock effect and the rotating effect are not executed, When the winning combination is determined, a lottery value may be defined so that it is easier to give the player the second chance state point than when performing the reel lock effect.

  In the present embodiment, the second chance state point acquisition lottery table (no pseudo-continuous production), the second chance state point acquisition lottery table (pseudo-continuous production “1” times), and the second chance When the state point acquisition lottery table (pseudo-continuous production “2” times) and the second chance state point acquisition lottery table (pseudo-continuous production “3” times) are compared, all the same lottery values are defined. The lottery value of the second chance state point acquisition lottery table can be set as appropriate. For example, the lottery value of the second chance state point acquisition lottery table (pseudo-continuous production “3” times) is specified so that the second chance state point is most easily given, and then the second chance state The lot value of the point acquisition lottery table (pseudo-continuous production “2” times) is defined so that the second chance state point can be easily given, and then the second chance state point acquisition lottery table (pseudo-continuous series) The lottery value of the production “1”) is defined so that the second chance state point is easily given, and the lottery value of the second chance state point acquisition lottery table (no pseudo-continuous production) is used as the second chance You may prescribe | regulate so that the point for states may be hardly given. Further, a lottery value in the second chance state point acquisition lottery table (no pseudo-continuous production) is defined so that the second chance state point is most easily given, and then the second chance state point acquisition is performed. The lottery value of the lottery table (pseudo continuous effect “1”) is defined so that the second chance state point is easily given, and then the second chance state point acquisition lottery table (pseudo continuous effect “2” ”Times) lottery values so that the second chance state points are easily given, and the second chance state point acquisition lottery table (pseudo-continuous production“ 3 ”times) lottery values You may prescribe | regulate so that the point for states may be hardly given.

(Lottery table for 3rd chance state)
Next, the third chance state lottery table will be described with reference to FIG.

  The third chance state lottery table includes: (a) a third chance state game number lottery table (see FIG. 61A) for determining the number of games that can be played in the third chance state; In the 3-chance state, when the reel lock effect or the spinning effect is not executed, the third chance state transition lottery table (there is no effect) used when determining the state of the transition destination (see FIG. 61B) (C) In the third chance state, when the reel lock SU1, the reel lock SU2, or the reel lock SU3 is executed, the third chance state transition lottery table (reel) used when determining the transition destination state (Locks SU1 to SU3) (see FIG. 61C) and (d) reel lock SU4 or reel lock SU5 is executed in the third chance state. In this case, the third chance state transition lottery table (reel locks SU4 to SU5) (see FIG. 61 (D)) used when determining the state of the transition destination, and (e) in the third chance state, When the effect is executed, it is configured by a third chance state transition lottery table (rotation effect) (see FIG. 61E) used when determining the state of the transition destination.

(3rd chance state game number lottery table)
The third chance state game number lottery table is provided in the sub ROM 402, and is provided for determining the number of games that can be played in the third chance state. Here, the third chance state game number lottery table defines lottery values corresponding to the number of games.

(3rd chance state transition lottery table (no production))
The third chance state transition lottery table (with no effect) is provided in the sub ROM 402. When the reel lock effect or the spinning effect is not executed in the third chance state, the transition destination state is determined. Used for. Here, in the third chance state transition lottery table (no production), the lottery value of the transition destination state is defined for each winning combination.

(Transfer lottery table for third chance state (reel locks SU1 to SU3))
The third chance state transition lottery table (reel locks SU1 to SU3) is provided in the sub ROM 402, and the transition is performed when the reel lock SU1, the reel lock SU2, or the reel lock SU3 is executed in the third chance state. Used when determining the previous state. Here, in the third chance state transition lottery table (reel locks SU1 to SU3), a lottery value of the transition destination state is defined for each winning combination.

(Transfer lottery table for third chance state (reel locks SU4 to SU5))
The third chance state transition lottery table (reel locks SU4 to SU5) is provided in the sub ROM 402. When the reel lock SU4 or the reel lock SU5 is executed in the third chance state, the transition destination state is displayed. Used in making decisions. Here, in the third chance state transition lottery table (reel locks SU4 to SU5), the lottery value of the transition destination state is defined for each winning combination.

(Transition lottery table for third chance state (rotation effect))
The third chance state transition lottery table (rotation effect) is provided in the sub ROM 402, and is used when determining the transition destination state when the rotation effect is executed in the third chance state. Here, in the third chance state transition lottery table (rotation effect), the lottery value of the transition destination state is defined for each winning combination.

(4th chance state lottery table)
Next, the fourth chance state lottery table will be described with reference to FIG.

  The fourth chance state lottery table includes: (a) a fourth chance state game number lottery table (see FIG. 62A) for determining the number of games that can be played in the fourth chance state; In the 4-chance state, when the current production step is “0”, the fourth chance state production step lottery table (ES0) used when drawing whether the production step is added or not (FIG. 62B). (C) In the fourth chance state, when the current production step is “1”, the fourth chance state production step lottery table used when drawing whether or not to add the production step ( ES1) (see FIG. 62C), and (d) in the fourth chance state, when the current production step is “2”, it is used for lottery whether to add the production step. In the fourth chance state production step lottery table (ES2) (see FIG. 62 (D)) and (e) in the fourth chance state, is the production step added when the current production step is “3”? The fourth chance state effect step lottery table (ES3) (see FIG. 62 (E)) used when lottery is selected or not, and (f) in the fourth chance state, when the current effect step is “4” In addition, in the fourth chance state effect step lottery table (ES4) (see FIG. 62 (F)) used when lottering whether or not to add the effect step, and (g) in the fourth chance state, the game is played. When the number of played games is “21” or later, the fourth chance state effect step used when drawing whether or not to shift to the first RUSH state or the second RUSH state. Lottery table (after 21 games) (see FIG. 62 (G)) and (h) 4th chance used when it is decided to shift the state managed by the sub-control board 400 in the 4th chance state It is composed of a state transition lottery table (see FIG. 62 (H)).

(4th chance state game number lottery table)
The fourth chance state game number lottery table is provided in the sub ROM 402 and is used when determining the number of games that can be played in the fourth chance state. Specifically, in the fourth chance state game number lottery table, a lottery value is defined for each number of games that can be played in the fourth chance state. Here, in the present embodiment, “10” game, “20” game, and “infinity” are defined as the number of games that can be played in the fourth chance state. In the present embodiment, “infinite” refers to until it is determined to shift to the first RUSH state or the second RUSH state.

(4th chance state effect step lottery table (ES0))
The fourth chance state effect step lottery table (ES0) is provided in the sub ROM 402, and in the fourth chance state, when the current effect step is “0”, it is determined whether to add the effect step. Used when Specifically, in the fourth chance state effect step lottery table (ES0), a lottery value of the number of effect steps to be added is defined for each winning combination. For example, when “middle cherry” is determined as the winning combination by an internal lottery process described later, “+5” is determined by “65536/65536”.

(4th chance state effect step lottery table (ES1))
The fourth chance state effect step lottery table (ES1) is provided in the sub ROM 402, and in the fourth chance state, when the current effect step is “1”, it is determined whether to add the effect step. Used when Specifically, in the fourth chance state effect step lottery table (ES1), a lottery value of the number of effect steps to be added is defined for each winning combination. For example, when “middle stage cherry” is determined as the winning combination by the internal lottery process described later, “+4” is determined by “65536/65536”.

(4th chance state effect step lottery table (ES2))
The fourth chance state effect step lottery table (ES2) is provided in the sub ROM 402, and in the fourth chance state, when the current effect step is “2”, it is determined whether to add the effect step. Used when Specifically, in the fourth chance state effect step lottery table (ES2), a lottery value of the number of effect steps to be added is defined for each winning combination. For example, when “middle cherry” is determined as the winning combination by the internal lottery process described later, “+3” is determined by “65536/65536”.

(4th chance state effect step lottery table (ES3))
The fourth chance state effect step lottery table (ES3) is provided in the sub ROM 402, and in the fourth chance state, when the current effect step is “3”, it is determined whether to add the effect step. Used when Specifically, in the fourth chance state effect step lottery table (ES3), a lottery value of the number of effect steps to be added is defined for each winning combination. For example, when “middle stage cherry” is determined as the winning combination by an internal lottery process described later, “+2” is determined by “65536/65536”.

(4th chance state effect step lottery table (ES4))
The fourth chance state effect step lottery table (ES4) is provided in the sub ROM 402, and in the fourth chance state, when the current effect step is “4”, it is determined whether to add the effect step. Used when Specifically, in the fourth chance state effect step lottery table (ES4), a lottery value of the number of effect steps to be added is defined for each winning combination. For example, when “middle cherry” is determined as the winning combination by the internal lottery process described later, “+1” is determined by “65536/65536”.

(4th chance state effect step lottery table (after 21 games))
The fourth chance state effect step lottery table (after 21 games) is provided in the sub-ROM 402. When the number of games played in the fourth chance state is “21” or later games, It is used when drawing whether to shift to the 2RUSH state. Specifically, in the fourth chance state effect step lottery table (after 21 games), a lottery value is defined for each winning combination. For example, when “losing” is determined as the winning combination by an internal lottery process described later, it is determined to shift to the first RUSH state or the second RUSH state at “2014/65536”.

(Transition lottery table for the fourth chance state)
The fourth chance state transition lottery table is provided in the sub ROM 402, and in the fourth chance state, when it is determined to transition to the first RUSH state or the second RUSH state, whether to transition to the first RUSH state. Or to determine whether to shift to the second RUSH state. Specifically, in the fourth chance state transition lottery table, lottery values are defined in accordance with conditions determined to shift to the first RUSH state or the second RUSH state. For example, when reaching “ES5”, it is determined to shift to the first RUSH state with a probability of “32768/65536” and to shift to the second RUSH state with a probability of “32768/65536”. .

(Bonus preparation state transfer lottery table)
Next, the Bonus preparation state transition lottery table will be described with reference to FIG.

  The Bonus preparation state transfer lottery table includes (a) a normal mode Bonus preparation state transfer lottery table (see FIG. 63A) for drawing whether or not to enter the Bonus preparation state in the normal mode or the like. b) In the specific mode, a specific mode for drawing whether or not to shift to the Bonus preparation state after the game of the number of games determined by the specific mode game number lottery table (see FIG. 47D) is performed. Bonus preparation state transfer lottery table (see FIG. 63B).

(Normal mode Bonus preparation state transition lottery table)
The normal mode Bonus preparation state transition lottery table is provided in the sub-ROM 402, and is provided for lottery of whether or not to shift to the Bonus preparation state in the normal mode. Here, in the normal mode Bonus preparation state transition lottery table, lottery values are defined in accordance with the winning combination and whether or not to execute the reel lock effect and the spinning effect. For example, when “watermelon” is determined as the winning combination and the reel lock effect or the spinning effect is not executed, it is determined to shift to the Bonus preparation state with a probability of “1255/65536”. In the specific mode, before the game of the number of games determined by the specific mode game number lottery table (see FIG. 47D) is performed, the specific mode Bonus preparation state transition lottery table (FIG. 63B). Rather than refer to), a lottery for determining whether or not to shift to the Bonus preparation state is performed using the normal mode Bonus preparation state transfer lottery table.

(Bonus preparation state transition lottery table for specific mode)
The special mode Bonus preparation state transition lottery table is provided in the sub-ROM 402, and is provided for lottery of whether or not to shift to the Bonus preparation state in the specific mode. Here, in the bonus preparation state transition lottery table for specific mode, a lottery value is defined according to the winning combination and whether or not to execute the reel lock effect and the spinning effect. For example, when “chance eye replay CR2”, “watermelon”, “weak cherry”, “strong cherry”, “middle cherry”, “chance eye CN1”, “chance eye CN2” are determined as the winning roles, Regardless of whether the reel lock effect or the spinning effect is executed, it is determined to shift to the Bonus preparation state with a probability of “65536/65536”.

(Bonus state distribution lottery table)
Next, the Bonus state distribution lottery table will be described with reference to FIG.

  The Bonus state distribution lottery table is (a) a Bonus state distribution lottery table (normal mode) (see FIG. 64A) that is referred to when it is determined to shift to the Bonus preparation state in the normal mode. (B) It is comprised by the Bonus state distribution lottery table (specific mode) (refer FIG. 64 (B)) referred when transition to a Bonus preparation state is determined in specific mode.

(Bonus state distribution lottery table (normal mode))
The Bonus state distribution lottery table (normal mode) is provided in the sub-ROM 402, and when it is determined to shift to the Bonus preparation state in the normal mode, the first Bonus standby, the second Bonus standby, the third Bonus It is provided to determine any of the waiting states. Here, in the Bonus state distribution lottery table (normal mode), the lottery value determined to be waiting for the first Bonus, the lottery value determined to be waiting for the second Bonus, and the lottery value determined to be waiting for the third Bonus are winning. It is prescribed for each. For example, when “watermelon” is determined by the internal lottery process described later and it is determined to shift to the Bonus preparation state, the waiting for the first Bonus is determined with a probability of “24852/65536”, and “39858/65536 is determined. The probability of waiting for the second Bonus is determined, and the probability of waiting for the third Bonus is determined with the probability of “826/65536”.

  In the following description, the waiting for the first Bonus, the waiting for the second Bonus, and the waiting for the third Bonus are collectively referred to as “waiting for the Bonus”.

(Bonus state distribution lottery table (specific mode))
The Bonus state distribution lottery table (specific mode) is provided in the sub-ROM 402, and when it is determined to shift to the Bonus preparation state in the specific mode, the first Bonus standby, the second Bonus standby, and the third Bonus It is provided to determine any of the waiting states. Here, in the Bonus state distribution lottery table (specific mode), the lottery value determined to be waiting for the first Bonus, the lottery value determined to be waiting for the second Bonus, and the lottery value determined to be waiting for the third Bonus are winning. It is prescribed for each. For example, when “watermelon” is determined by an internal lottery process described later and it is determined to shift to the Bonus preparation state, the first Bonus standby is determined with a probability of “23852/65536”, and “37858/65536 The probability of waiting for the second Bonus is determined, and the probability of waiting for the third Bonus is determined with the probability of “3826/65536”.

  Here, the sub-control board 400 determines whether the “Bonus rush replay BI1”, “Bonus rush replay BI2”, or “Bonus rush replay BI2” by performing an internal lottery process described later during the determined first Bonus standby, second Bonus standby, or third Bonus standby. Alternatively, when “Bonus rush replay BI3” is determined, control is performed to notify the stop button operation display unit 35 and the liquid crystal display device 46 of the operation order of the left stop button 11, the middle stop button 12, and the right stop button 13.

(Foreign promotion lottery table)
Next, the precursor promotion lottery table will be described with reference to FIG.

  The advance promotion lottery table is a table used when the state managed by the sub-control board 400 is the Bonus precursor state, and (a) the state managed by the sub-control board 400 is the Bonus precursor state, In the case of waiting for the first Bonus, the advance promotion lottery table (waiting for the first Bonus) used when drawing whether or not to promote during the second Bonus waiting or the third Bonus waiting (waiting for the first Bonus) (see FIG. 65A) ) And (b) When the state managed by the sub-control board 400 is the Bonus precursor state and is waiting for the second Bonus, the precursor used when the lottery is selected for the promotion during the third Bonus standby. The promotion lottery table (while waiting for the second Bonus) (see FIG. 65B).

(Foreign promotion lottery table (waiting for 1st Bonus))
The advance promotion lottery table (waiting for the first Bonus) is provided in the sub-ROM 402, and is promoted during the second Bonus waiting or the third Bonus waiting when the Bonus precursor is in the first Bonus waiting state. It is used when drawing whether or not. Here, in the advance promotion lottery table (waiting for the first Bonus), lottery values are defined according to the winning combination and whether or not to execute the reel lock effect and the spinning effect. For example, when “watermelon” is determined as the winning combination and the reel lock effect or the spinning effect is not executed, the player is promoted to the second Bonus standby with the probability of “12785/65536” and the probability of “24/65536” And promoted while waiting for 3rd Bonus.

(Foreign promotion lottery table (second Bonus waiting))
The advance promotion lottery table (waiting for the second Bonus) is provided in the sub-ROM 402, and when the Bonus precursor state is in the standby state for the second Bonus, it is determined whether or not the promotion is performed while waiting for the third Bonus. Used when. Here, in the advance promotion lottery table (while waiting for the second Bonus), lottery values are defined in accordance with the winning combination and whether or not to execute the reel lock effect and the spinning effect. For example, when “watermelon” is determined as the winning combination and the reel lock effect or the spinning effect is not executed, the player is promoted during the third Bonus standby with a probability of “24/65536”.

(Confirmation screen promotion lottery table)
Next, the confirmation screen promotion lottery table will be described with reference to FIG.

  The confirmation screen promotion lottery table is used when the state managed by the sub-control board 400 is the Bonus preparation state. (A) When the first Bonus is waiting, the second Bonus is waiting, or the first In the case where the confirmation screen promotion lottery table (waiting for the first Bonus) (see FIG. 66 (A)) used when the lottery to be promoted during the 3Bonus standby is lottery (see FIG. 66A), (b) It is configured by a confirmation screen promotion lottery table (second Bonus standby) (see FIG. 66 (B)) used when the player selects whether to promote during the third Bonus standby.

(Confirmed screen promotion lottery table (waiting for 1st Bonus))
The confirmation screen promotion lottery table (waiting for the first Bonus) is provided in the sub-ROM 402, and is used for lottery whether to promote during the waiting for the first Bonus, waiting for the second Bonus, or waiting for the third Bonus. It is done. Here, in the confirmation screen promotion lottery table (waiting for the first Bonus), lottery values are defined according to the winning combination and whether or not the reel lock effect and the spinning effect are executed. For example, when “watermelon” is determined as the winning combination and the reel lock effect or the spinning effect is not executed, the player is promoted to the second Bonus standby with the probability of “12785/65536” and the probability of “24/65536” And promoted while waiting for 3rd Bonus.

(Confirmed screen promotion lottery table (second Bonus standby))
The confirmation screen promotion lottery table (while waiting for the second Bonus) is provided in the sub-ROM 402, and is used when lottery is performed regarding whether or not to promote while waiting for the third Bonus while waiting for the second Bonus. Here, in the confirmation screen promotion lottery table (while waiting for the second Bonus), lottery values are defined in accordance with the winning combination and whether or not to execute the reel lock effect and the spinning effect. For example, when “watermelon” is determined as the winning combination and the reel lock effect or the spinning effect is not executed, the player is promoted during the third Bonus standby with a probability of “24/65536”.

(ART state transition table)
Next, the ART state transition table will be described with reference to FIG.

  The ART state transition table is (a) an ART state transition rank lottery table (FIG. 67 (FIG. 67)) for determining one of the first to eleventh ranks when transitioning to the ART state. (See A)), and (b) ART point transition ART point lottery table used when determining the ART points to be given to the player when shifting to the ART state (see FIG. 67 (B)). And (c) a scenario determination table for determining a scenario to be referred to when determining whether or not to shift to the first RUSH state or the second RUSH state when shifting to the ART state (FIG. 67 (C)) (D) and (d) in the battle state, when it is determined to continue the ART state, a lottery is performed to determine whether or not to shift to the first RUSH state or the second RUSH state. The scenario-specific RUSH state transition determination table (see FIG. 67 (D)) referred to in (2) and (e) an ART level lottery table used when lottering ART levels according to the rank when transitioning to the ART state ( (First set) (see FIG. 67 (E)).

(Rank lottery table for ART state transition)
The ART state transition rank lottery table is provided in the sub-ROM 402, and is provided for determining any rank from the first rank to the eleventh rank when shifting to the ART state. Specifically, in the ART state transition rank lottery table, the lottery value of each rank is defined in accordance with the condition for transitioning to the ART state. For example, when the state transitions from the third Bonus state to the RUSH preparation state and then transitions to the ART state via the first RUSH state or the second RUSH state, the fourth rank is determined with a probability of “12192/65536”. The fifth rank is determined with the probability of “12192/65536”, the sixth rank is determined with the probability of “12192/65536”, the seventh rank is determined with the probability of “8485/65536”, and “8485/65536” The eighth rank is determined with the probability of, the ninth rank is determined with the probability of “8485/65536”, the tenth rank is determined with the probability of “2400/65536”, and the eleventh rank with the probability of “1105/65536”. The rank will be determined.

  Here, the determined rank is used when determining the ART level described later. Although specifically described later, the most unfavorable rank for the player is the first rank, and the most advantageous rank for the player is the eleventh rank.

(ART point lottery table for ART state transition)
An ART state transition ART point lottery table is provided in the sub-ROM 402, and is used when determining an ART point to be given to a player when the ART state is shifted. Specifically, in the ART point transition ART point lottery table, a lottery value is defined for each ART point to be given to the player.

  In the present embodiment, when the state managed by the sub control board 400 is determined to shift from the third chance state to the ART state, the sub CPU 401 determines the ART state transition ART point lottery table (see FIG. 67 (B)), the ART point is given. However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, it is good also as giving ART point according to the point for normal states which the player acquired. In this case, a lottery may be performed using a lottery table that gives a larger value as an ART point to be given to the player as the value of the normal state point is larger. The ART point may be defined such that the larger the value of the state point, the greater the value given as the ART point to be given to the player.

(Scenario determination table)
The scenario determination table is provided in the sub-ROM 402, and when the state transitions to the ART state or when it is determined to continue the ART state in the battle state, whether to transition to the first RUSH state or the second RUSH state. It is provided to determine a scenario that is referred to when determining whether or not. Here, in the scenario determination table, a lottery value is defined so as to determine a scenario according to the condition for shifting to the ART state. For example, when the state shifts from the third chance state to the ART state, the first scenario is determined with the probability of “8192/65536”, the second scenario is determined with the probability of “16384/65536”, and “8192/65536”. The third scenario is determined with a probability of “8192/65536”, the fourth scenario is determined with a probability of “16384/65536”, and the second scenario is determined with a probability of “8192/65536”. Six scenarios are determined.

(Scenario-specific RUSH state transition decision table)
The scenario-specific RUSH state transition determination table is provided in the sub ROM 402, and when it is determined to continue the ART state in the battle state, whether or not to transition to the first RUSH state or the second RUSH state is determined. It is provided to determine the lottery value when performing. Here, in the scenario-specific RUSH state transition determination table, lottery values are defined according to the determined scenario and the number of times that the ART state is determined to be continued. For example, when it is determined that the ART state is to be continued for the first time in the state in which the first scenario is determined, it is determined to shift to the first RUSH state or the second RUSH state with a probability of “1966/65536”. Is done.

  In the present embodiment, lottery is performed using a common scenario-specific RUSH state transition determination table for all setting values, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, a scenario-specific RUSH state transition determination table may be provided for each set value. In this case, for example, (a) the lottery value may be defined so that the higher the set value is, the easier it is to determine the transition to the first RUSH state or the second RUSH state; When the set value is an even number, the lottery value may be defined so that it is easier to determine the transition to the first RUSH state or the second RUSH state compared to the case where the set value is an odd number. (C) When the set value is an odd number, even if the lottery value is defined so that it is easier to determine the transition to the first RUSH state or the second RUSH state than when the set value is an even number (D) When the set value is equal to or greater than a predetermined value (for example, “4”), the state shifts to the first RUSH state or the second RUSH state as compared with the case where the set value is less than the predetermined value. Is decided (E) In the case of a specific set value (for example, “6”), the first RUSH state is compared with the case other than the specific set value. Or the lottery value may be prescribed | regulated so that it may become easy to determine shifting to a 2nd RUSH state.

(ART level lottery table (first set))
The ART level lottery table (first set) is provided in the sub ROM 402, and is used when drawing the ART level corresponding to the rank when shifting to the ART state. Here, in the ART level lottery table (first set), a lottery value for each ART level is defined according to the determined rank. For example, when the determined rank is “first rank”, “ART level NML” is determined with a probability of “49152/65536”, and “ART level High” is determined with a probability of “8192/65536”. Then, “ART level SP” is determined with a probability of “8191/65536”, and “ART level PRM” is determined with a probability of “1/65536”.

  Here, in this embodiment, apart from the ART level lottery table (first set), an ART level lottery table is provided according to the number of times that it is determined to continue the ART state. Specifically, the ART level lottery table (second set) used when the number of times determined to continue the ART state is “2” and the number of times determined to continue the ART state are “3”. ”ART level lottery table (third set) used in the case of“ 4 ”, ART level lottery table (fourth set) used when the number of times determined to continue the ART state is“ 4 ”, and ART state ART level lottery table (fifth set) used when the number of times determined to continue is “5”, and ART used when the number of times determined to continue the ART state is “6” Level lottery table (sixth set) and ART level lottery table (seventh set) used when the number of times that the ART state is determined to be continued is “7” The ART level lottery table (after the 8th set) used when the number of times determined to continue the ART state is “8”, “9”, or “10”, and the ART state may be continued. ART level lottery table (after 11th set) used when the determined number is “11”, “12”, “13”, “14”, or “15”, and to continue the ART state ART level lottery table (after 16th set) used when the number of times played is “16”, “17”, “18”, “19”, or “20”, and to continue the ART state There is provided an ART level lottery table (after the 21st set) used when the number of times is “21” or more.

  Note that these ART level lottery tables define lottery values for each ART level according to the determined rank, as in the ART level lottery table (first set). ART level lottery table (second set), ART level lottery table (third set), ART level lottery table (fourth set), ART level lottery table (fifth set), ART level lottery table (six sets) Eyes), ART level lottery table (7th set), ART level lottery table (8th set and later), ART level lottery table (11th set and later), ART level lottery table (16th set and later), ART level lottery table The lottery value (from the 21st set) can be set as appropriate.

(ART state high probability lottery table)
Next, the ART state high probability lottery table will be described with reference to FIG.

  The ART state high probability lottery table includes (a) a navigation permission mode determination table (see FIG. 68 (A)) used when determining the navigation permission mode, and (b) when the navigation permission mode is the low probability mode. When “watermelon play”, “weak cherry replay”, “strong cherry replay”, or “chance eye replay CR1” is determined by the internal lottery process described later, “watermelon play”, “weak cherry replay”, “ Low-probability mode navigation permission lottery table (see FIG. 68 (B)) for performing a lottery to determine whether or not to allow display of a symbol combination related to “strong cherry replay” or “chance eye replay CR1”; and (c). When the navigation permission mode is the high probability mode, “watermelon play”, “weak cherry replay”, “strong When “Lee Replay” or “Chance Eye Replay CR1” is determined, a combination of symbols related to “Watermelon Play”, “Weak Cherry Replay”, “Strong Cherry Replay”, or “Chance Eye Replay CR1” is displayed. It is configured by a high-probability mode navigation permission lottery table (see FIG. 68 (C)) for performing a lottery of whether to allow or not.

(Navigation permission mode determination table)
The navigation permission mode determination table is provided in the sub ROM 402, and “watermelon play”, “weak cherry replay”, “strong cherry replay”, or “chance eye replay CR1” is determined by an internal lottery process described later. When determining whether or not to notify the stop operation order that does not allow the display of the symbol combination related to “watermelon play”, “weak cherry replay”, “strong cherry replay”, or “chance eye replay CR1” Is provided to determine a navigation permission mode referred to in FIG. Specifically, in the navigation permission mode determination table, the lottery value is specified for each of the case where the ART state is started, the case where the ART state is determined to be continued, and the case where the first RUSH state or the second RUSH state is started. Has been. For example, at the start of the ART state, the “low probability mode” is determined with the probability of “52429/65536”, and the “high probability mode” is determined with the probability of “13107/65536”.

(Navigation permission lottery table for low probability mode)
The navigation permission lottery table for the low probability mode is provided in the sub ROM 402. When the navigation permission mode is the low probability mode, the “watermelon play”, “weak cherry replay”, “strong cherry” are performed by the internal lottery process described later. When “Replay” or “Chance Eye Replay CR1” is determined, display of a combination of symbols relating to “Watermelon Play”, “Weak Cherry Replay”, “Strong Cherry Replay”, or “Chance Eye Replay CR1” is allowed. It is provided to make a lottery for whether or not to do so. Specifically, in the low-permission mode navigation permission lottery table, a lottery value is defined in accordance with whether or not the winning combination and the spinning effect are executed. For example, when “watermelon play” is determined by the internal lottery process described later and the spinning effect is not executed, it is allowed to display a combination of symbols related to “watermelon play” with a probability of “8192/65536”. Is done. In addition, when “watermelon play” is determined by an internal lottery process to be described later and a spinning effect is executed, it is allowed to display a combination of symbols related to “watermelon play” with a probability of “65536/65536” Is done.

(Navigation permission lottery table for high probability mode)
The navigation permission lottery table for the high probability mode is provided in the sub ROM 402. When the navigation permission mode is the high probability mode, the “watermelon play”, “weak cherry replay”, “strong cherry” are performed by the internal lottery process described later. When “Replay” or “Chance Eye Replay CR1” is determined, display of a combination of symbols relating to “Watermelon Play”, “Weak Cherry Replay”, “Strong Cherry Replay”, or “Chance Eye Replay CR1” is allowed. It is provided to make a lottery for whether or not to do so. Specifically, in the high probability mode navigation permission lottery table, a lottery value is defined according to the winning combination and whether or not to execute the spinning effect. For example, when “watermelon play” is determined by the internal lottery process described later and the spinning effect is not executed, it is allowed to display a combination of symbols related to “watermelon play” with a probability of “16384/65536” Is done.

(Second addition state transition lottery table)
Next, the second added state transition lottery table will be described with reference to FIG.

  The second added state transition lottery table is provided in the sub ROM 402, and is provided for drawing whether or not to shift to the second added state. Specifically, in the second added state transition lottery table, lottery values are defined according to the winning combination. For example, when “middle stage cherry” is determined as the winning combination by the internal lottery process described later, it is determined to shift to the second added state with a probability of “32768/65536”.

(Must win stock lottery table)
Next, the winning stock lottery table will be described with reference to FIG.

  The winning stock lottery table is provided in the sub-ROM 402, and whether or not to acquire the winning stock that can receive the lottery without reducing the points until it is decided to continue the ART state in the battle state. It is provided to draw lots. Specifically, the winning stock lottery table defines a lottery value for each winning combination. For example, when “watermelon” is determined as the winning combination by the internal lottery process described later, the winning stock is acquired with a probability of “1280/65536”.

(Art state status transition lottery table)
Next, the state transition lottery table for ART state will be described based on FIG.

  The state transition lottery table for the ART state is provided in the sub ROM 402, and is provided for lottery of whether to shift from the ART state to the chance state during ART or the first added state. Specifically, the state state lottery table for the ART state includes a lottery value that shifts to the chance state during the ART and the first addition depending on whether or not the winning combination and the reel lock effect or the spinning effect are executed. A lottery value for shifting to a state is defined. For example, in the case where “successful play” is determined as the winning combination by the internal lottery process described later and the reel lock effect or the spinning effect is not executed, the state shifts to the chance state during ART with a probability of “1280/65536”. , Transition to the first addition state with a probability of “1280/65536”.

(ART state point acquisition lottery table)
Next, the ART state point acquisition lottery table will be described with reference to FIG.

  The ART state point acquisition lottery table is: (a) When the ART state is NML and the ART level is NML, the ART state point acquisition lottery table (ART (Level = NML) (see FIG. 72 (A)) and (b) ART state points used when drawing whether or not to acquire an ART point when the ART level is High and the ART level is High. Acquisition lottery table (ART level = High) (see FIG. 72 (B)) and (c) In the ART state, when the ART level is SP, it is used when drawing whether or not to acquire ART points. ART state point acquisition lottery table (ART level = SP) (see FIG. 72C), and (d) ART state, In the case RT level is PRM, is constituted by ART state for point acquisition lottery table used when lottery whether to acquire ART Points (ART level = PRM) (see FIG. 72 (D)).

(ART state point acquisition lottery table (ART level = NML))
The ART state point acquisition lottery table (ART level = NML) is provided in the sub-ROM 402. When the ART state is the NTL and the ART level is NML, it is determined whether or not to acquire an ART point. Used for. Specifically, the ART state point acquisition lottery table (ART level = NML) is acquired by the player in accordance with the winning combination and whether or not to execute the reel lock effect or the spinning effect. A lottery value is defined for ART points. For example, in the case where “Watermelon Play” is determined as the winning combination by the internal lottery process described later, and when the reel lock effect or the spinning effect is not executed, the ART point has a probability of “2048/65536”. Is added by “2”, ART point is added by “3” with probability of “1024/65536”, “5” is added by ART with probability of “512/65536”, and ART with probability of “512/65536” Points are added by “7”.

(ART state point acquisition lottery table (ART level = High))
The ART state point acquisition lottery table (ART level = High) is provided in the sub-ROM 402. When the ART state is the ART level and the ART level is High, it is determined whether or not to acquire the ART point. Used for. Specifically, the ART state point acquisition lottery table (ART level = High) is acquired by the player depending on whether or not the winning combination and the reel lock effect or the spinning effect are executed. A lottery value is defined for ART points. For example, in the case where “watermelon play” is determined as the winning combination by the internal lottery process described later, and when the reel lock effect or the spinning effect is not executed, the ART point has a probability of “4096/65536”. Is added by “2”, ART point is added by “3” with probability of “2048/65536”, “5” is added by ART probability of “1024/65536”, and ART with probability of “1024/65536” Points are added by “7”.

(ART state point acquisition lottery table (ART level = SP))
The ART state point acquisition lottery table (ART level = SP) is provided in the sub-ROM 402, and when the ART state is SP and the ART level is SP, whether or not to acquire an ART point is determined. Used for. Specifically, the ART state point acquisition lottery table (ART level = SP) is acquired by the player in accordance with the winning combination and whether or not to execute the reel lock effect or the spinning effect. A lottery value is defined for ART points. For example, in the case where “watermelon play” is determined as the winning combination by the internal lottery process described later, and the reel lock effect or the spinning effect is not executed, the ART point has a probability of “16384/65536”. Is added by “2”, ART point is added by “3” with a probability of “8192/65536”, ART point is added by “5” with a probability of “4096/65536”, and ART with a probability of “4096/65536” Points are added by “7”.

(ART state point acquisition lottery table (ART level = PRM))
The ART state point acquisition lottery table (ART level = PRM) is provided in the sub-ROM 402, and when the ART state is the ART level and the ART level is PRM, it is determined whether or not to acquire the ART point. Used for. More specifically, the ART state point acquisition lottery table (ART level = PRM) is acquired by the player in accordance with the winning combination and whether or not to execute the reel lock effect or the spinning effect. A lottery value is defined for ART points. For example, in the case where “watermelon play” is determined as the winning combination by the internal lottery process described later, and when the reel lock effect or the spinning effect is not executed, the ART point with a probability of “32768/65536” Is added by “2”, ART point is added by “3” with probability of “16384/65536”, “5” is added by ART probability of “8192/65536”, and ART with probability of “8192/65536” Points are added by “7”.

  Here, ART state point acquisition lottery table (ART level = NML), ART state point acquisition lottery table (ART level = High), ART state point acquisition lottery table (ART level = SP), and ART state Comparing the point acquisition lottery table (ART level = PRM), when ART level is PRM, ART level is SP, ART level is High, ART level is NML, and ART points are acquired in order. It is easy. Therefore, the order of the level advantageous to the player is the order when the ART level is PRM, when the ART level is SP, when the ART level is High, and when the ART level is NML.

(Preparation lottery table)
Next, the preparation state lottery table will be described with reference to FIG.

  The preparation state lottery table includes: (a) an ART preparation state point acquisition lottery table (see FIG. 73A) used when drawing whether or not to acquire an ART point in the ART preparation state; ) In the RUSH ready state, when the value of the first RUSH state stock counter provided in the sub RAM 403 is “1” or more and the value of the second RUSH state stock counter is “0”, or provided in the sub RAM 403 When the value of the first RUSH state stock counter is “1” or more and the value of the second RUSH state stock counter is “1” or more, the first RUSH state stock counter is used when drawing whether or not to acquire an ART point. 1RUSH ready state point acquisition lottery table (see FIG. 73 (B)), and (c) RUSH ready state, sub R When the value of the first RUSH state stock counter provided in M403 is “0” and the value of the second RUSH state stock counter is “1” or more, when drawing whether or not to acquire an ART point Second RUSH preparation state point acquisition lottery table used (see FIG. 73C), and (d) In the preparation state for addition, point acquisition for addition preparation state used when drawing whether or not to acquire an ART point It is composed of a lottery table (see FIG. 73D).

(ART acquisition state point acquisition lottery table)
The ART ready state point acquisition lottery table is provided in the sub-ROM 402, and is used when drawing whether or not to acquire an ART point in the ART ready state. Specifically, the ART ready state point acquisition lottery table includes lottery values for the ART points that the player will acquire depending on whether the winning combination, reel lock effect, or rotation effect is executed. Is stipulated. For example, when “watermelon” is determined as the winning combination by the internal lottery process described later and the reel lock effect or the spinning effect is not executed, the ART point is calculated with a probability of “512/65536”. “1” is acquired, “2” is acquired with a probability of “256/65536”, and “3” is acquired with a probability of “128/65536”.

(Point acquisition lottery table for 1st RUSH ready state)
The first RUSH ready state point acquisition lottery table is provided in the sub ROM 402. In the RUSH ready state, the value of the first RUSH state stock counter provided in the sub RAM 403 is “1” or more, and the second RUSH state. When the value of the stock counter is “0”, or when the value of the first RUSH state stock counter provided in the sub-RAM 403 is “1” or more and the value of the second RUSH state stock counter is “1” or more In addition, it is used when drawing whether or not to acquire ART points. Specifically, the first RUSH ready state point acquisition lottery table is selected as an ART point that the player will acquire depending on whether the winning combination, reel lock effect, or rotation effect is executed. Value is specified. For example, when “watermelon” is determined as the winning combination by the internal lottery process described later and the reel lock effect or the spinning effect is not executed, the ART point is calculated with a probability of “1280/65536”. Acquire "1", acquire "2" ART points with a probability of "512/65536", acquire "3" ART points with a probability of "256/65536", with a probability of "128/65536" You get “5” ART points, you get “7” ART points with a probability of “64/65536”, and you get “10” ART points with a probability of “32/65536”.

(2nd RUSH ready state point acquisition lottery table)
The second RUSH ready state point acquisition lottery table is provided in the sub ROM 402. In the RUSH ready state, the value of the first RUSH state stock counter provided in the sub RAM 403 is “0”, and the second RUSH state stock When the value of the counter is “1” or more, it is used when drawing whether or not to acquire an ART point. Specifically, the second RUSH ready state point acquisition lottery table is selected as an ART point that the player will acquire depending on whether the winning combination, reel lock effect, or rotation effect is executed. Value is specified. For example, when “watermelon” is determined as the winning combination by the internal lottery process described later and the reel lock effect or the spinning effect is not executed, the ART point is given with a probability of “2560/65536”. Acquire "1", acquire "2" ART points with a probability of "1024/65536", acquire "3" ART points with a probability of "512/65536", with a probability of "256/65536" This means that “5” is acquired for the ART point, “7” is acquired for the ART point with the probability of “128/65536”, and “10” is acquired for the ART point with the probability of “64/65536”.

(Additional preparation point acquisition lottery table)
The additional preparation state point acquisition lottery table is provided in the sub-ROM 402, and is used when a lottery is performed to determine whether or not to acquire an ART point in the additional preparation state. Specifically, the additional preparation state point acquisition lottery table includes lottery values for the ART points that the player will acquire depending on whether the winning combination, reel lock effect, or rotation effect is executed. Is stipulated. For example, when “watermelon” is determined as the winning combination by the internal lottery process described later and the reel lock effect or the spinning effect is not executed, the ART point is calculated with a probability of “1280/65536”. Acquire "1", acquire "2" ART points with a probability of "512/65536", acquire "3" ART points with a probability of "256/65536", with a probability of "128/65536" You get “5” ART points.

(Lottery table for fall standby state)
Next, the falling standby state lottery table will be described with reference to FIG.

  The fall-standby lottery table includes: (a) a first fall-standby lottery table (see FIG. 74 (A)) for drawing whether to acquire an ART point in the first fall-standby state; b) In the second fall standby state, a second fall standby state lottery table (see FIG. 74 (B)) for drawing whether or not to acquire an ART point; and (c) in the third fall standby state, A third fall waiting state lottery table (see FIG. 74 (C)) for drawing whether or not to acquire ART points, and (d) whether or not to acquire ART points in the fourth fall waiting state. It is configured by a fourth falling standby state lottery table (see FIG. 74D) for lottery.

(Lottery table for the first fall standby state)
The lottery table for the first fall standby state is provided in the sub ROM 402, and is provided for drawing whether or not to acquire an ART point in the first fall standby state. Here, in the first falling standby state lottery table, a lottery value is defined for an ART point that a player will acquire in accordance with the winning combination. For example, when “Watermelon” is determined as the winning combination by the internal lottery process described later, “2” is acquired with a probability of “4096/65536” and ART points with a probability of “256/65536”. Acquire "3". In addition, when it is determined to give an ART point to the player as a result of performing the lottery using the first fall standby state lottery table, the player enters the ART state via the ART preparation state. .

(Second lottery waiting state lottery table)
The second fall standby state lottery table is provided in the sub ROM 402, and is provided for lottery of whether or not to acquire an ART point in the second fall standby state. Here, in the second falling standby state lottery table, a lottery value is defined for an ART point that a player will acquire in accordance with the winning combination. For example, when “Watermelon” is determined as the winning combination by the internal lottery process described later, “1” is obtained with a probability of “32768/65536”, and ART points with a probability of “16384/65536”. "2" is obtained, and "3" is obtained with the probability of "16384/65536".

(Lottery table for third fall standby state)
The third fall standby state lottery table is provided in the sub-ROM 402, and is provided for drawing whether or not to acquire an ART point in the third fall standby state. Here, in the third falling standby state lottery table, a lottery value is defined for an ART point that a player will acquire in accordance with the winning combination. For example, when “Watermelon” is determined as the winning combination by the internal lottery process described later, “2” is acquired with a probability of “4096/65536” and ART points with a probability of “256/65536”. Acquire "3".

(Fourth falling stand lottery table)
The lottery table for the fourth fall standby state is provided in the sub ROM 402, and is provided for lottery of whether or not to acquire an ART point in the fourth fall standby state. Here, in the fourth falling standby state lottery table, lottery values are defined for ART points that the player will acquire in accordance with the winning combination. For example, when “Watermelon” is determined as the winning combination by the internal lottery process described later, “2” is acquired with a probability of “4096/65536” and ART points with a probability of “256/65536”. Acquire "3". In addition, when it is determined to give an ART point to a player as a result of performing the lottery using the fourth falling standby state lottery table, the player returns to the ART state.

(First addition state lottery table)
Next, the first added state lottery table will be described with reference to FIG.

  The first added state lottery table is: (a) a first added state point acquisition lottery table used when lottery is performed to determine whether or not to acquire an ART point in the first added state (see FIG. 75A). And (b) a first added state continuation lottery table (see FIG. 75 (B)) used when drawing whether or not to continue the first added state.

(First acquisition point acquisition lottery table)
The first added state point acquisition lottery table is provided in the sub-ROM 402, and is used in the first added state to determine whether or not to acquire an ART point. Specifically, the first added state point acquisition lottery table is selected as an ART point that the player will acquire depending on whether the winning combination, reel lock effect, or rotation effect is executed. Value is specified. For example, when “watermelon” is determined as a winning combination by an internal lottery process described later and the reel lock effect or the spinning effect is not executed, the ART point is calculated with a probability of “16384/65536”. Earn “1”, get “2” ART points with a probability of “8192/65536”, get “3” ART points with a probability of “4096/65536”, and ART points with a probability of “2048/65536” You will get “5”.

(First addition state continuous lottery table)
The first added state continuation lottery table is provided in the sub ROM 402, and is used when lottery is performed to determine whether or not the first added state is continued. Here, in the first added state continuation lottery table, the lottery value is defined according to whether or not the acquired ART point is “0” in the first added state and the number of times the first added state continues. . For example, when the acquired ART point is “0” at the end of the first added state, the first added state is continued with a probability of “65536/65536”.

  Here, in the present embodiment, the lottery value is defined so that the first added state always continues when the ART point cannot be acquired in the first added state. Thereby, despite the transition to the first added state, it is possible to prevent the situation where the ART point cannot be acquired and the first added state ends.

(Lottery table for chances during ART)
Next, based on FIG. 76, the lottery table for the chance state during ART will be described.

  The ART-chance state lottery table includes (a) an ART-chance state game number lottery table used when determining the number of games that can be played in the ART-chance state (see FIG. 76A), and (b). The RUSH state transition lottery table for the during-ART chance state used when drawing whether to shift to the first RUSH state or the second RUSH state in the chance state during ART (see FIG. 76 (B), (c) ART) In the medium chance state, it is constituted by an ART medium chance state point acquisition lottery table (see FIG. 76 (C)) used when drawing whether or not to acquire an ART point.

(Number-of-chance state game lottery table during ART)
The ART state chance state game number lottery table is provided in the sub ROM 402, and is used when determining the number of games that can be played in the ART state chance state. Specifically, a lottery value is defined for each number of games that can be played in the chance state during ART in the ART state chance state game number lottery table. Here, in this embodiment, “10” game, “20” game, and “infinity” are defined as the number of games that can be played in the chance state during ART.

(RUSH state transition lottery table for chance state during ART)
The ART state chance state RUSH state transition lottery table is provided in the sub-ROM 402, and is used to determine whether or not to shift to the first RUSH state or the second RUSH state in the ART state chance state. Here, the RUSH state transition lottery table for the chance state during ART is a lottery value that will shift to the first RUSH state depending on whether or not the winning combination and the reel lock effect or the spinning effect are executed, A lottery value that will shift to the second RUSH state is defined. For example, when “watermelon” is determined as a winning combination by an internal lottery process to be described later and the reel lock effect or the spinning effect is not executed, the first RUSH state has a probability of “512/65536”. It is determined to shift to the first RUSH state with a probability of “64/65536”.

(Point acquisition lottery table for chances during ART)
The point acquisition lottery table for the chance state during ART is provided in the sub-ROM 402, and is used when drawing whether or not to acquire an ART point in the chance state during ART. Specifically, the point acquisition lottery table for the chance state during ART is selected as an ART point that the player will acquire depending on whether or not the winning combination and the reel lock effect or the spinning effect are executed. Value is specified. For example, when “watermelon” is determined as the winning combination by the internal lottery process described later and the reel lock effect or the spinning effect is not executed, the ART point is calculated with a probability of “1280/65536”. Earn “1”, get “2” ART points with a probability of “512/65536”, get “3” ART points with a probability of “256/65536”, and ART points with a probability of “128/65536” You will get “5”.

(2nd extra state point acquisition lottery table)
Next, based on FIG. 77, the second added point acquisition lottery table will be described.

  The second added state point acquisition lottery table is provided in the sub ROM 402, and is used when performing a lottery to determine whether or not to acquire an ART point in the second added state. Specifically, in the second added state point acquisition lottery table, a lottery value is defined for an ART point that a player will acquire according to the winning combination. For example, if “Watermelon” is determined as the winning combination by the internal lottery process described later, “2” is obtained with a probability of “16384/65536”, and ART points with a probability of “2048/65536”. You will get “3”.

(RUSH state lottery table)
Next, the RUSH state lottery table will be described with reference to FIG.

  The RUSH state lottery table includes: (a) a first RUSH state point acquisition lottery table (see FIG. 78 (A)) used in the first RUSH state to determine whether or not to acquire an ART point; ) In the second RUSH state, the second RUSH state point acquisition lottery table (see FIG. 78 (B)) used when drawing whether or not to acquire the ART point, and (c) In the first RUSH state, the spinning effect When it is decided to execute the first RUSH state point acquisition lottery table (when performing the spinning effect) (see FIG. 78 (C)) used when the ART points to be acquired are selected. In the second RUSH state, when it is decided to execute the spinning effect, the second RU used when drawing the ART points to be acquired It is constituted by the H state for point acquisition lottery table (when the reel-effect execution) (see FIG. 78 (D)).

(Point acquisition lottery table for 1st RUSH state)
The first RUSH state point acquisition lottery table is provided in the sub ROM 402, and is used in the first RUSH state to determine whether or not to acquire an ART point. Specifically, in the first RUSH state point acquisition lottery table, lottery values are defined for ART points that the player will acquire in accordance with the winning combination. For example, when “Watermelon” is determined as the winning combination by the internal lottery process described later, “1” is obtained with a probability of “32768/65536”, and ART points with a probability of “16384/65536”. "2" is obtained, and "3" is obtained with the probability of "16384/65536".

(2nd RUSH state point acquisition lottery table)
The second RUSH state point acquisition lottery table is provided in the sub ROM 402, and is used in the second RUSH state to determine whether or not to acquire an ART point. Specifically, in the second RUSH state point acquisition lottery table, lottery values are defined for ART points that the player will acquire in accordance with the winning combination. For example, when “Watermelon” is determined as the winning combination by the internal lottery process described later, “2” is obtained with a probability of “32768/65536”, and ART points with a probability of “16384/65536”. "3" is obtained, and "5" is obtained with the probability of "16384/65536".

(Point acquisition lottery table for the first RUSH state (when performing the spinning effect))
The first RUSH state point acquisition lottery table (when the spinning effect is executed) is used when the ART point to be acquired is lottery in the first RUSH state when it is determined to execute the spinning effect. Specifically, in the first RUSH state point acquisition lottery table (when the spinning effect is executed), lottery values are defined for the ART points that the player will acquire according to the determined spinning effect. . For example, if it is decided to execute “rotation effect RE2”, “1” is obtained with the probability of “32768/65536”, and the ART point with the probability of “32768/65536” is “ 2 ”will be acquired.

  Therefore, in the first RUSH state, when “watermelon” is determined as the winning combination by the internal lottery process to be described later and it is determined to execute the “rotating effect RE2”, the points for the first RUSH state are acquired. The ART points to be acquired by the player using the lottery table are determined, and the ART points to be acquired by the player using the first RUSH state point acquisition lottery table (when the spinning effect is executed) are determined. Will be determined. Therefore, in the first RUSH state, the player can acquire a large amount of ART points.

(Point acquisition lottery table for the second RUSH state (when performing the spinning effect))
The point acquisition lottery table for the second RUSH state (during execution of the spinning effect) is used when drawing whether or not to acquire the ART point when it is determined to execute the rotation effect in the second RUSH state. It is done. Specifically, in the second RUSH state point acquisition lottery table (when the spinning effect is executed), lottery values are defined for the ART points that the player will acquire according to the determined spinning effect. . For example, when it is decided to execute “rotation effect RE2”, “2” is obtained with the probability of “32768/65536”, and the ART point with the probability of “32768/65536” is “ 3 ”will be acquired.

  Therefore, in the second RUSH state, when “watermelon” is determined as the winning combination by the internal lottery process described later and it is determined to execute the “rotating effect RE2”, the points for the second RUSH state are acquired. The ART points to be acquired by the player are determined using the lottery table, and the ART points to be acquired by the player using the second RUSH state point acquisition lottery table (when performing the spinning effect) are determined. Will be determined. Therefore, in the second RUSH state, the player can acquire a large amount of ART points.

  When the first RUSH state point acquisition lottery table is compared with the second RUSH state point acquisition lottery table, the first RUSH state point acquisition lottery table is obtained by using the second RUSH state point acquisition lottery table. The lottery value is defined so that ART points can be easily given to the player as compared to the case where the lottery is performed using the. Further, when comparing the first RUSH state point acquisition lottery table (when the spinning effect is performed) and the second RUSH state point acquisition lottery table (when the rotational effect is performed), the second RUSH state point acquisition lottery table (the rotational effect) When performing a lottery using (when executing), compared to the case where a lottery is performed using the first RUSH state point acquisition lottery table (when performing a spinning effect), ART points are more likely to be awarded to the player. A lottery value is defined in the same way. Therefore, the second RUSH state is an advantageous state for the player as compared with the first RUSH state.

(Point acquisition lottery table for the spinning effect RE5)
Next, the point acquisition lottery table for the spinning effect RE5 will be described with reference to FIG.

  The point acquisition lottery table for the spinning effect RE5 is provided in the sub-ROM 402, and when executing the “rotating effect RE5”, the main control board 300 performs lottery using the continuous lottery table (see FIG. 33). As a result, when it is decided to continue, and when it is decided to continue by resurrection, it is provided to determine the ART points to be given to the player by lottery. Specifically, the player will acquire the point acquisition lottery table for the spinning effect RE5 in each of the case where it is determined to continue and the case where it is determined to continue due to the resurrection. A lottery value is defined for each ART point. For example, if it is decided to continue, “1” is obtained with the probability of “16384/65536”, “2” is obtained with the probability of “16384/65536”, and “16384 / Acquire “3” ART points with a probability of 65536, acquire “5” ART points with a probability of “8192/65536”, acquire “7” ART points with a probability of “4096/65536”, “2048” Acquire “10” ART points with a probability of “/ 65536”, “30” ART points with a probability of “1524/65536”, and “50” ART points with a probability of “524/65536”. Become.

(Battle state lottery table)
Next, the battle state lottery table will be described with reference to FIG.

  The battle state lottery table is (a) a battle state winning stock lottery table (see FIG. 80 (A)) used when the player draws whether or not the player acquires the winning stock when the battle state is entered. ), (B) a battle state win / loss lottery table (see FIG. 80 (B)) used when drawing whether or not to continue the ART state in the battle state, and (c) the ART state in the battle state. RUSH state transition scenario table (see FIG. 80 (C)) used when drawing whether or not to transition to the first RUSH state or the second RUSH state when it is decided to continue .

(Battle condition winning stock lottery table)
The battle state winning stock lottery table is provided in the sub ROM 402, and is used when the player draws whether or not the player acquires the winning stock when the battle state is entered. Here, in the battle condition winning stock lottery table, a lottery value for acquiring the winning stock is defined. Specifically, the winning stock can be acquired with a probability of “655/65536”.

(Battle state win / loss lottery table)
The battle state win / loss lottery table is provided in the sub ROM 402, and is used when the player determines whether to continue the ART state in the battle state. Here, in the battle state winning / losing lottery table, a lottery value is defined in accordance with whether or not the winning combination and the reel lock effect or the spinning effect are executed. For example, if “watermelon” is determined by an internal lottery process described later and it is determined not to execute a reel lock effect or a spinning effect, the ART state can be continued with a probability of “13107/65536”. It is determined.

(RUSH state transition scenario table)
The RUSH state transition scenario table is provided in the sub-ROM 402, and when it is determined to continue the ART state in the battle state, whether to shift to the first RUSH state or the second RUSH state. Used for. Here, the RUSH state transition scenario table changes to the first RUSH state according to whether or not there is a winning stock and the lottery value determined based on the scenario-specific RUSH state transition determination table (see FIG. 67D). A lottery value to be shifted and a lottery value to be shifted to the second RUSH state are defined. For example, when there is no winning stock in the battle state and the lottery value determined based on the scenario-specific RUSH state transition determination table (see FIG. 67D) is “1966”, “1311 / The transition to the first RUSH state is determined with a probability of “65536”, and the transition to the second RUSH state is determined with a probability of “655/65536”.

(First Bonus state lottery table)
Next, the first Bonus state lottery table will be described with reference to FIG.

  The first Bonus state lottery table is: (a) a first Bonus state point conversion table used when converting a normal state point acquired by a player into a first Bonus state point before shifting to the first Bonus state ( 81 (A)) and (b) an effective line when either of “Bonus replay BR1” or “Bonus replay BR2” is determined as a winning combination by an internal lottery process described later. At the time of BAR replay winning, which is used to determine whether or not to notify the stop operation sequence of the left stop button 11, the middle stop button 12, and the right stop button 13 for displaying the symbols related to "BAR" together At the end of the first half part of the first lotus table (see FIG. 81 (B)) and (c) the first Bonus state Based on the points for 1 Bonus state, the final judge lottery table (see FIG. 81C) used to determine whether or not to shift to the ART state, and (d) subtract the relief points given to the player The relief point subtraction table (see FIG. 81 (D)) used when determining whether or not to perform, and (e) at the end of the second half part of the first Bonus state, according to the relief points acquired by the player When it is determined to shift to the ART state in the relief point lottery table (see FIG. 81 (E)) used when lottering whether or not to shift to the ART state, and (f) the first Bonus state, A state transition lottery table for the first Bonus state (see FIG. 81 (F)) used when the state of the transition destination is drawn, and (g) the second half of the first Bonus state. In over bets are constituted by first 1Bonus state for the second half-part score points lottery table used when lottery whether to acquire ART point (see FIG. 81 (G)).

(First Bonus state point conversion table)
The first Bonus state point conversion table is provided in the sub ROM 402, and is used when converting the normal state points acquired by the player to the first Bonus state points before shifting to the first Bonus state. Specifically, the point conversion table for the first Bonus state is determined based on the conditions that have caused the transition to the first Bonus state and the points for the normal state that the player has acquired before the transition to the first Bonus state. A lottery value of the first Bonus state points to be given to is defined. For example, in the second chance state, as a result of performing the lottery using the points acquired by the player, it is determined to shift to the Bonus ready state, and then the player shifts to the first Bonus state. If the normal state point acquired by the player is “55”, the point is converted to the first Bonus state point “5” with the probability of “65000/65536”, and the point is converted to the first Bonus with the probability of “536/65536”. It is converted into a state point “10”. In addition, as a result of performing lottery using the Bonus preparation state transition lottery table (see FIGS. 63A and 63B), it is determined that the Bonus preparation state is to be entered, and then the first Bonus state is entered. In the case where the normal state point acquired by the player is “55”, the point is converted to the first Bonus state point “5” with a probability of “60000/65536”, and “5536/65536”. The point is converted into the first Bonus state point “10” with the probability of

(Lottery table for winning BAR replay)
The BAR replay winning lottery table is provided in the sub-ROM 402, and “Bonus Replay BR1” or “Bonus Replay BR2” is determined as the winning combination by an internal lottery process to be described later. In this case, it is used to determine whether or not to notify the stop operation sequence of the left stop button 11, the middle stop button 12, and the right stop button 13 for displaying the symbols related to “BAR” on the active line. It is done. Specifically, in the BAR replay winning lottery table, a lottery value is defined according to the reel lock effect to be executed and the first bonus state points acquired by the player in the first bonus state. For example, when it is determined to execute “reel lock BRE1”, if the point for the first Bonus state is “0”, it is not won with the probability of “64512/65536”, and “1024/65536” Win with probability. If the winning result is determined by using the BAR replay winning lottery table, the left stop button 11 for displaying the symbols related to “BAR” on the active line, and the middle stop. The stop operation sequence of the button 12 and the right stop button 13 is notified.

(Final judge lottery table)
The final judge lottery table is provided in the sub ROM 402, and determines whether or not to shift to the ART state based on the points for the first Bonus state acquired by the player at the end of the first half part of the first Bonus state. Used when. Specifically, in the final judge lottery table, lottery values are defined according to the first bonus state points acquired by the player. For example, when the first bonus state point acquired by the player is “0”, the player is not elected with a probability of “64512/65536” and is elected with a probability of “1024/65536”. Then, if a lottery is performed as a result of the lottery using the final judge lottery table, the state shifts to the ART state.

  In the present embodiment, when the first bonus state point acquired by the player is “0”, the player is not elected with a probability of “64512/65536” and is elected with a probability of “1024/65536”. However, the lottery value may be defined so that when the first bonus state point acquired by the player is “0”, the player wins with a probability of “1024/65536”. Thereby, since the game property that the player does not acquire the first Bonus state point is added to the game property of acquiring the first Bonus state point, the interest in the game in the first Bonus state is improved.

(Relief point subtraction table)
The relief point subtraction table is provided in the sub ROM 402 and is used when determining whether or not to subtract relief points given to the player. Here, in the relief point subtraction table, a lottery value is defined for each winning combination. For example, when “Bonus replay BR1” or “Bonus replay BR2” is determined by an internal lottery process described later, “1” is subtracted from the relief point with a probability of “65536/65536”. . The relief point is given to the player when the second part of the first Bonus state starts.

(Relief point lottery table)
The relief point lottery table is provided in the sub-ROM 402, and is used when drawing whether or not to shift to the ART state according to the relief point acquired by the player at the end of the second half of the first bonus state. It is done. Here, in the relief point lottery table, the lottery value is defined according to the relief point acquired by the player at the end of the second half part of the first Bonus state. For example, when the player's saved points are “8”, the player is elected with a probability of “1966/65536” and is not elected with a probability of “63570/65536”. Then, when a lottery is made using the relief point lottery table, if the winning is made, the state is shifted to the ART state.

(State transition lottery table for the first Bonus state)
The state change lottery table for the first bonus state is provided in the sub ROM 402, and is used when the transfer destination state is lottery when it is determined to shift to the ART state in the first bonus state. Specifically, in the first Bonus state state transition lottery table, the lottery value of the transition destination is defined according to the condition determined to transition to the ART state. For example, if it is decided to shift to the ART state by acquiring “60” points for the first Bonus state in the first half part, it is decided to shift to the ART state with a probability of “32768/65536”. , It is determined to transition to the first RUSH state with a probability of “32112/65536”, and to transition to the second RUSH state with a probability of “656/65536”.

(1st Bonus state second half part point acquisition lottery table)
The first Bonus state second half part point acquisition lottery table is provided in the sub-ROM 402, and it is decided to shift to the ART state by acquiring “60” points for the first Bonus state point in the first half part of the first Bonus state. In the second half part of the first Bonus state, it is used when drawing whether or not to acquire an ART point. Specifically, in the first Bonus state second half part point acquisition lottery table, a lottery value is defined for an ART point that a player will acquire according to the winning combination. For example, when “Watermelon” is determined as the winning combination by the internal lottery process described later, “5” is obtained with a probability of “2048/65536” and ART points with a probability of “2048/65536”. You will get “10”.

(Second Bonus state lottery table)
Next, the second Bonus state lottery table will be described with reference to FIG.

  The second Bonus state lottery table includes: (a) a second Bonus state point conversion table used when converting points for the normal state acquired by the player before shifting to the second Bonus state into points for the second Bonus state (see FIG. 82 (A)), and (b) in the continuous game of the first half part of the second Bonus state, for the second Bonus state acquired by the player when a predetermined combination of symbols is displayed on the active line Based on the winning combination determined by the internal lottery process described later in the first half part of the second bonus state in the combo point lottery table (see FIG. 82 (B)) used when the points are lottered 2nd Bonus state points used when drawing whether or not to acquire state points In the first table of the selection table (see FIG. 82C) and (d) the second Bonus state, the second Bonus used when determining the transition destination state based on the points for the second Bonus state acquired by the player State state lottery table (see FIG. 82 (D)) and (e) in the first half part of the second bonus state, when the second bonus state point acquired by the player is less than “1000” points, In the second Bonus state second part state transition lottery table (see FIG. 82 (E)) used when the lottery determines whether or not to shift to the ART state, and (f) the ART point in the second part of the second Bonus state The second Bonus state second half part point acquisition lottery table (FIG. 82) used in the lottery of whether or not to acquire. It is constituted by F) reference).

(Second Bonus state point conversion table)
The second Bonus state point conversion table is provided in the sub-ROM 402, and is used when converting the normal state points acquired by the player to the second Bonus state points before shifting to the second Bonus state. Specifically, the point conversion table for the second Bonus state is based on the condition for shifting to the second Bonus state and the points for the normal state acquired by the player before shifting to the second Bonus state. The lottery value of the second Bonus state points to be assigned to the is defined. For example, in the second chance state, after the lottery is performed using the points for the normal state acquired by the player, the transition to the second bonus state is made after it is determined to shift to the bonus preparation state. When the remainder of the normal state points acquired by the player is “55”, the normal state points are converted to the second Bonus state point “20” with a probability of “6554/65536”, and “6554/65536”. The normal state point is converted to the second Bonus state point “30” with the probability “”, the normal state point is converted to the second Bonus state point “50” with the probability “6554/65536”, and “6554/65536”. The normal state point is converted to the second Bonus state point “100” with a probability of “6554/65”. Probability points for normal state 36 "is converted to a point" 150 "for the first 2Bonus state point for the normal state with a probability of" 32768/65536 "is converted to a point" 200 "for the first 2Bonus state.

(Combo point lottery table)
The combo point lottery table is provided in the sub ROM 402, and when the predetermined symbol combination is continuously displayed on the active line in a plurality of games, the points for the second bonus state that the player acquires are displayed. Used when drawing lots. Specifically, in the combo point lottery table, lottery values are defined according to the number of times a predetermined symbol combination is continuously displayed on the active line in a plurality of games. For example, when the combination of symbols related to “push order bell” is displayed continuously for “2” games, “10” is obtained for the second Bonus state point with a probability of “62259/65536”, and “3277” With the probability of “/ 65536”, “20” is acquired for the second Bonus state point.

(Second Bonus state point acquisition lottery table)
The second Bonus state point acquisition lottery table is provided in the sub ROM 402, and is provided in order to determine whether or not to acquire the second Bonus state point in the first half part of the second Bonus state. Specifically, the second Bonus state point acquisition lottery table defines the lottery value of the second Bonus state point that the player will acquire for each winning combination. For example, when “watermelon” is determined as the winning combination by the internal lottery process described later, the second Bonus state point is acquired with a probability of “32768/65536” and “16384/65536” With the probability, “50” is obtained for the second Bonus state point, and with the probability of “16384/65536”, “100” is obtained for the second Bonus state point.

(Second Bonus state state transition lottery table)
The state transition lottery table for the second Bonus state is provided in the sub ROM 402, and is used when the transition destination of the state after the end of the second Bonus state ends when the first half part of the second Bonus state ends. Specifically, in the second bonus state state transition lottery table, a lottery value for each state of the transition destination is defined according to the second bonus state point acquired by the player. For example, if the second bonus point earned by the player is “50”, the player moves to the first fall state with a probability of “6501/65536” and transitions to the ART state with a probability of “535/65536”. It will be.

(State transition lottery table for second Bonus state second half part)
The state transition lottery table for the second Bonus state second half part is provided in the sub-ROM 402, and in the second half part after it is determined to shift to the first fall standby state at the end of the first half part of the second Bonus state, It is used when drawing whether or not to shift to the first RUSH state or the second RUSH state. Specifically, the lottery value for the transition destination state is defined for each winning combination in the state transition lottery table for the second Bonus state second half part. For example, if “Watermelon” is determined as the winning combination by the internal lottery process described later, it will be lost with a probability of “64256/65536”, and it will be determined to shift to the ART state with a probability of “1280/65536”. Is done. In addition, when it becomes a loss, after the 2nd Bonus state ends, it will transfer to the 1st fall standby state.

(Second Bonus state second half part point acquisition lottery table)
The second Bonus state second half part point acquisition lottery table is provided in the sub-ROM 402, and when it is determined to shift to the ART state in the first half part of the second Bonus state, an ART point is given to the player. It is provided to draw whether or not. Specifically, the second Bonus state second half part point acquisition lottery table defines the ART point lottery value that the player will acquire for each winning combination. For example, when “Watermelon” is determined as the winning combination by the internal lottery process described later, “1” is obtained with a probability of “32768/65536”, and ART points with a probability of “16384/65536”. "2" is obtained, and "3" is obtained with the probability of "16384/65536".

(Third Bonus State Game Number Determination Table)
Next, the third Bonus state game number determination table will be described with reference to FIG.

  The third Bonus state game number determination table is provided in the sub ROM 402, and is provided for determining the number of games that can be played in the third Bonus state. Specifically, in the third bonus state game number determination table, a lottery value of the number of games that can be played in the third bonus state is defined in accordance with the condition for shifting to the third bonus state. For example, when the condition for shifting to the third Bonus state is the normal state and “direct hit Bonus” is determined as the winning combination by the internal lottery process described later and long freeze is executed, “65536/65536 "100" games are determined as the number of games that can be played in the third Bonus state.

(Program start processing by the main control board 300)
Next, a program start process performed by the main control board 300 will be described with reference to FIG. The program start process is a process performed based on the fact that the power switch 201sw is turned on.

(Step S1)
In step S <b> 1, the main CPU 301 performs processing for determining whether or not power is interrupted. Specifically, when power is supplied to the gaming machine 1, the main CPU 301 determines whether or not the gaming machine 1 is in a power interruption state, and when the power is not supplied to the gaming machine 1. In this case, a process for determining whether or not the gaming machine 1 is cut off by the backup power source is performed. If it is determined that the power is interrupted (step S1 = Yes), the process of step S1 is repeatedly executed. On the other hand, if it is determined that the power is not interrupted (step S1 = No), the process proceeds to step S2.

(Step S2)
In step S2, the main CPU 301 performs an initial setting process. Specifically, the main CPU 301 sets a table address for setting the internal register of the gaming machine 1, and performs a process of setting the register address based on the table. Then, when the process of step S2 ends, the process proceeds to step S3.

(Step S3)
In step S3, the main CPU 301 performs a RAM checksum calculation process. Specifically, the main CPU 301 calculates the checksum of the main RAM 303, and when the calculation is completed, performs processing for setting the checksum of the main RAM 303. Then, when the process of step S3 ends, the process proceeds to step S4.

(Step S4)
In step S4, the main CPU 301 performs a process for determining whether or not the setting change key switch is ON. In the present embodiment, the setting change key switch 49sw is turned on when the setting change key (not shown) is inserted into the setting change key hole 48 and rotated by a predetermined angle. Therefore, in step S4, the main CPU 301 performs a process of determining whether or not the setting change key (not shown) is rotated by a predetermined angle with the setting change key inserted in the setting change key hole 48. When it is determined that the setting change key switch is ON (step S4 = Yes), the process proceeds to step S5, and when it is determined that the setting change key switch is OFF (step S4). = No), the processing shifts to a power failure recovery process for restoring the value of the register saved before power interruption and the value of the saved stack pointer.

  When the power interruption recovery process is completed, the game machine 1 returns to the state when the power is turned off.

(Step S5)
In step S5, the main CPU 301 performs a process of determining whether or not the door opening / closing sensor is ON. In the present embodiment, a door key (not shown) is inserted into the keyhole 5 and rotated clockwise by a predetermined angle, and the front door 3 is opened by a predetermined angle or more, whereby the door opening / closing sensor 17s is turned on. It becomes. Therefore, in step S5, the main CPU 301 determines whether or not a door key (not shown) is inserted into the keyhole 5 and rotated clockwise by a predetermined angle, and the front door 3 is opened at a predetermined angle or more. Processing to determine is performed. If it is determined that the door opening / closing sensor is ON (step S5 = Yes), the process proceeds to step S7, and if it is determined that the door opening / closing sensor is OFF (step S5 = No). ), The process proceeds to step S6.

(Step S6)
In step S6, the main CPU 301 performs a process of setting a setting change device operation abnormality flag. Specifically, when the setting change key switch is ON (step S4 = Yes) and the door opening / closing sensor 17s is OFF (step S5 = No), the front door 3 is not opened more than a predetermined angle. Regardless, it is rotated by a predetermined angle with the setting change key inserted. For this reason, the main CPU 301 performs a process of setting a setting change device operation abnormality flag in a setting change device operation abnormality flag storage area provided in the main RAM 303. And when the process of step S6 is complete | finished, a process is transfered to the electric power interruption return process mentioned above.

(Step S7)
In step S7, the main CPU 301 performs processing for setting a setting change start command. Specifically, the main CPU 301 sets the setting change start command in the effect transmission data storage area provided in the main RAM 303 in order to transmit the setting change start command to the sub-control board 400. I do. Here, the “setting change start command” is a command having information or the like indicating that the gaming machine 1 is turned on and starts changing the setting value. Then, when the process of step S7 ends, the process proceeds to step S8.

(Step S8)
In step S8, the main CPU 301 performs a setting value change process. Specifically, the main CPU 301 acquires the current set value, determines whether or not the range of the set value is normal, and when the determination result is normal, the stored number indicator 28, Processing for displaying the current set value on the setting display unit 44 is performed. On the other hand, when the above determination result is not normal, processing for setting the initial setting value of the setting value in the setting value storage area provided in the main RAM 303 is performed. The main CPU 301 performs a setting value switching process based on the detection of the operation of the setting change button 45 by the setting change switch 45sw, and also detects that the operation of the start lever 10 is detected by the start switch 10sw. Based on this, the setting value is determined, and the setting value is stored in the main RAM 303 when it is detected that the setting changing key rotated by a predetermined angle has been rotated to an angle at which it can be inserted and removed. Processing to store in the set value storage area provided is performed. Then, when the process of step S8 ends, the process proceeds to step S9.

(Step S9)
In step S9, the main CPU 301 performs processing for setting a setting change end command. Specifically, the main CPU 301 sets the setting change end command in the effect transmission data storage area provided in the main RAM 303 in order to transmit the setting change end command to the sub-control board 400. I do. Here, the “setting change end command” is a command having information indicating that the setting value has been changed and information related to the changed setting value. Then, when the process of step S9 ends, the process proceeds to step S10.

(Step S10)
In step S10, the main CPU 301 performs a process of determining whether or not the door opening / closing sensor is OFF. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs processing for determining whether or not the door opening / closing sensor 17s is OFF. If it is determined that the door opening / closing sensor is OFF (step S10 = Yes), the process proceeds to step S11, and if it is determined that the door opening / closing sensor is not OFF (step S10 = No). ), The process proceeds to step S12.

(Step S11)
In step S11, the main CPU 301 performs processing for setting a door close command. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs a process of setting the door close command in an effect transmission data storage area provided in the main RAM 303 in order to transmit the door close command to the sub-control board 400. . Here, the “door close command” is a command having information indicating that the front door 3 is closed. Then, when the process of step S11 ends, the process proceeds to the main loop process (see FIG. 85).

(Step S12)
In step S12, the main CPU 301 performs processing for setting a door open command. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs a process of setting the door open command in an effect transmission data storage area provided in the main RAM 303 in order to transmit the door open command to the sub-control board 400. . Here, the “door open command” is a command having information indicating that the front door 3 is open. Then, when the process of step S12 ends, the process proceeds to the main loop process (see FIG. 85).

(Main loop processing by the main control board 300)
Next, the main loop process performed by the main control board 300 will be described with reference to FIG.

(Step S101)
In step S101, the main CPU 301 performs an initialization process. Specifically, the main CPU 301 sets the stack pointer, sets the initialization start address and the initialization end address of the main RAM 303, and then initializes from the initialization start address to the initialization end address area of the main RAM 303. Processing for initializing the area is performed. Then, when the process of step S101 ends, the process proceeds to step S102.

(Step S102)
In step S102, the main CPU 301 performs a game start management process. Specifically, the main CPU 301 sets the symbol position related to “Blue Seven”, the value of the inserted number counter provided in the main RAM 303, and the value of the stop control number storage area provided in the main RAM 303. Processing for clearing the value of the continuation rate information storage area provided in the main RAM 303, the value of the pressing reference position storage area provided in the main RAM 303, the value of the acquired number counter provided in the main RAM 303, etc. . Then, when the process of step S102 ends, the process proceeds to step S103.

(Step S103)
In step S103, the main CPU 301 performs a medal acceptance start process which will be described in detail later with reference to FIG. In this process, the main CPU 301 performs a process of automatically inserting medals when a later-described re-game operating flag is ON. Then, when the process of step S103 ends, the process proceeds to step S104.

(Step S104)
In step S104, the main CPU 301 performs a setting value confirmation process. Specifically, the main CPU 301 determines the setting value stored in the setting value storage area provided in the main RAM 303 when the medal has not been inserted and the setting change key switch 49sw is ON. A process of displaying the value on the setting display unit 44 is performed. Then, when the process of step S104 ends, the process proceeds to step S105.

(Step S105)
In step S105, the main CPU 301 performs medal management processing, which will be described in detail later with reference to FIG. In this process, the main CPU 301 performs a process of determining whether or not a medal has been inserted into the medal insertion slot 6 when a later-described re-game operating flag is not ON. Then, when the process of step S105 ends, the process proceeds to step S106.

(Step S106)
In step S <b> 106, the main CPU 301 performs processing for determining whether or not the value of the insertion number counter is “3”. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs a process of determining whether or not the value of the insertion number counter provided in the main RAM 303 is “3”. If it is determined that the value of the inserted number counter is “3” (step S106 = Yes), the process proceeds to step S107, and it is determined that the value of the inserted number counter is not “3”. In that case (step S106 = No), the process proceeds to step S104.

(Step S107)
In step S107, the main CPU 301 performs a start lever check process which will be described in detail later with reference to FIG. In the processing, the main CPU 301 performs processing for determining whether or not the start switch 10sw is ON. Then, when the process of step S107 ends, the process proceeds to step S108.

(Step S108)
In step S108, the main CPU 301 performs a process for determining whether or not the start switch is ON. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs processing for determining whether or not the start switch 10sw is ON. If it is determined that the start switch is ON (step S108 = Yes), the process proceeds to step S109. If it is determined that the start switch is not ON (step S108 = No), The process proceeds to step S104.

(Step S109)
In step S109, the main CPU 301 performs an internal lottery process which will be described in detail later with reference to FIG. In this process, the main CPU 301 performs a process of determining a winning combination by lottery. Then, when the process of step S109 ends, the process proceeds to step S110.

(Step S110)
In step S110, the main CPU 301 performs a symbol code setting process which will be described in detail later with reference to FIG. In this process, the main CPU 301 performs a process of acquiring a stop control number based on the winning combination determined in the process of step S109 and storing it in a stop control number storage area provided in the main RAM 303. Then, when the process of step S110 ends, the process proceeds to step S111.

(Step S111)
In step S111, the main CPU 301 performs a reel rotation start preparation process which will be described in detail later with reference to FIG. In this process, the main CPU 301 performs a process for setting a minimum game time. Then, when the process of step S111 ends, the process proceeds to step S112.

(Step S112)
In step S112, the main CPU 301 performs reel stop pre-processing which will be described in detail later with reference to FIG. In this process, the main CPU 301 performs a pull-in prediction process for the rotating reel 17 and the like. Then, when the process of step S112 ends, the process proceeds to step S113.

(Step S113)
In step S113, the main CPU 301 performs a reel rotation flag setting process. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs processing for storing information indicating that the left reel 18, the middle reel 19, and the right reel 20 are rotating in a reel information storage area provided in the main RAM 303. Then, when the process of step S113 ends, the process proceeds to step S114.

(Step S114)
In step S114, the main CPU 301 performs processing for clearing the operable state flag. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs processing to turn off the operable state flag corresponding to the BET button 7 or the MAXBET button 8 in the operable state flag storage area provided in the main RAM 303. Then, when the process of step S114 ends, the process proceeds to step S115.

(Step S115)
In step S115, the main CPU 301 performs a reel rotation start process. Specifically, the main CPU 301 drives the left stepping motor 151, the middle stepping motor 152, and the right stepping motor 153 via the reel control board 150 to determine the left reel 18, the middle reel 19, and the right reel 20. Performs processing to rotate at high speed. Then, when the process of step S115 ends, the process proceeds to step S116.

(Step S116)
In step S116, the main CPU 301 performs processing for setting an operable state flag. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs processing for turning on the operable state flag corresponding to the left stop button 11, the middle stop button 12, and the right stop button 13 in the operable state flag storage area provided in the main RAM 303. Do. Then, when the process of step S116 ends, the process proceeds to step S117.

(Step S117)
In step S117, the main CPU 301 performs reel rotation processing which will be described in detail later with reference to FIG. In this process, the main CPU 301 detects that the left stop switch 11sw, middle stop switch 12sw, and right stop switch 13sw have detected a stop operation on the left stop button 11, the middle stop button 12, and the right stop button 13 by the player. Control for stopping the rotation of the left reel 18, the middle reel 19, and the right reel 20 is performed. Then, when the process of step S117 ends, the process proceeds to step S118.

(Step S118)
In step S118, the main CPU 301 determines whether or not all reels have stopped. Specifically, the main CPU 301 determines whether all of the left reel 18, the middle reel 19, and the right reel 20 have stopped based on the value of the operable state flag storage area provided in the main RAM 303. I do. If it is determined that all the reels are stopped (step S118 = Yes), the process proceeds to step S119. If it is determined that all the reels are not stopped (step S118 = No), The process proceeds to step S117, and the same process is repeated until all reels stop.

(Step S119)
In step S119, the main CPU 301 performs display determination processing, which will be described in detail later with reference to FIG. In this process, the main CPU 301 performs a process of calculating the number of payouts according to the winning symbol combination. Then, when the process of step S119 ends, the process proceeds to step S120.

(Step S120)
In step S120, the main CPU 301 performs payout processing, which will be described in detail later with reference to FIG. In this process, the main CPU 301 performs a process such as paying out medals by driving the hopper 202 via the power supply board 200. Then, when the process of step S120 ends, the process proceeds to step S121.

(Step S121)
In step S121, the main CPU 301 performs a game state transition process which will be described in detail later with reference to FIG. In this process, the main CPU 301 performs a process of shifting the RT gaming state based on the combination of symbols displayed on the active line. Then, when the process of step S121 ends, the process proceeds to step S101, and the process is repeated.

(Medal reception start processing by the main control board 300)
Next, based on FIG. 86, the medal acceptance start process performed by the process of step S103 of FIG. 85 will be described. FIG. 85 is a diagram showing a subroutine for medal acceptance start processing.

(Step S103-1)
In step S103-1, the main CPU 301 performs a process of determining whether or not the re-game in-operation flag is ON. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs a process of determining whether or not the re-game operation flag is ON based on the value of the re-game operation flag storage area provided in the main RAM 303. If it is determined that the re-game operating flag is ON (step S103-1 = Yes), the process proceeds to step S103-2, and it is determined that the re-game operating flag is not ON. In this case (step S103-1 = No), the medal acceptance start process subroutine is terminated, and the process proceeds to step S104 of the main loop process.

(Step S103-2)
In step S103-2, the main CPU 301 performs processing for setting an automatic charging initial timer. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs a process of setting “355” to a timer counter provided in the main RAM 303 in order to provide a standby time for automatically inserting medals used in the previous game. Then, when the process of step S103-2 is completed, the process proceeds to step S103-3.

(Step S103-3)
In step S103-3, the main CPU 301 performs timer wait processing. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs a process of waiting until the value set in the timer counter becomes “0” by the process of step S103-2 or the process of step S103-8 described later. Then, when the process of step S103-3 ends, the process proceeds to step S103-4.

(Step S103-4)
In step S103-4, the main CPU 301 performs processing for determining whether or not the re-game display lamp is lit. Specifically, the main CPU 301 determines whether the re-game display lamp lighting flag in the lamp-related data storage area provided in the main RAM 303 is ON, so that the re-game display lamp 31 is on. Processing for determining whether or not there is present is performed. If it is determined that the regame display lamp is lit (step S103-4 = Yes), the process proceeds to step S103-6, and it is determined that the regame display lamp is not lit. In this case (step S103-4 = No), the process proceeds to step S103-5.

(Step S103-5)
In step S103-5, the main CPU 301 performs processing for setting an automatic medal insertion command. Specifically, the main CPU 301 sets the medal automatic insertion command in the effect transmission data storage area provided in the main RAM 303 in order to transmit the automatic medal insertion command to the sub-control board 400. I do. Here, the “medal automatic insertion command” is a command having information indicating that a medal used in the previous game is automatically inserted. Then, when the process of step S103-5 ends, the process proceeds to step S103-6.

(Step S103-6)
In step S103-6, the main CPU 301 performs a process of adding “1” to the value of the insertion number counter. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs a process of adding “1” to the value of the insertion number counter provided in the main RAM 303 with the upper limit being the number of medals used in the previous game. Then, when the process of step S103-6 ends, the process proceeds to step S103-7.

(Step S103-7)
In step S103-7, the main CPU 301 performs a process of determining whether or not the value of the insertion number counter is “3”. Specifically, the main CPU 301 adds “1” to the value of the insertion number counter provided in the main RAM 303 by the process of step S103-6, and as a result, the value of the insertion number counter provided in the main RAM 303 is obtained. It is determined whether or not “3” has been reached. When it is determined that the value of the inserted number counter is “3” (step S103-7 = Yes), the medal acceptance start process subroutine is terminated, and the process proceeds to step S104 of the main loop process. . On the other hand, if it is determined that the value of the inserted number counter is not “3” (step S103-7 = No), the process proceeds to step S103-8.

(Step S103-8)
In step S103-8, the main CPU 301 performs processing for setting an automatic insertion interval timer. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs a process of setting “71” to a timer counter provided in the main RAM 303 in order to provide an interval for automatically inserting medals used in the previous game. Then, when the process of step S103-8 ends, the process proceeds to step S103-3.

(Medal management process)
Next, based on FIG. 87, the medal management process performed by the process of step S105 of FIG. 85 will be described. FIG. 87 is a diagram showing a subroutine for medal management processing.

(Step S105-1)
In step S105-1, the main CPU 301 performs a process of determining whether or not the re-game in-operation flag is ON. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs a process of determining whether or not the value of the re-game operating flag storage area provided in the main RAM 303 is ON. If it is determined that the re-game in-operation flag is ON (step S105-1 = Yes), the medal management process subroutine is terminated, and the process proceeds to step S106 of the main loop process. On the other hand, if it is determined that the re-game in-operation flag is not ON (step S105-1 = No), the process proceeds to step S105-2.

  In the present embodiment, when the re-game in-operation flag is ON, the medal management process subroutine is terminated, and the medal check process described later is not performed. Therefore, when the re-game in-operation flag is ON, the medal insertion is not accepted, but even when the re-game in-operation flag is ON, the medal insertion may be accepted. Good.

(Step S105-2)
In step S105-2, the main CPU 301 performs processing for determining whether or not a medal has been inserted. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs a process of determining whether or not insertion of a medal is detected by the selector sensor 15s. If it is determined that a medal has been inserted (step S105-2 = Yes), the process proceeds to step S105-3, and if it is determined that no medal has been inserted (step S105-2). = No), the process proceeds to step S105-4.

(Step S105-3)
In step S105-3, the main CPU 301 performs a medal insertion check process, which will be described in detail later with reference to FIG. In this process, the main CPU 301 determines the value of the input number counter provided in the main RAM 303 based on the value of the input number counter provided in the main RAM 303 or the value of the stored number counter provided in the main RAM 303. Also, processing for adding the value of the stored number counter provided in the main RAM 303 is performed. When the process of step S105-3 is completed, the medal management process subroutine is terminated, and the process proceeds to step S106 of the main loop process.

(Step S105-4)
In step S105-4, the main CPU 301 performs a process of setting “1” as the insertion request number. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs a process of setting “1” as the requested number of sheets in the register. Then, when the process of step S105-4 ends, the process proceeds to step S105-5.

(Step S105-5)
In step S105-5, the main CPU 301 performs processing for determining whether or not the BET switch is ON. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs processing for determining whether or not an operation of the BET button 7 by the player is detected by the BET switch 7sw. If it is determined that the BET switch is ON (step S105-5 = Yes), the process proceeds to step S105-8, and if it is determined that the BET switch is not ON (step S105). −5 = No), the process proceeds to step S105-6.

(Step S105-6)
In step S105-6, the main CPU 301 performs processing for setting “3” as the requested number of sheets to be inserted. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs processing for updating the insertion request number “1” set in the register to “3”. Then, when the process of step S105-6 ends, the process proceeds to step S105-7.

(Step S105-7)
In step S105-7, the main CPU 301 performs processing for determining whether or not the MAXBET switch is ON. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs processing for determining whether or not an operation of the MAXBET button 8 by the player is detected by the MAXBET switch 8sw. If it is determined that the MAXBET switch is ON (step S105-7 = Yes), the process proceeds to step S105-8, and if it is determined that the MAXBET switch is not ON (step S105). −7 = No), and the process proceeds to step S105-11.

(Step S105-8)
In step S105-8, the main CPU 301 performs a process of determining whether or not the value of the insertion number counter is “3”. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs a process of determining whether or not the value of the insertion number counter provided in the main RAM 303 is “3”. If it is determined that the value of the inserted number counter is “3” (step S105-8 = Yes), the medal management process subroutine is terminated, and the process proceeds to step S106 of the main loop process. On the other hand, if it is determined that the value of the inserted number counter is not “3” (step S105-8 = No), the process proceeds to step S105-9.

(Step S105-9)
In step S105-9, the main CPU 301 performs a process of determining whether or not the value of the stored number counter is “1” or more. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs a process of determining whether or not the value of the stored number counter provided in the main RAM 303 is “1” or more. If it is determined that the value of the stored number counter is “1” or more (step S105-9 = Yes), the process proceeds to step S105-10, and the value of the stored number counter is “1” or more. If it is determined that this is not the case (step S105-9 = No), the medal management process subroutine is terminated, and the process proceeds to step S106 of the main loop process.

(Step S105-10)
In step S105-10, the main CPU 301 performs a stored medal insertion process, which will be described in detail later with reference to FIG. In this process, the main CPU 301 performs a process of adding the value of the insertion number counter provided in the main RAM 303 based on the value of the insertion number counter provided in the main RAM 303. When the process of step S105-10 ends, the medal management process subroutine ends, and the process proceeds to step S106 of the main loop process.

(Step S105-11)
In step S105-11, the main CPU 301 performs processing for determining whether or not the checkout switch is ON. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs a process of determining whether or not an operation of the payment button 9 by the player is detected by the payment switch 9sw. If it is determined that the settlement switch is ON (step S105-11 = Yes), the process proceeds to step S105-12, and if it is determined that the settlement switch is not ON (step S105). −11 = No), the medal management process subroutine is terminated, and the process proceeds to step S106 of the main loop process.

(Step S105-12)
In step S105-12, the main CPU 301 performs a process of determining whether or not the value of the stored number counter is “1” or more. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs a process of determining whether or not the value of the stored number counter provided in the main RAM 303 is “1” or more. If it is determined that the value of the stored number counter is “1” or more (step S105-12 = Yes), the process proceeds to step S105-13, and the value of the stored number counter is “1” or more. If it is determined that this is not the case (step S105-12 = No), the medal management process subroutine is terminated, and the process proceeds to step S106 of the main loop process.

(Step S105-13)
In step S105-13, the main CPU 301 performs processing for setting a settlement start command. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs a process of setting the settlement start command in an effect transmission data storage area provided in the main RAM 303 in order to transmit the settlement start command to the sub-control board 400. . Here, the “settlement start command” is a command having information or the like indicating that a settlement process for returning medals stored in the gaming machine 1 to the player is started. Then, when the process of step S105-13 ends, the process proceeds to step S105-14.

(Step S105-14)
In step S105-14, the main CPU 301 performs a process of determining whether or not the value of the insertion number counter is “1” or more. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs a process of determining whether or not the value of the insertion number counter provided in the main RAM 303 is “1” or more. If it is determined that the value of the input number counter is “1” or more (step S105-14 = Yes), the process proceeds to step S105-15, and the value of the input number counter is “1” or more. If it is determined that this is not the case (step S105-14 = No), the process proceeds to step S105-18.

(Step S105-15)
In step S105-15, the main CPU 301 performs inserted medal settlement processing. Specifically, the main CPU 301 controls to return “1” medals by driving the hopper 202 via the power supply board 200 in order to return the bet medals to the player. Then, when the process of step S105-15 ends, the process proceeds to step S105-16.

(Step S105-16)
In step S105-16, the main CPU 301 performs a process of subtracting “1” from the value of the insertion number counter. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs a process of subtracting “1” from the value of the insertion number counter provided in the main RAM 303. Then, when the process of step S105-16 ends, the process proceeds to step S105-17.

(Step S105-17)
In step S105-17, the main CPU 301 performs a process of determining whether or not the value of the insertion number counter is “0”. Specifically, the main CPU 301 subtracts “1” from the value of the insertion number counter provided in the main RAM 303 by the process of step S105-16, so that the value of the insertion number counter provided in the main RAM 303 is obtained. A process of determining whether or not “0” has been reached is performed. If it is determined that the value of the inserted number counter is “0” (step S105-17 = Yes), the process proceeds to step S105-19, and the value of the inserted number counter is not “0”. Is determined (step S105-17 = No), the process proceeds to step S105-15, and the same process is performed until the value of the insertion number counter provided in the main RAM 303 becomes “0”. Run repeatedly.

(Step S105-18)
In step S105-18, the main CPU 301 performs a stored medal settlement process. Specifically, the main CPU 301 controls to return “1” medals by driving the hopper 202 via the power supply board 200 in order to return the medals stored in the gaming machine 1 to the player. I do. Then, “1” is subtracted from the value of the stored number counter provided in the main RAM 303, and as a result of performing the processing, it is determined whether or not the value of the stored number counter provided in the main RAM 303 is “0”. The same processing is repeatedly executed until it is determined that the value of the stored number counter provided in the main RAM 303 is “0”. Then, when the process of step S105-18 ends, the process proceeds to step S105-19.

(Step S105-19)
In step S105-19, the main CPU 301 performs processing for setting a settlement end command. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs a process of setting the settlement end command in the effect transmission data storage area provided in the main RAM 303 in order to transmit the settlement end command to the sub-control board 400. . Here, the “payment end command” is information indicating that the bet medals have been returned to the player, or that the medals stored in the gaming machine 1 have been returned to the player. This command has information to that effect. When the process of step S105-19 ends, the medal management process subroutine ends, and the process proceeds to step S106 of the main loop process.

(Medal insertion check process)
Next, the medal insertion check process performed by the process of step S105-3 of FIG. 87 will be described based on FIG. FIG. 88 shows a subroutine for medal insertion check processing.

(Step S105-3-1)
In step S105-3-1, the main CPU 301 performs medal passage monitoring start processing. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs a process of starting a medal passage monitoring process for determining whether or not a normal medal has been inserted by the selector 15. Then, when the process of step S105-3-1 ends, the process proceeds to step S105-3-2.

(Step S105-3-2)
In step S105-3-2, the main CPU 301 performs processing for determining whether an error has been detected. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs a process of determining whether or not an error has been detected in the medal passage monitoring process started by the medal passage monitoring start process in step S105-3-1. If it is determined that an error has been detected (step S105-3-2 = Yes), the process proceeds to step S105-3-9. If it is determined that no error has been detected ( The process proceeds to step S105-3-2 = No) and step S105-3-3.

(Step S105-3-3)
In step S105-3-3, the main CPU 301 performs a process of determining whether or not the medal passage monitoring process has ended. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs a process for determining whether or not the medal passage monitoring process started by the medal passage monitoring start process in step S105-3-1 has ended. If it is determined that the medal passage monitoring process has ended (step S105-3-3 = Yes), the process proceeds to step S105-3-4, and it is determined that the medal passage monitoring process has not ended. If it is determined (step S105-3-3 = No), the process proceeds to step S105-3-1 and the same process is executed until the medal passage monitoring process ends.

(Step S105-3-4)
In step S105-3-4, the main CPU 301 performs processing to determine whether or not the medal insertion number is a MAX value. Specifically, the main CPU 301 determines whether or not the value of the inserted number counter provided in the main RAM 303 is “3” and the value of the stored number counter provided in the main RAM 303 is “50”. Processing to determine is performed. If it is determined that the medal inserted number is the MAX value (step S105-3-4 = Yes), the process proceeds to step S105-3-8, and it is determined that the medal inserted number is not the MAX value. If it is determined (step S105-3-4 = No), the process proceeds to step S105-3-5.

(Step S105-3-5)
In step S105-3-5, the main CPU 301 performs a process of determining whether or not the value of the insertion number counter is “3”. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs a process of determining whether or not the value of the insertion number counter provided in the main RAM 303 is “3”. If it is determined that the value of the inserted number counter is “3” (step S105-3-5 = Yes), the process proceeds to step S105-3-7, where the value of the inserted number counter is “3”. If it is determined that it is not “3” (step S105-3-5 = No), the process proceeds to step S105-3-6.

(Step S105-3-6)
In step S105-3-6, the main CPU 301 performs a process of adding “1” to the value of the insertion number counter. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs a process of adding “1” to the value of the insertion number counter provided in the main RAM 303. Then, when the process of step S105-3-6 ends, the process proceeds to step S105-3-8.

(Step S105-3-7)
In step S105-3-7, the main CPU 301 performs a process of adding “1” to the value of the stored number counter. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs a process of adding “1” to the value of the stored number counter provided in the main RAM 303. Then, when the process of step S105-3-7 ends, the process proceeds to step S105-3-8.

(Step S105-3-8)
In step S105-3-8, the main CPU 301 performs processing for setting a medal insertion command. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs a process of setting the medal insertion command in an effect transmission data storage area provided in the main RAM 303 in order to transmit the medal insertion command to the sub-control board 400. . Here, the “medal insertion command” is a command having information indicating that a normal medal has been inserted into the medal insertion slot 6. When the process of step S105-3-8 ends, the medal insertion check process subroutine ends, and the process proceeds to step S105-4 of the medal management process.

(Step S105-3-9)
In step S105-3-9, the main CPU 301 performs a medal insertion error detection process. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs processing for displaying error information on the payout number display 29 or the like. In addition, a medal insertion error command having information indicating that a medal insertion error has been detected is set in an effect transmission data storage area provided in the main RAM 303. When the process of step S105-3-9 ends, the medal insertion check process subroutine ends, and the process proceeds to step S105-4 of the medal management process.

(Storage medal insertion process)
Next, the stored medal insertion process performed by the process of step S105-10 of FIG. 87 will be described based on FIG. FIG. 89 is a diagram showing a subroutine of stored medal insertion processing.

(Step S105-10-1)
In step S <b> 105-10-1, the main CPU 301 performs a process of determining whether or not the value of the stored number counter is equal to or more than the requested number of sheets. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs a process of determining whether or not the value of the stored number counter provided in the main RAM 303 is equal to or larger than the requested number of sheets stored in the register. If it is determined that the value of the stored number counter is equal to or greater than the requested number of inputs (step S105-10-1 = Yes), the process proceeds to step S105-10-3, and the value of the stored number counter is If it is determined that the number is not equal to or greater than the requested number of insertions (step S105-10-1 = No), the process proceeds to step S105-10-2.

(Step S105-10-2)
In step S105-10-2, the main CPU 301 performs processing for setting the value of the stored number counter to the requested number of input sheets. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs a process of setting the value of the stored number counter provided in the main RAM 303 to the value of the requested number of sheets stored in the register. Then, when the process of step S105-10-2 ends, the process proceeds to step S105-10-3.

(Step S105-10-3)
In step S105-10-3, the main CPU 301 performs processing for setting a BET command. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs a process of setting the BET command in an effect transmission data storage area provided in the main RAM 303 in order to transmit the BET command to the sub control board 400. Here, the “BET command” is a command having information indicating that a stored medal has been inserted by operating the BET button 7 and the MAXBET button 8. Then, when the process of step S105-10-3 ends, the process proceeds to step S105-10-4.

(Step S105-10-4)
In step S105-10-4, the main CPU 301 performs a process of adding “1” to the value of the insertion number counter. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs a process of adding “1” to the value of the insertion number counter provided in the main RAM 303. Then, when the process of step S105-10-4 ends, the process proceeds to step S105-10-5.

(Step S105-10-5)
In step S105-10-5, the main CPU 301 performs a process of subtracting “1” from the requested number of sheets to be inserted. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs a process of subtracting “1” from the value of the number of requested insertions stored in the register. Then, when the process of step S105-10-5 ends, the process proceeds to step S105-10-6.

(Step S105-10-6)
In step S105-10-6, the main CPU 301 performs a process of subtracting “1” from the value of the stored number counter. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs a process of subtracting “1” from the value of the stored number counter provided in the main RAM 303. Then, when the process of step S105-10-6 ends, the process proceeds to step S105-10-7.

(Step S105-10-7)
In step S <b> 105-10-7, the main CPU 301 performs a process of determining whether or not the insertion request number is “0”. Specifically, as a result of subtracting “1” from the value of the number of requested insertions stored in the register by the processing of step S105-10-5, the main CPU 301 obtains the value of the number of requested requests stored in the register. A process of determining whether or not “0” has been reached is performed. If it is determined that the requested number of insertions is “0” (step S105-10-7 = Yes), the stored medal insertion process subroutine is terminated, and the process proceeds to step S106 of the main loop process. . On the other hand, if it is determined that the requested number of sheets is not “0” (step S105-10-7 = No), the process proceeds to step S105-10-4.

(Start lever check processing)
Next, based on FIG. 90, the start lever check process performed by the process of step S107 of FIG. 85 will be described. FIG. 90 is a diagram showing a subroutine of start lever check processing.

(Step S107-1)
In step S107-1, the main CPU 301 performs a process of determining whether or not the start switch is ON. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs a process of determining whether or not the start switch 10sw has detected an operation of the start lever 10 by the player. When it is determined that the start switch is ON (step S107-1 = Yes), the process proceeds to step S107-2, and when it is determined that the start switch is not ON (step S107). −1 = No), the start lever check processing subroutine is terminated, and the process proceeds to step S108 of the main loop processing.

(Step S107-2)
In step S107-2, the main CPU 301 performs a process of turning off the re-game operating flag. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs processing for turning off the value of the re-game operating flag storage area provided in the main RAM 303. When the process of step S107-2 ends, the start lever check process subroutine ends, and the process proceeds to step S108 of the main loop process.

(Internal lottery process)
Next, the internal lottery process performed by the process of step S109 of FIG. 85 will be described based on FIG. FIG. 91 shows a subroutine of the internal lottery process.

(Step S109-1)
In step S109-1, the main CPU 301 performs a pre-lottery error check process. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs a process of detecting an error before determining the winning combination by the internal lottery process. Then, when the process of step S109-1 ends, the process proceeds to step S109-2.

  The main CPU 301 performs a non-recoverable error process when an error is detected by the pre-lottery error check process in step S109-1.

(Step S109-2)
In step S109-2, the main CPU 301 performs a hard random number acquisition process. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs processing for extracting the random number value generated by the main random number generator 304 and processing for storing the extracted random number value in a register. Then, when the process of step S109-2 ends, the process proceeds to step S109-3.

(Step S109-3)
In step S109-3, the main CPU 301 performs a winning number initial value acquisition process. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs processing for obtaining an initial value of a winning number when determining a winning combination. Here, in this embodiment, the main CPU 301 performs a process of acquiring “39” as the initial value of the winning number and storing it in the register. Then, when the process of step S109-3 ends, the process proceeds to step S109-4.

(Step S109-4)
In step S109-4, the main CPU 301 performs processing for setting the second winning combination determination table. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs a process of setting a second winning combination determination table (see FIG. 21) stored in the main ROM 302. Then, when the process of step S109-4 ends, the process proceeds to step S109-5.

(Step S109-5)
In step S109-5, the main CPU 301 performs a winning number acquisition process. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs processing for acquiring a winning number stored in the register. Then, when the process of step S109-5 ends, the process proceeds to step S109-6.

(Step S109-6)
In step S109-6, the main CPU 301 performs processing for determining whether or not the winning number is “24” or more. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs a process of determining whether or not the winning number acquired by the winning number acquiring process in step S109-5 is “24” or more. If it is determined that the winning number is “24” or more (step S109-6 = Yes), the process proceeds to step S109-11, and it is determined that the winning number is not “24” or more. In this case (step S109-6 = No), the process proceeds to step S109-7.

(Step S109-7)
In step S109-7, the main CPU 301 performs a gaming state acquisition process. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs processing for acquiring a gaming state based on the value of the gaming state storage area provided in the main RAM 303. Then, when the process of step S109-7 ends, the process proceeds to step S109-8.

(Step S109-8)
In step S109-8, the main CPU 301 performs processing for setting the first winning combination determination table. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs processing for setting the first winning combination determination table in accordance with the gaming state acquired by the gaming state acquisition processing in step S109-7. For example, when the gaming state acquired by the gaming state acquisition processing in step S109-7 is the first RT gaming state, processing for setting the first winning combination determination table for the first RT gaming state (see FIG. 15) is performed. . Then, when the process of step S109-8 ends, the process proceeds to step S109-9.

  In the process of step S109-8, if the gaming state acquired by the gaming state acquisition process of step S109-7 is the first RT gaming state, the first winning combination determination table for the first RT gaming state (FIG. 15). When the gaming state acquired by the gaming state acquisition processing in step S109-7 is the second RT gaming state, the first winning combination determination table for the second RT gaming state (see FIG. 16). ) Is set, and when the gaming state acquired by the gaming state acquisition processing of step S109-7 is the third RT gaming state, the first winning combination determination table for the third RT gaming state (see FIG. 17) If the gaming state acquired by the gaming state acquisition processing in step S109-7 is the fourth RT gaming state, the fourth R When the gaming state first winning combination determination table (see FIG. 18) is set, and the gaming state acquired by the gaming state acquisition processing in step S109-7 is the fifth RT gaming state, the fifth RT gaming is performed. When the state first winning combination determination table (see FIG. 19) is set, and the gaming state acquired by the gaming state acquisition processing in step S109-7 is the sixth RT gaming state, the sixth RT gaming state The process which sets the 1st winning combination determination table for use (refer FIG. 20) is performed.

(Step S109-9)
In step S109-9, the main CPU 301 performs a lottery data acquisition process. Specifically, the main CPU 301 obtains data related to the winning combination corresponding to the winning number based on the first winning combination determining table set by the process of step S109-8 and the winning number stored in the register. Perform the acquisition process. Then, when the process of step S109-9 ends, the process proceeds to step S109-10.

(Step S109-10)
In step S109-10, the main CPU 301 performs processing for determining whether or not there is a lottery. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs a process of determining whether or not to perform the lottery based on the data relating to the winning combination acquired by the lottery data acquisition process of step S109-9. Here, in the present embodiment, the main CPU 301 determines that the lottery is not performed when the lottery value corresponding to the winning number is “0”. When it is determined that there is no lottery (step S109-10 = Yes), the process proceeds to step S109-16, and when it is determined that there is no lottery (step S109-10 = No). ), The process proceeds to step S109-11.

(Step S109-11)
In step S <b> 109-11, the main CPU 301 performs a process for determining whether or not the setting is a common value for all settings. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs a process of determining whether or not the winning number acquired by the lottery data acquisition process in step S109-9 is the same lottery value regardless of the set value. If it is determined that the value is a common value for all settings (step S109-11 = Yes), the process proceeds to step S109-13 and if it is determined that the value is not a common value for all settings (step S109- 11 = No), the process proceeds to step S109-12.

(Step S109-12)
In step S109-12, the main CPU 301 performs a lottery value acquisition process by setting value. Specifically, the main CPU 301 determines the first winning combination currently set based on the value stored in the set value storage area provided in the main RAM 303 and the winning number stored in the register. The lottery value of the table or the second winning combination determination table is acquired and stored in the register. Then, when the process of step S109-12 ends, the process proceeds to step S109-14.

(Step S109-13)
In step S109-13, the main CPU 301 performs all setting common lottery value acquisition processing. Specifically, the main CPU 301 acquires a lottery value of the first winning combination determination table or the second winning combination determination table that is currently set based on the winning number stored in the register, and stores it in the register. Perform the process. Then, when the process of step S109-13 ends, the process proceeds to step S109-14.

(Step S109-14)
In step S109-14, the main CPU 301 performs a lottery confirmation process. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs the lottery value acquired by the lottery value acquisition process by setting value of step S109-12 from the random number value stored in the register by the hard random number acquisition process of step S109-2, or step S109. The lottery value acquired by the all-setting common lottery value acquisition process of -13 is subtracted, and the value stored in the register in which the random number value is stored is updated to the value after the subtraction and stored. Then, when the process of step S109-14 ends, the process proceeds to step S109-15.

(Step S109-15)
In step S109-15, the main CPU 301 performs a process of determining whether or not the winning is made. Specifically, the main CPU 301 determines the lottery value acquired by the lottery value acquisition process by setting value of step S109-12 from the random number value stored in the register by the lottery confirmation process of step S109-14, or step S109-13. As a result of performing the process of subtracting the lottery value acquired by the all setting common lottery value acquisition process, a process of determining whether or not a negative value is obtained is performed. If it is determined that the winning is made (step S109-15 = Yes), the subroutine of the internal lottery process is terminated, and the process proceeds to step S110 of the main loop process. On the other hand, when it is determined that the winning is not made (step S109-15 = No), the process proceeds to step S109-16.

(Step S109-16)
In step S109-16, the main CPU 301 performs a process of subtracting “1” from the value of the winning number. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs a process of subtracting “1” from the winning number stored in the register. Then, when the process of step S109-16 ends, the process proceeds to step S109-17.

(Step S109-17)
In step S109-17, the main CPU 301 performs a process of determining whether or not the value of the winning number is “0”. Specifically, the main CPU 301 determines whether or not the value of the winning number is “0” as a result of subtracting “1” from the winning number value stored in the register by the process of step S109-16. Perform the process. If it is determined that the value of the winning number is “0” (step S109-17 = Yes), the internal lottery process subroutine is terminated, and the process proceeds to step S110 of the main loop process. On the other hand, when it is determined that the value of the winning number is not “0” (step S109-17 = No), the process proceeds to step S109-4.

  In this embodiment, when the value of the winning number is “0” (step S109-17 = YES), “losing” is determined as the winning combination.

(Design code setting process)
Next, the symbol code setting process performed by the process of step S110 of FIG. 85 will be described based on FIG. FIG. 92 is a diagram showing a subroutine of symbol code setting processing.

(Step S110-1)
In step S110-1, the main CPU 301 performs a stop control number acquisition process. Specifically, the main CPU 301 stores the winning number of the winning combination determined by the internal lottery process in step S108 as a stop control number in a stop control number storage area provided in the main RAM 303 and sets it in a register. Process. Then, when the process of step S110-1 ends, the process proceeds to step S110-2.

(Step S110-2)
In step S110-2, the main CPU 301 performs a display permission symbol bit setting process. Specifically, the main CPU 301 displays information that is information related to a combination of symbols that is allowed to be displayed on the active line in accordance with the stop control number acquired by the stop control number acquisition process in step S110-1. Performs processing to set bits. Then, when the process of step S110-2 ends, the process proceeds to step S110-3.

(Step S110-3)
In step S110-3, the main CPU 301 performs processing for setting a reel rotation start acceptance command. Specifically, the main CPU 301 sets the reel rotation start acceptance command in the effect transmission data storage area provided in the main RAM 303 in order to transmit the reel rotation start acceptance command to the sub-control board 400. Perform the process. Here, the “reel rotation start acceptance command” is a command having information indicating that the operation of the start lever 10 has been accepted. Then, when the process of step S110-3 ends, the process proceeds to step S110-4.

(Step S110-4)
In step S110-4, the main CPU 301 performs an effect lottery process that will be described in detail later with reference to FIG. In this process, the main CPU 301 performs a reel effect lottery management process, which will be described in detail later with reference to FIG. Then, when the process of step S110-4 ends, the process proceeds to step S110-5.

(Step S110-5)
In step S110-5, the main CPU 301 performs an effect state management process which will be described in detail later with reference to FIG. In this process, the main CPU 301 performs a second effect state point lottery process or the like for determining the second effect state point to be given to the player by lottery. Then, when the process of step S110-5 ends, the process proceeds to step S110-6.

(Step S110-6)
In step S110-6, the main CPU 301 performs processing for setting a second body effect lottery command. Specifically, the main CPU 301 transmits the second torso effect lottery command to the sub-control board 400, and transmits the second torso effect lottery command to the effect transmission data provided in the main RAM 303. Performs processing to set in the storage area. Here, the “second body effect lottery command” is a command having information related to a level described later. Then, when the process of step S110-6 ends, the process proceeds to step S110-7.

(Step S110-7)
In step S110-7, the main CPU 301 performs processing for setting a RUSH stock number command. Specifically, the main CPU 301 sets the RUSH stock number command in the effect transmission data storage area provided in the main RAM 303 in order to transmit the RUSH stock number command to the sub-control board 400. I do. Here, the “RUSH stock number command” is a command having information relating to the number of games that can be played in the first RUSH state or the second RUSH state. Then, when the process of step S110-7 ends, the process proceeds to step S110-8.

(Step S110-8)
In step S110-8, the main CPU 301 performs processing for setting a RUSH game number command. Specifically, the main CPU 301 sets the RUSH game number command in the effect transmission data storage area provided in the main RAM 303 in order to transmit the RUSH game number command to the sub-control board 400. I do. Here, the “RUSH game number command” is a command having information relating to the number of games in the first RUSH state or the second RUSH state. Then, when the process of step S110-8 ends, the process proceeds to step S110-9.

(Step S110-9)
In step S110-9, the main CPU 301 performs an old display symbol bit acquisition process. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs a process of acquiring a display symbol bit having information on a combination of symbols displayed on the active line in the previous game. Then, when the process of step S110-9 ends, the process proceeds to step S110-10.

(Step S110-10)
In step S110-10, the main CPU 301 performs a process of determining whether or not it matches the target data. Specifically, the main CPU 301 indicates that the display symbol bits acquired by the old display symbol bit acquisition process in step S110-9 are “lower watermelon play”, “upper watermelon play”, “weak cherry replay”, “strong cherry replay”. ”,“ Right-up watermelon ”,“ Right-down watermelon ”,“ First cherry ”, or“ Second cherry ”is determined. If it is determined that it matches the target data (step S110-10 = Yes), the process proceeds to step S110-12, and if it is determined that it does not match the target data (step S110-10 = No), the process proceeds to step S110-11.

(Step S110-11)
In step S110-11, the main CPU 301 performs a process of determining whether or not the process has been completed. Specifically, the main CPU 301 indicates that the display symbol bits acquired by the old display symbol bit acquisition process in step S110-9 are “lower watermelon play”, “upper watermelon play”, “right-up watermelon”, “right-down watermelon”. ”,“ First cherry ”, or“ second cherry ”, it is determined whether or not all bits are checked. If it is determined that the process has been completed (step S110-11 = Yes), the process proceeds to step S110-12, and if it is determined that the process has not been completed (step S110-11). = No), the process proceeds to step S110-9.

(Step S110-12)
In step S110-12, the main CPU 301 performs effect type acquisition processing. Specifically, the main CPU 301 acquires information related to the turning effect stored in the turning effect execution information storage area provided in the main RAM 303 by the effect type setting process in step S110-4-4 described later. Perform the process. Then, when the process of step S110-12 ends, the process proceeds to step S110-13.

(Step S110-13)
In step S110-13, the main CPU 301 performs a process of determining whether or not the effect type is a corresponding number. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs processing for determining whether or not to execute the rotation effect RE1 or the rotation effect RE2. If it is determined that the effect type is the corresponding number (step S110-13 = Yes), the process proceeds to step S110-14, and if it is determined that the effect type is not the corresponding number ( Step S110-13 = No), the process proceeds to step S110-16.

(Step S110-14)
In step S110-14, the main CPU 301 performs processing for determining whether or not there is a display. Specifically, the main CPU 301 displays the symbols related to “watermelon” on the upper line, the middle line, the lower line, the upper right line, or the lower right line, or the upper line or the left reel of the left reel 18. A process of determining whether a symbol related to “cherry” is displayed in the lower part of 18 is performed. If it is determined that display is present (step S110-14 = Yes), the process proceeds to step S110-16, and if it is determined that display is not present (step S110-14 = No). ), The process proceeds to step S110-15.

(Step S110-15)
In step S110-15, the main CPU 301 performs an effect type resetting process. Specifically, in the processing of step S110-14, the main CPU 301 does not display the symbols related to “watermelon” on the upper line, the middle line, the lower line, the upper right line, or the lower right line. Since it is determined that the symbol related to “cherry” is not displayed on the upper stage of the left reel 18 or the lower stage of the left reel 18 (step S110-14 = No), a process of setting the second effect type for missing I do. Then, when the process of step S110-15 ends, the process proceeds to step S110-16.

(Step S110-16)
In step S110-16, the main CPU 301 performs processing for setting a conditional device command. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs a process of setting the conditional device command in the effect transmission data storage area provided in the main RAM 303 in order to transmit the conditional device command to the sub-control board 400. . Here, the “condition device command” is a command having information relating to the winning combination. When the process of step S110-16 ends, the symbol code setting process subroutine ends, and the process proceeds to step S111 of the main loop process.

(Direction lottery process)
Next, the effect lottery process performed by the process of step S110-4 of FIG. 92 will be described based on FIG. FIG. 93 shows a subroutine for effect lottery processing.

(Step S110-4-1)
In step S110-4-1, the main CPU 301 performs a reel effect lottery management process, which will be described in detail later with reference to FIG. In this process, the main CPU 301 performs a process of executing an effect determination process that will be described in detail later with reference to FIG. Then, when the process of step S110-4-1 ends, the process proceeds to step S110-4-2.

(Step S110-4-2)
In step S110-4-2, the main CPU 301 performs a process of setting a first reel effect lottery command. Specifically, in order to transmit the first reel effect lottery command to the sub-control board 400, the main CPU 301 transmits the first reel effect lottery command to the effect transmission data storage area provided in the main RAM 303. Perform processing to set to. Here, the “first reel effect lottery command” is a command having information related to the reel lock effect. Then, when the process of step S110-4-2 ends, the process proceeds to step S110-4-3.

(Step S110-4-3)
In step S110-4-3, the main CPU 301 performs a process of determining whether or not there is a reservation for the spinning effect. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs a process of determining whether or not a spinning effect has been reserved in the previous game. If it is determined that there is a reservation for the spinning effect (step S110-4-3 = Yes), the process proceeds to step S110-4-4, and it is determined that there is no reservation for the spinning effect. In this case (step S110-4-3 = No), the process proceeds to step S110-4-9.

(Step S110-4-4)
In step S110-4-4, the main CPU 301 performs an effect type setting process. Specifically, the main CPU 301 determines whether or not the reel lock effect has been won. If the reel lock effect has been won, the main CPU 301 stores information on the selected reel lock effect in the main RAM 303. A process of storing in the provided reel lock effect execution information storage area is performed. Further, when the reel lock effect is won, a process for clearing the reservation of the spinning effect is performed so that the reserved reel effect in the previous game is not performed. If the reel lock effect is not won, the main RAM 303 is provided with information on the reel effect reserved in the previous game in order to execute the reel effect reserved in the previous game. The storage process is performed in the storage effect execution information storage area. More specifically, the main CPU 301 performs a process of storing the value stored in the rotation effect information storage area provided in the main RAM 303 in the rotation effect execution information storage area provided in the main RAM 303. Do. Further, the main CPU 301 performs processing for clearing the spinning effect information storage area provided in the main RAM 303. Then, when the process of step S110-4-4 ends, the process proceeds to step S110-4-5.

(Step S110-4-5)
In step S110-4-5, the main CPU 301 performs a process of determining whether or not there is a reservation for the spinning effect RE5. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs a process of determining whether or not the spinning effect RE5 has been reserved in the previous game. More specifically, a process of determining whether or not the value stored in the rotation effect execution information storage area provided in the main RAM 303 is information related to the rotation effect RE5 is performed. If it is determined that there is a reservation for the spinning effect RE5 (step S110-4-5 = Yes), the process proceeds to step S110-4-6, and it is determined that there is no reservation for the spinning effect RE5. If it is determined (step S110-4-5 = No), the process proceeds to step S110-4-9.

(Step S110-4-6)
In step S110-4-6, the main CPU 301 performs a continuation rate lottery process. Specifically, the main CPU 301 extracts a soft random number, acquires information on the continuation rate based on the continuation rate determination table (see FIG. 32) provided in the main ROM 302, and is provided in the main RAM 303. To store in the continuation rate information storage area. Then, when the process of step S110-4-6 ends, the process proceeds to step S110-4-7.

(Step S110-4-7)
In step S110-4-7, the main CPU 301 performs a process of setting “4” to the value of the guaranteed number counter. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs a process of setting “4” to the value of the guaranteed number counter provided in the main RAM 303. Then, when the process of step S110-4-7 ends, the process proceeds to step S110-4-8.

(Step S110-4-8)
In step S110-4-8, the main CPU 301 performs a process of setting a rotation effect RE5 continuation rate command. Specifically, the main CPU 301 transmits the rotation effect RE5 continuation rate command to the sub-control board 400, and transmits the rotation effect RE5 continuation rate command to the effect transmission data provided in the main RAM 303. Performs processing to set in the storage area. Here, the “rotation effect RE5 continuation rate command” is a command having information related to the continuation rate determined by the continuation rate lottery process in step S110-4-6. Then, when the process of step S110-4-8 ends, the process proceeds to step S110-4-9.

(Step S110-4-9)
In step S110-4-9, the main CPU 301 performs a process of determining whether or not the blue seven BB is in progress. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs a process of determining whether or not it is in the blue seven BB based on the value stored in the blue seven information storage area provided in the main RAM 303. And when it determines with it being in blue seven BB (step S110-4-9 = Yes), a process transfers to step S110-4-20, and when it determines with not being in blue seven BB. (Step S110-4-9 = No), the process proceeds to Step S110-4-10.

(Step S110-4-10)
In step S110-4-10, the main CPU 301 performs a process of determining whether or not the fifth RT gaming state is set. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs a process of determining whether or not it is the fifth RT gaming state based on a value stored in a gaming state storage area provided in the main RAM 303. When it is determined that the game is in the fifth RT gaming state (step S110-4-10 = Yes), the process proceeds to step S110-4-11, and when it is determined that the game is not in the fifth RT gaming state. (Step S110-4-10 = No), the process proceeds to Step S110-4-12.

(Step S110-4-11)
In step S110-4-11, the main CPU 301 performs a process of determining whether or not the value of the RUSH game number counter is “0”. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs a process of determining whether or not the value of the RUSH game number counter is “0” based on the value of the RUSH game number counter provided in the main RAM 303. If it is determined that the value of the RUSH game number counter is “0” (step S110-4-11 = Yes), the effect lottery process subroutine is terminated, and the symbol code setting process step S110-5 is completed. The process is transferred to. On the other hand, if it is determined that the value of the RUSH game number counter is not “0” (step S110-4-11 = No), the process proceeds to step S110-4-12.

(Step S110-4-12)
In step S110-4-12, the main CPU 301 performs a process of determining whether or not it is in the third RT gaming state. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs a process of determining whether or not it is in the third RT gaming state based on a value stored in a gaming state storage area provided in the main RAM 303. If it is determined that the game is in the third RT gaming state (step S110-4-12 = Yes), the process proceeds to step S110-4-13, and if it is determined that the game is not in the third RT gaming state. (Step S110-4-12 = No), the process proceeds to Step S110-4-14.

(Step S110-4-13)
In step S110-4-13, the main CPU 301 performs a process of determining whether or not the value of the second effect state game number counter and the value of the third effect state game number counter are “0”. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs processing for determining whether or not the value of the second effect state game number counter provided in the main RAM 303 and the value of the third effect state game number counter are “0”. Do. When it is determined that the value of the second effect state game number counter and the value of the third effect state game number counter are “0” (step S110-4-13 = Yes), the effect lottery process is performed. The subroutine is terminated, and the process proceeds to step S110-5 of the symbol code setting process. On the other hand, when it is determined that the value of the second effect state game number counter or the value of the third effect state game number counter is not “0” (step S110-4-13 = No), step S110-4 The process is shifted to -14.

(Step S110-4-14)
In step S110-4-14, the main CPU 301 performs a reel effect lottery management process, which will be described in detail later with reference to FIG. In this process, the main CPU 301 performs a process of executing an effect determination process that will be described in detail later with reference to FIG. Then, when the process of step S110-4-14 ends, the process proceeds to step S110-4-15.

(Step S110-4-15)
In step S110-4-15, the main CPU 301 performs a lottery result acquisition process. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs a process of acquiring the result of the lottery performed by the reel lock effect / rotor effect determination process in step S110-4-1-4-6 described later. Then, when the process of step S110-4-15 ends, the process proceeds to step S110-4-16.

(Step S110-4-16)
In step S110-4-16, the main CPU 301 performs a process of determining whether or not it is non-winning. Specifically, the main CPU 301 may acquire information regarding whether or not to execute the spinning effect by the lottery result acquisition process in step S110-4-15, and may not execute the rotating effect. A process of determining whether or not it has been determined is performed. If it is determined that the winning combination has not been won (step S110-4-16 = Yes), the effect lottery process subroutine is terminated, and the process proceeds to step S110-5 of the symbol code setting process. On the other hand, when it is determined that the winning is not made (step S110-4-16 = No), the process proceeds to step S110-4-17.

(Step S110-4-17)
In step S110-4-17, the main CPU 301 performs an effect reservation setting process. Specifically, the main CPU 301 has a rotation effect information storage area provided in the main RAM 303 in order to execute the rotation effect acquired by the lottery result acquisition process in step S110-4-15 in the next game. Process to store in. Then, when the process of step S110-4-17 ends, the process proceeds to step S110-4-18.

(Step S110-4-18)
In step S110-4-18, the main CPU 301 performs a process of determining whether or not a spinning effect including the spinning effect RE4 has been determined. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs processing for determining whether or not the turning effect determined by the turning effect determining process in step S110-4-15 is a turning effect including the turning effect RE4. . And when it determines with the rotation effect including the rotation effect RE4 having been determined (step S110-4-18 = Yes), it transfers a process to step S110-4-19 and includes the rotation effect RE4. If it is determined that the spinning effect has not been determined (step S110-4-18 = No), the effect lottery process subroutine is terminated, and the process proceeds to step S110-5 of the symbol code setting process.

  Note that, as described above, the rotation effect including the rotation effect RE4 is the rotation effect RE4, the rotation effect RE7, the rotation effect RE10, the rotation effect RE13, the rotation effect RE15, the rotation effect RE17, the rotation effect. This refers to the production RE19.

(Step S110-4-19)
In step S110-4-19, the main CPU 301 performs a process of setting “0” to the value of the RUSH game number counter. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs a process of setting “0” to the value of the RUSH game number counter provided in the main RAM 303. When the process of step S110-4-19 is completed, the effect lottery process subroutine is terminated, and the process proceeds to step S110-5 of the symbol code setting process.

(Step S110-4-20)
In step S110-4-20, the main CPU 301 performs a process of determining whether or not it is in the fifth RT gaming state. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs a process of determining whether or not it is the fifth RT gaming state based on a value stored in a gaming state storage area provided in the main RAM 303. When it is determined that the game is in the fifth RT gaming state (step S110-4-20 = Yes), the process proceeds to step S110-4-22, and when it is determined that the game is not in the fifth RT gaming state. (Step S110-4-20 = No), the process proceeds to Step S110-4-21.

(Step S110-4-21)
In step S110-4-21, the main CPU 301 performs a process of determining whether or not it is in the third RT gaming state. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs a process of determining whether or not it is in the third RT gaming state based on a value stored in a gaming state storage area provided in the main RAM 303. If it is determined that the game is in the third RT gaming state (step S110-4-21 = Yes), the process proceeds to step S110-4-22, and if it is determined that the game is not in the third RT gaming state. (Step S110-4-21 = No), the effect lottery process subroutine is terminated, and the process proceeds to Step S110-5 of the symbol code setting process.

(Step S110-4-22)
In step S110-4-22, the main CPU 301 performs a RUSH stock lottery process. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs a RUSH stock lottery based on a RUSH stock lottery table (see FIG. 31) stored in the main ROM 302. Then, when the process of step S110-4-22 ends, the process proceeds to step S110-4-23.

(Step S110-4-23)
In step S110-4-23, the main CPU 301 performs a process of determining whether or not the winning is made. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs a process of determining whether or not the player has won as a result of the lottery by the RUSH stock lottery process in step S110-4-22. If it is determined that the winning is made (step S110-4-23 = Yes), the process proceeds to step S110-4-24. If it is determined that the winning is not made (step S110-4). −23 = No), the effect lottery process subroutine is terminated, and the process proceeds to step S110-5 of the symbol code setting process.

(Step S110-4-24)
In step S110-4-24, the main CPU 301 performs a process of adding “1” to the value of the RUSH stock number counter. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs a process of adding “1” to the value of the RUSH stock number counter provided in the main RAM 303. When the process of step S110-4-24 ends, the effect lottery process subroutine ends, and the process proceeds to step S110-5 of the symbol code setting process.

(Reel production lottery management process)
Next, based on FIG. 94, the reel effect lottery management process performed by the process of step S110-4-1 of FIG. 93 or the process of step S110-4-14 will be described. FIG. 94 is a diagram showing a subroutine of reel effect lottery management processing.

(Step S110-4-1-1)
In step S110-4-1-1, the main CPU 301 performs a process of determining whether or not it is after winning the blue seven BB. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs a process of determining whether or not it is after winning the blue seven BB based on the value stored in the blue seven information storage area provided in the main RAM 303. If it is determined that the blue seven BB has been won (step S110-4-1-1 = Yes), the reel effect lottery management process subroutine is terminated. On the other hand, when it is determined that it is not after winning the Blue Seven BB (step S110-4-1-1 = No), the process proceeds to step S110-4-1-2.

  When the reel effect lottery management process subroutine of step S110-4-1 is completed, the process proceeds to step S110-4-2, and the reel effect lottery management process subroutine of step S110-4-14 is executed. If completed, the process proceeds to step S110-4-15.

(Step S110-4-1-2)
In step S110-4-1-2, the main CPU 301 performs a gaming state acquisition process. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs processing for acquiring a gaming state based on the value of the gaming state storage area provided in the main RAM 303. And if the process of step S110-4-1-2 is complete | finished, a process will be transfered to step S110-4-1-3.

(Step S110-4-1-3)
In step S110-4-1-3, the main CPU 301 performs a process for determining whether or not to execute a lottery. Specifically, the main CPU 301 executes a lottery for determining whether or not to execute a reel lock effect or a spinning effect based on the game state acquired by the game state acquisition process of step S110-4-1-2. A process for determining whether or not to execute a lottery of whether or not. If it is determined that the lottery is to be executed (step S110-4-1-3 = Yes), the process proceeds to step S110-4-1-4, and if it is determined that the lottery is not to be executed. (Step S110-4-1-3 = No), the reel effect lottery management process subroutine is terminated.

  When the reel effect lottery management process at step S110-4-1 is completed, the process proceeds to step S110-4-2, and when the reel effect lottery management process at step S110-4-14 is completed. Shifts the processing to step S110-4-15.

(Step S110-4-1-4)
In step S110-4-1-4, the main CPU 301 performs an effect determination process that will be described in detail later with reference to FIG. In the process, the main CPU 301 performs a process of determining a reel lock effect, a spinning effect, and the like based on a stop control number described later. When the process of step S110-4-1-4 is completed, the reel effect lottery management process subroutine is terminated.

(Production decision processing)
Next, based on FIG. 95, the effect determination process performed by the process of step S110-4-1-4 of FIG. 94 is demonstrated. FIG. 95 is a diagram showing a subroutine for effect determination processing.

(Step S110-4-1-4-1)
In step S110-4-1-4-1, the main CPU 301 performs a stop control number acquisition process. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs processing for setting the winning number of the winning combination determined by the internal lottery processing in step S108 as a stop control number in the register. Then, when the process of step S110-4-1-4-1 ends, the process proceeds to step S110-4-1-4-2.

(Step S110-4-1-4-2)
In step S110-4-1-4-2, the main CPU 301 performs a process of determining whether or not to execute a lottery. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs a process of determining whether or not to execute a lottery related to the reel lock effect. And when it determines with performing a lottery (step S110-4-1-4-2 = Yes), it transfers to a process to step S110-4-1-4-3, and determines with not performing a lottery. If this is the case (step S110-4-1-4-2 = No), the effect determination process subroutine is terminated.

  It should be noted that the effect determination process subroutine is executed from the reel effect lottery management process subroutine of step S110-4-1, and when the subroutine ends, the process proceeds to step S110-4-2, and step S110. From the reel effect lottery management process subroutine of -4-14, the effect determination process subroutine is executed, and when the subroutine ends, the process proceeds to step S110-4-15.

(Step S110-4-1-4-3)
In step S110-4-1-4-3, the main CPU 301 performs processing for determining whether or not to execute a lottery using the third RT gaming state reel lock effect lottery table. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs a process of determining whether or not to execute the lottery using the third RT gaming state reel lock effect lottery table (see FIG. 23) stored in the main ROM 302. Here, in the third RT gaming state, the main CPU 301 is the case where the value of the third effect state game number counter provided in the main RAM 303 is not “0”, and the winning combination determined by the internal lottery process is “ In the case of “Replay BR1 during Bonus”, “Replay BR2 during Bonus”, and “Replay BR3 during Bonus”, it is determined that the lottery is executed using the third RT gaming state reel lock effect lottery table. And when it determines with performing lottery using the 3rd gaming state reel lock production | presentation lottery table (step S110-4-1-4-3 = Yes), step S110-4-1-4-4 If it is determined that lottery is not to be executed using the third RT gaming state reel lock effect lottery table (step S110-4-1-4-3 = No), step S110-4- The process proceeds to 1-4-6.

(Step S110-4-1-4-4)
In step S110-4-1-4-4, the main CPU 301 performs a process of determining whether or not the value of the third effect state game number counter is “0”. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs a process of determining whether or not the value of the third effect state game number counter provided in the main RAM 303 is “0”. When it is determined that the value of the third effect state game number counter is “0” (step S110-4-1-4-4 = Yes), the effect determination process subroutine is terminated. On the other hand, when it is determined that the value of the third effect state game number counter is not “0” (step S110-4-1-4-4 = No), the process proceeds to step S110-4-1-4-5. Migrate processing.

(Step S110-4-1-4-5)
In step S110-4-1-4-5, the main CPU 301 performs a second effect state level acquisition process. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs processing for acquiring a value stored in a level storage area provided in the main RAM 303 and storing it in a register. Then, when the process of step S110-4-1-4-5 ends, the process proceeds to step S110-4-1-4-6.

(Step S110-4-1-4-6)
In step S110-4-1-4-6, the main CPU 301 performs a reel lock effect / rotation effect determination process. Specifically, the main CPU 301 stores the game state storage area provided in the main RAM 303 when the process shifts from the reel effect lottery management process of step S110-4-1 to the effect determination process. Based on the values, the first RT gaming state reel lock effect lottery table (see FIG. 22), the third RT gaming state reel lock effect lottery table (see FIG. 23), and the fourth RT gaming state reel stored in the main ROM 302. Whether or not to execute the reel lock effect based on the selected reel lock effect lottery table and the winning combination determined by the internal lottery process is selected from any of the lock effect lottery tables (see FIG. 24). Processing determined by lottery is performed. Further, the main CPU 301 performs a process of storing the lottery result in a reel lock effect information storage area provided in the main RAM 303. On the other hand, when the main CPU 301 shifts the processing from the reel effect lottery management process of step S110-4-14 to the effect determination process, the main CPU 301 is based on the value stored in the game state storage area provided in the main RAM 303. The first RT gaming state spinning effect lottery table (see FIG. 25), the fourth RT gaming state spinning effect lottery table (see FIG. 26), and the fifth RT gaming state spinning effect lottery stored in the main ROM 302. Select one of the tables (see FIG. 27), and determine by lottery whether or not to execute the spinning effect based on the selected spinning effect lottery table and the winning combination determined by the internal lottery process. Perform the process. Then, when the process of step S110-4-1-4-6 ends, the effect determination process subroutine ends.

  The main CPU 301 performs a process of clearing the reel lock effect information storage area provided in the main RAM 303 at a predetermined timing after executing the reel lock effect.

(Production type setting process)
Next, based on FIG. 96, the effect type setting process performed by the process of step S110-4-4 of FIG. 93 will be described. FIG. 96 shows a subroutine for effect type setting processing.

(Step S110-4-4-1)
In step S110-4-4-1, the main CPU 301 performs a process of determining whether or not the value of the reel lock effect information storage area is “00H”. Specifically, the main CPU 301 determines whether or not the value indicating the lottery result of the reel lock effect stored in the reel lock effect information storage area provided in the main RAM 303 is “00H”. Do. If the value indicating the lottery result of the reel lock effect is determined to be “00H” (step S110-4-4-1 = Yes), the process proceeds to step S110-4-4-4. If it is determined that the value indicating the reel lock production lottery result is not “00H” (step S110-4-4-1 = No), the process proceeds to step S110-4-4-2. To do. The value indicating the lottery result of the reel lock effect is a value indicating that “00H” does not perform the reel lock effect, “01H” is a value indicating that the reel lock effect SU0 is performed, and “02H” "Is a value indicating that the reel lock effect SU1 is performed," 03H "is a value indicating that the reel lock effect SU2 is performed, and" 04H "is a value indicating that the reel lock effect SU3 is performed. “05H” is a value indicating that the reel lock effect SU4 is performed, “06H” is a value indicating that the reel lock effect SU5 is performed, and “07H” is a value indicating that the long freeze is performed.

(Step S110-4-4-2)
In step S110-4-4-2, the main CPU 301 performs processing for setting the first effect type. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs a process of storing information relating to the selected reel lock effect in a reel lock effect execution information storage area provided in the main RAM 303 in order to execute the selected reel lock effect. Do. More specifically, the main CPU 301 performs a process of storing the value stored in the reel lock effect information storage area provided in the main RAM 303 in the reel lock effect execution information storage area provided in the main RAM 303. Do. For example, when “01H”, which is a value indicating that the reel lock effect SU0 is performed, is stored in the reel lock effect information storage area, a process of storing “01H” in the reel lock effect execution information storage area is performed. Do. Then, when the process of step S110-4-4-2 is completed, the process proceeds to step S110-4--4-3.

  Here, the first effect type corresponds to the second spinning effect of the present application, and in step S110-4-4-2, a process for executing the selected second spinning effect is performed. Done.

(Step S110-4--4-3)
In step S <b> 110-4-4-3, the main CPU 301 performs processing for clearing the reservation related to the second effect type. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs processing for clearing the spinning effect information storage area provided in the main RAM 303. Then, when the process of step S110-4-4-3 ends, the subroutine of the effect type setting process ends, and the process proceeds to step S110-4-5 of the effect lottery process of FIG.

  Here, the second production type corresponds to the first spinning production of the present application, and in step S110-4-4-2, when the processing related to the execution of the reel lock production is performed, In step S110-4--4-3, the reservation related to the execution of the first spinning effect is cleared. That is, in the previous game, when the execution of the first spinning effect is reserved and the first spinning effect based on the reservation is executed in the current game, the second spinning effect is performed in the current game. When the effect is won, execution of the first spinning effect based on the reservation is restricted, and the second spinning effect won in the current game is preferentially executed.

(Step S110-4-4-4)
In step S110-4-4-4, the main CPU 301 performs processing for setting the second effect type. Specifically, the main CPU 301 executes the rotation effect execution provided in the main RAM 303 for information related to the rotation effect reserved in the previous game in order to execute the rotation effect reserved in the previous game. Processing to store in the information storage area is performed. More specifically, the main CPU 301 performs a process of storing the value stored in the rotating effect information storage area provided in the main RAM 303 in the rotating effect execution information storage area provided in the main RAM 303. Do. Then, when the process of step S110-4-4-4 ends, the process proceeds to step S110-4-4-5.

(Step S110-4-4-5)
In step S110-4-4-5, the main CPU 301 performs processing for clearing the reservation related to the second effect type. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs processing for clearing the spinning effect information storage area provided in the main RAM 303. Then, when the process of step S110-4-4-5 ends, the effect type setting process subroutine ends, and the process proceeds to step S110-4-5 of the effect lottery process of FIG. In the first embodiment, when the gaming state is the first RT gaming state, the execution of the first spinning effect based on the reservation and the execution of the second spinning effect overlap in the same game. A case is assumed. In the first RT gaming state, the spinning effect RE5 is not executed. Therefore, the reservation related to the second performance type (first rotation effect) cleared in step S110-4-4-5 in FIG. 96 is the rotation effect RE1, the rotation effect RE2, and the rotation effect RE3. Any reservation will be applicable. Note that the gaming state assumed in the first embodiment is not limited to the first RT gaming state, and may be, for example, the fourth RT gaming state.

(Production state management process)
Next, based on FIG. 97, the production state management process performed by the process of step S110-5 of FIG. 92 will be described. FIG. 97 is a diagram showing a subroutine of effect state management processing.

(Step S110-5-1)
In step S110-5-1, the main CPU 301 performs a second effect state game number counter acquisition process. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs a process of acquiring the value of the second effect state game number counter provided in the main RAM 303. Then, when the process of step S110-5-1 is completed, the process proceeds to step S110-5-2.

(Step S110-5-2)
In step S110-5-2, the main CPU 301 performs a process of determining whether or not the value of the second effect state game number counter is “0”. Specifically, the main CPU 301 determines whether or not the value of the second effect state game number counter acquired by the second effect state game number counter acquisition process in step S110-5-1 is “0”. I do. If it is determined that the value of the second effect state game number counter is “0” (step S110-5-2 = Yes), the effect state management process subroutine is terminated, and the effect state management process is completed. Shifts to the process before shifting to the subroutine. On the other hand, if it is determined that the value of the second effect state game number counter is not “0” (step S110-5-2 = No), the process proceeds to step S110-5-3.

(Step S110-5-3)
In step S110-5-3, the main CPU 301 performs a second effect state point lottery process. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs a lottery process to determine whether or not to acquire the second performance state point by using a point lottery table (see FIG. 34) provided in the main ROM 302, and the lottery result is determined as follows. A process of adding and storing the value stored in the second effect state point storage area provided in the main RAM 303 is performed. Then, when the process of step S110-5-3 ends, the process proceeds to step S110-5-4.

(Step S110-5-4)
In step S110-5-4, the main CPU 301 performs a process of determining whether or not the winning is made. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs a process of determining whether or not it is determined to acquire the second effect state point by the second effect state point lottery process in step S110-5-3. If it is determined that the winning is made (step S110-5-4 = Yes), the process proceeds to step S110-5-5, and if it is determined that the winning is not made (step S110-5). -4 = No), the effect state management process subroutine is terminated, and the process proceeds to step S110-6 of the symbol code setting process.

(Step S110-5-5)
In step S110-5-5, the main CPU 301 performs a second effect state point acquisition process. Specifically, a process of acquiring a value stored in the second effect state point storage area provided in the main RAM 303 is performed. Then, when the process of step S110-5-5 is completed, the process proceeds to step S110-5-6.

(Step S110-5-6)
In step S110-5-6, the main CPU 301 performs processing for determining whether or not the value of the second effect state point is “60” or more. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs a process of determining whether or not the value of the second effect state point acquired by the second effect state point acquisition process in step S110-5-5 is “60” or more. And when it determines with the value of a 2nd production | presentation state point being "60" or more (step S110-5-6 = Yes), a process is transferred to step S110-5-7, and a 2nd production state When it is determined that the point value is not “60” or more (step S110-5-6 = No), the presentation state management process subroutine is terminated, and the process proceeds to step S110-6 of the symbol code setting process. Transition.

(Step S110-5-7)
In step S110-5-7, the main CPU 301 performs a process of setting “0” to the value of the second effect state game number counter. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs a process of setting “0” to the value of the second effect state game number counter provided in the main RAM 303. Then, when the process of step S110-5-7 ends, the process proceeds to step S110-5-8.

(Step S110-5-8)
In step S110-5-8, the main CPU 301 performs a process of setting “4” as a level value. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs a process of storing “4” in a level storage area provided in the main RAM 303. When the process of step S110-5-7 is completed, the effect state management process subroutine is terminated, and the process proceeds to step S110-6 of the symbol code setting process.

(Reel rotation start preparation process)
Next, the reel rotation start preparation process performed by the process of step S111 of FIG. 85 will be described based on FIG. FIG. 98 shows a subroutine for reel rotation start preparation processing.

(Step S111-1)
In step S111-1, the main CPU 301 performs an effect setting process which will be described in detail later with reference to FIG. In the process, the main CPU 301 performs a process of executing a reel lock effect, a spinning effect, and the like. Then, when the process of step S111-1 ends, the process proceeds to step S111-2.

(Step S111-2)
In step S111-2, the main CPU 301 performs a process of determining whether or not the minimum game time has elapsed. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs a process of determining whether or not the value of the timer counter set by the process of step S111-3 described later has become “0” in the previous game. If it is determined that the minimum game time has elapsed (step S111-2 = Yes), the process proceeds to step S111-3, and if it is determined that the minimum game time has not elapsed ( Step S111-2 = No), the process of step S111-2 is repeatedly executed until the minimum game time has elapsed.

(Step S111-3)
In step S111-3, the main CPU 301 performs processing for setting a minimum game time. Specifically, the main CPU 301 is configured so that the time from the process of step S111-3 in the previous game to the process of step S111-2 in the current game is not less than the minimum game time in order to suppress gambling for the game. Then, a process for setting the minimum game time in the timer counter is performed. Here, in the present embodiment, the minimum game time is about “4.1” seconds. Then, when the process of step S111-3 ends, the process proceeds to step S111-4.

(Step S111-4)
In step S111-4, the main CPU 301 performs a process of setting a reel rotation start command. Specifically, in order for the main CPU 301 to transmit a reel rotation start command to the sub-control board 400, a process of setting the reel rotation start command in the effect transmission data storage area of the main RAM 303 is performed. Here, the reel rotation start command is a command having information indicating that rotation of the left reel 18, the middle reel 19, and the right reel 20 is started. When the process of step S111-4 is completed, the reel rotation start preparation process subroutine is terminated, and the process proceeds to step S112 of the main loop process.

(Production setting process)
Next, based on FIG. 99, the effect setting process performed by the process of step S111-1 of FIG. 98 is demonstrated. FIG. 99 is a diagram showing a subroutine of effect setting processing.

(Step S111-1-1)
In step S111-1-1, the main CPU 301 performs processing for setting a reel lock effect command. Specifically, the main CPU 301 sets the reel lock effect command in the effect transmission data storage area provided in the main RAM 303 in order to transmit the reel lock effect command to the sub-control board 400. I do. Here, the “reel lock effect command” is a command having information on whether or not to execute the reel lock effect, information on the type of reel lock effect to be executed, and the like. Then, when the process of step S111-1-1 ends, the process proceeds to step S111-1-2.

(Step S111-1-2)
In step S111-1-2, the main CPU 301 performs a process of determining whether or not the reel lock effect is being executed. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs a process of determining whether or not to execute the reel lock effect is determined by the reel lock effect / rotor effect determination process of step S110-4-1-4-6. . If it is determined that the reel lock effect is being executed (step S111-1-2 = Yes), the process proceeds to step S111-1-3, and it is determined that the reel lock effect is not being executed. In the case (step S111-1-2 = No), the process proceeds to step S111-1-4.

(Step S111-1-3)
In step S <b> 111-1-3, the main CPU 301 performs a turning effect process that will be described in detail later with reference to FIG. 101. In this process, the main CPU 301 performs a process of executing a reel lock effect that is determined to be executed. Then, when the process of step S111-1-3 ends, the process proceeds to step S111-1-4.

(Step S111-1-4)
In step S111-1-4, the main CPU 301 performs processing for setting a spinning effect command. Specifically, the main CPU 301 sets the rotation effect command in the effect transmission data storage area provided in the main RAM 303 in order to transmit the rotation effect command to the sub-control board 400. I do. Here, the “rotation effect command” is a command having information on whether or not to execute the rotation effect, information on the type of the rotation effect to be executed, and the like. Then, when the process of step S111-1-4 is completed, the process proceeds to step S111-1-5.

(Step S111-1-5)
In step S <b> 111-1-5, the main CPU 301 performs a process for determining whether or not it is during the rotation effect execution. Specifically, in the previous game, the main CPU 301 is determined to execute the rotation effect by the reel lock effect / rotation effect determination process in step S110-4-1-4-6, and step S110- Processing for determining whether or not to execute the spinning effect by the effect reservation setting process of 4-17 is performed. And when it determines with it being at the time of rotation effect execution (step S111-1-5 = Yes), it transfers to processing to step S111-1-6, and it was determined that it is not at the time of rotation effect execution. In this case (step S111-1-5 = No), the effect determination process subroutine is terminated, and the process proceeds to step S111-2 of the reel rotation start preparation process.

(Step S111-1-6)
In step S <b> 111-1-6, the main CPU 301 performs a process of determining whether one of the fourth RT gaming state, the fifth RT gaming state, or the sixth RT gaming state is in the gaming state. Specifically, the main CPU 301 refers to the value of the game state storage area provided in the main RAM 303, and is in any one of the fourth RT game state, the fifth RT game state, and the sixth RT game state. The process which determines whether it is is is performed. If it is determined that the gaming state is any one of the fourth RT gaming state, the fifth RT gaming state, and the sixth RT gaming state (step S111-1-6 = Yes), step S111-1- If the processing is shifted to 7 and it is determined that the gaming state is not one of the fourth RT gaming state, the fifth RT gaming state, or the sixth RT gaming state (step S111-1-6 = No), The process proceeds to step S111-1-9.

(Step S111-1-7)
In step S <b> 111-1-7, the main CPU 301 performs a process for determining whether or not a specific spinning effect is present. Specifically, the main CPU 301 determines the effect type of the spinning effect to be executed based on the turning effect determination process in step S110-4-15, as shown in FIG. ) To determine whether the production type is “6” or more. In other words, a process for determining whether or not to execute the spinning effect at the time of ending, continuing, and reviving the spinning effect RE5 is performed. And when it determines with it being a specific rotation effect (step S111-1-7 = Yes), it transfers to a process to step S111-1-9, and it was determined that it is not a specific rotation effect. In this case (step S111-1-7 = No), the process proceeds to step S111-1-8.

(Step S111-1-8)
In step S111-1-8, the main CPU 301 performs a process of setting “2658” as an effect wait timer. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs a process of setting “2658” in a timer counter provided in the main RAM 303. Then, when the process of step S111-1-8 ends, the process proceeds to step S111-1-9.

(Step S111-1-9)
In step S <b> 111-1-9, the main CPU 301 performs a spinning effect process that will be described in detail later with reference to FIG. 101. In the process, the main CPU 301 performs a process of executing a spinning effect that is determined to be performed. Then, when the process of step S111-1-9 ends, the process proceeds to step S111-1-10.

(Step S111-1-10)
In step S <b> 111-1-10, the main CPU 301 performs a process of determining whether or not it is the end of the spinning effect RE 5. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs processing for determining whether or not the effect type of the spinning effect to be executed is the effect type “6” of the spinning effect map table (see FIG. 29). If it is determined that it is the end of the spinning effect RE5 (step S111-1-10 = Yes), the effect determination process subroutine is terminated and the process proceeds to step S111-2 of the reel rotation start preparation process. To migrate. On the other hand, when it is determined that it is not at the end of the turning effect RE5 (step S111-1-10 = No), the process proceeds to step S111-1-11.

(Step S111-1-11)
In step S111-1-11, the main CPU 301 performs a process of determining whether or not the rotation effect RE4. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs a process of determining whether or not the effect type of the spinning effect to be executed is the effect type “4” of the spinning effect map table (see FIG. 29). If it is determined that the rotation effect is RE4 (step S111-1-11 = Yes), the effect determination process subroutine is terminated, and the process proceeds to step S111-2 of the reel rotation start preparation process. . On the other hand, when it is determined that it is not the turning effect RE4 (step S111-1-11 = No), the process proceeds to step S111-1-12.

(Step S111-1-12)
In step S111-1-12, the main CPU 301 performs a process of setting “8754” as an effect weight timer. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs a process of setting “8754” to a timer counter provided in the main RAM 303. Then, when the process of step S111-1-12 ends, the process proceeds to step S111-1-13.

(Step S111-1-13)
In step S111-1-13, the main CPU 301 performs a process of determining whether or not it is the start of the spinning effect RE5. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs processing to determine whether or not the effect type of the spinning effect to be executed is the effect type “5” of the spinning effect map table (see FIG. 29). If it is determined that it is time to start the turning effect RE5 (step S111-1-13 = Yes), the effect determination process subroutine is terminated, and the process proceeds to step S111-2 of the reel rotation start preparation process. Transition. On the other hand, when it is determined that it is not at the start of the turning effect RE5 (step S111-1-13 = No), the process proceeds to step S111-1-14.

(Step S111-1-14)
In step S111-1-14, the main CPU 301 performs a process of determining whether or not the value of the effect timer counter is “1” or more. Specifically, the main CPU 301 refers to the value of the timer counter provided in the main RAM 303 and performs a process of determining whether or not the value of the effect timer counter is “1” or more. If it is determined that the value of the production timer counter is equal to or greater than “1” (step S111-1-14 = Yes), the process proceeds to step S111-1-15, and the production timer counter If it is determined that the value is not equal to or greater than “1” (step S111-1-14 = No), the effect determination process subroutine is terminated, and the process proceeds to step S111-2 of the reel rotation start preparation process. .

(Step S111-1-15)
In step S111-1-15, the main CPU 301 performs a process of determining whether or not it is in the fourth RT gaming state. Specifically, the main CPU 301 refers to the value of the gaming state storage area provided in the main RAM 303 and performs a process of determining whether or not it is the fourth RT gaming state. And when it determines with it being the 4th RT game state (step S111-1-15 = Yes), the subroutine of an effect determination process is complete | finished and a process transfers to step S111-2 of a reel rotation start preparation process. . On the other hand, if it is determined that the game state is not the fourth RT gaming state (step S111-1-15 = No), the process proceeds to step S111-1-16.

(Step S111-1-16)
In step S111-1-16, the main CPU 301 performs a process of setting “3356” to the value of the temporary timer. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs a process of setting “3356” in a temporary timer counter provided in the main RAM 303. Then, when the process of step S111-1-16 ends, the process proceeds to step S111-1-17.

(Step S111-1-17)
In step S <b> 111-1-17, the main CPU 301 performs processing for determining whether or not an operation of the start lever has been detected. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs a process of determining whether or not an operation of the start lever is detected by the start switch 10sw. If it is determined that an operation of the start lever has been detected (step S111-1-17 = Yes), the process proceeds to step S111-1-18. On the other hand, if it is determined that the operation of the start lever has not been detected (step S111-1-17 = No), the process proceeds to step S111-1-19.

(Step S111-1-18)
In step S111-1-18, the main CPU 301 performs a process of setting “0” to the value of the temporary timer. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs a process of setting “0” to a temporary timer counter provided in the main RAM 303. Then, when the process of step S111-1-18 ends, the process proceeds to step S111-1-19.

(Step S111-1-19)
In step S111-1-19, the main CPU 301 performs a process of determining whether or not the value of the temporary timer is “0”. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs a process of determining whether or not the value of the temporary timer counter provided in the main RAM 303 is “0”. If it is determined that the value of the temporary timer is “0” (step S111-1-19 = Yes), the process proceeds to step S111-1-20, and the value of the temporary timer is “0”. If it is determined that this is not the case (step S111-1-19 = No), the process proceeds to step S111-1-17.

(Step S111-1-20)
In step S <b> 111-1-20, the main CPU 301 performs a process of determining whether or not the spinning effect RE <b> 5 is being executed. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs a process of determining whether or not the executed spinning effect is the spinning effect RE5. If it is determined that the rotation effect RE5 is being executed (step S111-1-20 = Yes), the process proceeds to step S111-1-21, and the rotation effect RE5 is not being executed. Is determined (step S111-1-20 = No), the process proceeds to step S111-1-22.

(Step S111-1-21)
In step S111-1-21, the main CPU 301 performs processing during execution of the turning effect RE5, which will be described in detail later with reference to FIG. In this process, the main CPU 301 performs a process of obtaining a continuation rate, a process of subtracting “1” from the value of the guaranteed number counter provided in the main RAM 303, and the like. Then, when the process of step S111-1-21 ends, the process proceeds to step S111-1-4.

(Step S111-1-22)
In step S111-1-22, the main CPU 301 performs a process of determining whether or not the execution of the spinning effect has been completed. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs a process of determining whether or not the execution of the turning effect has been completed based on the value of the turning effect execution information storage area provided in the main RAM 303. If it is determined that the execution of the spinning effect has been completed (step S111-1-22 = Yes), the effect determination process subroutine is terminated, and the process proceeds to step S111-2 of the reel rotation start preparation process. Transition. On the other hand, when it is determined that the rotation effect has not been completed (step S111-1-22 = No), the process proceeds to step S111-1-4.

(Processing during turning effect RE5)
Next, based on FIG. 100, the process during the rotation effect RE5 being performed by the process of step S111-1-21 of FIG. 99 will be described. FIG. 100 is a diagram showing a subroutine of processing during execution of the turning effect RE5.

(Step S111-1-21-1)
In step S111-1-21-1, the main CPU 301 performs a continuation rate acquisition process. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs processing for acquiring information related to the continuation rate stored in the continuation rate information storage area provided in the main RAM 303. Then, when the process of step S111-1-21-1 ends, the process proceeds to step S111-1-21-2.

(Step S111-1-21-2)
In step S111-1-21-2, the main CPU 301 performs a continuous lottery process. Specifically, the main CPU 301 acquires a soft random number, and based on the acquired soft random number and information related to the continuation rate acquired by the continuation rate acquisition process in step S111-1-21-1. A process of drawing whether or not to continue the trunk effect RE5 is performed. Then, when the process of step S111-1-21-2 ends, the process proceeds to step S111-1-21-3.

(Step S111-1-21-3)
In step S <b> 111-1-21-3, the main CPU 301 performs a process for determining whether or not the process is finished. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs a process of determining whether or not to continue is determined as a result of the continuous lottery process in step S111-1-21-2. When it is determined that the process is finished (step S111-1-21-3 = Yes), the process proceeds to step S111-1-21-4, and when it is determined that the process is not finished ( The process proceeds to step S111-1-21-3 = No) and step S111-1-21-5.

(Step S111-1-21-4)
In step S111-1-21-4, the main CPU 301 performs processing for turning off the rotation effect RE5 continuation flag. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs a process of turning off the rotation effect RE5 continuation flag in the rotation effect RE5 continuation flag storage area provided in the main RAM 303. Then, when the process of step S111-1-21-4 ends, the process proceeds to step S111-1-21-5.

  It should be noted that the rotation effect RE5 continuation flag in the rotation effect RE5 continuation flag storage area provided in the main RAM 303 is turned ON at a predetermined timing when it is determined to execute the rotation effect RE5.

(Step S111-1-21-5)
In step S111-1-21-5, the main CPU 301 performs a process of determining whether or not the value of the guaranteed number counter is “0”. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs a process of determining whether or not the value of the guaranteed number counter provided in the main RAM 303 is “0”. If it is determined that the value of the guaranteed number counter is “0” (step S111-1-21-5 = Yes), the process proceeds to step S111-1-21-8, and the guaranteed number counter When it is determined that the value of is not “0” (step S111-1-21-5 = No), the process proceeds to step S111-1-21-6.

(Step S111-1-21-6)
In step S111-1-21-6, the main CPU 301 performs a process of subtracting “1” from the value of the guaranteed number counter. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs a process of subtracting “1” from the value of the guaranteed number counter provided in the main RAM 303. Then, when the process of step S111-1-21-6 ends, the process proceeds to step S111-1-21-7.

(Step S111-1-21-7)
In step S111-1-21-7, the main CPU 301 performs a turning effect RE5 continuation flag mask process. Specifically, the main CPU 301 determines that the rotation effect RE5 is continued when the rotation effect RE5 is determined to be ended by the continuous lottery process in step S111-1-21-2. A process of masking the bit corresponding to the end of the effect RE5 is performed. Then, when the process of step S111-1-21-7 ends, the process proceeds to step S111-1-21-8.

(Step S111-1-21-8)
In step S111-1-21-8, the main CPU 301 performs processing for setting the spinning effect RE5 command. Specifically, the main CPU 301 sets the rotation effect RE5 command in the effect transmission data storage area provided in the main RAM 303 in order to transmit the rotation effect RE5 command to the sub-control board 400. Perform the process. Here, the “rotation effect RE5 command” is a command having information on whether or not to continue the rotation effect RE5. Then, when the process of step S111-1-21-8 is completed, the subroutine of the process of performing the spinning effect RE5 is ended, and the process proceeds to step S111-2 of the reel rotation start preparation process.

(Cylinder effect processing)
Next, based on FIG. 101, the spinning effect processing performed by the process of step S111-1-3 of FIG. 99 or the process of step S111-1-9 will be described. FIG. 101 is a diagram showing a subroutine of the spinning effect processing.

(Step S111-1-3-1)
In step S111-1-3-1, the main CPU 301 performs a process of determining whether or not the performance is not being executed. Specifically, the main CPU 301 determines the reel lock effect or the rotation based on the value of the reel lock effect information storage area provided in the main RAM 303 and the value of the spinning effect execution information storage area provided in the main RAM 303. Processing for determining whether or not to execute the trunk effect is performed. And when it determines with it being at the time of performance non-execution (step S111-1-3-1 = Yes), the subroutine of a rotation effect processing is complete | finished. On the other hand, if it is determined that it is not during the performance non-execution (step S111-1-3-1 = No), the process proceeds to step S111-1-3-3.

  In addition, when the subroutine of the spinning effect processing of step S111-1-3 is completed, the processing is shifted to step S111-1-4, and the subroutine of the spinning effect processing of step S111-1-9 is completed. In this case, the process proceeds to step S111-1-10.

(Step S111-1-3-2)
In step S <b> 111-1-3-2, the main CPU 301 performs processing for determining whether or not correction is being performed. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs processing for determining whether or not it is time to execute the spinning effect RE1 or the spinning effect RE2. If it is determined that correction is being performed (step S111-1-3-2 = Yes), the process proceeds to step S111-1-3-3, and if it is determined that correction is not being performed. (Step S111-1-3-2 = No), the process proceeds to Step S111-1-3-4.

(Step S111-1-3-3)
In step S111-1-3-3, the main CPU 301 performs a correction type acquisition process. Specifically, the main CPU 301 is based on the value stored in the previous stop position storage area provided in the main RAM 303 and the rotation effect correction map table (see FIG. 30) provided in the main ROM 302. The process which acquires production | presentation classification is performed. Then, when the process of step S111-1-3-3 is completed, the process proceeds to step S111-1-3-3-4.

  The previous stop position storage area provided in the main RAM 303 is a storage area for storing a combination of symbols stopped on the active line in the previous game, and is updated for each game. After the correction type acquisition process in step S111-1-3-3 is completed, the process is cleared at a predetermined timing.

(Step S111-1-3-3-4)
In step S111-1-3-3-4, the main CPU 301 performs effect block data acquisition processing. Specifically, the main CPU 301 produces an effect according to the value of the reel lock effect information storage area provided in the main RAM 303 or an effect according to the value of the spinning effect information storage area provided in the main RAM 303. Depending on the type and the effect type acquired by the correction type acquisition process in step S111-1-3-3, the reel lock effect block table (see FIG. 35), the spinning effect effect block table (see FIG. 36), A trunk effect correction effect block table (see FIG. 37) is selected, a reel lock effect block table (see FIG. 35), a spinning effect effect block table (see FIG. 36), and a rotation effect correction effect block table (see FIG. 36). A process of acquiring data defined in FIG. 37) is performed. Then, when the process of step S111-1-3-4 ends, the process proceeds to step S111-1-3-5.

(Step S111-1-3-5)
In step S <b> 111-1-3-5, the main CPU 301 performs a process of determining whether or not it is the end of the effect. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs a process of determining whether or not it is the end of the effect based on the value acquired by the effect block data acquisition process in step S111-1-3-4. And when it determines with it being the time of the end of production (step S111-1-3-5 = Yes), the subroutine of a rotation effect processing is completed. On the other hand, when it is determined that it is not at the end of the production (step S111-1-3-5 = No), the process proceeds to step S111-1-3-6.

(Step S111-1-3-6)
In step S111-1-3-6, the main CPU 301 performs an effect process reel setting process. Specifically, the main CPU 301, based on the data acquired by the effect block data acquisition process in step S111-1-3-3-4, the left reel 18 that is movable when executing the reel lock effect or the spinning effect, Processing for setting information of the middle reel 19 and the right reel 20 is performed. Then, when the process of step S111-1-3-6 ends, the process proceeds to step S111-1-3-3.

(Step S111-1-3-3-7)
In step S111-1-3-3, the main CPU 301 performs an effect process reel rotation direction setting process. Specifically, the main CPU 301, based on the data acquired by the effect block data acquisition process in step S111-1-3-3-4, the left reel 18 that is movable when executing the reel lock effect or the spinning effect, Processing for setting information relating to the rotation direction of the middle reel 19 and the right reel 20 is performed. Then, when the process of step S111-1-3-3 is completed, the process proceeds to step S111-1-3-8.

(Step S111-1-3-8)
In step S111-1-3-8, the main CPU 301 performs a process of determining whether or not it is during the rotation effect RE4 or the rotation effect RE5. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs a process of determining whether or not the rotation effect RE4 or the rotation effect RE5 is being executed based on the value of the rotation effect information storage area provided in the main RAM 303. Do. And when it determines with it being at the time of rotation effect RE4 or rotation effect RE5 execution (step S111-1-3-8 = Yes), it transfers to a process to step S111-1-3-9, If it is determined that the rotation effect RE4 or the rotation effect RE5 is not being executed (step S111-1-3-8 = No), the process proceeds to step S111-1-3-18.

(Step S111-1-3-9)
In step S <b> 111-1-3-9, the main CPU 301 performs a process for determining whether or not it is an opening scale adjustment process. Here, when the spinning effect RE4 or the spinning effect RE5 is executed, the symbols related to “Blue Seven” are aligned in order to perform the process of finally displaying the symbols related to “Blue Seven”. When processing, the time required to align the symbols related to “Blue Seven” varies depending on the position where the left reel 18, the middle reel 19 and the right reel 20 are stopped in the previous game. The execution time of the production RE5 is different. For this reason, in the present embodiment, the main CPU 301 calculates the time required to display the symbols related to “Blue Seven” in a uniform manner, and the execution times of the spinning effect RE4 and the spinning effect RE5 that are defined in advance. A process for adjusting the opening scale is performed by subtracting the calculation result of the time required to align and display the symbols related to “Blue Seven” from the overall scale. As a result, the execution time of the rotation effect RE4 and the execution time of the rotation effect RE5 do not differ depending on the positions at which the left reel 18, the middle reel 19 and the right reel 20 are stopped in the previous game. Therefore, the main CPU 301 performs a process of determining whether or not it is a timing to perform a process of adjusting the opening scale. And when it determines with it being an opening scale adjustment process (step S111-1-3-9 = Yes), it transfers to a process to step S111-1-3-10, and determines with it not being an opening scale adjustment process. If it is determined (step S111-1-3-9 = No), the process proceeds to step S111-1-3-3.

(Step S111-1-3-10)
In step S111-1-3-10, the main CPU 301 performs a process of setting “4750” as a production wait timer. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs a process of setting “4750” to a timer counter provided in the main RAM 303. Then, when the process of step S111-1-3-10 ends, the process proceeds to step S111-1-3-11.

(Step S111-1-3-11)
In step S111-1-3-11, the main CPU 301 performs processing of adding “1” to the correction value. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs a process of adding “1” to the correction value stored in the register. Then, when the process of step S111-1-3-11 ends, the process proceeds to step S111-1-3-12.

(Step S111-1-3-12)
In step S111-1-3-12, the main CPU 301 performs an effect correction timer calculation process which will be described in detail later with reference to FIG. In this process, the main CPU 301 performs a process of calculating a time required to display the symbols related to “Blue Seven” in alignment. Then, when the process of step S111-1-3-12 is completed, the process proceeds to step S111-1-3-3.

  Here, in the effect correction timer calculation process of step S111-1-3-12, it is during execution of the turning effect RE4 or the turning effect RE5 (step S111-1-3-8 = Yes), Since the correction value stored in the register is “1” by the process of step S111-1-3-11, by rotating the left reel 18, the symbol related to “blue seven” of the left reel 18; The time required to align the symbols related to “blue seven” of the middle reel 19 is calculated.

(Step S111-1-3-3-13)
In step S111-1-3-3, the main CPU 301 performs a process of adding “1” to the correction value. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs a process of adding “1” to the correction value stored in the register. Then, when the process of step S111-1-3-13 ends, the process proceeds to step S111-1-3-14.

(Step S111-1-3-14)
In step S111-1-3-14, the main CPU 301 performs an effect correction timer calculation process which will be described in detail later with reference to FIG. In this process, the main CPU 301 performs a process of calculating a time required to display the symbols related to “Blue Seven” in alignment. Then, when the process of step S111-1-3-14 ends, the process proceeds to step S111-1-3-15.

  Here, in the effect correction timer calculation process in step S111-1-3-14, it is during execution of the turning effect RE4 or the turning effect RE5 (step S111-1-3-8 = Yes), Since the correction value stored in the register is “2” by the process of step S111-1-3-11 and the process of step S111-1-3-3-13, “2” is stored in the left reel 18 and the middle reel 19. After the symbols related to “Blue Seven” are prepared, the time required to align the symbols related to “Blue Seven” on the left reel 18 and the middle reel 19 and the symbols related to “Blue Seven” on the right reel 20 is calculated. It will be.

(Step S111-1-3-15)
In step S111-1-3-15, the main CPU 301 performs a process of adding “1” to the correction value. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs a process of adding “1” to the correction value stored in the register. Then, when the process of step S111-1-3-15 ends, the process proceeds to step S111-1-3-16.

(Step S111-1-3-16)
In step S111-1-3-16, the main CPU 301 performs an effect correction timer calculation process, which will be described in detail later with reference to FIG. In this process, the main CPU 301 performs a process of calculating a time required to display the symbols related to “Blue Seven” in alignment. Then, when the process of step S111-1-3-16 ends, the process proceeds to step S111-1-3-20.

  Here, in the effect correction timer calculation process in step S111-1-3-16, it is during execution of the turning effect RE4 or the turning effect RE5 (step S111-1-3-8 = Yes), Since the correction value stored in the register is “3” by the process of step S111-1-3-11, the process of step S111-1-3-3, and the process of step S111-1-3-15, the left By rotating the reel 18, the middle reel 19, and the right reel 20, the time required to rotate the symbols related to “blue seven” of the left reel 18, middle reel 19, and right reel 20 to a predetermined position is calculated. It will be.

(Step S111-1-3-17)
In step S <b> 111-1-3-17, the main CPU 301 performs an effect correction timer calculation process that will be described in detail later with reference to FIG. 103. In this process, the main CPU 301 performs a process of calculating a time required to display the symbols related to “Blue Seven” in alignment. Then, when the process of step S111-1-3-17 ends, the process proceeds to step S111-1-3-20.

  Here, in the effect correction timer calculation process of step S111-1-3-17, it is during execution of the turning effect RE4 or the turning effect RE5 (step S111-1-3-8 = Yes), Since it is not the timing for performing the opening scale adjustment process (step S111-1-3-9 = No), the time from the opening scale to the start of rotation of the left reel 18 is calculated.

(Step S111-1-3-18)
In step S111-1-3-18, the main CPU 301 performs effect phase data acquisition processing. Specifically, main CPU301 performs the process which acquires production | presentation phase data based on the data acquired by the production | generation block data acquisition process of step S111-1-3-3-4. Then, when the process of step S111-1-3-18 ends, the process proceeds to step S111-1-3-19.

(Step S111-1-3-19)
In step S111-1-3-19, the main CPU 301 performs an effect phase execution count acquisition process. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs a process of acquiring the number of executions based on the data acquired by the effect phase data acquisition process of step S111-1-3-18. Then, when the process of step S111-1-3-19 ends, the process proceeds to step S111-1-3-20.

(Step S111-1-3-20)
In step S111-1-3-20, the main CPU 301 performs an effect excitation image setting process that will be described in detail later with reference to FIG. In the processing, the main CPU 301 performs processing for setting an excitation pulse counter, processing for setting an output excitation pattern, and the like. Then, when the process of step S111-1-3-20 ends, the process proceeds to step S111-1-3-21.

(Step S111-1-3-21)
In step S <b> 111-1-21-21, the main CPU 301 performs a process for determining whether or not the excitation has been completed. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs a process of determining whether or not the process of exciting the left stepping motor 151, the middle stepping motor 152, and the right stepping motor 153 in the current phase has ended. When it is determined that the excitation execution is completed (step S111-1-3-21 = Yes), the process proceeds to step S111-1-3-22, and it is determined that the excitation execution is not completed. In this case (step S111-1-3-21 = No), the process of step S111-1-3-21 is performed until the process of exciting the left stepping motor 151, the middle stepping motor 152, and the right stepping motor 153 is completed. Run repeatedly.

(Step S111-1-3-22)
In step S <b> 111-1-22-22, the main CPU 301 performs a process for determining whether or not the pattern is finished. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs a process of determining whether or not the process of exciting the left stepping motor 151, the middle stepping motor 152, and the right stepping motor 153 has been completed for the number of times of excitation holding in the current phase. If it is determined that the pattern ends (step S111-1-3-22 = Yes), the process proceeds to step S111-1-3-23, and if it is determined that the pattern does not end. (Step S111-1-3-22 = No), the process proceeds to step S111-1-3-20.

(Step S111-1-3-23)
In step S <b> 111-1-3-23, the main CPU 301 performs effect phase execution frequency subtraction processing. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs a process of subtracting “1” from the number of executions in the current phase. Then, when the process of step S111-1-3-23 ends, the process proceeds to step S111-1-3-24.

(Step S111-1-3-24)
In step S111-1-3-24, the main CPU 301 performs a process of determining whether or not the phase execution has ended. Specifically, the main CPU 301 subtracts “1” from the number of executions in the current phase by the effect phase execution number subtraction process in step S111-1-3-21. As a result, the number of performance phase executions becomes “0”. A process of determining whether or not the If it is determined that the phase execution has ended (step S111-1-3-24 = Yes), the process proceeds to step S111-1-3-25, and it is determined that the phase execution has not ended. If it is determined (step S111-1-3-24 = No), the process proceeds to step S111-1-3-20.

(Step S111-1-3-25)
In step S <b> 111-1-3-25, the main CPU 301 performs processing for determining whether or not the phase group has ended. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs a reel lock effect phase table (see FIG. 38) and a spinning effect effect selected based on the data acquired by the effect block data acquisition process of step S111-1-3-3-4. Processing for determining whether or not the processing for the data in the phase table (see FIG. 39) and the rotation effect correction effect phase table (see FIG. 40) has been completed is performed. When it is determined that the phase group has ended (step S111-1-3-25 = Yes), the process proceeds to step S111-1-3-3, and it is determined that the phase group has not ended. If it is determined (step S111-1-3-25 = No), the process proceeds to step S111-1-3-8.

(Excitation image setting processing for production)
Next, an effect excitation image setting process performed by the process of step S111-1-3-20 of FIG. 101 will be described based on FIG. FIG. 102 is a diagram showing a subroutine for effect excitation image setting processing.

(Step S111-1-3-20-1)
In step S111-1-3-20-1, the main CPU 301 performs processing for setting an excitation pulse counter update target reel. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs a process of setting the left reel 18 as an initial value of the excitation pulse counter update target reel among the left reel 18, the middle reel 19, and the right reel 20. Then, when the process of step S111-1-3-20-1 is completed, the process proceeds to step S111-1-3-20-2.

(Step S111-1-3-20-2)
In step S111-1-3-20-2, the main CPU 301 performs processing for setting a search bit. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs a process of setting “100B” as a search bit in order to determine whether the left reel 18, the middle reel 19, and the right reel 20 are effect processing reels. Then, when the process of step S111-1-3-20-2 ends, the process proceeds to step S111-1-3-20-3.

(Step S111-1-3-20-3)
In step S111-1-3-20-3, the main CPU 301 performs effect processing reel setting processing. Specifically, the main CPU 301, based on the data acquired by the effect block data acquisition process in step S111-1-3-3-4, the left reel 18 that is movable when executing the reel lock effect or the spinning effect, Processing for setting information of the middle reel 19 and the right reel 20 is performed. Then, when the process of step S111-1-3-20-3 is completed, the process proceeds to step S111-1-3-20-4.

(Step S111-1-3-20-4)
In step S <b> 111-1-3-20-4, the main CPU 301 performs processing for determining whether or not it is an effect processing reel. Specifically, the main CPU 301 executes the search bit set in the process of step S111-1-3-20-2 and the effect process set by the effect process reel setting process of step S111-1-3-20-3. Based on the reels, processing is performed to determine whether the left reel 18, the middle reel 19, and the right reel 20 corresponding to the search bit are effect processing reels. And when it determines with it being an effect processing reel (step S111-1-3-20-4 = Yes), it transfers to a process to step S111-1-3-20-5, and is not an effect processing reel. Is determined (step S111-1-3-20-4 = No), the process proceeds to step S111-1-3-20-11.

(Step S111-1-3-20-5)
In step S <b> 111-1-3-20-5, the main CPU 301 performs a process for determining whether or not the rotation direction is being corrected. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs a process of determining whether or not the effect target reel corrects the rotation direction based on the correction target reel of the current effect block data. If it is determined that the rotational direction is being corrected (step S111-1-3-20-5 = Yes), the process proceeds to step S111-1-3-20-6, and the rotational direction is corrected. If it is determined that this is not the case (step S111-1-3-20-5 = No), the process proceeds to step S111-1-3-20-7.

(Step S111-1-3-20-6)
In step S111-1-3-20-6, the main CPU 301 performs a rotation direction correction process. Specifically, the main CPU 301 sets the data in the reverse direction when the data in the forward direction is currently set as the data in the rotation direction of the left reel 18, the middle reel 19, and the right reel 20. Perform the process. On the other hand, when data related to the reverse direction is currently set as data related to the rotation direction of the left reel 18, middle reel 19, and right reel 20, the main CPU 301 performs processing for setting data related to the forward direction. Do. Then, when the process of step S111-1-3-20-6 ends, the process proceeds to step S111-1-3-20-7.

(Step S111-1-3-20-7)
In step S111-1-3-20-7, the main CPU 301 performs a pulse offset value update process. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs a process of updating the pulse offset value by adding a value defined in the rotation direction of the effect data table to the data related to the rotation direction currently set. Then, when the process of step S111-1-3-20-7 is completed, the process proceeds to step S111-1-3-20-8.

(Step S111-1-3-20-8)
In step S111-1-3-20-8, the main CPU 301 performs a process of determining whether or not all phases are OFF. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs processing for determining whether or not the all-phase OFF flag of the current effect data is ON. If it is determined that all phases are OFF (step S111-1-3-20-8 = Yes), the process proceeds to step S111-1-3-20-10, and all phases are OFF. If it is determined that this is not the case (step S111-1-3-20-8 = No), the process proceeds to step S111-1-3-20-9.

(Step S111-1-3-20-9)
In step S111-1-3-20-9, the main CPU 301 performs processing for storing the output excitation pattern. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs processing for storing output pulse data in a register in accordance with an output pulse table (see FIG. 42) provided in the main ROM 302 and a pulse offset value. Then, when the process of step S111-1-3-20-9 ends, the process proceeds to step S111-1-3-20-10.

(Step S111-1-3-20-10)
In step S111-1-3-20-10, the main CPU 301 performs processing for setting an output excitation pattern. Specifically, the main CPU 301 sets the saved output pulse data when the output excitation pattern is saved by the process of step S111-1-3-20-9, and when all phases are OFF. In some cases, output pulse data (Φ0 = 0, Φ1 = 0, Φ2 = 0, Φ3 = 0) when all phases are OFF is set. Then, when the process of step S111-1-3-20-10 ends, the process proceeds to step S111-1-3-20-11.

(Step S111-1-3-20-11)
In step S111-1-3-20-11, the main CPU 301 performs an excitation pulse counter update target reel update process. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs a process of updating the excitation pulse counter update target reels in order to update the excitation pulse counters of all the reels of the left reel 18, the middle reel 19, and the right reel 20. Then, when the process of step S111-1-3-20-11 ends, the process proceeds to step S111-1-3-20-12.

(Step S111-1-3-20-12)
In step S111-1-3-20-12, the main CPU 301 performs a process of shifting the search bit to the right. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs a process of shifting the search bit currently set in the register to the right. Then, when the process of step S111-1-3-20-12 ends, the process proceeds to step S111-1-3-20-13.

(Step S111-1-3-20-13)
In step S <b> 111-1-3-20-13, the main CPU 301 performs a process for determining whether or not all reels have been processed. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs a process of determining whether or not a carry has occurred as a result of right-shifting the search bit in the process of step S111-1-3-20-12. If it is determined that all reels have been processed (step S111-1-3-20-13 = Yes), the effect excitation image setting process subroutine is terminated, and the spinning effect process step S111 is completed. The process shifts to -1-3-3-1. On the other hand, if it is determined that the processing for all the reels has not been completed (step S111-1-3-20-13 = No), the process proceeds to step S111-1-3-20-3.

(Produce correction timer calculation process)
Next, based on FIG. 103, the process of step S111-1-3-12 of FIG. 101, the process of step S111-1-3-14, the process of step S111-1-3-16, and step S111-1- The effect correction timer calculation process performed by the process 3-17 will be described. FIG. 103 is a diagram showing a subroutine for the effect correction timer calculation process.

(Step S111-1-2-22-1)
In step S <b> 111-1-3-2-1, the main CPU 301 performs a stop position acquisition process. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs a process of acquiring data related to a symbol displayed on the active line in the previous game. Then, when the process of step S111-1-3-22-1 ends, the process proceeds to step S111-1-3-22-2.

(Step S111-1-3-22-2)
In step S111-1-3-22-2, the main CPU 301 performs a position difference calculation process. Specifically, the main CPU 301 displays the stop position of step S111-1-2-22-1 in order to display the combination of symbols related to “blue seven” in the spinning effect RE4 and the spinning effect RE5. In the previous game acquired by the acquisition process, a process of calculating the difference in the position of the symbol is performed based on the data related to the symbol displayed on the active line and the correction value stored in the register. Then, when the process of step S111-1-3-22-2 ends, the process proceeds to step S111-1-3-22-3.

(Step S111-1-3-22-3)
In step S <b> 111-1-3-22-3, the main CPU 301 performs position difference storage processing. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs processing for storing the value calculated by the position difference calculation processing in step S111-1-3-22-2 in a register. Then, when the process of step S111-1-3-22-3 is completed, the process proceeds to step S111-1-3-22-4.

(Step S111-1-3-22-4)
In step S111-1-3-22-4, the main CPU 301 performs a correction type acquisition process. Specifically, the main CPU 301 executes the combination of the symbols displayed on the active line in the previous game and the symbols displayed on the active line after executing the spinning effect RE1 or the rotating effect RE2. In order to correct the difference between the combinations, a process of acquiring a correction type is performed. Then, when the process of step S111-1-3-22-4 ends, the process proceeds to step S111-1-3-22-5.

(Step S111-1-3-22-5)
In step S111-1-3-22-5, the main CPU 301 performs position difference addition processing. Specifically, the main CPU 301 sets the value corresponding to the correction type acquired by the correction type acquisition process of step S111-1-3-22-4 to the stop position acquisition process of step S111-1-3-22-1. In the previous game acquired by the above, a process of adding to the data related to the symbol displayed on the active line is performed. Then, when the process of step S111-1-3-3-22-5 is completed, the process proceeds to step S111-1-3-3-22-6.

(Step S111-1-3-22-6)
In step S111-1-3-22-6, the main CPU 301 performs correction timer storage processing. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs processing for saving the correction timer in a register. Then, when the process of step S111-1-3-22-6 ends, the process proceeds to step S111-1-3-3-22-7.

(Step S111-1-3-22-7)
In step S111-1-3-22-7, the main CPU 301 performs a correction timer calculation process. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs processing for subtracting the value of the correction timer from the overall scale and storing the subtraction result in a register. When the process of step S111-1-3-22-7 is finished, the subroutine for the effect correction timer calculation process is finished.

  In addition, when the subroutine of the correction timer calculation process for production | generation of step S111-1-3-12 is complete | finished, a process transfers to step S111-1-3-3-13 and the production | generation of step S111-1-3-14 When the correction timer calculation processing subroutine is completed, the process proceeds to step S111-1-3-15, and when the effect correction timer calculation processing subroutine in step S111-1-3-16 is completed. Shifts the process to step S111-1-3-20, and when the subroutine of the effect correction timer calculation process of step S111-1-3-17 ends, the process proceeds to step S111-1-3-20. To migrate.

(Reel stop pretreatment)
Next, based on FIG. 104, the reel stop pre-process performed by the process of step S112 of FIG. 85 will be described. FIG. 104 shows a subroutine for reel stop pre-processing.

(Step S112-1)
In step S112-1, the main CPU 301 performs a process of setting an expected pull-in reel search initial value. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs a process of setting data “100B” corresponding to the right reel 20 in the register as an expected pull-in reel search initial value. Then, when the process of step S112-1 ends, the process proceeds to step S112-2.

(Step S112-2)
In step S112-2, the main CPU 301 performs processing for determining whether or not the reel is rotating. Specifically, the main CPU 301 determines the left to be searched based on the pull-in expected reel search initial value set in the process of step S112-1 or the value of the search target reel updated in step S112-4 described later. A process of determining whether or not the reel 18, the middle reel 19, and the right reel 20 are rotating is performed. If it is determined that the reel is rotating (step S112-2 = Yes), the process proceeds to step S112-3. If it is determined that the reel is not rotating (step S112- 2 = No), the process proceeds to step S112-4.

(Step S112-3)
In step S112-3, the main CPU 301 performs a pull-in prediction process. Specifically, the main CPU 301 first sets the initial value of the virtual stop position, acquires the pull-in priority according to the virtual stop position, and stores it in the pull-in priority storage area provided in the main RAM 303. I do. Then, when the process of step S112-3 is completed, the process proceeds to step S112-4.

  The main CPU 301 performs a process of clearing data stored in the pull-in priority storage area provided in the main RAM 303 at a predetermined timing by the pull-in prediction process in step S112-3.

(Step S112-4)
In step S112-4, the main CPU 301 performs processing for acquiring the next search target reel. Specifically, when it is determined that the search target reel is stopped (step S112-2 = No), the main CPU 301 performs the search target reel pull-in prediction process in the pull-in prediction process in step S112-3. When the processing is completed, the value set in the register is shifted to the right to obtain the next search target reel. Then, when the process of step S112-4 ends, the process proceeds to step S112-5.

(Step S112-5)
In step S112-5, the main CPU 301 performs a process of determining whether or not the processing of all reels has been completed. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs a process of determining whether or not the pull-in prediction process for all of the left reel 18, the middle reel 19, and the right reel 20 has been completed. If it is determined that all reels have been processed (step S112-5 = Yes), the reel stop pre-processing subroutine is terminated, and the process proceeds to step S113 of the main loop process. On the other hand, if it is determined that all reels have not been processed (step S112-5 = No), the process proceeds to step S112-2, and all of the left reel 18, the middle reel 19, and the right reel 20 are processed. The same process is repeatedly executed until the pull-in prediction process for the reel is completed.

(Processing during reel rotation)
Next, based on FIG. 105, the reel rotation process performed by the process of step S117 of FIG. 85 will be described. FIG. 105 is a diagram showing a subroutine of reel rotation processing.

(Step S117-1)
In step S117-1, the main CPU 301 performs a process of determining whether or not the stop button is being pressed. Specifically, the main CPU 301 determines whether or not the left stop switch 11sw, middle stop switch 12sw, and right stop switch 13sw have detected an operation of the left stop button 11, the middle stop button 12, and the right stop button 13 by the player. Processing to determine is performed. If it is determined that the stop button has been pressed (step S117-1 = Yes), the process proceeds to step S117-2, and if it is determined that the stop button has not been pressed (step S117). -1 = No), the reel rotation process subroutine is terminated, and the process proceeds to step S118 of the main loop process.

(Step S117-2)
In step S117-2, the main CPU 301 performs processing for turning off the operable state flag. Specifically, the main CPU 301 determines the left stop button 11 in the operable state flag storage area provided in the main RAM 303 based on the operated left stop button 11, middle stop button 12, and right stop button 13. Processing to turn off the operable flag corresponding to the stop button 12 and the right stop button 13 is performed. Then, when the process of step S117-2 ends, the process proceeds to step S117-3.

(Step S117-3)
In step S117-3, the main CPU 301 performs a pressing information storing process. Specifically, the main CPU 301 includes the left reel 18, the middle reel 19, the right reel 20 and the left stepping motor corresponding to the operated stop button among the left stop button 11, the middle stop button 12, and the right stop button 13. 151, based on the values of the pulse counters supplied to the middle stepping motor 152 and the right stepping motor 153, a process of acquiring the pressing reference position and storing it in the pressing reference position storage area provided in the main RAM 303 is performed. Then, when the process of step S117-3 ends, the process proceeds to step S117-4.

(Step S117-4)
In step S117-4, the main CPU 301 performs a sliding frame number acquisition process. Specifically, the main CPU 301 includes a sliding frame number determination table (not shown) provided in the main ROM 302, the winning combination determined by the internal lottery process, the left stop button 11, the middle stop button 12, and the right Based on the operation order of the stop button 13 and the like, a process of acquiring the number of sliding frames is performed. Here, in the present embodiment, the main CPU 301 performs a process of determining the number of sliding frames within the range of “0” frames to “4” frames as the number of sliding frames. Then, when the process of step S117-4 ends, the process proceeds to step S117-5.

(Step S117-5)
In step S117-5, the main CPU 301 performs a reel stop process. Specifically, the main CPU 301 removes the reel based on the pressing reference position stored by the pressing information storing process in step S117-3 and the sliding frame number acquired by the sliding frame number acquisition process in step S117-4. Process to stop. Then, when the process of step S117-5 ends, the process proceeds to step S117-6.

  Further, in the reel stop process in step S117-5, the main CPU 301 updates values corresponding to the stopped left reel 18, middle reel 19, and right reel 20 in the reel information storage area provided in the main RAM 303. Process. Specifically, the main CPU 301 stores information indicating that the reel is stopped in a reel information storage area provided in the main RAM 303 according to the stopped left reel 18, middle reel 19, and right reel 20. Process.

(Step S117-6)
In step S117-6, the main CPU 301 performs processing for setting a reel stop command. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs a process of setting the reel stop command in an effect transmission data storage area provided in the main RAM 303 in order to transmit the reel stop command to the sub-control board 400. . Here, the “reel stop command” is a command having information such as a pressing reference position and the number of sliding frames. When the process of step S117-6 is completed, the subroutine for the reel rotation process is ended, and the process proceeds to step S118 of the main loop process.

(Display judgment processing)
Next, the display determination process performed by the process of step S119 of FIG. 85 will be described based on FIG. FIG. 106 is a diagram showing a subroutine of display determination processing.

(Step S119-1)
In step S119-1, the main CPU 301 performs processing for setting a display determination command. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs a process of setting the display determination command in an effect transmission data storage area provided in the main RAM 303 in order to transmit the display determination command to the sub-control board 400. . Here, the “display determination command” is a command having information on a combination of symbols displayed on the active line. Then, when the process of step S119-1 ends, the process proceeds to step S119-2.

(Step S119-2)
In step S119-2, the main CPU 301 performs a process of determining whether or not it is in the third RT gaming state. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs a process of determining whether or not it is in the third RT gaming state based on a value stored in a gaming state storage area provided in the main RAM 303. If it is determined that the state is the third RT gaming state (step S119-2 = Yes), the process proceeds to step S119-5, and if it is determined that the state is not the third RT gaming state (step S119). -2 = No), the process proceeds to step S119-3.

(Step S119-3)
In step S119-3, the main CPU 301 performs processing for determining whether or not the first stop is the right reel. Specifically, the main CPU 301 determines whether or not the right stop switch 13sw has detected an operation of the right stop button 13 in a state where the left reel 18, the middle reel 19, and the right reel 20 are all rotating. I do. When it is determined that the first stop is the right reel (step S119-3 = Yes), the process proceeds to step S119-4, and when it is determined that the first stop is not the right reel. (Step S119-3 = No), the process proceeds to Step S119-5.

(Step S119-4)
In step S119-4, the main CPU 301 performs processing for clearing the effect reservation. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs processing for clearing the value stored in the spinning effect information storage area provided in the main RAM 303. Then, when the process of step S119-4 ends, the process proceeds to step S119-5.

(Step S119-5)
In step S119-5, the main CPU 301 performs processing for determining whether or not a blank is displayed. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs a process of determining whether or not the symbol combination related to “blank” is displayed on the active line. If it is determined that a blank is displayed (step S119-5 = Yes), the display determination process subroutine is terminated, and the process proceeds to step S120 of the main loop process. On the other hand, if it is determined that no blank is displayed (step S119-5 = No), the process proceeds to step S119-6.

(Step S119-6)
In step S119-6, the main CPU 301 performs a process of determining whether or not a winning is achieved. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs a process of determining whether or not a combination of symbols related to winning is displayed on the active line. If it is determined that a winning is achieved (step S119-6 = Yes), the process proceeds to step S119-7, and if it is determined that no winning is achieved (step S119-6). = No), the process proceeds to step S119-8.

(Step S119-7)
In step S119-7, the main CPU 301 performs a payout number calculation process. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs a process of calculating the number of payouts based on a combination of symbols related to winnings displayed on the active line. When the process of step S119-7 ends, the display determination process subroutine ends, and the process proceeds to step S120 of the main loop process.

(Step S119-8)
In step S119-8, the main CPU 301 performs processing for determining whether or not replay has been established. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs a process of determining whether or not a symbol combination related to “replay” is displayed on the active line. If it is determined that replay has been established (step S119-8 = Yes), the process proceeds to step S119-9, and if it is determined that replay has not been established (step S119-8). = No), the display determination process subroutine is terminated, and the process proceeds to step S120 of the main loop process.

(Step S119-9)
In step S119-9, the main CPU 301 performs a process of turning on the re-game operating flag. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs processing for turning on the value of the re-game operating flag storage area provided in the main RAM 303. When the process of step S119-9 ends, the display determination process subroutine ends, and the process proceeds to step S120 of the main loop process.

(Payment processing)
Next, based on FIG. 107, the payout process performed by the process of step S120 in FIG. 85 will be described. FIG. 107 shows a payout processing subroutine.

(Step S120-1)
In step S120-1, the main CPU 301 performs a process of determining whether or not the re-game in-operation flag is ON. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs a process of determining whether or not the re-game operation flag is ON based on the value of the re-game operation flag storage area provided in the main RAM 303. If it is determined that the re-game operating flag is ON (step S120-1 = Yes), the process proceeds to step S120-3, and it is determined that the re-game operating flag is not ON. In the case (step S120-1 = No), the process proceeds to step S120-2.

(Step S120-2)
In step S120-2, the main CPU 301 performs processing for setting a remaining payout number counter. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs a process of setting the payout number calculated in the payout number calculation process in step S119-7 in a register. Then, when the process of step S120-2 ends, the process proceeds to step S120-3.

(Step S120-3)
In step S120-3, the main CPU 301 performs a process of determining whether or not the value of the remaining payout number counter is “1” or more. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs a process of determining whether or not the value of the remaining payout number counter set in the register is “1” or more by the process of step S120-2. If it is determined that the value of the remaining payout number counter is “1” or more (step S120-3 = Yes), the process proceeds to step S120-4, and the value of the remaining payout number counter is “1”. If it is determined that it is not greater than or equal to “No” (step S120-3 = No), the payout process subroutine is terminated, and the process proceeds to step S121 of the main loop process.

(Step S120-4)
In step S120-4, the main CPU 301 performs processing for setting a medal payout start command. Specifically, the main CPU 301 sets the medal payout start command in the effect transmission data storage area provided in the main RAM 303 in order to transmit the medal payout start command to the sub-control board 400. I do. Here, the “medal payout start command” is a command having information for starting the payout of medals. Then, when the process of step S120-4 is completed, the process proceeds to step S120-5.

(Step S120-5)
In step S120-5, the main CPU 301 performs a process of determining whether or not the value of the stored number counter is “50”. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs a process of determining whether or not the value of the stored number counter provided in the main RAM 303 is “50”. If it is determined that the value of the stored number counter is “50” (step S120-5 = Yes), the process proceeds to step S120-7, and the value of the stored number counter is not “50”. (Step S120-5 = No), the process proceeds to step S120-6.

(Step S120-6)
In step S120-6, the main CPU 301 performs a process of adding “1” to the value of the stored number counter. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs a process of adding “1” to the value of the stored number counter provided in the main RAM 303. Then, when the process of step S120-6 ends, the process proceeds to step S120-8.

(Step S120-7)
In step S120-7, the main CPU 301 performs medal payout processing. Specifically, the main CPU 301 controls to pay out “1” medals by driving the hopper 202 via the power supply board 200. Then, when the process of step S120-7 ends, the process proceeds to step S120-8.

(Step S120-8)
In step S120-8, the main CPU 301 performs a process of adding “1” to the value of the acquired number counter. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs a process of adding “1” to the value of the acquired number counter provided in the main RAM 303. Then, when the process of step S120-8 ends, the process proceeds to step S120-9.

(Step S120-9)
In step S120-9, the main CPU 301 performs a process of subtracting “1” from the value of the remaining payout number counter. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs a process of subtracting “1” from the value of the remaining payout number counter set in the register. Then, when the process of step S120-9 is completed, the process proceeds to step S120-10.

(Step S120-10)
In step S120-10, the main CPU 301 performs a process of determining whether or not the value of the remaining payout number counter is “0”. Specifically, the main CPU 301 determines whether or not the value of the remaining payout number counter is “0” as a result of subtracting “1” from the value of the remaining payout number counter in the process of step S120-9. Do. If it is determined that the value of the remaining payout number counter is “0” (step S120-10 = Yes), the process proceeds to step S120-11, and the value of the remaining payout number counter is “0”. If it is determined that this is not the case (step S120-10 = No), the process proceeds to step S120-5.

(Step S120-11)
In step S120-11, the main CPU 301 performs processing for setting a medal payout end command. Specifically, the main CPU 301 sets the medal payout end command in the effect transmission data storage area provided in the main RAM 303 in order to transmit the medal payout end command to the sub-control board 400. I do. Here, the “medal payout end command” is a command having information indicating that the payout of medals has ended. When the process of step S120-11 ends, the payout process subroutine ends, and the process proceeds to step S121 of the main loop process.

(Game state transition process)
Next, based on FIG. 108, the game state transition process performed by the process of step S121 of FIG. 85 will be described. FIG. 108 is a diagram showing a subroutine of the game state transition process.

(Step S121-1)
In step S121-1, the main CPU 301 performs a process of determining whether or not the BB is won. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs a process of determining whether or not the BB is won based on a value stored in a blue seven information storage area provided in the main RAM 303. If it is determined that the BB is won (step S121-1 = Yes), the process proceeds to step S121-5. If it is determined that the BB is not won (step S121-1). = No), the process proceeds to step S121-2.

(Step S121-2)
In step S121-2, the main CPU 301 performs a process of subtracting “1” from the value of the RUSH game number counter. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs a process of subtracting “1” from the value of the RUSH game number counter provided in the main RAM 303. Then, when the process of step S121-2 ends, the process proceeds to step S121-3.

(Step S121-3)
In step S121-3, the main CPU 301 performs a process of determining whether or not the value of the RUSH game number counter is “0”. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs a process of determining whether or not the value of the RUSH game number counter is “0” based on the value of the RUSH game number counter provided in the main RAM 303. If it is determined that the value of the RUSH game number counter is “0” (step S121-3 = Yes), the process proceeds to step S121-4, and the value of the RUSH game number counter is “0”. If it is determined that this is not the case (step S121-3 = No), the process proceeds to step S121-5.

(Step S121-4)
In step S121-4, the main CPU 301 performs a RUSH stock number counter management process. Specifically, the main CPU 301 determines whether or not the value of the RUSH stock number counter provided in the main RAM 303 is “0”, and if the value of the RUSH stock number counter is “0”. When the RUSH stock number counter management process ends and the value of the RUSH stock number counter is not “0”, a process of subtracting “1” from the value of the RUSH stock number counter provided in the main RAM 303 is performed. Then, when the process of step S121-4 ends, the process proceeds to step S121-5.

(Step S121-5)
In step S121-5, the main CPU 301 performs processing for determining whether or not the value of the second effect state game number counter is “0”. Specifically, the main CPU 301 determines whether or not the value of the second effect state game number counter is “0” based on the value of the second effect state game number counter provided in the main RAM 303. Process. If it is determined that the value of the second effect state game number counter is “0” (step S121-5 = Yes), the process proceeds to step S121-8, and the second effect state game number counter is reached. If it is determined that the value of is not “0” (step S121-5 = No), the process proceeds to step S121-6.

(Step S121-6)
In step S121-6, the main CPU 301 performs processing for determining whether or not the stop control number is “19”. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs a process of determining whether or not the stop control number is “19” based on the value stored in the stop control number storage area provided in the main RAM 303. If it is determined that the stop control number is “19” (step S121-6 = Yes), the process proceeds to step S121-17, and it is determined that the stop control number is not “19”. In that case (step S121-6 = No), the process proceeds to step S121-7.

(Step S121-7)
In step S121-7, the main CPU 301 performs processing for clearing the effect reservation. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs processing for clearing the value stored in the spinning effect information storage area provided in the main RAM 303. Then, when the process of step S121-7 ends, the process proceeds to step S121-12.

(Step S121-8)
In step S121-8, the main CPU 301 performs a process of determining whether or not the value of the third effect state game number counter is “0”. Specifically, the main CPU 301 determines whether or not the value of the third effect state game number counter is “0” based on the value of the third effect state game number counter provided in the main RAM 303. Process. If it is determined that the value of the third effect state game number counter is “0” (step S121-8 = Yes), the process proceeds to step S121-12, and the third effect state game number counter is reached. If it is determined that the value of is not “0” (step S121-8 = No), the process proceeds to step S121-9.

(Step S121-9)
In step S121-9, the main CPU 301 performs processing for determining whether or not BAR replay has been established. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs a process of determining whether or not the symbols related to “BAR” are displayed on the active line. If it is determined that BAR replay has been established (step S121-9 = Yes), the process proceeds to step S121-11, and if it is determined that BAR replay has not been established (step S121). −9 = No), the process proceeds to step S121-10.

(Step S121-10)
In step S121-10, the main CPU 301 performs processing for clearing the effect reservation. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs processing for clearing the value stored in the spinning effect information storage area provided in the main RAM 303. Then, when the process of step S121-10 ends, the process proceeds to step S121-12.

(Step S121-11)
In step S121-11, the main CPU 301 performs a process of setting “0” to the value of the third effect state game number counter. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs a process of setting “0” to the value of the third effect state game number counter provided in the main RAM 303. Then, when the process of step S121-11 ends, the process proceeds to step S121-12.

(Step S121-12)
In step S121-12, the main CPU 301 performs a third effect state game number counter subtraction process. Specifically, when the value of the third effect state game number counter provided in the main RAM 303 is “0”, the main CPU 301 ends the third effect state game number counter subtraction process, and the main RAM 303. If the value of the third effect state game number counter provided in is not “0”, a process of subtracting “1” from the value of the third effect state game number counter provided in the main RAM 303 is performed. Then, when the process of step S121-12 ends, the process proceeds to step S121-13.

(Step S121-13)
In step S121-13, the main CPU 301 performs a second effect state game number counter subtraction process. Specifically, when the value of the second effect state game number counter provided in the main RAM 303 is “0”, the main CPU 301 ends the second effect state game number counter subtraction process, and the main RAM 303. When the value of the second effect state game number counter provided in is not “0”, a process of subtracting “1” from the value of the second effect state game number counter provided in the main RAM 303 is performed. Then, when the process of step S121-13 ends, the process proceeds to step S121-14.

(Step S121-14)
In step S121-14, the main CPU 301 performs a process of determining whether or not the value of the second effect state game number counter is “0”. Specifically, the main CPU 301 determines whether or not the value of the second effect state game number counter is “0” based on the value of the second effect state game number counter provided in the main RAM 303. Process. If it is determined that the value of the second effect state game number counter is “0” (step S121-14 = Yes), the process proceeds to step S121-15, and the second effect state game number counter is reached. If it is determined that the value of is not “0” (step S121-14 = No), the process proceeds to step S121-17.

(Step S121-15)
In step S121-15, the main CPU 301 performs a third effect state game number counter setting process. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs a process of setting “10” to the value of the third effect state game number counter provided in the main RAM 303. Then, when the process of step S121-15 ends, the process proceeds to step S121-16.

(Step S121-16)
In step S121-16, the main CPU 301 performs level setting processing. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs a process of setting a level based on a value stored in a second effect state point storage area provided in the main RAM 303. Here, in the present embodiment, when the value stored in the second effect state point storage area provided in the main RAM 303 is “0” to “30”, the level “1” is set. When the value stored in the second effect state point storage area provided in the main RAM 303 is “31” to “40”, the level “2” is set and provided in the main RAM 303. When the value stored in the second effect state point storage area is “41” to “59”, the level “3” is set and the second effect state point storage area provided in the main RAM 303 is set. When the stored value is “60” or more, the level “4” is set. Then, when the process of step S121-16 ends, the process proceeds to step S121-17.

(Step S121-17)
In step S121-17, the main CPU 301 performs RT gaming state transition processing which will be described in detail later with reference to FIG. In this process, the main CPU 301 performs a process for shifting the RT gaming state. Then, when the process of step S121-17 ends, the process proceeds to step S121-18.

(Step S121-18)
In step S121-18, the main CPU 301 performs processing for determining whether or not BAR replay has been established. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs a process of determining whether or not a symbol combination related to the BAR replay is displayed on the active line. If it is determined that BAR replay has been established (step S121-18 = Yes), the process proceeds to step S121-19, and if it is determined that BAR replay has not been established (step S121). −18 = No), the process proceeds to step S121-21.

(Step S121-19)
In step S121-19, the main CPU 301 determines whether or not the left reel has stopped at “14” or “16”. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs processing for determining whether or not the stop control position of the left reel 18 is “14” or “16”. If the left reel stops at “14” or “16” (step S121-19 = Yes), the process proceeds to step S121-20, and the left reel is “14” or “ If it is determined that the stop has not been made at No. 16 ”(step S121-19 = No), the process proceeds to step S121-21.

(Step S121-20)
In step S121-20, the main CPU 301 performs a process of setting “3356” as an effect wait timer. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs a process of setting “3356” to a timer counter provided in the main RAM 303. Then, when the process of step S121-20 ends, the process proceeds to step S121-21.

(Step S121-21)
In step S121-21, the main CPU 301 performs terminal plate signal output processing, which will be described in detail later with reference to FIG. In this processing, the main CPU 301 performs processing for acquiring the type of signal output from the external concentration terminal board 47, and the like. Then, when the process of step S121-21 ends, the process proceeds to step S121-22.

(Step S121-22)
In step S121-22, the main CPU 301 performs processing for setting a game end command. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs a process of setting the game end command in the effect transmission data storage area provided in the main RAM 303 in order to transmit the game end command to the sub-control board 400. . Here, the “game end command” is a command having information that the game has ended, information related to the game state, and the like. When the process of step S121-22 is completed, the gaming state transition process subroutine is terminated, and the process proceeds to step S101 of the main loop process.

  The main CPU 301 turns ON the operable state flag corresponding to the BET button 7 and the MAXBET button 8 in the operable state flag storage area provided in the main RAM 303 after the processing of step S121-22 is completed. Process.

(RT gaming state transition processing)
Next, based on FIG. 109, the RT game state transition process performed by the process of step S121-17 of FIG. 108 will be described. FIG. 109 is a diagram showing a subroutine of RT gaming state transition processing.

(Step S121-17-1)
In step S121-17-1, the main CPU 301 performs a process of determining whether or not a gaming state transition symbol is displayed. Specifically, the main CPU 301 displays a combination of symbols related to “Blank”, a combination of symbols related to “Preparation Replay”, a combination of symbols related to “Bonus Replay”, a combination of symbols related to “ART Replay”, Among the symbol combinations related to “Replay” or the symbol combinations related to “RUSH Replay”, processing is performed to determine whether any symbol combination is displayed on the active line. When the game state transition symbol is displayed (step S121-17-1 = Yes), the process proceeds to step S121-17-2, and it is determined that the game state transition symbol is not displayed. (Step S121-17-1 = No), the RT gaming state transition process subroutine is terminated, and the process proceeds to step S121-18 of the gaming state transition process.

(Step S121-17-2)
In step S121-17-2, the main CPU 301 performs a gaming state acquisition process. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs processing for acquiring a gaming state based on the value of the gaming state storage area provided in the main RAM 303. Then, when the process of step S121-17-2 ends, the process proceeds to step S121-17-3.

(Step S121-17-3)
In step S <b> 121-17-3, the main CPU 301 performs a process for determining whether or not it is a game state transition time. Specifically, as shown in the game state transition diagram (see FIG. 43), the main CPU 301 displays, for example, when “a combination of symbols related to“ blank ”” is displayed in the non-RT game state, etc., step S121-17. -2 is performed based on the combination of the gaming state acquired by the gaming state acquisition processing of -2 and the symbols displayed on the active line. If it is determined that the game state is being changed (step S121-17-3 = Yes), the process proceeds to step S121-17-4, and if it is determined that the game state is not being changed. (Step S121-17-3 = No), the RT game state transition process subroutine is terminated, and the process proceeds to Step S121-18 of the game state transition process.

(Step S121-17-4)
In step S121-17-4, the main CPU 301 performs a gaming state setting process. Specifically, the main CPU 301 determines the gaming state provided in the main RAM 303 based on the combination of the gaming state acquired by the gaming state acquisition process in step S121-17-2 and the symbols displayed on the active line. Processing to update the value of the storage area is performed. Then, when the process of step S121-17-4 ends, the process proceeds to step S121-17-5.

(Step S121-17-5)
In step S121-17-5, the main CPU 301 performs processing for clearing the signal type. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs a process of clearing the signal type set for output by the external concentration terminal board 47. Then, when the process of step S121-17-5 ends, the process proceeds to step S121-17-6.

(Step S121-17-6)
In step S121-17-6, the main CPU 301 performs processing for clearing the value of the point / level / game number counter. Specifically, the main CPU 301 has a level storage area provided in the main RAM 303, a value of a second effect state game number counter provided in the main RAM 303, and a third effect state provided in the main RAM 303. A process of clearing the value of the game number counter and the value of the second effect state point storage area provided in the main RAM 303 is performed. Then, when the process of step S121-17-6 ends, the process proceeds to step S121-17-7.

(Step S121-17-7)
In step S121-17-7, the main CPU 301 performs a process of determining whether or not it is during the transition to the first RT gaming state. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs a process of determining whether or not the first RT gaming state is set in the gaming state setting process of step S121-17-4. If it is determined that the time is in the first RT gaming state transition (step S121-17-7 = Yes), the process proceeds to step S121-17-8 and it is determined that the time is not in the first RT gaming state transition. If it is determined (step S121-17-7 = No), the process proceeds to step S121-17-9.

(Step S121-17-8)
In step S121-17-8, the main CPU 301 performs a first RT gaming state transition process. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs a process of clearing the value of the RUSH game number counter. When the process of step S121-17-8 is completed, the RT gaming state transition process subroutine is terminated, and the process proceeds to step S121-18 of the gaming state transition process.

(Step S121-17-9)
In step S121-17-9, the main CPU 301 performs a process of determining whether or not it is during the transition to the third RT gaming state. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs processing for determining whether or not the third RT gaming state is set in the gaming state setting processing in step S121-17-4. If it is determined that the time is in the third RT gaming state transition (step S121-17-9 = Yes), the process proceeds to step S121-17-11 and it is determined that the time is not in the third RT gaming state transition. If it is determined (step S121-17-9 = No), the process proceeds to step S121-17-10.

(Step S121-17-10)
In step S121-17-10, the main CPU 301 performs a RUSH game number counter setting process. Specifically, the main CPU 301 determines whether or not the fifth RT gaming state is set in the gaming state setting process of step S121-17-4. If the fifth RT gaming state is set, the main RAM 303 The process of setting the value of the RUSH game number counter provided in is performed. When the process of step S121-17-8 is completed, the RT gaming state transition process subroutine is terminated, and the process proceeds to step S121-18 of the gaming state transition process.

(Step S121-17-11)
In step S121-17-11, the main CPU 301 performs a process of determining whether or not the stop control number is “07” or “08”. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs a process of determining whether or not the value stored in the stop control number storage area provided in the main RAM 303 is “07” or “08”. If it is determined that the stop control number is “07” or “08” (step S121-17-11 = Yes), the process proceeds to step S121-17-12, and the stop control number is If it is determined that it is not “07” or “08” (step S121-17-11 = No), the process proceeds to step S121-17-16.

(Step S121-17-12)
In step S121-17-12, the main CPU 301 performs a process of determining whether or not the pressing order matches. Specifically, the main CPU 301 (a) when the value stored in the stop control number storage area provided in the main RAM 303 is “07”, the left reel 18, the middle reel 19, and the right reel 20. When the left stop button 11 is operated in a state where all are rotating, (b) when the value stored in the stop control number storage area provided in the main RAM 303 is “08”, the left reel 18. When the right stop button 13 is operated in a state where the middle reel 19 and the right reel 20 are all rotating, it is determined that the pressing order matches. For this reason, the main CPU 301 performs processing for determining whether or not the condition (a) or (b) is satisfied. If it is determined that the pressing order is matched (step S121-17-12 = Yes), the process proceeds to step S121-17-13, and if it is determined that the pressing order is not matched (step S121-17-12 = Yes) S121-17-12 = No), the process proceeds to step S121-17-15.

(Step S121-17-13)
In step S121-17-13, the main CPU 301 performs a second effect state game number counter setting process. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs a process of setting “30” to the value of the second effect state game number counter provided in the main RAM 303. Then, when the process of step S121-17-13 ends, the process proceeds to step S121-17-14.

(Step S121-17-14)
In step S121-17-14, the main CPU 301 performs point setting processing. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs a process of storing “10” in the second effect state point storage area provided in the main RAM 303. Then, when the process of step S121-17-14 ends, the process proceeds to step S121-17-15.

(Step S121-17-15)
In step S121-17-15, the main CPU 301 performs a process of setting “7700” as an effect wait timer. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs a process of setting “7700” to a timer counter provided in the main RAM 303. When the processing of step S121-17-15 is completed, the RT gaming state transition processing subroutine is terminated, and the processing proceeds to step S121-18 of the gaming state transition processing.

(Step S121-17-16)
In step S121-17-16, the main CPU 301 determines whether or not the first stop is the left reel. Specifically, the main CPU 301 determines whether or not the left stop switch 11sw has detected an operation of the left stop button 11 in a state where the left reel 18, the middle reel 19, and the right reel 20 are all rotating. I do. If it is determined that the first stop is the left reel (step S121-17-16 = Yes), the process proceeds to step S121-17-18, and it is determined that the first stop is not the left reel. If it is determined (step S121-17-16 = No), the process proceeds to step S121-17-17.

(Step S121-17-17)
In step S121-17-17, the main CPU 301 performs a process of determining whether or not the stop control number is “05”. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs a process of determining whether or not the value stored in the stop control number storage area provided in the main RAM 303 is “05”. If it is determined that the stop control number is “05” (step S121-17-17 = Yes), the process proceeds to step S121-17-18, and the stop control number is not “05”. Is determined (step S121-17-17 = No), the RT gaming state transition process subroutine is terminated, and the process proceeds to step S121-18 of the gaming state transition process.

(Step S121-17-18)
In step S121-17-18, the main CPU 301 performs an effect state flag setting process. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs processing for setting information relating to the blue seven BB in the blue seven information storage area provided in the main RAM 303. Then, when the process of step S121-17-18 ends, the process proceeds to step S121-17-19.

  The main CPU 301 performs a process of clearing the blue seven information storage area provided in the main RAM 303 at a predetermined timing when the gaming state is shifted.

(Step S121-17-19)
In step S121-17-19, the main CPU 301 performs a signal type setting process. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs processing for setting the type of signal output from the external concentration terminal board 47. Here, details of a signal output from the external concentration terminal board 47 will be described later. Then, when the process of step S121-17-19 ends, the process proceeds to step S121-17-20.

(Step S121-17-20)
In step S121-17-20, the main CPU 301 performs a process of setting “5570” as the effect wait timer. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs a process of setting “5570” to a timer counter provided in the main RAM 303. When the processing of step S121-17-20 is completed, the RT gaming state transition processing subroutine is terminated, and the processing proceeds to step S121-18 of the gaming state transition processing.

(Terminal board signal output processing)
Next, based on FIG. 110, the terminal board signal output process performed by the process of step S121-21 of FIG. 108 is demonstrated. FIG. 110 is a diagram showing a subroutine of terminal board signal output processing.

(Step S121-21-1)
In step S121-21-1, the main CPU 301 performs a process of determining whether or not the signal is OFF. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs processing for determining whether or not the signal output from the external concentration terminal board 47 is OFF. If it is determined that the signal is OFF (step S121-21-1 = Yes), the process proceeds to step S121-21-5, and if it is determined that the signal is not OFF ( Step S121-21-1 = No), the process proceeds to step S121-21-2.

(Step S121-21-2)
In step S121-21-2, the main CPU 301 performs a gaming state acquisition process.
Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs processing for acquiring a gaming state based on the value of the gaming state storage area provided in the main RAM 303. Then, when the process of step S121-21-2 ends, the process proceeds to step S121-21-3.

(Step S121-21-3)
In step S121-21-3, the main CPU 301 performs processing for determining whether or not there is no signal output. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs processing for determining whether or not there is a signal output from the external concentration terminal board 47. If it is determined that there is no signal output (step S121-21-3 = Yes), the process proceeds to step S121-21-5, and if it is determined that there is no signal output ( Step S121-21-3 = No), the process proceeds to step S121-21-4.

(Step S121-21-4)
In step S121-21-4, the main CPU 301 performs signal type acquisition processing. Specifically, the main CPU 301 displays the gaming state acquired by the gaming state acquisition process of step S121-21-2, the combination of symbols displayed on the active line, and the predetermined symbol combination displayed on the active line. The process of acquiring the type of signal output from the external concentration terminal board 47 is performed according to whether or not the game of “1” game has been performed. Then, when the process of step S121-21-4 ends, the process proceeds to step S121-21-5.

(Step S121-21-5)
In step S121-21-5, the main CPU 301 performs output port data setting processing. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs processing for setting output port data in accordance with the type of signal output from the external concentrated terminal board 47 acquired by the signal type acquisition processing in step S121-21-4. When the process of step S121-21-5 is completed, the terminal board signal output process subroutine is terminated, and the process proceeds to step S121-22 of the game state transition process.

(Interrupt processing)
Next, interrupt processing will be described based on FIG. Here, the interrupt process is a process performed by interrupting the main loop process every "1.49 ms".

(Step S201)
In step S <b> 201, the main CPU 301 performs processing for saving a register. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs processing for saving the value of the register used at the time of step S201. Then, when the process of step S201 ends, the process proceeds to step S202.

(Step S202)
In step S202, the main CPU 301 performs input port read processing. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs processing for receiving predetermined signals from the status board 100, the reel control board 150, the power supply board 200, and the setting switch board 250. Then, when the process of step S202 ends, the process proceeds to step S203.

(Step S203)
In step S203, the main CPU 301 performs an external signal output data set process. Specifically, when there is an external signal output request related to an error, the main CPU 301 performs processing for setting the output port data of the external concentrated terminal board 47 and the like. Then, when the process of step S203 ends, the process proceeds to step S204.

(Step S204)
In step S204, the main CPU 301 performs a timer measurement process. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs a process of subtracting “1” from the value of the timer for effect at the time of spinning effect and the value of the timer counter for measuring the minimum game time and the like. Then, when the process of step S204 ends, the process proceeds to step S205.

(Step S205)
In step S205, the main CPU 301 performs a process of setting “3” as the reel number. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs a process of setting “3” as the reel number in order to set the target of the reel to be driven and controlled in the reel drive control process of step S206 described later. Then, when the process of step S205 ends, the process proceeds to step S206.

(Step S206)
In step S206, the main CPU 301 performs a reel drive control process. Specifically, the main CPU 301, via the reel control board 150, corresponds to the reel number set by the process of step S205, the left reel 18, the middle reel 19, the right reel 20, the left stepping motor 151, and the middle stepping motor. By driving the right stepping motor 153, the rotation of the left reel 18, the middle reel 19, and the right reel 20 are accelerated, controlled at a constant speed, and decelerated. Then, when the process of step S206 ends, the process proceeds to step S207.

  In this embodiment, the main CPU 301 performs drive control of the right reel 20 when the reel number is “3”, and performs drive control of the middle reel 19 when the reel number is “2”. When the reel number is “1”, drive control of the left reel 18 is performed.

(Step S207)
In step S207, the main CPU 301 performs a process of subtracting “1” from the reel number. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs a process of subtracting “1” from the reel number currently set in the register. Then, when the process of step S207 ends, the process proceeds to step S208.

(Step S208)
In step S208, the main CPU 301 performs a process of determining whether or not the reel number is “0”. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs a process of determining whether or not the reel drive control process of step S206 has been performed for all the reels of the left reel 18, the middle reel 19, and the right reel 20. When it is determined that the reel number is “0” (step S208 = Yes), the process proceeds to step S209, and when it is determined that the reel number is not “0” (step S208). = No), the process proceeds to step S206.

(Step S209)
In step S209, the main CPU 301 performs an external signal output process. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs processing for setting output port data of the external concentration terminal board 47 and the like. Then, when the process of step S209 ends, the process proceeds to step S210.

(Step S210)
In step S210, the main CPU 301 performs LED output data creation processing. Specifically, the main CPU 301 includes a start lamp 24, a first BET lamp 25, a second BET lamp 26, a third BET lamp 27, a stored number display 28, a payout number display 29, a throwable display display 30, and a replay display. Processing for creating display data of the lamp 31 is performed. Then, when the process of step S210 ends, the process proceeds to step S211.

  The main CPU 301 controls to turn on a re-game display lamp lighting flag provided in the main RAM 303 when creating display data for lighting the re-game display lamp 31 in the LED output data creation processing in step S210. When the display data for turning off the re-game display lamp 31 is created, the re-game display lamp lighting flag provided in the main RAM 303 is turned off.

(Step S211)
In step S211, the main CPU 301 performs an LED display process. Specifically, the main CPU 301 includes a start lamp 24, a first BET lamp 25, a second BET lamp 26, a third BET lamp 27, a stored number display 28, a payout number display 29, a throwable display lamp 30, and a replay display. The lamp 31 is controlled. Then, when the process of step S211 is completed, the process proceeds to step S212.

(Step S212)
In step S212, the main CPU 301 performs control command transmission processing. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs a process of transmitting various commands set in the effect transmission data storage area provided in the main RAM 303 to the sub-control board 400. Then, when the process of step S212 ends, the process proceeds to step S213.

(Step S213)
In step S213, the main CPU 301 performs port output processing. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs a process of transmitting a predetermined signal to the status board 100, the reel control board 150, the power supply board 200, and the sub control board 400. Then, when the process of step S213 ends, the process proceeds to step S214.

(Step S214)
In step S214, the main CPU 301 performs a register restoration process. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs a process of restoring the saved register value in the process of step S201. Then, when the process of step S214 ends, the interrupt process ends, and the process returns to the main loop process.

(External signal output processing)
Next, the external signal output process performed by the process of step S209 in FIG. 111 will be described based on FIG. FIG. 112 shows a subroutine for external signal output processing.

(Step S209-1)
In step S209-1, the main CPU 301 performs processing to determine whether or not the external signal output time timer is “0”. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs a process of determining whether or not the value of the external signal output time timer counter provided in the main RAM 303 is “0”. If it is determined that the external signal output time timer is “0” (step S209-1 = Yes), the process proceeds to step S209-2, and the external signal output time timer is not “0”. Is determined (step S209-1 = No), the process proceeds to step S209-3.

(Step S209-2)
In step S209-2, the main CPU 301 performs a process of setting “68” in the external signal output time timer. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs a process of setting “68” in an external signal output time timer counter provided in the main RAM 303. When the process of step S209-2 ends, the external signal output process subroutine ends, and the process proceeds to step S210 of the interrupt process.

(Step S209-3)
In step S209-3, the main CPU 301 performs processing for determining whether or not there is a medal insertion signal request signal. Specifically, the main CPU 301 is requested to output a medal insertion signal having information indicating that a medal has been inserted from the external concentration terminal board 47 through the medal insertion slot 6, the BET button 7, and the MAXBET button 8. Processing for determining whether or not there is present is performed. When it is determined that there is a medal insertion signal request signal (step S209-3 = Yes), the process proceeds to step S209-4, and when it is determined that there is no medal insertion signal request signal. (Step S209-3 = No), the process proceeds to Step S209-5.

(Step S209-4)
In step S209-4, the main CPU 301 performs output port data setting processing. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs processing for setting output port data in order to output a medal insertion signal from the external concentration terminal board 47 to the outside of the gaming machine 1. Then, when the process of step S209-4 ends, the process proceeds to step S209-5.

(Step S209-5)
In step S209-5, the main CPU 301 performs processing for determining whether or not there is a medal payout signal request signal. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs processing for determining whether or not there is a request to output from the external concentration terminal board 47 a medal payout signal having information indicating that the hopper 202 has paid out medals. When it is determined that there is a medal payout signal request signal (step S209-5 = Yes), the process proceeds to step S209-6, and when it is determined that there is no medal payout signal request signal. (Step S209-5 = No), the external signal output process subroutine is terminated, and the process proceeds to Step S210 of the interrupt process.

(Step S209-6)
In step S209-6, the main CPU 301 performs output port data setting processing. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs processing for setting output port data in order to output a medal payout signal from the external concentration terminal board 47 to the outside of the gaming machine 1. When the process of step S209-6 ends, the external signal output process subroutine ends, and the process proceeds to interrupt process step S210.

(Main processing on sub-control board)
Next, the main process in the sub control board will be described with reference to FIG.

(Step S301)
In step S301, the sub CPU 401 performs an initialization process. Specifically, the sub CPU 401 performs processing such as error checking of the sub RAM 403. Then, when the process of step S301 ends, the process proceeds to step S302.

(Step S302)
In step S302, the sub CPU 401 performs main board communication processing, which will be described in detail later with reference to FIG. In the processing, the sub CPU 401 performs processing for analyzing a command transmitted from the main control board 300 and the like. Then, when the process of step S302 ends, the process proceeds to step S303.

(Step S303)
In step S303, the sub CPU 401 performs sound control processing. Specifically, the sub CPU 401 performs the upper left speaker 40, the lower left speaker 41, the upper right speaker 42, and the lower right speaker via the amplifier board 500 based on the content of the effect determined by the sub effect determination process described later. The process of outputting audio from 43 is performed. Then, when the process of step S303 ends, the process proceeds to step S304.

(Step S304)
In step S304, the sub CPU 401 performs lamp control processing. Specifically, the sub CPU 401 performs the Bonus display unit 32, the ART display unit 33, the RUSH display unit 34, and the stop via the panel LED relay board 700 based on the content of the effect determined by the sub effect determination process described later. The button operation display unit 35, start lever LED 36, MAXBET button LED 721, stop button LED 722, effect button LED 723, and waist panel LED 724 are controlled. Further, the sub CPU 401 performs the effect device 50, the left effect device motor 651, and the right effect device via the effect control board 600 and the effect device drive board 650, based on the effect contents determined by the sub effect determination process described later. The motor 654, the left liquid crystal lift motor 657, and the right liquid crystal lift motor 660 are controlled. Then, when the process of step S304 ends, the process proceeds to step S305.

(Step S305)
In step S305, the sub CPU 401 performs image control processing. Specifically, the sub CPU 401 controls the liquid crystal display device 46 via the effect control board 600 based on the effect contents determined by the sub effect determining process described later. Then, when the process of step S305 ends, the process proceeds to step S306.

(Step S306)
In step S306, the sub CPU 401 performs various switch detection processing. Specifically, the sub CPU 401 performs predetermined processing when (a) the effect button detection sensor 710sw detects an operation of the effect button 21, or (b) when the cross key board 711 detects an operation of the cross key 22. Process to execute. Then, when the process of step S306 ends, the process proceeds to step S302.

(Main board communication processing)
Next, based on FIG. 114, the main board | substrate communication process performed by the process of step S302 of FIG. 113 is demonstrated. FIG. 114 is a diagram showing a subroutine of main board communication processing.

(Step S302-1)
In step S302-1, the sub CPU 401 performs processing for determining whether or not a different command is received. Specifically, the sub CPU 401 performs a process of determining whether or not the command transmitted from the main control board 300 is a command different from the command transmitted last time. If it is determined that a different command has been received (step S302-1 = Yes), the process proceeds to step S302-2. If it is determined that a different command has not been received (step S302). −1 = No), the main board communication process subroutine is terminated, and the process proceeds to step S303 of the main process in the sub control board.

(Step S302-2)
In step S302-2, the sub CPU 401 performs a game information storage process. Specifically, the sub CPU 401 performs processing for creating game information based on a command different from the previously transmitted command and storing it in a predetermined storage area of the sub RAM 403. Then, when the process of step S302-2 ends, the process proceeds to step S302-3.

(Step S302-3)
In step S302-3, the sub CPU 401 performs a command analysis process that will be described in detail later with reference to FIG. In this process, the sub CPU 401 executes a process based on the game information stored by the process of step S302-2. When the process of step S302-3 ends, the main board communication process subroutine ends, and the process proceeds to step S303 of the main process in the sub control board.

(Command analysis processing)
Next, based on FIG. 115, the command analysis process performed by the process of step S302-3 of FIG. 114 will be described. FIG. 115 is a diagram showing a subroutine of command analysis processing.

(Step S302-3-1)
In step S302-3-1, the sub CPU 401 performs processing for each command, which will be described in detail later with reference to FIG. In the processing, the sub CPU 401 performs processing according to the command received from the main control board 300. Then, when the process of step S302-3-1 ends, the process proceeds to step S302-3-2.

(Step S302-3-2)
In step S302-3-2, the sub CPU 401 performs lamp data determination processing. Specifically, sub CPU401 performs the process which determines the lamp data corresponding to the production content determined by the process according to command of step S302-3-1. Then, when the process of step S302-3-2 ends, the process proceeds to step S302-3-3.

(Step S302-3-3)
In step S302-3-3, the sub CPU 401 performs sound data determination processing. Specifically, sub CPU401 performs the process which determines the sound data corresponding to the production content determined by the process according to command of step S302-3-1. Then, when the process of step S302-3-3 ends, the process proceeds to step S302-3-4.

(Step S302-3-4)
In step S302-3-4, the sub CPU 401 performs image data determination processing. Specifically, the sub CPU 401 performs processing for determining image data corresponding to the effect content determined by the command-specific processing in step S302-3-1. When the process of step S302-3-4 ends, the command analysis process subroutine ends, and the process proceeds to step S303 of the main process in the sub control board.

(Processing by command)
Next, the command-by-command processing performed by the processing in step S302-3-1 in FIG. 115 will be described based on FIG. FIG. 116 is a diagram showing a subroutine for processing by command.

(Step S302-3-1-1)
In step S302-3-1-1, the sub CPU 401 performs processing for determining whether or not a conditional device command has been received. Specifically, the sub CPU 401 performs processing for determining whether or not the command received from the main control board 300 is a conditional device command. If it is determined that the received command is a conditional device command (step S302-3-1-1 = Yes), the process proceeds to step S302-3-1-2, and the received command is a condition command. If it is determined that the command is not an apparatus command (step S302-3-1-1 = No), the process proceeds to step S302-3-3-1-3.

(Step S302-3-1-2)
In step S302-3-1-2, the sub CPU 401 performs a conditional device command reception process which will be described in detail later with reference to FIG. In the processing, the sub CPU 401 performs processing according to the condition device command received from the main control board 300 and the state managed by the sub control board 400. Then, when the process of step S302-3-1-2 ends, the process proceeds to step S302-3-8-1-8.

(Step S302-3-3-1)
In step S302-3-3-1, the sub CPU 401 performs processing for determining whether or not a display determination command has been received. Specifically, the sub CPU 401 performs processing for determining whether or not the command received from the main control board 300 is a display determination command. If it is determined that the received command is a display determination command (step S302-3-3-1 = Yes), the process proceeds to step S302-3-1-1-4, and the received command is displayed. If it is determined that the command is not a determination command (step S302-3-3-1 = No), the process proceeds to step S302-3-5-1-5.

(Step S302-3-1-4)
In step S302-3-1-1-4, the sub CPU 401 performs a display determination command reception process which will be described in detail later with reference to FIG. In the processing, the sub CPU 401 performs processing according to the display determination command received from the main control board 300 and the state managed by the sub control board 400. Then, when the process of step S302-3-1-1-4 ends, the process proceeds to step S302-3-8-1-8.

(Step S302-3-5-1-5)
In step S302-3-5-1-5, the sub CPU 401 performs a process of determining whether or not the rotation effect RE5 command has been received. Specifically, the sub CPU 401 performs a process of determining whether or not the command received from the main control board 300 is a rotation effect RE5 command. If it is determined that the received command is the spinning effect RE5 command (step S302-3-5-1 = Yes), the process proceeds to step S302-3-1-6, and the received command If it is determined that the command is not the spinning effect RE5 command (step S302-3-5-1 = No), the process proceeds to step S302-3-1-7.

(Step S302-3-1-6)
In step S302-3-1-6, the sub CPU 401 performs a process for receiving the turning effect RE5 command, which will be described in detail later with reference to FIG. In this process, the sub CPU 401 performs a process according to the spinning effect RE5 command received from the main control board 300. Then, when the process of step S302-3-6-1-6 ends, the process proceeds to step S302-3-8-1-8.

(Step S302-3-1-7)
In step S302-3-1-7, the sub CPU 401 performs processing according to the received command. Specifically, the sub CPU 401 performs processing according to the command received from the main control board 300. Then, when the process of step S302-3-1-7 ends, the process proceeds to step S302-3-8-1-8.

  Here, when receiving a setting change end command from the main control board 300, the sub CPU 401 uses the setting change mode lottery table (see FIG. 47A) provided in the sub ROM 402 to specify the specific mode. Or whether to set the normal mode, and stores the result of the lottery in a mode information storage area provided in the sub RAM 403. Further, when it is determined that the specific mode is set, the sub CPU 401 plays a game in the specific mode based on the specific mode game number lottery table (see FIG. 47D) provided in the sub ROM 402. The number of games to be determined is determined by lottery, and the number of games determined by the lottery is set to the value of the specific mode game number counter provided in the sub RAM 403.

  In addition, when the sub CPU 401 receives a setting change end command from the main control board 300, the sub CPU 401 displays the normal state point acquisition lottery table (when setting is changed) provided in the sub ROM 402 (see FIG. 49J). Based on this, a lottery to determine whether or not to acquire the normal state point is performed, and the normal state point acquired by the lottery is stored in a normal state point storage area provided in the sub-RAM 403.

  Further, when the sub CPU 401 receives a setting change end command from the main control board 300, the sub CPU 401 determines a predetermined winning combination based on a rare inter-role initial game number determination table (see FIG. 50) provided in the sub ROM 402. A process of determining by lottery how many games that have not been won will be awarded for normal state points.

(Step S302-3-1-8)
In step S302-3-1-8, the sub CPU 401 performs a sub effect determination process. Specifically, the sub CPU 401 performs processing upon reception of a conditional device command in step S302-3-1-2, processing upon reception of a display determination command in step S302-3-1-1, and step S302-3-1-6. A process for determining an effect to be executed by the liquid crystal display device 46 or the like based on the result of executing the process at the time of receiving the reel effect RE5, the process according to the received command, and the effect determination table (see FIG. 46). Do. When the process of step S302-3-1-8 ends, the subroutine for each command process ends, and the process proceeds to step S302-3-2 of the command analysis process.

  Here, the sub CPU 401 may execute the first continuous effect, the second continuous effect, the third continuous effect, the fourth continuous effect, or the fifth continuous effect informing that the state does not shift to an advantageous state for the player. When determined, based on the normal state point acquisition lottery table (continuous production failure) (see FIG. 49 (H)), a process for determining the normal state points to be given to the player by lottery, The normal state points determined by the lottery are added to the normal state point storage area provided in the sub RAM 403 and stored.

  Further, when the sub CPU 401 includes, in the sub effect determining process in step S302-3-1-8, information indicating that the spinning device effect is executed in the condition device command received from the main control board 300, A process for determining an effect corresponding to the spinning effect to be executed is performed. For example, when the condition device command received from the main control board 300 includes information indicating that the rotation effect RE1 is to be executed, the effect corresponding to the rotation effect RE1 is determined and received from the main control board 300. If the condition device command includes information indicating that the rotation effect RE2 is to be executed, the effect corresponding to the rotation effect RE2 is determined, and the condition device command received from the main control board 300 is set to the rotation effect. If information indicating that RE3 is to be executed is included, an effect corresponding to the spinning effect RE3 is determined, and information indicating that the rotating effect RE4 is to be executed in the conditional device command received from the main control board 300. If included, the effect corresponding to the spinning effect RE4 is determined.

  When an effect corresponding to the spinning effect is determined, the upper left speaker 40, the lower left speaker 41, the upper right speaker 42, the lower right speaker 43, the liquid crystal display device 46, the effect device 50, and the upper left effect device 811. The lower left effect device 812, the upper right effect device 813, the lower right effect device 814, the top LED 861, the corner LED 862, the side LED 863, the saucer side LED 864, and the saucer LED 865 are used to produce an effect corresponding to the spinning effect.

  Further, when the sub CPU 401 includes, in the sub effect determining process in step S302-3-8-1-8, information indicating that the spinning device effect is reserved in the condition device command received from the main control board 300, The process which determines the rotation effect suggestion production which suggests the possibility that a rotation production is performed is performed. Specifically, the sub CPU 401 detects an effect at the start of rotation of the left reel 18, the middle reel 19, and the right reel 20, an effect when the operation of the left stop button 11 is detected, and an operation of the middle stop button 12. Processing for determining the effect when the operation of the right stop button 13 is detected. Therefore, in the game in which the rotation effect is reserved, the rotation effect suggestion effect is performed, so that the player expects the rotation effect to be performed in the next game. You can play games with feeling.

  Further, when the state managed by the sub control board 400 shifts from the battle state to the ART state, the sub CPU 401 displays the information related to the winning combination included in the conditional device command received from the main control board 300 as “ART”. Stop button operation display of information necessary for displaying a combination of symbols related to “ART replay” on the active line in the case of “medium replay AR1”, “ART replay AR2”, or “ART replay AR3” Control is performed by the unit 35, the liquid crystal display device 46, and the like. Here, the notification is determined “1” times after the state managed by the sub-control board 400 shifts from the battle state to the ART state, and the timing at which the notification is performed next is the sub-control board 400 again. After the state managed by is shifted from the battle state to the ART state.

  Further, when the state managed by the sub control board 400 is the Bonus preparation state, the sub CPU 401 performs “preparation state transition replay JR1”, “preparation state transition replay JR2”, and “preparation state transition replay JR3” by the internal lottery process. When “preparation state transition replay JR4” is determined, a process of determining an effect for notifying information for displaying the combination of symbols related to “preparation replay” on the active line is performed. Further, when the state managed by the sub control board 400 is the Bonus preparation state, the sub CPU 401 determines “Bonus rush replay BI1”, “Bonus rush replay BI2”, and “Bonus rush replay BI3” by the internal lottery process. In the case of being played, combinations of symbols related to “first bonus replay”, “second bonus replay”, and “third bonus replay” based on the values stored in the bonus standby information storage area provided in the sub-RAM 403. Is performed to determine an effect for notifying information for displaying on the active line.

  In addition, when the state managed by the sub control board 400 is the ART ready state, and the “state transition replay” is determined by the internal lottery process, the sub CPU 401 determines the combination of symbols related to “ART replay”. Is performed to determine an effect for notifying information for displaying on the active line. In addition, when the state managed by the sub control board 400 is the RUSH preparation state and the “state transition replay” is determined by the internal lottery process, the sub CPU 401 combines the symbols related to the “RUSH replay”. Is performed to determine an effect for notifying information for displaying on the active line. In addition, when the state managed by the sub control board 400 is the addition preparation state, the sub CPU 401 determines that the “state transition replay” is determined by the internal lottery process, and the symbol combination related to the “special replay” Is performed to determine an effect for notifying information for displaying on the active line.

  Further, when the state managed by the sub control board 400 is the second fall standby state, the sub CPU 401 performs “ART replay AR1”, “ART replay AR2”, and “ART replay AR3” by the internal lottery process. Is determined, an effect of notifying information for displaying the combination of symbols related to “ART replay” on the active line is determined. Further, when the state managed by the sub control board 400 is the third fall standby state, the sub CPU 401 determines that “RUSH replay R1” or “RUSH replay R2” is determined by the internal lottery process. A process of determining an effect for notifying information for displaying a combination of symbols related to “ART replay” on the active line is performed.

  When the state managed by the sub control board 400 is the first fall standby state or the fourth fall standby state, the sub CPU 401 performs “push order bell A1”, “push order” by the internal lottery process. “Bell A2”, “Push Order Bell A3”, “Push Order Bell A4”, “Push Order Bell B1”, “Push Order Bell B2”, “Push Order Bell B3”, “Push Order Bell B4” are determined Does not determine the effect of notifying information for displaying the symbol combination related to “bell” on the active line. For this reason, the symbol combination related to “Bell” is not displayed on the effective line, and the symbol combination related to “Blank” is displayed on the effective line.

(Processing when conditional device command is received)
Next, based on FIG. 117, the conditional device command reception process performed by the process of step S302-3-1-2 of FIG. 116 will be described. FIG. 117 is a diagram showing a subroutine of processing when a conditional device command is received.

(Step S302-3-2-1-1)
In step S302-3-2-1-1, the sub CPU 401 performs an ART lottery combination conversion process. Specifically, the sub CPU 401 uses the low probability mode navigation permission lottery table provided in the sub ROM 402 based on the value of the high probability information storage area provided in the sub RAM 303 (see FIG. 68B). Alternatively, the navigation permission lottery table for high probability mode provided in the sub ROM 402 (see FIG. 68C) is selected, and the selected navigation permission lottery table and the state storage area provided in the sub RAM 403 are selected. Based on the value of, the information related to the winning combination included in the conditional device command transmitted by the main control board 300, and the information on whether or not to execute the spinning effect, “watermelon play”, “weak cherry” Whether to allow the combination of symbols related to “Replay”, “Strong Cherry Replay”, and “Chance Eye Replay CR1” to be displayed on the active line Perform Kano lottery. Then, when the process of step S302-3-1-2-1 ends, the process proceeds to step S302-3-1-2-2.

  Further, the sub CPU 401 determines whether or not the value of the high probability game number counter provided in the sub RAM 403 is “1” or more in the ART lottery combination conversion process of step S302-3-2-1-1. If it is determined that the value of the high probability game number counter provided in the sub RAM 403 is “1” or more, “1” is subtracted from the value of the high probability game number counter provided in the sub RAM 403. Perform the process. Then, the sub CPU 401 determines whether or not the value of the high probability game number counter is “0” as a result of subtracting “1” from the value of the high probability game number counter provided in the sub RAM 403, If it is determined that the value of the game counter is “0”, whether or not to set a high probability based on the navigation permission mode determination table (see FIG. 68A) provided in the sub ROM 402 Do the lottery. If it is determined that a high probability is set as a result of the lottery, the high probability provided in the sub ROM 402 is performed while performing processing for storing in the high probability information storage area provided in the sub RAM 403. Based on the number-of-games lottery table (at the time of high probability) (see FIG. 56E), processing for determining the number of games that can be played with high probability is performed. Then, a process of setting the determined number of games to the value of the high probability game number counter provided in the sub RAM 403 is performed.

  On the other hand, if the sub CPU 401 determines that the value of the high probability mode game number counter provided in the sub RAM 403 is not “1” or more, the navigation permission mode determination table (see FIG. 68 (A)), whether or not to set a high probability is determined. If it is determined that a high probability is set as a result of the lottery, the high probability provided in the sub ROM 402 is performed while performing processing for storing in the high probability information storage area provided in the sub RAM 403. Based on the number-of-games lottery table (at the time of high probability) (see FIG. 56E), processing for determining the number of games that can be played with high probability is performed. Then, a process of setting the determined number of games to the value of the high probability mode game number counter provided in the sub RAM 403 is performed.

  In the present embodiment, in the ART lottery combination conversion process in step S302-3-2-1-1, the “watermelon play”, “weak cherry replay”, “strong cherry replay”, and “chance eye replay CR1” are set. If it is determined that the combination of symbols is allowed to be displayed on the active line, the liquid crystal display device 46 or the like is used to select “watermelon play”, “weak cherry replay”, “strong cherry replay”, “chance”. An effect suggesting that the combination of symbols relating to “eye replay CR1” is allowed to be displayed on the active line is performed.

  On the other hand, in the ART lottery role conversion process of step S302-3-2-1-1, the sub CPU 401 relates to the “watermelon play”, “weak cherry replay”, “strong cherry replay”, and “chance eye replay CR1”. If it is determined not to allow the combination of symbols to be displayed on the effective line, the left stop button for displaying the symbol combination related to “middle stage replay” on the effective line by the liquid crystal display device 46 or the like. 11. Processing for informing the operation order of the middle stop button 12 and the right stop button 13 is performed.

(Step S302-3-1-2-2)
In step S302-3-1-2-2, the sub CPU 401 performs a main RUSH state management process. Specifically, the sub CPU 401 sets the value of the first RUSH state stock counter to “1” when the information indicating that the RUSH stock counter is to be added is included in the conditional device command transmitted by the main control board 300. It is determined by lottery whether to add or “1” is added to the value of the second RUSH state stock counter, and the determined result is the value of the first RUSH state stock counter provided in the sub RAM 403 or the second RUSH. A process of adding “1” to the value of the state stock counter is performed. Then, when the process of step S302-3-1-2-2 ends, the process proceeds to step S302-3-1-2-3.

(Step S302-3-1-2-3)
In step S <b> 302-3-1-2-3, the sub CPU 401 performs processing for determining whether or not the state number is “01” to “11”. Specifically, in the sub CPU 401, the state managed by the sub control board 400 is “normal state” with the state number “01”, “first chance precursor state” with the state number “02”, and the state number is “03” indicates “second chance precursor state”, “04” indicates “third chance precursor state”, “05” indicates “fourth chance precursor state”, and “06” indicates that the state number is “06”. "5th chance precursor state", "Bonus precursor state" with state number "07", "first chance state" with state number "08", "second chance state" with state number "09", state number Is a “third chance state” with “10” and a “fourth chance state” with the state number “11”. If it is determined that the state number is any one of “01” to “11” (step S302-3-1-2-3 = Yes), the process goes to step S302-3-1-2-4. When the process is shifted and it is determined that the state number is not “01” to “11” (step S302-3-1-2-3 = No), step S302-3-1-2 is performed. The process is shifted to -5.

(Step S302-3-1-2-4)
In step S302-3-1-2-4, the sub CPU 401 performs a process of adding “1” to the value of the Bonus game number counter. Specifically, the sub CPU 401 performs a process of adding “1” to the value of the bonus game number counter provided in the sub RAM 403. Then, when the process of step S302-3-1-2-4 ends, the process proceeds to step S302-3-1-2-5.

(Step S302-3-1-2-5)
In step S302-3-1-2-5, the sub CPU 401 performs state transition processing. Specifically, the sub CPU 401 performs processing according to the state managed by the sub control board 400 based on the value of the state storage area provided in the sub RAM 403. Here, in the state-by-state transition processing in step S302-3-1-2-5, a subroutine is provided according to the value of the state storage area provided in the sub RAM 403 (see FIGS. 118 to 153). Then, when the process of step S302-3-1-2-5 ends, the process proceeds to step S302-3-1-2-6.

(Step S302-3-1-2-6)
In step S302-3-1-2-6, the sub CPU 401 performs a process of determining whether or not the first chance state winning flag is ON. Specifically, the sub CPU 401 performs a process of determining whether or not the first chance state winning flag is ON based on the value of the first chance state winning flag storage area provided in the sub RAM 403. If it is determined that the first chance state winning flag is ON (step S302-3-1-2-6 = Yes), the process proceeds to step S302-3-1-2-10. If it is determined that the first chance state winning flag is not ON (step S302-3-1-2-6 = No), the process proceeds to step S302-3-1-2-7.

(Step S302-3-1-2-7)
In step S302-3-1-2-7, the sub CPU 401 performs a process of determining whether or not the second chance state winning flag is ON. Specifically, the sub CPU 401 performs a process of determining whether or not the second chance state winning flag is ON based on the value of the second chance state winning flag storage area provided in the sub RAM 403. If it is determined that the second chance state winning flag is ON (step S302-3-1-2-7 = Yes), the process proceeds to step S302-3-1-2-10. If it is determined that the second chance state winning flag is not ON (step S302-3-1-2-7 = No), the process proceeds to step S302-3-1-2-8.

(Step S302-3-1-2-8)
In step S302-3-1-2-8, the sub CPU 401 determines whether or not the value of the third chance state game number counter is “1” or more. Specifically, the sub CPU 401 determines whether the value of the third chance state game number counter is “1” or more based on the value of the third chance state game number counter provided in the sub RAM 403. Perform the process. If it is determined that the value of the third chance state game number counter is “1” or more (step S302-3-1-2-8 = Yes), step S302-3-1-2-10 If it is determined that the value of the third chance state game number counter is not “1” or more (step S302-3-1-2-8 = No), step S302-3-1 is performed. The process is shifted to -2-9.

(Step S302-3-1-2-9)
In step S302-3-1-2-9, the sub CPU 401 performs processing to determine whether or not the value of the fourth chance state game number counter is “1” or more. Specifically, the sub CPU 401 determines whether or not the value of the fourth chance state game number counter is “1” or more based on the value of the fourth chance state game number counter provided in the sub RAM 403. Perform the process. If it is determined that the value of the fourth chance state game number counter is “1” or more (step S302-3-1-2-9 = Yes), step S302-3-1-2-10 If it is determined that the value of the fourth chance state game number counter is not equal to or greater than “1” (step S302-3-1-2-9 = No), processing at the time of receiving a conditional device command is performed. Is terminated, and the processing shifts to step S302-3-8-1 of the command-by-command processing.

(Step S302-3-1-2-10)
In step S302-3-1-2-10, the sub CPU 401 performs processing for clearing the fake type variable. Specifically, the sub CPU 401 performs processing for clearing the fake type variable storage area provided in the sub RAM 403. Here, the fake type variable refers to the first chance state, the second chance state, and the second chance state when the transition to the first chance state, the second chance state, the third chance state, and the fourth chance state is not determined. It is a value for performing a fake effect that expects a transition to the chance state, the third chance state, and the fourth chance state over a plurality of games. Then, when the process of step S302-3-1-2-10 ends, the process proceeds to step S302-3-1-2-11.

(Step S302-3-1-2-11)
In step S302-3-1-2-11, the sub CPU 401 performs a process of setting “0” in the fake game number counter. Specifically, the sub CPU 401 performs a process of setting “0” to the value of the fake game number counter provided in the sub RAM 403. When the process of step S302-3-1-2-11 ends, the subroutine of the conditional device command reception process ends, and the process proceeds to step S302-3-8-1-8 of the command-specific process.

(Normal processing)
Next, based on FIG. 118, normal state processing performed when the state managed by the sub-control board 400 is in the normal state in the state-specific transition processing in step S302-3-1-2-5 in FIG. 117. Will be described. FIG. 118 is a diagram showing a subroutine for normal state processing.

(Step S302-3-1-2-5-1-1)
In step S302-3-1-2-5-1-1, the sub CPU 401 performs ceiling subtraction processing. Specifically, the sub CPU 401 performs a process of subtracting “1” from the value of the ceiling game number counter provided in the sub RAM 403. Then, when the process of step S302-3-1-2-5-1-1 ends, the process proceeds to step S302-3-1-2-5-2.

(Step S302-3-1-2-5-1-2)
In step S302-3-1-2-5-1-2, the sub CPU 401 performs a normal counter subtraction process. Specifically, when the value of the Bonus omen game number counter provided in the sub RAM 403 is “1” or more, the sub CPU 401 determines the value of the Bonus omen game number counter provided in the sub RAM 403. The process of subtracting “1” from the value, or (b) the value of the fake game number counter provided in the sub RAM 403 when the value of the fake game number counter provided in the sub RAM 403 is “1” or more. The process of subtracting “1” from is performed. Then, when the process of step S302-3-1-2-5-1-2 ends, the process proceeds to step S302-3-1-2-5-1-3.

(Step S302-3-1-2-5-1-3)
In step S302-3-1-2-5-1-3, the sub CPU 401 performs processing to determine whether or not the winning number is “05”. Specifically, the sub CPU 401 performs a process of determining whether or not the information related to the winning combination included in the conditional device command received from the main control board 300 is the winning number “05”. And when it determines with a winning number being "05" (step S302-3-1-2-5-1-3 = Yes), step S302-3-1-2-5-1-4. If it is determined that the winning number is not “05” (step S302-3-1-2-5-1-3 = No), step S302-3-1-2-5 is performed. The process is shifted to -1-5.

(Step S302-3-1-2-5-1-4)
In step S302-3-1-2-5-1-4, the sub CPU 401 performs a direct hit winning process. Specifically, the sub CPU 401 (a) updates the Bonus winning opportunity storage area provided in the sub RAM 403, (b) the third chance state game number counter provided in the sub RAM 403, A process of clearing the 4-chance state game number counter, etc., (c) an ART initial hit process described later, and (d) a Bonus winning process described later are performed. When the processing of step S302-3-1-2-5-1-4 is completed, the normal state processing subroutine is terminated, and the conditional device command reception processing is terminated at step S302-3-1-2-6. Migrate processing.

(Step S302-3-1-2-5-5)
In step S <b> 302-3-2-5-1-5, the sub CPU 401 performs processing for determining whether or not the winning number is “20” to “30”. Specifically, the sub CPU 401 determines whether or not the information related to the winning combination included in the conditional device command received from the main control board 300 is any of the winning numbers “20” to “30”. Perform the process. If it is determined that the winning number is any one of “20” to “30” (step S302-3-1-2-5-1-5 = Yes), step S302-3-1-1 The process proceeds to 2-5-1-6, and if it is determined that the winning number is not “20” to “30” (step S302-3-1-2-5-1-5). = No), the process proceeds to step S302-3-1-2-5-1-7.

(Step S302-3-1-2-5-1-6)
In step S <b> 302-3-2-5-1-6, the sub CPU 401 performs specific role ceiling determination processing. Specifically, the sub CPU 401 determines that the information related to the winning combination included in the conditional device command received from the main control board 300 is any one of the winning numbers “20” to “30”. The process of adding “1” to the value of the specified combination winning number counter provided in the sub RAM 403 is performed, and the value of the specified combination winning number counter provided in the sub RAM 403 reaches a predetermined number. In the next game, the state managed by the sub-control board 400 becomes the first chance precursor state in the next state storage area provided in the sub-RAM 403 so that the state managed by the sub-control board 400 becomes the first chance precursor state. Perform processing to set. Further, the sub CPU 401 determines whether to shift to the third chance state or the fourth chance state by lottery, and based on the result of the lottery, the sub CPU 401 sets the third chance state stock counter provided in the sub RAM 403. A process of adding “1” to the value or the value of the fourth chance state stock counter is performed. Then, when the process of step S302-3-2-1-2-5-1-6 ends, the process proceeds to step S302-3-1-2-5-1-7.

(Step S302-3-1-2-5-1-7)
In step S <b> 302-3-2-5-1-7, the sub CPU 401 performs a process of determining whether or not the value of the high probability mode game number counter is “1” or more. Specifically, the sub CPU 401 performs a process of determining whether or not the value of the high probability mode game number counter provided in the sub RAM 403 is “1” or more. If it is determined that the value of the high probability mode game number counter is “1” or more (step S302-3-1-2-5-1-7 = Yes), step S302-3-1-1— When the process proceeds to 2-5-1-8 and it is determined that the value of the high probability mode game number counter is not equal to or greater than “1” (step S302-3-2-1-2-5-1-7). = No), the process proceeds to step S302-3-1-2-5-1-9.

(Step S302-3-1-2-5-1-8)
In step S302-3-1-2-5-1-8, the sub CPU 401 performs a high-probability lottery process. Specifically, the sub CPU 401 subtracts “1” from the value of the high probability mode game number counter provided in the sub RAM 403, and the chance state transition lottery table (when high probability stays) provided in the sub ROM 402 ( 53B) and whether or not to shift to the third chance state or the fourth chance state based on the information related to the winning combination included in the conditional device command received from the main control board 300. A lottery process is performed. Further, when it is determined that the transition to the third chance state is made as a result of the lottery, the sub CPU 401 adds “1” to the value of the third chance state stock counter provided in the sub RAM 403. The sub CPU 401 adds “1” to the value of the fourth chance state stock counter provided in the sub RAM 403 when it is determined as a result of the lottery that the state shifts to the fourth chance state. Process. Then, based on the sign lottery table (see FIG. 54) provided in the sub ROM 402 and the information related to the winning combination included in the conditional device command, the first chance sign state or the second chance sign is obtained. A process for determining whether to shift to a state by lottery is performed, and a process for storing the result of the lottery in a next state storage area provided in the sub RAM 403 is performed. Then, when the process of step S302-3-1-2-5-1-8 ends, the process proceeds to step S302-3-1-2-5-1-9.

  Further, the sub CPU 401 transitions to the second chance precursor state when it is determined in the process of step S302-3-1-2-5-1-8 to transition to the first chance precursor state. Is determined, the number of games to be played in the first chance precursor state or the second chance precursor state based on the precursor game number lottery table (see FIG. 55) provided in the sub ROM 402 is determined. Processing determined by lottery is performed. Then, the number of games determined by the lottery is set to the value of the first chance precursor state game number counter or the second chance precursor state game number counter provided in the sub-RAM 403.

(Step S302-3-1-2-5-1-9)
In step S302-3-2-1-5-1-9, the sub CPU 401 performs normal point related processing. Specifically, the sub CPU 401 determines the normal state point acquisition lottery table provided in the sub ROM 402 based on the value of the Bonus game number counter provided in the sub RAM 403 (FIGS. 49A and 49). (B), FIG. 49C, FIG. 49D, and FIG. 49E), and the selected normal state point acquisition lottery table and the condition device command received from the main control board 300 Based on the information related to the winning combination included in the game, the lottery process is performed to determine whether or not to acquire the normal state point, and when the lottery is won, the normal state provided in the sub RAM 403 is used. Adds the winning value to the point storage area. Then, when the process of step S302-3-1-2-5-1-9 ends, the process proceeds to step S302-3-1-2-2-5-1-10.

  Here, in the normal point-related processing, (a) when the value of the bonus game number counter provided in the sub RAM 403 is “1” to “200”, the normal state first point acquisition lottery Based on the table (see FIG. 49A), a process of drawing whether or not to acquire the points for the normal state is performed. (B) The value of the Bonus game number counter provided in the sub RAM 403 is “201. ”To“ 400 ”, based on the normal state second point acquisition lottery table (see FIG. 49 (B)), a process of lottering whether or not to acquire the normal state points is performed ( c) When the value of the inter-Bus game number counter provided in the sub RAM 403 is “401” to “600”, the normal state third point acquisition lottery table (FIG. 4). Based on (C), a process for drawing whether or not to acquire the normal state point is performed, and (d) the value of the inter-Bus game number counter provided in the sub RAM 403 is changed from “601” to “800”. ”On the basis of the normal state fourth point acquisition lottery table (see FIG. 49D), a process of lottering whether or not to acquire the normal state points is performed. (E) Sub-RAM 403 If the value of the Bonus inter-game number counter provided in is “801” or more, the normal state points are acquired based on the normal state fifth point acquisition lottery table (see FIG. 49E). A process for drawing whether or not to do is performed.

  In the normal point-related process, the internal lottery process is provided in the sub ROM 402 based on the fact that the number of games that are not won from the winning number “20” to the winning number “30” has become a predetermined number of games. Based on the normal state point acquisition lottery table (between rare roles) (see FIG. 49F), processing for determining the normal state points to be acquired by the player by lottery is performed. Then, the normal state point determined by the lottery is added to the normal state point storage area provided in the sub-RAM 403 and stored.

(Step S302-3-1-2-5-1-10)
In step S <b> 302-3-2-5-1-10, the sub CPU 401 performs a process of determining whether or not the specific mode game number has been reached. Specifically, the sub CPU 401 uses a specific mode game number lottery table (see FIG. 47D) provided in the sub ROM 402 based on the value of the specific mode game number counter provided in the sub RAM 403. A process for determining whether or not a game of the number of games determined in this manner has been performed is performed. And when it is determined that the number of specific mode games has been reached (step S302-3-1-2-5-1-10 = Yes), the process proceeds to step S302-3-1-2-5-1-11. When the process is shifted and it is determined that the number of specific mode games has not been reached (step S302-3-1-25-1-10 = No), step S302-3-1-2-5-1. The process is shifted to -12.

(Step S302-3-1-2-5-11)
In step S <b> 302-3-2-5-1-11, the sub CPU 401 performs a special mode Bonus preparation state transition lottery process. Specifically, the sub CPU 401 is included in the special mode Bonus preparation state transition lottery table (see FIG. 63B) provided in the sub ROM 402 and the condition device command received by the main control board 300. Based on the information related to the winning combination, whether or not to execute the reel lock effect, and whether or not to execute the spinning effect, a process of lottery of whether to shift to the Bonus preparation state is performed. Then, when the process of step S302-3-1-2-5-11 is completed, the process proceeds to step S302-3-2-1-2-5-1-13.

  In the present embodiment, when lottery is performed using the Bonus preparation state transition lottery table for specific mode (see FIG. 63B), it is determined that the transition to the Bonus preparation state is always performed, but this is not limitative. As compared with the normal mode Bonus preparation state transition lottery table (see FIG. 63 (A)), if the lottery value is specified, the transition to the Bonus preparation state is easier. The lottery values in the transfer lottery table can be set as appropriate.

(Step S302-3-2-1-2-5-1-12)
In step S302-3-1-2-5-11, the sub CPU 401 performs a normal mode Bonus preparation state transition lottery process. Specifically, the sub CPU 401 is included in the normal mode Bonus preparation state transition lottery table (see FIG. 63A) provided in the sub ROM 402 and the condition device command received by the main control board 300. Based on the information related to the winning combination, whether or not to execute the reel lock effect, and whether or not to execute the spinning effect, a process of lottery of whether to shift to the Bonus preparation state is performed. Then, when the process of step S302-3-1-2-5-1-12 is completed, the process proceeds to step S302-3-1-2-2-5-1-13.

(Step S302-3-1-2-5-1-13)
In step S <b> 302-3-2-5-1-13, the sub CPU 401 performs a process of determining whether or not the transition to the Bonus preparation state has been won. Specifically, the sub CPU 401 determines the result of lottery by the special mode Bonus preparation state transition lottery process in step S302-3-1-2-5-11 or step S302-3-1-2-5. As a result of the lottery process of the 1-12 normal mode Bonus preparation state transition lottery process, it is determined whether or not it is determined to shift to the Bonus preparation state. If it is determined that the Bonus preparation state transition has been won (step S302-3-2-1-5-1-13 = Yes), the process proceeds to step S302-3-1-2-5-1-14. When it is determined that the process is shifted and the Bonus preparation state shift is not won (step S302-3-1-2-5-1-13 = No), step S302-3-1-2-5 The process proceeds to -1-18.

(Step S302-3-1-2-5-1-14)
In step S <b> 302-3-2-5-1-14, the sub CPU 401 performs a Bonus standby distribution process. Specifically, when it is determined that the sub CPU 401 shifts to the Bonus preparation state as a result of the lottery by the Bonus preparation state transition lottery process for the specific mode in Step S <b> 302-3-2-5-1-11. Includes a bonus state distribution lottery table (specific mode) provided in the sub ROM 402 (see FIG. 64B) and information related to the winning combination included in the condition device command received by the main control board 300. In addition, based on whether the reel lock effect is executed or whether the spinning effect is executed, it is determined whether the first Bonus standby, the second Bonus standby, or the third Bonus standby, and step S302-3. As a result of the lottery process for the normal mode Bonus preparation state shift lottery process of 1-2-2-5-1-12, it is decided to shift to the Bonus preparation state. In the case of being selected, the Bonus state distribution lottery table (normal mode) provided in the sub ROM 402 (see FIG. 64A) and the winning combination included in the condition device command received by the main control board 300 are displayed. The process of determining whether the first Bonus standby, the second Bonus standby, or the third Bonus standby is performed based on the information related to the above, whether the reel lock effect is executed, or whether the rotation effect is executed. Do. Further, the sub CPU 401 performs processing of storing in the Bonus standby information storage area provided in the sub RAM 403 when it is determined that the first Bonus standby, the second Bonus standby, or the third Bonus standby is determined. Then, when the process of step S302-3-1-2-5-1-14 ends, the process proceeds to step S302-3-1-2-5-15-15.

(Step S302-3-1-2-5-1-15)
In step S <b> 302-3-2-5-1-15, the sub CPU 401 performs a normal sign lottery process. Specifically, the sub CPU 401 determines the number of precursor games until the transition to the Bonus preparation state, and performs a process of setting the value of the Bonus precursor game number counter provided in the sub RAM 403. Then, when the process of step S302-3-1-2-5-1-15 ends, the process proceeds to step S302-3-1-2-2-5-1-16.

(Step S302-3-1-2-5-1-16)
In step S <b> 302-3-2-5-1-16, the sub CPU 401 performs a precursor rewriting determination process. Specifically, the sub CPU 401 is a case where the value of the fake type variable storage area provided in the sub RAM 403 is not “0”, and the value of the fake game number counter provided in the sub RAM 403 is “1”. If this is the case, the process of rewriting the fake precursor to the Bonus precursor is performed. Then, when the process of step S302-3-2-1-2-1-16 is completed, the process proceeds to step S302-3-1-2-2-5-1-17.

(Step S302-3-1-2-5-1-17)
In step S <b> 302-3-2-5-1-17, the sub CPU 401 performs a bonus winning process. Specifically, the sub CPU 401 sets the value of the fake type variable storage area provided in the sub RAM 403, the value of the fake game number counter, the value of the first chance precursor state game number counter, the number of second chance precursor state games. Processing is performed to clear the counter value, the third chance precursor state game number counter value, the fourth chance precursor state game number counter value, and the fifth chance precursor state game number counter value. Further, the sub CPU 401 sets the value set in the Bonus precursor game number counter provided in the sub RAM 403 to “0” by the normal precursor lottery process in step S302-3-1-2-5-15. In this case, in the next game, the Bonus preparation state is set in the state storage area provided in the sub RAM 403 so that the state managed by the sub control board 400 becomes the Bonus preparation state, and step S302-3- If the value set in the Bonus precursor game number counter provided in the sub RAM 403 is equal to or greater than “1” by the normal precursor lottery process of 1-2-5-1-15, in the next game, A state provided in the sub-RAM 403 so that the state managed by the control board 400 becomes a Bonus precursor state It performs a process of setting the Bonus aura state paid area. When the process of step S302-3-1-2-5-1-17 ends, the normal state process subroutine ends, and the conditional device command reception process proceeds to step S302-3-1-2-6. Migrate processing.

(Step S302-3-1-2-5-1-18)
In step S302-3-1-25-1-18, the sub CPU 401 performs a second chance state lottery process. Specifically, the sub CPU 401 adds to the second chance state transition lottery table (see FIG. 52A, FIG. 52B, FIG. 52C, and FIG. 52D) provided in the sub ROM 402. On the basis of this, a lottery to determine whether or not to shift to the second chance state is performed. When the lottery is won, the value of the second chance state winning flag storage area provided in the sub RAM 403 is updated, The number of precursor games until the transition to the chance state is determined by lottery, and the determined number of precursor games is set in the fifth chance precursor state game number counter provided in the sub-RAM 403. In the next game, A fifth chance precursor is stored in the next state storage area provided in the sub RAM 403 so that the state managed by the sub-control board 400 becomes the fifth chance precursor. It performs a process to set. Further, when it is determined that the sub CPU 401 shifts to the second chance state in the first chance precursor state or the second chance precursor state, the number of first chance precursor state games provided in the sub RAM 403 is determined. A process of clearing the counter value and the value of the second chance precursor state game number counter is performed. Then, when the process of step S302-3-1-2-5-1-18 ends, the process proceeds to step S302-3-1-2-5-1-19.

(Step S302-3-1-2-5-1-19)
In step S302-3-1-25-1-19, the sub CPU 401 performs a first chance state lottery process. Specifically, the sub CPU 401 performs a lottery to determine whether or not to shift to the first chance state based on the first chance state transition lottery table (see FIG. 51) provided in the sub ROM 402, and determines the lottery. After winning, after updating the value of the first chance state winning flag storage area provided in the sub RAM 403 and performing a lottery to shift to either the third chance precursor state or the fourth chance precursor state The number of precursor games until the transition to the first chance state is determined by lottery, and the determined number of precursor games is the third chance precursor state game number counter provided in the sub-RAM 403 or the fourth chance precursor state game number Performs processing to set the counter. In addition, in the next game, the sub CPU 401 stores the next state storage area provided in the sub RAM 403 so that the state managed by the sub control board 400 becomes the third chance precursor state or the fourth chance precursor state. A process of setting the third chance precursor state or the fourth chance precursor state is performed. Then, when the process of step S302-3-1-2-5-1-19 ends, the process proceeds to step S302-3-1-2-2-5-1-20.

(Step S302-3-1-2-5-1-20)
In step S302-3-1-25-1-20, the sub CPU 401 performs a process of determining whether or not a predetermined condition is satisfied. Specifically, the sub CPU 401 determines that the first chance state winning flag in the first chance state winning flag storage area provided in the sub RAM 403 is OFF and the second chance state winning flag in the second chance state winning flag storage area. Processing is performed to determine whether the flag is OFF and the values of the third chance state stock counter and the fourth chance state stock counter are “0”. If it is determined that the predetermined condition is satisfied (step S302-3-1-2-5-1-20 = Yes), the process proceeds to step S302-3-1-2-2-5-1-21. If it is determined that the predetermined condition is not satisfied (step S302-3-1-2-5-1-20 = No), step S302-3-1-2-5-1 is performed. The process is shifted to -23.

(Step S302-3-1-2-5-1-21)
In step S302-3-1-2-5-1-21, the sub CPU 401 performs ceiling activation processing. Specifically, the sub CPU 401 determines the chance state transition lottery table (when the ceiling is reached) provided in the sub ROM 402 based on the value of the ceiling game number counter provided in the sub RAM 403 being “0”. ) (See FIG. 53A), it is determined by lottery whether to shift to the third chance state or the fourth chance state, and the result of the lottery is the third chance provided in the sub RAM 403. Processing to set the status stock counter or the fourth chance status stock counter is performed. Further, the sub CPU 401 performs a process of setting the first chance precursor state in the next state storage area provided in the sub RAM 403 so that the first chance precursor state is set in the next game. Then, when the process of step S302-3-1-2-5-1-21 is completed, the process proceeds to step S302-3-1-2-2-5-1-22.

(Step S302-3-1-2-5-1-22)
In step S302-3-1-2-2-1-22, the sub CPU 401 performs a fake lottery process. Specifically, the sub CPU 401 performs a process of determining whether or not to perform the fake effect over a plurality of games by lottery, and when it is determined that the fake effect is performed over a plurality of games as a result of the lottery. Then, processing for storing information indicating that it is determined to perform the fake effect over a plurality of games in the fake type variable storage area provided in the sub RAM 403 is performed. Further, when it is determined that the fake effect is performed over a plurality of games, the number of games for which the fake effect is executed is determined by lottery, and the result of the lottery is displayed in the fake game number counter provided in the sub RAM 403. Perform the setting process. Then, when the process of step S302-3-1-2-5-1-22 ends, the process proceeds to step S302-3-1-2-2-5-1-23.

(Step S302-3-1-2-5-1-23)
In step S <b> 302-3-2-5-1-1-23, the sub CPU 401 performs processing for determining whether or not a predetermined condition is satisfied. Specifically, the sub CPU 401 determines that the first chance state winning flag in the first chance state winning flag storage area provided in the sub RAM 403 is OFF and the second chance state winning flag in the second chance state winning flag storage area. Processing is performed to determine whether the flag is OFF and the values of the third chance state stock counter and the fourth chance state stock counter are “0”. If it is determined that the predetermined condition is satisfied (step S302-3-1-2-5-1-23 = Yes), the process proceeds to step S302-3-1-2-5-1-25. If it is determined that the predetermined condition is not satisfied (step S302-3-1-2-5-1-23 = No), step S302-3-1-2-5-1 is performed. The process is shifted to -24.

(Step S302-3-1-2-5-1-24)
In step S302-3-1-2-5-1-24, the sub CPU 401 performs a normal activation process. Specifically, when the first chance state winning flag in the first chance state winning flag storage area provided in the sub RAM 403 is ON, the sub CPU 401 determines the third chance precursor state provided in the sub RAM 403. When the value of the game number counter and the value of the fourth chance precursor state game number counter are “0”, the state managed by the sub-control board 400 becomes the first chance state in the next game. The first chance state is set in the next state storage area provided in the sub RAM 403, and the first chance state winning flag in the first chance state winning flag storage area provided in the sub RAM 403 is turned OFF. The first chance state game number counter provided in the sub RAM 403 It performs a process to set the "7". On the other hand, when the first chance state winning flag in the first chance state winning flag storage area provided in the sub RAM 403 is OFF, the second chance in the second chance state winning flag storage area provided in the sub RAM 403 When the state winning flag is ON, and the value of the fifth chance precursor state game number counter provided in the sub RAM 403 is “0”, the normal state points provided in the sub RAM 403 If the value of the storage area is less than “33”, a process of setting “33” is performed and the second chance state winning flag in the second chance state winning flag storage area provided in the sub RAM 403 is turned OFF. In the next game, the state managed by the sub-control board 400 becomes the second chance state. Sea urchin, a process of setting a second chance state to the next state storage area provided in the sub RAM403 performed. Further, when the first chance state winning flag in the first chance state winning flag storage area provided in the sub RAM 403 is OFF, the second chance in the second chance state winning flag storage area provided in the sub RAM 403. When the state winning flag is OFF and the value of the first chance precursor state game number counter is “0”, or when the value of the second chance precursor state game number counter is “0”, The fourth chance state activation process is performed. Then, when the process of step S302-3-1-2-5-1-24 ends, the process proceeds to step S302-3-1-2-2-5-1-25.

(Step S302-3-2-1-2-5-1-25)
In step S <b> 302-3-2-5-1-25, the sub CPU 401 performs processing for setting the value of the next state storage area in the state storage area. Specifically, the sub CPU 401 performs processing for setting the value of the next state storage area provided in the sub RAM 403 to the value of the state storage area provided in the sub RAM 403. Then, when the process of step S302-3-1-2-5-1-25 ends, the process proceeds to step S302-3-1-2-2-1-26.

(Step S302-3-1-2-2-1-26)
In step S302-3-1-2-5-26, the sub CPU 401 performs processing for clearing the next state storage area. Specifically, the sub CPU 401 performs processing for clearing the value of the next state storage area provided in the sub RAM 403. When the processing of step S302-3-1-2-2-1-26 is completed, the normal state processing subroutine is terminated, and the conditional device command reception processing is advanced to step S302-3-1-2-6. Migrate processing.

(Process for the first chance precursor state)
Next, based on FIG. 119, in the state-by-state transition processing in step S302-3-1-2-5 in FIG. 117, the first process performed when the state managed by the sub-control board 400 is the first chance precursor state. The 1-chance precursory state process will be described. FIG. 119 is a diagram illustrating a subroutine of the first chance sign state processing.

(Step S302-3-1-2-5-2-1)
In step S302-3-1-2-5-2-1, the sub CPU 401 performs ceiling subtraction processing. Specifically, the sub CPU 401 performs a process of subtracting “1” from the value of the ceiling game number counter provided in the sub RAM 403. Then, when the process of step S302-3-1-2-2-2-1 ends, the process proceeds to step S302-3-1-2-2-2.

(Step S302-3-1-2-2-2-2)
In step S <b> 302-3-1-2-5-2-2, the sub CPU 401 performs a process of determining whether or not the winning number is “05”. Specifically, the sub CPU 401 performs a process of determining whether or not the information related to the winning combination included in the conditional device command received from the main control board 300 is the winning number “05”. If it is determined that the winning number is “05” (step S302-3-1-2-2-2 = Yes), step S302-3-1-2-5-2-3 If it is determined that the winning number is not “05” (step S302-3-1-2-5-2-2 = No), step S302-3-1-2-5 is performed. The process is transferred to -2-4.

(Step S302-3-1-2-2-5-2)
In step S302-3-1-2-5-2-3, the sub CPU 401 performs a direct hit winning process. Specifically, the sub CPU 401 (a) updates the Bonus winning opportunity storage area provided in the sub RAM 403, (b) the third chance state game number counter provided in the sub RAM 403, A process of clearing the 4-chance state game number counter, etc., (c) an ART initial hit process described later, and (d) a Bonus winning process described later are performed. When the process of step S302-3-1-2-5-2-3 is finished, the subroutine for the first chance precursor state process is finished, and step S302-3-1-2 of the conditional device command reception process is finished. The process is shifted to -6.

(Step S302-3-1-2-5-2-4)
In step S302-3-1-2-5-2-4, the sub CPU 401 performs a process of determining whether or not the value of the first chance precursor state game number counter is “0”. Specifically, the sub CPU 401 performs a process of determining whether or not the value of the first chance precursor state game number counter provided in the sub RAM 403 is “0”. If it is determined that the value of the first chance precursor state game number counter is “0” (step S302-3-1-2-2-4 = Yes), step S302-3-1 is performed. The process proceeds to -2-5-2-5, and when it is determined that the value of the first chance precursor state game number counter is not “0” (step S302-3-1-2-2-5-2). -4 = No), the process proceeds to step S302-3-1-2-5-2-6.

(Step S302-3-1-2-2-5-2-5)
In step S302-3-1-2-5-2-5, the sub CPU 401 performs a process of subtracting “1” from the value of the second chance precursor game number counter. Specifically, the sub CPU 401 performs a process of subtracting “1” from the value of the second chance precursor game number counter provided in the sub RAM 403. Then, when the process of step S302-3-1-2-5-2-5 ends, the process proceeds to step S302-3-1-2-5-2-7.

(Step S302-3-1-2-2-5-6)
In step S302-3-1-2-5-2-6, the sub CPU 401 performs a process of subtracting “1” from the value of the first chance predictor game number counter. Specifically, the sub CPU 401 performs a process of subtracting “1” from the value of the first chance precursor game number counter provided in the sub RAM 403. Then, when the process of step S302-3-1-2-2-5-6 ends, the process proceeds to step S302-3-1-2-2-7.

(Step S302-3-1-2-5-2-7)
In step S302-3-1-2-5-2-7, the sub CPU 401 performs normal point related processing. Specifically, the sub CPU 401 determines the normal state point acquisition lottery table provided in the sub ROM 402 based on the value of the Bonus game number counter provided in the sub RAM 403 (FIGS. 49A and 49). (B), FIG. 49C, FIG. 49D, and FIG. 49E), and the selected normal state point acquisition lottery table and the condition device command received from the main control board 300 Based on the information related to the winning combination included in the game, the lottery process is performed to determine whether or not to acquire the normal state point, and when the lottery is won, the normal state provided in the sub RAM 403 is used. Adds the winning value to the point storage area. Then, when the process of step S302-3-1-2-2-7 ends, the process proceeds to step S302-3-1-2-2-8.

(Step S302-3-1-2-5-2-8)
In step S302-3-1-2-5-2-8, the sub CPU 401 performs a normal mode Bonus preparation state transition lottery process. Specifically, the sub CPU 401 performs lottery processing based on a normal mode Bonus preparation state transition lottery table (see FIG. 63A) provided in the sub ROM 402 to determine whether or not to enter the Bonus preparation state. I do. Then, when the process of step S302-3-1-2-5-2-8 ends, the process proceeds to step S302-3-1-2-5-2-9.

(Step S302-3-1-2-5-2-9)
In step S <b> 302-3-1-2-5-2-9, the sub CPU 401 performs processing for determining whether or not the Bonus preparation state transition is won. Specifically, whether or not the sub CPU 401 has determined to shift to the Bonus preparation state as a result of the lottery by the normal mode Bonus preparation state transition lottery process in Step S302-3-1-2-5-2-8. The process which determines is performed. If it is determined that the Bonus preparation state transition is won (step S302-3-1-2-5-2-9 = Yes), the process proceeds to step S302-3-1-2-5-2-10. When it is determined that the process is shifted and the Bonus preparation state shift is not won (step S302-3-1-2-5-2-9 = No), step S302-3-1-2-5 The process is transferred to -2-14.

(Step S302-3-1-2-5-2-10)
In step S302-3-1-2-5-2-10, the sub CPU 401 performs a Bonus standby distribution process. Specifically, when the sub CPU 401 determines to shift to the Bonus preparation state as a result of the lottery by the normal mode Bonus preparation state transition lottery process in Step S302-3-1-2-2-5-2-9. Based on the Bonus state distribution lottery table (normal mode) (see FIG. 64A) provided in the sub-ROM 402, whether the first Bonus standby, the second Bonus standby, or the third Bonus standby is set. Perform the decision process. Further, the sub CPU 401 performs processing of storing in the Bonus standby information storage area provided in the sub RAM 403 when it is determined that the first Bonus standby, the second Bonus standby, or the third Bonus standby is determined. Then, when the process of step S302-3-1-2-5-2-10 is completed, the process proceeds to step S302-3-1-2-5-2-11.

(Step S302-3-1-2-2-2-11)
In step S302-3-1-2-5-2-11, the sub CPU 401 performs a normal sign lottery process. Specifically, the sub CPU 401 determines the number of precursor games until the transition to the Bonus preparation state, and performs a process of setting the value of the Bonus precursor game number counter provided in the sub RAM 403. Then, when the process of step S302-3-1-2-5-2-11 ends, the process proceeds to step S302-3-1-2-5-2-12.

(Step S302-3-1-2-5-2-12)
In step S302-3-1-2-5-2-12, the sub CPU 401 performs a precursor rewriting determination process. Specifically, the sub CPU 401 is a case where the value of the fake type variable storage area provided in the sub RAM 403 is not “0”, and the value of the fake game number counter provided in the sub RAM 403 is “1”. If this is the case, the process of rewriting the fake precursor to the Bonus precursor is performed. Then, when the process of step S302-3-1-2-2-2-12 ends, the process proceeds to step S302-3-1-2-2-13.

(Step S302-3-1-2-5-2-13)
In step S302-3-1-2-5-2-13, the sub CPU 401 performs a Bonus winning process. Specifically, the sub CPU 401 sets the value of the fake type variable storage area provided in the sub RAM 403, the value of the fake game number counter, the value of the first chance precursor state game number counter, the number of second chance precursor state games. Processing is performed to clear the counter value, the third chance precursor state game number counter value, the fourth chance precursor state game number counter value, and the fifth chance precursor state game number counter value. Further, the sub CPU 401 sets “0” to the value set in the Bonus precursor game number counter provided in the sub RAM 403 by the normal precursor lottery process in step S302-3-1-2-5-2-11. In this case, in the next game, the Bonus preparation state is set in the state storage area provided in the sub RAM 403 so that the state managed by the sub control board 400 becomes the Bonus preparation state, and step S302-3- If the value set in the Bonus precursor game number counter provided in the sub RAM 403 is “1” or more by the normal precursor lottery process of 1-2-5-2-11, A state provided in the sub-RAM 403 so that the state managed by the control board 400 becomes a Bonus precursor state It performs a process of setting the Bonus aura state paid area. When the process of step S302-3-1-2-5-2-13 ends, the subroutine for the first chance precursor state process ends, and step S302-3-1-2 of the conditional device command reception process ends. The process is shifted to -6.

(Step S302-3-1-2-5-2-14)
In step S302-3-1-2-5-2-14, the sub CPU 401 determines whether the value of the first chance precursor state game number counter and the value of the second chance precursor state game number counter are “0”. The process which determines is performed. Specifically, the sub CPU 401 has a value of a first chance precursor state game number counter provided in the sub RAM 403 of “0” and a second chance precursor state game number counter provided in the sub RAM 403. To determine whether or not the value of “0” is “0”. If it is determined that the value of the first chance precursor state game number counter and the value of the second chance precursor state game number counter are “0” (step S302-3-1-2-2-5-2). −14 = Yes), the process proceeds to step S302-3-1-2-5-2-15, and the value of the first chance precursor state game number counter and the value of the second chance precursor state game number counter are “ If it is determined that it is not “0” (step S302-3-1-2-2-14 = No), the first chance precursor state processing subroutine is terminated, and the conditional device command reception processing is terminated. The process proceeds to step S302-3-1-2-6.

(Step S302-3-1-2-5-2-15)
In step S302-3-1-2-5-2-15, the sub CPU 401 performs a process of determining whether or not the precursor extension flag is OFF. Specifically, the sub CPU 401 performs processing for determining whether or not the precursor extension flag is OFF based on the value of the precursor extension flag storage area provided in the sub RAM 403. If it is determined that the sign extension flag is OFF (step S302-3-1-2-5-2-15 = Yes), the process proceeds to step S302-3-1-2-5-2-16. When the process is shifted and it is determined that the prognostic extension flag is not OFF (step S302-3-1-2-2-15 = No), step S302-3-1-2-5-2 The process is shifted to -17.

(Step S302-3-1-2-5-2-16)
In step S302-3-1-2-2-16, the sub CPU 401 performs third / fourth chance state activation processing. Specifically, when the sub CPU 401 shifts the state managed by the sub control board 400 to the third chance state, the sub CPU 401 changes the state managed by the sub control board 400 in the next game. The third chance state stock counter provided in the sub RAM 403 is processed so as to set the third chance state in the state storage area provided in the sub RAM 403 so that the state managed by. In addition to performing a process of subtracting “1” from this value, a lottery is performed based on the third chance state game number lottery table (see FIG. 61A), and the lottery result is provided in the sub-RAM 403. A process of setting the chance state game number counter is performed. On the other hand, when the state managed by the sub control board 400 is shifted to the fourth chance state, the state managed by the sub control board 400 is changed to the state managed by the sub control board 400 in the next game. The fourth chance state is set in the state storage area provided in the sub RAM 403 so that the four chance state is obtained, and “1” is subtracted from the value of the fourth chance state stock counter provided in the sub RAM 403. The lottery is performed based on the fourth chance state game number lottery table (see FIG. 62A), and the lottery result is set in the fourth chance state game number counter provided in the sub RAM 403. Perform the process. When the process of step S302-3-1-2-5-2-16 ends, the subroutine for the first chance precursor state process ends, and step S302-3-1-2 of the conditional device command reception process ends. The process is shifted to -6.

  The sub CPU 401 performs lottery based on the fourth chance state game number lottery table (see FIG. 62A) in the third and fourth chance state activation processing, and the lottery result is provided in the sub RAM 403. When the process for setting the fourth chance state game number counter is performed, the value of the fourth chance state set number counter provided in the sub RAM 403 is set. Specifically, the sub CPU 401 performs the lottery based on the fourth chance state game number lottery table (see FIG. 62A), and as a result, the number of games that can be played in the fourth chance state is “10” games. Is determined, the value of the fourth chance state set number counter provided in the sub RAM 403 is set to “1”, and “20” games are set as the number of games that can be played in the fourth chance state. Is determined, the value of the fourth chance state set number counter provided in the sub RAM 403 is set to “2”, and “infinity” is set as the number of games that can be played in the fourth chance state. If determined, a process of setting “3” to the value of the fourth chance state set number counter provided in the sub-RAM 403 is performed.

(Step S302-3-1-2-5-2-17)
In step S302-3-1-2-5-2-17, the sub CPU 401 performs a specific trigger sign lottery process. Specifically, the sub CPU 401 performs a process of determining a precursor scenario by lottery and storing it in a precursor scenario number storage area provided in the sub RAM 403. In addition, when a value other than “0” is stored in the precursor scenario number storage area provided in the sub RAM 403, the sub CPU 401 determines the number of precursor games by lottery, and the sub CPU 403 is provided in the sub RAM 403. A process of setting the one-chance precursory state game number counter is performed. Further, the sub CPU 401 performs a process of turning on the precursor extension flag in the precursor extension flag storage area provided in the sub RAM 403. Then, when the process of step S302-3-1-2-2-17 ends, the process proceeds to step S302-3-1-2-2-18.

(Step S302-3-1-2-2-5-218)
In step S302-3-1-2-5-2-18, the sub CPU 401 performs a first chance precursor state game number counter setting process. Specifically, the sub CPU 401 adds “1” to the number of precursor games determined by the specific trigger time precursor lottery process, and sets the value of the first chance precursor state game number counter provided in the sub RAM 403 to “ 1 ”Addition processing is performed. Then, when the process of step S302-3-1-2-2-18 is completed, the process proceeds to step S302-3-1-2-2-2-19.

(Step S302-3-1-2-5-2-19)
In step S302-3-1-2-5-2-19, the sub CPU 401 performs processing for turning off the precursor extension flag. Specifically, the sub CPU 401 performs processing for turning off the precursor extension flag in the precursor extension flag storage area provided in the sub RAM 403. Then, when the process of step S302-3-1-2-5-2-19 ends, the process proceeds to step S302-3-1-2-2-20.

(Step S302-3-1-2-5-2-20)
In step S302-3-1-2-5-2-20, in the next game, the sub CPU 401 performs a process of setting the state managed by the sub control board 400 to the first chance precursor state. Specifically, in the next game, the sub CPU 401 stores the first chance precursor state in the state storage area provided in the sub RAM 403 so that the state managed by the sub control board 400 becomes the first chance precursor state. Perform processing to set. When the process of step S302-3-1-2-5-2-20 ends, the subroutine for the first chance precursor state process ends, and step S302-3-1-2 of the conditional device command reception process ends. The process is shifted to -6.

(Process for the second chance precursor state)
Next, based on FIG. 120, in the state-by-state transition processing in step S302-3-1-2-5 in FIG. 117, the second control is performed when the state managed by the sub-control board 400 is the second chance precursor state. The process for the 2-chance precursory state will be described. FIG. 120 is a diagram showing a subroutine of the second chance precursor state processing.

(Step S302-3-1-2-5-3-1)
In step S302-3-1-2-5-3-1, the sub CPU 401 performs ceiling subtraction processing. Specifically, the sub CPU 401 performs a process of subtracting “1” from the value of the ceiling game number counter provided in the sub RAM 403. Then, when the process of step S302-3-1-2-5-3-1 is completed, the process proceeds to step S302-3-1-2-5-3-2.

(Step S302-3-1-2-5-3-2)
In step S302-3-1-2-5-3-2, the sub CPU 401 determines whether or not the winning number is “05”. Specifically, the sub CPU 401 performs a process of determining whether or not the information related to the winning combination included in the conditional device command received from the main control board 300 is the winning number “05”. If it is determined that the winning number is “05” (step S302-3-1-2-5-3-2 = Yes), step S302-3-1-2-5-3-3 is performed. If it is determined that the winning number is not “05” (step S302-3-1-2-5-3-2 = No), step S302-3-1-2-5 is performed. The process is transferred to -3-4.

(Step S302-3-1-2-5-3-3)
In step S302-3-1-2-5-3-3, the sub CPU 401 performs a direct hit winning process. Specifically, the sub CPU 401 (a) updates the Bonus winning opportunity storage area provided in the sub RAM 403, (b) the third chance state game number counter provided in the sub RAM 403, A process of clearing the 4-chance state game number counter, etc., (c) an ART initial hit process described later, and (d) a Bonus winning process described later are performed. When the process of step S302-3-1-2-5-3-3 ends, the subroutine for the second chance precursor state process ends, and step S302-3-1-2 of the condition device command reception process ends. The process is shifted to -6.

(Step S302-3-1-2-5-3-4)
In step S302-3-1-2-5-3-4, the sub CPU 401 performs a process of determining whether or not the value of the first chance precursor state game number counter is “0”. Specifically, the sub CPU 401 performs a process of determining whether or not the value of the first chance precursor state game number counter provided in the sub RAM 403 is “0”. If it is determined that the value of the first chance precursor state game number counter is “0” (step S302-3-1-2-5-3-4 = Yes), step S302-3-1 is performed. When the process proceeds to -2-5-3-5 and it is determined that the value of the first chance precursor state game number counter is not “0” (step S302-3-1-2-5-3) -4 = No), the process proceeds to step S302-3-1-2-5-3-6.

(Step S302-3-1-2-5-3-5)
In step S302-3-1-2-5-3-5, the sub CPU 401 performs a process of subtracting “1” from the value of the second chance precursor game number counter. Specifically, the sub CPU 401 performs a process of subtracting “1” from the value of the second chance precursor game number counter provided in the sub RAM 403. Then, when the process of step S302-3-1-2-5-3-5 ends, the process proceeds to step S302-3-1-2-5-3-7.

(Step S302-3-1-2-5-3-6)
In step S302-3-1-2-5-3-6, the sub CPU 401 performs a process of subtracting “1” from the value of the first chance precursor game number counter. Specifically, the sub CPU 401 performs a process of subtracting “1” from the value of the first chance precursor game number counter provided in the sub RAM 403. Then, when the process of step S302-3-1-2-5-3-6 ends, the process proceeds to step S302-3-1-2-5-3-7.

(Step S302-3-1-2-5-3-7)
In step S302-3-1-2-5-3-7, the sub CPU 401 performs normal point related processing. Specifically, the sub CPU 401 determines the normal state point acquisition lottery table provided in the sub ROM 402 based on the value of the Bonus game number counter provided in the sub RAM 403 (FIGS. 49A and 49). (B), FIG. 49C, FIG. 49D, and FIG. 49E), and the selected normal state point acquisition lottery table and the condition device command received from the main control board 300 Based on the information related to the winning combination included in the game, the lottery process is performed to determine whether or not to acquire the normal state point, and when the lottery is won, the normal state provided in the sub RAM 403 is used. Adds the winning value to the point storage area. Then, when the process of step S302-3-1-2-5-3-7 ends, the process proceeds to step S302-3-1-2-5-3-8.

(Step S302-3-1-2-5-3-8)
In step S302-3-1-2-5-3-8, the sub CPU 401 performs a normal mode Bonus preparation state transition lottery process. Specifically, the sub CPU 401 performs lottery processing based on a normal mode Bonus preparation state transition lottery table (see FIG. 63A) provided in the sub ROM 402 to determine whether or not to enter the Bonus preparation state. I do. Then, when the process of step S302-3-1-2-5-3-8 ends, the process proceeds to step S302-3-1-2-5-3-9.

(Step S302-3-1-2-5-3-9)
In step S302-3-1-2-5-3-9, the sub CPU 401 performs processing for determining whether or not the Bonus preparation state transition is won. Specifically, whether or not the sub CPU 401 has determined to shift to the Bonus preparation state as a result of the lottery by the normal mode Bonus preparation state transition lottery process in Step S302-3-1-2-5-3-8. The process which determines is performed. When it is determined that the Bonus preparation state transition is won (step S302-3-1-2-5-3-9 = Yes), the process proceeds to step S302-3-1-2-5-3-10. When it is determined that the process has been transferred and the Bonus preparation state transfer has not been won (step S302-3-1-2-5-3-9 = No), step S302-3-1-2-5 The process is shifted to -3-14.

(Step S302-3-1-2-5-3-10)
In step S302-3-1-2-5-3-10, the sub CPU 401 performs a Bonus standby distribution process. Specifically, when the sub CPU 401 determines to shift to the Bonus preparation state as a result of the lottery by the normal mode Bonus preparation state transition lottery process in Step S302-3-1-2-5-3-9. Based on the Bonus state distribution lottery table (normal mode) (see FIG. 64A) provided in the sub-ROM 402, whether the first Bonus standby, the second Bonus standby, or the third Bonus standby is set. Perform the decision process. Further, the sub CPU 401 performs processing of storing in the Bonus standby information storage area provided in the sub RAM 403 when it is determined that the first Bonus standby, the second Bonus standby, or the third Bonus standby is determined. Then, when the process of step S302-3-1-2-5-3-10 ends, the process proceeds to step S302-3-1-2-5-3-11.

(Step S302-3-1-2-5-3-11)
In step S302-3-1-2-5-3-11, the sub CPU 401 performs a normal sign lottery process. Specifically, the sub CPU 401 determines the number of precursor games until the transition to the Bonus preparation state, and performs a process of setting the value of the Bonus precursor game number counter provided in the sub RAM 403. Then, when the process of step S302-3-1-2-5-3-11 ends, the process proceeds to step S302-3-1-2-5-3-12.

(Step S302-3-1-2-5-3-12)
In step S302-3-1-2-5-3-12, the sub CPU 401 performs a precursor rewriting determination process. Specifically, the sub CPU 401 is a case where the value of the fake type variable storage area provided in the sub RAM 403 is not “0”, and the value of the fake game number counter provided in the sub RAM 403 is “1”. If this is the case, the process of rewriting the fake precursor to the Bonus precursor is performed. Then, when the process of step S302-3-1-2-5-3-12 ends, the process proceeds to step S302-3-1-2-5-3-13.

(Step S302-3-1-2-5-3-13)
In step S302-3-1-2-5-3-13, the sub CPU 401 performs a Bonus winning process. Specifically, the sub CPU 401 sets the value of the fake type variable storage area provided in the sub RAM 403, the value of the fake game number counter, the value of the first chance precursor state game number counter, the number of second chance precursor state games. Processing is performed to clear the counter value, the third chance precursor state game number counter value, the fourth chance precursor state game number counter value, and the fifth chance precursor state game number counter value. In addition, the value set in the Bonus precursor game number counter provided in the sub RAM 403 is “0” in the sub CPU 401 by the normal precursor lottery process in step S302-3-1-2-5-3-11. In this case, in the next game, the Bonus preparation state is set in the state storage area provided in the sub RAM 403 so that the state managed by the sub control board 400 becomes the Bonus preparation state, and step S302-3- If the value set in the Bonus precursor game number counter provided in the sub RAM 403 is “1” or more by the normal precursor lottery process of 1-2-5-2-11, A state provided in the sub-RAM 403 so that the state managed by the control board 400 becomes a Bonus precursor state It performs a process of setting the Bonus aura state paid area. When the process of step S302-3-1-2-5-3-13 ends, the subroutine for the second chance precursor state process ends, and step S302-3-1-2 of the condition device command reception process ends. The process is shifted to -6.

(Step S302-3-1-2-5-3-14)
In step S302-3-1-2-5-3-14, the sub CPU 401 determines whether the value of the first chance precursor state game number counter and the value of the second chance precursor state game number counter are “0”. The process which determines is performed. Specifically, the sub CPU 401 has a value of a first chance precursor state game number counter provided in the sub RAM 403 of “0” and a second chance precursor state game number counter provided in the sub RAM 403. To determine whether or not the value of “0” is “0”. When it is determined that the value of the first chance precursor state game number counter and the value of the second chance precursor state game number counter are “0” (step S302-3-1-2-5-3). −14 = Yes), the process proceeds to step S302-3-1-2-5-3-15, and the value of the first chance precursor state game number counter and the value of the second chance precursor state game number counter are “ If it is determined that it is not “0” (step S302-3-1-2-5-3-14 = No), the first chance precursor state processing subroutine is terminated, and the conditional device command reception processing is terminated. The processing moves to step S302-3-3-1-3-6.

(Step S302-3-1-2-5-3-15)
In step S302-3-1-2-5-3-15, the sub CPU 401 performs processing to determine whether or not the prognostic extension flag is OFF. Specifically, the sub CPU 401 performs processing for determining whether or not the precursor extension flag is OFF based on the value of the precursor extension flag storage area provided in the sub RAM 403. If it is determined that the sign extension flag is OFF (step S302-3-1-2-5-3-15 = Yes), the process proceeds to step S302-3-1-2-5-3-16. When the processing is shifted and it is determined that the precursor extension flag is not OFF (step S302-3-1-2-5-3-15 = No), step S302-3-1-2-5-3 The process is shifted to -17.

(Step S302-3-1-2-5-3-16)
In step S302-3-1-2-5-3-16, the sub CPU 401 performs third and fourth chance state activation processing. Specifically, when the sub CPU 401 shifts the state managed by the sub control board 400 to the third chance state, the sub CPU 401 changes the state managed by the sub control board 400 in the next game. The third chance state stock counter provided in the sub RAM 403 is processed so as to set the third chance state in the state storage area provided in the sub RAM 403 so that the state managed by. In addition to performing a process of subtracting “1” from this value, a lottery is performed based on the third chance state game number lottery table (see FIG. 61A), and the lottery result is provided in the sub-RAM 403. A process of setting the chance state game number counter is performed. On the other hand, when the state managed by the sub control board 400 is shifted to the fourth chance state, the state managed by the sub control board 400 is changed to the state managed by the sub control board 400 in the next game. The fourth chance state is set in the state storage area provided in the sub RAM 403 so that the four chance state is obtained, and “1” is subtracted from the value of the fourth chance state stock counter provided in the sub RAM 403. The lottery is performed based on the fourth chance state game number lottery table (see FIG. 62A), and the lottery result is set in the fourth chance state game number counter provided in the sub RAM 403. Perform the process. When the process of step S302-3-1-2-5-3-16 ends, the subroutine for the second chance precursor state process ends, and step S302-3-1-2 of the conditional device command reception process ends. The process is shifted to -6.

(Step S302-3-1-2-5-3-17)
In step S302-3-1-2-5-3-17, the sub CPU 401 performs a specific trigger sign lottery process. Specifically, the sub CPU 401 performs a process of determining a precursor scenario by lottery and storing it in a precursor scenario number storage area provided in the sub RAM 403. In addition, when a value other than “0” is stored in the precursor scenario number storage area provided in the sub RAM 403, the sub CPU 401 determines the number of precursor games by lottery, and the sub CPU 403 is provided in the sub RAM 403. A process of setting the one-chance precursory state game number counter is performed. Further, the sub CPU 401 performs a process of turning on the precursor extension flag in the precursor extension flag storage area provided in the sub RAM 403. Then, when the process of step S302-3-1-2-5-3-17 ends, the process proceeds to step S302-3-1-2-5-3-18.

(Step S302-3-1-2-5-3-18)
In step S302-3-1-2-5-3-18, the sub CPU 401 performs a second chance precursor state game number counter setting process. Specifically, the sub CPU 401 adds “1” to the number of precursor games determined by the specific opportunity time precursor lottery process, and sets the value of the second chance precursor state game number counter provided in the sub RAM 403 to “ 1 ”Addition processing is performed. Then, when the process of step S302-3-1-2-5-3-18 ends, the process proceeds to step S302-3-1-2-5-3-19.

(Step S302-3-1-2-5-3-19)
In step S302-3-1-2-5-3-19, the sub CPU 401 performs processing for turning off the precursor extension flag. Specifically, the sub CPU 401 performs processing for turning off the precursor extension flag in the precursor extension flag storage area provided in the sub RAM 403. Then, when the process of step S302-3-1-2-5-3-19 ends, the process proceeds to step S302-3-1-2-5-3-20.

(Step S302-3-1-2-5-3-20)
In step S302-3-1-2-5-3-20, in the next game, the sub CPU 401 performs a process of setting the state managed by the sub control board 400 to the second chance precursor state. Specifically, in the next game, the sub CPU 401 stores the second chance precursor state in the state storage area provided in the sub RAM 403 so that the state managed by the sub control board 400 becomes the second chance precursor state. Perform processing to set. When the process of step S302-3-1-2-5-3-20 ends, the subroutine for the second chance precursor state process ends, and step S302-3-1-2 of the condition device command reception process ends. The process is shifted to -6.

  In the present embodiment, as described above, the state managed by the sub control board 400 is the first chance precursor state and the state managed by the sub control board 400 is the second chance precursor state. The same processing is to be performed. Therefore, when the state managed by the sub control board 400 is the first chance precursor state, or when the state managed by the sub control board 400 is the second chance precursor state, the processing shown in FIG. 119 or FIG. If the processing shown in FIG. 4 is performed, the capacity of the sub ROM 402 can be reduced. At this time, by sharing the first chance precursor state game number counter and the second chance precursor state game number counter provided in the sub RAM 403, the sub RAM 403 is compared with the sub RAM 403 of the present embodiment. It can also be set as a simple structure.

(Process for the third chance precursor state)
Next, based on FIG. 121, in the state-by-state transition processing in step S302-3-1-2-5 in FIG. The process for the 3-chance precursory state will be described. FIG. 121 is a diagram showing a subroutine for the third chance precursor state process.

(Step S302-3-1-2-5-4-1)
In step S302-3-1-2-5-4-1, the sub CPU 401 performs ceiling subtraction processing. Specifically, the sub CPU 401 performs a process of subtracting “1” from the value of the ceiling game number counter provided in the sub RAM 403. Then, when the process of step S302-3-1-2-5-4-1 ends, the process proceeds to step S302-3-1-2-2-4-2.

(Step S302-3-1-2-5-4-2)
In step S302-3-1-2-2-4-2, the sub CPU 401 performs a normal counter subtraction process. Specifically, when the value of the Bonus omen game number counter provided in the sub RAM 403 is “1” or more, the sub CPU 401 determines the value of the Bonus omen game number counter provided in the sub RAM 403. The process of subtracting “1” from the value, or (b) the value of the fake game number counter provided in the sub RAM 403 when the value of the fake game number counter provided in the sub RAM 403 is “1” or more. The process of subtracting “1” from is performed. Then, when the process of step S302-3-1-2-5-4-2 ends, the process proceeds to step S302-3-1-2-5-4-3.

(Step S302-3-1-2-5-4-3)
In step S302-3-1-2-5-4-3, the sub CPU 401 performs processing to determine whether or not the winning number is “05”. Specifically, the sub CPU 401 performs a process of determining whether or not the information related to the winning combination included in the conditional device command received from the main control board 300 is the winning number “05”. If it is determined that the winning number is “05” (step S302-3-1-2-5-4-3 = Yes), step S302-3-1-2-5-4-4 is performed. If it is determined that the winning number is not “05” (step S302-3-1-2-5-4-3 = No), step S302-3-1-2-5 is performed. The process is shifted to -4--5.

(Step S302-3-1-2-5-4-4)
In step S302-3-1-2-5-4-4, the sub CPU 401 performs a direct hit winning process. Specifically, the sub CPU 401 (a) updates the Bonus winning opportunity storage area provided in the sub RAM 403, (b) the third chance state game number counter provided in the sub RAM 403, A process of clearing the 4-chance state game number counter, etc., (c) an ART initial hit process described later, and (d) a Bonus winning process described later are performed. When the process of step S302-3-1-2-5-4-4 ends, the third chance precursor state processing subroutine ends, and step S302-3-1-2 of the conditional device command reception process ends. The process is shifted to -6.

(Step S302-3-1-2-5-4-5)
In step S <b> 302-3-1-2-5-4-5, the sub CPU 401 performs processing for determining whether or not the winning number is “20” to “30”. Specifically, the sub CPU 401 determines whether or not the information related to the winning combination included in the conditional device command received from the main control board 300 is any of the winning numbers “20” to “30”. Perform the process. If it is determined that the winning number is any one of “20” to “30” (step S302-3-1-2-5-4-5 = Yes), step S302-3-1-1 If the process shifts to 2-5-4-6 and it is determined that the winning number is not “20” to “30” (step S302-3-1-2-5-4-5) = No), the process proceeds to step S302-3-1-2-5-4-11.

(Step S302-3-1-2-5-4-6)
In step S302-3-1-2-5-4-6, the sub CPU 401 performs processing for setting the value of the state storage area in the next state storage area. Specifically, the sub CPU 401 performs processing for setting the value of the state storage area provided in the sub RAM 403 in the next state storage area provided in the sub RAM 403. Then, when the process of step S302-3-1-2-5-4-6 ends, the process proceeds to step S302-3-1-2-5-4-7.

(Step S302-3-1-2-5-4-7)
In step S302-3-1-2-5-4-7, the sub CPU 401 performs a specific role ceiling determination process. Specifically, the sub CPU 401 determines that the information related to the winning combination included in the conditional device command received from the main control board 300 is any one of the winning numbers “20” to “30”. The process of adding “1” to the value of the specified combination winning number counter provided in the sub RAM 403 is performed, and the value of the specified combination winning number counter provided in the sub RAM 403 reaches a predetermined number. In the next game, the state managed by the sub-control board 400 becomes the first chance precursor state in the next state storage area provided in the sub-RAM 403 so that the state managed by the sub-control board 400 becomes the first chance precursor state. Perform processing to set. Further, the sub CPU 401 determines whether to shift to the third chance state or the fourth chance state by lottery, and based on the result of the lottery, the sub CPU 401 sets the third chance state stock counter provided in the sub RAM 403. A process of adding “1” to the value or the value of the fourth chance state stock counter is performed. Then, when the process of step S302-3-1-2-5-4-7 ends, the process proceeds to step S302-3-1-2-5-4-8.

(Step S302-3-1-2-5-4-8)
In step S302-3-1-2-5-4-8, the sub CPU 401 determines whether the value of the third chance state stock counter or the value of the fourth chance state stock counter is “1” or more. Processing to determine is performed. Specifically, whether the value of the third chance state stock counter provided in the sub RAM 403 or the value of the fourth chance state stock counter provided in the sub RAM 403 is “1” or more. Processing to determine whether or not. When it is determined that the value of the third chance state stock counter or the value of the fourth chance state stock counter is “1” or more (step S302-3-1-2-5-4-8). = Yes), the process proceeds to step S302-3-1-2-5-4-9, and the value of the third chance state stock counter or the value of the fourth chance state stock counter is not “1” or more. Is determined (step S302-3-1-2-5-4-8 = No), the process proceeds to step S302-3-1-2-5-4-11.

(Step S302-3-1-2-5-4-9)
In step S <b> 302-3-2-5-4-9, the sub CPU 401 performs a process of setting “0” to the value of the first chance precursor state game number counter. Specifically, the sub CPU 401 performs a process of setting “0” to the value of the first chance precursor state game number counter provided in the sub RAM 403. Then, when the process of step S302-3-1-2-5-4-9 ends, the process proceeds to step S302-3-1-2-5-4-10.

(Step S302-3-1-2-5-4-10)
In step S302-3-1-2-5-4-10, the sub CPU 401 performs processing for setting the next state storage area to the value of the state storage area. Specifically, the sub CPU 401 performs a process of setting the value stored in the next state storage area provided in the sub RAM 403 to the value of the state storage area provided in the sub RAM 403. Then, when the process of step S302-3-1-2-5-4-10 ends, the process proceeds to step S302-3-1-2-5-4-11.

  In the processing of step S302-3-1-2-5-4-10, the sub CPU 401 stores the value stored in the next state storage area provided in the sub RAM 403 in the sub RAM 403. After setting the value in the state storage area provided, the value stored in the next state storage area provided in the sub-RAM 403 is cleared.

(Step S302-3-1-2-5-4-11)
In step S302-3-1-2-5-4-11, the sub CPU 401 performs third / fourth chance sign state game number counter subtraction processing. Specifically, the sub CPU 401 determines that the value of the third chance precursor state game number counter provided in the sub RAM 403 or the value of the fourth chance precursor state game number counter provided in the sub RAM 403 is “1” or more. In this case, a process of subtracting “1” from the value of the third chance precursor state game number counter provided in the sub RAM 403 or the value of the fourth chance precursor state game number counter provided in the sub RAM 403 is performed. Do. Then, when the process of step S302-3-1-2-5-4-11 ends, the process proceeds to step S302-3-1-2-5-4-12.

(Step S302-3-1-2-5-4-12)
In step S302-3-1-2-5-4-12, the sub CPU 401 performs normal point related processing. Specifically, the sub CPU 401 determines the normal state point acquisition lottery table provided in the sub ROM 402 based on the value of the Bonus game number counter provided in the sub RAM 403 (FIGS. 49A and 49). (B), FIG. 49C, FIG. 49D, and FIG. 49E), and the selected normal state point acquisition lottery table and the condition device command received from the main control board 300 Based on the information related to the winning combination included in the game, the lottery process is performed to determine whether or not to acquire the normal state point, and when the lottery is won, the normal state provided in the sub RAM 403 is used. Adds the winning value to the point storage area. Then, when the process of step S302-3-1-2-5-4-12 ends, the process proceeds to step S302-3-1-2-5-4-13.

(Step S302-3-1-2-5-4-13)
In step S302-3-1-2-5-4-13, the sub CPU 401 performs a Bonus preparation state transition lottery process. Specifically, when the current mode is the specific mode, the sub CPU 401 determines the Bonus based on the specific mode Bonus preparation state transition lottery table (see FIG. 63B) provided in the sub ROM 402. If the current mode is the normal mode, a lottery table for normal mode Bonus preparation state transfer lottery table provided in the sub ROM 402 (see FIG. 63A) is performed. ) To perform lottery processing to determine whether or not to shift to the Bonus preparation state. Then, when the process of step S302-3-1-2-5-4-13 ends, the process proceeds to step S302-3-1-2-5-4-14.

(Step S302-3-1-2-5-4-14)
In step S302-3-1-2-5-4-14, the sub CPU 401 performs processing to determine whether or not the Bonus preparation state transition has been won. Specifically, the sub CPU 401 determines whether or not it is determined to shift to the Bonus preparation state as a result of the lottery process by the Bonus preparation state transition lottery process in Step S302-3-1-2-5-4-13. Perform the process. If it is determined that the Bonus preparation state transition is won (step S302-3-1-2-5-4-14 = Yes), the process proceeds to step S302-3-1-2-5-4-15. When it is determined that the process is shifted and the Bonus preparation state shift is not won (step S302-3-1-2-5-4-14 = No), step S302-3-1-2-5 The process proceeds to -4-19.

(Step S302-3-1-2-5-4-15)
In step S302-3-1-2-5-4-15, the sub CPU 401 performs a Bonus standby distribution process. Specifically, when the current mode is the specific mode, the sub CPU 401 performs the Bonus preparation state transition lottery process in Step S302-3-1-2-5-4-13, and as a result, enters the Bonus preparation state. When it is determined to shift, based on the Bonus state distribution lottery table (specific mode) provided in the sub ROM 402 (see FIG. 64 (B)), waiting for the first Bonus, waiting for the second Bonus, As a result of performing the Bonus preparation state transition lottery processing in Step S302-3-1-2-5-4-13 when the third Bonus standby is determined and the current mode is the normal mode, the Bonus preparation When it is decided to shift to the state, the Bonus state distribution lottery table (normal mode) provided in the sub ROM 402 is determined. ) Based on (FIG. 64 (A) refer) performs waiting the 1Bonus, waiting a 2Bonus, the process of determining either of the 3Bonus waiting. Further, the sub CPU 401 performs processing of storing in the Bonus standby information storage area provided in the sub RAM 403 when it is determined that the first Bonus standby, the second Bonus standby, or the third Bonus standby is determined. Then, when the process of step S302-3-1-2-5-4-15 ends, the process proceeds to step S302-3-1-2-5-4-16.

(Step S302-3-1-2-5-4-16)
In step S302-3-1-2-5-4-16, the sub CPU 401 performs a normal sign lottery process. Specifically, the sub CPU 401 determines the number of precursor games until the transition to the Bonus preparation state, and performs a process of setting the value of the Bonus precursor game number counter provided in the sub RAM 403. Then, when the process of step S302-3-1-2-5-4-16 ends, the process proceeds to step S302-3-1-2-5-4-17.

(Step S302-3-1-2-5-4-17)
In step S302-3-1-2-5-4-17, the sub CPU 401 performs a precursor rewriting determination process. Specifically, the sub CPU 401 is a case where the value of the fake type variable storage area provided in the sub RAM 403 is not “0”, and the value of the fake game number counter provided in the sub RAM 403 is “1”. If this is the case, the process of rewriting the fake precursor to the Bonus precursor is performed. Then, when the process of step S302-3-1-2-5-4-17 ends, the process proceeds to step S302-3-1-2-5-4-18.

(Step S302-3-1-2-5-4-18)
In step S302-3-1-2-5-4-18, the sub CPU 401 performs a Bonus winning process. Specifically, the sub CPU 401 sets the value of the fake type variable storage area provided in the sub RAM 403, the value of the fake game number counter, the value of the first chance precursor state game number counter, the number of second chance precursor state games. Processing is performed to clear the counter value, the third chance precursor state game number counter value, the fourth chance precursor state game number counter value, and the fifth chance precursor state game number counter value. Further, the sub CPU 401 sets “0” as the value set in the Bonus precursor game number counter provided in the sub RAM 403 by the normal precursor lottery process in step S302-3-1-2-5-4-16. In this case, in the next game, the Bonus preparation state is set in the state storage area provided in the sub RAM 403 so that the state managed by the sub control board 400 becomes the Bonus preparation state, and step S302-3- If the value set in the Bonus precursor game number counter provided in the sub RAM 403 is “1” or more by the normal precursor lottery process of 1-2-5-4-16, in the next game, A state provided in the sub-RAM 403 so that the state managed by the control board 400 becomes a Bonus precursor state It performs a process of setting the Bonus aura state paid area. When the process of step S302-3-1-2-5-4-18 ends, the subroutine for the third chance precursor state process ends, and step S302-3-1-2 of the condition device command reception process ends. The process is shifted to -6.

(Step S302-3-1-2-5-4-19)
In step S302-3-1-2-5-4-19, the sub CPU 401 performs a second chance state lottery process. Specifically, the sub CPU 401 adds to the second chance state transition lottery table (see FIG. 52A, FIG. 52B, FIG. 52C, and FIG. 52D) provided in the sub ROM 402. On the basis of this, a lottery to determine whether or not to shift to the second chance state is performed. When the lottery is won, the value of the second chance state winning flag storage area provided in the sub RAM 403 is updated, The number of precursor games until the transition to the chance state is determined by lottery, and the determined number of precursor games is set in the fifth chance precursor state game number counter provided in the sub-RAM 403. In the next game, A fifth chance precursor is stored in the next state storage area provided in the sub RAM 403 so that the state managed by the sub-control board 400 becomes the fifth chance precursor. It performs a process to set. Further, when it is determined that the sub CPU 401 shifts to the second chance state in the third chance precursor state or the fourth chance precursor state, the number of third chance precursor state games provided in the sub RAM 403 is determined. A process of clearing the value of the counter and the value of the fourth chance precursor state game number counter is performed. Then, when the process of step S302-3-1-2-5-4-19 ends, the process proceeds to step S302-3-1-2-5-4-20.

(Step S302-3-1-2-5-4-20)
In step S302-3-1-2-5-4-20, the sub CPU 401 performs processing for setting the next state storage area to the value of the state storage area. Specifically, the sub CPU 401 performs a process of setting the value stored in the next state storage area provided in the sub RAM 403 to the value of the state storage area provided in the sub RAM 403. Then, when the process of step S302-3-1-2-5-4-20 ends, the process proceeds to step S302-3-1-2-5-4-21.

  In the processing of step S302-3-1-2-5-4-20, the sub CPU 401 stores the value stored in the next state storage area provided in the sub RAM 403 in the sub RAM 403. After setting the value in the state storage area provided, the value stored in the next state storage area provided in the sub-RAM 403 is cleared.

(Step S302-3-1-2-5-4-21)
In step S302-3-1-2-5-4-21, the sub CPU 401 determines whether the value of the third chance precursor state game number counter and the value of the fourth chance precursor state game number counter are “0”. The process which determines is performed. Specifically, the sub CPU 401 has “0” for the value of the third chance precursor state game number counter provided in the sub RAM 403 and the value of the fourth chance precursor state game number counter provided in the sub RAM 403. Processing for determining whether or not there is present is performed. When it is determined that the value of the third chance precursor state game number counter and the value of the fourth chance precursor state game number counter are “0” (step S302-3-1-2-5-4). −21 = Yes), the process proceeds to step S302-3-1-2-5-4-22, and the value of the third chance precursor state game number counter and the value of the fourth chance precursor state game number counter are “ If it is determined that it is not “0” (step S302-3-1-2-5-4-21 = No), the process proceeds to step S302-3-1-2-5-4-30.

(Step S302-3-1-2-5-4-22)
In step S302-3-1-2-5-4-22, the sub CPU 401 performs a process of determining whether or not the precursor extension flag is OFF. Specifically, the sub CPU 401 performs processing for determining whether or not the precursor extension flag is OFF based on the value of the precursor extension flag storage area provided in the sub RAM 403. If it is determined that the sign extension flag is OFF (step S302-3-1-2-5-4-22 = Yes), the process proceeds to step S302-3-1-2-5-4-23. When the processing is shifted and it is determined that the precursor extension flag is not OFF (step S302-3-1-2-5-4-22 = No), step S302-3-1-2-5-4 The process is shifted to -24.

(Step S302-3-1-2-5-4-23)
In step S302-3-1-2-5-4-23, the sub CPU 401 performs a first chance state entry process. Specifically, when the value of the normal state point storage area provided in the sub RAM 403 is equal to or greater than “110”, the sub CPU 401 sets the fifth chance precursor state game number counter provided in the sub RAM 403. When the value is “0”, the second chance state winning flag in the second chance state winning flag storage area provided in the sub RAM 403 is turned OFF, and is managed by the sub control board 400 in the next game. A process of setting the second chance state in the state storage area provided in the sub-RAM 403 is performed so that the state to be performed becomes the second chance state. On the other hand, when the value of the normal state point storage area provided in the sub-RAM 403 is less than “110”, the state managed by the sub-control board 400 becomes the first chance state in the next game. In addition, a process for setting the first chance state in the state storage area provided in the sub RAM 403 is performed, and the first chance state winning flag in the first chance state winning flag storage area provided in the sub RAM 403 is turned OFF. And a process of setting “7” to the first chance state game number counter provided in the sub-RAM 403 is performed. When the process of step S302-3-1-2-5-4-23 ends, the subroutine for the third chance precursor state process ends, and step S302-3-1-2 of the condition device command reception process ends. The process is shifted to -6.

(Step S302-3-1-2-5-4-24)
In step S302-3-1-2-5-4-24, the sub CPU 401 performs processing to determine whether or not the normal state point is equal to or greater than “110” which is the upper limit value. Specifically, the sub CPU 401 determines, based on the value of the normal state point storage area provided in the sub RAM 403, whether or not the normal state point is equal to or higher than the upper limit “110”. I do. If it is determined that the normal state point is equal to or higher than the upper limit “110” (step S302-3-1-2-5-4-24 = Yes), step S302-3-1-1 The process proceeds to 2-5-4-25, and when it is determined that the normal state point is not equal to or higher than the upper limit “110” (step S302-3-1-2-5-4-24). = No), the process proceeds to step S302-3-1-2-5-4-26.

(Step S302-3-1-2-5-4-25)
In step S302-3-1-2-5-4-25, the sub CPU 401 performs a second chance state entry process. Specifically, when the value of the normal state point storage area provided in the sub RAM 403 is less than “33”, the sub CPU 401 performs a process of setting “33” and is provided in the sub RAM 403. The second chance state winning flag in the stored second chance state winning flag storage area is turned OFF, and in the next game, the state managed by the sub control board 400 becomes the second chance precursor state in the sub RAM 403. A process of setting the second chance precursor state in the provided state storage area is performed. When the process of step S302-3-1-2-5-4-25 ends, the subroutine for the third chance precursor state process ends, and step S302-3-1-2 of the condition device command reception process ends. The process is shifted to -6.

(Step S302-3-1-2-5-4-26)
In step S302-3-1-2-5-4-26, the sub CPU 401 performs a specific trigger sign lottery process. Specifically, the sub CPU 401 performs a process of determining a precursor scenario by lottery and storing it in a precursor scenario number storage area provided in the sub RAM 403. In addition, when a value other than “0” is stored in the precursor scenario number storage area provided in the sub RAM 403, the sub CPU 401 determines the number of precursor games by lottery, and the sub CPU 403 is provided in the sub RAM 403. A process of setting the 3-chance precursory state game number counter is performed. Further, the sub CPU 401 performs a process of turning on the precursor extension flag in the precursor extension flag storage area provided in the sub RAM 403. Then, when the process of step S302-3-1-2-5-4-26 ends, the process proceeds to step S302-3-1-2-5-4-27.

(Step S302-3-1-2-5-4-27)
In step S302-3-1-2-5-4-27, the sub CPU 401 performs a third chance precursor state game number counter setting process. Specifically, the sub CPU 401 adds “1” to the number of precursor games determined by the specific trigger time precursor lottery process, and sets the value of the third chance precursor state game number counter provided in the sub RAM 403 to “ 1 ”Addition processing is performed. Then, when the process of step S302-3-1-2-5-4-27 ends, the process proceeds to step S302-3-1-2-5-4-28.

(Step S302-3-1-2-5-4-28)
In step S302-3-1-2-5-4-28, the sub CPU 401 performs processing for turning off the precursor extension flag. Specifically, the sub CPU 401 performs processing for turning off the precursor extension flag in the precursor extension flag storage area provided in the sub RAM 403. Then, when the process of step S302-3-1-2-5-4-28 ends, the process proceeds to step S302-3-1-2-5-4-29.

(Step S302-3-1-2-5-4-29)
In step S302-3-1-2-5-4-29, in the next game, the sub CPU 401 performs a process of setting the state managed by the sub control board 400 to the third chance precursor state. Specifically, in the next game, the sub CPU 401 stores the third chance precursor state in the state storage area provided in the sub RAM 403 so that the state managed by the sub control board 400 becomes the third chance precursor state. Perform processing to set. When the process of step S302-3-1-2-5-4-29 ends, the subroutine for the third chance precursor state process ends, and step S302-3-1-2 of the condition device command reception process ends. The process is shifted to -6.

(Step S302-3-1-2-5-4-30)
In step S302-3-1-2-5-4-30, the sub CPU 401 performs third / fourth chance precursor state processing which will be described in detail later with reference to FIG. In this process, the sub CPU 401 performs the above-described third chance precursor state game number counter setting process and the like. When the process of step S302-3-1-2-5-4-30 ends, the subroutine for the third chance precursor state process ends, and step S302-3-1-2 of the conditional device command reception process ends. The process is shifted to -6.

(Processing in the precursor state of the third and fourth chances)
Next, based on FIG. 122, the third / fourth chance precursor state process performed by the process of step S302-3-1-2-5-4-30 of FIG. 121 will be described. FIG. 122 is a diagram showing a subroutine of processing during the third and fourth chance precursor states.

(Step S302-3-1-2-5-4-30-1)
In step S302-3-1-2-5-4-30-1, the sub CPU 401 performs processing to determine whether or not it is in the fourth chance precursor state. Specifically, the sub CPU 401 performs a process of determining whether or not it is a fourth chance precursor state based on the value of the state storage area provided in the sub RAM 403. And when it determines with it being a 4th chance precursor state (step S302-3-1-2-5-4-30-1 = Yes), step S302-3-1-2-5-4- If the process proceeds to 30-2 and it is determined that the fourth chance chance state is not reached (step S302-3-1-2-5-4-30-1 = No), the third and fourth chances The subroutine for the precursor state process is terminated, and the process proceeds to step S302-3-1-2-6 in the process at the time of receiving the conditional device command.

(Step S302-3-1-2-5-4-30-2)
In step S <b> 302-3-1-2-5-4-30-2, the sub CPU 401 performs processing for determining whether or not the normal state point is less than the upper limit “110”. Specifically, the sub CPU 401 determines, based on the value of the normal state point storage area provided in the sub RAM 403, whether or not the normal state point is less than the upper limit “110”. I do. When it is determined that the normal state point is less than the upper limit “110” (step S302-3-1-2-5-4-30-2 = Yes), step S302-3- When the process proceeds to 1-2-5-4-30-3 and it is determined that the normal state point is not less than the upper limit “110” (step S302-3-1-2-5). -4-30-2 = No), the subroutine of the third / fourth chance precursor state process is terminated, and the process proceeds to step S302-3-1-2-6 of the conditional device command reception process.

(Step S302-3-1-2-5-4-30-3)
In step S302-3-1-2-5-4-30-3, the sub CPU 401 performs a chance sign lottery process. Specifically, the sub CPU 401 determines the number of precursor games until the transition to the first chance state, and performs processing to set the value of the second chance precursor state game number counter provided in the sub RAM 403. Then, when the process of step S302-3-1-2-5-4-30-3 ends, the process proceeds to step S302-3-1-2-5-4-30-4.

(Step S302-3-1-2-5-4-30-4)
In step S302-3-1-2-5-4-30-4, the sub CPU 401 performs processing to determine whether or not the precursor scenario number is “0”. Specifically, the sub CPU 401 performs processing for determining whether or not the precursor scenario number is “0” based on the value of the precursor scenario number storage area provided in the sub RAM 403. If it is determined that the precursor scenario number is “0” (step S302-3-1-2-5-4-30-4 = Yes), step S302-3-1-2-5- If it is determined that the precursor scenario number is not “0” (step S302-3-1-2-5-4-30-4 = No), the process proceeds to 4-30-5. The process is transferred to 3-1-2-5-4-30-6.

(Step S302-3-1-2-5-4-30-5)
In step S302-3-1-2-5-4-30-5, in the next game, the sub CPU 401 performs a process of setting the state managed by the sub control board 400 to the fourth chance precursor state. Specifically, in the next game, the sub CPU 401 stores the fourth chance precursor state in the state storage area provided in the sub RAM 403 so that the state managed by the sub control board 400 becomes the fourth chance precursor state. Perform processing to set. When the processing of step S302-3-1-2-5-4-30-5 ends, the subroutine of the third and fourth chance precursor state processing ends, and step S302- of the conditional device command reception processing ends. The process proceeds to 3-1-2-6.

(Step S302-3-1-2-5-4-30-6)
In step S302-3-1-2-5-4-30-6, the sub CPU 401 performs a third chance precursor state game number counter setting process. Specifically, the sub CPU 401 adds “1” to the number of precursor games determined by the specific trigger time precursor lottery process, and sets the value of the third chance precursor state game number counter provided in the sub RAM 403 to “ 1 ”Addition processing is performed. When the process of step S302-3-1-2-5-4-30-6 ends, the process proceeds to step S302-3-1-2-5-4-30-7.

(Step S302-3-1-2-5-4-30-7)
In step S302-3-1-2-5-4-30-7, the sub CPU 401 performs a process of setting “0” to the value of the fourth chance precursor state game number counter. Specifically, the sub CPU 401 performs a process of setting “0” to the value of the fourth chance precursor state game number counter provided in the sub RAM 403. Then, when the process of step S302-3-1-2-5-4-30-7 ends, the process proceeds to step S302-3-1-2-5-4-30-8.

(Step S302-3-1-2-5-4-30-8)
In step S302-3-1-2-5-4-30-8, in the next game, the sub CPU 401 performs a process of setting the state managed by the sub control board 400 to the third chance precursor state. Specifically, in the next game, the sub CPU 401 stores the third chance precursor state in the state storage area provided in the sub RAM 403 so that the state managed by the sub control board 400 becomes the third chance precursor state. Perform processing to set. When the processing of step S302-3-1-2-5-4-30-8 is completed, the subroutine of the third and fourth chance precursor state processing is ended, and step S302- of the conditional device command reception processing is completed. The process proceeds to 3-1-2-6.

(Process for the fourth chance precursor state)
Next, based on FIG. 123, in the state-by-state transition processing in step S302-3-1-2-5 in FIG. The 4-chance precursory state process will be described. FIG. 123 is a diagram showing a subroutine for the fourth chance precursory state process.

(Step S302-3-1-2-5-5-1)
In step S302-3-1-2-5-5-1, the sub CPU 401 performs ceiling subtraction processing. Specifically, the sub CPU 401 performs a process of subtracting “1” from the value of the ceiling game number counter provided in the sub RAM 403. Then, when the process of step S302-3-1-2-5-5-1 ends, the process proceeds to step S302-3-1-2-2-5-2.

(Step S302-3-1-2-5-5-2)
In step S302-3-1-2-5-5-2, the sub CPU 401 performs a normal counter subtraction process. Specifically, when the value of the Bonus omen game number counter provided in the sub RAM 403 is “1” or more, the sub CPU 401 determines the value of the Bonus omen game number counter provided in the sub RAM 403. The process of subtracting “1” from the value, or (b) the value of the fake game number counter provided in the sub RAM 403 when the value of the fake game number counter provided in the sub RAM 403 is “1” or more. The process of subtracting “1” from is performed. Then, when the process of step S302-3-1-2-5-5-2 ends, the process proceeds to step S302-3-1-2-5-5-3.

(Step S302-3-1-2-5-5-3)
In step S302-3-1-2-5-5-3, the sub CPU 401 performs processing to determine whether or not the winning number is “05”. Specifically, the sub CPU 401 performs a process of determining whether or not the information related to the winning combination included in the conditional device command received from the main control board 300 is the winning number “05”. And when it is determined that the winning number is “05” (step S302-3-1-2-5-5-3 = Yes), step S302-3-1-2-5-5-4. If it is determined that the winning number is not “05” (step S302-3-1-2-5-5-3 = No), step S302-3-1-2-5 is performed. The process is shifted to -5-5.

(Step S302-3-1-2-5-5-4)
In step S302-3-1-2-5-5-4, the sub CPU 401 performs a direct hit winning process. Specifically, the sub CPU 401 (a) updates the Bonus winning opportunity storage area provided in the sub RAM 403, (b) the third chance state game number counter provided in the sub RAM 403, A process of clearing the 4-chance state game number counter, etc., (c) an ART initial hit process described later, and (d) a Bonus winning process described later are performed. When the process of step S302-3-1-2-5-5-4 is completed, the fourth chance precursor state process subroutine is terminated, and step S302-3-1-2 of the conditional device command reception process is terminated. The process is shifted to -6.

(Step S302-3-1-2-5-5-5)
In step S302-3-1-2-5-5-5, the sub CPU 401 performs processing for determining whether or not the winning number is any one of “20” to “30”. Specifically, the sub CPU 401 determines whether or not the information related to the winning combination included in the conditional device command received from the main control board 300 is any of the winning numbers “20” to “30”. Perform the process. If it is determined that the winning number is any one of “20” to “30” (step S302-3-1-2-5-5-5 = Yes), step S302-3-1-1 The process proceeds to 2-5-5-6, and when it is determined that the winning number is not “20” to “30” (step S302-3-1-2-5-5-5). = No), the process proceeds to step S302-3-1-2-5-5-11.

(Step S302-3-1-2-5-5-6)
In step S302-3-1-2-5-5-6, the sub CPU 401 performs processing for setting the value of the state storage area in the next state storage area. Specifically, the sub CPU 401 performs processing for setting the value of the state storage area provided in the sub RAM 403 in the next state storage area provided in the sub RAM 403. Then, when the process of step S302-3-1-2-5-5-6 ends, the process proceeds to step S302-3-1-2-5-5-7.

(Step S302-3-1-2-5-5-7)
In step S302-3-1-2-5-5-7, the sub CPU 401 performs a specific role ceiling determination process. Specifically, the sub CPU 401 determines that the information related to the winning combination included in the conditional device command received from the main control board 300 is any one of the winning numbers “20” to “30”. The process of adding “1” to the value of the specified combination winning number counter provided in the sub RAM 403 is performed, and the value of the specified combination winning number counter provided in the sub RAM 403 reaches a predetermined number. In the next game, the state managed by the sub-control board 400 becomes the first chance precursor state in the next state storage area provided in the sub-RAM 403 so that the state managed by the sub-control board 400 becomes the first chance precursor state. Perform processing to set. Further, the sub CPU 401 determines whether to shift to the third chance state or the fourth chance state by lottery, and based on the result of the lottery, the sub CPU 401 sets the third chance state stock counter provided in the sub RAM 403. A process of adding “1” to the value or the value of the fourth chance state stock counter is performed. Then, when the process of step S302-3-1-2-5-5-7 ends, the process proceeds to step S302-3-1-2-5-5-8.

(Step S302-3-1-2-5-5-8)
In step S302-3-1-2-5-5-8, the sub CPU 401 determines whether the value of the third chance state stock counter or the value of the fourth chance state stock counter is “1” or more. Processing to determine is performed. Specifically, whether the value of the third chance state stock counter provided in the sub RAM 403 or the value of the fourth chance state stock counter provided in the sub RAM 403 is “1” or more. Processing to determine whether or not. When it is determined that the value of the third chance state stock counter or the value of the fourth chance state stock counter is “1” or more (step S302-3-1-2-5-5-8). = Yes), the process proceeds to step S302-3-1-2-5-5-9, and the value of the third chance state stock counter or the value of the fourth chance state stock counter is not “1” or more. If it is determined (step S302-3-1-2-5-5-8 = No), the process proceeds to step S302-3-1-2-5-5-11.

(Step S302-3-1-2-5-5-9)
In step S302-3-1-2-5-5-9, the sub CPU 401 performs a process of setting “0” to the value of the first chance precursor state game number counter. Specifically, the sub CPU 401 performs a process of setting “0” to the value of the first chance precursor state game number counter provided in the sub RAM 403. Then, when the process of step S302-3-1-2-5-5-9 ends, the process proceeds to step S302-3-1-2-5-5-10.

(Step S302-3-1-2-5-5-10)
In step S302-3-1-2-5-5-10, the sub CPU 401 performs processing for setting the next state storage area to the value of the state storage area. Specifically, the sub CPU 401 performs a process of setting the value stored in the next state storage area provided in the sub RAM 403 to the value of the state storage area provided in the sub RAM 403. Then, when the process of step S302-3-1-2-5-5-10 ends, the process proceeds to step S302-3-1-2-5-5-11.

  In the processing of step S302-3-1-2-5-5-10, the sub CPU 401 stores values stored in the next state storage area provided in the sub RAM 403 in the sub RAM 403. After setting the value in the state storage area provided, the value stored in the next state storage area provided in the sub-RAM 403 is cleared.

(Step S302-3-1-2-5-5-11)
In step S302-3-1-2-5-5-11, the sub CPU 401 performs third / fourth chance sign state game number counter subtraction processing. Specifically, the sub CPU 401 determines that the value of the third chance precursor state game number counter provided in the sub RAM 403 or the value of the fourth chance precursor state game number counter provided in the sub RAM 403 is “1” or more. In this case, a process of subtracting “1” from the value of the third chance precursor state game number counter provided in the sub RAM 403 or the value of the fourth chance precursor state game number counter provided in the sub RAM 403 is performed. Do. Then, when the process of step S302-3-1-2-5-5-11 ends, the process proceeds to step S302-3-1-2-5-5-12.

(Step S302-3-1-2-5-5-12)
In step S302-3-1-2-5-5-12, the sub CPU 401 performs normal point related processing. Specifically, the sub CPU 401 determines the normal state point acquisition lottery table provided in the sub ROM 402 based on the value of the Bonus game number counter provided in the sub RAM 403 (FIGS. 49A and 49). (B), FIG. 49C, FIG. 49D, and FIG. 49E), and the selected normal state point acquisition lottery table and the condition device command received from the main control board 300 Based on the information related to the winning combination included in the game, the lottery process is performed to determine whether or not to acquire the normal state point, and when the lottery is won, the normal state provided in the sub RAM 403 is used. Adds the winning value to the point storage area. Then, when the process of step S302-3-1-2-5-5-12 ends, the process proceeds to step S302-3-1-2-5-5-13.

(Step S302-3-1-2-5-5-13)
In step S302-3-1-2-5-5-13, the sub CPU 401 performs a Bonus preparation state transition lottery process. Specifically, when the current mode is the specific mode, the sub CPU 401 determines the Bonus based on the specific mode Bonus preparation state transition lottery table (see FIG. 63B) provided in the sub ROM 402. If the current mode is the normal mode, a lottery table for normal mode Bonus preparation state transfer lottery table provided in the sub ROM 402 (see FIG. 63A) is performed. ) To perform lottery processing to determine whether or not to shift to the Bonus preparation state. Then, when the process of step S302-3-1-2-5-5-13 ends, the process proceeds to step S302-3-1-2-5-5-14.

(Step S302-3-1-2-5-5-14)
In step S <b> 302-3-2-5-5-14, the sub CPU 401 performs a process for determining whether or not the Bonus preparation state transition is won. Specifically, the sub CPU 401 determines whether or not it is determined to shift to the Bonus preparation state as a result of the lottery processing by the Bonus preparation state transition lottery process in Step S302-3-1-2-5-5-13. Perform the process. If it is determined that the Bonus preparation state transition is won (step S302-3-1-2-5-5-14 = Yes), the process proceeds to step S302-3-1-2-5-5-15. When it is determined that the process is shifted and the Bonus preparation state shift is not won (step S302-3-1-2-5-5-14 = No), step S302-3-1-2-5 The process is shifted to -5-19.

(Step S302-3-1-2-5-5-15)
In step S302-3-1-2-5-5-15, the sub CPU 401 performs a Bonus standby distribution process. Specifically, when the current mode is the specific mode, the sub CPU 401 performs the Bonus preparation state transition lottery process in Step S302-3-1-2-5-5-13, and as a result, enters the Bonus preparation state. When it is determined to shift, based on the Bonus state distribution lottery table (specific mode) provided in the sub ROM 402 (see FIG. 64 (B)), waiting for the first Bonus, waiting for the second Bonus, As a result of performing the Bonus preparation state transition lottery processing in Step S302-3-1-2-5-5-13 when the third Bonus standby is determined and the current mode is the normal mode, the Bonus preparation When it is decided to shift to the state, the Bonus state distribution lottery table (normal mode) provided in the sub ROM 402 is determined. ) Based on (FIG. 64 (A) refer) performs waiting the 1Bonus, waiting a 2Bonus, the process of determining either of the 3Bonus waiting. Further, the sub CPU 401 performs processing of storing in the Bonus standby information storage area provided in the sub RAM 403 when it is determined that the first Bonus standby, the second Bonus standby, or the third Bonus standby is determined. Then, when the process of step S302-3-1-2-5-5-15 ends, the process proceeds to step S302-3-1-2-5-5-16.

(Step S302-3-1-2-5-5-16)
In step S302-3-1-2-5-5-16, the sub CPU 401 performs a normal sign lottery process. Specifically, the sub CPU 401 determines the number of precursor games until the transition to the Bonus preparation state, and performs a process of setting the value of the Bonus precursor game number counter provided in the sub RAM 403. Then, when the process of step S302-3-1-2-5-5-16 ends, the process proceeds to step S302-3-1-2-5-5-17.

(Step S302-3-1-2-5-5-17)
In step S302-3-1-2-5-5-17, the sub CPU 401 performs a precursor rewriting determination process. Specifically, the sub CPU 401 is a case where the value of the fake type variable storage area provided in the sub RAM 403 is not “0”, and the value of the fake game number counter provided in the sub RAM 403 is “1”. If this is the case, the process of rewriting the fake precursor to the Bonus precursor is performed. Then, when the process of step S302-3-1-2-5-5-17 ends, the process proceeds to step S302-3-1-2-5-5-18.

(Step S302-3-1-2-5-5-18)
In step S302-3-1-2-5-5-18, the sub CPU 401 performs a Bonus winning process. Specifically, the sub CPU 401 sets the value of the fake type variable storage area provided in the sub RAM 403, the value of the fake game number counter, the value of the first chance precursor state game number counter, the number of second chance precursor state games. Processing is performed to clear the counter value, the third chance precursor state game number counter value, the fourth chance precursor state game number counter value, and the fifth chance precursor state game number counter value. Further, the sub CPU 401 has a value set to “0” for the Bonus precursor game number counter provided in the sub RAM 403 by the normal precursor lottery process in step S302-3-1-2-5-5-16. In this case, in the next game, the Bonus preparation state is set in the state storage area provided in the sub RAM 403 so that the state managed by the sub control board 400 becomes the Bonus preparation state, and step S302-3- When the value set in the Bonus precursor game number counter provided in the sub RAM 403 is “1” or more by the normal precursor lottery process of 1-2-5-5-16, in the next game, A state provided in the sub-RAM 403 so that the state managed by the control board 400 becomes a Bonus precursor state It performs a process of setting the Bonus aura state paid area. When the process of step S302-3-1-2-5-5-18 ends, the subroutine for the fourth chance precursor state process ends, and step S302-3-1-2 of the condition device command reception process ends. The process is shifted to -6.

(Step S302-3-1-2-5-5-19)
In step S302-3-1-2-5-5-19, the sub CPU 401 performs a second chance state lottery process. Specifically, the sub CPU 401 adds to the second chance state transition lottery table (see FIG. 52A, FIG. 52B, FIG. 52C, and FIG. 52D) provided in the sub ROM 402. On the basis of this, a lottery to determine whether or not to shift to the second chance state is performed. When the lottery is won, the value of the second chance state winning flag storage area provided in the sub RAM 403 is updated, The number of precursor games until the transition to the chance state is determined by lottery, and the determined number of precursor games is set in the fifth chance precursor state game number counter provided in the sub-RAM 403. In the next game, A fifth chance precursor is stored in the next state storage area provided in the sub RAM 403 so that the state managed by the sub-control board 400 becomes the fifth chance precursor. It performs a process to set. Further, when it is determined that the sub CPU 401 shifts to the second chance state in the third chance precursor state or the fourth chance precursor state, the number of third chance precursor state games provided in the sub RAM 403 is determined. A process of clearing the value of the counter and the value of the fourth chance precursor state game number counter is performed. Then, when the process of step S302-3-1-2-5-5-19 ends, the process proceeds to step S302-3-1-2-5-5-20.

(Step S302-3-1-2-5-5-20)
In step S302-3-1-2-5-5-20, the sub CPU 401 performs processing for setting the next state storage area to the value of the state storage area. Specifically, the sub CPU 401 performs a process of setting the value stored in the next state storage area provided in the sub RAM 403 to the value of the state storage area provided in the sub RAM 403. Then, when the process of step S302-3-1-2-5-5-20 ends, the process proceeds to step S302-3-1-2-5-5-21.

  In the processing of step S302-3-1-2-5-5-20, the sub CPU 401 stores the value stored in the next state storage area provided in the sub RAM 403 in the sub RAM 403. After setting the value in the state storage area provided, the value stored in the next state storage area provided in the sub-RAM 403 is cleared.

(Step S302-3-1-2-5-5-21)
In step S302-3-1-2-5-5-21, the sub CPU 401 determines whether the value of the third chance precursor state game number counter and the value of the fourth chance precursor state game number counter are “0”. The process which determines is performed. Specifically, the sub CPU 401 has “0” for the value of the third chance precursor state game number counter provided in the sub RAM 403 and the value of the fourth chance precursor state game number counter provided in the sub RAM 403. Processing for determining whether or not there is present is performed. When it is determined that the value of the third chance precursor state game number counter and the value of the fourth chance precursor state game number counter are “0” (step S302-3-1-2-5-5). −21 = Yes), the process proceeds to step S302-3-1-2-5-5-22, and the value of the third chance precursor state game number counter and the value of the fourth chance precursor state game number counter are “ If it is determined that it is not “0” (step S302-3-1-2-5-5-21 = No), the process proceeds to step S302-3-1-2-5-5-30.

(Step S302-3-1-2-5-5-22)
In step S302-3-1-2-5-5-22, the sub CPU 401 performs a process of determining whether or not the precursor extension flag is OFF. Specifically, the sub CPU 401 performs processing for determining whether or not the precursor extension flag is OFF based on the value of the precursor extension flag storage area provided in the sub RAM 403. If it is determined that the sign extension flag is OFF (step S302-3-1-2-5-5-22 = Yes), the process proceeds to step S302-3-1-2-5-5-23. If the process proceeds and it is determined that the sign extension flag is not OFF (step S302-3-1-2-5-5-22 = No), step S302-3-1-2-5-5 The process is shifted to -24.

(Step S302-3-1-2-5-5-23)
In step S302-3-1-2-5-5-23, the sub CPU 401 performs a first chance state entry process. Specifically, when the value of the normal state point storage area provided in the sub RAM 403 is equal to or greater than “110”, the sub CPU 401 sets the fifth chance precursor state game number counter provided in the sub RAM 403. When the value is “0”, the second chance state winning flag in the second chance state winning flag storage area provided in the sub RAM 403 is turned OFF, and is managed by the sub control board 400 in the next game. The second chance precursor state is set in the state storage area provided in the sub-RAM 403 so that the state to be performed becomes the second chance precursor state. On the other hand, when the value of the normal state point storage area provided in the sub-RAM 403 is less than “110”, the state managed by the sub-control board 400 becomes the first chance state in the next game. In addition, a process for setting the first chance state in the state storage area provided in the sub RAM 403 is performed, and the first chance state winning flag in the first chance state winning flag storage area provided in the sub RAM 403 is turned OFF. And a process of setting “7” to the first chance state game number counter provided in the sub-RAM 403 is performed. When the process of step S302-3-1-2-5-5-23 is completed, the fourth chance precursor state process subroutine is terminated, and step S302-3-1-2 of the conditional device command reception process is terminated. The process is shifted to -6.

(Step S302-3-1-2-5-5-24)
In step S <b> 302-3-2-5-5-24, the sub CPU 401 performs processing for determining whether or not the normal state point is equal to or higher than “110” which is the upper limit value. Specifically, the sub CPU 401 determines, based on the value of the normal state point storage area provided in the sub RAM 403, whether or not the normal state point is equal to or higher than the upper limit “110”. I do. When it is determined that the normal state point is equal to or higher than the upper limit “110” (step S302-3-1-2-5-5-24 = Yes), step S302-3-1-1 is performed. When the process proceeds to 2-5-5-25 and it is determined that the normal state point is not equal to or higher than the upper limit “110” (step S302-3-1-2-5-5-24). = No), the process proceeds to step S302-3-1-2-5-26.

(Step S302-3-1-2-5-5-25)
In step S302-3-1-2-5-5-25, the sub CPU 401 performs a second chance state entry process. Specifically, when the value of the normal state point storage area provided in the sub RAM 403 is less than “33”, the sub CPU 401 performs a process of setting “33” and is provided in the sub RAM 403. The second chance state winning flag in the stored second chance state winning flag storage area is turned OFF, and in the next game, the state managed by the sub control board 400 becomes the second chance precursor state in the sub RAM 403. A process of setting the second chance precursor state in the provided state storage area is performed. When the process of step S302-3-1-2-5-5-25 ends, the subroutine for the fourth chance precursor state process ends, and step S302-3-1-2 of the condition device command reception process ends. The process is shifted to -6.

(Step S302-3-1-2-5-5-26)
In step S302-3-1-2-5-5-26, the sub CPU 401 performs a specific trigger sign lottery process. Specifically, the sub CPU 401 performs a process of determining a precursor scenario by lottery and storing it in a precursor scenario number storage area provided in the sub RAM 403. Further, when a value other than “0” is stored in the precursor scenario number storage area provided in the sub RAM 403, the sub CPU 401 determines the number of precursor games by lottery, and the sub CPU 403 is provided in the sub RAM 403. A process of setting the 4-chance precursory state game number counter is performed. Further, the sub CPU 401 performs a process of turning on the precursor extension flag in the precursor extension flag storage area provided in the sub RAM 403. Then, when the process of step S302-3-1-2-5-5-26 ends, the process proceeds to step S302-3-1-2-5-5-27.

(Step S302-3-1-2-5-5-27)
In step S302-3-1-2-5-5-27, the sub CPU 401 performs a third chance precursor state game number counter setting process. Specifically, the sub CPU 401 adds “1” to the number of precursor games determined by the specific trigger time precursor lottery process, and sets the value of the third chance precursor state game number counter provided in the sub RAM 403 to “ 1 ”Addition processing is performed. Then, when the process of step S302-3-1-2-5-5-27 is completed, the process proceeds to step S302-3-1-2-5-5-28.

(Step S302-3-1-2-5-5-28)
In step S302-3-1-2-5-5-28, the sub CPU 401 performs processing for turning off the precursor extension flag. Specifically, the sub CPU 401 performs processing for turning off the precursor extension flag in the precursor extension flag storage area provided in the sub RAM 403. Then, when the process of step S302-3-1-2-5-5-28 ends, the process proceeds to step S302-3-1-2-5-29.

(Step S302-3-1-2-5-29)
In step S <b> 302-3-2-5-5-29, the sub CPU 401 performs processing for setting the state managed by the sub control board 400 to the fourth chance precursor state in the next game. Specifically, in the next game, the sub CPU 401 stores the fourth chance precursor state in the state storage area provided in the sub RAM 403 so that the state managed by the sub control board 400 becomes the fourth chance precursor state. Perform processing to set. When the process of step S302-3-1-2-5-5-29 is completed, the fourth chance precursor state process subroutine is terminated, and step S302-3-1-2 of the conditional device command reception process is terminated. The process is shifted to -6.

(Step S302-3-1-2-5-5-30)
In step S302-3-1-2-5-5-30, the sub CPU 401 performs the above-described third / fourth chance sign state processing. In this process, the sub CPU 401 performs the above-described third chance precursor state game number counter setting process and the like. When the process of step S302-3-1-2-5-5-30 ends, the fourth chance precursor state process subroutine ends and step S302-3-1-2 of the conditional device command reception process ends. The process is shifted to -6.

  In the present embodiment, as described above, the state managed by the sub control board 400 is the third chance precursor state and the state managed by the sub control board 400 is the fourth chance precursor state. The same processing is to be performed. Therefore, when the state managed by the sub control board 400 is the third chance precursor state, or when the state managed by the sub control board 400 is the fourth chance precursor state, the processing shown in FIG. If the processing shown in FIG. 4 is performed, the capacity of the sub ROM 402 can be reduced. At this time, the third chance precursor state game number counter and the fourth chance precursor state game number counter provided in the sub RAM 403 are shared, so that the sub RAM 403 is compared with the sub RAM 403 of the present embodiment. It can also be set as a simple structure.

  In the present embodiment, when it is determined to shift to the first chance state and it is determined to shift to the second chance state, the first chance state is shifted to the first chance state. There are cases where a transition is made to the second chance state after the end of the state, a transition to the second chance state, and a transition to the first chance state after the end of the second chance state. Absent. For example, when it is determined to shift to the first chance state and it is determined to shift to the second chance state, the transition to the first chance state may always be performed first. Thus, in the first chance state, after acquiring the normal state point, it is possible to receive a lottery as to whether or not to shift to the Bonus preparation state using the normal state point. In addition, it is possible to reduce a situation in which the number of times that the player can receive the lottery to determine whether to shift to the second chance state and shift to the Bonus preparation state with a small number of normal state points can be reduced.

  In addition, when it is determined to shift to the first chance state and it is determined to shift to the second chance state, the transition to the second chance state may always be performed first. Thereby, the continuation willingness with respect to the game after the 2nd chance state is complete | finished can be maintained.

(5th chance precursor state process)
Next, based on FIG. 124, in the state-by-state transition process in step S302-3-1-2-5 in FIG. 117, the first process performed when the state managed by the sub-control board 400 is the fifth chance precursor state. The process for the 5-chance precursory state will be described. FIG. 124 is a diagram showing a subroutine for the fifth chance precursory state process.

(Step S302-3-1-2-5-6-1)
In step S302-3-1-2-5-6-1, the sub CPU 401 performs ceiling subtraction processing. Specifically, the sub CPU 401 performs a process of subtracting “1” from the value of the ceiling game number counter provided in the sub RAM 403. Then, when the process of step S302-3-1-2-5-6-1 ends, the process proceeds to step S302-3-1-2-2-6-2.

(Step S302-3-1-2-5-6-2)
In step S302-3-1-2-5-6-2, the sub CPU 401 performs a normal counter subtraction process. Specifically, when the value of the Bonus omen game number counter provided in the sub RAM 403 is “1” or more, the sub CPU 401 determines the value of the Bonus omen game number counter provided in the sub RAM 403. The process of subtracting “1” from the value, or (b) the value of the fake game number counter provided in the sub RAM 403 when the value of the fake game number counter provided in the sub RAM 403 is “1” or more. The process of subtracting “1” from is performed. Then, when the process of step S302-3-1-2-5-6-2 ends, the process proceeds to step S302-3-1-2-5-6-3.

(Step S302-3-1-2-5-6-3)
In step S302-3-1-2-5-6-3, the sub CPU 401 determines whether or not the winning number is “05”. Specifically, the sub CPU 401 performs a process of determining whether or not the information related to the winning combination included in the conditional device command received from the main control board 300 is the winning number “05”. And when it determines with a winning number being "05" (step S302-3-1-2-5-6-3 = Yes), step S302-3-1-2-5-6-4 If it is determined that the winning number is not “05” (step S302-3-1-2-5-6-3 = No), step S302-3-1-2-5 is performed. The process proceeds to -6-5.

(Step S302-3-1-2-5-6-4)
In step S302-3-1-2-5-6-4, the sub CPU 401 performs a direct hit winning process. Specifically, the sub CPU 401 (a) updates the Bonus winning opportunity storage area provided in the sub RAM 403, (b) the third chance state game number counter provided in the sub RAM 403, A process of clearing the 4-chance state game number counter, etc., (c) an ART initial hit process described later, and (d) a Bonus winning process described later are performed. When the process of step S302-3-1-2-5-6-4 ends, the subroutine for the fifth chance precursor state process ends, and step S302-3-1-2 of the conditional device command reception process ends. The process is shifted to -6.

(Step S302-3-1-2-5-6-5)
In step S302-3-1-2-5-6-5, the sub CPU 401 performs processing for determining whether or not the winning number is “20” to “30”. Specifically, the sub CPU 401 determines whether or not the information related to the winning combination included in the conditional device command received from the main control board 300 is any of the winning numbers “20” to “30”. Perform the process. If it is determined that the winning number is any one of “20” to “30” (step S302-3-1-2-5-6-5 = Yes), step S302-3-1-1 If the process shifts to 2-5-6-6 and it is determined that the winning number is not “20” to “30” (step S302-3-1-2-5-6-6) = No), the process proceeds to step S302-3-1-2-5-6-9.

(Step S302-3-1-2-5-6-6)
In step S302-3-1-2-5-6-6, the sub CPU 401 performs a specific role ceiling determination process. Specifically, the sub CPU 401 determines that the information related to the winning combination included in the conditional device command received from the main control board 300 is any one of the winning numbers “20” to “30”. The process of adding “1” to the value of the specified combination winning number counter provided in the sub RAM 403 is performed, and the value of the specified combination winning number counter provided in the sub RAM 403 reaches a predetermined number. In the next game, the state managed by the sub-control board 400 becomes the first chance precursor state so that the state managed by the sub-control board 400 becomes the first chance precursor state. Perform the setting process. Further, the sub CPU 401 determines whether to shift to the third chance state or the fourth chance state by lottery, and based on the result of the lottery, the sub CPU 401 sets the third chance state stock counter provided in the sub RAM 403. A process of adding “1” to the value or the value of the fourth chance state stock counter is performed. Then, when the process of step S302-3-1-2-5-6-6 ends, the process proceeds to step S302-3-1-2-5-6-7.

(Step S302-3-1-2-5-6-7)
In step S302-3-1-2-5-6-7, the sub CPU 401 determines whether the value of the third chance state stock counter or the value of the fourth chance state stock counter is “1” or more. Processing to determine is performed. Specifically, whether the value of the third chance state stock counter provided in the sub RAM 403 or the value of the fourth chance state stock counter provided in the sub RAM 403 is “1” or more. Processing to determine whether or not. When it is determined that the value of the third chance state stock counter or the value of the fourth chance state stock counter is “1” or more (step S302-3-1-2-5-6-7). = Yes), the process proceeds to step S302-3-1-2-5-6-8, and the value of the third chance state stock counter or the value of the fourth chance state stock counter is not “1” or more. If it is determined (step S302-3-1-2-5-6-7 = No), the process proceeds to step S302-3-1-2-5-6-9.

(Step S302-3-1-2-5-6-8)
In step S302-3-1-2-5-6-8, the sub CPU 401 performs a process of setting “0” to the value of the first chance precursor state game number counter. Specifically, the sub CPU 401 performs a process of setting “0” to the value of the first chance precursor state game number counter provided in the sub RAM 403. Then, when the process of step S302-3-1-2-5-6-8 ends, the process proceeds to step S302-3-1-2-5-6-9.

(Step S302-3-1-2-5-6-9)
In step S302-3-1-2-5-6-9, the sub CPU 401 performs normal point related processing. Specifically, the sub CPU 401 determines the normal state point acquisition lottery table provided in the sub ROM 402 based on the value of the Bonus game number counter provided in the sub RAM 403 (FIGS. 49A and 49). (B), FIG. 49C, FIG. 49D, and FIG. 49E), and the selected normal state point acquisition lottery table and the condition device command received from the main control board 300 Based on the information related to the winning combination included in the game, the lottery process is performed to determine whether or not to acquire the normal state point, and when the lottery is won, the normal state provided in the sub RAM 403 is used. Adds the winning value to the point storage area. Then, when the process of step S302-3-1-2-5-6-9 ends, the process proceeds to step S302-3-1-2-5-6-10.

(Step S302-3-1-2-5-6-10)
In step S302-3-1-2-5-6-10, the sub CPU 401 performs a process of subtracting “1” from the value of the fifth chance precursor game number counter. Specifically, the sub CPU 401 performs a process of subtracting “1” from the value of the fifth chance precursor game number counter provided in the sub RAM 403. Then, when the process of step S302-3-1-2-5-6-10 ends, the process proceeds to step S302-3-1-2-5-6-11.

(Step S302-3-1-2-5-6-11)
In step S302-3-1-2-5-6-11, the sub CPU 401 performs a Bonus preparation state transition lottery process. Specifically, when the current mode is the specific mode, the sub CPU 401 determines the Bonus based on the specific mode Bonus preparation state transition lottery table (see FIG. 63B) provided in the sub ROM 402. If the current mode is the normal mode, a lottery table for normal mode Bonus preparation state transfer lottery table provided in the sub ROM 402 (see FIG. 63A) is performed. ) To perform lottery processing to determine whether or not to shift to the Bonus preparation state. Then, when the process of step S302-3-1-2-5-6-11 ends, the process proceeds to step S302-3-1-2-5-6-12.

(Step S302-3-1-2-5-6-12)
In step S302-3-1-2-5-6-12, the sub CPU 401 performs processing for determining whether or not the Bonus preparation state transition is won. Specifically, the sub CPU 401 determines whether or not it is determined to shift to the Bonus preparation state as a result of the lottery process by the Bonus preparation state transition lottery process in Step S302-3-1-2-5-6-11. Perform the process. If it is determined that the Bonus ready state transition is won (step S302-3-1-2-5-6-12 = Yes), the process proceeds to step S302-3-1-2-5-6-13. When it is determined that the process is shifted and the Bonus preparation state shift is not won (step S302-3-1-2-5-6-12 = No), step S302-3-1-2-5 The process proceeds to -6-17.

(Step S302-3-1-2-5-6-13)
In step S302-3-1-2-5-6-13, the sub CPU 401 performs a Bonus standby distribution process. Specifically, when the current mode is the specific mode, the sub CPU 401 performs the Bonus preparation state transition lottery process in Step S302-3-1-2-5-6-11, and as a result, enters the Bonus preparation state. When it is determined to shift, based on the Bonus state distribution lottery table (specific mode) provided in the sub ROM 402 (see FIG. 64 (B)), waiting for the first Bonus, waiting for the second Bonus, As a result of performing the Bonus preparation state transition lottery process in Step S302-3-1-2-5-6-11 when the third Bonus standby is determined and the current mode is the normal mode, the Bonus preparation When it is decided to shift to the state, the Bonus state distribution lottery table (normal mode) provided in the sub ROM 402 is determined. ) Based on (FIG. 64 (A) refer) performs waiting the 1Bonus, waiting a 2Bonus, the process of determining either of the 3Bonus waiting. Further, the sub CPU 401 performs processing of storing in the Bonus standby information storage area provided in the sub RAM 403 when it is determined that the first Bonus standby, the second Bonus standby, or the third Bonus standby is determined. Then, when the process of step S302-3-1-2-5-6-13 ends, the process proceeds to step S302-3-1-2-5-6-14.

(Step S302-3-1-2-5-6-14)
In step S302-3-1-2-5-6-14, the sub CPU 401 performs a normal sign lottery process. Specifically, the sub CPU 401 determines the number of precursor games until the transition to the Bonus preparation state, and performs a process of setting the value of the Bonus precursor game number counter provided in the sub RAM 403. Then, when the process of step S302-3-1-2-5-6-14 ends, the process proceeds to step S302-3-1-2-5-6-15.

(Step S302-3-1-2-5-6-15)
In step S302-3-1-2-5-6-15, the sub CPU 401 performs a precursor rewriting determination process. Specifically, the sub CPU 401 is a case where the value of the fake type variable storage area provided in the sub RAM 403 is not “0”, and the value of the fake game number counter provided in the sub RAM 403 is “1”. If this is the case, the process of rewriting the fake precursor to the Bonus precursor is performed. Then, when the process of step S302-3-1-2-5-6-15 ends, the process proceeds to step S302-3-1-2-5-6-16.

(Step S302-3-1-2-5-6-16)
In step S302-3-1-2-5-6-16, the sub CPU 401 performs a Bonus winning process. Specifically, the sub CPU 401 sets the value of the fake type variable storage area provided in the sub RAM 403, the value of the fake game number counter, the value of the first chance precursor state game number counter, the number of second chance precursor state games. Processing is performed to clear the counter value, the third chance precursor state game number counter value, the fourth chance precursor state game number counter value, and the fifth chance precursor state game number counter value. In addition, the sub CPU 401 sets “0” to the value set in the Bonus omen game counter provided in the sub RAM 403 by the normal omen lottery process in step S302-3-1-2-5-6-14. In this case, in the next game, the Bonus preparation state is set in the state storage area provided in the sub RAM 403 so that the state managed by the sub control board 400 becomes the Bonus preparation state, and step S302-3- When the value set in the Bonus precursor game number counter provided in the sub RAM 403 is “1” or more by the normal precursor lottery process of 1-2-5-6-14, in the next game, A state provided in the sub-RAM 403 so that the state managed by the control board 400 becomes a Bonus precursor state It performs a process of setting the Bonus aura state paid area. When the process of step S302-3-1-2-5-6-16 ends, the subroutine for the fifth chance precursor state process ends, and step S302-3-1-2 of the condition device command reception process ends. The process is shifted to -6.

(Step S302-3-1-2-5-6-17)
In step S302-3-1-2-5-6-17, the sub CPU 401 performs a first chance state lottery process. Specifically, the sub CPU 401 performs a lottery to determine whether or not to shift to the first chance state based on the first chance state transition lottery table (see FIG. 51) provided in the sub ROM 402, and determines the lottery. After winning, after updating the value of the first chance state winning flag storage area provided in the sub RAM 403 and performing a lottery to shift to either the third chance precursor state or the fourth chance precursor state The number of precursor games until the transition to the first chance state is determined by lottery, and the determined number of precursor games is the third chance precursor state game number counter provided in the sub-RAM 403 or the fourth chance precursor state game number Performs processing to set the counter. In addition, the sub CPU 401 stores the second CPU in the state storage area provided in the sub RAM 403 so that the state managed by the sub control board 400 becomes the third chance precursor state or the fourth chance precursor state. A process of setting a 3 chance sign state or a fourth chance sign state is performed. Then, when the process of step S302-3-1-2-5-6-17 ends, the process proceeds to step S302-3-1-2-5-6-18.

(Step S302-3-1-2-5-6-18)
In step S302-3-1-2-5-6-18, the sub CPU 401 performs a process of determining whether or not the state managed by the sub control board 400 is the first chance state in the next game. . Specifically, the sub CPU 401 determines whether or not the state managed by the sub control board 400 is the first chance state in the next game based on the value of the state storage area provided in the sub RAM 403. Processing to determine is performed. In the next game, when it is determined that the state managed by the sub control board 400 is the first chance state (step S302-3-1-2-5-6-18 = Yes), The subroutine for the 5-chance precursory state process is terminated, and the process proceeds to step S302-3-1-2-6 in the condition device command reception process. On the other hand, if it is determined in the next game that the state managed by the sub-control board 400 is not the first chance state (step S302-3-1-2-5-6-18 = No), the step The process proceeds to S302-3-1-2-5-6-19.

(Step S302-3-1-2-5-6-19)
In step S302-3-1-2-5-6-19, the sub CPU 401 performs processing to determine whether or not the value of the fifth chance precursor state game number counter is “0”. Specifically, the sub CPU 401 performs a process of determining whether or not the value of the fifth chance precursor state game number counter provided in the sub RAM 403 is “0”. If it is determined that the value of the fifth chance precursor state game number counter is “0” (step S302-3-1-2-5-6-19 = Yes), step S302-3-1 is performed. When the process proceeds to -2-5-6-20 and it is determined that the value of the fifth chance precursor state game number counter is not “0” (step S302-3-1-2-5-6) −19 = No), the fifth chance precursor state processing subroutine is terminated, and the processing shifts to step S302-3-1-2-6 of the conditional device command reception processing.

(Step S302-3-1-2-5-6-20)
In step S <b> 302-3-2-5-6-20, the sub CPU 401 performs a process for determining whether or not the precursor extension flag is OFF. Specifically, the sub CPU 401 performs processing for determining whether or not the precursor extension flag is OFF based on the value of the precursor extension flag storage area provided in the sub RAM 403. If it is determined that the sign extension flag is OFF (step S302-3-1-2-5-6-20 = Yes), the process proceeds to step S302-3-1-2-5-6-21. When the process proceeds and it is determined that the sign extension flag is not OFF (step S302-3-1-2-5-6-20 = No), step S302-3-1-2-5-6 The process is shifted to -22.

(Step S302-3-1-2-5-6-21)
In step S302-3-1-2-5-6-21, the sub CPU 401 performs a second chance state entry process. Specifically, when the value of the normal state point storage area provided in the sub RAM 403 is less than “33”, the sub CPU 401 performs a process of setting “33” and is provided in the sub RAM 403. The second chance state winning flag in the stored second chance state winning flag storage area is turned OFF, and in the next game, the state managed by the sub control board 400 becomes the second chance precursor state in the sub RAM 403. A process of setting the second chance precursor state in the provided state storage area is performed. When the processing of step S302-3-1-2-5-6-21 is completed, the fifth chance precursor state processing subroutine is terminated, and step S302-3-1-2 of the conditional device command reception processing is completed. The process is shifted to -6.

(Step S302-3-1-2-5-6-22)
In step S302-3-1-2-5-6-22, the sub CPU 401 performs a specific trigger sign lottery process. Specifically, the sub CPU 401 performs a process of determining a precursor scenario by lottery and storing it in a precursor scenario number storage area provided in the sub RAM 403. Further, when a value other than “0” is stored in the precursor scenario number storage area provided in the sub RAM 403, the sub CPU 401 determines the number of precursor games by lottery, and the sub CPU 403 is provided in the sub RAM 403. A process of setting the 5-chance precursory state game number counter is performed. Further, the sub CPU 401 performs a process of turning on the precursor extension flag in the precursor extension flag storage area provided in the sub RAM 403. Then, when the process of step S302-3-1-2-5-6-22 ends, the process proceeds to step S302-3-1-2-5-6-23.

(Step S302-3-1-2-5-6-23)
In step S302-3-1-2-5-6-23, the sub CPU 401 performs a fifth chance precursor state game number counter setting process. Specifically, the sub CPU 401 adds “1” to the number of precursor games determined by the specific trigger time precursor lottery process, and sets the value of the fifth chance precursor state game number counter provided in the sub RAM 403 to “ 1 ”Addition processing is performed. Then, when the process of step S302-3-1-2-5-6-23 ends, the process proceeds to step S302-3-1-2-5-6-24.

(Step S302-3-1-2-5-6-24)
In step S302-3-1-2-5-6-24, the sub CPU 401 performs processing for turning off the precursor extension flag. Specifically, the sub CPU 401 performs processing for turning off the precursor extension flag in the precursor extension flag storage area provided in the sub RAM 403. When the process of step S302-3-1-2-5-6-24 is completed, the fifth chance precursor state process subroutine is terminated, and step S302-3-1-2 of the conditional device command reception process is terminated. The process is shifted to -6.

(Process for Bonus precursor state)
Next, based on FIG. 125, in the state-specific transition processing in step S302-3-1-2-5 in FIG. 117, the Bonus precursor state that is performed when the state managed by the sub-control board 400 is the Bonus precursor state. The processing will be described. FIG. 125 is a diagram showing a subroutine of the Bonus precursor state process.

(Step S302-3-1-2-5-7-1)
In step S302-3-1-2-5-7-1, the sub CPU 401 performs ceiling subtraction processing. Specifically, the sub CPU 401 performs a process of subtracting “1” from the value of the ceiling game number counter provided in the sub RAM 403. Then, when the process of step S302-3-1-2-5-7-1 ends, the process proceeds to step S302-3-1-2-5-7-2.

(Step S302-3-1-2-5-7-2)
In step S302-3-1-2-5-7-2, the sub CPU 401 performs a normal counter subtraction process. Specifically, when the value of the Bonus omen game number counter provided in the sub RAM 403 is “1” or more, the sub CPU 401 determines the value of the Bonus omen game number counter provided in the sub RAM 403. The process of subtracting “1” from the value, or (b) the value of the fake game number counter provided in the sub RAM 403 when the value of the fake game number counter provided in the sub RAM 403 is “1” or more. The process of subtracting “1” from is performed. Then, when the process of step S302-3-1-2-5-7-2 ends, the process proceeds to step S302-3-1-2-5-7-3.

(Step S302-3-1-2-5-7-3)
In step S302-3-1-2-5-7-3, the sub CPU 401 performs a process of determining whether or not the winning number is “05”. Specifically, the sub CPU 401 performs a process of determining whether or not the information related to the winning combination included in the conditional device command received from the main control board 300 is the winning number “05”. If it is determined that the winning number is “05” (step S302-3-1-2-5-7-3 = Yes), step S302-3-1-2-5-7-4 is performed. If it is determined that the winning number is not “05” (step S302-3-1-2-5-7-3 = No), step S302-3-1-2-5 is performed. The process is shifted to -7-5.

(Step S302-3-1-2-5-7-4)
In step S302-3-1-2-5-7-4, the sub CPU 401 performs a direct hit winning process. Specifically, the sub CPU 401 (a) updates the Bonus winning opportunity storage area provided in the sub RAM 403, (b) the third chance state game number counter provided in the sub RAM 403, A process of clearing the 4-chance state game number counter, etc., (c) an ART initial hit process described later, and (d) a Bonus winning process described later are performed. When the process of step S302-3-1-2-5-7-4 is completed, the Bonus precursor state process subroutine is terminated, and step S302-3-1-2-6 of the conditional device command reception process is terminated. The process is transferred to.

(Step S302-3-1-2-5-7-5)
In step S <b> 302-3-1-2-5-7-5, the sub CPU 401 performs processing for determining whether or not the winning number is “20” to “30”. Specifically, the sub CPU 401 determines whether or not the information related to the winning combination included in the conditional device command received from the main control board 300 is any of the winning numbers “20” to “30”. Perform the process. If it is determined that the winning number is any one of “20” to “30” (step S302-3-1-2-5-7-5 = Yes), step S302-3-1- If the process shifts to 2-5-7-6 and it is determined that the winning number is not “20” to “30” (step S302-3-1-2-5-7-5) = No), the process proceeds to step S302-3-1-2-5-7-9.

(Step S302-3-1-2-5-7-6)
In step S302-3-1-2-5-7-6, the sub CPU 401 performs a specific role ceiling determination process. Specifically, the sub CPU 401 determines that the information related to the winning combination included in the conditional device command received from the main control board 300 is any one of the winning numbers “20” to “30”. The process of adding “1” to the value of the specified combination winning number counter provided in the sub RAM 403 is performed, and the value of the specified combination winning number counter provided in the sub RAM 403 reaches a predetermined number. In the next game, the state managed by the sub-control board 400 becomes the first chance precursor state so that the state managed by the sub-control board 400 becomes the first chance precursor state. Perform the setting process. Further, the sub CPU 401 determines whether to shift to the third chance state or the fourth chance state by lottery, and based on the result of the lottery, the sub CPU 401 sets the third chance state stock counter provided in the sub RAM 403. A process of adding “1” to the value or the value of the fourth chance state stock counter is performed. Then, when the process of step S302-3-1-2-5-7-6 ends, the process proceeds to step S302-3-1-2-5-7-7.

(Step S302-3-1-2-5-7-7)
In step S302-3-1-2-5-7-7, the sub CPU 401 determines whether the value of the third chance state stock counter or the value of the fourth chance state stock counter is “1” or more. Processing to determine is performed. Specifically, whether the value of the third chance state stock counter provided in the sub RAM 403 or the value of the fourth chance state stock counter provided in the sub RAM 403 is “1” or more. Processing to determine whether or not. When it is determined that the value of the third chance state stock counter or the value of the fourth chance state stock counter is “1” or more (step S302-3-1-2-5-7-7). = Yes), the process proceeds to step S302-3-1-2-5-7-8, and the value of the third chance state stock counter or the value of the fourth chance state stock counter is not “1” or more. (Step S302-3-1-2-5-7-7 = No), the process proceeds to step S302-3-1-2-5-7-9.

(Step S302-3-1-2-5-7-8)
In step S <b> 302-3-1-2-5-7-8, the sub CPU 401 performs a process of setting “0” to the value of the first chance precursor state game number counter. Specifically, the sub CPU 401 performs a process of setting “0” to the value of the first chance precursor state game number counter provided in the sub RAM 403. Then, when the process of step S302-3-1-2-5-7-8 ends, the process proceeds to step S302-3-1-2-5-7-9.

(Step S302-3-1-2-5-7-9)
In step S <b> 302-3-2-5-5-9, the sub CPU 401 performs processing for determining whether or not the first Bonus standby or the second Bonus standby is performed. Specifically, the sub CPU 401 performs processing for determining whether or not the first Bonus standby or the second Bonus standby is performed based on the value of the Bonus standby information storage area provided in the sub RAM 403. If it is determined that the first Bonus is waiting or the second Bonus is waiting (Step S302-3-1-2-5-7-9 = Yes), Step S302-3-1-2-5 is performed. When the process proceeds to −7-10 and it is determined that the first Bonus standby or the second Bonus standby is not being performed (Step S302-3-1-2-5-7-9 = No), Step S302 is performed. The process is transferred to 3-1-2-5-7-11.

(Step S302-3-1-2-5-7-10)
In step S302-3-1-2-5-7-10, the sub CPU 401 performs a promotion lottery process. Specifically, the sub CPU 401 determines the advance promotion lottery table (FIG. 65 (A), FIG. 65 (B) provided in the sub ROM 402 based on the value of the Bonus standby information storage area provided in the sub RAM 403. ) Reference), and the selected advance promotion lottery table, information on the winning combination included in the conditional device command, information on whether or not to execute the reel lock effect, and the spinning effect Based on the information regarding whether or not to execute, during the first Bonus standby, the lottery of whether to wait for the second Bonus or the third Bonus standby, and in the second Bonus standby, the third Bonus standby Whether or not the lottery is performed and the result of the lottery is stored in the Bonus standby information storage area provided in the sub-RAM 403 is performed. Then, when the process of step S302-3-1-2-5-7-10 ends, the process proceeds to step S302-3-1-2-5-7-11.

(Step S302-3-1-2-5-7-11)
In step S302-3-1-2-5-7-11, the sub CPU 401 performs a process of subtracting “1” from the value of the Bonus precursor game number counter. Specifically, the sub CPU 401 performs a process of subtracting “1” from the value of the Bonus precursor game number counter provided in the sub RAM 403. Then, when the process of step S302-3-1-2-5-7-11 ends, the process proceeds to step S302-3-1-2-5-7-12.

(Step S302-3-1-2-5-7-12)
In step S302-3-1-2-5-7-12, the sub CPU 401 performs normal point related processing. Specifically, the sub CPU 401 determines the normal state point acquisition lottery table provided in the sub ROM 402 based on the value of the Bonus game number counter provided in the sub RAM 403 (FIGS. 49A and 49). (B), FIG. 49C, FIG. 49D, and FIG. 49E), and the selected normal state point acquisition lottery table and the condition device command received from the main control board 300 Based on the information related to the winning combination included in the game, the lottery process is performed to determine whether or not to acquire the normal state point, and when the lottery is won, the normal state provided in the sub RAM 403 is used. Adds the winning value to the point storage area. Then, when the process of step S302-3-1-2-5-7-12 ends, the process proceeds to step S302-3-1-2-5-7-13.

(Step S302-3-1-2-5-7-13)
In step S <b> 302-3-1-2-5-7-13, the sub CPU 401 performs a process of determining whether or not the value of the Bonus precursor game number counter is “1” or more. Specifically, the sub CPU 401 performs a process of determining whether or not the value of the Bonus precursor game number counter provided in the sub RAM 403 is “1” or more. When it is determined that the value of the Bonus precursor game number counter is “1” or more (step S302-3-1-2-5-7-13 = Yes), step S302-3-1-2 is performed. When the process proceeds to −5-7-14 and it is determined that the value of the Bonus precursor game number counter is not equal to or greater than “1” (step S302-3-1-2-5-7-13 = No) ), The process proceeds to step S302-3-1-2-5-7-15.

(Step S302-3-1-2-5-7-14)
In step S302-3-1-2-5-7-14, the sub CPU 401 performs processing for setting the state managed by the sub control board 400 to the Bonus precursor state in the next game. Specifically, in the next game, the sub CPU 401 sets the Bonus precursor state in the state storage area provided in the sub RAM 403 so that the state managed by the sub control board 400 becomes the Bonus precursor state. I do. When the processing of step S302-3-1-2-5-7-14 is completed, the Bonus precursor state processing subroutine is terminated, and step S302-3-1-2-6 of the conditional device command reception processing is ended. The process is transferred to.

(Step S302-3-1-2-5-7-15)
In step S302-3-1-2-5-7-15, the sub CPU 401 performs processing to determine whether or not the precursor extension flag is ON. Specifically, the sub CPU 401 performs processing for determining whether or not the precursor extension flag is ON based on the value of the precursor extension flag storage area provided in the sub RAM 403. If it is determined that the sign extension flag is ON (step S302-3-1-2-5-7-15 = Yes), the process proceeds to step S302-3-1-2-5-7-16. When the process proceeds and it is determined that the precursor extension flag is not ON (step S302-3-1-2-5-7-15 = No), step S302-3-1-2-5-7 The process is shifted to -19.

(Step S302-3-1-2-5-7-16)
In step S302-3-1-2-5-7-16, the sub CPU 401 performs a specific trigger sign lottery process. Specifically, the sub CPU 401 performs a process of determining a precursor scenario by lottery and storing it in a precursor scenario number storage area provided in the sub RAM 403. Also, when a value other than “0” is stored in the precursor scenario number storage area provided in the sub RAM 403, the sub CPU 401 determines the number of precursor games by lottery, and the Bonus provided in the sub RAM 403. A process of setting the precursor state game number counter is performed. Further, the sub CPU 401 performs a process of turning on the precursor extension flag in the precursor extension flag storage area provided in the sub RAM 403. Then, when the process of step S302-3-1-2-5-7-16 ends, the process proceeds to step S302-3-1-2-5-7-17.

(Step S302-3-1-2-5-7-17)
In step S302-3-1-2-5-7-17, the sub CPU 401 performs a Bonus precursor state game number counter setting process. Specifically, the sub-CPU 401 adds “1” to the value of the Bonus precursor state game number counter provided in the sub-RAM 403 in order to add “1” to the number of precursor games determined by the specific trigger time lottery process. Perform the addition process. Then, when the process of step S302-3-1-2-5-7-17 ends, the process proceeds to step S302-3-1-2-5-7-18.

(Step S302-3-1-2-5-7-18)
In step S302-3-1-2-5-7-18, the sub CPU 401 performs processing for turning off the precursor extension flag. Specifically, the sub CPU 401 performs processing for turning off the precursor extension flag in the precursor extension flag storage area provided in the sub RAM 403. When the process of step S302-3-1-2-5-7-18 ends, the subroutine of the Bonus precursor state process ends, and step S302-3-1-2-6 of the conditional device command reception process ends. The process is transferred to.

(Step S302-3-1-2-5-7-19)
In step S302-3-1-2-5-7-19, the sub CPU 401 performs processing for setting the state managed by the sub control board 400 to the Bonus preparation state in the next game. Specifically, in the next game, the sub CPU 401 sets the Bonus preparation state in the state storage area provided in the sub RAM 403 so that the state managed by the sub control board 400 becomes the Bonus preparation state. I do. Then, when the process of step S302-3-1-2-5-7-19 ends, the process proceeds to step S302-3-1-2-5-7-20.

(Step S302-3-1-2-5-7-20)
In step S302-3-1-2-5-7-20, the sub CPU 401 performs processing for setting a rare combination as the Bonus winning opportunity type. Specifically, the sub CPU 401 performs processing for storing information indicating that the state has shifted to the Bonus preparation state due to the rare role in the Bonus winning opportunity storage area provided in the sub RAM 403. When the process of step S302-3-1-2-5-7-20 ends, the subroutine of the Bonus precursor state process ends, and step S302-3-1-2-6 of the conditional device command reception process ends. The process is transferred to.

  In the present embodiment, “rare role” means “chance eye replay CR2” with winning number “24”, “watermelon” with winning number “25”, “weak cherry” with winning number “26”, winning number “27” “strong cherry”, winning number “28” “middle cherry”, winning number “29” “chance eye CN1”, and winning number “30” “chance eye CN2”. In addition, through the internal lottery process, the “watermelon play” with the winning number “20”, the “weak cherry replay” with the winning number “21”, the “strong cherry replay” with the winning number “22”, and the “chance” with the winning number “23”. Also, when “eye replay CR1” is determined and the combination of these symbols is permitted to be displayed on the active line by the ART lottery combination conversion process of step S302-3-2-1-1, it is also referred to as “rare combination”. There is a case.

(First chance state processing)
Next, based on FIG. 126, the first process performed when the state managed by the sub-control board 400 is the first chance state in the state-by-state transition process in step S302-3-1-2-5 in FIG. The chance state process will be described. FIG. 126 is a diagram showing a first chance state processing subroutine.

(Step S302-3-1-2-5-8-1)
In step S302-3-1-2-5-8-1, the sub CPU 401 performs ceiling subtraction processing. Specifically, the sub CPU 401 performs a process of subtracting “1” from the value of the ceiling game number counter provided in the sub RAM 403. Then, when the process of step S302-3-1-2-5-8-1 ends, the process proceeds to step S302-3-1-2-5-8-2.

(Step S302-3-1-2-5-8-2)
In step S302-3-1-2-5-8-2, the sub CPU 401 performs processing to determine whether or not the winning number is “05”. Specifically, the sub CPU 401 performs a process of determining whether or not the information related to the winning combination included in the conditional device command received from the main control board 300 is the winning number “05”. And when it determines with a winning number being "05" (step S302-3-1-2-5-8-2 = Yes), step S302-3-1-2-5-8-3 If it is determined that the winning number is not “05” (step S302-3-1-2-5-8-2 = No), step S302-3-1-2-5 is performed. The process is shifted to -8-5.

(Step S302-3-1-2-5-8-3)
In step S302-3-1-2-5-8-3, the sub CPU 401 performs a direct hit winning process. Specifically, the sub CPU 401 (a) updates the Bonus winning opportunity storage area provided in the sub RAM 403, (b) the third chance state game number counter provided in the sub RAM 403, A process of clearing the 4-chance state game number counter, etc., (c) an ART initial hit process described later, and (d) a Bonus winning process described later are performed. When the process of step S302-3-1-2-5-8-3 ends, the process proceeds to step S302-3-1-2-5-8-4.

(Step S302-3-1-2-5-8-4)
In step S302-3-1-2-5-8-4, the sub CPU 401 performs a first chance state clear process. Specifically, the sub CPU 401 performs a process of setting “0” to the value of the first chance state game number counter provided in the sub RAM 403. When the processing of step S302-3-1-2-5-8-4 is completed, the first chance state processing subroutine is terminated, and step S302-3-1-2 of the conditional device command reception processing is terminated. The processing is shifted to 6.

(Step S302-3-1-2-5-8-5)
In step S302-3-1-2-5-8-5, the sub CPU 401 performs a process of subtracting “1” from the value of the first chance state game number counter. Specifically, the sub CPU 401 performs a process of subtracting “1” from the value of the first chance state game number counter provided in the sub RAM 403. Then, when the process of step S302-3-1-2-5-8-5 ends, the process proceeds to step S302-3-1-2-5-8-6.

(Step S302-3-1-2-5-8-6)
In step S302-3-1-2-5-8-6, the sub CPU 401 determines whether or not the winning number is “20” to “30”. Specifically, the sub CPU 401 determines whether or not the information related to the winning combination included in the conditional device command received from the main control board 300 is any of the winning numbers “20” to “30”. Perform the process. When it is determined that the winning number is any one of “20” to “30” (step S302-3-1-2-5-8-6 = Yes), step S302-3-1-1 The process proceeds to 2-5-8-7, and when it is determined that the winning number is not “20” to “30” (step S302-3-1-2-5-8-6). = No), the process proceeds to step S302-3-1-2-5-8-10.

(Step S302-3-1-2-5-8-7)
In step S302-3-1-2-5-8-7, the sub CPU 401 performs a specific role ceiling determination process. Specifically, the sub CPU 401 determines that the information related to the winning combination included in the conditional device command received from the main control board 300 is any one of the winning numbers “20” to “30”. The process of adding “1” to the value of the specified combination winning number counter provided in the sub RAM 403 is performed, and the value of the specified combination winning number counter provided in the sub RAM 403 reaches a predetermined number. In the next game, the state managed by the sub-control board 400 becomes the first chance precursor state so that the state managed by the sub-control board 400 becomes the first chance precursor state. Perform the setting process. Further, the sub CPU 401 determines whether to shift to the third chance state or the fourth chance state by lottery, and based on the result of the lottery, the sub CPU 401 sets the third chance state stock counter provided in the sub RAM 403. A process of adding “1” to the value or the value of the fourth chance state stock counter is performed. Then, when the process of step S302-3-1-2-5-8-7 ends, the process proceeds to step S302-3-1-2-5-8-8.

(Step S302-3-1-2-5-8-8)
In step S302-3-1-2-5-8-8, the sub CPU 401 determines whether or not the value of the third chance state stock counter or the value of the fourth chance state stock counter is “1” or more. Processing to determine is performed. Specifically, whether the value of the third chance state stock counter provided in the sub RAM 403 or the value of the fourth chance state stock counter provided in the sub RAM 403 is “1” or more. Processing to determine whether or not. When it is determined that the value of the third chance state stock counter or the value of the fourth chance state stock counter is “1” or more (step S302-3-1-2-5-8-8). = Yes), the process proceeds to step S302-3-1-2-5-8-9, and the value of the third chance state stock counter or the value of the fourth chance state stock counter is not “1” or more. Is determined (step S302-3-1-2-5-8-8 = No), the process proceeds to step S302-3-1-2-5-8-10.

(Step S302-3-1-2-5-8-9)
In step S302-3-1-2-5-8-9, the sub CPU 401 performs a process of setting “0” to the value of the first chance precursor state game number counter. Specifically, the sub CPU 401 performs a process of setting “0” to the value of the first chance precursor state game number counter provided in the sub RAM 403. Then, when the process of step S302-3-1-2-5-8-9 ends, the process proceeds to step S302-3-1-2-5-8-10.

(Step S302-3-1-2-5-8-10)
In step S302-3-1-2-5-8-10, the sub CPU 401 determines whether or not the value of the first chance state game number counter is “1” or more. Specifically, the sub CPU 401 subtracts “1” from the value of the first chance state game number counter provided in the sub RAM 403 by the process of step S302-3-1-2-5-8-5. Then, a process of determining whether or not the value of the first chance state game number counter provided in the sub RAM 403 is “1” or more is performed. When it is determined that the value of the first chance state game number counter is “1” or more (step S302-3-1-2-5-8-10 = Yes), step S302-3-1 is performed. The process proceeds to -2-5-8-11, and when it is determined that the value of the first chance state game number counter is not equal to or greater than “1” (step S302-3-1-2-5-8). −10 = No), the process proceeds to step S302-3-1-2-5-8-12.

(Step S302-3-1-2-5-8-11)
In step S302-3-1-2-5-8-11, the sub CPU 401 performs a point lottery process during the first chance state. Specifically, the sub CPU 401 includes information related to the winning combination included in the conditional device command received from the main control board 300, and a first chance state point acquisition lottery table provided in the sub ROM 402 (FIG. 57). Based on (A), a process for lottering whether or not to acquire a normal state point is performed. If the lottery is won, the normal state point storage area provided in the sub-RAM 403 is won. A process of adding the values obtained is performed. Then, when the process of step S302-3-1-2-5-8-11 ends, the process proceeds to step S302-3-1-2-5-8-12.

(Step S302-3-1-2-5-8-12)
In step S302-3-1-2-5-8-12, the sub CPU 401 performs processing to determine whether or not the Bonus is not in standby. Specifically, the sub CPU 401 performs a process of determining whether or not the Bonus is not in standby based on the value of the Bonus standby information storage area provided in the sub RAM 403. If it is determined that the Bonus is not in standby (step S302-3-1-2-5-8-12 = Yes), the process proceeds to step S302-3-1-2-5-8-13. If it is determined that the device is not in a non-standby state (step S302-3-1-2-5-8-12 = No), step S302-3-1-2-5-8-14 The process is transferred to.

(Step S302-3-1-2-5-8-13)
In step S302-3-1-2-5-8-13, the sub CPU 401 performs a Bonus preparation state transition lottery process. Specifically, when the current mode is the specific mode, the sub CPU 401 determines the Bonus based on the specific mode Bonus preparation state transition lottery table (see FIG. 63B) provided in the sub ROM 402. If the current mode is the normal mode, a lottery table for normal mode Bonus preparation state transfer lottery table provided in the sub ROM 402 (see FIG. 63A) is performed. ) To perform lottery processing to determine whether or not to shift to the Bonus preparation state. Then, when the process of step S302-3-1-2-5-8-13 ends, the process proceeds to step S302-3-1-2-5-8-14.

(Step S302-3-1-2-5-8-14)
In step S302-3-1-2-5-8-14, the sub CPU 401 performs processing for determining whether or not the transition to the Bonus preparation state has been won. Specifically, the sub CPU 401 determines whether or not it is determined to shift to the Bonus preparation state as a result of the lottery process by the Bonus preparation state transition lottery process in Step S302-3-1-2-5-8-13. Perform the process. If it is determined that the Bonus preparation state transition is won (step S302-3-1-2-5-8-14 = Yes), the process proceeds to step S302-3-1-2-5-8-15. When it is determined that the process is shifted and the Bonus preparation state shift is not won (step S302-3-1-2-5-8-14 = No), step S302-3-1-2-5 is performed. The process is shifted to -8-16.

(Step S302-3-1-2-5-8-15)
In step S302-3-1-2-5-8-15, the sub CPU 401 performs a Bonus standby distribution process. Specifically, when the current mode is the specific mode, the sub CPU 401 performs the bonus preparation state transition lottery process in step S302-3-1-2-5-8-13, and as a result, enters the bonus preparation state. When it is determined to shift, based on the Bonus state distribution lottery table (specific mode) provided in the sub ROM 402 (see FIG. 64 (B)), waiting for the first Bonus, waiting for the second Bonus, As a result of performing the Bonus preparation state transition lottery process in Step S302-3-1-2-5-8-13 when the third Bonus standby is determined and the current mode is the normal mode, the Bonus preparation When it is decided to shift to the state, the Bonus state distribution lottery table (normal mode) provided in the sub ROM 402 is determined. ) Based on (FIG. 64 (A) refer) performs waiting the 1Bonus, waiting a 2Bonus, the process of determining either of the 3Bonus waiting. Further, the sub CPU 401 performs processing of storing in the Bonus standby information storage area provided in the sub RAM 403 when it is determined that the first Bonus standby, the second Bonus standby, or the third Bonus standby is determined. When the process of step S302-3-1-2-5-8-15 ends, the subroutine for the first chance state process ends, and step S302-3-1-2 of the conditional device command reception process ends. The processing is shifted to 6.

(Step S302-3-1-2-5-8-16)
In step S302-3-1-2-5-8-16, the sub CPU 401 performs a second chance state lottery process. Specifically, the sub CPU 401 determines the second chance state transition lottery table provided in the sub ROM 402 based on the value of the normal state point storage area provided in the sub RAM 403 (FIG. 52A, FIG. 52 (B), FIG. 52 (C), and FIG. 52 (D)) are selected and included in the selected second chance state transition lottery table and the condition device command received from the main control board 300. Based on the information related to the winning combination, a process of lottery is performed to determine whether or not to shift to the second chance state. The second chance state winning flag stored in the second chance state winning flag storage area is turned on. Then, when the process of step S302-3-1-2-5-8-16 ends, the process proceeds to step S302-3-1-2-5-8-17.

(Step S302-3-1-2-5-8-17)
In step S <b> 302-3-2-5-5-17, the sub CPU 401 performs processing for determining whether or not the first Bonus standby or the second Bonus standby is performed. Specifically, the sub CPU 401 performs processing for determining whether or not the first Bonus standby or the second Bonus standby is performed based on the value of the Bonus standby information storage area provided in the sub RAM 403. If it is determined that the first Bonus is waiting or the second Bonus is waiting (Step S302-3-1-2-5-8-17 = Yes), Step S302-3-1-2-5 is performed. When the process proceeds to −8-18 and it is determined that the first Bonus is not waiting or the second Bonus is not waiting (Step S302-3-1-2-5-8-17 = No), Step S302 is performed. The process is transferred to 3-1-2-5-8-19.

(Step S302-3-1-2-5-8-18)
In step S302-3-1-2-5-8-18, the sub CPU 401 performs a promotion lottery process. Specifically, the sub CPU 401 selects the advance promotion lottery table (see FIGS. 65A and 65B) based on the value of the Bonus standby information storage area provided in the sub RAM 403, Whether or not to wait for the second Bonus or the third Bonus during the first Bonus waiting based on the selected sign promotion lottery table and the information related to the winning combination included in the conditional device command During the second lottery and the second Bonus standby, a lottery is performed to determine whether or not the third Bonus standby is to be performed, and a process of storing the lottery result in the Bonus standby information storage area provided in the sub RAM 403 is performed. Then, when the process of step S302-3-1-2-5-8-18 ends, the process proceeds to step S302-3-1-2-5-8-19.

(Step S302-3-1-2-5-8-19)
In step S302-3-1-2-5-8-19, the sub CPU 401 performs a process of determining whether or not the normal state point is equal to or greater than “110” which is the upper limit value. Specifically, the sub CPU 401 determines, based on the value of the normal state point storage area provided in the sub RAM 403, whether or not the normal state point is equal to or higher than the upper limit “110”. I do. When it is determined that the normal state point is equal to or higher than the upper limit “110” (step S302-3-1-2-5-8-19 = Yes), step S302-3-1-1 is performed. The process proceeds to 2-5-8-20, and when it is determined that the normal state point is not equal to or higher than the upper limit “110” (step S302-3-1-2-5-8-19). = No), the process proceeds to step S302-3-1-2-5-8-22.

(Step S302-3-1-2-5-8-20)
In step S302-3-1-2-5-8-20, the sub CPU 401 performs processing for turning on the second chance state winning flag. Specifically, the sub CPU 401 performs processing for turning on the second chance state winning flag in the second chance state winning flag storage area provided in the sub RAM 403. Then, when the process of step S302-3-1-2-5-8-20 ends, the process proceeds to step S302-3-1-2-5-8-21.

(Step S302-3-1-2-5-8-21)
In step S302-3-1-2-5-8-21, the sub CPU 401 performs processing at the end of the first chance state. Specifically, the sub CPU 401 performs a process of setting “0” to the value of the first chance state game number counter provided in the sub RAM 403. Next, the sub CPU 401 determines whether or not the Bonus standby is based on the value of the Bonus standby information storage area provided in the sub RAM 403. It is determined whether or not the value of the normal state point storage area is equal to or higher than the upper limit “110”, and the value of the normal state point storage area provided in the sub-RAM 403 is the upper limit “ If it is 110 ”or more, processing for setting the Bonus preparation state in the state storage area provided in the sub RAM 403 so that the state managed by the sub control board 400 becomes the Bonus preparation state in the next game. To the Bonus winning opportunity storage area provided in the sub RAM 403 via the chance state, The process of storing information indicating a transition to do. When the value of the normal state point storage area provided in the sub RAM 403 is less than the upper limit “110”, the precursor scenario is determined by lottery, and the precursor scenario number provided in the sub RAM 403 is determined. When processing for storing in the storage area is performed and “0” is stored in the precursor scenario number storage area provided in the sub RAM 403, the state managed by the sub control board 400 in the next game is the Bonus preparation. To set the Bonus preparation state in the state storage area provided in the sub-RAM 403 so that the state becomes the state, the Bonus winning opportunity storage area provided in the sub-RAM 403 has entered the Bonus preparation state due to a rare role The process which stores the information to the effect is performed. On the other hand, when the Bonus standby is not being performed, processing for determining whether or not the second chance state winning flag is ON based on the value of the second chance state winning flag storage area provided in the sub-RAM 403 is performed. When the second chance state winning flag is ON and the value of the third chance state stock counter or the value of the fourth chance state stock counter is “1” or more, the third chance The process for shifting to the state or the fourth chance state is performed, and the pre-lottery lottery process is performed. Further, when the second chance state winning flag is OFF, in the next game, the state managed by the sub-control board 400 is normally set in the state storage area provided in the sub-RAM 403 so that the state is managed. Process to set the state. When the process of step S302-3-1-2-5-8-21 ends, the first chance state process subroutine ends and step S302-3-1-2 of the conditional device command reception process ends. The processing is shifted to 6.

(Step S302-3-1-2-5-8-22)
In step S302-3-1-2-5-8-22, the sub CPU 401 determines whether or not the value of the first chance state game number counter is “0”. Specifically, the sub CPU 401 performs a process of determining whether or not the value of the first chance state game number counter provided in the sub RAM 403 is “0”. If it is determined that the value of the first chance state game number counter is “0” (step S302-3-1-2-5-8-22 = Yes), step S302-3-1-1 The process proceeds to 2-5-8-23, and when it is determined that the value of the first chance state game number counter is not “0” (step S302-3-1-2-5-8-22). = No), the first chance state processing subroutine is terminated, and the process proceeds to step S302-3-1-2-6 in the conditional device command reception process.

(Step S302-3-1-2-5-8-23)
In step S302-3-1-2-5-8-23, the sub CPU 401 performs a first chance state extended lottery process. Specifically, the sub CPU 401 includes information related to the winning combination included in the conditional device command received from the main control board 300, and the first chance state continuous lottery table provided in the sub ROM 402 (FIG. 57 ( B) (see (C)), the lottery process is performed to determine whether or not to continue the first chance state. Then, when the process of step S302-3-1-2-5-8-23 ends, the process proceeds to step S302-3-1-2-5-8-24.

(Step S302-3-1-2-5-8-24)
In step S302-3-1-2-5-8-24, the sub CPU 401 performs a process of determining whether or not it has been won. Specifically, the sub CPU 401 performs a process of determining whether or not the lottery by the first chance state extended lottery process in step S302-3-1-2-5-8-23 has been won. And when it determines with having won (step S302-3-1-2-5-8-24 = Yes), it transfers a process to step S302-3-1-2-5-8-25, When it is determined that it has not been won (step S302-3-1-2-5-8-24 = No), the process proceeds to step S302-3-1-2-5-8-26.

(Step S302-3-1-2-5-8-25)
In step S302-3-1-2-5-8-25, the sub CPU 401 performs processing for setting a first chance state game number counter. Specifically, the sub CPU 401 performs a process of setting “7” to the value of the first chance state game number counter provided in the sub RAM 403. When the process of step S302-3-1-2-5-2-25 is completed, the first chance state process subroutine is ended, and step S302-3-1-2 of the conditional device command reception process is ended. The processing is shifted to 6.

(Step S302-3-1-2-5-8-26)
In step S302-3-1-2-5-8-26, the sub CPU 401 performs processing to determine whether or not the second chance state winning flag is OFF. Specifically, the sub CPU 401 performs processing for determining whether or not the second chance state winning flag is OFF based on the value of the second chance state winning flag storage area provided in the sub RAM 403. If it is determined that the second chance state winning flag is OFF (step S302-3-1-2-5-8-26 = Yes), step S302-3-1-2-5-8. If the process is shifted to -27 and it is determined that the second chance state winning flag is not OFF (step S302-3-1-2-5-8-26 = No), step S302-3-1 The process shifts to -2-5-8-28.

(Step S302-3-1-2-5-8-27)
In step S302-3-1-2-5-8-27, the sub CPU 401 performs a second chance state lottery process during the first chance state. Specifically, the sub CPU 401 determines the second chance state transition lottery table provided in the sub ROM 402 based on the value of the normal state point storage area provided in the sub RAM 403 (FIG. 52E, FIG. 52 (F), FIG. 52 (G), and FIG. 52 (H)) are selected, and are included in the selected second chance state transition lottery table and the condition device command received from the main control board 300. Based on the information related to the winning combination, a process of lottery is performed to determine whether or not to shift to the second chance state. The second chance state winning flag stored in the second chance state winning flag storage area is turned on. Then, when the process of step S302-3-1-2-5-8-27 ends, the process proceeds to step S302-3-1-2-5-8-28.

(Step S302-3-1-2-5-8-28)
In step S302-3-1-2-5-8-28, the sub CPU 401 performs processing at the end of the first chance state. Specifically, the sub CPU 401 performs a process of setting “0” to the value of the first chance state game number counter provided in the sub RAM 403. Next, the sub CPU 401 determines whether or not the Bonus standby is based on the value of the Bonus standby information storage area provided in the sub RAM 403. It is determined whether or not the value of the normal state point storage area is equal to or higher than the upper limit “110”, and the value of the normal state point storage area provided in the sub-RAM 403 is the upper limit “ If it is 110 ”or more, processing for setting the Bonus preparation state in the state storage area provided in the sub RAM 403 so that the state managed by the sub control board 400 becomes the Bonus preparation state in the next game. To the Bonus winning opportunity storage area provided in the sub RAM 403 via the chance state, The process of storing information indicating a transition to do. When the value of the normal state point storage area provided in the sub RAM 403 is less than the upper limit “110”, the precursor scenario is determined by lottery, and the precursor scenario number provided in the sub RAM 403 is determined. When processing for storing in the storage area is performed and “0” is stored in the precursor scenario number storage area provided in the sub RAM 403, the state managed by the sub control board 400 in the next game is the Bonus preparation. To set the Bonus preparation state in the state storage area provided in the sub-RAM 403 so that the state becomes the state, the Bonus winning opportunity storage area provided in the sub-RAM 403 has entered the Bonus preparation state due to a rare role The process which stores the information to the effect is performed. On the other hand, when the Bonus standby is not being performed, processing for determining whether or not the second chance state winning flag is ON based on the value of the second chance state winning flag storage area provided in the sub-RAM 403 is performed. When the second chance state winning flag is ON and the value of the third chance state stock counter or the value of the fourth chance state stock counter is “1” or more, the third chance The process for shifting to the state or the fourth chance state is performed, and the pre-lottery lottery process is performed. Further, when the second chance state winning flag is OFF, in the next game, the state managed by the sub-control board 400 is normally set in the state storage area provided in the sub-RAM 403 so that the state is managed. Process to set the state. When the process of step S302-3-1-2-5-8-28 ends, the subroutine for the first chance state process ends, and step S302-3-1-2 of the conditional device command reception process ends. The processing is shifted to 6.

(Second chance state processing)
Next, based on FIG. 127, the second process performed when the state managed by the sub-control board 400 is the second chance state in the state-by-state transition process in step S302-3-1-2-5 in FIG. The chance state process will be described. FIG. 127 is a diagram showing a subroutine of the second chance state process.

(Step S302-3-1-2-5-9-1)
In step S302-3-1-2-5-9-1, the sub CPU 401 performs ceiling subtraction processing. Specifically, the sub CPU 401 performs a process of subtracting “1” from the value of the ceiling game number counter provided in the sub RAM 403. Then, when the process of step S302-3-1-2-5-9-1 ends, the process proceeds to step S302-3-1-2-5-9-2.

(Step S302-3-1-2-5-9-2)
In step S302-3-1-2-5-9-2, the sub CPU 401 performs processing to determine whether or not the winning number is “05”. Specifically, the sub CPU 401 performs a process of determining whether or not the information related to the winning combination included in the conditional device command received from the main control board 300 is the winning number “05”. If it is determined that the winning number is “05” (step S302-3-1-2-5-9-2 = Yes), step S302-3-1-2-5-9-3 is performed. If it is determined that the winning number is not “05” (step S302-3-1-2-5-9-2 = No), step S302-3-1-2-5 is performed. The process is shifted to -9-5.

(Step S302-3-1-2-5-9-3)
In step S302-3-1-2-5-9-3, the sub CPU 401 performs a direct hit winning process. Specifically, the sub CPU 401 (a) updates the Bonus winning opportunity storage area provided in the sub RAM 403, (b) the third chance state game number counter provided in the sub RAM 403, A process of clearing the 4-chance state game number counter, etc., (c) an ART initial hit process described later, and (d) a Bonus winning process described later are performed. Then, when the process of step S302-3-1-2-5-9-3 ends, the process proceeds to step S302-3-1-2-5-9-4.

(Step S302-3-1-2-5-9-4)
In step S302-3-1-2-5-9-4, the sub CPU 401 performs a second chance state clear process. Specifically, the sub CPU 401 (a) the value of the pseudo-continuous counter provided in the sub RAM 403, (b) the value of the second chance state point storage area provided in the sub RAM 403, (c) Processing for clearing the value of the accumulated second chance state point storage area provided in the sub-RAM 403 is performed. When the process of step S302-3-1-2-5-9-4 ends, the subroutine for the second chance state process ends, and step S302-3-1-2 of the conditional device command reception process ends. The processing is shifted to 6.

(Step S302-3-1-2-5-9-5)
In step S302-3-1-2-5-9-5, the sub CPU 401 performs processing to determine whether or not a character has been determined. Specifically, the sub CPU 401 performs processing for determining whether or not a character has been determined based on the value of the second chance state character information storage area provided in the sub RAM 403. If it is determined that the character has not been determined (step S302-3-1-2-5-9-5 = Yes), the process proceeds to step S302-3-1-2-5-9-6. If it is determined that the character is not yet determined (step S302-3-1-2-5-9-5 = No), step S302-3-1-2-5-9-9 is performed. The process is transferred to.

(Step S302-3-1-2-5-9-6)
In step S302-3-1-2-5-9-6, the sub CPU 401 performs a second chance state character determination process. Specifically, the sub CPU 401 performs processing for determining a character to be used in the second chance state based on a second chance state character lottery table (see FIG. 58A) provided in the sub ROM 402. . Then, when the process of step S302-3-1-2-5-9-6 ends, the process proceeds to step S302-3-1-2-5-9-7.

(Step S302-3-1-2-5-9-7)
In step S302-3-1-2-5-9-7, the sub CPU 401 performs a process of subtracting “1” from the value of the second chance state game number counter. Specifically, the sub CPU 401 performs a process of subtracting “1” from the value of the second chance state game number counter provided in the sub RAM 403. Then, when the process of step S302-3-1-2-5-9-7 ends, the process proceeds to step S302-3-1-2-5-9-8.

(Step S302-3-1-2-5-9-8)
In step S302-3-1-2-5-9-8, the sub CPU 401 performs a process of setting no pseudo continuous effect to the second chance state variable. Specifically, the sub CPU 401 performs a process of setting “no pseudo continuous effect” in the second chance state variable storage area provided in the sub RAM 403. Then, when the process of step S302-3-1-2-5-9-8 ends, the process proceeds to step S302-3-1-2-5-9-9.

(Step S302-3-1-2-5-9-9)
In step S302-3-1-2-5-9-9, the sub CPU 401 performs the second chance state point lottery process. Specifically, the sub CPU 401 determines the second chance state point acquisition lottery table provided in the sub ROM 402 based on the value of the pseudo-continuous counter provided in the sub RAM 403 (FIG. 60A, FIG. 60 (B), FIG. 60 (C), and FIG. 60 (D)), and is included in the selected second chance state point acquisition lottery table and the condition device command received from the main control board 300. On the basis of the information related to the winning combination, whether to execute the reel lock effect included in the conditional device command received from the main control board 300, and whether to execute the spinning effect A process of drawing whether or not to acquire the second chance state point is performed. If the lottery is won, a process of storing the winning value in the second chance state point storage area provided in the sub RAM 403 is performed. Then, when the process of step S302-3-1-2-5-9-9 ends, the process proceeds to step S302-3-1-2-5-9-10.

  On the other hand, the sub CPU 401 determines, in the process of step S302-3-1-2-5-9-9, a second chance state point acquisition lottery table (see FIG. 58B) provided in the sub ROM 402, Based on the value of the pseudo-ream counter provided in the sub-RAM 403, the value of the second chance state point acquired by the player is determined, and the determined value is stored in the second chance state point storage area. Processing to add to and store.

(Step S302-3-1-2-5-9-10)
In step S302-3-1-2-5-9-10, the sub CPU 401 performs the second chance state point addition process. Specifically, the sub CPU 401 uses the value stored in the second chance state point storage area provided in the sub RAM 403 as the accumulated second chance state point storage area provided in the sub RAM 403. Performs processing to add to the value. Then, when the process of step S302-3-1-2-5-9-10 ends, the process proceeds to step S302-3-1-2-5-9-11.

(Step S302-3-1-2-5-9-11)
In step S <b> 302-3-2-5-9-11, the sub CPU 401 performs a process of determining whether or not the second chance state variable is “pseudo train“ 4 ”times” or “reverse rotation”. . Specifically, based on the value of the second chance state variable storage area provided in the sub RAM 403, the sub CPU 401 has the second chance state variable “pseudo-continuous“ 4 ”times” or “reverse”. The process which determines whether or not is performed. When it is determined that the second chance state variable is “pseudo-continuous“ 4 ”times” or “reverse rotation” (step S302-3-1-2-5-9-11 = Yes), step The process proceeds to S302-3-1-2-5-9-12, and when it is determined that the second chance state variable is not “quasi-continuous“ 4 ”times” or “reverse rotation” (step S302). 3-1-2-5-9-11 = No), the process proceeds to step S302-3-1-2-5-9-16.

(Step S302-3-1-2-5-9-12)
In step S302-3-1-2-5-9-12, the sub CPU 401 performs a Bonus standby distribution process. Specifically, the sub CPU 401 waits for the first Bonus, the second Bonus, and the third Bonus based on the Bonus state distribution lottery table (normal mode) provided in the sub ROM 402 (see FIG. 64A). Processing for determining one of the waiting is performed. Further, the sub CPU 401 performs processing of storing in the Bonus standby information storage area provided in the sub RAM 403 when it is determined that the first Bonus standby, the second Bonus standby, or the third Bonus standby is determined. Then, when the process of step S302-3-1-2-5-9-12 ends, the process proceeds to step S302-3-1-2-5-9-13.

(Step S302-3-1-2-5-9-13)
In step S302-3-1-2-5-9-13, the sub CPU 401 performs processing for setting the state managed by the sub control board 400 to the Bonus preparation state in the next game. Specifically, in the next game, the sub CPU 401 sets the Bonus preparation state in the state storage area provided in the sub RAM 403 so that the state managed by the sub control board 400 becomes the Bonus preparation state. I do. Then, when the process of step S302-3-1-2-5-9-13 ends, the process proceeds to step S302-3-1-2-5-9-14.

(Step S302-3-1-2-5-9-14)
In step S302-3-1-2-5-9-14, the sub CPU 401 performs a process of setting the second chance state via as a Bonus winning opportunity. Specifically, the sub CPU 401 performs processing for storing information indicating that the state has shifted to the Bonus preparation state via the chance state in the Bonus winning opportunity storage area provided in the sub RAM 403. Then, when the process of step S302-3-1-2-5-9-14 ends, the process proceeds to step S302-3-1-2-5-9-15.

(Step S302-3-1-2-5-9-15)
In step S302-3-1-2-5-9-15, the sub CPU 401 performs a second chance state clear process. Specifically, the sub CPU 401 (a) the value of the pseudo-continuous counter provided in the sub RAM 403, (b) the value of the second chance state point storage area provided in the sub RAM 403, (c) Processing for clearing the value of the accumulated second chance state point storage area provided in the sub-RAM 403 is performed. When the processing of step S302-3-1-2-5-9-15 is completed, the first chance state processing subroutine is terminated, and step S302-3-1-2 of the conditional device command reception processing is terminated. The processing is shifted to 6.

(Step S302-3-1-2-5-9-16)
In step S302-3-1-2-5-9-16, the sub CPU 401 performs processing for determining whether or not the value of the pseudo-continuous effect counter is less than “3”. Specifically, the sub CPU 401 performs a process of determining whether or not the value of the pseudo continuous effect counter provided in the sub RAM 403 is less than “3”. If it is determined that the value of the pseudo-continuous effect counter is less than “3” (step S302-3-1-2-5-9-16 = Yes), step S302-3-1-2-2 is performed. If the process proceeds to 5-9-17 and it is determined that the value of the pseudo-continuous effect counter is not less than “3” (step S302-3-1-2-5-9-16 = No), The process proceeds to step S302-3-1-2-5-9-18.

(Step S302-3-1-2-5-9-17)
In step S302-3-1-2-5-9-17, the sub CPU 401 performs a process of determining whether or not the cumulative second chance state point value is equal to or greater than the pseudo-separation threshold value. Specifically, the sub CPU 401 determines whether or not the value of the accumulated second chance state point storage area provided in the sub RAM 403 is equal to or greater than the pseudo-separation threshold value preliminarily defined for each pseudo-continuous performance. Perform the process. If it is determined that the accumulated second chance state point value is equal to or greater than the pseudo-separation threshold (step S302-3-1-2-5-9-17 = Yes), step S302-3- When the process proceeds to 1-2-5-9-19 and it is determined that the accumulated second chance state point value is not equal to or greater than the pseudo-separation threshold (step S302-3-1-2-5). −9−17 = No), the process proceeds to step S302-3-1-2-5-9-18.

(Step S302-3-1-2-5-9-18)
In step S302-3-1-2-5-9-18, the sub CPU 401 performs processing to determine whether or not the value of the second chance state point is equal to or greater than the pseudo continuous continuation threshold. Specifically, the sub CPU 401 determines whether or not the value of the second chance state point storage area provided in the sub RAM 403 is equal to or larger than a pre-defined pseudo-continuation threshold value for each pseudo-continuous number. Perform the process. If it is determined that the value of the second chance state point is equal to or greater than the pseudo continuous continuation threshold (step S302-3-1-2-5-9-18 = Yes), step S302-3- When the process proceeds to 1-2-5-9-19 and it is determined that the value of the second chance state point is not equal to or greater than the pseudo continuous continuation threshold (step S302-3-1-2-5). −9−18 = No), the process proceeds to step S302-3-1-2-5-9-20.

(Step S302-3-1-2-5-9-19)
In step S302-3-1-2-5-9-19, the sub CPU 401 performs a second chance state variable setting process. Specifically, when the value of the pseudo continuous counter provided in the sub RAM 403 is “1”, the sub CPU 401 displays “pseudo continuous effect” in the second chance state variable storage area provided in the sub RAM 403. When the information related to “1” times is stored and the value of the pseudo continuous counter provided in the sub RAM 403 is “2”, the “pseudo continuous state” is stored in the second chance state variable storage area provided in the sub RAM 403. When information related to the production “2” times is stored and the value of the pseudo-continuous counter provided in the sub RAM 403 is “3”, the second chance state variable storage area provided in the sub RAM 403 stores “ Processing for storing information related to the pseudo-continuous performance “3” times is performed. When the process of step S302-3-1-2-5-9-19 ends, the subroutine for the second chance state process ends, and step S302-3-1-2 of the conditional device command reception process ends. The processing is shifted to 6.

  In the second chance state variable setting process in step S302-3-1-2-5-9-19, the value of the accumulated second chance state point storage area provided in the sub RAM 403 is equal to or greater than the pseudo-separation threshold. In some cases, or when the value of the second chance state point storage area provided in the sub RAM 403 is equal to or greater than the pseudo-separation threshold, processing for setting a second chance state variable is performed. Specifically, the sub CPU 401 performs a process of continuing the pseudo-continuous effect when the information related to the winning combination included in the conditional device command received from the main control board 300 is a rare combination. Thereby, in the case where the pseudo-continuous effect is being executed, the disappointment of the player due to the fact that the pseudo-continuous effect ends even though the rare combination is won can be resolved. However, if the value of the pseudo-continuous effect counter provided in the sub RAM 403 is “3” or more as a result of the process of step S302-3-1-2-5-9-16, step S302-3-1-1— The second chance state variable setting process of 2-5-9-19 is not performed. This is because in the present embodiment, the pseudo-continuous production is to be continued “4” times only when shifting to the Bonus state.

(Step S302-3-1-2-5-9-20)
In step S302-3-1-2-5-9-20, the sub CPU 401 performs a second chance state process which will be described in detail later with reference to FIG. In the process, the sub CPU 401 performs a process of drawing whether or not to shift to the Bonus preparation state in the second chance state. When the process of step S302-3-1-2-5-9-20 ends, the subroutine for the second chance state process ends, and step S302-3-1-2 of the conditional device command reception process ends. The processing is shifted to 6.

(Second chance state processing)
Next, based on FIG. 128, the second chance state process performed by the process of step S302-3-1-2-5-9-20 of FIG. 127 will be described. FIG. 128 is a diagram showing a subroutine of processing in the second chance state.

(Step S302-3-1-2-5-9-20-1)
In step S302-3-1-2-5-9-20-1, the sub CPU 401 performs a second chance state bonus preparation state transition lottery process. Specifically, the sub CPU 401 determines a judgment lottery table (FIGS. 59A, 59B, 59) provided in the sub ROM 402 based on the value of the pseudo-ream counter provided in the sub RAM 403. (C), see FIG. 59D), and based on the selected judge lottery table and the value of the accumulated second chance state point storage area provided in the sub-RAM 403, the second chance state Process to draw lots of variables. Then, when the process of step S302-3-1-2-5-9-20-1 ends, the process proceeds to step S302-3-1-2-5-9-20-2.

(Step S302-3-1-2-5-9-20-2)
In step S302-3-1-2-5-9-20-2, the sub CPU 401 performs a second chance state variable setting process. Specifically, the sub CPU 401 stores, in the sub RAM 403, the second chance state variable determined by the second chance state Bonus preparation state transition lottery process in step S302-3-1-2-5-9-20-1. A process of storing in the second chance state variable storage area provided is performed. Then, when the process of step S302-3-1-2-5-9-20-2 ends, the process proceeds to step S302-3-1-2-5-9-20-3.

(Step S302-3-1-2-5-9-20-3)
In step S302-3-1-2-5-9-20-3, the sub CPU 401 performs processing to determine whether or not the second chance state variable is “losing”. Specifically, the sub CPU 401 performs a process of determining whether or not the value of the second chance state variable storage area provided in the sub RAM 403 is “lost”. When it is determined that the second chance state variable is “losing” (step S302-3-1-2-5-9-20-3 = Yes), step S302-3-1-2 When the process proceeds to 5-9-20-4 and it is determined that the second chance state variable is not “losing” (step S302-3-1-2-5-9-20-3 = No) ), The process proceeds to step S302-3-1-2-5-9-20-15.

(Step S302-3-1-2-5-9-20-4)
In step S302-3-1-2-5-9-20-4, the sub CPU 401 determines whether or not the value of the second chance state game number counter is “1” or more. Specifically, the sub CPU 401 performs a process of determining whether or not the value of the second chance state game number counter provided in the sub RAM 403 is “1” or more. If it is determined that the value of the second chance state game number counter is “1” or more (step S302-3-1-2-5-9-20-4 = Yes), step S302-3 is performed. When the process proceeds to -1--2-5-9-20-5 and it is determined that the value of the second chance state game number counter is not “1” or more (step S302-3-1-2). -5-9-20-5 = No), the process proceeds to step S302-3-1-2-5-9-20-7.

(Step S302-3-1-2-5-9-20-5)
In step S302-3-1-2-5-9-20-5, the sub CPU 401 performs processing for setting the state managed by the sub control board 400 to the second chance state in the next game. Specifically, the sub CPU 401 sets the second chance state in the state storage area provided in the sub RAM 403 so that the state managed by the sub control board 400 becomes the second chance state in the next game. Perform the process. Then, when the process of step S302-3-1-2-5-9-20-5 ends, the process proceeds to step S302-3-1-2-5-9-20-6.

(Step S302-3-1-2-5-9-20-6)
In step S302-3-1-2-5-9-20-6, the sub CPU 401 performs a second chance state clear process. Specifically, the sub CPU 401 (a) the value of the pseudo-continuous counter provided in the sub RAM 403, (b) the value of the second chance state point storage area provided in the sub RAM 403, (c) Processing for clearing the value of the accumulated second chance state point storage area provided in the sub-RAM 403 is performed. When the process of step S302-3-1-2-5-9-20-6 is completed, the subroutine of the second chance state process is terminated, and step S302-3-1-1 of the conditional device command reception process is terminated. The processing is shifted to 2-6.

(Step S302-3-1-2-5-9-20-7)
In step S302-3-1-2-5-9-20-7, the sub CPU 401 performs a process of determining whether or not the bonus determination flag during the second chance state is OFF. Specifically, the sub CPU 401 determines whether or not the second chance state bonus confirmation flag is OFF based on the value of the second chance state bonus confirmation flag storage area provided in the sub RAM 403. Process. If it is determined that the Bonus determination flag during the second chance state is OFF (step S302-3-1-2-5-9-20-7 = Yes), step S302-3-1-2. When the process proceeds to -5-9-20-8 and it is determined that the Bonus determination flag is not OFF during the second chance state (step S302-3-1-2-5-9-20-7). = No), the process proceeds to step S302-3-1-2-5-9-20-10.

(Step S302-3-1-2-5-9-20-8)
In step S302-3-1-2-5-9-20-8, the sub CPU 401 performs processing at the end of the second chance state. Specifically, the sub CPU 401 performs processing for initializing the ART state continuation set number storage area provided in the sub RAM 403. Further, the sub CPU 401 determines that the value of the normal state point storage area provided in the sub RAM 403 is equal to or greater than “110” which is the upper limit value, and after the completion of the Bonus state, The second chance state winning flag in the provided second chance state winning flag storage area is turned off, and the sub RAM 403 is set so that the state managed by the sub control board 400 becomes the second chance precursor state in the next game. The second chance precursor state is set in the state storage area provided in FIG. On the other hand, when the value of the normal state point storage area provided in the sub RAM 403 is less than the upper limit “110”, or other than after the completion of the Bonus state, the second value provided in the sub RAM 403 is used. Based on the value of the 1 chance state winning flag storage area, it is determined whether or not the first chance state winning flag is ON. If the first chance state winning flag is ON, the state is shifted to the first chance state. Process to do. Further, when the first chance state winning flag is OFF, it is determined whether or not the values of the third chance state stock counter and the fourth chance state stock counter provided in the sub RAM 403 are “1” or more. If the determination is made and the values of the third chance state stock counter and the fourth chance state stock counter are “1” or more, processing for shifting to the third chance state or the fourth chance state is performed. When the values of the third chance state stock counter and the fourth chance state stock counter are not equal to or greater than “1”, the state managed by the sub control board 400 is changed to the sub control board 400 in the next game. Processing for setting the normal state in the state storage area provided in the sub-RAM 403 is performed so that the managed state becomes the normal state. Then, when the process of step S302-3-1-2-5-9-20-8 ends, the process proceeds to step S302-3-1-2-5-9-20-9.

(Step S302-3-1-2-5-9-20-9)
In step S302-3-1-2-5-9-20-9, the sub CPU 401 performs a second chance state clear process. Specifically, the sub CPU 401 (a) the value of the pseudo-continuous counter provided in the sub RAM 403, (b) the value of the second chance state point storage area provided in the sub RAM 403, (c) Processing for clearing the value of the accumulated second chance state point storage area provided in the sub-RAM 403 is performed. When the process of step S302-3-1-2-5-9-20-9 ends, the subroutine for the second chance state process ends, and step S302-3-1-1 of the conditional device command reception process ends. The processing is shifted to 2-6.

(Step S302-3-1-2-5-9-20-10)
In step S302-3-1-2-5-9-20-10, the sub CPU 401 performs a process of setting “win” in the second chance state variable. Specifically, the sub CPU 401 performs processing for storing information related to “win” in a second chance state variable storage area provided in the sub RAM 403. Then, when the process of step S302-3-1-2-5-9-20-10 ends, the process proceeds to step S302-3-1-2-5-9-20-11.

(Step S302-3-1-2-5-9-20-11)
In step S302-3-1-2-5-9-20-11, the sub CPU 401 performs a Bonus standby distribution process. Specifically, the sub CPU 401 waits for the first Bonus, the second Bonus, and the third Bonus based on the Bonus state distribution lottery table (normal mode) provided in the sub ROM 402 (see FIG. 64A). Processing for determining one of the waiting is performed. Further, the sub CPU 401 performs processing of storing in the Bonus standby information storage area provided in the sub RAM 403 when it is determined that the first Bonus standby, the second Bonus standby, or the third Bonus standby is determined. Then, when the process of step S302-3-1-2-5-9-20-11 ends, the process proceeds to step S302-3-1-2-5-9-20-12.

(Step S302-3-1-2-5-9-20-12)
In step S302-3-1-2-5-9-20-12, the sub CPU 401 performs processing for setting the state managed by the sub control board 400 to the Bonus preparation state in the next game. Specifically, in the next game, the sub CPU 401 sets the Bonus preparation state in the state storage area provided in the sub RAM 403 so that the state managed by the sub control board 400 becomes the Bonus preparation state. I do. Then, when the process of step S302-3-1-2-5-9-20-12 ends, the process proceeds to step S302-3-1-2-5-9-20-13.

(Step S302-3-1-2-5-9-20-13)
In step S302-3-1-2-5-9-20-13, the sub CPU 401 performs processing for setting the second chance state via as a Bonus winning opportunity. Specifically, the sub CPU 401 performs processing for storing information indicating that the state has shifted to the Bonus preparation state via the chance state in the Bonus winning opportunity storage area provided in the sub RAM 403. When the process of step S302-3-1-2-5-9-20-13 ends, the process proceeds to step S302-3-1-2-5-9-20-14.

(Step S302-3-1-2-5-9-20-14)
In step S302-3-1-2-5-9-20-14, the sub CPU 401 performs a second chance state clear process. Specifically, the sub CPU 401 (a) the value of the pseudo-continuous counter provided in the sub RAM 403, (b) the value of the second chance state point storage area provided in the sub RAM 403, (c) Processing for clearing the value of the accumulated second chance state point storage area provided in the sub-RAM 403 is performed. When the process of step S302-3-1-2-5-9-20-14 ends, the subroutine for the second chance state process ends, and step S302-3-1-1 of the condition device command reception process ends. The processing is shifted to 2-6.

(Step S302-3-1-2-5-9-20-15)
In step S302-3-1-2-5-9-20-15, the sub CPU 401 determines whether or not the second chance state variable is “win”. Specifically, the sub CPU 401 performs a process of determining whether or not the value of the second chance state variable storage area provided in the sub RAM 403 is “win”. If it is determined that the second chance state variable is “win” (step S302-3-1-2-5-9-20-15 = Yes), step S302-3-1-2-2 is performed. If the process proceeds to 5-9-20-16 and it is determined that the second chance state variable is not “win” (step S302-3-1-2-5-9-20-15 = No) ), The process proceeds to step S302-3-1-2-5-9-20-20.

(Step S302-3-1-2-5-9-20-16)
In step S302-3-1-2-5-9-20-16, the sub CPU 401 performs a promotion lottery process. Specifically, the sub CPU 401 selects the advance promotion lottery table (see FIGS. 65A and 65B) based on the value of the Bonus standby information storage area provided in the sub RAM 403, Whether or not to wait for the second Bonus or the third Bonus during the first Bonus waiting based on the selected sign promotion lottery table and the information related to the winning combination included in the conditional device command During the second lottery and the second Bonus standby, a lottery is performed to determine whether or not the third Bonus standby is to be performed, and a process of storing the lottery result in the Bonus standby information storage area provided in the sub RAM 403 is performed. Then, when the process of step S302-3-1-2-5-9-20-16 ends, the process proceeds to step S302-3-1-2-5-9-20-17.

(Step S302-3-1-2-5-9-20-17)
In step S302-3-1-2-5-9-20-17, the sub CPU 401 performs processing for setting the state managed by the sub control board 400 to the Bonus preparation state in the next game. Specifically, in the next game, the sub CPU 401 sets the Bonus preparation state in the state storage area provided in the sub RAM 403 so that the state managed by the sub control board 400 becomes the Bonus preparation state. I do. Then, when the process of step S302-3-1-2-5-9-20-17 ends, the process proceeds to step S302-3-1-2-5-9-20-18.

(Step S302-3-1-2-5-9-20-18)
In step S302-3-1-2-5-9-20-18, the sub CPU 401 performs processing for setting the second chance state via as a Bonus winning opportunity. Specifically, the sub CPU 401 performs processing for storing information indicating that the state has shifted to the Bonus preparation state via the second chance state in the Bonus winning opportunity storage area provided in the sub RAM 403. Then, when the process of step S302-3-1-2-5-9-20-18 ends, the process proceeds to step S302-3-1-2-5-9-20-19.

(Step S302-3-1-2-5-9-20-19)
In step S302-3-1-2-5-9-20-19, the sub CPU 401 performs a second chance state clear process. Specifically, the sub CPU 401 (a) the value of the pseudo-continuous counter provided in the sub RAM 403, (b) the value of the second chance state point storage area provided in the sub RAM 403, (c) Processing for clearing the value of the accumulated second chance state point storage area provided in the sub-RAM 403 is performed. When the process of step S302-3-1-2-5-9-20-19 ends, the subroutine for the second chance state process ends, and step S302-3-1-1 of the conditional device command reception process ends. The processing is shifted to 2-6.

(Step S302-3-1-2-5-9-20-20)
In step S302-3-1-2-5-9-20-20, the sub CPU 401 determines whether or not the second chance state variable is “quasi-continuous“ 4 ”times” or “reverse rotation”. I do. Specifically, based on the value of the second chance state variable storage area provided in the sub RAM 403, the sub CPU 401 has the second chance state variable “pseudo-continuous“ 4 ”times” or “reverse”. The process which determines whether or not is performed. When it is determined that the second chance state variable is “quasi-continuous“ 4 ”times” or “reverse rotation” (step S302-3-1-2-5-9-20-20 = Yes). , The process proceeds to step S302-3-1-2-5-9-20-21, and it is determined that the second chance state variable is not “pseudo-continuous“ 4 ”times” or “reverse”. (Step S302-3-1-2-5-9-20-20 = No) terminates the second chance state processing subroutine, and receives the conditional device command reception time step S302-3-1-2-2. The processing is shifted to 6.

(Step S302-3-1-2-5-9-20-21)
In step S302-3-1-2-5-9-20-21, the sub CPU 401 performs processing for setting the state managed by the sub control board 400 to the second chance state in the next game. Specifically, the sub CPU 401 sets the second chance state in the state storage area provided in the sub RAM 403 so that the state managed by the sub control board 400 becomes the second chance state in the next game. Perform the process. When the process of step S302-3-1-2-5-9-20-21 ends, the subroutine for the second chance state process ends, and step S302-3-1-1 of the conditional device command reception process ends. The processing is shifted to 2-6.

(Process for third chance state)
Next, based on FIG. 129, the third process performed when the state managed by the sub-control board 400 is the third chance state in the state-by-state transition process in step S302-3-1-2-5 in FIG. The chance state process will be described. FIG. 129 is a diagram showing a subroutine of third chance state processing.

(Step S302-3-1-2-5-10-1)
In step S302-3-1-2-5-10-1, the sub CPU 401 performs ceiling subtraction processing. Specifically, the sub CPU 401 performs a process of subtracting “1” from the value of the ceiling game number counter provided in the sub RAM 403. Then, when the process of step S302-3-1-2-5-10-1 ends, the process proceeds to step S302-3-1-2-5-10-2.

(Step S302-3-1-2-5-10-2)
In step S302-3-1-2-5-10-2, the sub CPU 401 performs processing for determining whether or not the winning number is “05”. Specifically, the sub CPU 401 performs a process of determining whether or not the information related to the winning combination included in the conditional device command received from the main control board 300 is the winning number “05”. If it is determined that the winning number is “05” (step S302-3-1-2-5-10-2 = Yes), step S302-3-1-2-5-10-3 is performed. If it is determined that the winning number is not “05” (step S302-3-1-2-5-10-2 = No), step S302-3-1-2-5 is performed. The process is shifted to -10-5.

(Step S302-3-1-2-5-10-3)
In step S302-3-1-2-5-10-3, the sub CPU 401 performs a direct hit winning process. Specifically, the sub CPU 401 (a) updates the Bonus winning opportunity storage area provided in the sub RAM 403, (b) the third chance state game number counter provided in the sub RAM 403, A process of clearing the 4-chance state game number counter, etc., (c) an ART initial hit process described later, and (d) a Bonus winning process described later are performed. Then, when the process of step S302-3-1-2-5-10-3 ends, the process proceeds to step S302-3-1-2-5-10-4.

(Step S302-3-1-2-5-10-4)
In step S302-3-1-2-5-10-4, the sub CPU 401 performs a process of setting “2” to the initial ART point. Specifically, the sub CPU 401 performs processing for setting “2” in the ART point storage area provided in the sub RAM 403. When the process of step S302-3-1-2-5-10-4 ends, the subroutine for the third chance state process ends, and step S302-3-1-2 of the conditional device command reception process ends. The processing is shifted to 6.

(Step S302-3-1-2-5-10-5)
In step S302-3-1-2-5-10-5, the sub CPU 401 performs a process of subtracting “1” from the value of the third chance state game number counter. Specifically, the sub CPU 401 performs a process of subtracting “1” from the value of the third chance state game number counter provided in the sub RAM 403. Then, when the process of step S302-3-1-2-5-10-5 ends, the process proceeds to step S302-3-1-2-5-10-6.

(Step S302-3-1-2-5-10-6)
In step S302-3-1-2-5-10-6, the sub CPU 401 performs a third chance state lottery process. Specifically, the sub CPU 401 has information regarding whether or not to execute the reel lock effect included in the conditional device command received from the main control board 300, and information regarding whether or not to execute the spinning effect. Based on the above, the third chance state transition lottery table (see FIG. 61 (B), FIG. 61 (C), FIG. 61 (D), FIG. 61 (E)) provided in the sub ROM 402 is selected and the selection is made. The transition destination of the state managed by the sub-control board 400 is determined based on the third chance state transition lottery table and the information related to the winning combination included in the conditional device command received from the main control board 300 Perform the process. Then, when the process of step S302-3-1-2-5-10-6 ends, the process proceeds to step S302-3-1-2-5-10-7.

(Step S302-3-1-2-5-10-7)
In step S302-3-1-2-5-10-7, the sub CPU 401 performs a process of determining whether or not it has been won. Specifically, the sub CPU 401 shifts to the ART state, the first RUSH state, or the second RUSH state as a result of the lottery by the third chance state lottery process in step S302-3-1-2-5-10-6. A process for determining whether or not this is determined is performed. And when it determines with having won (step S302-3-1-2-5-10-7 = Yes), it transfers a process to step S302-3-1-2-5-10-8, If it is determined that it has not been won (step S302-3-1-2-5-10-7 = No), the process proceeds to step S302-3-1-2-5-10-9.

(Step S302-3-1-2-5-10-8)
In step S302-3-1-2-5-10-8, the sub CPU 401 performs ART first hit processing. Specifically, when the sub CPU 401 determines to shift to the ART state by (a) the third chance state lottery process in step S302-3-1-2-5-10-6, Based on the scenario determination table (see FIG. 67C) provided in the sub-ROM 402 and the conditions for shifting to the ART state, a process for determining a scenario is performed, and the scenario information storage area provided in the sub-RAM 403 is stored. In addition to performing processing for storing information related to the determined scenario, and in the next game, ART is stored in the state storage area provided in the sub RAM 403 so that the state managed by the sub control board 400 becomes the ART ready state. Processing to set the ready state. Also, (b) provided in the sub ROM 402 when it is determined that the transition to the first RUSH state is made by the third chance state lottery process in step S302-3-1-2-5-10-6. Based on the scenario determination table (see FIG. 67C) and the conditions that have shifted to the ART state, the scenario determination process is performed, and the scenario determined in the scenario information storage area provided in the sub-RAM 403 Processing for storing information and processing for setting the RUSH preparation state in the state storage area provided in the sub RAM 403 so that the state managed by the sub control board 400 becomes the RUSH preparation state in the next game And add “1” to the value of the first RUSH state stock counter provided in the sub-RAM 403. Also, (c) if it is determined that the transition to the second RUSH state is made by the third chance state lottery process in step S302-3-1-2-5-10-6, the sub ROM 402 is provided. Based on the scenario determination table (see FIG. 67C) and the conditions that have shifted to the ART state, the scenario determination process is performed, and the scenario determined in the scenario information storage area provided in the sub-RAM 403 Processing for storing information and processing for setting the RUSH preparation state in the state storage area provided in the sub RAM 403 so that the state managed by the sub control board 400 becomes the RUSH preparation state in the next game And add “1” to the value of the second RUSH state stock counter provided in the sub-RAM 403. Further, the sub CPU 401 determines the rank by lottery based on the ART state transition rank lottery table (see FIG. 67 (A)) provided in the sub ROM 402 and the condition for shifting to the ART state. And a process for storing the determined rank in a rank storage area provided in the sub-RAM 403. Further, the sub CPU 401 performs a process of drawing ART points based on the ART state transition ART point lottery table (see FIG. 67B) provided in the sub ROM 402, and the ART points acquired by the lottery. Is stored in the ART point storage area provided in the sub RAM 403. Further, the sub CPU 401 is based on the value stored in the rank storage area provided in the sub RAM 403 and the ART level lottery table (first set) provided in the sub ROM 402 (see FIG. 67 (E)). To determine the ART level. When the processing of step S302-3-1-2-5-10-8 is completed, the third chance state processing subroutine is terminated, and step S302-3-1-2 of conditional device command reception processing is completed. The processing is shifted to 6.

(Step S302-3-1-2-5-10-9)
In step S302-3-1-2-5-10-9, the sub CPU 401 determines whether or not the value of the third chance state game number counter is “0”. Specifically, the sub CPU 401 performs a process of determining whether or not the value of the third chance state game number counter provided in the sub RAM 403 is “0”. If it is determined that the value of the third chance state game number counter is “0” (step S302-3-1-2-5-10-9 = Yes), step S302-3-1-1 When the process proceeds to 2-5-10-10 and it is determined that the value of the third chance state game number counter is not “0” (step S302-3-1-2-5-10-9). = No), the third chance state processing subroutine is terminated, and the process proceeds to step S302-3-1-2-6 in the conditional device command reception process.

(Step S302-3-1-2-5-10-10)
In step S302-3-1-2-5-10-10, the sub CPU 401 performs processing at the end of the third and fourth chance states. Specifically, the sub CPU 401 has a third chance state game number counter provided in the sub RAM 403, a fourth chance state game number counter provided in the sub RAM 403, and a fourth chance state provided in the sub RAM 403. Processing for clearing the values of the step number counter, the fourth chance state continuation set number counter provided in the sub RAM 403, and the fourth chance state set number counter provided in the sub RAM 403 is performed. Further, the sub CPU 401 determines the normal state points to be given to the player based on the normal state point acquisition lottery table (chance state failure) provided in the sub ROM 402 (see FIG. 49G). Perform the process. Further, the sub CPU 401 performs processing for initializing the ART state continuation set number storage area provided in the sub RAM 403, and the value of the normal state point storage area provided in the sub RAM 403 is the upper limit “110”. ”Or more, and after the completion of the Bonus state, the second chance state winning flag in the second chance state winning flag storage area provided in the sub RAM 403 is turned OFF, and in the next game, Processing for setting the second chance precursor state in the state storage area provided in the sub RAM 403 is performed so that the state managed by the sub control board 400 becomes the second chance precursor state. On the other hand, if the value of the normal state point storage area provided in the sub-RAM 403 is less than “110”, or other than after the Bonus state is finished, the first chance state winning in the sub-RAM 403 is selected. Based on the value of the flag storage area, it is determined whether or not the first chance state winning flag is ON. If the first chance state winning flag is ON, a process for shifting to the first chance state I do. Further, when the first chance state winning flag is OFF, it is determined whether or not the values of the third chance state stock counter and the fourth chance state stock counter provided in the sub RAM 403 are “1” or more. If the determination is made and the values of the third chance state stock counter and the fourth chance state stock counter are “1” or more, processing for shifting to the third chance state or the fourth chance state is performed. When the values of the third chance state stock counter and the fourth chance state stock counter are not equal to or greater than “1”, the state managed by the sub control board 400 is changed to the sub control board 400 in the next game. Processing for setting the normal state in the state storage area provided in the sub-RAM 403 is performed so that the managed state becomes the normal state. When the processing of step S302-3-1-2-5-10-10 is completed, the third chance state processing subroutine is terminated, and step S302-3-1-2 of conditional device command reception processing is completed. The processing is shifted to 6.

(4th chance state processing)
Next, based on FIG. 130, the fourth process is performed when the state managed by the sub-control board 400 is the fourth chance state in the state-by-state transition process in step S <b> 302-3-2-5 in FIG. 117. The chance state process will be described. FIG. 130 is a diagram showing a fourth chance state processing subroutine.

(Step S302-3-1-2-5-11-1)
In step S302-3-1-2-5-11-1, the sub CPU 401 performs ceiling subtraction processing. Specifically, the sub CPU 401 performs a process of subtracting “1” from the value of the ceiling game number counter provided in the sub RAM 403. Then, when the process of step S302-3-1-2-5-11-1 ends, the process proceeds to step S302-3-1-2-5-11-2.

(Step S302-3-1-2-5-11-2)
In step S302-3-1-2-5-11-2, the sub CPU 401 performs processing to determine whether or not the winning number is “05”. Specifically, the sub CPU 401 performs a process of determining whether or not the information related to the winning combination included in the conditional device command received from the main control board 300 is the winning number “05”. And when it determines with a winning number being "05" (step S302-3-1-2-5-11-2 = Yes), step S302-3-1-2-5-11-3 If it is determined that the winning number is not “05” (step S302-3-1-2-5-11-2 = No), step S302-3-1-2-5 is performed. The process proceeds to -11-5.

(Step S302-3-1-2-5-11-3)
In step S302-3-1-2-5-11-3, the sub CPU 401 performs a direct hit winning process. Specifically, the sub CPU 401 (a) updates the Bonus winning opportunity storage area provided in the sub RAM 403, (b) the third chance state game number counter provided in the sub RAM 403, A process for clearing the 4-chance state game number counter, etc., (c) the above-mentioned ART initial hit process, (d) a Bonus winning process described later, etc. are performed. Then, when the process of step S302-3-1-2-5-11-3 ends, the process proceeds to step S302-3-1-2-5-11-4.

(Step S302-3-1-2-5-11-4)
In step S302-3-1-2-5-11-4, the sub CPU 401 performs a process of adding “1” to the value of the first RUSH state stock counter. Specifically, the sub CPU 401 performs a process of adding “1” to the value of the first RUSH state stock counter provided in the sub RAM 403. When the process of step S302-3-1-2-5-11-4 is completed, the fourth chance state process subroutine is terminated, and step S302-3-1-2 of the conditional device command reception process is terminated. The processing is shifted to 6.

(Step S302-3-1-2-5-11-5)
In step S302-3-1-2-5-11-5, the sub CPU 401 performs processing to determine whether or not the fourth chance state is infinite. Specifically, the sub CPU 401 performs processing to determine whether or not the value of the fourth chance state continuation set number counter provided in the sub RAM 403 is “2”. If it is determined that the fourth chance state is infinite (step S302-3-1-2-5-11-5 = Yes), step S302-3-1-2-5-11-6. If it is determined that the fourth chance state is not infinite (step S302-3-1-2-5-11-5 = No), step S302-3-1-2-5 The process proceeds to -11-7.

(Step S302-3-1-2-5-11-6)
In step S302-3-1-2-5-11-6, the sub CPU 401 performs an infinite lottery process. Specifically, the sub CPU 401 determines the first RUSH state or the second RUSH state based on the fourth chance state effect step lottery table (after 21 games) provided in the sub ROM 402 (see FIG. 62G). A process of drawing whether or not to shift to is performed. Then, when the process of step S302-3-1-2-5-11-6 ends, the process proceeds to step S302-3-1-2-5-11-10.

(Step S302-3-1-2-5-11-7)
In step S302-3-1-2-5-11-7, the sub CPU 401 performs a fourth chance state effect step number lottery process. Specifically, the sub CPU 401 determines the fourth chance state effect step lottery table based on the value of the fourth chance state step number counter provided in the sub RAM 403 (FIGS. 62B and 62C). 62 (D), 62 (E), and 62 (F)), the selected fourth chance state effect step lottery table and the condition device command received from the main control board 300 are selected. Based on the information related to the winning combination included, a process of lottery of whether to add the number of performance steps is performed. In addition, when the sub CPU 401 wins the lottery, the sub CPU 401 performs a process of adding the value added by the winning to the value of the fourth chance state step number counter provided in the sub RAM 403 provided in the sub RAM 403. Do. Then, when the process of step S302-3-1-2-5-11-7 ends, the process proceeds to step S302-3-1-2-5-11-8.

(Step S302-3-1-2-5-11-8)
In step S302-3-1-2-5-11-8, the sub CPU 401 performs processing for determining whether or not the number of rendering steps is “5”. Specifically, the sub CPU 401 performs a process of determining whether or not the number of effect steps is “5” based on the value of the fourth chance state step number counter provided in the sub RAM 403. And when it determines with the number of production steps being "5" (step S302-3-1-2-5-11-8 = Yes), step S302-3-1-2-5-11-. If the process proceeds to 9 and it is determined that the number of production steps is not “5” (step S302-3-1-2-5-11-8 = No), step S302-3-1-2. The process shifts to -5-11-10.

(Step S302-3-1-2-5-11-9)
In step S302-3-1-2-5-11-9, the sub CPU 401 performs processing for turning on the RUSH winning flag. Specifically, the sub CPU 401 performs processing for turning on the RUSH winning flag in the RUSH winning flag storage area provided in the sub RAM 403. Then, when the process of step S302-3-1-2-5-11-9 ends, the process proceeds to step S302-3-1-2-5-11-10.

(Step S302-3-1-2-5-11-10)
In step S302-3-1-2-5-11-10, the sub CPU 401 performs processing to determine whether or not the RUSH winning flag is ON. Specifically, the sub CPU 401 performs processing for determining whether or not the RUSH winning flag is ON based on the value of the RUSH winning flag storage area provided in the sub RAM 403. If it is determined that the RUSH winning flag is ON (step S302-3-1-2-5-11-10 = Yes), the process proceeds to step S302-3-1-2-5-11-11. When the process is shifted and it is determined that the RUSH winning flag is not ON (step S302-3-1-2-5-11-10 = No), step S302-3-1-2-5-11 The process is shifted to -13.

(Step S302-3-1-2-5-11-11)
In step S302-3-1-2-5-11-11, the sub CPU 401 performs an ART winning type determination process. Specifically, the sub CPU 401 determines the transition destination of the state managed by the sub control board 400 based on the fourth chance state transition lottery table (see FIG. 62H) provided in the sub ROM 402. Perform the process. Further, the sub CPU 401 performs processing for storing information relating to the determined migration destination in a state storage area provided in the sub RAM 403. Then, when the process of step S302-3-1-2-5-11-11 ends, the process proceeds to step S302-3-1-2-5-11-12.

(Step S302-3-1-2-5-11-12)
In step S302-3-1-2-5-11-12, the sub CPU 401 performs an ART initial hitting process. Specifically, when the sub CPU 401 determines to shift to the first RUSH state by (a) the ART winning type determination process in step S302-3-1-2-5-11-11, Based on the scenario determination table provided in the ROM 402 (see FIG. 67C) and the conditions for shifting to the ART state, a process for determining a scenario is performed, and the scenario information storage area provided in the sub RAM 403 is determined. In the next game, the RUSH preparation is performed in the state storage area provided in the sub RAM 403 so that the state managed by the sub control board 400 becomes the RUSH preparation state. The state is set, and the value of the first RUSH state stock counter provided in the sub RAM 403 is set. 1 "performs a process of addition. In addition, (b) when it is determined to shift to the second RUSH state by the ART winning type determination process in step S302-3-1-2-5-11-11, the scenario provided in the sub ROM 402 Based on the determination table (see FIG. 67 (C)) and the conditions for shifting to the ART state, a process for determining a scenario is performed, and information on the scenario determined in the scenario information storage area provided in the sub RAM 403 is stored. In addition to performing the storing process, in the next game, performing the process of setting the RUSH preparation state in the state storage area provided in the sub RAM 403 so that the state managed by the sub control board 400 becomes the RUSH preparation state. Then, a process of adding “1” to the value of the second RUSH state stock counter provided in the sub RAM 403 is performed. Further, the sub CPU 401 determines the rank by lottery based on the ART state transition rank lottery table (see FIG. 67 (A)) provided in the sub ROM 402 and the condition for shifting to the ART state. And a process for storing the determined rank in a rank storage area provided in the sub-RAM 403. Further, the sub CPU 401 performs a process of drawing ART points based on the ART state transition ART point lottery table (see FIG. 67B) provided in the sub ROM 402, and the ART points acquired by the lottery. Is stored in the ART point storage area provided in the sub RAM 403. Further, the sub CPU 401 is based on the value stored in the rank storage area provided in the sub RAM 403 and the ART level lottery table (first set) provided in the sub ROM 402 (see FIG. 67 (E)). To determine the ART level. Then, when the process of step S302-3-1-2-5-11-12 ends, the process proceeds to step S302-3-1-2-5-11-13.

(Step S302-3-1-2-5-11-13)
In step S302-3-1-2-5-11-13, the sub CPU 401 determines whether or not the fourth chance state is infinite. Specifically, the sub CPU 401 performs processing to determine whether or not the value of the fourth chance state continuation set number counter provided in the sub RAM 403 is “2”. And when it determines with a 4th chance state not being infinite (step S302-3-1-2-5-11-13 = Yes), step S302-3-1-2-5-11-14 If it is determined that the fourth chance state is infinite (step S302-3-1-2-5-11-13 = No), step S302-3-1-2-5 is performed. The process proceeds to -11-15.

(Step S302-3-1-2-5-11-14)
In step S302-3-1-2-5-11-14, the sub CPU 401 performs a process of subtracting “1” from the value of the fourth chance state game number counter. Specifically, the sub CPU 401 performs a process of subtracting “1” from the value of the fourth chance state game number counter provided in the sub RAM 403. Then, when the process of step S302-3-1-2-5-11-14 ends, the process proceeds to step S302-3-1-2-5-11-15.

(Step S302-3-1-2-5-11-15)
In step S302-3-1-2-5-11-15, the sub CPU 401 determines whether or not the value of the fourth chance state game number counter is “0”. Specifically, the sub CPU 401 performs a process of determining whether or not the value of the fourth chance state game number counter provided in the sub RAM 403 is “0”. If it is determined that the value of the fourth chance state game number counter is “0” (step S302-3-1-2-5-11-15 = Yes), step S302-3-1-1 is performed. The process proceeds to 2-5-11-16, and when it is determined that the value of the fourth chance state game number counter is not “0” (step S302-3-1-2-5-11-15). = No), the fourth chance state process subroutine is terminated, and the process proceeds to step S302-3-1-2-6 in the conditional device command reception process.

(Step S302-3-1-2-5-11-16)
In step S302-3-1-2-5-11-16, the sub CPU 401 performs a process of determining whether or not it is unwinning. Specifically, the sub CPU 401 determines whether or not the fourth chance state is not infinite and the value of the fourth chance state step number counter provided in the sub RAM 403 is less than “5”. Processing to determine is performed. If it is determined that the winning is not made (step S302-3-1-2-5-11-16 = Yes), the process proceeds to step S302-3-1-2-5-11-17. If it is determined that the winning is not made (step S302-3-1-2-5-11-16 = No), the fourth chance state processing subroutine is terminated, and the conditional device command reception processing is completed. The process proceeds to step S302-3-1-2-6.

(Step S302-3-1-2-5-11-17)
In step S302-3-1-2-5-11-17, the sub CPU 401 performs processing of subtracting “1” from the value of the fourth chance state set number counter. Specifically, the sub CPU 401 performs a process of subtracting “1” from the value of the fourth chance state set number counter provided in the sub RAM 403. Then, when the process of step S302-3-1-2-5-11-17 ends, the process proceeds to step S302-3-1-2-5-11-18.

(Step S302-3-1-2-5-11-18)
In step S302-3-1-2-5-11-18, the sub CPU 401 determines whether or not the value of the fourth chance state set number counter is “0”. Specifically, the sub CPU 401 performs a process of determining whether or not the value of the fourth chance state set number counter provided in the sub RAM 403 is “0”. If it is determined that the value of the fourth chance state set number counter is “0” (step S302-3-1-2-5-11-18 = Yes), step S302-3-1-1 is performed. The process proceeds to 2-5-11-19, and when it is determined that the value of the fourth chance state set number counter is not “0” (step S302-3-1-2-5-11-18). = No), the process proceeds to step S302-3-1-2-5-11-20.

(Step S302-3-1-2-5-11-19)
In step S302-3-1-2-5-11-19, the sub CPU 401 performs processing at the end of the third and fourth chance states. Specifically, the sub CPU 401 has a third chance state game number counter provided in the sub RAM 403, a fourth chance state game number counter provided in the sub RAM 403, and a fourth chance state provided in the sub RAM 403. Processing for clearing the values of the step number counter, the fourth chance state continuation set number counter provided in the sub RAM 403, and the fourth chance state set number counter provided in the sub RAM 403 is performed. Further, the sub CPU 401 determines the normal state points to be given to the player based on the normal state point acquisition lottery table (chance state failure) provided in the sub ROM 402 (see FIG. 49G). Perform the process. Further, the sub CPU 401 performs processing for initializing the ART state continuation set number storage area provided in the sub RAM 403, and the value of the normal state point storage area provided in the sub RAM 403 is the upper limit value. 110 "or more and after the Bonus state is finished, the second chance state winning flag in the second chance state winning flag storage area provided in the sub-RAM 403 is turned OFF, and the next game Then, the second chance precursor state is set in the state storage area provided in the sub RAM 403 so that the state managed by the sub control board 400 becomes the second chance precursor state. On the other hand, when the value of the normal state point storage area provided in the sub RAM 403 is less than the upper limit “110”, or other than after the completion of the Bonus state, the second value provided in the sub RAM 403 is used. Based on the value of the 1 chance state winning flag storage area, it is determined whether or not the first chance state winning flag is ON. If the first chance state winning flag is ON, the state is shifted to the first chance state. Process to do. Further, when the first chance state winning flag is OFF, it is determined whether or not the values of the third chance state stock counter and the fourth chance state stock counter provided in the sub RAM 403 are “1” or more. If the determination is made and the values of the third chance state stock counter and the fourth chance state stock counter are “1” or more, processing for shifting to the third chance state or the fourth chance state is performed. When the values of the third chance state stock counter and the fourth chance state stock counter are not equal to or greater than “1”, the state managed by the sub control board 400 is changed to the sub control board 400 in the next game. Processing for setting the normal state in the state storage area provided in the sub-RAM 403 is performed so that the managed state becomes the normal state. Then, when the process of step S302-3-1-2-5-11-19 ends, the fourth chance state process subroutine ends, and step S302-3-1-2 of the condition device command reception process ends. The processing is shifted to 6.

(Step S302-3-1-2-5-11-20)
In step S302-3-1-2-5-11-20, the sub CPU 401 performs a process of adding “1” to the value of the fourth chance state continuation set number counter. Specifically, the sub CPU 401 performs a process of adding “1” to the value of the fourth chance state continuation set number counter provided in the sub RAM 403. Then, when the process of step S302-3-1-2-5-11-20 ends, the process proceeds to step S302-3-1-2-5-11-21.

(Step S302-3-1-2-5-11-21)
In step S302-3-1-2-5-11-21, the sub CPU 401 performs a process of determining whether or not the value of the fourth chance state continuation set number counter is an upper limit value. Specifically, the sub CPU 401 performs a process of determining whether or not the value of the fourth chance state continuation set number counter provided in the sub RAM 403 is “2” that is the upper limit value. If it is determined that the value of the fourth chance state continuation set number counter is the upper limit value (step S302-3-1-2-5-11-21 = Yes), step S302-3-1-1 When the process proceeds to 2-5-11-22 and it is determined that the value of the fourth chance state continuation set number counter is not the upper limit value (step S302-3-1-2-5-11-21) = No), the process proceeds to step S302-3-1-2-5-11-23.

(Step S302-3-1-2-5-11-22)
In step S302-3-1-2-5-11-22, the sub CPU 401 performs a process of setting infinity to the value of the fourth chance state game number counter. Specifically, the sub CPU 401 performs a process of setting “0” to the value of the fourth chance state game number counter provided in the sub RAM 403. As a result, in the subsequent games, it is determined that the process of step S302-3-1-2-5-11-16 is not a win (step S302-3-1-2-5-11-16 = No). As a result of the determination, the fourth chance state continues until the transition to the first RUSH state or the second RUSH state. When the process of step S302-3-1-2-5-11-22 ends, the fourth chance state process subroutine ends, and step S302-3-1-2 of the conditional device command reception process ends. The processing is shifted to 6.

(Step S302-3-1-2-5-11-23)
In step S302-3-1-2-5-11-23, the sub CPU 401 performs fourth chance state game number counter setting processing. Specifically, the sub CPU 401 performs a process of setting “10” to the value of the fourth chance state game number counter provided in the sub RAM 403. When the processing of step S302-3-1-2-5-11-23 is completed, the fourth chance state processing subroutine is terminated, and step S302-3-1-2 of the conditional device command reception processing is ended. The processing is shifted to 6.

(Bonus ready state processing)
Next, based on FIG. 131, in the state-specific migration processing in step S302-3-1-2-5 in FIG. The processing will be described. FIG. 131 is a diagram showing a subroutine of the Bonus preparation state process.

(Step S302-3-1-2-5-12-1)
In step S302-3-1-2-5-12-1, the sub CPU 401 performs processing to determine whether or not the winning number is “05”. Specifically, the sub CPU 401 performs a process of determining whether or not the information related to the winning combination included in the conditional device command received from the main control board 300 is the winning number “05”. And when it determines with a winning number being "05" (step S302-3-1-2-5-12-1 = Yes), step S302-3-1-2-5-12-2 When it is determined that the winning number is not “05” (step S302-3-1-2-5-12-1 = No), step S302-3-1-2-5 is performed. The process is shifted to -12-3.

(Step S302-3-1-2-5-12-2)
In step S302-3-1-2-5-12-2, the sub CPU 401 performs a direct hit winning process. Specifically, the sub CPU 401 (a) updates the Bonus winning opportunity storage area provided in the sub RAM 403, (b) the third chance state game number counter provided in the sub RAM 403, A process for clearing the 4-chance state game number counter, etc., (c) the above-mentioned ART initial hit process, (d) a Bonus winning process described later, etc. are performed. When the process of step S302-3-1-2-5-12-2 ends, the subroutine for the bonus preparation state process ends, and step S302-3-1-2-6 of the conditional device command reception process ends. The process is transferred to.

(Step S302-3-1-2-5-12-3)
In step S <b> 302-3-2-5-12-3, the sub CPU 401 performs processing for determining whether or not the first Bonus standby or the second Bonus standby is performed. Specifically, the sub CPU 401 performs processing for determining whether or not the first Bonus standby or the second Bonus standby is performed based on the value of the Bonus standby information storage area provided in the sub RAM 403. And when it determines with it being 1st Bonus standby or 2nd Bonus standby (step S302-3-1-2-5-12-3 = Yes), step S302-3-1-2-5 When the process proceeds to -12-4 and it is determined that the first Bonus is not waiting or the second Bonus is not waiting (Step S302-3-1-2-5-12-3 = No), Step S302 is performed. The process shifts to 3-1-2-5-12-8.

(Step S302-3-1-2-5-12-4)
In step S302-3-1-2-5-12-4, the sub CPU 401 performs a process of adding “1” to the value of the Bonus preparation state game number counter. Specifically, the sub CPU 401 performs a process of adding “1” to the value of the Bonus preparation state game number counter provided in the sub RAM 403. Then, when the process of step S302-3-1-2-5-12-4 ends, the process proceeds to step S302-3-1-2-5-12-5.

(Step S302-3-1-2-5-12-5)
In step S302-3-1-2-5-12-5, the sub CPU 401 performs a preparatory promotion lottery process. Specifically, the sub CPU 401 determines the promotion screen lottery table for confirmation screen provided in the sub ROM 402 based on the value stored in the Bonus standby information storage area provided in the sub RAM 403 (FIG. 66A). 66B), whether the selected confirmation screen promotion lottery table and the information related to the winning combination included in the conditional device command, the reel lock effect, and the spinning effect are executed. Based on the information regarding whether or not to wait for the first Bonus, the lottery to determine whether to wait for the second Bonus or the third Bonus, and whether to wait for the third Bonus during the second Bonus waiting The lottery is performed, and the lottery result is stored in the Bonus standby information storage area provided in the sub-RAM 403. Then, when the process of step S302-3-1-2-5-12-5 ends, the process proceeds to step S302-3-1-2-5-12-6.

(Step S302-3-1-2-5-12-6)
In step S302-3-1-2-5-12-6, the sub CPU 401 performs processing for determining whether the first Bonus is waiting or the second Bonus is waiting. Specifically, the sub CPU 401 performs processing for determining whether or not the first Bonus standby or the second Bonus standby is performed based on the value of the Bonus standby information storage area provided in the sub RAM 403. If it is determined that the first Bonus is waiting or the second Bonus is waiting (Step S302-3-1-2-5-12-6 = Yes), Step S302-3-1-2-5 is performed. When the process shifts to -12-7 and it is determined that the first Bonus is not waiting or the second Bonus is not waiting (Step S302-3-1-2-5-12-6 = No), Step S302 is performed. The process shifts to 3-1-2-5-12-8.

(Step S302-3-1-2-5-12-7)
In step S302-3-1-2-5-12-7, the sub CPU 401 performs standby update processing. Specifically, when the value of the Bonus ready state game number counter provided in the sub RAM 403 reaches a predetermined value, the sub CPU 401 stores the third Bonus in the Bonus standby information storage area provided in the sub RAM 403. Processing to store information related to standby is performed. Then, when the process of step S302-3-1-2-5-12-7 ends, the process proceeds to step S302-3-1-2-5-12-8.

(Step S302-3-1-2-5-12-8)
In step S302-3-1-2-5-12-8, the sub CPU 401 performs processing for determining whether or not the third Bonus is waiting. Specifically, the sub CPU 401 performs processing for determining whether or not the third Bonus standby is based on the value of the Bonus standby information storage area provided in the sub RAM 403. If it is determined that the third Bonus is waiting (step S302-3-1-2-5-12-8 = Yes), the process proceeds to step S302-3-1-2-5-12-9. If it is determined that the third Bonus is not waiting (step S302-3-1-2-5-12-8 = No), the Bonus preparation state processing subroutine is terminated, and the conditional device command is terminated. The process proceeds to step S302-3-1-2-6 in the reception process.

(Step S302-3-1-2-5-12-9)
In step S302-3-1-2-5-12-9, the sub CPU 401 performs an ART initial hitting process. Specifically, when it is determined that (a) the transition to the ART state is made, the sub CPU 401 transitions to the scenario determination table (see FIG. 67C) provided in the sub ROM 402 and the ART state. Based on the determined conditions, a process for determining a scenario is performed, a process for storing information related to the determined scenario in a scenario information storage area provided in the sub RAM 403, and a sub control board 400 in the next game. The process of setting the ART preparation state in the state storage area provided in the sub-RAM 403 is performed so that the state managed by the above becomes the ART preparation state. In addition, (b) when it is determined to shift to the first RUSH state, based on the scenario determination table (see FIG. 67C) provided in the sub ROM 402 and the conditions for shifting to the ART state, A process for determining a scenario is performed to store information related to the determined scenario in the scenario information storage area provided in the sub-RAM 403, and the state managed by the sub-control board 400 is determined in the next game. Processing to set the RUSH ready state in the state storage area provided in the sub RAM 403 so as to be in the RUSH ready state, and to add “1” to the value of the first RUSH state stock counter provided in the sub RAM 403 I do. Further, (c) when it is determined to shift to the second RUSH state, based on the scenario determination table (see FIG. 67 (C)) provided in the sub ROM 402 and the conditions for shifting to the ART state, A process for determining a scenario is performed to store information related to the determined scenario in the scenario information storage area provided in the sub-RAM 403, and the state managed by the sub-control board 400 is determined in the next game. Processing to set the RUSH preparation state in the state storage area provided in the sub RAM 403 so as to be in the RUSH preparation state, and to add “1” to the value of the second RUSH state stock counter provided in the sub RAM 403 I do. Further, the sub CPU 401 determines the rank by lottery based on the ART state transition rank lottery table (see FIG. 67 (A)) provided in the sub ROM 402 and the condition for shifting to the ART state. And a process for storing the determined rank in a rank storage area provided in the sub-RAM 403. Further, the sub CPU 401 performs a process of drawing ART points based on the ART state transition ART point lottery table (see FIG. 67B) provided in the sub ROM 402, and the ART points acquired by the lottery. Is stored in the ART point storage area provided in the sub RAM 403. Further, the sub CPU 401 is based on the value stored in the rank storage area provided in the sub RAM 403 and the ART level lottery table (first set) provided in the sub ROM 402 (see FIG. 67 (E)). To determine the ART level. Then, when the process of step S302-3-1-2-5-12-9 ends, the process proceeds to step S302-3-1-2-5-12-10.

(Step S302-3-1-2-5-12-10)
In step S302-3-1-2-5-12-10, the sub CPU 401 performs a third bonus winning process. Specifically, when the information related to the reel lock effect included in the conditional device command received from the main control board 300 is long freeze, the sub CPU 401 stores the second RUSH state stock provided in the sub RAM 403. The state managed by the sub-control board 400 when the process of adding “1” to the value of the counter is performed and the information related to the reel lock effect included in the conditional device command received from the main control board 300 is not long freeze Is in the first RUSH state, a process of adding “1” to the value of the first RUSH state stock counter provided in the sub-RAM 403 is performed, and the state managed by the sub-control board 400 is in the second RUSH state. In the second RUSH state provided in the sub-RAM 403 It performs the process of adding "1" to the value of the stock counter. Further, the sub CPU 401 performs a process of determining the number of games that can be played in the third bonus state based on the third bonus state game number determination table (see FIG. 83) provided in the sub ROM 402, and in the next game. The third management state is set in the state storage area provided in the sub-RAM 403 so that the state managed by the sub-control board 400 becomes the third bonus state, and the third bonus is provided in the sub-RAM 403. Processing to turn off the third Bonus winning flag in the winning flag storage area is performed. When the process of step S302-3-1-2-5-12-10 ends, the subroutine for the Bonus preparation state process ends, and step S302-3-1-2-6 of the conditional device command reception process ends. The process is transferred to.

(Process for the first Bonus state)
Next, based on FIG. 132, the first Bonus state performed when the state managed by the sub-control board 400 is the first Bonus state in the state-by-state transition process of Step S302-3-1-2-5 of FIG. 117. The processing will be described. FIG. 132 is a diagram showing a subroutine of the first Bonus state process.

(Step S302-3-1-2-5-13-1)
In step S302-3-1-2-5-13-1, the sub CPU 401 performs processing for clearing the Bonus winning opportunity storage area. Specifically, the sub CPU 401 performs processing for clearing the Bonus winning opportunity storage area provided in the sub RAM 403. Then, when the process of step S302-3-1-2-5-13-1 ends, the process proceeds to step S302-3-1-2-5-13-2.

(Step S302-3-1-2-5-13-2)
In step S302-3-1-2-5-13-2, the sub CPU 401 performs a process of subtracting “1” from the value of the first Bonus state game number counter. Specifically, the sub CPU 401 performs a process of subtracting “1” from the value of the first bonus state game number counter provided in the sub RAM 403. Then, when the process of step S302-3-1-2-5-13-2 ends, the process proceeds to step S302-3-1-2-5-13-3.

(Step S302-3-1-2-5-13-3)
In step S302-3-1-2-5-13-3, the sub CPU 401 performs main control board Bonus point addition processing. Specifically, the sub CPU 401 uses the first Bonus provided in the sub RAM 403 for points stored in the second effect state point storage area in the game included in the conditional device command received from the main control board 300. Processing is performed by adding to the state point storage area. Then, when the process of step S302-3-1-2-5-13-3 is completed, the process proceeds to step S302-3-1-2-5-13-4.

(Step S302-3-1-2-5-13-4)
In step S302-3-1-2-5-13-4, the sub CPU 401 performs a process of determining whether or not the ART is not won. Specifically, the sub CPU 401 performs a process of determining whether or not the ART is not winning based on a value stored in an ART winning opportunity storage area provided in the sub RAM 403. If it is determined that the ART is not won (step S302-3-1-2-5-13-4 = Yes), the process proceeds to step S302-3-1-2-5-13-5. If it is determined that the ART is not won (step S302-3-1-2-5-13-4 = No), the process proceeds to step S302-3-1-2-5-13-28. To migrate.

(Step S302-3-1-2-5-13-5)
In step S <b> 302-3-1-2-5-13-5, the sub CPU 401 performs a process of determining whether or not the value of the first Bonus state game number counter is “10” or more. Specifically, the sub CPU 401 performs a process of determining whether or not the value of the first bonus state game number counter provided in the sub RAM 403 is “10” or more. If it is determined that the value of the first Bonus state game number counter is “10” or more (step S302-3-1-2-5-13-5 = Yes), step S302-3-1— The process proceeds to 2-5-13-6, and when it is determined that the value of the first Bonus state game number counter is not “10” or more (step S302-3-1-2-5-13-5). = No), the process proceeds to step S302-3-1-2-5-13-12.

(Step S302-3-1-2-5-13-6)
In step S302-3-1-2-5-13-6, the sub CPU 401 performs a process of determining whether or not the value of the second effect state point storage area is “60” or more. Specifically, the sub CPU 401 sets the value of the second effect state point storage area to “60” based on the value of the second effect state point storage area included in the condition device command received from the main control board 300. Processing for determining whether or not this is the case is performed. And when it determines with the value of the 2nd production | presentation state point storage area being "60" or more (step S302-3-1-2-5-13-6 = Yes), step S302-3-1 When the process proceeds to -2-5-13-7 and it is determined that the value of the second effect state point storage area is not “60” or more (step S302-3-1-2-5-13). −6 = No), the process proceeds to step S302-3-1-2-5-13-29.

(Step S302-3-1-2-5-13-7)
In step S302-3-1-2-5-13-7, the sub CPU 401 performs a process of determining whether or not the winning is the Bonus replay BR3. Specifically, the sub CPU 401 performs a process of determining whether or not the information relating to the winning combination included in the conditional device command received from the main control board 300 is “Replay BR3 during Bonus”. If it is determined that the win is due to the Bonus replay BR3 (step S302-3-1-2-5-13-7 = Yes), step S302-3-1-2-5-13-8 is performed. If it is determined that the winning is not performed by the Bonus replay BR3 (step S302-3-1-2-5-13-7 = No), step S302-3-1-2-5 is performed. The process proceeds to -13-11.

(Step S302-3-1-2-5-13-8)
In step S302-3-1-2-5-13-8, the sub CPU 401 performs a process of determining whether or not to execute the spinning effect. Specifically, the sub CPU 401 performs a process of determining whether or not the condition device command received from the main control board 300 includes information indicating that the “rotation effect RE21” is to be executed. And when it determines with performing a rotation effect (step S302-3-1-2-5-13-8 = Yes), a process is processed to step S302-3-1-2-5-13-9. If it is determined that the rotation effect is not executed (step S302-3-1-2-5-13-8 = No), the process proceeds to step S302-3-1-2-5-13-10. Migrate processing.

(Step S302-3-1-2-5-13-9)
In step S302-3-1-2-5-13-9, the sub CPU 401 performs processing for setting Bonus replay + rotation effect as an ART winning opportunity type. Specifically, the sub CPU 401 stores, in the ART winning opportunity storage area provided in the sub RAM 403, information indicating the transition to the ART ready state by Bonus replay + rotation effect as the ART winning opportunity type. I do. Then, when the process of step S302-3-1-2-5-13-9 ends, the process proceeds to step S302-3-1-2-5-13-29.

(Step S302-3-1-2-5-13-10)
In step S302-3-1-2-5-13-10, the sub CPU 401 performs processing for setting a Bonus replay as the ART winning opportunity type. Specifically, the sub CPU 401 performs a process of storing information indicating that the state is shifted to the ART preparation state by the Bonus replay as the ART winning opportunity type in the ART winning opportunity storage area provided in the sub RAM 403. Then, when the process of step S302-3-1-2-5-13-10 ends, the process proceeds to step S302-3-1-2-5-13-29.

(Step S302-3-1-2-5-13-11)
In step S302-3-1-2-5-13-11, the sub CPU 401 performs processing for setting a specific combination as an ART winning opportunity type. Specifically, the sub CPU 401 performs a process of storing information indicating that the state shifts to the ART preparation state by the specific role as the ART winning opportunity type in the ART winning opportunity storage area provided in the sub RAM 403. Then, when the process of step S302-3-1-2-5-13-11 ends, the process proceeds to step S302-3-1-2-5-13-29.

(Step S302-3-1-2-5-13-12)
In step S <b> 302-3-1-2-5-13-12, the sub CPU 401 performs a process of determining whether or not the value of the first Bonus state game number counter is “9”. Specifically, the sub CPU 401 determines whether or not the value of the first bonus state game number counter provided in the sub RAM 403 is “9”. If it is determined that the value of the first Bonus state game number counter is “9” (step S302-3-1-2-5-13-12 = Yes), step S302-3-1-2 is performed. When the process proceeds to -5-13-13 and it is determined that the value of the first Bonus state game number counter is not “9” (step S302-3-1-2-5-13-12 = No) ), The process proceeds to step S302-3-1-2-5-13-14.

(Step S302-3-1-2-5-13-13)
In step S302-3-1-2-5-13-13, the sub CPU 401 performs processing of subtracting “10” from the first bonus state point. Specifically, the sub CPU 401 performs a process of subtracting “10” from the value of the first Bonus state point storage area provided in the sub RAM 403. Then, when the process of step S302-3-1-2-5-13-13 ends, the process proceeds to step S302-3-1-2-5-13-14.

(Step S302-3-1-2-5-13-14)
In step S302-3-1-2-5-13-14, the sub CPU 401 performs a process of adding the second half part point lottery result. Specifically, the sub CPU 401 uses the first Bonus state for the first Bonus state in the latter part of the first Bonus state based on the first Bonus state second half part point acquisition lottery table provided in the sub ROM 402 (see FIG. 81G). A process for lottering whether or not to acquire points is performed. When the lottery is won, a process for adding the value won to the value of the first Bonus state point storage area provided in the sub RAM 403 is performed. Then, when the process of step S302-3-1-2-5-13-14 ends, the process proceeds to step S302-3-1-2-5-13-15.

(Step S302-3-1-2-5-13-15)
In step S302-3-1-2-5-13-15, the sub CPU 401 performs processing for determining whether or not the winning number is any one of “17” to “19”. Specifically, the sub CPU 401 determines whether or not the information related to the winning combination included in the conditional device command received from the main control board 300 is any of the winning numbers “17” to “19”. Perform the process. If it is determined that the winning number is any one of “17” to “19” (step S302-3-1-2-5-13-15 = Yes), step S302-3-1- If the process shifts to 2-5-13-16 and it is determined that the winning number is not “17” to “19” (step S302-3-1-2-5-13-15) = No), the process proceeds to step S302-3-1-2-5-13-17.

(Step S302-3-1-2-5-13-16)
In step S302-3-1-2-5-13-16, the sub CPU 401 performs a navigation lottery process. Specifically, the sub CPU 401 includes information on the reel lock effect included in the conditional device command received from the main control board 300, the value of the first Bonus state point storage area provided in the sub RAM 403, Based on the BAR replay winning lottery table (see FIG. 81 (B)) provided in the sub ROM 402, the left stop button 11 that can display a combination of symbols related to BAR replay on the active line, The lottery process is performed to determine whether or not to notify the operation order of the stop button 12 and the right stop button 13. Then, when the process of step S302-3-1-2-5-13-16 ends, the process proceeds to step S302-3-1-2-5-13-17.

(Step S302-3-1-2-5-13-17)
In step S302-3-1-2-5-13-17, the sub CPU 401 performs processing to determine whether or not the ART has been won. Specifically, the sub CPU 401 performs a process of determining whether or not a winning result is obtained as a result of the lottery by the navigation lottery process in step S302-3-1-2-5-13-16. If it is determined that the ART is won (step S302-3-1-2-5-13-17 = Yes), the process proceeds to step S302-3-1-2-5-13-18. If it is determined that the ART is not won (step S302-3-1-2-5-13-17 = No), the process proceeds to step S302-3-1-2-5-13-21. To migrate.

(Step S302-3-1-2-5-13-18)
In step S302-3-1-2-5-13-18, the sub CPU 401 performs processing for determining whether or not to execute the spinning effect. Specifically, the sub CPU 401 performs a process of determining whether or not the condition device command received from the main control board 300 includes information indicating that the “rotation effect RE21” is to be executed. And when it determines with performing a rotation effect (step S302-3-1-2-5-13-18 = Yes), a process is processed to step S302-3-1-2-5-13-19. If it is determined that the rotation effect is not executed (step S302-3-1-2-5-13-18 = No), the process proceeds to step S302-3-1-2-5-13-20. Migrate processing.

(Step S302-3-1-2-5-13-19)
In step S302-3-1-2-5-13-19, the sub CPU 401 performs processing for setting Bonus replay + rotation effect as the ART winning opportunity type. Specifically, the sub CPU 401 stores, in the ART winning opportunity storage area provided in the sub RAM 403, information indicating the transition to the ART ready state by Bonus replay + rotation effect as the ART winning opportunity type. I do. When the process of step S302-3-1-2-5-13-19 ends, the process proceeds to step S302-3-1-2-5-13-22.

(Step S302-3-1-2-5-13-20)
In step S302-3-1-2-5-13-20, the sub CPU 401 performs processing for setting a Bonus replay as the ART winning opportunity type. Specifically, the sub CPU 401 performs a process of storing information indicating that the state is shifted to the ART preparation state by the Bonus replay as the ART winning opportunity type in the ART winning opportunity storage area provided in the sub RAM 403. Then, when the process of step S302-3-1-2-5-13-20 ends, the process proceeds to step S302-3-1-2-5-13-22.

(Step S302-3-1-2-5-13-21)
In step S302-3-1-2-5-13-21, the sub CPU 401 performs relief point calculation processing. Specifically, the sub CPU 401 receives information related to the winning combination included in the conditional device command received from the main control board 300, and a relief point subtraction table provided in the sub ROM 402 (see FIG. 81D). Based on the above, a process for determining a value to be subtracted from the repair point stored in the repair point storage area provided in the sub-RAM 403 is performed, and the process is stored in the repair point storage area provided in the sub-RAM 403. A process of subtracting the determined value from the relief point is performed. Then, when the process of step S302-3-1-2-5-13-21 ends, the process proceeds to step S302-3-1-2-5-13-22.

(Step S302-3-1-2-5-13-22)
In step S302-3-1-2-5-13-22, the sub CPU 401 performs a process of determining whether or not the value of the first Bonus state game number counter is “0”. Specifically, the sub CPU 401 performs a process of determining whether or not the value of the first bonus state game number counter provided in the sub RAM 403 is “0”. If it is determined that the value of the first Bonus state game number counter is “0” (step S302-3-1-2-5-13-22 = Yes), step S302-3-1-2 is performed. When the process proceeds to -5-13-23 and it is determined that the value of the first Bonus state game number counter is not “0” (step S302-3-1-2-5-13-22 = No) ), The process proceeds to step S302-3-1-2-5-13-29.

(Step S302-3-1-2-5-13-23)
In step S302-3-1-2-5-13-23, the sub CPU 401 performs a process of determining whether or not the ART is not won. Specifically, the sub CPU 401 performs a process of determining whether or not the ART is not winning based on a value stored in an ART winning opportunity storage area provided in the sub RAM 403. If it is determined that the ART is not won (step S302-3-1-2-5-13-23 = Yes), the process proceeds to step S302-3-1-2-5-13-24. If it is determined that the ART is not won (step S302-3-1-2-5-13-23 = No), the process proceeds to step S302-3-1-2-5-13-28. To migrate.

(Step S302-3-1-2-5-13-24)
In step S302-3-1-2-5-13-24, the sub CPU 401 performs a final judge lottery process. Specifically, the sub CPU 401 stores the value stored in the first Bonus state point storage area provided in the sub RAM 403 and the final judge lottery table provided in the sub ROM 402 (see FIG. 81C). Based on the above, the lottery process is performed to determine whether or not to shift to the ART state. Then, when the process of step S302-3-1-2-5-13-24 is completed, the process proceeds to step S302-3-1-2-5-13-25.

(Step S302-3-1-2-5-13-25)
In step S302-3-1-2-5-13-25, the sub CPU 401 performs a process of determining whether or not it has been won. Specifically, the sub CPU 401 performs a process of determining whether or not the lottery in the final judge lottery process in step S302-3-1-2-5-13-24 has been won. And when it determines with having won (step S302-3-1-2-5-13-25 = Yes), it transfers a process to step S302-3-1-2-5-13-26, If it is determined that it has not been won (step S302-3-1-2-5-13-25 = No), the process proceeds to step S302-3-1-2-5-13-27.

(Step S302-3-1-2-5-13-26)
In step S302-3-1-2-5-13-26, the sub CPU 401 performs a process of setting a final judge as an ART winning opportunity type. Specifically, the sub CPU 401 performs a process of storing information indicating that the ART transition state is entered into the ART winning opportunity storage area provided in the sub RAM 403 by the final judge as the ART winning opportunity type. Then, when the process of step S302-3-1-2-5-13-26 ends, the process proceeds to step S302-3-1-2-5-13-28.

(Step S302-3-1-2-5-13-27)
In step S302-3-1-2-5-13-27, the sub CPU 401 performs a relief lottery process. Specifically, the sub CPU 401 sets the repair point value stored in the repair point storage area provided in the sub RAM 403 and the repair point lottery table provided in the sub ROM 402 (see FIG. 81E). Based on the above, a process for lottering whether or not to shift to the ART ready state is performed, and when the lottery is won, a final judge as an ART winning opportunity type is stored in the ART winning opportunity storage area provided in the sub RAM 403. Thus, a process for storing information indicating the transition to the ART ready state is performed. Then, when the process of step S302-3-1-2-5-13-27 ends, the process proceeds to step S302-3-1-2-5-13-28.

(Step S302-3-1-2-5-13-28)
In step S302-3-1-2-5-13-28, the sub CPU 401 performs ART point lottery processing after the ART state transition is confirmed. Specifically, the sub CPU 401 stores information related to the winning combination included in the conditional device command received from the main control board 300 and the sub ROM 402 when it is after the transition to the ART state is determined. Based on the first Bonus state second-half part point acquisition lottery table (see FIG. 81G), a lottery is performed as to whether or not to acquire an ART point. If the lottery is won, the sub RAM 403 The winning value is added to the ART point storage area provided in. Then, when the process of step S302-3-1-2-5-13-28 ends, the process proceeds to step S302-3-1-2-5-13-29.

(Step S302-3-1-2-5-13-29)
In step S302-3-1-2-5-13-29, the sub CPU 401 performs a first Bonus state process which will be described in detail later with reference to FIG. In the process, the sub CPU 401 performs a process of ending the first bonus state when the value of the first bonus state game number counter provided in the sub RAM 403 is “0”. When the process of step S302-3-1-2-5-13-29 ends, the subroutine for the first Bonus state process ends, and step S302-3-1-2-6 of the conditional device command reception process ends. The process is transferred to.

(Process during the first Bonus state)
Next, based on FIG. 133, the process in 1st Bonus state performed by the process of step S302-3-1-2-5-13-29 of FIG. 132 is demonstrated. FIG. 133 is a diagram showing a subroutine of processing during the first Bonus state.

(Step S302-3-1-2-5-13-29-1)
In step S302-3-1-2-5-13-29-1, the sub CPU 401 performs processing to determine whether or not the ART winning opportunity has been set. Specifically, the sub CPU 401 performs processing to determine whether or not information indicating that the ART preparation state is to be stored is stored in the ART winning opportunity storage area provided in the sub RAM 403. If it is determined that the ART winning opportunity has been set (step S302-3-1-2-5-13-29-1 = Yes), step S302-3-1-2-5-13 When the process is shifted to -29-2 and it is determined that the ART winning opportunity has not been set (step S302-3-1-2-5-13-29-1 = No), step S302-3 The process proceeds to -1-2-2-5-13-29-3.

(Step S302-3-1-2-5-13-29-2)
In step S302-3-1-2-5-13-29-2, the sub CPU 401 performs a first Bonus state migration destination determination process. Specifically, the sub CPU 401 is based on the value of the ART winning opportunity storage area provided in the sub RAM 403 and the first Bonus state state transition lottery table provided in the sub ROM 402 (see FIG. 81F). Then, a state managed by the sub control board 400 is determined by lottery, and the determined information is stored in a state storage area provided in the sub RAM 403. Then, when the process of step S302-3-1-2-5-13-29-2 ends, the process proceeds to step S302-3-1-2-5-13-29-3.

(Step S302-3-1-2-5-13-29-3)
In step S302-3-1-2-5-13-29-3, the sub CPU 401 performs a process of determining whether or not the value of the first Bonus state game number counter is “0”. Specifically, the sub CPU 401 performs a process of determining whether or not the value of the first bonus state game number counter provided in the sub RAM 403 is “0”. If it is determined that the value of the first Bonus state game number counter is “0” (step S302-3-1-2-5-13-29-3 = Yes), step S302-3-1 is performed. When the process proceeds to -2-5-13-29-4 and it is determined that the value of the first Bonus state game number counter is not “0” (step S302-3-1-2-5-13) -29-3 = No), the subroutine of the first Bonus state process is terminated, and the process proceeds to step S302-3-1-2-6 of the process at the time of receiving the conditional device command.

(Step S302-3-1-2-5-13-29-4)
In step S302-3-1-2-5-13-29-4, the sub CPU 401 performs processing at the end of the first Bonus state. Specifically, the sub CPU 401 determines whether or not information indicating the transition to the ART preparation state is stored in the ART winning opportunity storage area provided in the sub RAM 403, and the transition to the ART preparation state is performed. Is stored, the above-mentioned ART initial hit process is performed. On the other hand, if the information indicating the transition to the ART ready state is not stored, (a) processing for setting “1000” to the value of the ceiling game number counter provided in the sub RAM 403, or (b) sub Based on the Bonus state end mode lottery table provided in the ROM 402 (see FIG. 47B), the lottery for the normal mode or the specific mode is performed, and the result of the lottery is displayed in the sub-RAM 403. (C) a specific mode provided in the sub ROM 402 when information related to the specific mode is stored in the mode information storage area provided in the sub RAM 403 Based on the number-of-games lottery table (see FIG. 47D), the number of games in the specific mode is determined, and the determined number of games is stored in the sub-RAM. The process stored in the specific mode game number counter provided in 03, (d) In the next game, provided in the sub RAM 403 so that the state managed by the sub control board 400 becomes the first fall standby state. (E) A process of clearing the value of the specific winning number counter provided in the sub-RAM 403 is performed. When the process of step S302-3-1-2-5-13-29-4 ends, the subroutine for the first bonus state process ends, and step S302-3-1-2 of the conditional device command reception process ends. The process is shifted to -6.

(Second Bonus state processing)
Next, based on FIG. 134, the second Bonus state performed when the state managed by the sub-control board 400 is the second Bonus state in the state-specific transition process of Step S <b> 302-3-2-5 in FIG. 117. The processing will be described. FIG. 134 is a diagram showing a subroutine of the second Bonus state process.

(Step S302-3-1-2-5-14-1)
In step S302-3-1-2-5-14-1, the sub CPU 401 performs a process of subtracting “1” from the value of the second Bonus state game number counter. Specifically, the sub CPU 401 performs a process of subtracting “1” from the value of the second bonus state game number counter provided in the sub RAM 403. Then, when the process of step S302-3-1-2-5-14-1 ends, the process proceeds to step S302-3-1-2-5-14-2.

(Step S302-3-1-2-5-14-2)
In step S302-3-1-2-5-14-2, the sub CPU 401 performs processing to determine whether or not the value of the second Bonus state game number counter is “5” or more. Specifically, the sub CPU 401 performs a process of determining whether or not the value of the second bonus state game number counter provided in the sub RAM 403 is “5” or more. If it is determined that the value of the second Bonus state game number counter is “5” or more (step S302-3-1-2-5-14-2 = Yes), step S302-3-1-1— If the process proceeds to 2-5-14-3 and it is determined that the value of the second Bonus state game number counter is not “5” or more (step S302-3-1-2-5-14-2). = No), the process proceeds to step S302-3-1-2-5-14-11.

(Step S302-3-1-2-5-14-3)
In step S302-3-1-2-5-14-3, the sub CPU 401 performs a second bonus state point addition process. Specifically, the sub CPU 401 includes information related to the winning combination included in the conditional device command received from the main control board 300, and a second Bonus state point acquisition lottery table provided in the sub ROM 402 (FIG. 82 ( C)), a lottery for determining whether or not to acquire the second Bonus state point is performed, and the lottery result is set to a value stored in the second Bonus state point storage area provided in the sub-RAM 403. Perform the addition process. Then, when the process of step S302-3-1-2-5-14-3 ends, the process proceeds to step S302-3-1-2-5-14-4.

(Step S302-3-1-2-5-14-4)
In step S <b> 302-3-2-5-14-4, the sub CPU 401 performs a process of determining whether or not the acquired value of the second bonus state point is “1” or more. Specifically, the sub CPU 401 determines whether the value of the second Bonus state point added by the second Bonus state point addition process in Step S302-3-1-2-5-14-3 is “1” or more. Processing to determine whether or not. Then, when it is determined that the acquired value of the second Bonus state point is “1” or more (step S302-3-1-2-5-14-4 = Yes), step S302-3-1 The process proceeds to -2-5-14-5, and when it is determined that the acquired value of the second Bonus state point is not “1” or more (step S302-3-1-2-5-14) -4 = No), the process proceeds to step S302-3-1-2-5-14-6.

(Step S302-3-1-2-5-14-5)
In step S302-3-1-2-5-14-5, the sub CPU 401 performs processing of adding “1” to the value of the combo counter. Specifically, the sub CPU 401 performs a process of adding “1” to the value of the combo counter provided in the sub RAM 403. Then, when the process of step S302-3-1-2-5-14-5 ends, the process proceeds to step S302-3-1-2-5-14-7.

(Step S302-3-1-2-5-14-6)
In step S302-3-1-2-5-14-6, the sub CPU 401 performs a process of setting “0” to the value of the combo counter. Specifically, the sub CPU 401 performs a process of setting “0” to the value of the combo counter provided in the sub RAM 403. Then, when the process of step S302-3-1-2-5-14-6 ends, the process proceeds to step S302-3-1-2-5-14-7.

(Step S302-3-1-2-5-14-7)
In step S302-3-1-2-5-14-7, the sub CPU 401 determines whether or not the value of the combo counter is “2” or more. Specifically, the sub CPU 401 performs processing for determining whether or not the value of the combo counter is “2” or more based on the value of the combo counter provided in the sub RAM 403. If it is determined that the value of the combo counter is “2” or more (step S302-3-1-2-5-14-7 = Yes), step S302-3-1-2-5- If the process proceeds to 14-8 and it is determined that the value of the combo counter is not “2” or more (step S302-3-1-2-5-14-7 = No), step S302-3 The process is shifted to -1-2-5-14-9.

(Step S302-3-1-2-5-14-8)
In step S302-3-1-2-5-14-8, the sub CPU 401 performs combo successful point addition processing. Specifically, the sub CPU 401 determines the second Bonus state point based on the value of the combo counter provided in the sub RAM 403 and the combo point lottery table provided in the sub ROM 402 (see FIG. 82B). In the case of winning as a result of the lottery, a process of adding to the second Bonus state point storage area provided in the sub RAM 403 and storing is performed. Then, when the process of step S302-3-1-2-5-14-8 ends, the process proceeds to step S302-3-1-2-5-14-9.

(Step S302-3-1-2-5-14-9)
In step S302-3-1-2-5-14-9, the sub CPU 401 performs a process of determining whether or not the value of the second Bonus state game number counter is “5”. Specifically, the sub CPU 401 performs a process of determining whether or not the value of the second bonus state game number counter provided in the sub RAM 403 is “5”. If it is determined that the value of the second Bonus state game number counter is “5” (step S302-3-1-2-5-14-9 = Yes), step S302-3-1-2. When the process proceeds to -5-14-10 and it is determined that the value of the second Bonus state game number counter is not “5” (step S302-3-1-2-5-14-9 = No) ), The process proceeds to step S302-3-1-2-5-14-11.

(Step S302-3-1-2-5-14-10)
In step S302-3-1-2-5-14-10, the sub CPU 401 performs the second Bonus state first half part ART state transition lottery process. Specifically, the sub CPU 401 stores the value of the second Bonus state point storage area provided in the sub RAM 403 and the second Bonus state state transition lottery table provided in the sub ROM 402 (see FIG. 82D). Based on the above, a process for determining a transition destination of the state managed by the sub-control board 400 is performed. In addition, when the ART state is determined as the transfer destination, the sub CPU 401 performs processing for storing information related to the ART preparation state in the state storage area provided in the sub RAM 403, and the first RUSH state is set as the transfer destination. If it is determined, processing for storing information relating to the RUSH ready state in the state storage area provided in the sub RAM 403 is performed, and the value of the first RUSH state stock counter provided in the sub RAM 403 is set to “1”. When the second RUSH state is determined as the transfer destination, the information about the RUSH preparation state is stored in the state storage area provided in the sub RAM 403 and the sub RAM 403 is provided. A process of adding “1” to the value of the second RUSH state stock counter being performed is performed. Then, when the process of step S302-3-1-2-5-14-10 ends, the process proceeds to step S302-3-1-2-5-14-11.

(Step S302-3-1-2-5-14-11)
In step S302-3-1-2-5-14-11, the sub CPU 401 performs a process of determining whether or not the ART is not won. Specifically, the sub CPU 401 performs a process of determining whether or not the ART is not won based on a value stored in a state storage area provided in the sub RAM 403. If it is determined that the ART is not won (step S302-3-1-2-5-14-11 = Yes), the process proceeds to step S302-3-1-2-5-14-12. When it is determined that the ART is not won (step S302-3-1-2-5-14-12 = No), the process proceeds to step S302-3-1-2-5-14-13. To migrate.

(Step S302-3-1-2-5-14-12)
In step S302-3-1-2-5-14-12, the sub CPU 401 performs a second Bonus state second-half part ART state transition lottery process. Specifically, the sub CPU 401 stores information related to the winning combination included in the conditional device command received from the main control board 300, and the state transition lottery table for the second Bonus state second half part provided in the sub ROM 402 (FIG. 82 (E)), the process of determining the transition destination of the state managed by the sub-control board 400 is performed. In addition, when the ART state is determined as the transfer destination, the sub CPU 401 performs processing for storing information related to the ART preparation state in the state storage area provided in the sub RAM 403, and the first RUSH state is set as the transfer destination. If it is determined, processing for storing information relating to the RUSH ready state in the state storage area provided in the sub RAM 403 is performed, and the value of the first RUSH state stock counter provided in the sub RAM 403 is set to “1”. When the second RUSH state is determined as the transfer destination, the information about the RUSH preparation state is stored in the state storage area provided in the sub RAM 403 and the sub RAM 403 is provided. A process of adding “1” to the value of the second RUSH state stock counter being performed is performed. Then, when the process of step S302-3-1-2-5-14-12 ends, the process proceeds to step S302-3-1-2-5-14-14.

(Step S302-3-1-2-5-14-13)
In step S302-3-1-2-5-14-13, the sub CPU 401 performs ART point lottery processing after the ART state transition is confirmed. Specifically, the sub CPU 401 stores information related to the winning combination included in the conditional device command received from the main control board 300 and the sub ROM 402 when it is after the transition to the ART state is determined. Based on the second Bonus state ART point acquisition lottery table (see FIG. 82 (F)), a lottery is performed as to whether or not to acquire an ART point. A process of adding the winning value to the provided ART point storage area is performed. Then, when the process of step S302-3-1-2-5-14-13 ends, the process proceeds to step S302-3-1-2-5-14-14.

(Step S302-3-1-2-5-14-14)
In step S302-3-1-2-5-14-14, the sub CPU 401 performs processing to determine whether or not the value of the second Bonus state game number counter is “0”. Specifically, the sub CPU 401 performs a process of determining whether or not the value of the second bonus state game number counter provided in the sub RAM 403 is “0”. If it is determined that the value of the second Bonus state game number counter is “0” (step S302-3-1-2-5-14-14 = Yes), step S302-3-1-2 is performed. When the process proceeds to -5-14-15 and it is determined that the value of the second Bonus state game number counter is not “0” (step S302-3-1-2-5-14-14 = No) ), The second Bonus state process subroutine is terminated, and the process proceeds to step S302-3-1-2-6 in the conditional device command reception process.

(Step S302-3-1-2-5-14-15)
In step S302-3-1-2-5-14-15, the sub CPU 401 performs processing at the end of the second Bonus state. Specifically, the sub CPU 401, when information related to the ART ready state, the first RUSH state, or the second RUSH state is stored in the state storage area provided in the sub RAM 403, Perform time processing. On the other hand, when information related to the first fall standby state is stored, (a) processing for setting “1000” to the value of the ceiling game number counter provided in the sub RAM 403, or (b) sub ROM 402 Based on the Bonus state end mode lottery table (see FIG. 47 (B)) provided in FIG. Processing to store in a mode information storage area provided, (c) A specific mode game provided in the sub ROM 402 when information relating to a specific mode is stored in the mode information storage area provided in the sub RAM 403 Based on the number lottery table (see FIG. 49D), the number of games in the specific mode is determined, and the determined number of games is stored in the sub-RAM 403. (D) A state provided in the sub-RAM 403 so that the state managed by the sub-control board 400 becomes the first fall standby state in the next game. A process of setting the first fall standby state in the storage area, and (e) a process of clearing the value of the specific winning combination counter provided in the sub RAM 403 are performed. When the process of step S302-3-1-2-5-14-15 ends, the subroutine for the second Bonus state process ends, and step S302-3-1-2-6 of the conditional device command reception process ends. The process is transferred to.

(Processing for the first fall standby state)
Next, based on FIG. 135, in the state-by-state transition processing in step S302-3-1-2-5 in FIG. 117, the first process is performed when the state managed by the sub-control board 400 is the first fall standby state. The process for the one fall standby state will be described. FIG. 135 is a diagram showing a subroutine of the first fall standby state processing.

(Step S302-3-1-2-5-15-1)
In step S302-3-1-2-5-15-1, the sub CPU 401 performs a first falling standby state pull-out lottery process. Specifically, the sub CPU 401 includes information related to the winning combination included in the conditional device command received from the main control board 300, and a first fall waiting state lottery table provided in the sub RAM 403 (FIG. 74 ( Based on A), a process of drawing whether or not to acquire an ART point is performed. In addition, when the sub CPU 402 is elected, the sub CPU 402 performs a process of adding the winning value to the ART point storage area provided in the sub RAM 403 and storing it. Then, when the process of step S302-3-1-2-5-15-1 ends, the process proceeds to step S302-3-1-2-5-15-2.

(Step S302-3-1-2-5-15-2)
In step S302-3-1-2-5-15-2, the sub CPU 401 performs a process of determining whether or not it has been won. Specifically, the sub CPU 401 performs a process of determining whether or not the lottery in the first falling standby state pull-out lottery process in step S302-3-1-2-5-15-1 has been won. And when it determines with having won (step S302-3-1-2-5-15-2 = Yes), it transfers a process to step S302-3-1-2-5-15-3, If it is determined that it has not been won (step S302-3-1-2-5-15-2 = No), the subroutine of the first fall standby process is terminated, and the conditional device command reception process is terminated. The process proceeds to step S302-3-1-2-6.

(Step S302-3-1-2-5-15-3)
In step S302-3-1-2-5-15-3, the sub CPU 401 performs ART initial hit processing. Specifically, when it is determined that (a) the transition to the ART state is made, the sub CPU 401 transitions to the scenario determination table (see FIG. 67C) provided in the sub ROM 402 and the ART state. Based on the determined conditions, a process for determining a scenario is performed, a process for storing information related to the determined scenario in a scenario information storage area provided in the sub RAM 403, and a sub control board 400 in the next game. The process of setting the ART preparation state in the state storage area provided in the sub-RAM 403 is performed so that the state managed by the above becomes the ART preparation state. Further, the sub CPU 401 determines the rank by lottery based on the ART state transition rank lottery table (see FIG. 67 (A)) provided in the sub ROM 402 and the condition for shifting to the ART state. And a process for storing the determined rank in a rank storage area provided in the sub-RAM 403. Further, the sub CPU 401 performs a process of drawing ART points based on the ART state transition ART point lottery table (see FIG. 67B) provided in the sub ROM 402, and the ART points acquired by the lottery. Is stored in the ART point storage area provided in the sub RAM 403. Further, the sub CPU 401 is based on the value stored in the rank storage area provided in the sub RAM 403 and the ART level lottery table (first set) provided in the sub ROM 402 (see FIG. 67 (E)). To determine the ART level. Then, when the process of step S302-3-1-2-5-15-3 is completed, the subroutine of the first fall waiting state process is ended, and step S302-3-1-2 of the conditional device command reception process is ended. The process is shifted to -6.

(ART preparation status processing)
Next, based on FIG. 136, in the state-by-state transition processing in step S302-3-1-2-5 in FIG. 117, the ART preparation state performed when the state managed by the sub-control board 400 is the ART preparation state. The processing will be described. FIG. 136 is a diagram showing a subroutine of the ART preparation state processing.

(Step S302-3-1-2-5-16-1)
In step S302-3-1-2-5-16-1, the sub CPU 401 performs a process of determining whether or not the winning number is “05”. Specifically, the sub CPU 401 performs a process of determining whether or not the information related to the winning combination included in the conditional device command received from the main control board 300 is the winning number “05”. And when it determines with a winning number being "05" (step S302-3-1-2-5-16-1 = Yes), step S302-3-1-2-5-16-2 If it is determined that the winning number is not “05” (step S302-3-1-2-5-16-1 = No), step S302-3-1-2-5 The process proceeds to -16-3.

(Step S302-3-1-2-5-16-2)
In step S302-3-1-2-5-16-2, the sub CPU 401 performs a direct hit winning process. Specifically, the sub CPU 401 (a) updates the Bonus winning opportunity storage area provided in the sub RAM 403, (b) the third chance state game number counter provided in the sub RAM 403, A process for clearing the 4-chance state game number counter, etc., (c) the above-mentioned ART initial hit process, (d) a Bonus winning process described later, etc. are performed. When the processing of step S302-3-1-2-5-16-2 is completed, the ART preparation state processing subroutine is terminated, and step S302-3-1-2-6 of conditional device command reception processing is completed. The process is transferred to.

(Step S302-3-1-2-5-16-3)
In step S302-3-1-2-5-16-3, the sub CPU 401 performs ART point addition lottery processing. Specifically, the sub CPU 401 includes information related to the winning combination included in the conditional device command received from the main control board 300, and an ART preparation state point acquisition lottery table provided in the sub ROM 402 (FIG. 73 ( Based on A), a process for drawing whether or not to acquire an ART point is performed, and if the result of the lottery is won, the value of the ART point storage area provided in the sub-RAM 403 is won. The process which adds and stores the points acquired by (1) is performed. When the processing of step S302-3-1-2-5-16-3 is completed, the ART preparation state processing subroutine is terminated, and step S302-3-1-2-6 of conditional device command reception processing is completed. The process is transferred to.

(ART status processing)
Next, based on FIG. 137, in the state-specific transition processing in step S302-3-1-2-5 of FIG. 117, the ART state processing performed when the state managed by the sub control board 400 is the ART state. Will be described. FIG. 137 is a diagram showing a subroutine of ART state processing.

(Step S302-3-1-2-5-17-1)
In step S302-3-1-2-5-17-1, the sub CPU 401 performs processing for turning off the validity flag. Specifically, the sub CPU 401 performs processing for turning off the success / failure flag in the success / failure flag storage area provided in the sub RAM 403. Then, when the process of step S302-3-1-2-5-17-1 ends, the process proceeds to step S302-3-1-2-5-17-2.

  The success / failure flag is a flag for identifying whether or not to perform a lottery to determine whether or not to shift to the first added state, the second added state, the winning stock precursory state, or the ART chance state.

(Step S302-3-1-2-5-17-2)
In step S302-3-1-2-5-17-2, the sub CPU 401 performs a subtraction process during the ART state. Specifically, the sub CPU 401 performs a process of subtracting “1” from the value of the ART state game number counter provided in the sub RAM 403. In addition, when the value of the fake game number counter provided in the sub RAM 403 is “1” or more, the sub CPU 401 subtracts “1” from the value of the fake game number counter provided in the sub RAM 403. I do. Then, when the process of step S302-3-1-2-5-17-2 ends, the process proceeds to step S302-3-1-2-5-17-3.

(Step S302-3-1-2-5-17-3)
In step S302-3-1-2-5-17-3, the sub CPU 401 performs ART point addition lottery processing. Specifically, the sub CPU 401 determines the ART state point acquisition lottery table provided in the sub ROM 402 based on the value stored in the ART level storage area provided in the sub RAM 403 (FIG. 72A). 72 (B), 72 (C), and 72 (D)), the selected ART state point acquisition lottery table and the condition device command received from the main control board 300 are included. Based on the information related to the winning combination, a lottery is performed as to whether or not to acquire ART points. In addition, when the lottery is won, the sub CPU 401 performs a process of storing the winning value in the ART point storage area provided in the sub RAM 403. Then, when the process of step S302-3-1-2-5-17-3 ends, the process proceeds to step S302-3-1-2-5-17-4.

(Step S302-3-1-2-5-17-4)
In step S302-3-1-2-5-17-4, the sub CPU 401 performs processing to determine whether or not the second added state stock flag is OFF. Specifically, the sub CPU 401 performs a process of determining whether or not the second added state stock flag is OFF based on the value of the second added state stock flag storage area provided in the sub RAM 403. If it is determined that the second added state stock flag is OFF (step S302-3-1-2-5-17-4 = Yes), step S302-3-1-2-5-17 When the process proceeds to -5 and it is determined that the second added state stock flag is not OFF (step S302-3-1-2-5-17-4 = No), step S302-3-1 The process shifts to -2-5-17-9.

(Step S302-3-1-2-5-17-5)
In step S302-3-1-2-5-17-5, the sub CPU 401 performs a second added state transition lottery process. Specifically, the sub CPU 401 includes information related to the winning combination included in the conditional device command received from the main control board 300, and a second added state transition lottery table provided in the sub ROM 402 (see FIG. 69). Based on the above, the lottery process is performed to determine whether or not to shift to the second added state. When the sub CPU 401 wins the lottery, the sub CPU 403 determines whether the sub flag 403 is a correct / incorrect flag storage area, and the sub RAM 403 provides the second additional state stock flag storage area. Processing to set the status stock flag to ON is performed. Then, when the process of step S302-3-1-2-5-17-5 ends, the process proceeds to step S302-3-1-2-5-17-6.

(Step S302-3-1-2-5-17-6)
In step S302-3-1-2-5-17-6, the sub CPU 401 performs a process of determining whether or not the second added state transition lottery has been won. Specifically, the sub CPU 401 determines whether or not the success / failure flag is turned on as a result of performing the second added state transition lottery process in step S302-3-1-2-5-17-5. Do. And when it determines with having won the 2nd addition state transfer lottery (step S302-3-1-2-5-17-6 = Yes), step S302-3-1-2-5-17-. If the process proceeds to 7 and it is determined that the second added state transition lottery is not won (step S302-3-1-2-5-17-6 = No), step S302-3-1 The process shifts to -2-5-17-9.

(Step S302-3-1-2-5-17-7)
In step S302-3-1-2-5-17-7, the sub CPU 401 performs rank upgrade lottery processing when the second added state is won. Specifically, the sub CPU 401 performs processing for determining a rank based on the ART state transition rank lottery table (see FIG. 67A) provided in the sub ROM 402, and the determined rank and If the rank stored in the rank storage area provided in the sub RAM 403 is compared and the determined rank is more advantageous for the player, the rank storage area provided in the sub RAM 403 The rank stored in is updated to the determined rank. Then, when the process of step S302-3-1-2-5-17-7 ends, the process proceeds to step S302-3-1-2-5-17-8.

(Step S302-3-1-2-5-17-8)
In step S302-3-1-2-5-17-8, the sub CPU 401 performs a second added state winning process. Specifically, if the value of the ART state game number counter provided in the sub RAM 403 is “1” or more, the sub CPU 401 adds the state managed by the sub control board 400 in the next game. When processing for setting the precursor state is added to the state storage area provided in the sub RAM 403 so as to be in the precursor state, and the value of the ART state game number counter provided in the sub RAM 403 is not “1” or more In the next game, a process of setting an additional preparation state in a state storage area provided in the sub RAM 403 or a process provided in the sub RAM 403 so that the state managed by the sub control board 400 becomes an additional preparation state. For example, a process of turning on the success / failure flag of the given success / failure flag storage area is performed. Then, when the process of step S302-3-1-2-5-17-8 ends, the process proceeds to step S302-3-1-2-5-17-9.

(Step S302-3-1-2-5-17-9)
In step S302-3-1-2-5-17-9, the sub CPU 401 performs a process of determining whether or not the success / failure flag is OFF. Specifically, the sub CPU 401 performs processing for determining whether or not the success / failure flag is OFF based on the value of the success / failure flag storage area provided in the sub RAM 403. If it is determined that the success / failure flag is OFF (step S302-3-1-2-5-17-9 = Yes), the process proceeds to step S302-3-1-2-5-17-10. If it is determined that the success / failure flag is not OFF (step S302-3-1-2-5-17-9 = No), step S302-3-1-2-5-17-15 The process is transferred to.

(Step S302-3-1-2-5-17-10)
In step S302-3-1-2-5-17-10, the sub CPU 401 performs processing to determine whether or not the winning stock flag is OFF. Specifically, the sub CPU 401 performs processing to determine whether or not the winning stock flag is OFF based on the value of the winning stock flag storage area provided in the sub RAM 403. If it is determined that the winning stock flag is OFF (step S302-3-1-2-5-17-10 = Yes), the process proceeds to step S302-3-1-2-5-17-11. If the process is shifted and it is determined that the winning stock flag is not OFF (step S302-3-1-2-5-17-10 = No), step S302-3-1-2-5-17 The process is shifted to -15.

(Step S302-3-1-2-5-17-11)
In step S302-3-1-2-5-17-11, the sub CPU 401 performs processing to determine whether or not the ART level is NML. Specifically, the sub CPU 401 performs processing for determining whether or not the ART level is NML based on the value of the ART level storage area provided in the sub RAM 403. If it is determined that the ART level is NML (step S302-3-1-2-5-17-11 = Yes), the process proceeds to step S302-3-1-2-5-17-12. If it is determined that the level is not ART level NML (step S302-3-1-2-5-17-11 = No), the process proceeds to step S302-3-1-2-5-17-15. To migrate.

(Step S302-3-1-2-5-17-12)
In step S302-3-1-2-5-17-12, the sub CPU 401 performs a winning stock lottery process. Specifically, the sub CPU 401 is based on the winning combination lottery table (see FIG. 70) provided in the sub ROM 402 and information relating to the winning combination included in the conditional device command received from the main control board 300. Then, a process of drawing whether or not to acquire the winning stock is performed. Then, when the process of step S302-3-1-2-5-17-12 ends, the process proceeds to step S302-3-1-2-5-17-13.

(Step S302-3-1-2-5-17-13)
In step S302-3-1-2-5-17-13, the sub CPU 401 performs a process of determining whether or not the winning stock lottery is won. Specifically, the sub CPU 401 performs a process of determining whether or not the winning stock has been acquired as a result of the lottery in the winning stock lottery process in step S302-3-1-2-5-17-12. If it is determined that the winning stock lottery is won (step S302-3-1-2-5-17-13 = Yes), the process proceeds to step S302-3-1-2-5-17-14. If it is determined that the winning stock lottery is not won (step S302-3-1-2-5-17-13 = No), step S302-3-1-2-5-17 The process is shifted to -15.

(Step S302-3-1-2-5-17-14)
In step S302-3-1-2-5-17-14, the sub CPU 401 performs a winning stock winning process. Specifically, the sub CPU 401 stores information indicating that the winning stock winning flag is stored in the winning stock winning flag storage area provided in the sub RAM 403 and is managed by the sub control board 400 in the next game. Processing to set the winning stock precursor state in the state storage area provided in the sub RAM 403 so that the state becomes the winning stock precursor state, and processing to turn on the success flag in the success flag storage area provided in the sub RAM 403 Then, processing for setting the value of the winning stock precursor state game number counter provided in the sub RAM 403 is performed. When the process of step S302-3-1-2-5-17-14 ends, the process proceeds to step S302-3-1-2-5-17-15.

(Step S302-3-1-2-5-17-15)
In step S302-3-1-2-5-17-15, the sub CPU 401 performs a process of determining whether or not the success / failure flag is OFF. Specifically, the sub CPU 401 performs processing for determining whether or not the success / failure flag is OFF based on the value of the success / failure flag storage area provided in the sub RAM 403. If it is determined that the success / failure flag is OFF (step S302-3-1-2-5-17-15 = Yes), the process proceeds to step S302-3-1-2-5-17-16. If it is determined that the success / failure flag is not OFF (step S302-3-1-2-5-17-15 = No), step S302-3-1-2-5-17-19 is performed. The process is transferred to.

(Step S302-3-1-2-5-17-16)
In step S302-3-1-2-5-17-16, the sub CPU 401 performs an ART state state transition lottery process. Specifically, the sub CPU 401 includes information related to the winning combination included in the conditional device command received from the main control board 300 and the state transition lottery table for the ART state provided in the sub ROM 402 (see FIG. 71). Based on the above, a process of determining whether or not to shift to the ART chance state or the first added state is performed. Then, when the process of step S302-3-1-2-5-17-16 ends, the process proceeds to step S302-3-1-2-5-17-17.

(Step S302-3-1-2-5-17-17)
In step S302-3-1-2-5-17-17, the sub CPU 401 performs a process of determining whether or not the ART state state lottery is won. Specifically, the sub CPU 401 shifts to the ART state chance state or the first added state as a result of the lottery in the state transition lottery process for the ART state in step S302-3-1-2-5-17-16. The process of determining whether or not is determined. If it is determined that the state state lottery for the ART state has been won (step S302-3-1-2-5-17-17 = Yes), step S302-3-1-2-5-17- If it is determined that the state transition lottery for ART state is not won (step S302-3-1-2-5-17-17 = No), step S302-3-1 is performed. The process shifts to -2-5-17-19.

(Step S302-3-1-2-5-17-18)
In step S302-3-1-2-5-17-18, the sub CPU 401 performs ART state transition processing. Specifically, when the sub CPU 401 determines to shift to the ART chance state as a result of the lottery in the state transition lottery process for the ART state in step S302-3-1-2-5-17-16. In the next game, the processing of setting the ART chance state in the state storage area provided in the sub RAM 403 so that the state managed by the sub control board 400 becomes the ART chance state, Based on the provided ART chance chance state game number lottery table (see FIG. 76A), the number of games that can be played in the ART chance state is determined, and the determined number of games is subtracted. A process of setting in an ART chance chance state game number counter provided in the RAM 403 is performed. On the other hand, if the sub CPU 401 determines to shift to the first added state as a result of the lottery in the state transition lottery process for the ART state in step S302-3-1-2-5-17-16, In the game, the process of setting the ART warning sign state in the state storage area provided in the sub RAM 403 or the sub RAM 403 is provided so that the state managed by the sub control board 400 becomes the ART warning sign state. The process of setting the value of the ART early warning state game number counter is performed. Then, when the process of step S302-3-1-2-5-17-18 ends, the process proceeds to step S302-3-1-2-5-17-19.

(Step S302-3-1-2-5-17-19)
In step S302-3-1-2-5-17-19, the sub CPU 401 performs a process of determining whether or not the success / failure flag is OFF. Specifically, the sub CPU 401 performs processing for determining whether or not the success / failure flag is OFF based on the value of the success / failure flag storage area provided in the sub RAM 403. If it is determined that the success / failure flag is OFF (step S302-3-1-2-5-17-19 = Yes), the process proceeds to step S302-3-1-2-5-17-20. If it is determined that the success / failure flag is not OFF (step S302-3-1-2-5-17-19 = No), the ART state processing subroutine is terminated and the conditional device command is received. The processing shifts to step S302-3-1-2-6 of the time processing.

(Step S302-3-1-2-5-17-20)
In step S302-3-1-2-5-17-20, the sub CPU 401 determines whether or not the value of the fake game number counter is “1” or more. Specifically, the sub CPU 401 performs a process of determining whether or not the value of the fake game number counter provided in the sub RAM 403 is “1” or more. When it is determined that the value of the fake game number counter is “1” or more (step S302-3-1-2-5-17-20 = Yes), the ART state subroutine is terminated. Then, the process proceeds to step S302-3-1-2-6 of the process at the time of receiving the conditional device command. On the other hand, when it is determined that the value of the fake game number counter is not “1” or more (step S302-3-1-2-5-17-20 = No), step S302-3-1-2-2 is performed. The process proceeds to 5-17-21.

(Step S302-3-1-2-5-17-21)
In step S302-3-1-2-5-17-21, the sub CPU 401 determines whether or not the value of the ART state game number counter is “1” or more. Specifically, the sub CPU 401 performs a process of determining whether or not the value of the ART state game number counter provided in the sub RAM 403 is “1” or more. If it is determined that the value of the ART state game number counter is “1” or more (step S302-3-1-2-5-17-21 = Yes), step S302-3-1-2 is performed. If the process proceeds to -5-17-22 and it is determined that the value of the ART state game number counter is not equal to or greater than "1" (step S302-3-1-2-5-17-21 = No) ), The process proceeds to step S302-3-1-2-5-17-25.

(Step S302-3-1-2-5-17-22)
In step S302-3-1-2-5-17-22, the sub CPU 401 performs a fake game number lottery process during the ART state. Specifically, the sub CPU 401 shifts the player to the first added state or enters the second added state based on the information related to the winning combination included in the conditional device command received from the main control board 300. The lottery process, the transition to the chance state during the ART, and the fake production to perform the fake production that expects to acquire the winning stock over multiple games are lottery, and the lottery is won In this case, the number of games for which the fake effect is executed is determined by lottery, and a process for setting the determined number of games in a fake game number counter provided in the sub RAM 403 is performed. Then, when the process of step S302-3-1-2-5-17-22 ends, the process proceeds to step S302-3-1-2-5-17-23.

(Step S302-3-1-2-5-17-23)
In step S302-3-1-2-5-17-23, the sub CPU 401 performs processing to determine whether or not the value of the fake game number counter is equal to or greater than the ART state game number counter. Specifically, the sub CPU 401 compares the value of the fake game number counter provided in the sub RAM 403 with the value of the ART state game number counter provided in the sub RAM 403, and the value of the fake game number counter is A process of determining whether or not the ART state game number counter is exceeded is performed. If it is determined that the value of the fake game number counter is equal to or greater than the ART state game number counter (step S302-3-1-2-5-17-23 = Yes), step S302-3-1 is performed. When the process proceeds to -2-5-17-24 and it is determined that the value of the fake game number counter is not equal to or greater than the ART state game number counter (step S302-3-1-2-5-17) -23 = No), the ART state processing subroutine is terminated, and the process proceeds to step S302-3-1-2-6 of the conditional device command reception process.

(Step S302-3-1-2-5-17-24)
In step S302-3-1-2-5-17-24, the sub CPU 401 performs a fake game number resetting process during the ART state. Specifically, the sub CPU 401 is provided in the sub RAM 403 so that the value of the fake game number counter provided in the sub RAM 403 is less than the value of the ART state game number counter provided in the sub RAM 403. A process for correcting the value of the counter value of the number of fake games being performed is performed. Then, when the processing of step S302-3-1-2-5-17-24 is completed, the ART state subroutine is terminated, and the conditional device command reception processing is advanced to step S302-3-1-2-6. Migrate processing.

(Step S302-3-1-2-5-17-25)
In step S302-3-1-2-5-17-25, the sub CPU 401 performs processing for setting the state managed by the sub control board 400 to the battle state in the next game. Specifically, in the next game, the sub CPU 401 performs a process of setting the battle state in the state storage area provided in the sub RAM 403 so that the state managed by the sub control board 400 becomes the battle state. . When the process of step S302-3-1-2-5-17-25 ends, the process proceeds to step S302-3-1-2-5-17-26.

(Step S302-3-1-2-5-17-26)
In step S302-3-1-2-5-17-26, the sub CPU 401 performs battle state ceiling frequency setting processing. Specifically, the sub CPU 401 performs a process of setting “10” to the battle state ceiling number counter provided in the sub RAM 403. When the process of step S302-3-1-2-5-17-26 ends, the process proceeds to step S302-3-1-2-5-17-27.

  In this embodiment, “10” is set in the battle state ceiling number counter provided in the sub-RAM 403 by the battle state ceiling number setting process. However, the present invention is not limited to this. The battle state ceiling number setting process may not be performed.

(Step S302-3-1-2-5-17-27)
In step S302-3-1-2-5-17-27, the sub CPU 401 performs a process of setting “0” to the value of the fake game number counter. Specifically, the sub CPU 401 performs a process of setting “0” to the value of the fake game number counter provided in the sub RAM 403. When the process of step S302-3-1-2-5-17-27 ends, the process proceeds to step S302-3-1-2-5-17-28.

(Step S302-3-1-2-5-17-28)
In step S302-3-1-2-5-17-28, the sub CPU 401 performs processing for determining whether or not the value of the ART point is “0”. Specifically, the sub CPU 401 performs processing for determining whether or not the value of the ART point is “0” based on the value of the ART point storage area provided in the sub RAM 403. If it is determined that the value of the ART point is “0” (step S302-3-1-2-5-17-28 = Yes), step S302-3-1-2-5-17 If the processing is shifted to -29 and it is determined that the value of the ART point is not "0" (step S302-3-1-2-5-17-28 = No), a subroutine for the ART state processing Is ended, and the process proceeds to step S302-3-1-2-6 in the process at the time of receiving the conditional device command.

(Step S302-3-1-2-5-17-29)
In step S302-3-1-2-5-17-29, the sub CPU 401 performs a process of setting “1” to the ART point. Specifically, the sub CPU 401 performs a process of setting “1” to the value of the ART point storage area provided in the sub RAM 403. By this processing, when shifting to the battle state, it is possible to prevent shifting to the second fall standby state without receiving a lottery as to whether or not to continue the ART state. When the processing of step S302-3-1-2-5-17-29 is completed, the ART state processing subroutine is terminated, and the conditional device command reception processing is advanced to step S302-3-1-2-6. Migrate processing.

(Processing for the precursor state of ART)
Next, based on FIG. 138, in the state-by-state transition processing in step S302-3-1-2-5 in FIG. 117, the ART being executed when the state managed by the sub-control board 400 is the ART warning sign state. The precursor state process will be described. FIG. 138 is a diagram showing a subroutine for the ART precursory state process.

(Step S302-3-1-2-5-18-1)
In step S302-3-1-2-5-18-1, the sub CPU 401 performs processing for turning off the validity flag. Specifically, the sub CPU 401 performs processing for turning off the success / failure flag in the success / failure flag storage area provided in the sub RAM 403. Then, when the process of step S302-3-1-2-5-18-1 ends, the process proceeds to step S302-3-1-2-5-18-2.

(Step S302-3-1-2-5-18-2)
In step S302-3-1-2-5-18-2, the sub CPU 401 performs a process of subtracting “1” from the value of the ART state game number counter. Specifically, the sub CPU 401 performs a process of subtracting “1” from the value of the ART state game number counter provided in the sub RAM 403. Then, when the process of step S302-3-1-2-5-18-2 ends, the process proceeds to step S302-3-1-2-5-18-3.

(Step S302-3-1-2-5-18-3)
In step S302-3-1-2-5-18-3, the sub CPU 401 performs ART point addition lottery processing. Specifically, the sub CPU 401 determines the ART state point acquisition lottery table provided in the sub ROM 402 based on the value stored in the ART level storage area provided in the sub RAM 403 (FIG. 72A). 72 (B), 72 (C), and 72 (D)), the selected ART state point acquisition lottery table and the condition device command received from the main control board 300 are included. Based on the information related to the winning combination, a lottery is performed as to whether or not to acquire ART points. In addition, when the lottery is won, the sub CPU 401 performs a process of storing the winning value in the ART point storage area provided in the sub RAM 403. Then, when the process of step S302-3-1-2-5-18-3 ends, the process proceeds to step S302-3-1-2-5-18-4.

(Step S302-3-1-2-5-18-4)
In step S302-3-1-2-5-18-4, the sub CPU 401 performs processing to determine whether or not the second added state stock flag is OFF. Specifically, the sub CPU 401 performs a process of determining whether or not the second added state stock flag is OFF based on the value of the second added state stock flag storage area provided in the sub RAM 403. If it is determined that the second added state stock flag is OFF (step S302-3-1-2-5-18-4 = Yes), step S302-3-1-2-5-18 When the process proceeds to -5 and it is determined that the second added state stock flag is not OFF (step S302-3-1-2-5-18-4 = No), step S302-3-1 The process shifts to -2-5-18-9.

(Step S302-3-1-2-5-18-5)
In step S302-3-1-2-5-18-5, the sub CPU 401 performs a second added state transition lottery process. Specifically, the sub CPU 401 includes information related to the winning combination included in the conditional device command received from the main control board 300, and a second added state transition lottery table provided in the sub ROM 402 (see FIG. 69). Based on the above, the lottery process is performed to determine whether or not to shift to the second added state. When the sub CPU 401 wins the lottery, the sub CPU 403 determines whether the sub flag 403 is a correct / incorrect flag storage area, and the sub RAM 403 provides the second additional state stock flag storage area. Processing to set the status stock flag to ON is performed. Then, when the process of step S302-3-1-2-5-18-5 ends, the process proceeds to step S302-3-1-2-5-18-6.

(Step S302-3-1-2-5-18-6)
In step S302-3-1-2-5-18-6, the sub CPU 401 performs a process of determining whether or not the second added state transition lottery has been won. Specifically, the sub CPU 401 performs a process of determining whether or not the success / failure flag is turned on as a result of performing the second added state transition lottery process in step S302-3-1-2-5-18-5. Do. And when it determines with having won the 2nd addition state transfer lottery (step S302-3-1-2-5-18-6 = Yes), step S302-3-1-2-5-18- If the process proceeds to 7 and it is determined that the second added state transition lottery is not won (step S302-3-1-2-5-18-6 = No), step S302-3-1 The process shifts to -2-5-18-9.

(Step S302-3-1-2-5-18-7)
In step S302-3-1-2-5-18-7, the sub CPU 401 performs rank upgrade lottery processing when the second added state is won. Specifically, the sub CPU 401 performs processing for determining a rank based on the ART state transition rank lottery table (see FIG. 67A) provided in the sub ROM 402, and the determined rank and If the rank stored in the rank storage area provided in the sub RAM 403 is compared and the determined rank is more advantageous for the player, the rank storage area provided in the sub RAM 403 The rank stored in is updated to the determined rank. Then, when the process of step S302-3-1-2-5-18-7 ends, the process proceeds to step S302-3-1-2-5-18-8.

(Step S302-3-1-2-5-18-8)
In step S302-3-1-2-5-18-8, the sub CPU 401 performs a second added state winning process. Specifically, if the value of the ART state game number counter provided in the sub RAM 403 is “1” or more, the sub CPU 401 adds the state managed by the sub control board 400 in the next game. When processing for setting the precursor state is added to the state storage area provided in the sub RAM 403 so as to be in the precursor state, and the value of the ART state game number counter provided in the sub RAM 403 is not “1” or more In the next game, a process of setting an additional preparation state in a state storage area provided in the sub RAM 403 or a process provided in the sub RAM 403 so that the state managed by the sub control board 400 becomes an additional preparation state. For example, a process of turning on the success / failure flag of the given success / failure flag storage area is performed. Then, when the process of step S302-3-1-2-5-18-8 ends, the process proceeds to step S302-3-1-2-5-18-9.

(Step S302-3-1-2-5-18-9)
In step S302-3-1-2-5-18-9, the sub CPU 401 performs a process of determining whether or not the success / failure flag is OFF. Specifically, the sub CPU 401 performs processing for determining whether or not the success / failure flag is OFF based on the value of the success / failure flag storage area provided in the sub RAM 403. If it is determined that the success / failure flag is OFF (step S302-3-1-2-5-18-9 = Yes), the process proceeds to step S302-3-1-2-5-18-10. If it is determined that the success / failure flag is not OFF (step S302-3-1-2-5-18-9 = No), step S302-3-1-2-5-18-15 The process is transferred to.

(Step S302-3-1-2-5-18-10)
In step S302-3-1-2-5-18-10, the sub CPU 401 performs processing to determine whether or not the winning stock flag is OFF. Specifically, the sub CPU 401 performs processing to determine whether or not the winning stock flag is OFF based on the value of the winning stock flag storage area provided in the sub RAM 403. If it is determined that the winning stock flag is OFF (step S302-3-1-2-5-18-10 = Yes), the process proceeds to step S302-3-1-2-5-18-11. If the process is shifted and it is determined that the winning stock flag is not OFF (step S302-3-1-2-5-18-10 = No), step S302-3-1-2-5-18 The process is shifted to -15.

(Step S302-3-1-2-5-18-11)
In step S302-3-1-2-5-18-11, the sub CPU 401 performs processing to determine whether or not the ART level is NML. Specifically, the sub CPU 401 performs processing for determining whether or not the ART level is NML based on the value of the ART level storage area provided in the sub RAM 403. If it is determined that the ART level is NML (step S302-3-1-2-5-18-11 = Yes), the process proceeds to step S302-3-1-2-5-18-12. If it is determined that the level is not ART level NML (step S302-3-1-2-5-18-11 = No), the process proceeds to step S302-3-1-2-5-18-15. To migrate.

(Step S302-3-1-2-5-18-12)
In step S302-3-1-2-5-18-12, the sub CPU 401 performs a winning stock lottery process. Specifically, the sub CPU 401 is based on the winning combination included in the conditional device command received from the main control board 300 and the winning stock lottery table (see FIG. 70) provided in the sub ROM 402. Then, a process for determining whether or not to acquire the winning stock is performed, and when it is determined that the winning stock is acquired, a process for turning ON / OFF the corresponding flag in the determination flag storage area provided in the sub RAM 403 is performed. Then, when the process of step S302-3-1-2-5-18-12 ends, the process proceeds to step S302-3-1-2-5-18-13.

(Step S302-3-1-2-5-18-13)
In step S302-3-1-2-5-18-13, the sub CPU 401 performs a process of determining whether or not the winning stock lottery is won. Specifically, the sub CPU 401 performs a process of determining whether or not a winning stock has been acquired as a result of the lottery in the winning stock lottery process in step S302-3-1-2-5-18-12. If it is determined that the winning stock lottery is won (step S302-3-1-2-5-18-13 = Yes), the process proceeds to step S302-3-1-2-5-18-14. If it is determined that the winning stock lottery has not been won (step S302-3-1-2-5-18-13 = No), step S302-3-1-2-5-18 The process is shifted to -15.

(Step S302-3-1-2-5-18-14)
In step S302-3-1-2-5-18-14, the sub CPU 401 performs a winning stock winning process. Specifically, the sub CPU 401 stores information indicating that the winning stock winning flag is stored in the winning stock winning flag storage area provided in the sub RAM 403 and is managed by the sub control board 400 in the next game. Processing to set the winning stock precursor state in the state storage area provided in the sub RAM 403 so that the state becomes the winning stock precursor state, and processing to turn on the success flag in the success flag storage area provided in the sub RAM 403 Then, processing for setting the value of the winning stock precursor state game number counter provided in the sub RAM 403 is performed. Then, when the process of step S302-3-1-2-5-18-14 ends, the process proceeds to step S302-3-1-2-5-18-15.

(Step S302-3-1-2-5-18-15)
In step S302-3-1-2-5-18-15, the sub CPU 401 performs a process of subtracting “1” from the value of the ART early warning state game number counter. Specifically, the sub CPU 401 performs a process of subtracting “1” from the value of the ART early warning state game number counter provided in the sub RAM 403. Then, when the process of step S302-3-1-2-5-18-15 ends, the process proceeds to step S302-3-1-2-5-18-16.

(Step S302-3-1-2-5-18-16)
In step S302-3-1-2-5-18-16, the sub CPU 401 performs an ART precursor state transition determination process. Specifically, the sub CPU 401 is provided in the sub RAM 403 as a result of subtracting “1” from the value of the ART early warning state game number counter by the process of step S302-3-1-2-5-18-15. When the value of the ART warning sign game number counter being “0” is set in the sub RAM 403 so that the state managed by the sub control board 400 becomes the first added state in the next game. A process of setting the first added state in the state storage area is performed. When the process of step S302-3-1-2-5-18-16 ends, the ART precursor state processing subroutine ends, and step S302-3-1-2 of the condition device command reception process ends. The processing is shifted to 6.

(Processing for the sign of the winning stock)
Next, based on FIG. 139, the winning stock that is performed when the state managed by the sub-control board 400 is the winning stock precursor state in the state-specific transition processing in step S302-3-1-2-5 of FIG. The precursor state process will be described. FIG. 139 is a diagram showing a subroutine of the winning stock precursor state processing.

(Step S302-3-1-2-5-19-1)
In step S302-3-1-2-5-19-1, the sub CPU 401 performs a process of subtracting “1” from the value of the winning stock precursory state game number counter. Specifically, the sub CPU 401 performs a process of subtracting “1” from the value of the winning-predictive stock precursor state game number counter provided in the sub RAM 403. Then, when the process of step S302-3-1-2-5-19-1 ends, the process proceeds to step S302-3-1-2-5-19-2.

(Step S302-3-1-2-5-19-2)
In step S302-3-1-2-5-19-2, the sub CPU 401 performs a process of subtracting “1” from the value of the ART state game number counter. Specifically, the sub CPU 401 performs a process of subtracting “1” from the value of the ART state game number counter provided in the sub RAM 403. Then, when the process of step S302-3-1-2-5-19-2 ends, the process proceeds to step S302-3-1-2-5-19-3.

(Step S302-3-1-2-5-19-3)
In step S302-3-1-2-5-19-3, the sub CPU 401 performs ART point addition lottery processing. Specifically, the sub CPU 401 determines the ART state point acquisition lottery table provided in the sub ROM 402 based on the value stored in the ART level storage area provided in the sub RAM 403 (FIG. 72A). 72 (B), 72 (C), and 72 (D)), the selected ART state point acquisition lottery table and the condition device command received from the main control board 300 are included. Based on the information related to the winning combination, a lottery is performed as to whether or not to acquire ART points. In addition, when the lottery is won, the sub CPU 401 performs a process of storing the winning value in the ART point storage area provided in the sub RAM 403. Then, when the process of step S302-3-1-2-5-19-3 ends, the process proceeds to step S302-3-1-2-5-19-4.

(Step S302-3-1-2-5-19-4)
In step S302-3-1-2-5-19-4, the sub CPU 401 performs processing for determining whether or not the second added state stock flag is OFF. Specifically, the sub CPU 401 performs a process of determining whether or not the second added state stock flag is OFF based on the value of the second added state stock flag storage area provided in the sub RAM 403. If it is determined that the second added state stock flag is OFF (step S302-3-1-2-5-19-4 = Yes), step S302-3-1-2-5-19 When the process proceeds to -5 and it is determined that the second added state stock flag is not OFF (step S302-3-1-2-5-19-4 = No), step S302-3-1 The process shifts to -2-5-19-9.

(Step S302-3-1-2-5-19-5)
In step S302-3-1-2-5-19-5, the sub CPU 401 performs a second added state transition lottery process. Specifically, the sub CPU 401 includes information related to the winning combination included in the conditional device command received from the main control board 300, and a second added state transition lottery table provided in the sub ROM 402 (see FIG. 69). Based on the above, the lottery process is performed to determine whether or not to shift to the second added state. When the sub CPU 401 wins the lottery, the sub CPU 403 determines whether the sub flag 403 is a correct / incorrect flag storage area, and the sub RAM 403 provides the second additional state stock flag storage area. A process for turning on the status stock flag and a process for turning on / off the success / failure flag in the corresponding / unusual flag storage area provided in the sub-RAM 403 are performed. Then, when the process of step S302-3-1-2-5-19-5 ends, the process proceeds to step S302-3-1-2-5-19-6.

(Step S302-3-1-2-5-19-6)
In step S302-3-1-2-5-19-6, the sub CPU 401 performs a process of determining whether or not the success / failure flag is ON. Specifically, the sub CPU 401 performs a process of determining whether or not the success / failure flag is turned ON as a result of performing the second added state transition lottery process in step S302-3-1-2-5-19-5. Do. If it is determined that the success / failure flag is ON (step S302-3-1-2-5-19-6 = Yes), the process proceeds to step S302-3-1-2-5-19-7. If it is determined that the success / failure flag is not ON (step S302-3-1-2-5-19-6 = No), step S302-3-1-2-5-19-9 is performed. The process is transferred to.

(Step S302-3-1-2-5-19-7)
In step S302-3-1-2-5-19-7, the sub CPU 401 performs rank upgrade lottery processing when the second added state is won. Specifically, the sub CPU 401 performs processing for determining a rank based on the ART state transition rank lottery table (see FIG. 67A) provided in the sub ROM 402, and the determined rank and If the rank stored in the rank storage area provided in the sub RAM 403 is compared and the determined rank is more advantageous for the player, the rank storage area provided in the sub RAM 403 The rank stored in is updated to the determined rank. Then, when the process of step S302-3-1-2-5-19-7 ends, the process proceeds to step S302-3-1-2-5-19-8.

(Step S302-3-1-2-5-19-8)
In step S302-3-1-2-5-19-8, the sub CPU 401 performs a second added state winning process. Specifically, if the value of the ART state game number counter provided in the sub RAM 403 is “1” or more, the sub CPU 401 adds the state managed by the sub control board 400 in the next game. When processing for setting the precursor state is added to the state storage area provided in the sub RAM 403 so as to be in the precursor state, and the value of the ART state game number counter provided in the sub RAM 403 is not “1” or more In the next game, processing for setting the additional preparation state in the state storage area provided in the sub RAM 403 is performed so that the state managed by the sub control board 400 becomes the additional preparation state. Then, when the process of step S302-3-1-2-5-19-8 ends, the process proceeds to step S302-3-1-2-5-19-9.

(Step S302-3-1-2-5-19-9)
In step S302-3-1-2-5-19-9, the sub CPU 401 performs a process of determining whether or not the value of the winning stock precursor state game number counter is “0”. Specifically, the sub CPU 401 performs a process of determining whether or not the value of the winning-predictive stock precursor state game number counter provided in the sub RAM 403 is “0”. If it is determined that the value of the winning-predictive-stock-predicted state game number counter is “0” (step S302-3-1-2-5-19-9 = Yes), step S302-3-1-1 If the process shifts to 2-5-19-10 and it is determined that the value of the winning stock precursor state game number counter is not “0” (step S302-3-1-2-5-19-9) = No), the subroutine for the winning stock precursor state process is terminated, and the process proceeds to step S302-3-1-2-6 of the conditional device command reception process.

(Step S302-3-1-2-5-19-10)
In step S302-3-1-2-5-19-10, the sub CPU 401 performs a winning stock notification process. Specifically, the sub CPU 401 performs a process of setting an effect identifier in order to notify the player that the winning stock flag has been acquired. Then, when the process of step S302-3-1-2-5-19-10 ends, the process proceeds to step S302-3-1-2-5-19-11.

(Step S302-3-1-2-5-19-11)
In step S302-3-1-2-5-19-11, the sub CPU 401 performs processing for turning off the winning stock winning flag. Specifically, the sub CPU 401 performs processing for turning off the winning stock winning flag in the winning stock winning flag storage area provided in the sub RAM 403. Then, when the process of step S302-3-1-2-5-19-11 ends, the process proceeds to step S302-3-1-2-5-19-12.

(Step S302-3-1-2-5-19-12)
In step S302-3-1-2-5-19-12, the sub CPU 401 performs ART state transition processing. Specifically, when the value of the second added state stock counter provided in the sub RAM 403 is equal to or greater than “1”, the sub CPU 401 determines the state managed by the sub control board 400 in the next game. For example, processing for setting an additional preparation state in a state storage area provided in the sub-RAM 403 is performed so as to be in an additional preparation state. In addition, when the value of the second added state stock counter provided in the sub RAM 403 is “0”, in the next game, the state managed by the sub control board 400 is changed to the ART state. A process for setting the ART state in the state storage area provided in the RAM 403, a process for turning off the success / failure flag in the success / failure flag storage area provided in the sub RAM 403, and the like are performed. When the process of step S302-3-1-2-5-19-12 ends, the subroutine for the winning stock precursory state process ends, and step S302-3-1-2 of the conditional device command reception process ends. The processing is shifted to 6.

(Process for the first added state)
Next, based on FIG. 140, the first process performed when the state managed by the sub-control board 400 is the first added state in the state-by-state transition process in step S302-3-1-2-5 in FIG. The added state processing will be described. FIG. 140 is a diagram showing a subroutine of the first added state processing.

(Step S302-3-1-2-5-20-1)
In step S302-3-1-2-5-20-1, the sub CPU 401 performs a process of subtracting “1” from the value of the first added state game number counter. Specifically, the sub CPU 401 performs a process of subtracting “1” from the value of the first added state game number counter provided in the sub RAM 403. Then, when the process of step S302-3-1-2-5-20-1 ends, the process proceeds to step S302-3-1-2-5-20-2.

(Step S302-3-1-2-5-20-2)
In step S302-3-1-2-5-20-2, the sub CPU 401 performs ART point addition lottery processing. Specifically, the sub CPU 401 executes information on the winning combination included in the conditional device command received from the main control board 300, information on whether or not to execute the reel lock effect, and whether or not to execute the spinning effect. Based on the information regarding whether or not, and a first added state point acquisition lottery table (see FIG. 75A) provided in the sub ROM 402, a process of lottering whether or not to acquire an ART point is performed. Then, when the process of step S302-3-1-2-5-20-2 ends, the process proceeds to step S302-3-1-2-5-20-3.

(Step S302-3-1-2-5-20-3)
In step S302-3-1-2-5-20-3, the sub CPU 401 performs a process of determining whether or not the value of the first added state game number counter is “0”. Specifically, the sub CPU 401 performs a process of determining whether or not the value of the first added state game number counter provided in the sub RAM 403 is “0”. If it is determined that the value of the first added state game number counter is “0” (step S302-3-1-2-5-20-3 = Yes), step S302-3-1-1 When the process proceeds to 2-5-20-4 and it is determined that the value of the first added state game number counter is not “0” (step S302-3-1-2-5-20-3) = No), the first added state processing subroutine is terminated, and the process proceeds to step S302-3-1-2-6 in the conditional device command reception process.

(Step S302-3-1-2-5-20-4)
In step S302-3-1-2-5-20-4, the sub CPU 401 performs a first added state continuous lottery process. Specifically, the sub CPU 401 sets the value of the first added state continuous number counter provided in the sub RAM 403, the value of the ART point acquired in the first added state, and the first added state continuous lottery table (FIG. 75). Based on (B), a process of determining by lottery whether or not to continue the first added state is performed. Then, when the process of step S302-3-1-2-5-20-4 ends, the process proceeds to step S302-3-1-2-5-20-5.

(Step S302-3-1-2-5-20-5)
In step S302-3-1-2-5-20-5, the sub CPU 401 performs a process of determining whether or not it has been won. Specifically, the sub CPU 401 determines whether or not to continue the first added state as a result of the lottery in the first added state continued lottery process in step S302-3-1-2-5-20-4. The process which determines is performed. And when it determines with having won (step S302-3-1-2-5-20-5 = Yes), it transfers a process to step S302-3-1-2-5-20-6, When it is determined that it has not been won (step S302-3-1-2-5-20-5 = No), the process proceeds to step S302-3-1-2-5-20-8.

(Step S302-3-1-2-5-20-6)
In step S302-3-1-2-5-20-6, the sub CPU 401 performs processing for setting a first added state game number counter. Specifically, the sub CPU 401 performs a process of setting “10” to a first added state game number counter provided in the sub RAM 403. Then, when the process of step S302-3-1-2-5-20-6 ends, the process proceeds to step S302-3-1-2-5-20-7.

(Step S302-3-1-2-5-20-7)
In step S302-3-1-2-5-20-7, the sub CPU 401 performs a process of adding “1” to the value of the first added state continuous number counter. Specifically, the sub CPU 401 performs a process of adding “1” to the value of the first added state continuous number counter provided in the sub RAM 403. When the process of step S302-3-1-2-5-20-7 ends, the first added state processing subroutine ends, and step S302-3-1-2 of the conditional device command reception process ends. The processing is shifted to 6.

(Step S302-3-1-2-5-20-8)
In step S302-3-1-2-5-20-8, the sub CPU 401 performs the first added state end process. Specifically, the sub CPU 401 performs a process of clearing the value of the first added game number counter provided in the sub RAM 403, the value of the first added state continuous number counter provided in the sub RAM 403, and the like. When the processing of step S302-3-1-2-5-20-8 is completed, the first added state processing subroutine is terminated and step S302-3-1-2 of the conditional device command reception processing is terminated. The processing is shifted to 6.

(Processing for chance state during ART)
Next, based on FIG. 141, in the state-specific transition processing in step S302-3-1-2-5 in FIG. 117, the ART being performed when the state managed by the sub-control board 400 is the ART in-chance state. The chance state process will be described. FIG. 141 is a diagram showing a subroutine for the chance state processing during ART.

(Step S302-3-1-2-5-21-1)
In step S302-3-1-2-5-21-1, the sub CPU 401 performs a process of subtracting “1” from the value of the ART-chance state game number counter. Specifically, the sub CPU 401 performs a process of subtracting “1” from the value of the ART chance state game number counter provided in the sub RAM 403. Then, when the process of step S302-3-1-2-5-21-1 ends, the process proceeds to step S302-3-1-2-5-21-2.

(Step S302-3-1-2-5-21-2)
In step S302-3-1-2-5-21-2, the sub CPU 401 performs ART point addition lottery processing. Specifically, the sub CPU 401 executes information regarding the winning combination included in the conditional device command received from the main control board 300, information regarding whether or not to execute the reel lock effect, and the spinning effect. Based on the information regarding whether or not to acquire an ART point based on the point acquisition lottery table for the chance state during ART provided in the sub-ROM 402 (see FIG. 76C) As a result of the lottery, if the winning is made, a process of adding the points acquired by winning to the value of the ART point storage area provided in the sub RAM 403 and storing it is performed. Then, when the process of step S302-3-1-2-5-21-2 ends, the process proceeds to step S302-3-1-2-5-21-3.

(Step S302-3-1-2-5-21-3)
In step S302-3-1-2-5-21-3, the sub CPU 401 performs a RUSH state transition lottery process. Specifically, the sub CPU 401 executes information regarding the winning combination included in the conditional device command received from the main control board 300, information regarding whether or not to execute the reel lock effect, and the spinning effect. Whether or not to shift to the first RUSH state or the second RUSH state based on the information regarding whether or not and the RUSH state transition lottery table for the chance state during ART provided in the sub ROM 402 (see FIG. 76B) A process of drawing lots is performed. Then, when the process of step S302-3-1-2-5-21-3 ends, the process proceeds to step S302-3-1-2-5-21-4.

(Step S302-3-1-2-5-21-4)
In step S302-3-1-2-5-21-4, the sub CPU 401 performs a process of determining whether or not it has been won. Specifically, has the sub CPU 401 been determined to shift to the first RUSH state or the second RUSH state as a result of the lottery in the RUSH state transition lottery process in step S302-3-1-2-5-21-3? Processing to determine whether or not. And when it determines with having won (step S302-3-1-2-5-21-4 = Yes), it transfers a process to step S302-3-1-2-5-21-5, If it is determined that it has not been won (step S302-3-1-2-5-21-4 = No), the process proceeds to step S302-3-1-2-5-21-11.

(Step S302-3-1-2-5-21-5)
In step S302-3-1-2-5-21-5, the sub CPU 401 performs processing for determining whether or not the first RUSH state has been won. Specifically, the sub CPU 401 determines whether or not the transition to the first RUSH state has been determined as a result of performing the RUSH state transition lottery process in step S302-3-1-2-5-21-3. Process. If it is determined that the first RUSH state has been won (step S302-3-1-2-5-21-5 = Yes), the process proceeds to step S302-3-1-2-5-21-6. If it is determined that the first RUSH state has not been won (step S302-3-1-2-5-21-5 = No), step S302-3-1-2-5-21 The process is shifted to -7.

(Step S302-3-1-2-5-21-6)
In step S302-3-1-2-5-21-6, the sub CPU 401 performs a process of adding “1” to the value of the first RUSH state stock counter. Specifically, the sub CPU 401 performs a process of adding “1” to the value of the first RUSH state stock counter provided in the sub RAM 403. Then, when the process of step S302-3-1-2-5-21-6 ends, the process proceeds to step S302-3-1-2-5-21-8.

(Step S302-3-1-2-5-21-7)
In step S302-3-1-2-5-21-7, the sub CPU 401 performs a process of adding “1” to the value of the second RUSH state stock counter. Specifically, the sub CPU 401 performs a process of adding “1” to the value of the second RUSH state stock counter provided in the sub RAM 403. Then, when the process of step S302-3-1-2-5-21-7 ends, the process proceeds to step S302-3-1-2-5-21-8.

(Step S302-3-1-2-5-21-8)
In step S302-3-1-2-5-21-8, the sub CPU 401 performs a process of setting a chance state during ART as a winning opportunity in the RUSH state. Specifically, the sub CPU 401 performs a process of storing information indicating that the RUSH winning opportunity storage area provided in the sub RAM 403 shifts to the RUSH preparation state via the ART chance state. Then, when the process of step S302-3-1-2-5-21-8 ends, the process proceeds to step S302-3-1-2-5-21-9.

(Step S302-3-1-2-5-21-9)
In step S <b> 302-3-1-2-5-21-9, the sub CPU 401 performs processing for setting “0” to the value of the ART state chance state game number counter. Specifically, the sub CPU 401 performs a process of setting “0” to the value of the during-ART chance state game number counter provided in the sub RAM 403. Then, when the process of step S302-3-1-2-5-21-9 ends, the process proceeds to step S302-3-1-2-5-21-10.

(Step S302-3-1-2-5-21-10)
In step S302-3-1-2-5-21-10, the sub CPU 401 performs processing for changing the state managed by the sub control board 400 to the RUSH preparation state in the next game. Specifically, in the next game, the sub CPU 401 sets the RUSH preparation state in the state storage area provided in the sub RAM 403 so that the state managed by the sub control board 400 becomes the RUSH preparation state. I do. Then, when the processing of step S302-3-1-2-5-21-10 is completed, the ART chance state processing subroutine is terminated, and the conditional device command reception processing step S302-3-1-2-2 is completed. The processing is shifted to 6.

(Step S302-3-1-2-5-21-11)
In step S <b> 302-3-2-5-5-11-11, the sub CPU 401 performs a process of determining whether or not the value of the ART-chance state game number counter is “0”. Specifically, the sub CPU 401 performs a process of determining whether or not the value of the during-ART chance state game number counter provided in the sub RAM 403 is “0”. When it is determined that the value of the ART-chance state game number counter is “0” (step S302-3-1-2-5-21-11 = Yes), step S302-3-1-1 is performed. When the process proceeds to 2-5-21-12 and it is determined that the value of the ART-chance state game number counter is not “0” (step S302-3-1-2-5-21-11) = No), the subroutine for the chance state process during ART is terminated, and the process proceeds to step S302-3-1-2-6 in the process at the time of receiving the conditional device command.

(Step S302-3-1-2-5-21-12)
In step S302-3-1-2-5-21-12, the sub CPU 401 performs an ART chance time end process. Specifically, the sub CPU 401 performs a process of clearing the value of the ART-chance state game number counter provided in the sub RAM 403. When the processing of step S302-3-1-2-5-21-12 is completed, the ART chance state processing subroutine is terminated, and the conditional device command reception processing step S302-3-1-2-2 is completed. The processing is shifted to 6.

(Treatment for an extra sign state)
Next, based on FIG. 142, in the state-by-state transition processing of step S302-3-1-2-5 in FIG. The processing will be described. FIG. 142 is a diagram showing a subroutine for the sign-on-predicate state process.

(Step S302-3-1-2-2-22-1)
In step S <b> 302-3-1-2-5-2-1, the sub CPU 401 performs a process of subtracting “1” from the value of the extra sign state game number counter. Specifically, the sub CPU 401 performs a process of subtracting “1” from the value of the extra sign state game number counter provided in the sub RAM 403. Then, when the process of step S302-3-1-2-2-22-1 ends, the process proceeds to step S302-3-1-2-2-22-2.

(Step S302-3-1-2-2-22-2)
In step S <b> 302-3-1-2-5-2-2, the sub CPU 401 performs a process of subtracting “1” from the value of the ART state game number counter. Specifically, the sub CPU 401 performs a process of subtracting “1” from the value of the ART state game number counter provided in the sub RAM 403. Then, when the process of step S302-3-1-2-2-22-2 ends, the process proceeds to step S302-3-1-2-5-22-3.

(Step S302-3-1-2-5-22-3)
In step S302-3-1-2-5-22-3, the sub CPU 401 performs ART point addition lottery processing. Specifically, the sub CPU 401 determines the ART state point acquisition lottery table provided in the sub ROM 402 based on the value stored in the ART level storage area provided in the sub RAM 403 (FIG. 72A). 72 (B), 72 (C), and 72 (D)), the selected ART state point acquisition lottery table and the condition device command received from the main control board 300 are included. Based on the information related to the winning combination, a lottery is performed as to whether or not to acquire ART points. In addition, when the lottery is won, the sub CPU 401 performs a process of storing the winning value in the ART point storage area provided in the sub RAM 403. Then, when the process of step S302-3-1-2-5-22-3 ends, the process proceeds to step S302-3-1-2-5-22-4.

(Step S302-3-1-2-5-22-4)
In step S302-3-1-2-5-22-4, the sub CPU 401 performs processing to determine whether or not the value of the extra sign state game number counter is “0”. Specifically, the sub CPU 401 performs a process of determining whether or not the value of the extra sign state game number counter provided in the sub RAM 403 is “0”. If it is determined that the value of the extra sign state game number counter is “0” (step S302-3-1-2-5-22-4 = Yes), step S302-3-1-2 is performed. When the process proceeds to -5-22-5 and it is determined that the value of the extra sign state game number counter is not “0” (step S302-3-1-2-5-22-4 = No) ), The subroutine for the extra sign state process is terminated, and the process proceeds to step S302-3-1-2-6 of the condition device command reception process.

(Step S302-3-1-2-5-22-5)
In step S302-3-1-2-5-22-5, in the next game, the sub CPU 401 performs a process of adding the state managed by the sub control board 400 to the preparation state. Specifically, in the next game, the sub CPU 401 sets an additional preparation state in the state storage area provided in the sub RAM 403 so that the state managed by the sub control board 400 becomes the additional preparation state. I do. Then, when the process of step S302-3-1-2-5-22-5 is completed, the subroutine for the extra sign state process is terminated, and step S302-3-1-2-6 of the condition device command reception process is terminated. The process is transferred to.

(Additional preparation state processing)
Next, based on FIG. 143, in the state-by-state transition processing in step S302-3-1-2-5 in FIG. 117, an additional preparation state performed when the state managed by the sub-control board 400 is the additional preparation state. The processing will be described. FIG. 143 is a diagram showing a subroutine for the extra preparation state process.

(Step S302-3-1-2-5-23-1)
In step S302-3-1-2-5-23-1, the sub CPU 401 performs ART point addition lottery processing. Specifically, the sub CPU 401 receives the winning preparation state point acquisition lottery table (see FIG. 73 (D)) provided in the sub ROM 402 and the win included in the condition device command received from the main control board 300. A lottery is performed to determine whether or not to acquire an ART point based on information relating to a combination, whether or not to execute a reel lock effect, and whether or not to execute a spinning effect. Further, when the sub CPU 401 wins the lottery, the sub CPU 401 performs a process of adding the winning value to the ART point storage area provided in the sub RAM 403 and storing it. When the process of step S302-3-1-2-5-23-1 is completed, the subroutine for the extra preparation state process is terminated, and step S302-3-1-2-6 of the conditional device command reception process is terminated. The process is transferred to.

(Process for the second added state)
Next, based on FIG. 144, the second process performed when the state managed by the sub-control board 400 is the second added state in the state-by-state transition process in step S302-3-1-2-5 in FIG. The added state processing will be described. FIG. 144 is a diagram showing a subroutine for the second added state process.

(Step S302-3-1-2-5-24-1)
In step S <b> 302-3-2-5-24-1, the sub CPU 401 performs processing for determining whether or not the winning number is “11” or other than “12”. Specifically, the sub CPU 401 determines whether or not the information related to the winning combination included in the conditional device command received from the main control board 300 is other than the winning number “11” or “12”. Process. If it is determined that the winning number is other than “11” or “12” (step S302-3-1-2-5-24-1 = Yes), step S302-3-1-2 is performed. If the process is shifted to 5-24-2 and it is determined that the winning number is not “11” or “12” (step S302-3-1-2-5-24-1 = No) ), The process proceeds to step S302-3-1-2-5-24-5.

(Step S302-3-1-2-5-24-2)
In step S302-3-1-2-5-24-2, the sub CPU 401 performs processing to determine whether or not the winning number is “09” or “10”. Specifically, the sub CPU 401 determines whether or not the information relating to the winning combination included in the conditional device command received from the main control board 300 is the winning number “09” or “10”. I do. If it is determined that the winning number is “09” or “10” (step S302-3-1-2-5-24-2 = Yes), step S302-3-1-2 If it is determined that the winning number is not “09” or “10” (step S302-3-1-2-5-24-2 = No), The process proceeds to step S302-3-1-2-5-24-4.

(Step S302-3-1-2-5-24-3)
In step S302-3-1-2-5-24-3, the sub CPU 401 performs processing for turning off the second added state guarantee flag. Specifically, the sub CPU 401 performs processing for turning off the second added state guarantee flag in the second added state guarantee flag storage area provided in the sub RAM 403. Then, when the process of step S302-3-1-2-5-24-3 ends, the process proceeds to step S302-3-1-2-5-24-4.

(Step S302-3-1-2-5-24-4)
In step S302-3-1-2-5-24-4, the sub CPU 401 performs ART point addition lottery processing. Specifically, the sub CPU 401 includes information related to the winning combination included in the conditional device command received from the main control board 300, and a second added state point acquisition lottery table provided in the sub ROM 402 (FIG. 77). Based on (see), a lottery of whether or not to acquire ART points is performed. In addition, when the lottery is won, the sub CPU 401 performs a process of storing the winning value in the ART point storage area provided in the sub RAM 403. When the process of step S302-3-1-2-5-24-4 ends, the subroutine for the second added state process ends, and step S302-3-1-2 of the condition device command reception process ends. The processing is shifted to 6.

  Note that in the present embodiment, the sub CPU 401, when the state managed by the sub control board 400 is the second added state, information related to the winning combination included in the conditional device command received from the main control board 300 Are “ART replay AR3” and “ART replay AR4”, a combination of symbols related to “BAR replay” is displayed on the active line. Left stop button 11, middle stop button 12, right stop button 13 Is determined by the stop button operation display unit 35 or the liquid crystal display device 46. On the other hand, when the state managed by the sub control board 400 is the second added state, the sub CPU 401 displays the information related to the winning combination included in the conditional device command received from the main control board 300 as “ART replay AR1. ”And“ ART Replay AR2 ”, a combination of symbols other than the symbol combination related to“ BAR Replay ”is displayed on the active line. Is determined by the stop button operation display unit 35 or the liquid crystal display device 46.

(Step S302-3-1-2-5-24-5)
In step S302-3-1-2-5-24-5, the sub CPU 401 performs a process of determining whether or not the second added state guarantee flag is ON. Specifically, the sub CPU 401 performs a process of determining whether or not the second extra state guarantee flag in the second extra state guarantee flag storage area provided in the sub RAM 403 is ON. If it is determined that the second added state guarantee flag is ON (step S302-3-1-2-5-24-5 = Yes), step S302-3-1-2-5-24 When the process proceeds to -6 and it is determined that the second added state guarantee flag is not ON (step S302-3-1-2-5-24-5 = No), the second added state process Is terminated, and the process proceeds to step S302-3-1-2-6 in the condition device command reception process.

(Step S302-3-1-2-5-24-6)
In step S302-3-1-2-5-24-6, the sub CPU 401 performs a process of setting the state managed by the sub control board 400 to the second fall standby state in the next game. Specifically, in the next game, the sub CPU 401 stores the second fall standby state in the state storage area provided in the sub RAM 403 so that the state managed by the sub control board 400 becomes the second fall standby state. Perform processing to set. When the process of step S302-3-1-2-5-24-6 ends, the subroutine for the second added state process ends, and step S302-3-1-2 of the condition device command reception process ends. The processing is shifted to 6.

(Processing for second fall standby state)
Next, based on FIG. 145, in the state-by-state transition processing in step S302-3-1-2-5 in FIG. The process for the 2-fall standby state will be described. FIG. 145 is a diagram showing a subroutine of the second fall standby state processing.

(Step S302-3-1-2-5-25-1)
In step S302-3-1-2-5-25-1, the sub CPU 401 performs ART point addition lottery processing. Specifically, the sub CPU 401 determines the winning included in the second fall waiting state lottery table (see FIG. 74B) provided in the sub ROM 402 and the condition device command received from the main control board 300. Based on the information relating to the combination, a lottery is performed as to whether or not to acquire an ART point. In addition, when the lottery is won, the sub CPU 401 performs a process of storing the winning value in the ART point storage area provided in the sub RAM 403. When the process of step S302-3-1-2-5-25-1 is completed, the subroutine for the second fall standby state process is terminated, and step S302-3-1-2 of the conditional device command reception process is terminated. The process is shifted to -6.

(Battle state processing)
Next, based on FIG. 146, in the state-specific transition process in step S302-3-1-2-5 of FIG. 117, a battle state process performed when the state managed by the sub control board 400 is a battle state. Will be described. FIG. 146 is a diagram showing a subroutine of battle state processing.

(Step S302-3-1-2-2-26-1)
In step S302-3-1-2-2-26-1, the sub CPU 401 performs processing for turning off the ART state continuation flag. Specifically, the sub CPU 401 performs processing for turning off the ART state continuation flag in the ART state continuation flag storage area provided in the sub RAM 403. Then, when the process of step S302-3-1-2-2-66-1 ends, the process proceeds to step S302-3-1-2-2-66-2.

(Step S302-3-1-2-2-66-2)
In step S302-3-1-2-2-66-2, the sub CPU 401 performs a process of determining whether or not the battle-losing final result output determination flag is ON. Specifically, the sub CPU 401 performs a process of determining whether or not the battle loss final result output determination flag in the battle loss final result output determination flag storage area provided in the sub RAM 403 is ON. If it is determined that the battle-losing final result output determination flag is ON (step S302-3-1-2-56-2-2 = Yes), step S302-3-1-2-5- If the process is shifted to 26-3 and it is determined that the battle-losing final result output determination flag is not ON (step S302-3-1-2-56-2-2 = No), step S302- The process proceeds to 3-1-5-2-5-26-6.

(Step S302-3-1-2-5-26-3)
In step S302-3-1-2-5-26-3, the sub CPU 401 performs a fourth fall standby state process which will be described in detail later with reference to FIG. In this process, the sub CPU 401 performs a fourth lottery waiting state pull-out lottery process or the like for lottering whether to return to the ART state in the fourth falling standby state. Then, when the process of step S302-3-1-2-5-26-3 ends, the process proceeds to step S302-3-1-2-5-26-4.

(Step S302-3-1-2-5-26-4)
In step S302-3-1-2-5-26-4, the sub CPU 401 determines whether or not the state managed by the sub control board 400 is other than the ART state in the next game. Specifically, the sub CPU 401 performs processing for determining whether information other than the ART state is stored in the state storage area provided in the sub RAM 403. In the next game, when it is determined that the state managed by the sub control board 400 is other than the ART state (step S302-3-1-2-5-26-4 = Yes), step S302 is performed. When the process proceeds to 3-1-2-5-26-5 and it is determined that the state managed by the sub-control board 400 is not other than the ART state in the next game (step S302-3). -1-2-5-26-4 = No), the process proceeds to step S302-3-1-2-5-26-20.

(Step S302-3-1-2-5-26-5)
In step S302-3-1-2-5-26-5, the sub CPU 401 performs a battle state end process. More specifically, the sub CPU 401 is provided in the sub RAM 403, a process of setting the special ceiling flag after the second added state in the second added special ceiling flag storage area provided in the sub RAM 403 to OFF, or the sub RAM 403. In the process of clearing the value of the battle state continuous losing counter, in the next game, the state managed by the sub-control board 400 is set to the fourth fall standby state in the state storage area provided in the sub-RAM 403. Based on the process of setting the fall standby state, the normal state point acquisition lottery table (ART state end) provided in the sub-ROM 402 (see FIG. 49I), the normal state points to be given to the player Is determined by lottery, and the determined value is stored in the normal state point storage area provided in the sub-RAM 403. It performs a process of pay. Then, when the process of step S302-3-1-2-5-26-5 ends, the process proceeds to step S302-3-1-2-5-26-20.
I do.

(Step S302-3-1-2-2-26-6)
In step S302-3-1-2-2-26-6, the sub CPU 401 performs a process of determining whether or not the value of the battle state digest game number counter is “0”. Specifically, the sub CPU 401 determines whether or not the value of the battle state digest game number counter provided in the sub RAM 403 is “0”. If it is determined that the value of the battle state digest game number counter is “0” (step S302-3-1-2-5-26-6 = Yes), step S302-3-1-2. When the process proceeds to −5-26-7 and it is determined that the value of the battle state digest game number counter is not “0” (step S302-3-1-2-5-26-6 = No) ), The process proceeds to step S302-3-1-2-5-26-20.

(Step S302-3-1-2-5-26-7)
In step S302-3-1-2-2-26-7, the sub CPU 401 performs a winning stock lottery process. Specifically, the sub CPU 401 includes information related to the winning combination included in the conditional device command received from the main control board 300, and a battle state winning stock lottery table provided in the sub ROM 402 (FIG. 80A). )) To determine whether or not to acquire the winning stock. Then, when the process of step S302-3-1-2-5-26-7 ends, the process proceeds to step S302-3-1-2-5-26-8.

(Step S302-3-1-2-5-26-8)
In step S302-3-1-2-2-26-8, the sub CPU 401 performs a process of determining whether or not the winning stock lottery is won. Specifically, the sub CPU 401 performs a process of determining whether or not the winning stock has been acquired as a result of the lottery in the winning stock lottery process of step S302-3-1-2-5-26-7. If it is determined that the winning stock lottery is won (step S302-3-1-2-5-26-8 = Yes), the process proceeds to step S302-3-1-2-5-26-9. If it is determined that the winning stock lottery is not won (step S302-3-1-2-5-26-8 = No), step S302-3-1-2-2-26 is performed. The process is shifted to -10.

(Step S302-3-1-2-5-26-9)
In step S302-3-1-2-5-26-9, the sub CPU 401 performs a winning stock winning process. Specifically, the sub CPU 401 stores information indicating that the winning stock winning flag is stored in the winning stock winning flag storage area provided in the sub RAM 403 and is managed by the sub control board 400 in the next game. Processing to set the winning stock precursor state in the state storage area provided in the sub RAM 403 so that the state becomes the winning stock precursor state, and processing to turn on the success flag in the success flag storage area provided in the sub RAM 403 Then, processing for setting the value of the winning stock precursor state game number counter provided in the sub RAM 403 is performed. Then, when the process of step S302-3-1-2-5-26-9 ends, the process proceeds to step S302-3-1-2-5-26-10.

(Step S302-3-1-2-5-26-10)
In step S302-3-1-2-5-26-10, the sub CPU 401 performs processing for determining whether or not the value of the battle state continuous losing counter is equal to the value of the number of times of battle state ceilings. Specifically, the sub CPU 401 determines whether or not the value of the battle state continuous losing counter provided in the sub RAM 403 is equal to the value of the battle state ceiling number counter provided in the sub RAM 403. Do. When it is determined that the value of the battle state continuous losing counter is equal to the value of the ceiling number for battle state (step S302-3-1-2-5-26-10 = Yes), step S302-3 When the process proceeds to 1-2-5-26-11 and it is determined that the value of the battle state continuous losing counter is not equal to the value of the battle state ceiling count (step S302-3-1-1). 2-5-26-10 = No), the process proceeds to step S302-3-1-2-5-26-14.

(Step S302-3-1-2-5-26-11)
In step S302-3-1-2-5-26-11, the sub CPU 401 performs a process of determining whether or not the special ceiling flag after the second added state is ON. Specifically, the sub CPU 401 performs a process of determining whether or not the special ceiling flag storage area after the second added state of the second added special ceiling flag storage area provided in the sub RAM 403 is ON. . If it is determined that the special ceiling flag after the second added state is ON (step S302-3-1-2-5-26-11 = Yes), step S302-3-1-2-5 When the process proceeds to −26-12 and it is determined that the special ceiling flag is not ON after the second added state (step S302-3-1-2-2-26-11 = No), step S302 is performed. The process is transferred to 3-1-2-5-26-14.

(Step S302-3-1-2-5-26-12)
In step S302-3-1-2-5-26-12, the sub CPU 401 performs processing for determining whether or not the value of the ART point is “1”. Specifically, the sub CPU 401 performs processing for determining whether or not the value of the ART point stored in the ART point storage area provided in the sub RAM 403 is “1”. If it is determined that the value of the ART point is “1” (step S302-3-1-2-5-26-12 = Yes), step S302-3-1-2-5-26. When the process proceeds to -13 and it is determined that the value of the ART point is not “1” (step S302-3-1-2-5-26-12 = No), step S302-3-1 The process shifts to -2-5-26-14.

(Step S302-3-1-2-5-26-13)
In step S302-3-1-2-2-26-13, the sub CPU 401 performs processing for turning on the ART state continuation flag. Specifically, the sub CPU 401 performs processing for turning on the ART state continuation flag provided in the sub RAM 403. Then, when the process of step S302-3-1-2-5-26-13 ends, the process proceeds to step S302-3-1-2-5-26-15.

(Step S302-3-1-2-5-26-14)
In step S302-3-1-2-2-26-14, the sub CPU 401 performs an ART state continuous lottery process. Specifically, the sub CPU 401 executes information regarding the winning combination included in the conditional device command received from the main control board 300, information regarding whether or not to execute the reel lock effect, and the spinning effect. Whether or not to continue the ART state is performed based on the information on whether or not and the battle state winning / losing lottery table provided in the sub ROM 402 (see FIG. 80B). The sub CPU 401 performs processing for turning on the ART state continuation flag provided in the sub RAM 403 when the lottery is won. Then, when the process of step S302-3-1-2-5-26-14 ends, the process proceeds to step S302-3-1-2-5-26-15.

(Step S302-3-1-2-2-26-15)
In step S302-3-1-2-5-26-15, the sub CPU 401 performs processing to determine whether or not the ART state continuation flag is ON. Specifically, the sub CPU 401 performs processing for determining whether or not the ART state continuation flag is ON based on the value stored in the ART state continuation flag storage area provided in the sub RAM 403. If it is determined that the ART state continuation flag is ON (step S302-3-1-2-5-26-15 = Yes), step S302-3-1-2-5-26-16 is performed. If it is determined that the ART state continuation flag is not ON (step S302-3-1-2-5-26-15 = No), step S302-3-1-2-5 The process is shifted to -26-17.

(Step S302-3-1-2-5-26-16)
In Step S302-3-1-2-5-26-16, the sub CPU 401 performs a state transition lottery process during the battle state. Specifically, the sub CPU 401 displays the RUSH state transition scenario table (see FIG. 80C) provided in the sub ROM 402, the value of the winning stock winning flag storage area provided in the sub RAM 403, and the main control. Based on the information on the winning combination included in the conditional device command received from the substrate 300, information on whether or not to execute the reel lock effect, and information on whether or not to execute the spinning effect, Processing for determining a transition destination of a state managed by the control board 400 is performed. Further, the sub CPU 401 performs processing for storing the determined migration destination in a state storage area provided in the sub RAM 403. Then, when the process of step S302-3-1-2-5-26-16 ends, the process proceeds to step S302-3-1-2-5-26-17.

(Step S302-3-1-2-5-26-17)
In step S302-3-1-2-5-26-17, the sub CPU 401 performs battle state precursor game number counter setting processing. Specifically, the sub CPU 401 performs a process of determining the number of battle precursor games by lottery based on a battle precursor game number determination table (not shown) provided in the sub ROM 402. Further, the sub CPU 401 performs a process of storing the number of battle precursor games determined by lottery in a battle state precursor game number counter provided in the sub RAM 403. Then, when the process of step S302-3-1-2-5-26-17 ends, the process proceeds to step S302-3-1-2-5-26-18.

(Step S302-3-1-2-2-26-18)
In step S302-3-1-2-5-26-18, the sub CPU 401 performs a process of determining whether or not the value of the battle state digest game number counter is “1”. Specifically, the sub CPU 401 performs a process of determining whether or not the value of the battle state digest game number counter provided in the sub RAM 403 is “1”. When the value of the battle state digest game number counter is determined to be “1” (step S302-3-1-2-5-26-18 = Yes), step S302-3-1-2-5 When the process proceeds to −26-19 and it is determined that the value of the battle state digest game number counter is not “1” (step S302-3-1-2-5-26-18 = No), The process proceeds to step S302-3-1-2-5-26-20.

(Step S302-3-1-2-5-26-19)
In step S302-3-1-2-5-26-19, the sub CPU 401 performs ART point addition lottery processing. Specifically, the sub CPU 401 determines the ART state point acquisition lottery table provided in the sub ROM 402 based on the value stored in the ART level storage area provided in the sub RAM 403 (FIG. 72A). 72 (B), 72 (C), and 72 (D)), the selected ART state point acquisition lottery table and the condition device command received from the main control board 300 are included. Based on the information related to the winning combination, a lottery is performed as to whether or not to acquire ART points. In addition, when the lottery is won, the sub CPU 401 performs a process of storing the winning value in the ART point storage area provided in the sub RAM 403. Then, when the process of step S302-3-1-2-5-26-19 ends, the process proceeds to step S302-3-1-2-5-26-20.

(Step S302-3-1-2-5-26-20)
In step S302-3-1-2-5-26-20, the sub CPU 401 performs a battle state process which will be described in detail later with reference to FIG. In this process, when the value of the battle state digest game number counter provided in the sub RAM 403 is less than the value of the battle state precursor game number counter, the sub CPU 401 sets the value of the battle state digest game number counter to “1”. Addition processing is performed. Then, when the processing of step S302-3-1-2-5-26-20 is finished, the battle state processing subroutine is finished, and the conditional device command reception processing is advanced to step S302-3-1-2-6. Migrate processing.

(Processing during battle)
Next, based on FIG. 147, the process in the battle state performed by the process of step S302-3-1-2-5-26-20 in FIG. 146 will be described. FIG. 147 is a diagram showing a subroutine of the process during the battle state.

(Step S302-3-1-2-5-26-20-1)
In step S302-3-1-2-5-26-20-1, the sub CPU 401 determines whether or not the value of the battle state digest game number counter is less than the value of the battle state precursor game number counter. Do. Specifically, the sub CPU 401 compares the value of the battle state digest game number counter provided in the sub RAM 403 with the value of the battle state predictor game number counter provided in the sub RAM 403, and determines the number of battle state digest games. Processing for determining whether or not the value of the counter is less than the value of the battle state precursor game number counter is performed. When it is determined that the value of the battle state digest game number counter is less than the value of the battle state precursor game number counter (step S302-3-1-2-5-26-20-1 = Yes). When the process proceeds to step S302-3-1-2-5-26-20-2, and it is determined that the value of the battle state digest game number counter is not less than the value of the battle state precursor game number counter (Step S302-3-1-2-5-26-20-1 = No), the process proceeds to step S302-3-1-2-5-26-20-5.

(Step S302-3-1-2-5-26-20-2)
In step S302-3-1-2-5-26-20-2, the sub CPU 401 performs a process of adding “1” to the value of the battle state digest game number counter. Specifically, the sub CPU 401 performs a process of adding “1” to the value of the battle state digest game number counter provided in the sub RAM 403. Then, when the process of step S302-3-1-2-5-26-20-2 ends, the process proceeds to step S302-3-1-2-5-26-20-3.

(Step S302-3-1-2-5-26-20-3)
In step S302-3-1-2-5-26-20-3, the sub CPU 401 performs processing for determining whether or not there is a winning stock. Specifically, the sub CPU 401 performs processing for determining whether or not there is a winning stock based on the value of the winning stock winning flag storage area provided in the sub RAM 403. And when it determines with there being no winning stock (step S302-3-1-2-5-26-20-3 = Yes), step S302-3-1-2-5-26-20-4 When it is determined that there is a winning stock (step S302-3-1-2-5-26-20-3 = No), the subroutine in the battle state process is terminated, and the conditional device The process proceeds to step S302-3-1-2-6 in the command reception process.

(Step S302-3-1-2-5-26-20-4)
In step S302-3-1-2-5-26-20-4, the sub CPU 401 performs processing of subtracting “1” from the value of the ART point. Specifically, the sub CPU 401 performs a process of subtracting “1” from the value of the ART point stored in the ART point storage area provided in the sub RAM 403. When the process of step S302-3-1-2-5-26-20-4 is completed, the subroutine for the process during the battle state is ended, and step S302-3-1-2 of the condition device command reception process is ended. The processing is shifted to 6.

(Step S302-3-1-2-5-26-20-5)
In step S302-3-1-2-5-26-20-5, the sub CPU 401 performs a process of determining whether or not the battle-losing final result output determination flag is OFF. Specifically, the sub CPU 401 determines whether or not the battle loss final result output determination flag is OFF based on the value stored in the battle loss final result output determination flag storage area provided in the sub RAM 403. The process which determines is performed. If it is determined that the battle-losing final result output determination flag is OFF (step S302-3-1-2-5-26-20-5 = Yes), step S302-3-1-2 When the process proceeds to −5-26-20-6 and it is determined that the final result output determination flag is not OFF at the time of battle (step S302-3-1-2-5-26-20-5) = No), the process proceeds to step S302-3-1-2-5-26-20-17.

(Step S302-3-1-2-5-26-20-6)
In step S302-3-1-2-5-26-20-6, the sub CPU 401 performs processing for determining whether or not there is a winning stock. Specifically, the sub CPU 401 performs processing for determining whether or not there is a winning stock based on the value of the winning stock winning flag storage area provided in the sub RAM 403. And when it determines with there being no winning stock (step S302-3-1-2-5-26-20-6 = Yes), step S302-3-1-2-5-26-20-7. If it is determined that there is a winning stock (step S302-3-1-2-5-26-20-6 = No), step S302-3-1-2-2-26 is performed. The process is shifted to -20-9.

(Step S302-3-1-2-5-26-20-7)
In step S <b> 302-3-1-2-5-26-20-7, the sub CPU 401 performs a process of determining whether or not the value of the battle state precursor game number counter is “0”. Specifically, the sub CPU 401 performs a process of determining whether or not the value of the battle state precursor game number counter provided in the sub RAM 403 is “0”. If it is determined that the value of the battle state precursor game number counter is “0” (step S302-3-1-2-5-26-20-7 = Yes), step S302-3-1 is performed. When the process proceeds to -2-5-26-20-8 and it is determined that the value of the battle state precursor game number counter is not “0” (step S302-3-1-2-5-26). −20−7 = No), the process proceeds to step S302-3-1-2-5-26-20-9.

(Step S302-3-1-2-5-26-20-8)
In step S302-3-1-2-5-26-20-8, the sub CPU 401 performs a process of subtracting “1” from the value of the ART point. Specifically, the sub CPU 401 performs a process of subtracting “1” from the value stored in the ART point storage area provided in the sub RAM 403. Then, when the process of step S302-3-1-2-5-26-20-8 ends, the process proceeds to step S302-3-1-2-5-26-20-9.

(Step S302-3-1-2-5-26-20-9)
In step S302-3-1-2-5-26-20-9, the sub CPU 401 performs a process of setting “0” to the value of the battle state digest game number counter. Specifically, the sub CPU 401 performs a process of setting “0” to the value of the battle state digest game number counter provided in the sub RAM 403. Then, when the process of step S302-3-1-2-5-26-20-9 ends, the process proceeds to step S302-3-1-2-5-26-20-10.

(Step S302-3-1-2-5-26-20-10)
In step S302-3-1-2-5-26-20-10, the sub CPU 401 performs a process of setting “0” to the value of the battle state precursor game number counter. Specifically, the sub CPU 401 performs a process of setting “0” to the value of the battle state precursor game number counter provided in the sub RAM 403. Then, when the process of step S302-3-1-2-5-26-20-10 ends, the process proceeds to step S302-3-1-2-5-26-20-11.

(Step S302-3-1-2-5-26-20-11)
In step S302-3-1-2-5-26-20-11, the sub CPU 401 performs processing to determine whether or not the ART state continuation flag is OFF. Specifically, the sub CPU 401 performs processing for determining whether or not the ART state continuation flag is OFF based on the value stored in the ART state continuation flag storage area provided in the sub RAM 403. If it is determined that the ART state continuation flag is OFF (step S302-3-1-2-5-26-20-11 = Yes), step S302-3-1-2-5-26. When the process proceeds to -20-12 and it is determined that the ART state continuation flag is not OFF (step S302-3-1-2-5-26-20-11 = No), step S302-3 The processing shifts to -1--2-5-26-20-15.

(Step S302-3-1-2-5-26-20-12)
In step S302-3-1-2-5-26-20-12, the sub CPU 401 performs processing to determine whether or not the value of the ART point is “0”. Specifically, the sub CPU 401 performs processing for determining whether or not the value of the ART point is “0” based on the value of the ART point storage area provided in the sub RAM 403. If it is determined that the value of the ART point is “0” (step S302-3-1-2-5-26-20-12 = Yes), step S302-3-1-2-5 When the process is shifted to −26-20-13 and it is determined that the value of the ART point is not “0” (step S302-3-1-2-5-26-20-12 = No), The process proceeds to step S302-3-1-2-5-26-20-14.

(Step S302-3-1-2-5-26-20-13)
In step S302-3-1-2-5-26-20-13, the sub CPU 401 performs processing for turning on the final result output determination flag lost in battle. Specifically, the sub CPU 401 performs a process of turning on a battle loss final result output determination flag in the battle loss final result output determination flag storage area provided in the sub RAM 403. When the process of step S302-3-1-2-5-26-20-13 ends, the subroutine for the process during the battle state ends, and step S302-3-1-2 of the condition device command reception process ends. The processing is shifted to 6.

(Step S302-3-1-2-5-26-20-14)
In step S302-3-1-2-5-26-20-14, the sub CPU 401 performs a process of adding “1” to the value of the battle state continuous losing counter. Specifically, the sub CPU 401 performs a process of adding “1” to the value of the battle state continuous losing counter provided in the sub RAM 403. Then, when the process of step S302-3-1-2-5-26-20-14 is finished, the subroutine of the process during the battle state is finished, and step S302-3-1-2 of the condition device command reception process is finished. The processing is shifted to 6.

(Step S302-3-1-2-5-26-20-15)
In step S302-3-1-2-5-26-20-15, the sub CPU 401 performs ART state continuation processing. Specifically, the sub CPU 401 performs a process of adding “1” to the value of the ART state continuation set number storage area provided in the sub RAM 403, and sets the value of the scenario counter provided in the sub RAM 403 to “1”. ”Is added. Further, if the value of the scenario counter provided in the sub RAM 403 is less than “7” as a result of adding “1” to the value of the scenario counter provided in the sub RAM 403, the sub CPU 401 stores the value in the sub RAM 403. The process of clearing the value of the provided battle state continuous losing counter is performed. On the other hand, when “1” is added to the value of the scenario counter provided in the sub RAM 403 and the value of the ART state continuation set number storage area provided in the sub RAM 403 is “7”, the value is stored in the sub ROM 402. Based on the provided scenario determination table (see FIG. 67 (C)), the process of drawing the scenario again is performed. The sub CPU 401 is provided in the sub RAM 403 so that the state managed by the sub control board 400 becomes the ART state in the next game when it is determined to shift to the ART state. If it is determined that the ART state is set in the state storage area and the transition to the first RUSH state is determined, the state managed by the sub-control board 400 will be the RUSH ready state in the next game. In addition, a process of setting the RUSH ready state in the state storage area provided in the sub RAM 403 is performed, and a process of adding “1” to the value of the first RUSH state stock counter provided in the sub RAM 403 is performed. If it is decided to shift to the state, in the next game, the sub control board 4 A process of setting the RUSH ready state in the state storage area provided in the sub RAM 403 is performed so that the state managed by 0 becomes the RUSH ready state, and the second RUSH state stock counter provided in the sub RAM 403 A process of adding “1” to the value is performed. Then, when the process of step S302-3-1-2-5-26-20-15 ends, the process proceeds to step S302-3-1-2-5-26-20-16.

(Step S302-3-1-2-5-26-20-16)
In step S302-3-1-2-5-26-20-16, the sub CPU 401 performs processing for turning off the special ceiling flag after the second addition state. Specifically, the sub CPU 401 performs a process of turning off the special ceiling flag after the second added state in the second added special ceiling flag storage area provided in the sub RAM 403. When the process of step S302-3-1-2-5-26-20-16 ends, the subroutine for the process during the battle state ends, and step S302-3-1-2 of the condition device command reception process ends. The processing is shifted to 6.

(Step S302-3-1-2-5-26-20-17)
In step S302-3-1-2-5-26-20-17, the sub CPU 401 performs processing for turning off the winning stock winning flag. Specifically, the sub CPU 401 performs processing for turning off the winning stock winning flag in the winning stock winning flag storage area provided in the sub RAM 403. Then, when the process of step S302-3-1-2-5-26-20-17 ends, the process proceeds to step S302-3-1-2-5-26-20-18.

(Step S302-3-1-2-5-26-20-18)
In step S302-3-1-2-5-26-20-18, the sub CPU 401 performs a process of setting “0” to the value of the battle state precursor game number counter. Specifically, the sub CPU 401 performs a process of setting “0” to the value of the battle state precursor game number counter provided in the sub RAM 403. Then, when the process of step S302-3-1-2-5-26-20-18 ends, the process proceeds to step S302-3-1-2-5-26-20-19.

(Step S302-3-1-2-5-26-20-19)
In step S302-3-1-2-5-26-20-19, the sub CPU 401 performs a process of setting “0” to the value of the battle state digest game number counter. Specifically, the sub CPU 401 performs a process of setting “0” to the value of the battle state digest game number counter provided in the sub RAM 403. Then, when the process of step S302-3-1-2-5-26-20-19 ends, the process proceeds to step S302-3-1-2-5-26-20-20.

(Step S302-3-1-2-5-26-20-20)
In step S <b> 302-3-1-2-5-26-20-20, the sub CPU 401 performs a process of setting “0” to the value of the battle state continuous losing counter. Specifically, the sub CPU 401 performs a process of setting “0” to the value of the battle state continuous losing counter provided in the sub RAM 403. Then, when the process of step S302-3-1-2-5-26-20-20 ends, the process proceeds to step S302-3-1-2-5-26-20-21.

(Step S302-3-1-2-5-26-20-21)
In step S <b> 302-3-1-2-5-26-20-21, the sub CPU 401 performs a process of setting “0” to the value of the battle state ceiling number counter. Specifically, the sub CPU 401 performs a process of setting “0” to the value of the battle state ceiling number counter provided in the sub RAM 403. Then, when the process of step S302-3-1-2-5-26-20-21 ends, the process proceeds to step S302-3-1-2-5-26-20-22.

(Step S302-3-1-2-5-26-20-22)
In step S302-3-1-2-5-26-20-22, the sub CPU 401 performs a process of turning off the final result output determination flag lost in battle. Specifically, the sub CPU 401 performs a process of turning off a battle loss final result output determination flag in the battle loss final result output determination flag storage area provided in the sub RAM 403. When the process of step S302-3-1-2-5-26-20-22 ends, the subroutine for the process during the battle state ends, and step S302-3-1-2 of the condition device command reception process ends. The processing is shifted to 6.

(RUSH ready state processing)
Next, based on FIG. 148, the RUSH preparation state performed when the state managed by the sub-control board 400 is the RUSH preparation state in the state-by-state transition processing in step S302-3-1-2-5 in FIG. The processing will be described. FIG. 148 shows a subroutine for the RUSH preparation state process.

(Step S302-3-1-2-527-1)
In step S302-3-1-2-2-27-1, the sub CPU 401 performs processing for determining whether or not the winning number is “05”. Specifically, the sub CPU 401 performs a process of determining whether or not the information related to the winning combination included in the conditional device command received from the main control board 300 is the winning number “05”. If it is determined that the winning number is “05” (step S302-3-1-2-527-1 = Yes), step S302-3-1-2-5-27-2 is performed. When it is determined that the winning number is not “05” (step S302-3-1-2-2-27-1 = No), step S302-3-1-2-5 is performed. The process is shifted to -27-3.

(Step S302-3-1-2-5-27-2)
In step S302-3-1-2-2-27-2, the sub CPU 401 performs a direct hitting process. Specifically, the sub CPU 401 (a) updates the Bonus winning opportunity storage area provided in the sub RAM 403, (b) the third chance state game number counter provided in the sub RAM 403, A process for clearing the 4-chance state game number counter, etc., (c) the above-mentioned ART initial hit process, (d) a Bonus winning process described later, etc. are performed. When the process of step S302-3-1-2-5-27-2 ends, the subroutine for the RUSH preparation state process ends, and step S302-3-1-2-6 of the conditional device command reception process ends. The process is transferred to.

(Step S302-3-1-2-5-27-3)
In step S302-3-1-2-5-27-3, the sub CPU 401 performs ART point addition lottery processing. Specifically, the sub CPU 401 determines the first RUSH ready state point acquisition lottery table (FIG. 73 (B) based on the value of the first RUSH state stock counter provided in the sub RAM 403 and the value of the second RUSH state stock counter. )), Or the second RUSH preparation state point acquisition lottery table (see FIG. 73C), and the selected first RUSH preparation state point acquisition lottery table (see FIG. 73B), or Whether or not to acquire ART points based on the information relating to the winning combination included in the condition device command received from the main control board 300 and the 2RUSH ready state point acquisition lottery table (see FIG. 73C) The lottery is performed. Further, when the sub CPU 401 wins the lottery, the sub CPU 401 performs a process of adding the winning value to the ART point storage area provided in the sub RAM 403 and storing it. Then, when the process of step S302-3-1-2-5-27-3 ends, the process proceeds to step S302-3-1-2-5-27-4.

(Step S302-3-1-2-5-27-4)
In step S302-3-1-2-5-27-4, the sub CPU 401 performs processing to determine whether or not the value of the new first RUSH stock counter is “1” or more. Specifically, the sub CPU 401 determines whether or not a new first RUSH state is to be stocked on the main control board 300 side based on information included in the conditional device command received from the main control board 300. Processing to determine is performed. If it is determined that the value of the new first RUSH stock counter is “1” or more (step S302-3-1-2-5-27-4 = Yes), step S302-3-1-2 is performed. When the process proceeds to −5-27-5 and it is determined that the value of the new first RUSH stock counter is not “1” or more (step S302-3-1-2-5-27-4 = No) ), The subroutine for the RUSH preparation state process is terminated, and the process proceeds to step S302-3-1-2-6 in the process when the conditional device command is received.

(Step S302-3-1-2-5-27-5)
In step S302-3-1-2-5-27-5, the sub CPU 401 performs processing of adding “1” to the value of the first RUSH state stock counter. Specifically, the sub CPU 401 performs a process of adding “1” to the value of the first RUSH state stock counter provided in the sub RAM 403. When the process of step S302-3-1-2-5-27-5 ends, the subroutine for the RUSH preparation state process ends, and step S302-3-1-2-6 of the conditional device command reception process ends. The process is transferred to.

(Process for the first RUSH state)
Next, based on FIG. 149, the first RUSH state performed when the state managed by the sub-control board 400 is the first RUSH state in the state-by-state transition process of step S302-3-1-2-5 in FIG. The processing will be described. FIG. 149 is a diagram showing a subroutine of processing for the first RUSH state.

(Step S302-3-1-2-2-28-1)
In step S302-3-1-2-2-28-1, the sub CPU 401 performs a process of subtracting “1” from the value of the first RUSH state game number counter. Specifically, the sub CPU 401 performs a process of subtracting “1” from the value of the first RUSH state game number counter provided in the sub RAM 403. When the process of step S302-3-1-2-2-28-1 ends, the process proceeds to step S302-3-1-2-2-28-2.

(Step S302-3-1-2-5-28-2)
In step S302-3-1-2-2-28-2, the sub CPU 401 performs ART point addition lottery processing. Specifically, the sub CPU 401 includes information related to the winning combination included in the conditional device command received from the main control board 300, and a first RUSH state point acquisition lottery table provided in the sub ROM 402 (FIG. 78 ( Based on A), a lottery of whether or not to acquire an ART point is performed. In addition, when the lottery is won, the sub CPU 401 performs a process of storing the winning value in the ART point storage area provided in the sub RAM 403. Then, when the process of step S302-3-1-2-5-28-2 ends, the process proceeds to step S302-3-1-2-5-28-3.

  Here, in the ART point addition lottery process in step S302-3-1-2-5-28-2, information indicating that the spinning effect is executed is included in the condition device command received from the main control board 300. In this case, based on the first RUSH state point acquisition lottery table (when the spinning effect is executed) (see FIG. 78C), a lottery is performed as to whether or not to acquire an ART point.

  Further, when the condition device command received from the main control board 300 includes information indicating that the rotation effect RE7 or the rotation effect RE8 is to be executed, the sub CPU 401 executes the rotation effect RE1. Therefore, the rotation effect RE4 or the rotation effect RE5 is executed, so the first RUSH state point acquisition lottery table (when the rotation effect is executed) provided in the sub ROM 402 (see FIG. 78C). A lottery is performed using the lottery value in the column of the spinning effect RE1. Further, when the condition device command received from the main control board 300 includes information indicating that the rotation effect RE10 or the rotation effect RE11 is to be executed, the sub CPU 401 executes the rotation effect RE2. Since the rotation effect RE4 or the rotation effect RE5 is executed, the rotation of the first RUSH state point acquisition lottery table (when the rotation effect is executed) provided in the sub ROM 402 (see FIG. 78C). The lottery is performed using the lottery value in the column of the trunk effect RE2.

  Further, when the condition device command received from the main control board 300 includes information indicating that the rotation effect RE13 or the rotation effect RE14 is to be executed, the sub CPU 401 executes the rotation effect RE3. Since the rotation effect RE4 or the rotation effect RE5 is executed, the rotation of the first RUSH state point acquisition lottery table (when the rotation effect is executed) provided in the sub ROM 402 (see FIG. 78C). A lottery is performed using the lottery value in the column of the trunk effect RE3. Further, when the condition device command received from the main control board 300 includes information indicating that the rotation effect RE15 or the rotation effect RE16 is to be executed, the sub CPU 401 executes the rotation effect RE6. Since the rotation effect RE4 or the rotation effect RE5 is executed, the rotation of the first RUSH state point acquisition lottery table (when the rotation effect is executed) provided in the sub ROM 402 (see FIG. 78C). The lottery is performed using the lottery value in the column of the trunk effect RE6.

  Further, when the condition device command received from the main control board 300 includes information indicating that the rotation effect RE17 or the rotation effect RE18 is executed, the sub CPU 401 executes the rotation effect RE9. Since the rotation effect RE4 or the rotation effect RE5 is executed, the rotation of the first RUSH state point acquisition lottery table (when the rotation effect is executed) provided in the sub ROM 402 (see FIG. 78C). A lottery is performed using the lottery value in the column of the trunk effect RE9. In addition, when the condition device command received from the main control board 300 includes information indicating that the rotation effect RE19 or the rotation effect RE20 is to be executed, the sub CPU 401 executes the rotation effect RE12. Since the rotation effect RE4 or the rotation effect RE5 is executed, the rotation of the first RUSH state point acquisition lottery table (when the rotation effect is executed) provided in the sub ROM 402 (see FIG. 78C). The lottery is performed using the lottery value in the column of the trunk effect RE12.

  Here, in the present embodiment, the sub CPU 401 acquires an ART point based on the first RUSH state point acquisition lottery table (when the spinning effect is executed) provided in the sub ROM 402 (see FIG. 78C). Whether or not to perform the lottery is determined, and the ART point determined by the lottery is divided and notified to the player. For example, in the case where the information related to the winning combination included in the conditional device command received from the main control board 300 is “chance eye CN2” and includes information indicating that the spinning effect RE12 is to be executed. First, the sub CPU 401 performs a lottery to determine whether or not to acquire an ART point based on the first RUSH state point acquisition lottery table provided in the sub ROM 402 (see FIG. 78A). Then, it is assumed that the value of the ART point acquired as a result of the lottery is “2”. Next, on the basis of the first RUSH state point acquisition lottery table (when the spinning effect is executed) provided in the sub-ROM 402 (see FIG. 78C), a lottery is performed to determine whether or not to acquire an ART point. Then, it is assumed that the value of the ART point acquired as a result of the lottery is “5”.

  In this case, the sub CPU 401 notifies that “2” is acquired for the ART point in the game. Then, in the next game, when the spinning effect RE12 is executed, when the spinning effect RE3 is first executed, a part of the acquired ART point “5” is notified, and the subsequent spinning effect is performed. When executing RE3, the remaining ART points of the acquired ART points “5” are notified.

  In the present embodiment, the sub CPU 401 is in the first RUSH state provided in the sub ROM 402 when the condition device command received from the main control board 300 includes information to execute the spinning effect. Based on the point acquisition lottery table (at the time of spinning effect execution) (see FIG. 78C), the lottery to determine whether or not to acquire an ART point is performed, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the sub CPU 401 determines whether or not to acquire the ART point based on the first RUSH state point acquisition lottery table (see FIG. 78A) provided in the sub ROM 402 even when the spinning effect is executed. It is good also as performing.

  For example, in the case where the information related to the winning combination included in the conditional device command received from the main control board 300 is “weak cherry” and includes information indicating that the spinning effect RE6 is to be executed, First, the sub CPU 401 refers to the “weak cherry” column based on the first RUSH state point acquisition lottery table provided in the sub ROM 402 (see FIG. 78A), and determines whether or not to acquire an ART point. Do the lottery. In the next game, when the spinning effect RE6 is executed, the first RUSH state point acquisition lottery table provided in the sub ROM 402 when the spinning effect RE1 is executed for the first time (FIG. 78A). The first RUSH provided in the sub ROM 402 when the lottery effect RE3 is executed next by referring to the “strong cherry” field and performing the spinning effect RE3. Based on the state point acquisition lottery table (see FIG. 78A), a lottery is performed as to whether or not to acquire an ART point with reference to the “strong cherry” column.

  In this case, refer to the “Strong Cherry” column and notify the result of the lottery whether or not to acquire the ART point in the game that executes the spinning effect, and refer to the “Weak Cherry” column. The result of the lottery to determine whether or not to acquire ART points may be notified thereafter, or the result of the lottery to determine whether or not to acquire ART points with reference to the “weak cherry” column. May be notified in the game that executes the spinning effect, and the result of the lottery of whether or not to acquire the ART point with reference to the “strong cherry” field may be notified thereafter.

  If the condition device command received from the main control board 300 includes information indicating that the spinning effect is to be executed, the lottery is performed according to the combination of symbols temporarily stopped by the spinning effect to be executed. It is good as well. In this case, the sub CPU 401 includes information indicating that the winning combination included in the conditional device command received from the main control board 300 is “weak cherry” and that the rotation effect RE1 is executed. If this is the case, the combination of symbols related to “strong cherry” is temporarily stopped on the effective line by the spinning effect RE 1, so the first RUSH state point acquisition lottery table ( With reference to the lottery value in the “strong cherry” column in FIG. 78 (A)), it is determined whether or not to give an ART point. This eliminates the need to separately provide the first RUSH state point acquisition lottery table (when the spinning effect is executed) provided in the sub ROM 402 (see FIGS. 78C and 78D).

  In addition, not only the ART point extra lottery process of step S302-3-1-2-5-28-2 but, for example, the ART point extra lottery process of step S302-3-1-2-5-18-3, etc. The same lottery may be performed in other ART point addition lottery processing.

  Further, in the present embodiment, the ART point addition lottery process has been described as an example, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the same processing may be performed in the normal state point related processing. Specifically, when the condition device command received from the main control board 300 includes information indicating that the spinning effect is to be executed, the sub CPU 401 displays the symbol temporarily stopped by the spinning effect to be executed. Depending on the combination, a lottery may be performed as to whether or not to grant points for normal conditions.

(Step S302-3-1-2-5-28-3)
In step S302-3-1-2-5-28-3, the sub CPU 401 performs processing to determine whether or not the third Bonus winning flag is ON. Specifically, the sub CPU 401 performs processing for determining whether or not the third Bonus winning flag is ON based on the value stored in the third Bonus winning flag storage area provided in the sub RAM 403. If it is determined that the third Bonus winning flag is ON (step S302-3-1-2-5-28-3 = Yes), step S302-3-1-2-5-28-4 is performed. If it is determined that the third Bonus winning flag is not ON (step S302-3-1-2-5-28-3 = No), step S302-3-1-2-5 is performed. The process is shifted to -28-8.

  When the state managed by the sub control board 400 is the first RUSH state or the second RUSH state, the sub CPU 401 determines that the main control board 300 executes the spinning effect RE4. The third Bonus winning flag is turned ON, and control for shifting to the third Bonus state is performed.

(Step S302-3-1-2-5-28-4)
In step S302-3-1-2-5-28-4, the sub CPU 401 performs the third Bonus state transition process. Specifically, the sub CPU 401 (a) updates the Bonus winning opportunity storage area provided in the sub RAM 403, (b) the third chance state game number counter provided in the sub RAM 403, A process for clearing the 4-chance state game number counter, etc., (c) the above-mentioned ART initial hit process, (d) a Bonus winning process described later, etc. are performed. Then, when the process of step S302-3-1-2-5-28-4 ends, the process proceeds to step S302-3-1-2-5-28-5.

(Step S302-3-1-2-5-28-5)
In step S302-3-1-2-5-28-5, the sub CPU 401 performs a process of setting “0” to the value of the first RUSH state game number counter. Specifically, the sub CPU 401 performs a process of setting “0” to the value of the first RUSH state game number counter provided in the sub RAM 403. When the process of step S302-3-1-2-5-28-5 ends, the process proceeds to step S302-3-1-2-5-28-6.

(Step S302-3-1-2-5-28-6)
In step S302-3-1-2-5-28-6, the sub CPU 401 performs processing for turning off the third Bonus winning flag. Specifically, the sub CPU 401 performs processing for turning off the third Bonus winning flag in the third Bonus winning flag storage area provided in the sub RAM 403. Then, when the process of step S302-3-1-2-5-28-6 ends, the process proceeds to step S302-3-1-2-5-28-7.

(Step S302-3-1-2-5-28-7)
In step S302-3-1-2-5-28-7, the sub CPU 401 performs a process of turning on the third RT gaming state transition flag during the third Bonus state. Specifically, the sub CPU 401 performs processing for turning on the third RT gaming state transition flag during the third Bonus state in the third RT gaming state transition flag storage area provided in the sub RAM 403. When the process of step S302-3-1-2-5-28-7 ends, the subroutine for the first RUSH state process ends, and step S302-3-1-2-6 of the conditional device command reception process ends. The process is transferred to.

(Step S302-3-1-2-5-28-8)
In step S302-3-1-2-5-28-8, the sub CPU 401 performs a process of determining whether or not the value of the first RUSH state game number counter is “0”. Specifically, the sub CPU 401 performs a process of determining whether or not the value of the first RUSH state game number counter provided in the sub RAM 403 is “0”. If it is determined that the value of the first RUSH state game number counter is “0” (step S302-3-1-2-5-28-8 = Yes), step S302-3-1-2. When the process proceeds to -5-28-9 and it is determined that the value of the first RUSH state game number counter is not “0” (step S302-3-1-2-5-28-8 = No) ), The first RUSH state processing subroutine is terminated, and the process proceeds to step S302-3-1-2-6 in the conditional device command reception process.

(Step S302-3-1-2-5-28-9)
In step S302-3-1-2-5-28-9, the sub CPU 401 determines whether or not the value of the first RUSH state stock counter or the value of the second RUSH state stock counter is “1” or more. I do. Specifically, the sub CPU 401 performs processing to determine whether the value of the first RUSH state stock counter provided in the sub RAM 403 or the value of the second RUSH state stock counter is “1” or more. When it is determined that the value of the first RUSH state stock counter or the value of the second RUSH state stock counter is “1” or more (step S302-3-1-2-5-28-9 = Yes). , The process proceeds to step S302-3-1-2-5-28-10, and it is determined that the value of the first RUSH state stock counter or the value of the second RUSH state stock counter is not equal to or greater than “1”. (Step S302-3-1-2-5-28-9 = No), the process proceeds to Step S302-3-1-2-5-28-13.

(Step S302-3-1-2-5-28-10)
In step S302-3-1-2-5-28-10, the sub CPU 401 performs a process of determining whether or not the RUSH stock of the main control board is “0”. Specifically, the sub CPU 401 performs a process of determining whether or not the value of the RUSH stock number counter included in the conditional device command received from the main control board 300 is “0”. If it is determined that the RUSH stock of the main control board is “0” (step S302-3-1-2-5-28-10 = Yes), step S302-3-1-2-5-28. When the process proceeds to -11 and it is determined that the RUSH stock of the main control board is not “0” (step S302-3-1-2-5-28-10 = No), step S302-3 The process shifts to -1--2-5-28-12.

(Step S302-3-1-2-5-28-11)
In step S302-3-1-2-5-28-11, the sub CPU 401 performs processing for setting the state managed by the sub control board 400 to the RUSH preparation state in the next game. Specifically, in the next game, the sub CPU 401 sets the RUSH preparation state in the state storage area provided in the sub RAM 403 so that the state managed by the sub control board 400 becomes the RUSH preparation state. I do. When the process of step S302-3-1-2-5-28-11 ends, the subroutine for the first RUSH state process ends, and step S302-3-1-2-6 of the conditional device command reception process ends. The process is transferred to.

(Step S302-3-1-2-5-28-12)
In step S302-3-1-2-5-28-12, the sub CPU 401 performs a first RUSH state transition process. Specifically, when the value of the first RUSH state stock counter provided in the sub RAM 403 is “0”, the sub CPU 401 determines that the state managed by the sub control board 400 is the second RUSH in the next game. Processing to set the second RUSH state in the state storage area provided in the sub-RAM 403 so as to become a state, processing to set “10” to the value of the second RUSH state game number counter provided in the sub-RAM 403, A process of subtracting “1” from the value of the second RUSH state stock counter provided in the sub RAM 403 is performed. On the other hand, when the value of the first RUSH state stock counter provided in the sub-RAM 403 is not “0”, the sub-control board 400 is controlled so that the state managed by the sub-control board 400 becomes the first RUSH state in the next game. A process of setting the first RUSH state in the state storage area provided in the RAM 403, a process of setting “10” to the value of the first RUSH state game number counter provided in the sub RAM 403, and the sub RAM 403 are provided. A process of subtracting “1” from the value of the first RUSH state stock counter is performed. When the process of step S302-3-1-2-5-28-12 ends, the subroutine for the first RUSH state process ends, and step S302-3-1-2-6 of the conditional device command reception process ends. The process is transferred to.

(Step S302-3-1-2-5-28-13)
In step S302-3-1-2-5-28-13, the sub CPU 401 performs processing to determine whether or not an ART point has been acquired in the first RUSH state. Specifically, the sub CPU 401 waits until the state managed by the sub control board 400 becomes the first RUSH state until the value of the first RUSH state game number counter provided in the sub RAM 403 becomes “0”. In addition, processing for determining whether or not processing for adding to the value of the ART point storage area provided in the sub RAM 403 has been performed is performed. If it is determined in the first RUSH state that an ART point has been acquired (step S302-3-1-2-5-28-13 = Yes), step S302-3-1-2-5-28. When the process proceeds to -14 and it is determined that the ART point has not been acquired in the first RUSH state (step S302-3-1-2-5-28-13 = No), step S302-3 The process is shifted to -1-2-5-28-18.

(Step S302-3-1-2-5-28-14)
In step S302-3-1-2-5-28-14, the sub CPU 401 performs a process of setting the state managed by the sub control board 400 to the third fall standby state in the next game. Specifically, the sub CPU 401 sets the third fall standby state in the state storage area provided in the sub RAM 403 so that the state managed by the sub control board 400 becomes the third fall standby state in the next game. Perform processing to set. Then, when the process of step S302-3-1-2-5-28-14 ends, the process proceeds to step S302-3-1-2-5-28-15.

(Step S302-3-1-2-5-28-15)
In step S <b> 302-3-1-2-5-28-15, the sub CPU 401 performs a process of determining whether or not the total number of acquired ART points is “1” or less. Specifically, the sub CPU 401 waits until the state managed by the sub control board 400 becomes the first RUSH state until the value of the first RUSH state game number counter provided in the sub RAM 403 becomes “0”. In addition, a process of determining whether or not the value added to the value of the ART point storage area provided in the sub RAM 403 is “1” or less is performed. If it is determined that the total number of acquired ART points is equal to or less than “1” (step S302-3-1-2-5-28-15 = Yes), step S302-3-1-2 If the process proceeds to 5-28-16 and it is determined that the total number of acquired ART points is not less than “1” (step S302-3-1-2-5-28-15 = No), The subroutine for the first RUSH state process is terminated, and the process proceeds to step S302-3-1-2-6 in the process when a conditional device command is received.

(Step S302-3-1-2-5-28-16)
In step S <b> 302-3-1-2-5-28-16, the sub CPU 401 performs a process of determining whether or not the ART state continuation set number is “0”. Specifically, the sub CPU 401 performs a process of determining whether or not the value of the ART state continuation set number storage area provided in the sub RAM 403 is “0”. If it is determined that the ART state continuation set number is “0” (step S302-3-1-2-5-28-16 = Yes), step S302-3-1-2-5- If the process proceeds to 28-17 and it is determined that the number of ART state continuation sets is not “0” (step S302-3-1-2-5-28-16 = No), the first RUSH state is used. The processing subroutine is terminated, and the process proceeds to step S302-3-1-2-6 in the conditional device command reception processing.

(Step S302-3-1-2-5-28-17)
In step S302-3-1-2-5-28-17, the sub CPU 401 performs a process of adding “1” to the value of the ART counter. Specifically, the sub CPU 401 performs a process of adding “1” to the value of the ART point storage area provided in the sub RAM 403. When the process of step S302-3-1-2-5-28-17 ends, the subroutine for the first RUSH state process ends, and step S302-3-1-2-6 of the conditional device command reception process ends. The process is transferred to.

(Step S302-3-1-2-5-28-18)
In step S302-3-1-2-5-28-18, the sub CPU 401 performs processing to determine whether or not the second RUSH state is set. Specifically, the sub CPU 401 performs processing for determining whether or not the state is the second RUSH state based on the value of the state storage area provided in the sub RAM 403. And when it determines with it being the 2nd RUSH state (step S302-3-1-2-5-28-18 = Yes), a process is processed to step S302-3-1-2-5-28-19. If it is determined that the state is not the second RUSH state (step S302-3-1-2-5-28-18 = No), the process proceeds to step S302-3-1-2-5-28-20. To migrate.

(Step S302-3-1-2-5-28-19)
In step S302-3-1-2-5-28-19, the sub CPU 401 performs a process of adding “1” to the value of the second RUSH state stock counter. Specifically, the sub CPU 401 performs a process of adding “1” to the value of the second RUSH state stock counter provided in the sub RAM 403. Then, when the process of step S302-3-1-2-5-28-19 ends, the process proceeds to step S302-3-1-2-5-28-21.

(Step S302-3-1-2-5-28-20)
In step S302-3-1-2-5-28-20, the sub CPU 401 performs a process of adding “1” to the value of the first RUSH state stock counter. Specifically, the sub CPU 401 performs a process of adding “1” to the value of the first RUSH state stock counter provided in the sub RAM 403. Then, when the process of step S302-3-1-2-5-28-20 ends, the process proceeds to step S302-3-1-2-5-28-21.

(Step S302-3-1-2-5-28-21)
In step S302-3-1-2-5-28-21, the sub CPU 401 performs processing for setting the state managed by the sub control board 400 to the RUSH preparation state in the next game. Specifically, in the next game, the sub CPU 401 sets the RUSH preparation state in the state storage area provided in the sub RAM 403 so that the state managed by the sub control board 400 becomes the RUSH preparation state. I do. When the process of step S302-3-1-2-5-28-21 ends, the subroutine for the first RUSH state process ends, and step S302-3-1-2-6 of the conditional device command reception process ends. The process is transferred to.

(Process for second RUSH state)
Next, based on FIG. 150, the second RUSH state performed when the state managed by the sub-control board 400 is the second RUSH state in the state-by-state transition processing in step S <b> 302-3-2-5 in FIG. 117. The processing will be described. FIG. 150 is a diagram showing a subroutine for processing for the second RUSH state.

(Step S302-3-1-2-2-29-1)
In step S302-3-1-2-5-29-1, the sub CPU 401 performs a process of subtracting “1” from the value of the second RUSH state game number counter. Specifically, the sub CPU 401 performs a process of subtracting “1” from the value of the second RUSH state game number counter provided in the sub RAM 403. Then, when the process of step S302-3-1-2-2-29-1 ends, the process proceeds to step S302-3-1-2-5-29-2.

(Step S302-3-1-2-5-29-2)
In step S302-3-1-2-5-29-2, the sub CPU 401 performs ART point addition lottery processing. Specifically, the sub CPU 401 includes information related to the winning combination included in the conditional device command received from the main control board 300 and a second RUSH state point acquisition lottery table provided in the sub ROM 402 (FIG. 78 ( Based on B), a lottery of whether or not to acquire ART points is performed. In addition, when the lottery is won, the sub CPU 401 performs a process of storing the winning value in the ART point storage area provided in the sub RAM 403. Then, when the process of step S302-3-1-2-5-29-2 ends, the process proceeds to step S302-3-1-2-5-29-3.

  Here, in the ART point addition lottery process in step S302-3-1-2-5-29-2, information indicating that the spinning effect is executed is included in the condition device command received from the main control board 300. In this case, based on the second RUSH state point acquisition lottery table (when the spinning effect is executed) (see FIG. 78D), a lottery is performed as to whether or not to acquire an ART point.

  Further, when the condition device command received from the main control board 300 includes information indicating that the rotation effect RE7 or the rotation effect RE8 is to be executed, the sub CPU 401 executes the rotation effect RE1. The rotation effect RE4 or the rotation effect RE5 is executed, and therefore the second RUSH state point acquisition lottery table (when the rotation effect is executed) provided in the sub ROM 402 (see FIG. 78D). A lottery is performed using the lottery value in the column of the spinning effect RE1. Further, when the condition device command received from the main control board 300 includes information indicating that the rotation effect RE10 or the rotation effect RE11 is to be executed, the sub CPU 401 executes the rotation effect RE2. Since the turning effect RE4 or the turning effect RE5 is executed, the rotation of the second RUSH state point acquisition lottery table (when the turning effect is executed) provided in the sub ROM 402 (see FIG. 78D). The lottery is performed using the lottery value in the column of the trunk effect RE2.

  Further, when the condition device command received from the main control board 300 includes information indicating that the rotation effect RE13 or the rotation effect RE14 is to be executed, the sub CPU 401 executes the rotation effect RE3. Since the turning effect RE4 or the turning effect RE5 is executed, the rotation of the second RUSH state point acquisition lottery table (when the turning effect is executed) provided in the sub ROM 402 (see FIG. 78D). A lottery is performed using the lottery value in the column of the trunk effect RE3. Further, when the condition device command received from the main control board 300 includes information indicating that the rotation effect RE15 or the rotation effect RE16 is to be executed, the sub CPU 401 executes the rotation effect RE6. Since the turning effect RE4 or the turning effect RE5 is executed, the rotation of the second RUSH state point acquisition lottery table (when the turning effect is executed) provided in the sub ROM 402 (see FIG. 78D). The lottery is performed using the lottery value in the column of the trunk effect RE6.

  Further, when the condition device command received from the main control board 300 includes information indicating that the rotation effect RE17 or the rotation effect RE18 is executed, the sub CPU 401 executes the rotation effect RE9. Since the turning effect RE4 or the turning effect RE5 is executed, the rotation of the second RUSH state point acquisition lottery table (when the turning effect is executed) provided in the sub ROM 402 (see FIG. 78D). A lottery is performed using the lottery value in the column of the trunk effect RE9. In addition, when the condition device command received from the main control board 300 includes information indicating that the rotation effect RE19 or the rotation effect RE20 is to be executed, the sub CPU 401 executes the rotation effect RE12. Since the turning effect RE4 or the turning effect RE5 is executed, the rotation of the second RUSH state point acquisition lottery table (when the turning effect is executed) provided in the sub ROM 402 (see FIG. 78D). The lottery is performed using the lottery value in the column of the trunk effect RE12.

  Here, in the present embodiment, the sub CPU 401 acquires ART points based on the second RUSH state point acquisition lottery table (when the spinning effect is executed) provided in the sub ROM 402 (see FIG. 78D). Whether or not to perform the lottery is determined, and the ART point determined by the lottery is divided and notified to the player. For example, in the case where the information related to the winning combination included in the conditional device command received from the main control board 300 is “chance eye CN2” and includes information indicating that the spinning effect RE12 is to be executed. First, the sub CPU 401 performs a lottery to determine whether or not to acquire an ART point based on a second RUSH state point acquisition lottery table (see FIG. 78B) provided in the sub ROM 402. Then, it is assumed that the value of the ART point acquired as a result of the lottery is “3”. Next, on the basis of the second RUSH state point acquisition lottery table (when the spinning effect is executed) provided in the sub-ROM 402 (see FIG. 78D), a lottery is performed as to whether or not to acquire an ART point. Then, it is assumed that the value of the ART point acquired as a result of the lottery is “5”.

  In this case, the sub CPU 401 notifies that the game has acquired “3” ART points. Then, in the next game, when the spinning effect RE12 is executed, when the spinning effect RE3 is first executed, a part of the acquired ART point “5” is notified, and the subsequent spinning effect is performed. When executing RE3, the remaining ART points of the acquired ART points “5” are notified.

  In the present embodiment, the sub CPU 401 is in the second RUSH state provided in the sub ROM 402 when the condition device command received from the main control board 300 includes information to execute the spinning effect. Based on the point acquisition lottery table (when the spinning effect is executed) (see FIG. 78D), the lottery to determine whether or not to acquire the ART point is performed, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the sub CPU 401 determines whether or not to acquire an ART point based on the second RUSH state point acquisition lottery table (see FIG. 78 (B)) provided in the sub ROM 402 even when the spinning effect is executed. It is good also as performing.

  For example, in the case where the information related to the winning combination included in the conditional device command received from the main control board 300 is “weak cherry” and includes information indicating that the spinning effect RE6 is to be executed, First, the sub CPU 401 refers to the “weak cherry” column based on the second RUSH state point acquisition lottery table (see FIG. 78B) provided in the sub ROM 402, and determines whether or not to acquire an ART point. Do the lottery. Then, in the next game, when the spinning effect RE6 is executed, the second RUSH state point acquisition lottery table provided in the sub ROM 402 when the spinning effect RE1 is executed for the first time (FIG. 78B). The second RUSH provided in the sub-ROM 402 when the next stage effect RE3 is executed with reference to the “strong cherry” column. Based on the state point acquisition lottery table (see FIG. 78 (B)), a lottery is performed as to whether or not to acquire an ART point with reference to the “strong cherry” column.

(Step S302-3-1-2-5-29-3)
In step S302-3-1-2-5-29-3, the sub CPU 401 performs processing for determining whether or not the third Bonus winning flag is ON. Specifically, the sub CPU 401 performs processing for determining whether or not the third Bonus winning flag is ON based on the value stored in the third Bonus winning flag storage area provided in the sub RAM 403. If it is determined that the third Bonus winning flag is ON (step S302-3-1-2-5-29-3 = Yes), step S302-3-1-2-5-29-4 is performed. When it is determined that the third Bonus winning flag is not ON (step S302-3-1-2-5-29-3 = No), step S302-3-1-2-5 is performed. The process is shifted to -29-8.

  When the state managed by the sub control board 400 is the first RUSH state or the second RUSH state, the sub CPU 401 determines that the main control board 300 executes the spinning effect RE4. The third Bonus winning flag is turned ON, and control for shifting to the third Bonus state is performed.

(Step S302-3-1-2-5-29-4)
In step S302-3-1-2-5-29-4, the sub CPU 401 performs a third Bonus state transition process. Specifically, the sub CPU 401 (a) updates the Bonus winning opportunity storage area provided in the sub RAM 403, (b) the third chance state game number counter provided in the sub RAM 403, A process for clearing the 4-chance state game number counter, etc., (c) the above-mentioned ART initial hit process, (d) a Bonus winning process described later, etc. are performed. Then, when the process of step S302-3-1-2-5-29-4 ends, the process proceeds to step S302-3-1-2-5-29-5.

(Step S302-3-1-2-5-29-5)
In step S302-3-1-2-5-29-5, the sub CPU 401 performs a process of setting “0” to the value of the second RUSH state game number counter. Specifically, the sub CPU 401 performs a process of setting “0” to the value of the second RUSH state game number counter provided in the sub RAM 403. Then, when the process of step S302-3-1-2-5-29-5 ends, the process proceeds to step S302-3-1-2-5-29-6.

(Step S302-3-1-2-5-29-6)
In step S302-3-1-2-5-29-6, the sub CPU 401 performs processing for turning off the third Bonus winning flag. Specifically, the sub CPU 401 performs processing for turning off the third Bonus winning flag in the third Bonus winning flag storage area provided in the sub RAM 403. Then, when the process of step S302-3-1-2-5-29-6 ends, the process proceeds to step S302-3-1-2-5-29-7.

(Step S302-3-1-2-5-29-7)
In step S302-3-1-2-5-29-7, the sub CPU 401 performs a process of turning on the third RT gaming state transition flag during the third Bonus state. Specifically, the sub CPU 401 performs processing for turning on the third RT gaming state transition flag during the third Bonus state in the third RT gaming state transition flag storage area provided in the sub RAM 403. When the process of step S302-3-1-2-5-29-7 ends, the subroutine for the second RUSH state process ends, and step S302-3-1-2-6 of the conditional device command reception process ends. The process is transferred to.

(Step S302-3-1-2-5-29-8)
In step S302-3-1-2-5-29-8, the sub CPU 401 determines whether or not the value of the second RUSH state game number counter is “0”. Specifically, the sub CPU 401 performs a process of determining whether or not the value of the second RUSH state game number counter provided in the sub RAM 403 is “0”. If it is determined that the value of the second RUSH state game number counter is “0” (step S302-3-1-2-5-29-8 = Yes), step S302-3-1-2. When the process proceeds to −5-29-9 and it is determined that the value of the second RUSH state game number counter is not “0” (step S302-3-1-2-5-29-8 = No) ), The subroutine for the second RUSH state process is terminated, and the process proceeds to step S302-3-1-2-6 in the condition device command reception process.

(Step S302-3-1-2-5-29-9)
In step S302-3-1-2-5-29-9, the sub CPU 401 determines whether or not the value of the first RUSH state stock counter or the value of the second RUSH state stock counter is “1” or more. I do. Specifically, the sub CPU 401 performs processing to determine whether the value of the first RUSH state stock counter provided in the sub RAM 403 or the value of the second RUSH state stock counter is “1” or more. When it is determined that the value of the first RUSH state stock counter or the value of the second RUSH state stock counter is “1” or more (step S302-3-1-2-5-29-9 = Yes). , The process proceeds to step S302-3-1-2-5-29-10, and it is determined that the value of the first RUSH state stock counter or the value of the second RUSH state stock counter is not equal to or greater than “1”. (Step S302-3-1-2-5-29-9 = No), the process proceeds to Step S302-3-1-2-5-29-13.

(Step S302-3-1-2-5-29-10)
In step S302-3-1-2-5-29-10, the sub CPU 401 performs a process of determining whether or not the RUSH stock of the main control board is “0”. Specifically, the sub CPU 401 performs a process of determining whether or not the value of the RUSH stock number counter included in the conditional device command received from the main control board 300 is “0”. When the RUSH stock of the main control board is determined to be “0” (step S302-3-1-2-5-29-10 = Yes), step S302-3-1-2-5-29. When the process proceeds to -11 and it is determined that the RUSH stock of the main control board is not “0” (step S302-3-1-2-5-29-10 = No), step S302-3 The process is shifted to -1--2-5-29-12.

(Step S302-3-1-2-5-29-11)
In step S302-3-1-2-5-29-11, the sub CPU 401 performs processing for setting the state managed by the sub control board 400 to the RUSH preparation state in the next game. Specifically, in the next game, the sub CPU 401 sets the RUSH preparation state in the state storage area provided in the sub RAM 403 so that the state managed by the sub control board 400 becomes the RUSH preparation state. I do. When the process of step S302-3-1-2-5-29-11 ends, the subroutine for the second RUSH state process ends, and step S302-3-1-2-6 of the conditional device command reception process ends. The process is transferred to.

(Step S302-3-1-2-5-29-12)
In step S302-3-1-2-5-29-12, the sub CPU 401 performs a second RUSH state transition process. Specifically, when the value of the first RUSH state stock counter provided in the sub RAM 403 is “0”, the sub CPU 401 determines that the state managed by the sub control board 400 is the second RUSH in the next game. Processing to set the second RUSH state in the state storage area provided in the sub-RAM 403 so as to become a state, processing to set “10” to the value of the second RUSH state game number counter provided in the sub-RAM 403, A process of subtracting “1” from the value of the second RUSH state stock counter provided in the sub RAM 403 is performed. On the other hand, when the value of the first RUSH state stock counter provided in the sub-RAM 403 is not “0”, the sub-control board 400 is controlled so that the state managed by the sub-control board 400 becomes the first RUSH state in the next game. A process of setting the first RUSH state in the state storage area provided in the RAM 403, a process of setting “10” to the value of the first RUSH state game number counter provided in the sub RAM 403, and the sub RAM 403 are provided. A process of subtracting “1” from the value of the first RUSH state stock counter is performed. When the process of step S302-3-1-2-5-29-12 ends, the subroutine for the second RUSH state process ends, and step S302-3-1-2-6 of the conditional device command reception process ends. The process is transferred to.

(Step S302-3-1-2-5-29-13)
In step S302-3-1-2-5-29-13, the sub CPU 401 performs processing for determining whether or not an ART point has been acquired in the second RUSH state. Specifically, the sub CPU 401 waits until the value of the second RUSH state game number counter provided in the sub RAM 403 becomes “0” after the state managed by the sub control board 400 becomes the second RUSH state. In addition, processing for determining whether or not processing for adding to the value of the ART point storage area provided in the sub RAM 403 has been performed is performed. If it is determined that the ART point has been acquired in the second RUSH state (step S302-3-1-2-5-29-13 = Yes), step S302-3-1-2-5-29 is performed. When the process is shifted to -14 and it is determined that the ART point has not been acquired in the second RUSH state (step S302-3-1-2-5-29-13 = No), step S302-3 The process is shifted to -1--2-5-29-18.

(Step S302-3-1-2-5-29-14)
In step S302-3-1-2-5-29-14, the sub CPU 401 performs a process of setting the state managed by the sub control board 400 to the third fall standby state in the next game. Specifically, the sub CPU 401 sets the third fall standby state in the state storage area provided in the sub RAM 403 so that the state managed by the sub control board 400 becomes the third fall standby state in the next game. Perform processing to set. Then, when the process of step S302-3-1-2-5-29-14 ends, the process proceeds to step S302-3-1-2-5-29-15.

(Step S302-3-1-2-5-29-15)
In step S302-3-1-2-5-29-15, the sub CPU 401 performs processing to determine whether or not the total number of acquired ART points is “1” or less. Specifically, the sub CPU 401 waits until the value of the second RUSH state game number counter provided in the sub RAM 403 becomes “0” after the state managed by the sub control board 400 becomes the second RUSH state. In addition, a process of determining whether or not the value added to the value of the ART point storage area provided in the sub RAM 403 is “1” or less is performed. If it is determined that the total number of acquired ART points is equal to or less than “1” (step S302-3-1-2-5-29-15 = Yes), step S302-3-1-2-2 If the process proceeds to 5-29-16 and it is determined that the total number of acquired ART points is not less than “1” (step S302-3-1-2-5-29-15 = No), The subroutine for the second RUSH state process is terminated, and the process proceeds to step S302-3-1-2-6 in the condition device command reception process.

(Step S302-3-1-2-5-29-16)
In step S302-3-1-2-5-29-16, the sub CPU 401 performs processing to determine whether or not the number of ART state continuation sets is “0”. Specifically, the sub CPU 401 performs a process of determining whether or not the value of the ART state continuation set number storage area provided in the sub RAM 403 is “0”. If it is determined that the ART state continuation set number is “0” (step S302-3-1-2-5-29-16 = Yes), step S302-3-1-2-5- If the process proceeds to 29-17 and it is determined that the ART state continuation set number is not “0” (step S302-3-1-2-5-29-16 = No), for the second RUSH state The processing subroutine is terminated, and the process proceeds to step S302-3-1-2-6 in the conditional device command reception processing.

(Step S302-3-1-2-5-29-17)
In step S302-3-1-2-5-29-17, the sub CPU 401 performs a process of adding “1” to the value of the ART counter. Specifically, the sub CPU 401 performs a process of adding “1” to the value of the ART point storage area provided in the sub RAM 403. When the process of step S302-3-1-2-5-29-17 ends, the subroutine for the second RUSH state process ends, and step S302-3-1-2-6 of the conditional device command reception process ends. The process is transferred to.

(Step S302-3-1-2-5-29-18)
In step S302-3-1-2-5-29-18, the sub CPU 401 performs processing to determine whether or not the second RUSH state is set. Specifically, the sub CPU 401 performs processing for determining whether or not the state is the second RUSH state based on the value of the state storage area provided in the sub RAM 403. And when it determines with it being the 2nd RUSH state (step S302-3-1-2-5-29-18 = Yes), a process is processed to step S302-3-1-2-5-29-19. If it is determined that the state is not the second RUSH state (step S302-3-1-2-5-29-18 = No), the process proceeds to step S302-3-1-2-5-29-20. To migrate.

(Step S302-3-1-2-5-29-19)
In step S302-3-1-2-5-29-19, the sub CPU 401 performs a process of adding “1” to the value of the second RUSH state stock counter. Specifically, the sub CPU 401 performs a process of adding “1” to the value of the second RUSH state stock counter provided in the sub RAM 403. Then, when the process of step S302-3-1-2-5-29-19 ends, the process proceeds to step S302-3-1-2-5-29-21.

(Step S302-3-1-2-5-29-20)
In step S302-3-1-2-5-29-20, the sub CPU 401 performs a process of adding “1” to the value of the first RUSH state stock counter. Specifically, the sub CPU 401 performs a process of adding “1” to the value of the first RUSH state stock counter provided in the sub RAM 403. Then, when the process of step S302-3-1-2-5-29-20 ends, the process proceeds to step S302-3-1-2-5-29-21.

(Step S302-3-1-2-5-29-21)
In step S302-3-1-2-5-29-21, the sub CPU 401 performs processing for setting the state managed by the sub control board 400 to the RUSH preparation state in the next game. Specifically, in the next game, the sub CPU 401 sets the RUSH preparation state in the state storage area provided in the sub RAM 403 so that the state managed by the sub control board 400 becomes the RUSH preparation state. I do. When the process of step S302-3-1-2-5-29-21 ends, the subroutine for the second RUSH state process ends, and step S302-3-1-2-6 of the conditional device command reception process ends. The process is transferred to.

  In the present embodiment, as described above, the same processing is performed when the state managed by the sub control board 400 is the first RUSH state and when the state managed by the sub control board 400 is the second RUSH state. Is going to do. Therefore, when the state managed by the sub-control board 400 is the first RUSH state, or when the state managed by the sub-control board 400 is the second RUSH state, the process shown in FIG. 147 or the process shown in FIG. 148 is performed. If so, the capacity of the sub-ROM 402 can be reduced. At this time, since the first RUSH state game number counter and the second RUSH state game number counter provided in the sub RAM 403 are shared, the sub RAM 403 also has a simple configuration compared to the sub RAM 403 of the present embodiment. It can be.

(Process for 3rd Bonus state)
Next, based on FIG. 151, the third Bonus state performed when the state managed by the sub-control board 400 is the third Bonus state in the state-specific transition process of Step S <b> 302-3-2-5 of FIG. 117. The processing will be described. FIG. 151 is a diagram showing a subroutine for the third Bonus state process.

(Step S302-3-1-2-5-30-1)
In step S302-3-1-2-5-30-1, the sub CPU 401 performs a process of determining whether or not the third RT gaming state transition flag is ON during the third Bonus state. Specifically, the sub CPU 401 sets the third RT gaming state transition flag during the third Bonus state to ON based on the value stored in the third RT gaming state transition flag storage area provided in the sub RAM 403. The process which determines whether it is is is performed. If it is determined that the third RT gaming state transition flag is ON during the third Bonus state (step S302-3-1-2-5-30-1 = Yes), step S302-3-1-2. When the process proceeds to -5-30-2 and it is determined that the third RT gaming state transition flag is not ON during the third Bonus state (step S302-3-1-2-5-30-1 = No) ), The process proceeds to step S302-3-1-2-5-30-3.

(Step S302-3-1-2-5-30-2)
In step S302-3-1-2-5-30-2, the sub CPU 401 performs a process of subtracting “1” from the value of the third Bonus state game number counter. Specifically, the sub CPU 401 performs a process of subtracting “1” from the value of the third bonus state game number counter provided in the sub RAM 403. When the process of step S302-3-1-2-5-30-2 is completed, the third bonus state processing subroutine is terminated, and step S302-3-1-2-6 of the conditional device command reception process is terminated. The process is transferred to.

(Step S302-3-1-2-5-30-3)
In step S302-3-1-2-5-30-3, the sub CPU 401 performs processing to determine whether or not the value of the new first RUSH stock counter is “1” or more. Specifically, the sub CPU 401 determines whether or not a new first RUSH state is to be stocked on the main control board 300 side based on information included in the conditional device command received from the main control board 300. Processing to determine is performed. When it is determined that the value of the new first RUSH stock counter is “1” or more (step S302-3-1-2-5-30-3 = Yes), step S302-3-1-2 is performed. When the process proceeds to −5-30-4 and it is determined that the value of the new first RUSH stock counter is not “1” or more (step S302-3-1-2-5-30-3 = No) ), The process proceeds to step S302-3-1-2-5-30-5.

(Step S302-3-1-2-5-30-4)
In step S302-3-1-2-5-30-4, the sub CPU 401 performs a process of adding “1” to the value of the first RUSH state stock counter. Specifically, the sub CPU 401 performs a process of adding “1” to the value of the first RUSH state stock counter provided in the sub RAM 403. When the process of step S302-3-1-2-5-30-4 ends, the subroutine for the third Bonus state process ends, and step S302-3-1-2-6 of the conditional device command reception process ends. The process is transferred to.

(Step S302-3-1-2-5-30-5)
In step S302-3-1-2-5-30-5, the sub CPU 401 performs processing to determine whether or not the value of the third Bonus state game number counter is “0”. Specifically, the sub CPU 401 performs a process of determining whether or not the value of the third Bonus state game number counter provided in the sub RAM 403 is “0”. When it is determined that the value of the third Bonus state game number counter is “0” (step S302-3-1-2-5-30-5 = Yes), step S302-3-1-2. When the process proceeds to −5-30-6 and it is determined that the value of the third Bonus state game number counter is not “0” (step S302-3-1-2-5-30-5 = No) ), The third Bonus state processing subroutine is terminated, and the processing shifts to step S302-3-1-2-6 of the conditional device command reception processing.

(Step S302-3-1-2-5-30-6)
In step S302-3-1-2-5-30-6, the sub CPU 401 performs processing at the end of the third Bonus state. Specifically, in the next game, when it is determined that the state managed by the sub control board 400 shifts to the ART ready state, the sub CPU 401 stores a state storage area provided in the sub RAM 403. In the next game, when it is determined that the state managed by the sub-control board 400 will shift to the RUSH preparation state, the state storage area provided in the sub-RAM 403 is set. Processing for setting the RUSH preparation state is performed. When the process of step S302-3-1-2-5-30-6 ends, the third Bonus state processing subroutine ends, and step S302-3-1-2-6 of the conditional device command reception process ends. The process is transferred to.

(Processing for the third fall standby state)
Next, based on FIG. 152, in the state-by-state transition process in step S302-3-1-2-5 in FIG. 117, the second control is performed when the state managed by the sub control board 400 is the third fall standby state. The process for the 3-fall standby state will be described. FIG. 152 is a diagram showing a subroutine of the third fall standby state process.

(Step S302-3-1-2-5-31-1)
In step S302-3-1-2-5-31-1, the sub CPU 401 performs ART point addition lottery processing. Specifically, the sub CPU 401 determines the winning included in the third fall waiting state lottery table (see FIG. 74C) provided in the sub ROM 402 and the condition device command received from the main control board 300. Based on the information relating to the combination, a lottery is performed as to whether or not to acquire an ART point. In addition, when the lottery is won, the sub CPU 401 performs a process of storing the winning value in the ART point storage area provided in the sub RAM 403. Then, when the process of step S302-3-1-2-5-31-1 is completed, the third fall standby state processing subroutine is terminated, and step S302-3-1-2 of the conditional device command reception process is terminated. The process is shifted to -6.

(Fourth fall waiting state process)
Next, based on FIG. 153, in the state-by-state transition process in step S302-3-1-2-5 in FIG. 117, the process is performed when the state managed by the sub-control board 400 is the fourth fall standby state. The 4-fall standby state process will be described. FIG. 153 is a diagram showing a subroutine of the fourth fall standby state process.

(Step S302-3-1-2-2-5-2-1)
In step S302-3-1-2-5-32-1, the sub CPU 401 performs a fourth falling standby state pull-out lottery process. Specifically, the sub CPU 401 determines the winning included in the fourth fall standby state lottery table (see FIG. 74D) provided in the sub ROM 402 and the condition device command received from the main control board 300. Based on the information relating to the combination, a lottery is performed as to whether or not to acquire an ART point. In addition, when the lottery is won, the sub CPU 401 performs a process of storing the winning value in the ART point storage area provided in the sub RAM 403. Then, when the process of step S302-3-1-2-2-5-2-1 ends, the process proceeds to step S302-3-1-2-2-5-2-2.

(Step S302-3-1-2-5-3-2)
In step S <b> 302-3-1-2-5-3-2, the sub CPU 401 performs a process of determining whether or not the value of the ART point is “1” or more. Specifically, the sub CPU 401 determines whether or not it is determined to acquire an ART point by the fourth falling standby state pull-out lottery process in step S302-3-1-2-5-32. Process. If it is determined that the value of the ART point is “1” or more (step S302-3-1-2-5-3-2 = Yes), step S302-3-1-2-5- If the process proceeds to 32-3 and it is determined that the value of the ART point is not “1” or more (step S302-3-1-2-5-3-2 = No), the fourth fall standby The state processing subroutine is terminated, and the process proceeds to step S302-3-1-2-6 in the conditional device command reception process.

(Step S302-3-1-2-5-32-3)
In step S302-3-1-2-5-32-3, the sub CPU 401 performs a process of adding “1” to the ART state continuation set number. Specifically, the sub CPU 401 performs a process of adding “1” to the value stored in the ART state continuation set number storage area provided in the sub RAM 403. Then, when the process of step S302-3-1-2-5-32-3 ends, the process proceeds to step S302-3-1-2-5-32-4.

(Step S302-3-1-2-5-32-4)
In step S302-3-1-2-5-32-4, the sub CPU 401 performs processing for determining whether or not the value of the scenario counter is less than “7”. Specifically, the sub CPU 401 performs processing for determining whether or not the value of the scenario counter provided in the sub RAM 403 is less than “7”. If it is determined that the value of the scenario counter is less than “7” (step S302-3-1-2-5-32-4 = Yes), step S302-3-1-2-5- If the process proceeds to 32-5 and it is determined that the value of the scenario counter is not less than “7” (step S302-3-1-2-5-32-4 = No), step S302-3 The process shifts to -1--2-5-32-6.

(Step S302-3-1-2-5-32-5)
In step S302-3-1-2-5-32-5, the sub CPU 401 performs a process of adding “1” to the value of the scenario counter. Specifically, the sub CPU 401 performs a process of adding “1” to the value of the scenario counter provided in the sub RAM 403. Then, when the process of step S302-3-1-2-5-32-5 ends, the process proceeds to step S302-3-1-2-5-32-8.

(Step S302-3-1-2-5-32-6)
In step S302-3-1-2-5-32-6, the sub CPU 401 performs a scenario lottery process. Specifically, the sub CPU 401 performs a process of determining a scenario by lottery based on a scenario determination table (see FIG. 67C) provided in the sub ROM 402. Further, the sub CPU 401 performs processing for storing information related to the determined scenario in the scenario information storage area provided in the sub RAM 403. Then, when the process of step S302-3-1-2-5-32-6 ends, the process proceeds to step S302-3-1-2-5-32-7.

(Step S302-3-1-2-5-32-7)
In step S302-3-1-2-5-32-7, the sub CPU 401 performs a process of setting “0” to the value of the scenario counter. Specifically, the sub CPU 401 performs a process of setting “0” to the value of the scenario counter provided in the sub RAM 403. Then, when the process of step S302-3-1-2-5-32-7 ends, the process proceeds to step S302-3-1-2-5-32-8.

(Step S302-3-1-2-5-32-8)
In step S302-3-1-2-5-32-8, the sub CPU 401 performs processing for changing the state managed by the sub control board 400 to the ART state in the next game. Specifically, the sub CPU 401 performs processing for setting the ART state in the state storage area provided in the sub RAM 403 so that the state managed by the sub control board 400 becomes the ART state in the next game. . Then, when the process of step S302-3-1-2-5-32-8 ends, the process proceeds to step S302-3-1-2-5-32-9.

(Step S302-3-1-2-5-32-9)
In step S302-3-1-2-5-32-9, the sub CPU 401 performs a level lottery process. Specifically, the sub CPU 401 performs a process of determining the ART level by lottery based on an ART level lottery table (first set) provided in the sub ROM 402 (see FIG. 67E). Further, the sub CPU 401 performs processing for storing information related to the ART level determined by lottery in an ART level storage area provided in the sub RAM 403. Then, when the process of step S302-3-1-2-5-32-9 ends, the process proceeds to step S302-3-1-2-5-32-10.

(Step S302-3-1-2-5-32-10)
In step S302-3-1-2-5-32-10, the sub CPU 401 performs ART state return processing. Specifically, the sub CPU 401 performs a process of setting “40” to the value of the ART state game number counter provided in the sub RAM 403. When the process of step S302-3-1-2-5-32-10 ends, the fourth fall standby state processing subroutine ends, and step S302-3-1-2 of the conditional device command reception process ends. The process is shifted to -6.

  In the present embodiment, when the sub CPU 401 has not decided to acquire the ART point by the fourth falling standby state pull-out lottery process in step S302-3-1-2-5-3-1. (Step S302-3-1-2-5-3-2 = No), the fourth fall standby state processing subroutine is terminated, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, when it is not determined to acquire the ART point by the fourth falling standby state pull-out lottery process in step S302-3-1-2-5-3-1, (step S302-3-1). -2-5-32-2 = No), it may be determined whether or not to acquire points for normal state. In this case, the sub CPU 401 selects the normal state first point acquisition lottery table (see FIG. 49A) provided in the sub ROM 402 and the win included in the condition device command received from the main control board 300. Based on the information relating to the combination, a process for determining the normal state points to be given to the player by lottery is performed, and if it is decided to give the normal state points to the player, A process of adding to the normal state point storage area provided in the RAM 403 and storing it is performed. As a result, even if it is not determined to acquire the ART point in the fourth fall waiting state pull-out lottery process, the normal state point may be acquired. Can be reduced.

(Process when receiving display judgment command)
Next, based on FIG. 154, a display determination command reception process performed by the process of step S302-3-1-1 in FIG. 116 will be described. FIG. 154 is a diagram showing a subroutine of processing at the time of display determination command reception.

(Step S302-3-1-4-1)
In step S <b> 302-3-4-1, the sub CPU 401 performs a third post-stop state transition process. Specifically, the sub CPU 401 performs processing according to the state managed by the sub control board 400 based on the value of the state storage area provided in the sub RAM 403. Here, in the third post-stop state transition process in step S302-3-1-4-1, a subroutine corresponding to the value of the state storage area provided in the sub-RAM 403 is provided (FIGS. 155 to 155). 165). Then, when the process of step S302-3-4-1-1 is completed, the subroutine of the display determination command reception process is terminated, and the process proceeds to step S302-3-8-1 of the command-specific process.

(Process for Bonus preparation status when receiving display judgment command)
Next, based on FIG. 155, the display determination command executed when the state managed by the sub-control board 400 is the Bonus preparation state in the state-by-state transition processing of Step S302-3-4-1-4-1 of FIG. The processing for the Bonus preparation state at the time of reception will be described. FIG. 155 is a diagram showing a subroutine of processing for the Bonus preparation state at the time of receiving a display determination command.

(Step S302-3-4-1-1-1)
In step S <b> 302-3-4-1-1-1, the sub CPU 401 performs a process of determining whether or not a Bonus replay is displayed. Specifically, the sub CPU 401 determines whether or not the information related to the combination of symbols displayed on the active line included in the display determination command received from the main control board 300 is “Bonus Replay”. Process. If it is determined that the Bonus replay has been displayed (step S302-3-4-1-1-1 = Yes), the process proceeds to step S302-3-4-1-1-2. When it is determined that the Bonus replay is not displayed (Step S302-3-4-1-1-1 = No), the subroutine for the Bonus preparation state process at the time of receiving the display determination command is terminated. Then, the process proceeds to step S302-3-1-8 of the command-specific process.

(Step S302-3-4-1-1-1-2)
In step S <b> 302-3-4-1-1-2, the sub CPU 401 performs processing for determining whether or not the first Bonus is waiting. Specifically, the sub CPU 401 performs processing for determining whether or not the first Bonus standby is performed based on the value stored in the Bonus standby information storage area provided in the sub RAM 403. If it is determined that the first Bonus is waiting (step S302-3-4-1-1-2 = Yes), the process proceeds to step S302-3-4-1-1-1-3. If it is determined that the first Bonus is not waiting (step S302-3-4-1-1-1-2 = No), step S302-3-4-1-1-1-4 is performed. The process is transferred to.

(Step S302-3-4-1-1-1-3)
In step S <b> 302-3-4-1-1-3, the sub CPU 401 performs a first bonus state operation process. Specifically, the sub CPU 401 sets the first bonus state in the state storage area provided in the sub RAM 403 and sets “40” as the value of the first bonus state game number counter provided in the sub RAM 403. Perform the process. Further, the sub CPU 401 determines the first Bonus state point conversion table (see FIG. 81A) provided in the sub ROM 402 and the value of the normal state point storage area provided in the sub RAM 403. In addition to performing processing for acquiring 1 Bonus state points, the first Bonus state points acquired as a result of the lottery are added to the first Bonus state point storage area provided in the sub-RAM 403 and stored. Process. When the process of step S302-3-4-1-1-1-3 ends, the subroutine for the Bonus preparation state process at the time of display determination command reception ends, and step S302-3-1-1-8 of the command-by-command process ends. The process is transferred to.

(Step S302-3-4-1-1-1-4)
In step S <b> 302-3-4-1-1-4, the sub CPU 401 performs processing for determining whether or not the second Bonus is waiting. Specifically, the sub CPU 401 performs a process of determining whether or not the second Bonus standby is based on the value stored in the Bonus standby information storage area provided in the sub RAM 403. If it is determined that the second Bonus is waiting (step S302-3-4-1-1-1-4 = Yes), the process proceeds to step S302-3-4-1-1-1-5. If it is determined that the second Bonus is not waiting (step S302-3-4-1-1-1-4 = No), step S302-3-4-1-1-1-6 is performed. The process is transferred to.

(Step S302-3-4-1-1-1-5)
In step S <b> 302-3-4-1-1-5, the sub CPU 401 performs a second Bonus state operation process. Specifically, the sub CPU 401 sets the second bonus state in the state storage area provided in the sub RAM 403 and sets “35” as the value of the second bonus state game number counter provided in the sub RAM 403. Perform the process. In addition, the sub CPU 401 determines the second Bonus state point conversion table (see FIG. 82A) provided in the sub ROM 402 and the value of the normal state point storage area provided in the sub RAM 403. A lottery for acquiring 2 Bonus state points is performed, and the second Bonus state points acquired as a result of the lottery are added to the second Bonus state point storage area provided in the sub RAM 403 and stored. Process. When the process of step S302-3-4-1-1-1-5 is completed, the subroutine for the Bonus preparation state process at the time of display determination command reception is terminated, and step S302-3-1-8 of the command-specific process is completed. The process is transferred to.

(Step S302-3-4-1-1-1-6)
In step S <b> 302-3-4-1-1-6, the sub CPU 401 performs a third Bonus state operation process. Specifically, the sub CPU 401 sets the third Bonus state in the state storage area provided in the sub RAM 403, and the third Bonus state game number determination table (see FIG. 83) provided in the sub ROM 402. Based on this, the number of games that can be played in the third Bonus state is determined by lottery, and the number of games determined by the lottery is set in the third Bonus state game number counter provided in the sub RAM 403. Do. When the process of step S302-3-4-1-1-1-6 is completed, the subroutine for the Bonus preparation state process at the time of display determination command reception is terminated, and step S302-3-1-8 of the command-specific process is completed. The process is transferred to.

  In the present embodiment, the sub CPU 401 stores the value stored in the normal state point storage area provided in the sub RAM 403 as it is in the normal state point storage area when shifting to the third Bonus state. However, it is not limited to this. For example, the sub CPU 401 determines the value stored in the normal state point storage area provided in the sub RAM 403 as ART in the third Bonus state operation processing in step S302-3-4-1-1-1-6. It is good also as performing the process converted into a point.

  In this case, the sub CPU 401 stores, in the sub ROM 402, a table for determining an ART point to be given to the player according to the normal state points provided in the sub RAM 403, and based on the table. A lottery may be performed. Thereby, the player can raise the expected value of the number of games that can be played in the ART state. In addition, since the ART points to be given are uniquely determined, the game can be performed while hoping for more ART points to be given, so that the interest in the game is improved.

  Note that the table as described above may not be stored in the sub ROM 402, and the ART point to be given to the player may be uniquely determined according to the normal state point. In this case, it is not necessary to draw the ART points to be given to the player based on the points for the normal state, so that the capacity of the sub ROM 402 can be reduced.

(Processing for the first fall standby state when a display judgment command is received)
Next, based on FIG. 156, the display performed when the state managed by the sub-control board 400 is in the first fall standby state in the state-by-state transition process of step S302-3-4-1 in FIG. The process for the first fall standby state at the time of receiving the determination command will be described. FIG. 156 is a diagram showing a subroutine of processing for the first fall standby state when a display determination command is received.

(Step S302-3-4-1-2-1)
In step S302-3-4-1-2-1-1, the sub CPU 401 performs processing for determining whether or not a blank is displayed. Specifically, the sub CPU 401 determines whether or not the information related to the combination of symbols displayed on the active line included in the display determination command received from the main control board 300 is “blank”. I do. If it is determined that a blank is displayed (step S302-3-4-1-2-1 = Yes), the process proceeds to step S302-3-4-1-1-2-2. If it is determined that no blank is displayed (step S302-3-4-1-2-1 = No), the first fall standby state processing subroutine upon reception of the display determination command is terminated. Then, the process proceeds to step S302-3-1-8 of the command-specific process.

(Step S302-3-4-1-1-2-2)
In step S302-3-4-1-1-2-2, the sub CPU 401 performs processing for setting the state managed by the sub control board 400 to the normal state in the next game. Specifically, the sub CPU 401 performs processing for setting the normal state in the state storage area provided in the sub RAM 403 so that the state managed by the sub control board 400 becomes the normal state in the next game. . When the process of step S302-3-4-1-1-2-2 is completed, the subroutine for the first fall standby state process upon reception of the display determination command is terminated, and step S302-3-1 of the command-specific process is completed. The process is shifted to -8.

(Process for ART ready state when receiving display judgment command)
Next, based on FIG. 157, a display determination command that is executed when the state managed by the sub-control board 400 is the ART ready state in the state-by-state transition processing in step S302-3-1-4-1 in FIG. The process for the ART preparation state at the time of reception will be described. FIG. 157 is a diagram showing a subroutine for the ART preparation state processing when a display determination command is received.

(Step S302-3-4-1-3-1)
In step S <b> 302-3-4-1-3-1, the sub CPU 401 performs processing for determining whether or not an ART replay is displayed. Specifically, the sub CPU 401 determines whether or not the information related to the combination of symbols displayed on the effective line included in the display determination command received from the main control board 300 is “ART replay”. Process. If it is determined that the ART replay has been displayed (step S302-3-4-1-3-1 = Yes), the process proceeds to step S302-3-4-1-4-1-2. When it is determined that the ART replay is not displayed (step S302-3-4-1-3-1 = No), the subroutine for the ART preparation state process upon reception of the display determination command is terminated. Then, the process proceeds to step S302-3-1-8 of the command-specific process.

(Step S302-3-1-4-1-3-2)
In step S302-3-1-4-1-3-2, the sub CPU 401 performs an ART state transition process. Specifically, when the value of the second added state stock counter provided in the sub RAM 403 is equal to or greater than “1”, the sub CPU 401 determines the state managed by the sub control board 400 in the next game. For example, processing for setting an additional preparation state in a state storage area provided in the sub-RAM 403 is performed so as to be in an additional preparation state. In addition, when the value of the second added state stock counter provided in the sub RAM 403 is “0”, in the next game, the state managed by the sub control board 400 is changed to the ART state. Processing for setting the ART state in the state storage area provided in the RAM 403 is performed. Then, when the process of step S302-3-4-1-1-3 is completed, the subroutine of the ART ready state process at the time of display determination command reception is terminated, and step S302-3-8-1-8 of the command-specific process is completed. The process is transferred to.

(Additional preparation status processing when display judgment command is received)
Next, based on FIG. 158, the display determination command that is executed when the state managed by the sub-control board 400 is the addition preparation state in the state-by-state transition processing in step S302-3-1-4-1 in FIG. A description will be given of the extra preparation state process at the time of reception. FIG. 158 is a diagram showing a subroutine of the processing for adding preparation state when a display determination command is received.

(Step S302-3-1-4-1-4-1)
In step S302-3-4-1-4-1, the sub CPU 401 performs processing for determining whether or not a special replay is displayed. Specifically, the sub CPU 401 determines whether or not the information related to the symbol combination displayed on the effective line included in the display determination command received from the main control board 300 is “special replay”. Process. If it is determined that the special replay is displayed (step S302-3-1-4-1-4-1 = Yes), the process proceeds to step S302-3-1-4-1-4-2. If it is determined that the special replay is not displayed (step S302-3-4-1-4-1 = No), the subroutine for the extra preparation state process upon reception of the display determination command is terminated. Then, the process proceeds to step S302-3-1-8 of the command-specific process.

(Step S302-3-1-4-1-4-2)
In step S302-3-1-4-1-4-2, the sub CPU 401 performs a second added state transition process. Specifically, the sub CPU 401 performs processing for turning on the second added state guarantee flag in the second added state guarantee flag storage area provided in the sub RAM 403, or after the second added state provided in the sub RAM 403. In the process of turning on the special ceiling flag after the second added state of the special ceiling flag storage area, the process of clearing the second added state stock flag storage area, and the state managed by the sub control board 400 in the next game are the second. A process of setting the second added state in the state storage area provided in the sub RAM 403 is performed so as to be in the added state. Then, when the processing of step S302-3-4-1-4-2 is completed, the subroutine for the additional preparation state processing at the time of display determination command reception is terminated, and step S302-3-8-1-8 of the command-specific processing is completed. The process is transferred to.

(Processing for the second fall standby state when receiving the display judgment command)
Next, based on FIG. 159, the display performed when the state managed by the sub-control board 400 is the second fall standby state in the state-by-state transition processing of step S302-3-4-1-1 of FIG. The process for the second fall standby state when the determination command is received will be described. FIG. 159 is a diagram showing a subroutine of the second fall standby state process when a display determination command is received.

(Step S302-3-1-4-1-5-1)
In step S <b> 302-3-4-1-5-1, the sub CPU 401 performs processing for determining whether or not the ART replay is displayed. Specifically, the sub CPU 401 determines whether or not the information related to the combination of symbols displayed on the effective line included in the display determination command received from the main control board 300 is “ART replay”. Process. If it is determined that the ART replay has been displayed (step S302-3-4-1-5-1 = Yes), the process proceeds to step S302-3-4-1-5-2. If it is determined that the ART replay is not displayed (step S302-3-4-1-5-1 = No), a subroutine for the second fall standby state process upon reception of the display determination command is performed. , And the process proceeds to step S302-3-8-1 of the command-specific process.

(Step S302-3-4-1-1-5-2)
In step S302-3-1-1-5-2, the sub CPU 401 performs an ART state transition process. Specifically, when the value of the second added state stock counter provided in the sub RAM 403 is equal to or greater than “1”, the sub CPU 401 determines the state managed by the sub control board 400 in the next game. For example, processing for setting an additional preparation state in a state storage area provided in the sub-RAM 403 is performed so as to be in an additional preparation state. In addition, when the value of the second added state stock counter provided in the sub RAM 403 is “0”, in the next game, the state managed by the sub control board 400 is changed to the ART state. Processing for setting the ART state in the state storage area provided in the RAM 403 is performed. When the process of step S302-3-4-1-5-2 is completed, the subroutine of the second fall standby state process upon reception of the display determination command is terminated, and step S302-3-1 of the command-specific process is completed. The process is shifted to -8.

(Process for RUSH ready state when display judgment command is received)
Next, based on FIG. 160, a display determination command executed when the state managed by the sub-control board 400 is the RUSH preparation state in the state-by-state transition processing in step S302-3-4-1 of FIG. The process for the RUSH preparation state at the time of reception will be described. FIG. 160 is a diagram showing a subroutine for RUSH preparation state processing when a display determination command is received.

(Step S302-3-1-4-1-6-1)
In step S <b> 302-3-4-1-6-1, the sub CPU 401 performs processing for determining whether or not a RUSH replay is displayed. Specifically, the sub CPU 401 determines whether or not the information related to the combination of symbols displayed on the effective line included in the display determination command received from the main control board 300 is “RUSH replay”. Process. If it is determined that the RUSH replay has been displayed (step S302-3-1-4-1-6-1 = Yes), the process proceeds to step S302-3-1-4-1-6-2. If it is determined that the RUSH replay is not displayed (step S302-3-4-1-6-1 = No), the subroutine for the RUSH preparation state process upon reception of the display determination command is terminated. Then, the process proceeds to step S302-3-1-8 of the command-specific process.

(Step S302-3-1-4-1-6-2)
In step S <b> 302-3-4-1-6-2, the sub CPU 401 performs RUSH state transition processing. Specifically, the sub CPU 401 performs a RUSH state transition process. Specifically, when the value of the first RUSH state stock counter provided in the sub RAM 403 is “0”, the sub CPU 401 determines that the state managed by the sub control board 400 is the second RUSH in the next game. Processing to set the second RUSH state in the state storage area provided in the sub-RAM 403 so as to become a state, processing to set “10” to the value of the second RUSH state game number counter provided in the sub-RAM 403, A process of subtracting “1” from the value of the second RUSH state stock counter provided in the sub RAM 403 is performed. On the other hand, when the value of the first RUSH state stock counter provided in the sub-RAM 403 is not “0”, the sub-control board 400 is controlled so that the state managed by the sub-control board 400 becomes the first RUSH state in the next game. A process of setting the first RUSH state in the state storage area provided in the RAM 403, a process of setting “10” to the value of the first RUSH state game number counter provided in the sub RAM 403, and the sub RAM 403 are provided. A process of subtracting “1” from the value of the first RUSH state stock counter is performed. When the process of step S302-3-4-1-1-6-2 ends, the subroutine for the RUSH preparation state process at the time of display determination command reception ends, and step S302-3-8-1 of the command-by-command process ends. The process is transferred to.

(Processing for the first RUSH state when a display determination command is received)
Next, based on FIG. 161, a display determination command that is executed when the state managed by the sub-control board 400 is the first RUSH state in the state-by-state transition processing in step S302-3-1-1 of FIG. The process for the first RUSH state at the time of reception will be described. FIG. 161 is a diagram showing a subroutine for the first RUSH state process when a display determination command is received.

(Step S302-3-1-4-1-7-1)
In step S <b> 302-3-4-1-7-1, the sub CPU 401 performs a process of determining whether or not the spinning effect RE <b> 5 is reserved. Specifically, the sub CPU 401 performs a process of determining whether or not the condition device command received from the main control board 300 includes information indicating that the rotation effect RE5 is reserved. If it is determined that the reeling effect RE5 is reserved (step S302-3-1-4-1-7-1 = Yes), step S302-3-1-4-1-7- If the process shifts to 2 and it is determined that the rotation effect RE5 is not reserved (step S302-3-1-4-1-6-1 = No), the first RUSH state is received when the display determination command is received. The processing process subroutine is terminated, and the process proceeds to step S302-3-8-1 of the command-specific process.

(Step S302-3-1-4-1-7-2)
In step S <b> 302-3-4-1-7-2, the sub CPU 401 performs processing for determining whether or not the first stop is the right reel. Specifically, the sub CPU 401 performs processing for determining whether or not the first stop is the right stop button 13 based on the reel stop command received from the main control board 300. And when it determines with a 1st stop being a right reel (step S302-3-1-4-1-7-2 = Yes), step S302-3-1-4-1-7-3. If it is determined that the first stop is not the right reel (step S302-3-1-4-1-7-2 = No), the process for the first RUSH state upon reception of the display determination command is performed. Is terminated, and the processing shifts to step S302-3-8-1 of the command-by-command processing.

(Step S302-3-1-4-1-7-3)
In step S302-3-1-4-1-7-3, the sub CPU 401 performs processing during the turning effect RE5, which will be described in detail later with reference to FIG. In this process, the sub CPU 401 performs a lottery to determine whether or not to give an ART point, and when the lottery is won, the winning value is added to the value of the ART point storage area provided in the sub RAM 403. To store the data. When the process of step S302-3-4-1-1-7-3 ends, the subroutine for the first RUSH state process when the display determination command is received ends, and step S302-3-1-8 of the command-by-command process ends. The process is transferred to.

(Processing for the second RUSH state when a display determination command is received)
Next, based on FIG. 162, a display determination command that is executed when the state managed by the sub-control board 400 is the second RUSH state in the state-by-state transition processing in step S302-3-1-4-1 in FIG. The process for the second RUSH state at the time of reception will be described. FIG. 162 is a diagram showing a subroutine for the second RUSH state process when a display determination command is received.

(Step S302-3-1-4-1-8-1)
In step S <b> 302-3-4-1-8-1, the sub CPU 401 performs a process for determining whether or not the spinning effect RE <b> 5 is reserved. Specifically, the sub CPU 401 performs a process of determining whether or not the condition device command received from the main control board 300 includes information indicating that the rotation effect RE5 is reserved. If it is determined that the spinning effect RE5 is reserved (step S302-3-4-1-8-1 = Yes), step S302-3-1-4-1-8- If the process shifts to 2 and it is determined that the rotation effect RE5 is not reserved (step S302-3-1-4-1-8-1 = No), the second RUSH state is received when the display determination command is received. The processing process subroutine is terminated, and the process proceeds to step S302-3-8-1 of the command-specific process.

(Step S302-3-1-4-1-8-2)
In step S <b> 302-3-4-1-8-2, the sub CPU 401 performs processing for determining whether or not the first stop is the right reel. Specifically, the sub CPU 401 performs processing for determining whether or not the first stop is the right stop button 13 based on the reel stop command received from the main control board 300. And when it determines with a 1st stop being a right reel (step S302-3-1-4-1-8-2 = Yes), step S302-3-1-4-1-8-3. If it is determined that the first stop is not the right reel (step S302-3-1-4-1-8-2 = No), the process for the second RUSH state upon reception of the display determination command Is terminated, and the processing shifts to step S302-3-8-1 of the command-by-command processing.

(Step S302-3-1-4-1-8-3)
In step S302-3-1-4-1-8-3, the sub CPU 401 performs processing during the turning effect RE5, which will be described in detail later with reference to FIG. In this process, the sub CPU 401 performs a lottery to determine whether or not to give an ART point, and when the lottery is won, the winning value is added to the value of the ART point storage area provided in the sub RAM 403. To store the data. Then, when the process of step S302-3-1-4-1-8-3 ends, the subroutine for the second RUSH state process at the time of display determination command reception ends, and step S302-3-1-8 of the command-specific process The process is transferred to.

(Process for 3rd Bonus state when receiving display judgment command)
Next, based on FIG. 163, a display determination command that is executed when the state managed by the sub-control board 400 is the third Bonus state in the state-by-state transition process of Step S302-3-4-1 in FIG. The process for the third Bonus state at the time of reception will be described. FIG. 163 is a diagram showing a subroutine of the third Bonus state process when a display determination command is received.

(Step S302-3-4-1-9-1)
In step S <b> 302-3-4-1-9-1, the sub CPU 401 performs processing for determining whether or not the Bonus replay is displayed. Specifically, the sub CPU 401 determines whether or not the information related to the combination of symbols displayed on the active line included in the display determination command received from the main control board 300 is “Bonus Replay”. Process. If it is determined that the Bonus replay has been displayed (step S302-3-4-1-1-9-1 = Yes), the process proceeds to step S302-3-4-1-1-9-2. If it is determined that the Bonus replay is not displayed (step S302-3-4-1-9-1 = No), the subroutine for the third Bonus state process is terminated when the display determination command is received. Then, the process proceeds to step S302-3-1-8 of the command-specific process.

(Step S302-3-1-4-1-9-2)
In step S <b> 302-3-4-1-9-2, the sub CPU 401 performs processing for turning off the third RT gaming state transition flag during the third Bonus state. Specifically, the sub CPU 401 performs a process of turning off the third RT gaming state transition flag during the third Bonus state in the third RT gaming state transition flag storage area provided in the sub RAM 403. When the process of step S302-3-4-1-1-9-2 is completed, the subroutine for the third Bonus state process when the display determination command is received is terminated, and step S302-3-8-1-8 of the command-specific process is completed. The process is transferred to.

(Processing for the third fall standby state when a display judgment command is received)
Next, based on FIG. 164, the display performed when the state managed by the sub-control board 400 is in the third fall standby state in the state-by-state transition processing of step S302-3-4-1-1 of FIG. The process for the third fall standby state at the time of receiving the determination command will be described. FIG. 164 is a diagram showing a subroutine of the third fall standby state process when a display determination command is received.

(Step S302-3-1-4-1-10-1)
In step S302-3-4-1-1-10-1, the sub CPU 401 performs a process of determining whether or not the spinning effect RE5 is reserved. Specifically, the sub CPU 401 performs a process of determining whether or not the condition device command received from the main control board 300 includes information indicating that the rotation effect RE5 is reserved. If it is determined that the spinning effect RE5 is reserved (step S302-3-1-4-1-10-1 = Yes), step S302-3-1-4-1-10-. If the processing is shifted to 2 and it is determined that the rotation effect RE5 is not reserved (step S302-3-1-4-1-10-1 = No), step S302-3-1-4 The process is shifted to -1-10-4.

(Step S302-3-1-4-1-10-2)
In step S <b> 302-3-4-1-10-2, the sub CPU 401 performs processing for determining whether or not the first stop is the right reel. Specifically, the sub CPU 401 performs processing for determining whether or not the first stop is the right stop button 13 based on the reel stop command received from the main control board 300. And when it determines with a 1st stop being a right reel (step S302-3-1-4-1-10-2 = Yes), step S302-3-1-4-1-10-3. When it is determined that the first stop is not the right reel (step S302-3-1-4-1-10-2 = No), the third fall standby state upon reception of the display determination command The processing process subroutine is terminated, and the process proceeds to step S302-3-8-1 of the command-specific process.

(Step S302-3-1-4-1-10-3)
In step S302-3-1-4-1-10-3, the sub CPU 401 performs processing during the turning effect RE5 which will be described in detail later with reference to FIG. In this process, the sub CPU 401 performs a lottery to determine whether or not to give an ART point, and when the lottery is won, the winning value is added to the value of the ART point storage area provided in the sub RAM 403. To store the data. When the process of step S302-3-4-1-1-10-3 is completed, the subroutine for the third fall standby state process upon reception of the display determination command is terminated, and step S302-3-1 of the command-specific process is completed. The process is shifted to -8.

(Step S302-3-1-4-1-10-4)
In step S <b> 302-3-4-1-10-4, the sub CPU 401 performs processing for determining whether or not an ART replay is displayed. Specifically, the sub CPU 401 determines whether or not the information related to the combination of symbols displayed on the effective line included in the display determination command received from the main control board 300 is “ART replay”. Process. If it is determined that the ART replay has been displayed (step S302-3-1-4-1-10-4 = Yes), the process proceeds to step S302-3-1-4-1-10-5. When it is determined that the ART replay is not displayed (step S302-3-4-1-1-10-4 = No), the third fall standby state processing subroutine upon reception of the display determination command , And the process proceeds to step S302-3-8-1 of the command-specific process.

(Step S302-3-1-4-1-10-5)
In step S302-3-1-4-1-10-5, the sub CPU 401 performs RUSH state end processing. Specifically, the sub CPU 401 performs processing for turning off the RUSH winning flag in the RUSH winning flag storage area provided in the sub RAM 403. Further, when the value of the second added state stock counter provided in the sub RAM 403 is “1” or more, the sub CPU 401 determines that the state managed by the sub control board 400 in the next game is the added preparation state. In such a manner, processing for setting an additional preparation state on the state storage area provided in the sub-RAM 403 is performed. In addition, when the value of the second added state stock counter provided in the sub RAM 403 is “0”, in the next game, the state managed by the sub control board 400 is changed to the ART state. Processing for setting the ART state in the state storage area provided in the RAM 403 is performed. When the process of step S302-3-1-4-1-10-5 is completed, the subroutine for the third fall standby state process upon reception of the display determination command is terminated, and step S302-3-1 of the command-specific process is completed. The process is shifted to -8.

(Process for 4th fall waiting state when display judgment command is received)
Next, based on FIG. 165, the display performed when the state managed by the sub-control board 400 is the fourth fall standby state in the state-by-state transition process of step S302-3-1-4-1 in FIG. The process for the fourth fall standby state at the time of receiving the determination command will be described. FIG. 165 is a diagram showing a subroutine of the fourth fall standby state process when a display determination command is received.

(Step S302-3-4-1-1-11-1)
In step S <b> 302-3-4-1-11-1, the sub CPU 401 performs processing for determining whether or not a blank is displayed. Specifically, the sub CPU 401 determines whether or not the information related to the combination of symbols displayed on the active line included in the display determination command received from the main control board 300 is “blank”. I do. And when it determines with the blank being displayed (step S302-3-4-1-1-11-1 = Yes), it transfers a process to step S302-3-4-1-1-11-2. If it is determined that no blank is displayed (step S302-3-4-1-1-11-1 = No), the fourth fall standby state processing subroutine upon reception of the display determination command is terminated. Then, the process proceeds to step S302-3-1-8 of the command-specific process.

(Step S302-3-4-1-1-11-2)
In step S302-3-4-1-1-11-2, the sub CPU 401 performs processing for setting the state managed by the sub control board 400 to the normal state in the next game. Specifically, the sub CPU 401 performs processing for setting the normal state in the state storage area provided in the sub RAM 403 so that the state managed by the sub control board 400 becomes the normal state in the next game. . When the process of step S302-3-4-1-1-11-2 is completed, the subroutine for the first fall standby state process at the time of display determination command reception is terminated, and step S302-3-1 of the command-specific process is completed. The process is shifted to -8.

(Processing during rotation effect RE5)
Next, based on FIG. 166, the process during the turning effect RE5 performed by the process of step S302-3-1-4-1-7-3 in FIG. 161 will be described. FIG. 166 is a diagram showing a subroutine of processing during the spinning cylinder effect RE5.

(Step S302-3-1-4-1-7-3-1)
In step S302-3-1-4-1-7-3-1, the sub CPU 401 performs a continuation rate determination process. Specifically, the sub CPU 401 performs processing for determining a continuation rate based on a continuation rate lottery table for right first stop (not shown) provided in the sub ROM 402. Further, the sub CPU 401 performs processing for storing information relating to the determined continuation rate in a continuation rate storage area provided in the sub RAM 403. Then, when the process of step S302-3-1-4-1-7-3-1 ends, the process proceeds to step S302-3-1-4-1-7-3-2.

(Step S302-3-4-1-1-7-3-2)
In step S302-3-1-4-1-7-3-2, the sub CPU 401 performs a guaranteed number of times setting process. Specifically, the sub CPU 401 performs a process of setting “4” in the guaranteed number storage area provided in the sub RAM 403. Then, when the process of step S302-3-1-4-1-7-3-2 ends, the process proceeds to step S302-3-1-4-1-7-3-3.

(Step S302-3-1-4-1-7-3-3)
In step S <b> 302-3-4-1-7-3-3, the sub CPU 401 performs a process of subtracting “1” from the value stored in the guaranteed number storage area. Specifically, the sub CPU 401 performs a process of subtracting “1” from the value stored in the guaranteed number storage area provided in the sub RAM 403. And if the process of step S302-3-1-4-1-7-3-3 is complete | finished, a process will be transfered to step S302-3-1-4-1-7-3-4.

(Step S302-3-4-1-1-7-3-4)
In step S302-3-1-4-1-7-3-4, the sub CPU 401 performs a continuous lottery process. Specifically, the sub CPU 401 extracts a soft random number and assigns an ART point based on the extracted soft random number and information stored in the continuation rate storage area provided in the sub RAM 403. The process of determining whether or not to continue is determined by lottery. Further, the sub CPU 401 performs a process of storing the lottery result in a continuous information storage area provided in the sub RAM 403. Then, when the process of step S302-3-1-4-1-7-3-4 ends, the process proceeds to step S302-3-1-4-1-7-3-5.

(Step S302-3-1-4-1-7-3-5)
In step S302-3-1-4-1-7-3-5, the sub CPU 401 performs processing for determining whether or not to continue is determined. Specifically, the sub CPU 401 determines whether or not to continue to give ART points as a result of the continuous lottery process in step S302-3-1-4-1-7-3-4. The process which determines is performed. If it is determined that it is determined to continue (step S302-3-4-1-1-7-5 = Yes), step S302-3-1-4-1-7-3 is performed. When it is determined that the process is shifted to -8 and it is not determined to continue (step S302-3-1-4-1-7-3-5 = No), step S302-3-1 The process shifts to −4-1-7-3-6.

(Step S302-3-1-4-1-7-3-6)
In step S <b> 302-3-4-1-7-3-6, the sub CPU 401 performs a process of determining whether or not the value of the guaranteed number storage area is “1” or more. Specifically, the sub CPU 401 performs a process of determining whether or not the value of the guaranteed number storage area provided in the sub RAM 403 is “1” or more. Then, when it is determined that the value of the guaranteed number storage area is “1” or more (step S302-3-1-4-1-7-3-6 = Yes), step S302-3-1- When the process proceeds to 4-1-7-3-7 and it is determined that the value of the guaranteed number storage area is not “1” or more (step S302-3-4-1-1-7-3). −6 = No), the subroutine of the process during the spinning effect RE5 is terminated, and the process proceeds to step S302-3-1-8 of the command-specific process.

(Step S302-3-1-4-1-7-3-7)
In step S302-3-4-1-1-7-3-7, the sub CPU 401 performs a lottery result rewriting process. Specifically, the sub CPU 401 performs a process of rewriting the information indicating that the information is not continued stored in the continuous information storage area provided in the sub RAM 403 into information indicating that the information is to be continued. Then, when the process of step S302-3-1-4-1-7-3-7 ends, the process proceeds to step S302-3-1-4-1-7-3-8.

(Step S302-3-1-4-1-7-3-8)
In step S302-3-1-4-1-7-3-8, the sub CPU 401 performs an ART point addition process. Specifically, the sub CPU 401 refers to the continuation column of the point acquisition lottery table for the rotation effect RE 5 provided in the sub ROM 402 (see FIG. 79), and draws ART points to be given to the player. The process determined by is performed. Further, the sub CPU 401 performs processing for adding the result of the lottery and storing it in the ART point storage area provided in the sub RAM 403. Then, when the process of step S302-3-1-4-1-7-3-8 ends, the process proceeds to step S302-3-1-4-1-7-3-3.

  Here, the process during the spinning effect RE5 is provided in the main RAM 303 when the player operates the right stop button 13 for the first time when the main control board 300 determines to execute the spinning effect RE5. A process for clearing the rotatory effect information storage area is performed. For this reason, if the player accidentally operates the right stop button 13 for the first time, there is a problem that the spinning effect RE5 is not executed even though the spinning effect RE5 is determined. On the other hand, in the process of turning effect RE5, when the player accidentally operates the right stop button 13 for the first time, the turning effect RE5 by the main control board 300 is not executed, but the sub-control This is a process of giving an ART point equivalent to the case where the turning effect RE5 is executed by the board 400 to the player. Therefore, by executing the process during the spinning effect RE5, it is possible to rescue a player who has accidentally operated the right stop button 13 for the first time.

  In the present embodiment, the same ART point is given to the player when the right stop button 13 is accidentally operated first and when the left stop button 11 or middle stop button 12 is operated first. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and if the player who has accidentally operated the right stop button 13 for the first time can be rescued, the ART points to be given to the player May not be equivalent. Specifically, provided in the main ROM 302 when the left stop button 11 or the middle stop button 12 is operated for the first time in the continuation rate determination process in step S302-3-1-4-1-7-3-1. The continuation rate may be determined with reference to an unfavorable table as compared to the continuation rate determination table (see FIG. 32). Further, in the guaranteed number setting process in step S302-3-4-1-1-7-3-2, the set guaranteed number may be a value less than “4”. In addition, in the ART point addition process in step S302-3-1-4-1-7-3-8, the game is referred to with reference to a table that is more disadvantageous than the point acquisition lottery table for the turning effect RE5 (see FIG. 79). You may give ART point to give to a person.

(Processing when receiving the spinning effect RE5 command)
Next, based on FIG. 167, the process at the time of receiving the rotation effect RE5 command performed by the process of step S302-3-6-1 in FIG. 116 will be described. FIG. 167 is a diagram showing a subroutine of processing at the time of receiving the spinning effect RE5 command.

(Step S302-3-1-6-1)
In step S <b> 302-3-1-1, the sub CPU 401 performs a process of determining whether or not it is continuation or restoration. Specifically, the sub CPU 401 includes, in the conditional device command received from the main control board 300, information indicating that the rotation effect RE5 is to be continued or information indicating that the rotation effect RE5 is to be continued by the resurrection. The process which determines is performed. If it is determined that the operation is to be continued or revived (step S302-3-6-1-Yes), the process proceeds to step S302-3-6-1-6-2, and is continued or revived. If it is determined that this is not the case (step S302-3-1-6-1 = No), the subroutine for receiving the spinning effect RE5 command is terminated, and step S302-3-1-8 of the command-by-command processing is ended. The process is transferred to.

(Step S302-3-1-1-6-2)
In step S302-3-1-1-6-2, the sub CPU 401 performs an ART point addition process. Specifically, the sub CPU 401 performs a process of determining, by lottery, an ART point to be given to the player based on the point acquisition lottery table for the spinning effect RE5 provided in the sub ROM 402 (see FIG. 79). Do. Further, the sub CPU 401 performs processing for adding the result of the lottery and storing it in the ART point storage area provided in the sub RAM 403. Then, when the process of step S302-3-6-1-6-2 is completed, the subroutine for the spinning effect RE5 command reception process is terminated, and the process proceeds to step S302-3-8-1-8 of the command-specific process.

(Timing chart showing signal output from external concentration terminal board)
Next, based on FIG. 168, the timing chart showing the output of the signal of the external concentration terminal board will be described.

  FIG. 168 illustrates the timing at which the external concentrated terminal board 47 connected to the main control board 300 outputs a signal to the outside of the gaming machine 1. Here, the external concentration terminal board 47 is provided with pins from the first pin to the eighth pin. Specifically, the first pin is a pin for outputting information relating to the number of inserted medals to the outside of the gaming machine 1, and the second pin is information relating to the number of paid out medals outside the gaming machine 1. The third pin is a pin for outputting information related to the ART state to the outside of the gaming machine 1, and the fourth pin is a first bonus state, a second bonus state, and a third bonus state. The fifth pin is a pin for outputting information relating to the first RUSH state and the second RUSH state to the outside of the gaming machine 1, The pin is an unused pin, the seventh pin is a pin for outputting information related to the ART state to the outside of the gaming machine 1, and the eighth pin is the gaming machine 1, similarly to the third pin. Information related to the error that occurred or performed on the gaming machine 1 And a pin for outputting information to the outside of the gaming machine 1 according to the fraud.

  The “information relating to the ART state” is information indicating that the main control board 300 has shifted to the fourth RT gaming state. Further, “information related to the first bonus state, the second bonus state, and the third bonus state” is information indicating that the main control board 300 has shifted to the third RT gaming state. The “information relating to the first RUSH state and the second RUSH state” is information indicating that the main control board 300 has shifted to the fifth RT gaming state.

  First, at the timing of FIG. 168 (A), the main control board 300 performs control to shift to the third RT gaming state when the symbol combination related to the second Bonus replay is displayed on the active line. Further, the sub control board 400 performs control to shift the state managed by the sub control board 400 from the Bonus preparation state to the second Bonus state at the timing of FIG. 168 (A). At this time, the main control board 300 performs control to turn the fourth pin of the external concentration terminal board 47 from OFF to ON. Accordingly, a signal having information indicating that the state has shifted to the third RT gaming state is output to the outside of the gaming machine 1.

  Next, at the timing of FIG. 168 (B), the sub-control board 400 transitions to the ART ready state at the end of the second Bonus state based on satisfying the conditions for transitioning to the ART state during the second Bonus state. Control.

  Next, at the timing of FIG. 168 (C), the main control board 300 performs control to shift to the fourth RT gaming state when the symbol combination related to the ART replay is displayed on the active line. In addition, the sub control board 400 performs control to shift the state managed by the sub control board 400 from the ART preparation state to the ART state at the timing of FIG. 168 (C). At this time, the main control board 300 performs control to turn the fourth pin of the external concentration terminal board 47 from ON to OFF. Therefore, a signal having information indicating that the state has shifted to the third RT gaming state that has been output to the outside of the gaming machine 1 is not output.

  Next, at the timing of FIG. 168 (D), the main control board 300 determines that the game of “1” game has been performed after the symbol combination related to ART replay is displayed on the active line. Control is performed to turn the third pin of the concentrated terminal board 47 from OFF to ON. Therefore, a signal having information indicating that the state has shifted to the fourth RT gaming state is output to the outside of the gaming machine 1.

  Next, at the timing of FIG. 168 (E), when the sub control board 400 decides to continue the ART state after shifting the state managed by the sub control board 400 from the ART state to the battle state. The operation sequence of the left stop button 11, the middle stop button 12, and the right stop button 13 for displaying a combination of symbols related to the ART replay on the active line during the continuing ART state Then, a control for informing by the liquid crystal display device 46 is performed.

  In addition, the main control board 300 turns the third pin of the external concentration terminal board 47 from ON to OFF based on the fact that the combination of the symbols related to the ART replay is displayed on the effective line at the timing of FIG. 168 (E). Control is performed. Therefore, a signal having information indicating that the state has shifted to the fourth RT gaming state that has been output to the outside of the gaming machine 1 is not output.

  Next, at the timing of FIG. 168 (F), the main control board 300 determines that the game of “1” game has been performed after the symbol combination related to ART replay is displayed on the active line. Control is performed to turn the third pin of the concentrated terminal board 47 from OFF to ON. Therefore, a signal having information indicating that the state has shifted to the fourth RT gaming state is output to the outside of the gaming machine 1.

  As described above, when it is determined that the ART state is to be continued after the state managed by the sub-control board 400 has shifted to the battle state, in the ART state that is to be continued, the pattern related to the ART replay. For displaying the combination of the left stop button 11, the middle stop button 12, and the right stop button 13 on the effective line by the stop button operation display unit 35 or the liquid crystal display device 46, and the main control. The board 300 performs control to turn the third pin of the external concentration terminal board 47 from ON to OFF based on the fact that the combination of the symbols related to ART replay is displayed on the effective line, and also for the symbol related to ART replay. Based on the fact that the game “1” has been played since the combination was displayed on the active line, Control is performed to the ON pin from OFF. Thereby, the continuation number of the ART state can be accurately output to the outside of the gaming machine 1.

(Timing chart when winning in first chance state and second chance state)
Next, based on FIG. 169, a timing chart when the first chance state and the second chance state are won will be described.

  First, at the timing of FIG. 169 (A), the main control board 300 transmits a condition device command having information related to the winning combination determined by the internal lottery process to the sub-control board 400.

  On the other hand, when the state managed by the sub control board 400 is the normal state, the sub CPU 401 is provided in the sub ROM 402 with information related to the winning combination included in the conditional device command received from the main control board 300. Whether to shift to the second chance state based on the second chance state transition lottery table (see FIG. 52A, FIG. 52B, FIG. 52C, and FIG. 52D) A second chance state lottery process is performed (step S302-3-1-2-5-1-18). Assume that the lottery is won. Further, based on the information relating to the winning combination included in the conditional device command received from the main control board 300 and the first chance state transition lottery table (see FIG. 51) provided in the sub ROM 402, the first chance. A first chance state lottery process for determining whether or not to shift to a state is performed (step S302-3-2-1-5-19). Assume that the lottery is also won. In this case, the sub CPU 401 performs control to shift the state managed by the sub control board 400 from the normal state to the third chance precursor state.

  In the present embodiment, control is performed to shift the state managed by the sub-control board 400 from the normal state to the third chance precursor state or the fourth chance precursor state. In FIG. A description will be given assuming that it is determined to shift to a three-chance precursory state.

  Next, at the timing of FIG. 169 (B), when the third chance precursor state ends, the sub CPU 401 changes the state managed by the sub control board 400 from the third chance precursor state to the first chance. Control to shift to the state.

  Next, at the timing of FIG. 169 (C), the sub CPU 401 performs control to shift the state managed by the sub control board 400 from the first chance state to the second chance state at the end of the first chance state.

  Thus, in this embodiment, when it is determined to shift to the first chance state and to shift to the second chance state, the third chance precursor state or the fourth chance state is passed. Then, control is performed to shift to the first chance state, and to shift to the second chance state at the end of the first chance state. Thus, in the first chance state, after acquiring the normal state point, it is possible to receive a lottery as to whether or not to shift to the Bonus preparation state using the normal state point. In addition, it is possible to reduce a situation in which the number of times that the player can receive the lottery to determine whether to shift to the second chance state and shift to the Bonus preparation state with a small number of normal state points can be reduced.

  In the present embodiment, after the first chance state ends, the state immediately shifts to the second chance state. However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the sub CPU 401 may perform control to shift to the second chance state after shifting to the fifth chance precursor state after the first chance state ends. Thereby, a player's sense of expectation can be maintained even after the first chance state ends.

  In addition, after the first chance state is completed, when the control is performed to shift to the second chance state after shifting to the fifth chance precursor state, the transition to the first chance state is performed at the timing of FIG. 169 (A). If only this is determined and the transition to the second chance state is not made, it is desirable to perform a fake effect over a plurality of games after the end of the first chance state. Thereby, it can be made to expect a player to transfer to a 2nd chance state after the 1st chance state completion.

(Timing chart when winning the 1st chance state with the 5th chance sign)
Next, based on FIG. 170, a timing chart when the first chance state is won in the fifth chance precursor state will be described.

  First, at the timing of FIG. 170A, the main control board 300 transmits a condition device command having information related to the winning combination determined by the internal lottery process to the sub-control board 400.

  On the other hand, when the state managed by the sub control board 400 is the normal state, the sub CPU 401 is provided in the sub ROM 402 with information related to the winning combination included in the conditional device command received from the main control board 300. Whether to shift to the second chance state based on the second chance state transition lottery table (see FIG. 52A, FIG. 52B, FIG. 52C, and FIG. 52D) A second chance state lottery process is performed (step S302-3-1-2-5-1-18). Assume that the lottery is won. Further, based on the information relating to the winning combination included in the conditional device command received from the main control board 300 and the first chance state transition lottery table (see FIG. 51) provided in the sub ROM 402, the first chance. A first chance state lottery process for determining whether or not to shift to a state is performed (step S302-3-2-1-5-19). It is assumed that the lottery is not won. In this case, the sub CPU 401 performs control to shift the state managed by the sub control board 400 from the normal state to the fifth chance precursor state.

  Next, at the timing of FIG. 170 (B), the sub CPU 401 determines the state managed by the sub control board 400 when it is determined to shift to the first chance state during the fifth chance precursor state. Control to shift from the fifth chance precursor state to the first chance state is performed.

  Next, at the timing of FIG. 170 (C), when the first chance state ends, the sub CPU 401 changes the state managed by the sub control board 400 from the first chance state to the second chance state. Perform transition control.

  Thus, in this embodiment, when it is determined to shift to the second chance state, the transition to the second chance state is made via the fifth chance precursor state. When it is determined to shift to the first chance state, control is performed to shift from the fifth chance precursor state to the first chance state and to shift to the second chance state at the end of the first chance state. Thus, in the first chance state, after acquiring the normal state point, it is possible to receive a lottery as to whether or not to shift to the Bonus preparation state using the normal state point. In addition, it is possible to reduce a situation in which the number of times that the player can receive the lottery to determine whether to shift to the second chance state and shift to the Bonus preparation state with a small number of normal state points can be reduced.

  In the present embodiment, after the first chance state ends, the state immediately shifts to the second chance state. However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, after the first chance state ends, the sub CPU 401 may perform control to shift again to the fifth chance state and then shift to the second chance state. Thereby, a player's sense of expectation can be maintained even after the first chance state ends.

(Timing chart at the time of execution of the suggestion effect of the spinning effect)
Next, based on FIG. 171, the timing chart at the time of execution of the spinning effect suggestion effect will be described.

  First, at the timing of FIG. 171 (A), when the value of the inserted number counter provided in the main RAM 303 is “3” and the start switch 10sw is turned ON, the “1” game is started. Become. At this time, a process for determining the winning combination and a process for determining whether or not to execute the spinning effect are performed. Then, it is assumed that it is determined to execute the spinning effect.

  Next, at the timing of FIG. 171 (B), the main CPU 301 makes a reservation for the spinning effect when executing the spinning effect. As a result of this processing, the spinning effect is executed after the start switch 10sw is turned on in the “2” game.

  Next, at the timing of FIG. 171 (C), the sub CPU 401 executes a spinning effect suggestion effect that suggests the possibility of the rotation effect being executed.

  Here, in the present embodiment, the rotation effect suggestion effect is the sound output from the upper left speaker 40, the lower left speaker 41, the upper right speaker 42, the lower right speaker 43, or the animation displayed on the liquid crystal display device 46. Although it is performed by moving the rendering device 50, it is not limited to this. For example, notification may be performed by emitting an LED such as the start lever LED 36.

  Further, in the present embodiment, the spinning effect suggestion effect is an effect suggesting the possibility that the spinning effect is executed, but is not limited to this. For example, it may be a spinning effect notification effect informing that the spinning effect is executed, or when a reservation of the spinning effect is made, It may be determined by lottery.

  In the present embodiment, the spinning effect suggestion effect is performed until the game ends after the reservation of the spinning effect is performed, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, it may be until any one of the left stop button 11, middle stop button 12, and right stop button 13 is operated.

  Next, at the timing of FIG. 171 (D), the sub CPU 401 ends the spinning effect suggestion effect because the “1” game has ended.

  Next, at the timing of FIG. 171 (E), the main CPU 301 determines that the value of the insertion number counter provided in the main RAM 303 is “3” and the start switch 10sw is turned on, “2”. The game starts. At this time, a process for determining the winning combination and a process for determining whether or not to execute the spinning effect are performed. At this time, it is determined whether or not there is a reservation for the spinning effect, and if there is a reservation for the spinning effect, a process for executing the spinning effect is performed.

  Next, at the timing of FIG. 171 (F), the main CPU 301 performs a process for executing the spinning effect, and then clears the information related to the spinning effect reserved for the “1” game. Do.

  Next, at the timing of FIG. 171 (G), the main CPU 301 performs a process of executing a spinning effect.

  In this way, in a game for which a rotation effect is reserved, the player is expected to perform by performing a rotation effect suggestion effect that suggests the possibility of the rotation effect being executed in the next game. be able to.

(Animation of the spinning effect RE1)
Next, based on FIG. 172, the animation of the turning effect RE1 will be described.

  As a precondition of FIG. 172, when the state managed by the sub-control board 400 is the normal state, “weak cherry” is determined as the winning combination by the internal lottery process, and it is determined to execute the spinning effect RE1. To do.

  First, FIG. 172 (a) shows an animation when the player operates the left stop button 11 and the left reel 18 stops.

  Next, FIG. 172 (b) shows an animation when the player operates the middle stop button 12 and the middle reel 19 stops after the left reel 18 stops.

  Next, FIG. 172 (c) shows an animation when the player operates the right stop button 13 and the right reel 20 stops after the left reel 18 and the middle reel 19 stop. In this case, a combination of symbols related to “weak cherry” is displayed on the active line.

  Next, FIG. 172 (d) shows an animation when the player operates the start lever 10 in the next game. In this case, the main CPU 301 performs control for swinging the right reel 20 by starting the spinning effect RE1.

  Next, FIG. 172 (e) shows an animation after the turning effect RE1 has started. In this case, the main CPU 301 rotates the right reel 20 by about “2” symbols in the forward direction, then rotates by “4” symbols in the reverse direction, and displays the “weak” displayed on the active line. Control is performed to temporarily stop the left reel 18, the middle reel 19, and the right reel 20 so that the symbol combination related to “cherry” is displayed on the effective line.

  Next, FIG. 172 (f) shows an animation when the left reel 18, the middle reel 19, and the right reel 20 are rotated after the rotation effect RE1 is completed. In this case, the main CPU 301 performs control to start rotation of the left reel 18, then start rotation of the middle reel 19, and finally start rotation of the right reel.

  Note that FIG. 172 will be used to explain each display area displayed on the liquid crystal display device 46 when the state managed by the sub-control board 400 is a normal state.

(Normal point display area 1000)
The normal state point display area 1000 is displayed on the left side of the liquid crystal display device 46 when viewed from the front, and is provided to display the normal state points acquired by the player. In addition, the normal state point display area 1000 includes a memory display area 1001 and a lottery count display area 1002.

(Memory display area 1001)
The memory display area 1001 is provided for displaying the points for the normal state acquired by the player. Further, in the present embodiment, since the number of memories in the memory display area 1001 is “11”, it is possible to display until the normal state points acquired by the player become “11”. Yes. Therefore, when an image as shown in FIG. 172 (a) is displayed on the liquid crystal display device 46, it is informed that the normal state point acquired by the player is “5”. Become.

(Lottery number display area 1002)
Similar to the memory display area 1001, the lottery count display area 1002 is provided to display the points for the normal state acquired by the player. In the present embodiment, the lottery count display area 1002 is displayed on the liquid crystal display device 46 with the normal state point “11” as one unit. Specifically, when the normal state point acquired by the player displayed in the memory display area 1001 is “10”, when the player acquires “1” for the normal state point, The normal state points acquired by the player displayed in the display area 1001 are “0”, and “× 1” is displayed in the lottery count display area 1002.

  Here, in the present embodiment, in the second chance state, by using “11” for the normal state point, it is possible to receive a lottery as to whether or not to shift to the Bonus preparation state. Therefore, the lottery count display area 1002 notifies the number of times that the lottery can be received in the second chance state as to whether or not to shift to the Bonus preparation state.

  In the present embodiment, in the second chance state, by using “11” as the value of the normal state point, it is possible to receive a lottery as to whether or not to shift to the Bonus preparation state. There is no limit. For example, in the second chance state, by using “1” as the value of the normal state point, it may be possible to receive a lottery as to whether or not to shift to the Bonus preparation state. In this case, the number of games that can be played in the second chance state is equal to or greater than the number of normal state points.

(Animation of the spinning effect RE2)
Next, based on FIG. 173, the animation of the rotating effect RE2 will be described.

  As a precondition of FIG. 173, it is assumed that “watermelon” is determined as the winning combination by the internal lottery process and it is determined to execute the spinning effect RE2.

  First, FIG. 173 (a) shows an animation when the player operates the left stop button 11 and the left reel 18 stops.

  Next, FIG. 173 (b) shows an animation when the player operates the middle stop button 12 and the middle reel 19 stops after the left reel 18 stops.

  Next, FIG. 173 (c) shows an animation when the player operates the right stop button 13 and the right reel 20 stops after the left reel 18 and the middle reel 19 stop. In this case, a combination of symbols related to “watermelon” is displayed on the active line.

  Next, FIG. 173 (d) shows an animation when the player operates the start lever 10 in the next game. In this case, the main CPU 301 performs control to swing the left reel 18, the middle reel 19, and the right reel 20 by starting the spinning effect RE2.

  Next, FIG. 173 (e) shows an animation after the turning effect RE2 has started. In this case, the main CPU 301 rotates the left reel 18 by “3” symbols in the forward direction, the middle reel 19 by “2” symbols in the forward direction, and the right reel 20 by “1” symbols in the forward direction. After that, the left reel 18, the middle reel 19 and the right reel 20 are rotated in the opposite direction by “2” symbols, and the combination of symbols related to “watermelon” displayed on the active line is changed to “watermelon” on the middle line. Are controlled so as to temporarily stop the left reel 18, the middle reel 19, and the right reel 20.

  Next, FIG. 173 (f) shows an animation when the left reel 18, the middle reel 19, and the right reel 20 are rotated after the spinning effect RE2 is completed. In this case, the main CPU 301 performs control to start rotation of the left reel 18, then start rotation of the middle reel 19, and finally start rotation of the right reel.

(Animation of the rendition production RE3)
Next, based on FIG. 174, the animation of the turning effect RE3 will be described.

  As a precondition in FIG. 174, it is assumed that “chance eye replay CR2” is determined as the winning combination by the internal lottery process, and it is determined to execute the spinning effect RE3.

  First, FIG. 174 (a) shows an animation when the player operates the left stop button 11 and the left reel 18 stops.

  Next, FIG. 174 (b) shows an animation when the player operates the middle stop button 12 and the middle reel 19 stops after the left reel 18 stops.

  Next, FIG. 174 (c) shows an animation when the player operates the right stop button 13 and the right reel 20 stops after the left reel 18 and the middle reel 19 stop. In this case, the symbol combination related to the “first chance replay” is displayed on the active line.

  Next, FIG. 174 (d) shows an animation when the player operates the start lever 10 in the next game. In this case, the main CPU 301 controls to rotate the left reel 18 and the right reel 20 in the reverse direction and to rotate the middle reel 19 in the forward direction by starting the spinning effect RE3.

  Next, FIG. 174 (e) shows an animation after the turning effect RE3 has started. In this case, the main CPU 301 rotates the left reel 18 and the right reel 20 in the reverse direction by “18” symbols, and rotates the middle reel 19 in the forward direction by “18” symbols. 18. Control for temporarily stopping the middle reel 19 and the right reel 20 is performed. Then, after temporarily stopping the left reel 18, the middle reel 19, and the right reel 20, the left reel 18 and the right reel 20 are rotated in the opposite direction by “3” symbols, and the middle reel 19 is moved in the forward direction. 3 ”Control is performed such that the left reel 18, the middle reel 19, and the right reel 20 are temporarily stopped so that the symbols related to the“ first chance replay ”are aligned and displayed again on the active line. .

  Next, FIG. 174 (f) shows an animation when the left reel 18, the middle reel 19, and the right reel 20 are rotated after the spinning effect RE3 is completed. In this case, the main CPU 301 performs control to start rotation of the left reel 18, then start rotation of the middle reel 19, and finally start rotation of the right reel.

(Animation of the spinning effect RE4)
Next, based on FIG. 175, the animation of the spinning drum effect RE4 will be described.

  As a precondition in FIG. 175, it is assumed that “weak cherry” is determined as the winning combination by the internal lottery process and it is determined to execute the spinning effect RE4.

  First, FIG. 175 (a) shows an animation when the player operates the left stop button 11 and the left reel 18 stops.

  Next, FIG. 175 (b) shows an animation when the player operates the middle stop button 12 after the left reel 18 stops and the middle reel 19 stops.

  Next, FIG. 175 (c) shows an animation when the player operates the right stop button 13 and the right reel 20 stops after the left reel 18 and the middle reel 19 stop. In this case, a combination of symbols related to “weak cherry” is displayed on the active line.

  Next, FIG. 175 (d) shows an animation when the player operates the start lever 10 in the next game. In this case, the main CPU 301 performs a standby process before starting the spinning effect RE4.

  Next, FIG. 175 (e) shows an animation after the turning effect RE4 has started. In this case, the main CPU 301 performs control to align the symbol related to “Blue Seven” of the left reel 18 and the symbol related to “Blue Seven” of the middle reel 19 by rotating the left reel 18 in the reverse direction. .

  Next, FIG. 175 (f) shows an animation after the turning effect RE4 has started, as in FIG. 175 (e). In this case, as shown in FIG. 175 (e), the main CPU 301 rotates the left reel 18 in the reverse direction to change the symbol related to “blue seven” of the left reel 18 and “blue seven” of the middle reel 19. After the symbols are aligned, the left reel 18 and the middle reel 19 are rotated in the reverse direction with the symbols related to “Blue Seven” on the left reel 18 and the symbols related to “Blue Seven” on the middle reel 19 being aligned. By doing so, control is performed to align the symbol related to “Blue Seven” of the left reel 18, the symbol related to “Blue Seven” of the middle reel 19, and the symbol related to “Blue Seven” of the right reel 20.

  Next, FIG. 175 (g) is an animation after the turning effect RE4 is started, as in FIG. 175 (e) and FIG. 175 (f). In this case, as shown in FIG. 175 (f), the main CPU 301 arranges the left reel 18 and the middle reel 19 in a state where the symbols relating to the “blue seven” of the left reel 18 and the symbols relating to “blue seven” of the middle reel 19 are aligned. Control to rotate the reel 19 in the reverse direction to align the symbol related to “Blue Seven” of the left reel 18, the symbol related to “Blue Seven” of the middle reel 19, and the symbol related to “Blue Seven” of the right reel 20 Is performed, and the left reel 18 in a state where the design related to “Blue Seven” on the left reel 18, the design related to “Blue Seven” on the middle reel 19, and the design related to “Blue Seven” on the right reel 20 are aligned. 18. Control for rotating the middle reel 19 and the right reel 20 in the reverse direction is performed.

  Next, FIG. 175 (h) is an animation when the turning effect RE4 is finished. In this case, the main CPU 301 performs control to temporarily stop the left reel 18, the middle reel 19, and the right reel 20 so that the symbols related to “Blue Seven” are displayed together on the middle line. At this time, the sub CPU 401 performs control to display on the liquid crystal display device 46 that the state has shifted to the third Bonus state. Thereby, the player can recognize that it shifted to the 3rd Bonus state.

  Next, FIG. 175 (i) shows an animation when the left reel 18, the middle reel 19, and the right reel 20 are rotated after the spinning drum effect RE4 is completed. In this case, the main CPU 301 performs control to start rotation of the left reel 18, then start rotation of the middle reel 19, and finally start rotation of the right reel.

(Animation of the spinning effect RE5)
Next, based on FIG. 176, the animation of the turning effect RE5 will be described.

  As a precondition in FIG. 176, it is assumed that “strong cherry” is determined as the winning combination by the internal lottery process, and it is determined to execute the spinning effect RE5.

  First, FIG. 176 (a) shows an animation when the player operates the left stop button 11 and the left reel 18 stops.

  Next, FIG. 176 (b) shows an animation when the player operates the middle stop button 12 and the middle reel 19 stops after the left reel 18 stops.

  Next, FIG. 176 (c) shows an animation when the player operates the right stop button 13 and the right reel 20 stops after the left reel 18 and the middle reel 19 stop. In this case, a combination of symbols related to “strong cherry” is displayed on the active line.

  Next, FIG. 176 (d) shows an animation when the player operates the start lever 10 in the next game. In this case, the main CPU 301 performs a standby process before starting the spinning effect RE5.

  Next, FIG. 176 (e) shows an animation after the turning effect RE5 has started. In this case, the main CPU 301 performs control to align the symbol related to “Blue Seven” of the left reel 18 and the symbol related to “Blue Seven” of the middle reel 19 by rotating the left reel 18 in the reverse direction. .

  Next, FIG. 176 (f) is an animation after the turning effect RE5 is started, as in FIG. 176 (e). In this case, the main CPU 301 rotates the left reel 18 in the reverse direction as shown in FIG. 176 (e), thereby changing the symbol related to “blue seven” of the left reel 18 and “blue seven” of the middle reel 19. After the symbols are aligned, the left reel 18 and the middle reel 19 are rotated in the reverse direction with the symbols related to “Blue Seven” on the left reel 18 and the symbols related to “Blue Seven” on the middle reel 19 being aligned. By doing so, control is performed to align the symbol related to “Blue Seven” of the left reel 18, the symbol related to “Blue Seven” of the middle reel 19, and the symbol related to “Blue Seven” of the right reel 20.

  Next, FIG. 176 (g) is an animation after the turning effect RE5 is started, as in FIG. 176 (e) and FIG. 176 (f). In this case, as shown in FIG. 176 (f), the main CPU 301 arranges the left reel 18 and the middle reel 19 in a state where the symbols relating to the “blue seven” of the left reel 18 and the symbols relating to the “blue seven” of the middle reel 19 are aligned. Control to rotate the reel 19 in the reverse direction to align the symbol related to “Blue Seven” of the left reel 18, the symbol related to “Blue Seven” of the middle reel 19, and the symbol related to “Blue Seven” of the right reel 20 Is performed, and the left reel 18 in a state where the design related to “Blue Seven” on the left reel 18, the design related to “Blue Seven” on the middle reel 19, and the design related to “Blue Seven” on the right reel 20 are aligned. 18. Control for rotating the middle reel 19 and the right reel 20 in the reverse direction is performed.

  Next, FIG. 176 (h) shows an animation when the turning effect RE4 ends. In this case, the main CPU 301 performs control to temporarily stop the left reel 18, the middle reel 19, and the right reel 20 so that the symbols related to “Blue Seven” are displayed together on the middle line. At this time, the sub CPU 401 performs control to display on the liquid crystal display device 46 that the state has shifted to the third Bonus state. Thereby, the player can recognize that it shifted to the 3rd Bonus state.

  Next, FIG. 176 (i) is an animation when notifying the player that the rotation effect RE5, not the rotation effect RE4. In this case, the sub CPU 401 controls the liquid crystal display device 46 to notify the player that the rotation effect RE5 is not the rotation effect RE4.

  Next, FIG. 176 (j) shows an animation in the case where the left reel 18, the middle reel 19, and the right reel 20 are rotated when the spinning effect RE5 is continued. In this case, the main CPU 301 rotates the left reel 18, the middle reel 19, and the right reel 20 in the reverse direction and again displays the symbols related to “Blue Seven” on the middle line so that the symbols are displayed together. Control is performed to temporarily stop the reel 18, the middle reel 19, and the right reel 20. Further, the sub CPU 401 performs control to display the ART points to be given to the player on the liquid crystal display device 46.

  Next, FIG. 176 (k) is an animation in the case where the left reel 18, the middle reel 19, and the right reel 20 are rotated after the rotation effect RE5 is finished without being continued. In this case, the main CPU 301 performs control to start rotation of the left reel 18, then start rotation of the middle reel 19, and finally start rotation of the right reel.

  Here, a description will be given of the start time of the turning effect RE4 and the turning effect RE5.

  First, when executing the turning effect RE4 or the turning effect RE5, in the previous game, depending on the stop position of the left reel 18, the middle reel 19, and the right reel 20, the symbol related to “Blue Seven” is displayed. Time to align in a straight line is different. For this reason, there has been a problem that a control load is imposed on synchronizing the effects at the end of the rotation effect RE4 or the rotation effect RE5. On the other hand, in the present embodiment, first, in the process of step S111-1-3-10, “4750” is set as the value of the production weight timer as the overall scale. Next, the position difference calculation process of step S111-1-3-22-2 of the effect correction timer calculation process of step S111-1-3-12 or the position difference addition of step S111-1-3-22-5. As a result of the processing, the time required to align the symbol related to “Blue Seven” of the left reel 18 and the symbol related to “Blue Seven” of the middle reel 19 is calculated, and the correction timer calculation in Step S111-1-3-22-7 is calculated. By processing, the value calculated from the overall scale is subtracted. Therefore, if the time required to align the symbol related to “Blue Seven” on the left reel 18 and the symbol related to “Blue Seven” on the middle reel 19 is α, the stored value is “4750−α”. Become.

  Next, the position difference calculation process of step S111-1-3-22-2 of the effect correction timer calculation process of step S111-1-3-14 and the position difference addition of step S111-1-3-22-5 By processing, the time required to align the symbol related to “Blue Seven” of the left reel 18 and the middle reel 19 and the symbol related to “Blue Seven” of the right reel 20 is calculated, and step S111-1-3-3-2 By the correction timer calculation process of No. 7, the calculated value is subtracted from the stored value. For this reason, if the time required to align the symbol related to “Blue Seven” of the left reel 18 and the middle reel 19 and the symbol related to “Blue Seven” of the right reel 20 is β, the stored value is “ 4750-α-β ”.

  Next, the position difference calculation process in step S111-1-3-22-2 of the effect correction timer calculation process in step S111-1-3-16 and the position difference addition in step S111-1-3-22-5. By processing, the time required to align the symbol “blue seven” of the left reel 18, middle reel 19, and right reel 20 with a predetermined symbol value “11” is calculated, and step S 111-1-3-22. The calculated value is subtracted from the stored value by the correction timer calculation process of -7. Therefore, if the time required to align the symbol “blue seven” of the left reel 18, the middle reel 19, and the right reel 20 with the value “11” of the predetermined symbol is γ, the stored value is “ 4750-α-β-γ ”. The predetermined symbol value “11” is a value for displaying the symbol related to “blue seven” in the middle stage line in the rotating effect RE4 or the rotating effect RE5.

  With these calculations, the opening scale is “4750-α-β-γ”. Thereby, the burden at the time of performing the rotation effect RE4 or the rotation effect RE5 can be reduced.

(Animation of the suggestion of the rendition effect)
Next, based on FIG. 177, the animation of the spinning effect suggestion effect will be described.

  In this embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 177 (A) to 177 (E), the sub CPU 401 displays a plurality of characters on the liquid crystal display device 46 when the main control board 300 is reserved for the spinning effect. Performs a rendition suggestion effect. Here, the plurality of characters displayed on the liquid crystal display device 46 are characters displayed on the liquid crystal display device 46 when executing the spinning effect. Note that the sub CPU 401 moves the effect device 50 and outputs predetermined sound from the upper left speaker 40, the lower left speaker 41, the upper right speaker 42, and the lower right speaker 43 when executing the spinning effect suggestion effect. Control.

  Further, in the present embodiment, the spinning effect suggestion effect varies depending on the state managed by the sub control board 400. Specifically, as shown in FIGS. 177 (A) to 177 (E), the spinning effect suggestion effect is in the first RUSH state, the second RUSH state, or the third fall standby state managed by the sub-control board 400. When the state that is executed and managed by the sub-control board 400 is a normal state, or in an ART state, a battle state, or the like, a different spinning effect suggestion effect is performed.

  Here, the images as shown in FIGS. 177 (A) to 177 (E) are displayed on the liquid crystal display device 46 when the rotation effect suggestion effect is executed when the state managed by the sub-control board 400 is the first RUSH state. The image displayed in the display area other than the display area for displaying the spinning effect suggestion effect will be described.

  In addition, with reference to FIG. 177A, each display area displayed on the liquid crystal display device 46 when the state managed by the sub-control board 400 is the first RUSH state or the second RUSH state will be described. .

(RUSH remaining game number display area 1003)
The RUSH remaining game number display area 1003 is provided to display the number of games that can be played when the state managed by the sub-control board 400 is the first RUSH state or the second RUSH state. For example, in FIG. 177, it is notified that the remaining number of games that can be played is “7” games in the first RUSH state or the second RUSH state.

(ART point display area 1004)
The ART point display area 1004 is provided to notify the player of the number of times that a lottery is performed regarding whether or not to continue the ART state in the battle state. For example, in FIG. 177, it is notified that the number of times that the lottery for determining whether or not to continue the ART state in the battle state is performed is “19” times.

(Acquired number display area 1005)
The acquired number display area 1005 is provided to notify the number of medals acquired by the player in a state advantageous to the player such as an ART state. For example, in FIG. 177, it is notified that the number of medals acquired by the player is “0” in a state advantageous to the player such as an ART state.

  In the present embodiment, when executing the spinning effect suggestion effect, the plurality of characters displayed on the liquid crystal display device 46 are the real images of the characters displayed on the liquid crystal display device 46 when the spinning effect is executed. By using it, the player is expected to have a sense of expectation, but is not limited thereto. For example, it may be a character displayed when executing the spinning effect of FIGS. 172 to 176. In this case, since the same image as the character displayed on the liquid crystal display device 46 is displayed at the time of executing the spinning effect, an effect that is easy for the player to understand can be performed.

  As shown in FIG. 177 (A), the sub CPU 401 performs control for displaying an image corresponding to the spinning effect suggestion effect on the liquid crystal display device 46 based on the reception of the condition device command. This suggests the possibility of executing the spinning effect.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 177 (B), the sub CPU 401 rotates the reel effect RE4 at the timing when the first reel stop command is received while the left reel 18, the middle reel 19 and the right reel 20 are rotating. Alternatively, control is performed to notify that there is no possibility of executing RE5. Specifically, the sub CPU 401 may execute the spinning effect RE4 or RE5 by performing control to darken the character displayed in the center among the characters displayed on the liquid crystal display device 46. Control is performed to notify that there is no error.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 177 (C), the sub CPU 401 performs control for notifying that there is no possibility that the rotation effect RE20 is executed from the rotation effect RE6 at the timing when the next reel stop command is received. Do. Specifically, the sub CPU 401 performs a control of darkening the character displayed on the right side of the character displayed at the center among the characters displayed on the liquid crystal display device 46, whereby the rotation effect RE6. From this, control for notifying that there is no possibility of executing the spinning effect RE20 is performed.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 177 (D), when the rotation effect is reserved, the sub CPU 401 executes the rotation effect RE3 at the timing when the last reel stop command is received. Control to notify is performed. Specifically, among the characters displayed on the liquid crystal display device 46, the sub CPU 401 displays the character displayed on the leftmost side and the character displayed on the rightmost side when the spinning effect is reserved. By performing control to darken the character, the control that notifies that there is no possibility of executing the rotation effect RE1 and the rotation effect RE2 is performed, and notification that the rotation effect RE3 is executed is performed. Take control.

  On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 177 (E), when the rotation effect is not reserved, the sub CPU 401 controls to notify that the rotation effect is not executed at the timing when the last reel stop command is received. I do. Specifically, the sub CPU 401 performs control for notifying that there is no possibility of performing the spinning effect by performing dark control of all characters displayed on the liquid crystal display device 46.

  Therefore, in the present embodiment, the sub CPU 401 informs whether or not the reeling effect has been reserved at the timing of receiving the last reel stop command, so that the expectation can be maintained.

  As described above, according to the first embodiment, when the first rotation effect is determined, the first rotation effect is executed in the game after the determined game. Further, when the second spinning effect is determined, the second spinning effect is executed in the determined game. And when the execution game of the 1st rotation effect and the execution game of the 2nd rotation effect overlap, execution control of the 1st rotation effect is restricted and the 2nd rotation effect Priority was given to execution control. By clarifying the priority order in the case of overlapping in this way, whether the effect executed by operating the start lever is executed based on the reservation of the first spinning effect, the second This makes it easy to determine whether or not it has been executed based on the fact that it has been won. Therefore, even if a plurality of effects using a rotating drum are provided, the game performance is not complicated, and a decrease in the gaming interest can be prevented. In addition, since the second turning effect is executed in a game that is determined to execute the second turning effect, when the second turning effect is duplicated with the execution game of the first turning effect, the second turning effect is performed. By performing the effect preferentially, it is possible to execute the second spinning effect in the overlapping game and execute the first spinning effect in the next game after the overlapping game. For this reason, the execution of the determined spinning performance is not restricted, and the game performance is not complicated, and the fall of the game entertainment can be prevented.

(Second Embodiment)
Next, a second embodiment will be described based on FIGS. 178 to 181.

(Battle state win / loss lottery table in the second embodiment)
Next, based on FIG. 178, the battle state winning / losing lottery table in the second embodiment will be described.

  The battle state win / loss lottery table in the second embodiment is provided in the sub-ROM 402, and is used when the lottery determines whether or not to continue the ART state in the battle state. Here, the battle state winning / losing lottery table in the second embodiment includes the winning combination, whether or not to execute the reel lock effect and the spinning effect, and the value of the battle state continuous losing counter provided in the sub RAM 403. The lottery value is defined according to

  Specifically, in the battle state winning / losing lottery table in the second embodiment, the larger the value of the battle state continuous losing counter provided in the sub RAM 403, the larger the lottery value for the winning is specified. Yes. For example, when “watermelon” is determined by the internal lottery process and it is determined not to execute the reel lock effect or the spinning effect, the value of the battle state continuous losing counter provided in the sub RAM 403 is “1”. In this case, it is determined to continue the ART state with a probability of “13107/65536”. On the other hand, when “watermelon” is determined by the internal lottery process and it is determined not to execute the reel lock effect or the spinning effect, the value of the battle state continuous losing counter provided in the sub RAM 403 is “9”. In this case, it is determined to continue the ART state with a probability of “14447/65536”.

  In addition, the battle state winning / losing lottery table in the second embodiment is similar to the battle state winning / losing lottery table described with reference to FIG. 80B, step S302-3-1-2-5-26-14. Is used when performing the ART state continuous lottery process.

  Thus, by using the battle state winning / losing lottery table in the second embodiment, the larger the value of the battle state continuous losing counter, the easier it is determined to continue the ART state. , Can reduce the stress when the player loses the battle.

(Battle state ceiling number determination table in the second embodiment)
Next, based on FIG. 179, the battle state ceiling frequency determination table in the second embodiment will be described.

  The battle state ceiling frequency determination table in the second embodiment is provided in the sub-ROM 402, and is used when performing a lottery to determine the ceiling frequency in the battle state. Here, in the battle state ceiling frequency determination table in the second embodiment, the ceiling frequency and a lottery value corresponding to the ceiling frequency are defined.

  Here, the battle state ceiling frequency determination table in the second embodiment is used in the battle state ceiling frequency setting process in step S302-3-1-2-5-17-26. Specifically, the sub CPU 401 extracts a soft random number in the battle state ceiling number setting process in step S302-3-1-2-5-17-26, and stores the extracted soft random number in the sub ROM 402. Based on the battle state ceiling number determination table in the second embodiment, a process for determining the ceiling number is performed. Further, the sub CPU 401 performs processing for setting the information related to the determined ceiling number to the value of the battle state ceiling number counter provided in the sub RAM 403.

  Thus, by providing the battle state ceiling frequency determination table in the second embodiment and using it in the battle state ceiling frequency setting process in step S302-3-1-2-5-17-26, the ceiling frequency is determined. Since it is not uniform, the ceiling in the battle state is not monotonous, and the interest in the game is improved.

(Timing chart when the first chance state and the second chance state are won in the second embodiment)
Next, based on FIG. 180, a timing chart when the first chance state and the second chance state in the second embodiment are won will be described.

  First, at the timing of FIG. 180 (A), the main control board 300 transmits a condition device command having information related to the winning combination determined by the internal lottery process to the sub-control board 400.

  On the other hand, when the state managed by the sub control board 400 is the normal state, the sub CPU 401 is provided in the sub ROM 402 with information related to the winning combination included in the conditional device command received from the main control board 300. Whether to shift to the second chance state based on the second chance state transition lottery table (see FIG. 52A, FIG. 52B, FIG. 52C, and FIG. 52D) A second chance state lottery process is performed (step S302-3-1-2-5-1-18). Assume that the lottery is won. Further, based on the information relating to the winning combination included in the conditional device command received from the main control board 300 and the first chance state transition lottery table (see FIG. 51) provided in the sub ROM 402, the first chance. A first chance state lottery process for determining whether or not to shift to a state is performed (step S302-3-2-1-5-19). Assume that the lottery is also won. In this case, the sub CPU 401 performs control to shift the state managed by the sub control board 400 from the normal state to the fifth chance precursor state.

  Next, at the timing of FIG. 180 (B), the sub CPU 401 changes the state managed by the sub control board 400 from the fifth chance precursor state to the second chance when the fifth chance precursor state ends. Control to shift to the state.

  Next, at the timing of FIG. 180 (C), the sub CPU 401 performs control to shift the state managed by the sub control board 400 from the second chance state to the first chance state at the end of the second chance state.

  Thus, in the second embodiment, when it is determined to shift to the first chance state and to shift to the second chance state, the second chance is passed through the fifth chance precursor state. Control to shift to the first chance state at the end of the second chance state. Thereby, the continuation willingness with respect to the game after the 2nd chance state is complete | finished can be maintained.

  In the second embodiment, the transition to the first chance state is made immediately after the completion of the second chance state. However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, after the second chance state ends, the sub CPU 401 may perform control to shift to the first chance state after shifting to the third chance precursor state and the fourth chance precursor state. Thereby, the continuation willingness with respect to the game after the 2nd chance state is complete | finished can be maintained.

  In addition, in the case of performing control to shift to the first chance state after the transition to the third chance precursor state or the fourth chance precursor state after the second chance state ends, at the timing of FIG. 180 (A), When it is determined only to shift to the second chance state and not to shift to the first chance state, it is desirable to perform a fake effect over a plurality of games after the end of the second chance state. Thereby, it can be made to expect a player to shift to the 1st chance state after the 2nd chance state ends.

(Timing chart when winning the second chance state in the third chance precursor state in the second embodiment)
Next, based on FIG. 181, a timing chart when the second chance state is won in the third chance precursor state in the second embodiment will be described.

  First, at the timing of FIG. 181 (A), the main control board 300 transmits a condition device command having information related to the winning combination determined by the internal lottery process to the sub-control board 400.

  On the other hand, when the state managed by the sub control board 400 is the normal state, the sub CPU 401 is provided in the sub ROM 402 with information related to the winning combination included in the conditional device command received from the main control board 300. Whether or not to shift to the first chance state based on the first chance state transition lottery table (see FIGS. 52A, 52B, 52C, and 52D) A second chance state lottery process is performed (step S302-3-1-2-5-1-18). Assume that the lottery is not won. Also, information related to the winning combination included in the conditional device command received from the main control board 300, and a first chance state transition lottery table provided in the sub ROM 402 (FIGS. 51A and 51B). Based on FIG. 51 (C)), a first chance state lottery process for determining whether or not to shift to the first chance state is performed (step S302-3-1-25-1-19). It is assumed that the lottery is won. In this case, the sub CPU 401 performs control to shift the state managed by the sub control board 400 from the normal state to the third chance precursor state.

  Next, at the timing of FIG. 181 (B), the sub CPU 401 determines the state managed by the sub control board 400 when it is determined to shift to the second chance state during the third chance precursor state. Control to shift from the third chance precursor state to the second chance state is performed.

  Next, at the timing of FIG. 181 (C), when the second chance state ends, the sub CPU 401 changes the state managed by the sub control board 400 from the second chance state to the first chance state. Perform transition control.

  As described above, in the second embodiment, when it is determined to shift to the first chance state, the transition to the first chance state is made via the third chance precursor state. In the state, when it is determined to shift to the second chance state, control is performed to shift from the third chance precursor state to the second chance state and to shift to the first chance state at the end of the second chance state. Do. Thereby, the continuation willingness with respect to the game after the 2nd chance state is complete | finished can be maintained.

  In the second embodiment, the transition to the first chance state is made immediately after the completion of the second chance state. However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, after the second chance state ends, the sub CPU 401 may perform control to shift again to the third chance precursor state and then shift to the first chance state. Thereby, after a 2nd chance state is complete | finished, a player's sense of expectation can be maintained.

  In the present embodiment, the sub control board 400 manages the normal state point, the first bonus state point, the second bonus state point, and the ART point separately, but is not limited thereto. For example, the normal state point, the first Bonus state point, the second Bonus state point, and the ART point may be managed in common. Specifically, in the second chance state, when determining whether to shift to the ART ready state in the first Bonus state and the points used when performing the lottery to determine whether or not to shift to the Bonus ready state. Points used when determining whether to shift to the ART ready state in the second Bonus state, and points used when performing a lottery to determine whether the ART state continues in the battle state Are the same points. Thereby, the normal state point storage area, the first Bonus state point storage area, the second Bonus state point storage area, and the ART point storage area provided in the sub-RAM 403 can be stored in one storage area. This eliminates the need to provide a separate storage area.

(Third embodiment)
Next, a third embodiment will be described based on FIG. Note that in the third embodiment, only differences from the first embodiment will be described.

  FIG. 184 is a subroutine of the effect type setting process in step S110-4-4 of the effect lottery process in FIG. 93. In the third embodiment, the contents of the effect type setting process are the same as those in the first embodiment. Since other processes are the same as those in the first embodiment, the description thereof will be omitted.

(Step S110-4-4-1-1)
In step S110-4-4-1-1, the main CPU 301 performs a process of determining whether or not the value of the reel lock effect information storage area is “07H”. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs a process of determining whether or not the value of the reel lock effect information storage area provided in the main RAM 303 is “07H”. If it is determined that the flag is “07H”, the reel lock effect long freeze is won. If it is determined that the value of the reel lock effect information storage area is “07H” (step S110-4-4-1-1 = Yes), the process proceeds to step S110-4-4-1-2. And when it is determined that the value of the reel lock effect information storage area is not “07H” (step S110-4-4-1-1 = No), step S110-4-4-1-4 The process is transferred to.

(Step S110-4-4-1-2)
In step S110-4-4-1-2, the main CPU 301 performs a first effect type setting process. Specifically, in order to execute the reel lock effect, the main CPU 301 performs a process of storing the value stored in the reel lock effect information storage area in the reel lock effect execution information storage area. Then, when the process of step S110-4-4-1-2 is completed, the process proceeds to step S110-4-4-1-3.

(Step S110-4-4-1-3)
In step S110-4-4-1-3, the main CPU 301 performs processing for clearing the reservation related to the second effect type. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs processing for clearing the spinning effect information storage area provided in the main RAM 303. Further, the main CPU 301 performs processing for clearing the reel lock effect information storage area provided in the main RAM 303. Then, when the process of step S110-4-4-1-3 is completed, the subroutine of the effect type setting process is ended, and the process proceeds to step S110-4-5 in the effect lottery process.

(Step S110-4-4-1-4)
In step S110-4-4-1-4, the main CPU 301 performs a second effect type setting process. Specifically, the main CPU 301 executes the rotation effect execution provided in the main RAM 303 for information related to the rotation effect reserved in the previous game in order to execute the rotation effect reserved in the previous game. Processing to store in the information storage area is performed. Then, when the process of step S110-4-4-1-4 ends, the process proceeds to step S110-4-4-1-5.

(Step S110-4-4-1-5)
In step S110-4-4-1-5, the main CPU 301 performs processing for clearing the reservation related to the second effect type. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs processing for clearing the spinning effect information storage area provided in the main RAM 303. Then, when the process of step S110-4-4-1-5 ends, the subroutine of the effect type setting process ends, and the process proceeds to step S110-4-5 in the effect lottery process.

  As described above, according to the third embodiment, in the game in which the first turning effect based on the reservation is executed, when the second turning effect is determined, the second turning effect is a long freeze. After determining whether or not there is a long freeze, the execution of the first spinning effect is restricted and the second spinning effect (long freeze) is executed. The execution of the second spinning effect is limited, and the first spinning effect based on the reservation is executed. In general, when a long freeze is performed, for example, as shown in FIG. 67, the privilege given to the player is also large. (In the example of FIG. 67, the ART game can be started at a high rank advantageous to the player). Therefore, in the game in which the first rotation effect based on the reservation is executed, when the second rotation effect is determined, the execution of the second rotation effect is uniformly limited, and the reservation is based on the reservation. Attempting to execute the first round effect may cause the player to think that the benefits of winning the long freeze are no longer received. However, if configured as in the third embodiment, when a long freeze is won, the long freeze is prioritized, so the player thinks that the benefits from the long freeze won't be received. It is possible to prevent the possibility of causing a decrease in gaming interest. In the third embodiment, when the gaming state is the first RT gaming state, the execution of the first spinning effect based on the reservation and the execution of the second spinning effect overlap in the same game. A case is assumed. In the first RT gaming state, the spinning effect RE5 is not executed. Therefore, the reservation related to the second performance type (first rotation effect) cleared in step S110-4-4-5 in FIG. 96 is the rotation effect RE1, the rotation effect RE2, and the rotation effect RE3. Any reservation will be applicable.

  In the present embodiment, the game situation corresponds to a privilege given to the player. That is, the main CPU 301 determines whether or not the long freeze is won as the reel lock effect in step S110-4-4-1-1 in FIG. 184, and if the long freeze is won, When the reel lock effect is preferentially executed and the long freeze is not won, the spinning effect is preferentially executed. The privilege is given by the sub CPU 401, and the reel lock effect and the spinning effect are controlled by the main CPU 301. For this reason, since it is difficult for the main CPU 301 to grasp the size of the privilege in detail, the main CPU 301 is configured so that the preferential effect varies depending on whether the long freeze is won or not. ing. Long freeze is an effect in which a relatively large privilege can be expected. In addition, as an element judged as a game situation, not only long freeze but a reel lock production SU5 may be included, for example. The result determined that the long freeze is won corresponds to the second determination result, and the result determined not to win the long freeze corresponds to the first determination result.

(Fourth embodiment)
Next, a fourth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. Note that in the fourth embodiment, only differences from the first embodiment will be described.

  FIG. 185 is a subroutine of the effect type setting process in step S110-4-4 of the effect lottery process in FIG. 93. In the fourth embodiment, the contents of the effect type setting process are the same as those in the first embodiment. Since other processes are the same as those in the first embodiment, the description thereof will be omitted.

(Step S110-4-4-1-1-1)
In step S110-4-4-1-1-1, the main CPU 301 performs a process of determining whether or not the value of the reel lock effect information storage area is “00H”. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs a process of determining whether or not the value of the reel lock effect information storage area provided in the main RAM 303 is “00H”. If it is determined that it is “00H”, the reel lock effect is not won. When it is determined that the value of the reel lock effect information storage area is “00H” (step S110-4-4-1-1 = Yes), step S110-4-4-1-1 If the process is shifted to -6 and it is determined that the value of the reel lock effect information storage area is not “00H” (step S110-4-4-1-1-1 = No), step S110-4 The process shifts to 4-1-1-2.

(Step S110-4-4-1-1-2)
In step S110-4-4-1-1-2, the main CPU 301 performs a process of acquiring the value of the gaming state storage area. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs processing for acquiring the current gaming state value from the gaming state storage area provided in the main RAM 303. And if the process of step S110-4-4-1-1-2 is complete | finished, a process will be transfered to step S110-4-4-1-1-3.

(Step S110-4-4-1-1-3)
In step S110-4-4-1-1-3, the main CPU 301 performs processing for determining whether or not the gaming state is RT1. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs a process of determining whether or not the value indicating the gaming state acquired in the process of step S110-4-4-1-1-2 is a value indicating RT1. If it is determined that the value indicating the gaming state is a value indicating RT1 (step S110-4-4-1-1-3 = Yes), step S110-4-4-1-1- When the processing is shifted to 4 and it is determined that the value indicating the gaming state is not the value indicating RT1 (step S110-4-4-1-1-3 = No), step S110-4-4 The process is shifted to 1-1-1-6.

(Step S110-4-4-1-1-4)
In step S110-4-4-1-1-4, the main CPU 301 performs a first effect type setting process. Specifically, in order to execute the reel lock effect, the main CPU 301 performs a process of storing the value stored in the reel lock effect information storage area in the reel lock effect execution information storage area. And if the process of step S110-4-4-1-1-4 is complete | finished, a process will be transfered to step S110-4-4-1-1-5.

(Step S110-4-4-1-1-5)
In step S <b> 110-4-1-1-5, the main CPU 301 performs processing for clearing the reservation related to the second effect type. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs processing for clearing the spinning effect information storage area provided in the main RAM 303. Further, the main CPU 301 performs processing for clearing the reel lock effect information storage area provided in the main RAM 303. And if the process of step S110-4-4-1-1-5 is complete | finished, the subroutine of an effect classification setting process will be complete | finished, and a process will be transfered to step S110-4-5 in an effect lottery process.

(Step S110-4-4-1-1-6)
In step S110-4-4-1-1-6, the main CPU 301 performs a second effect type setting process. Specifically, the main CPU 301 executes the rotation effect execution provided in the main RAM 303 for information related to the rotation effect reserved in the previous game in order to execute the rotation effect reserved in the previous game. Processing to store in the information storage area is performed. Then, when the process of step S110-4-4-1-1-6 ends, the process proceeds to step S110-4-4-1-1-7.

(Step S110-4-4-1-1-7)
In step S110-4-4-1-1-7, the main CPU 301 performs processing for clearing the reservation related to the second effect type. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs processing for clearing the spinning effect information storage area provided in the main RAM 303. And if the process of step S110-4-4-1-1-7 is complete | finished, the subroutine of an effect classification setting process will be complete | finished, and a process will be transfered to step S110-4-5 in an effect lottery process.

  As described above, according to the fourth embodiment, in the game in which the first rotation effect based on the reservation is executed, when the second rotation effect is determined, one of the rotations is performed according to the gaming state. The execution of the production was restricted and the other spinning production was executed. For example, in a gaming state in which a long freeze is not performed, such as in the fourth RT gaming state, the execution of the second spinning performance is restricted and the first spinning performance is performed. For example, the first RT gaming state As described above, in the gaming state in which the long freeze is performed, the execution of the first spinning effect is restricted and the second spinning effect is executed. By configuring in this way, it is possible to prevent the long freeze from being restricted in spite of the gaming state in which the long freeze is executed, and the player can no longer benefit from the long freeze winning. It is possible to prevent the possibility of deteriorating the game entertainment interest. In the fourth embodiment, when the gaming state is the first RT gaming state, the execution of the first spinning effect based on the reservation and the execution of the second spinning effect overlap in the same game. In this case, the second drum effect is preferentially executed. In the first RT gaming state, the spinning effect RE5 is not executed. Therefore, the reservation related to the second performance type (first rotation effect) cleared in step S110-4-4-5 in FIG. 96 is the rotation effect RE1, the rotation effect RE2, and the rotation effect RE3. Any reservation will be applicable.

  In the present embodiment, the game situation corresponds to the game state in which the user is staying. That is, the main CPU 301 determines whether or not it is the first RT gaming state as the gaming state in which it is currently staying, in step S110-4-4-1-1-3 in FIG. 185, and the first RT gaming state. If it is, the reel lock effect is preferentially executed, and if it is not the first RT gaming state, the spinning effect is preferentially executed. In the first RT gaming state, a long freeze can be won. Further, as described in the third embodiment, the long freeze can be expected to have a large privilege. For this reason, in the present embodiment, the reel lock effect is preferentially executed in the first RT gaming state in which a long freeze may occur. The result determined to be in the first RT gaming state corresponds to the second determination result, and the result determined to be not in the first RT gaming state corresponds to the first determination result.

(Fifth embodiment)
Next, a fifth embodiment will be described based on FIGS. 186 to 189. Note that in the fifth embodiment, only differences from the first embodiment will be described.

  FIG. 186 shows another example of the ART state process of FIG. 137, which is different from FIG. 137 only in the process of step S302-3-1-2-5-17-3-3. Since the processes are the same, the description of the common process parts is omitted.

(Step S302-3-1-2-5-17-3-3)
In step S302-3-1-2-5-17-3-3, the sub CPU 401 performs an ART point addition lottery process which will be described in detail later with reference to FIG. Specifically, the sub CPU 401 determines the ART state point acquisition lottery table provided in the sub ROM 402 based on the value stored in the ART level storage area provided in the sub RAM 403 (FIG. 72A). 72 (B), 72 (C), and 72 (D)), the selected ART state point acquisition lottery table and the condition device command received from the main control board 300 are included. Based on the information related to the winning combination, a lottery is performed as to whether or not to acquire ART points. In addition, when the lottery is won, the sub CPU 401 performs a process of storing the winning value in the ART point storage area provided in the sub RAM 403. Then, when the process of step S302-3-1-2-5-17-3-3 ends, the process proceeds to step S302-3-1-2-5-17-4-4.

(ART point addition lottery process)
Next, the ART point addition lottery process performed by the process of step S302-3-1-2-5-17-3-3 in FIG. 186 will be described based on FIG. FIG. 187 is a diagram showing a subroutine of effect lottery processing.

(Step S302-3-1-2-5-17-3-3-1)
In step S302-3-1-2-5-17-3-3-1, the sub CPU 401 performs a reel lock effect addition lottery process which will be described in detail later with reference to FIG. Specifically, the sub CPU 401 determines the ART state point acquisition lottery table provided in the sub ROM 402 based on the value stored in the ART level storage area provided in the sub RAM 403 (FIG. 72A). 72 (B), 72 (C), and 72 (D)), the selected ART state point acquisition lottery table and the condition device command received from the main control board 300 are included. Based on the information related to the winning combination and the information related to the reel lock effect included in the conditional device command, the lottery process for adding ART points is performed. Then, when the process of step S302-3-1-2-5-17-3-3-1 ends, the process proceeds to step S302-3-1-2-5-17-3-3-3.

(Step S302-3-1-2-5-17-3-3-3)
In step S302-3-1-2-5-17-3-3-3, the sub CPU 401 performs a spinning effect addition lottery process which will be described in detail later with reference to FIG. Specifically, the sub CPU 401 determines the ART state point acquisition lottery table provided in the sub ROM 402 based on the value stored in the ART level storage area provided in the sub RAM 403 (FIG. 72A). 72 (B), 72 (C), and 72 (D)), the selected ART state point acquisition lottery table and the condition device command received from the main control board 300 are included. Based on the information related to the winning combination and the information related to the spinning effect included in the conditional device command, the lottery process for adding the ART points is performed. Then, when the process of step S302-3-1-2-5-17-3-3-3 ends, the process proceeds to step S302-3-1-2-5-17-3-3-3.

(Step S302-3-1-2-5-17-3-3-3)
In step S302-3-1-2-5-17-3-3-3, the sub CPU 401 performs an extra lottery process for other extra occasions. Specifically, the sub CPU 401 determines the ART state point acquisition lottery table provided in the sub ROM 402 based on the value stored in the ART level storage area provided in the sub RAM 403 (FIG. 72A). 72 (B), 72 (C), and 72 (D)), the selected ART state point acquisition lottery table and the condition device command received from the main control board 300 are included. Based on the information related to the winning combination, the ART points are added and a lottery process is performed. When the processing of step S302-3-1-2-5-17-3-3-3 is completed, the ART point addition lottery processing subroutine is terminated, and the ART state processing step S302-3-1-1 is completed. The process proceeds to 2-5-17-4-4.

(Reel lock production extra lottery process)
Next, based on FIG. 188, the reel lock production extra lottery process performed by the process of step S302-3-1-2-5-17-3-3-1 in FIG. 187 will be described. FIG. 188 is a diagram showing a subroutine for lottery processing on the reel lock effect.

(Step S302-3-1-2-5-17-3-3-3-1)
In step S302-3-1-2-5-17-3-3-1-1, the sub CPU 401 performs processing to determine whether or not the reel lock effect has been won. Specifically, the sub CPU 401 performs a process of determining whether or not the reel lock effect is won based on the information related to the reel lock effect included in the conditional device command. If the information related to the reel lock effect indicates other than “00H”, it is determined that the reel lock effect is won. If it is determined that the reel lock effect is won (step S302-3-1-2-5-17-3-3-1-1 = Yes), step S302-3-1-2. When the process is shifted to -5-17-3-3-1-2 and it is determined that the reel lock effect is not won (step S302-3-1-2-5-17-3-3) -1-1 = No), the reel lock production extra lottery processing subroutine is terminated, and the process proceeds to step S302-3-1-2-5-17-3-3 in the ART point extra lottery processing.

(Step S302-3-1-2-5-17-3-3-3-1)
In step S302-3-1-2-5-17-3-3-1-2, the sub CPU 401 performs an extra lottery process corresponding to the reel lock effect winning. Specifically, when the information related to the reel lock effect indicates “02H”, “03H”, or “04H”, the sub CPU 401 determines the ART state point acquisition lottery table provided in the sub ROM 402. The ART point corresponding to the winning combination is determined from the positions of the step-up reel locks SU1 to SU3 (see FIGS. 72A, 72B, 72C, and 72D). When the information related to the reel lock effect indicates “05H” or “06H”, the ART state point acquisition lottery table provided in the sub ROM 402 (FIG. 72 (A), FIG. 72 (B) 72) (see FIG. 72 (C) and FIG. 72 (D)), the ART point corresponding to the winning combination is determined from the locations of the step-up reel locks SU4 to SU5. When the processing of step S302-3-1-2-5-17-3-3-1-2 is completed, the reel lock production extra lottery processing subroutine is finished, and step S302-3 in the ART point extra lottery processing is completed. The process is shifted to -1--2-5-17-3-3-3.

(Rotating lottery process added)
Next, on the basis of FIG. 189, the spinning effect addition lottery process performed by the process of step S302-3-1-2-5-17-3-3-3 in FIG. 187 will be described. FIG. 189 is a diagram showing a subroutine of lottery processing for adding a spinning effect.

(Step S302-3-1-2-5-17-3-3-3-1)
In step S <b> 302-3-1-2-5-17-3-2-1, the sub CPU 401 performs a process of determining whether or not the spinning effect is won. Specifically, the sub CPU 401 performs a process of determining whether or not the turning effect is won based on information relating to the turning effect included in the conditional device command. In addition, when the information regarding a rotation effect has shown except "00H", it determines with having won the rotation effect. If it is determined that the spinning effect is won (step S302-3-1-2-5-17-3-32-1 = Yes), step S302-3-1-2. When the process proceeds to -5-17-3-3-3-2 and it is determined that the spinning effect is not won (step S302-3-1-2-5-17-3-3) -2-1 = No), the spinning effect addition lottery processing subroutine is terminated, and the process proceeds to step S302-3-1-2-5-17-3-3-3 in the ART point addition lottery processing.

(Step S302-3-1-2-5-17-3-3-3-2)
In step S302-3-1-2-5-17-3-3-3-2, the sub CPU 401 performs an extra lottery process corresponding to the spinning effect winning. Specifically, the sub CPU 401 uses the ART state point acquisition lottery table provided in the sub ROM 402 (see FIG. 72A, FIG. 72B, FIG. 72C, and FIG. 72D). The ART point corresponding to the winning combination is determined from the location of the spinning effect. Then, when the processing of step S302-3-1-2-5-17-3-3-3-2 is completed, the subroutine for the spinning effect addition lottery processing is ended, and step S302-3 in the ART point addition lottery processing is completed. The process is shifted to -1-2-2-5-17-3-3.

  As described above, according to the fifth embodiment, in the game in which the first rotation effect is executed, even if the second rotation effect is determined, it is based on the determination of the first rotation effect. A privilege can be granted and a privilege based on the determination of the second spinning effect can be granted. Accordingly, one of the spinning effects is executed in a fixed manner, and the execution of the other rotating effect is restricted, giving an impression that the privilege of the restricted turning effect cannot be received. It is possible to prevent a decrease in the entertainment interest.

  According to the fifth embodiment, in step S302-3-1-2-5-17-3-3-1-2, an ART state point acquisition lottery table (FIG. 72 (A), FIG. 72 ( B), FIG. 72 (C), and FIG. 72 (D)), an ART point extra lottery at the time of reel lock effect winning is performed, and step S302-3-1-2-5-17-3. In 3-2-1, using the ART state point acquisition lottery table (see FIGS. 72 (A), 72 (B), 72 (C), 72 (D)) at the time of winning the spinning effect Although it is configured so that the ART point is added and a lottery is performed, it can also be configured as follows.

  For example, when in the third chance state, when performing the state transition lottery using the third chance state transition lottery table shown in FIG. 61, the state transition lottery is performed based on the reel lock effect to be executed. While performing (transition lottery is performed using (C) or (D) in FIG. 61), a state transition lottery is performed based on the rotation effect that is restricted from being performed (transition using (E) in FIG. 61). Lottery). By configuring in this way, it is possible to receive a lottery that can shift to an advantageous state in both the reel-lock effect that is executed and the spinning effect that is restricted from being executed, thereby preventing a decrease in gaming interest. can do.

  Further, when in the normal mode, the state transition is performed based on the reel lock effect that is executed when the state transition lottery is performed using the normal mode Bonus preparation state transition lottery table shown in FIG. While performing the lottery, it is also possible to perform a state transition lottery based on the spinning performance that is restricted from being executed. By configuring in this way, it is possible to receive a lottery that can shift to an advantageous state in both the reel-lock effect that is executed and the spinning effect that is restricted from being executed, thereby preventing a decrease in gaming interest. can do.

  Also, when in the Bonus precursor state, using the precursor promotion lottery table (waiting for the first Bonus) (shown in FIG. 65 (A)), from waiting for the first Bonus, waiting for the second Bonus, or waiting for the third Bonus. When performing a promotion lottery to the inside, and using the precursor promotion lottery table (waiting for the second Bonus) shown in FIG. 65 (B), the promotion lottery from waiting for the second Bonus to waiting for the third Bonus is performed. In this case, the promotion lottery can be performed based on the spinning drum effect that is restricted in execution while performing the promotion lottery based on the reel lock effect to be executed. If comprised in this way, since it can receive the lottery which can be promoted to advantageous Bonus standby in both the reel lock production to be performed and the spinning production production to which execution is restricted, a decrease in the game entertainment interest Can be prevented.

  Further, when in the Bonus ready state, using the confirmation screen promotion lottery table (waiting for the first Bonus) shown in FIG. 66 (A), from waiting for the first Bonus, waiting for the second Bonus, or waiting for the third Bonus. When performing a promotion lottery to the inside, and using the confirmation screen promotion lottery table (waiting for the second Bonus) shown in FIG. 66 (B), the promotion lottery from waiting for the second Bonus to waiting for the third Bonus is performed. When performing, it is conceivable that the promotion lottery is performed based on the rotation effect that is restricted in execution while performing the promotion lottery based on the reel lock effect to be executed. If comprised in this way, since it can receive the lottery which can be promoted to advantageous Bonus standby in both the reel lock production to be performed and the spinning production production to which execution is restricted, a decrease in the game entertainment interest Can be prevented.

  Further, when the state is in the ART state, using the state state lottery table for the ART state shown in FIG. 71, when performing the state lottery from the ART state to the chance state during the ART or the first added state, It is conceivable to perform the state transition lottery based on the spinning effect that is restricted from being executed while performing the state transition lottery based on the reel lock effect to be performed. By configuring in this way, it is possible to receive a lottery that can shift to an advantageous state in both the reel-lock effect that is executed and the spinning effect that is restricted from being executed, thereby preventing a decrease in gaming interest. can do.

  Further, when in the ART ready state, when the ART point acquisition lottery is performed using the ART preparation state point acquisition lottery table shown in FIG. It is also possible to perform an ART point acquisition lottery based on the spinning performance that is restricted in execution. If constituted in this way, since it is possible to receive an ART point acquisition lottery both in the reel lock effect to be executed and the spinning effect in which the execution is restricted, it is possible to prevent a decrease in gaming entertainment. it can.

  Further, when the player is in the RUSH preparation state, when performing an ART point acquisition lottery using the first RUSH preparation state point acquisition lottery table shown in FIG. While performing point acquisition lottery, it is also possible to perform ART point acquisition lottery based on the spinning performance that is restricted from being executed. If constituted in this way, since it is possible to receive an ART point acquisition lottery both in the reel lock effect to be executed and the spinning effect in which the execution is restricted, it is possible to prevent a decrease in gaming entertainment. it can.

  Further, when the player is in the RUSH preparation state, the ART is acquired based on the reel lock effect that is executed when the ART point acquisition lottery is performed using the second RUSH preparation state point acquisition lottery table shown in FIG. 73 (C). While performing point acquisition lottery, it is also possible to perform ART point acquisition lottery based on the spinning performance that is restricted from being executed. If constituted in this way, since it is possible to receive an ART point acquisition lottery both in the reel lock effect to be executed and the spinning effect in which the execution is restricted, it is possible to prevent a decrease in gaming entertainment. it can.

  Based on the reel lock effect that is executed when the ART point acquisition lottery is performed using the first additional state point acquisition lottery table shown in FIG. 75A in the first additional state. While performing the ART point acquisition lottery, the ART point acquisition lottery can also be performed based on the spinning performance that is restricted from being executed. If constituted in this way, since it is possible to receive an ART point acquisition lottery both in the reel lock effect to be executed and the spinning effect in which the execution is restricted, it is possible to prevent a decrease in gaming entertainment. it can.

  Further, when in the ART chance state, based on the reel lock effect executed when the lottery table for transition to the RUSH state is performed using the RUSH state transition lottery table for ART chance state shown in FIG. 76 (B). Thus, the transfer lottery can be performed based on the spinning effect that is restricted in execution. With this configuration, it is possible to receive a lottery transition to the RUSH state in both the reel-lock effect that is executed and the spinning effect that is restricted from being executed. Can do.

  Further, when the ART point acquisition lottery is performed by using the ART chance state point acquisition lottery table shown in FIG. 76C in the ART chance state, the ART is executed based on the reel lock effect to be executed. While performing point acquisition lottery, it is also possible to perform ART point acquisition lottery based on the spinning performance that is restricted from being executed. If constituted in this way, since it is possible to receive an ART point acquisition lottery both in the reel lock effect to be executed and the spinning effect in which the execution is restricted, it is possible to prevent a decrease in gaming entertainment. it can.

  Further, when in the battle state, as shown in FIG. 80 (B), the lottery value for continuing the ART state is greater when the spinning effect is performed than when the reel lock effect is performed. Since it is high, when it is in the battle state, the spinning effect may be executed with priority. If comprised in this way, the big privilege called the continuation of the ART state by a spinning effect winning is not lost, and the fall of game entertainment can be prevented.

  In addition, when the game that executes the spinning effect based on the reservation and the game that wins the reel lock effect and executes the reel lock effect overlap, it may be configured to notify that the overlap has occurred. And when giving a privilege, you may make it alert | report separately the privilege by a rotation effect winning, and the privilege by reel lock effect winning. By configuring in this way, even if the game that executes the spinning effect based on the reservation and the game that wins the reel lock effect and executes the reel lock effect overlap, any benefit If it is not received, the player will not be reminded, and a decrease in the gaming interest can be prevented.

(Reel lock animation)
Next, the reel lock effect animation in the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. In FIG. 182 (a), reference numerals of the liquid crystal display device 46, the rendering device 50, the left reel 18, the middle reel 19, and the right reel 20 are shown, but in FIG. 182 (b) to (e). Since they are common, the reference numerals are omitted.

  Further, as a precondition of FIG. 182, “weak cherry” is determined as the winning combination by the internal lottery process, and the reel lock effect SU0 is executed.

  First, the state shown in FIG. 182 (a) shows a state before the start lever 10 is operated, that is, a state before the game is started. In this state, when the start lever 10 is operated, the state transits to the state shown in FIG.

  Next, in the state shown in FIG. 182 (b), the start lever 10 is operated and the game is started. In this state, the left reel 18, the middle reel 19, and the right reel 20 are rotated in the reverse direction by "1" symbols, and the left reel 18, the middle reel 19, and the right reel 20 are rotated at the rotated positions. Stopped. In this state, the operation of the left stop button 11, the middle stop button 12, and the right stop button 13 is not accepted. In the reel lock effect, the rotation speed when rotating the symbols in the reverse direction of the left reel 18, the middle reel 19, and the right reel 20 is the rotation speed when rotating in the forward direction when a normal game is performed. Compared to the speed, the rotation speed is low.

  In the state shown in FIG. 182 (b), the rendering device 50 is operated, and the liquid crystal display device 46 is in a state where a predetermined flash image is displayed in front of the character image. And when predetermined time passes from this state, it will change to the state shown in Drawing 182 (c).

  Next, in the state shown in FIG. 182 (c), the character introduction image is displayed on the liquid crystal display device 46 while the rotation of the left reel 18, the middle reel 19, and the right reel 20 is stopped. ing. A plurality of types of character images are prepared, and the character images are switched step by step. For example, when the character image set at the final stage is reached, it can be expected that the winning combination advantageous to the player is determined as compared with the case where the character set at the initial stage is displayed. It is like that.

  In the state shown in FIG. 182 (c), the operation of the left stop button 11, the middle stop button 12, and the right stop button 13 is not accepted. In addition, the rendering device 50 is moved to the original position. And when predetermined time passes from this state, it will change to the state shown in Drawing 182 (d).

  Next, in the state shown in FIG. 182 (d), the left reel 18, the middle reel 19 and the right reel 20 are rotated from the stopped state to the forward direction. In the liquid crystal display device 46, an image indicating that a special winning combination (for example, a special small combination such as “weak cherry”) is established is displayed. When the left reel 18, the middle reel 19, and the right reel 20 rotate in the forward direction, the operation of the left stop button 11, the middle stop button 12, and the right stop button 13 is accepted, and the left stop button 11, the middle stop button 12. Based on the stop operation of the right stop button 13, the rotation of the reel can be stopped. Then, after the operation of the left stop button 11, the middle stop button 12, and the right stop button 13 is accepted, when the stop operation is performed by the left stop button 11, the middle stop button 12, and the right stop button 13, FIG. Transition to the state indicated by (e).

  Next, in the state shown in FIG. 182 (e), when the stop operation is performed by the left stop button 11, the middle stop button 12, and the right stop button 13, the left reel 18, the middle reel 19, and the right reel 20 are moved. Indicates a stopped state. In the left reel 18, the middle reel 19, and the right reel 20, the symbol combination relating to “weak cherry” is stopped and displayed, and the liquid crystal display device 46 displays an image indicating “cherry”.

  In this way, when the reel lock effect is performed, the reel rotation is stopped for a predetermined time, and then the reel is forwardly rotated to perform the stop operation, thereby allowing the player to perform a special winning combination (for example, , A special small role such as “Weak Cherry”) can be notified. In a state where the rotation of the reels is stopped, a so-called freeze state in which a stop operation by the left stop button 11, the middle stop button 12, the right stop button 13, or an operation of the start lever 10 is not accepted.

(Animation produced by Long Freeze)
Next, with reference to FIG. 183, the animation of the long freeze effect in the present embodiment will be described. In FIG. 183 (a), reference numerals of the liquid crystal display device 46, the rendering device 50, the left reel 18, the middle reel 19, and the right reel 20 are shown, but in FIGS. 183 (b) to (g). Since they are common, the reference numerals are omitted.

  The explanation will be applied to the case where the long freeze effect is won at the rate of “125/251” when “direct bonus” of the winning number “05” is determined as the winning combination by the internal lottery process. .

  First, the state shown in FIG. 183 (a) shows a state when the start lever 10 is operated, that is, a state at the start of the game. In this state, even if the start lever 10 is operated, the left reel 18, the middle reel 19, and the right reel 20 are not rotated and are stopped at a position before the game is started. Further, in the liquid crystal display device 46, the screen is switched to the dark screen based on the operation of the start lever 10. And after that, it changes to the state shown in Drawing 183 (b). In the state shown in FIG. 183 (a), the operation of the left stop button 11, the middle stop button 12, and the right stop button 13 is not accepted.

  Next, in the state shown in FIG. 183 (b), the left reel 18, the middle reel 19, and the right reel 20 remain stationary, and the display image on the liquid crystal display device 46 also remains a dark screen. That is, the state shown in FIG. 183 (b) is maintained for a predetermined time. And after that, it changes to the state shown in Drawing 183 (c). In the state shown in FIG. 183 (b), the operations of the left stop button 11, the middle stop button 12, and the right stop button 13 are not accepted.

  Next, in the state shown in FIG. 183 (c), the left reel 18, the middle reel 19, and the right reel 20 are rotated from the stopped state to the reverse direction. In the liquid crystal display device 46, a predetermined character image is displayed. And after that, it changes to the state shown in Drawing 183 (d). In the state shown in FIG. 183 (c), the operations of the left stop button 11, the middle stop button 12, and the right stop button 13 are not accepted. In the long freeze effect, the rotation speed when the left reel 18, the middle reel 19 and the right reel 20 are rotated in the reverse direction is the rotation speed when the normal reel is rotated in the normal rotation. Compared to the low rotational speed.

  Next, in the state shown in FIG. 183 (d), the left reel 18, the middle reel 19, and the right reel 20 are rotated in the reverse direction, and the liquid crystal display device 46 has a predetermined character image and a predetermined serif image. Is displayed. And after that, it changes to the state shown in Drawing 183 (e). In the state shown in FIG. 183 (d), the operations of the left stop button 11, the middle stop button 12, and the right stop button 13 are not accepted.

  Next, in the state shown in FIG. 183 (e), the left reel 18, the middle reel 19, and the right reel 20 that have been rotated in the reverse direction are temporarily stopped at predetermined positions. In the liquid crystal display device 46, a predetermined character image is displayed. Then, the state transits to the state shown in FIG. 183 (f). In the state shown in FIG. 183 (e), the operation of the left stop button 11, the middle stop button 12, and the right stop button 13 is not accepted.

  Next, in the state shown in FIG. 183 (f), the left reel 18, the middle reel 19, and the right reel 20 that have been temporarily stopped are rotated in the forward direction. In the liquid crystal display device 46, an image indicating that “direct hit Bonus” is established is displayed. In addition, an image “1” is displayed in the display area at the upper position of the left reel 18 so that the left reel 18 is first operated to stop aiming at the “direct hit Bonus” symbol.

  When the left reel 18, the middle reel 19, and the right reel 20 rotate in the forward direction, the operation of the left stop button 11, the middle stop button 12, and the right stop button 13 is accepted, and the left stop button 11, the middle stop button 12. Based on the stop operation of the right stop button 13, the rotation of the reel can be stopped. Then, after the operations of the left stop button 11, the middle stop button 12, and the right stop button 13 are accepted, when the stop operation is performed by the left stop button 11, the middle stop button 12, and the right stop button 13, FIG. 183 Transition to the state indicated by (g).

  Next, in the state shown in FIG. 183 (g), when the stop operation is performed by the left stop button 11, the middle stop button 12, and the right stop button 13, the left reel 18, the middle reel 19, and the right reel 20 are moved. Indicates a stopped state. It should be noted that the symbol combination relating to “direct hit Bonus” is stopped and displayed on the left reel 18, middle reel 19, and right reel 20, and an image showing “direct hit Bonus” is displayed on the liquid crystal display device 46.

  As described above, when the long freeze effect is performed, the rotation of the reel is stopped for a predetermined time, and then the reel is reversely rotated for a predetermined time. By performing the above, it is possible to notify the player that “direct hit Bonus” has been established. In the state where the rotation of the reel is stopped, the state where the reel is reversely rotated, and the state where the reel is temporarily stopped, a stop operation by the left stop button 11, the middle stop button 12, the right stop button 13, This is a so-called freeze state in which the operation of the start lever 10 or the like is not accepted. The rotation speed when rotating the left reel 18, the middle reel 19, and the right reel 20 in the reverse direction when executing the long freeze effect is the same as when executing another reel lock effect (for example, reel lock effect SU0). The left reel 18, middle reel 19, and right reel 20 may be different from the rotation speed when rotating in the reverse direction, or may be the same.

(Timing chart when reel lock production is won)
Next, based on FIG. 190, a timing chart when the reel lock effect is won will be described. Note that FIG. 190 shows an example of the case where the reel lock effect is won in a situation where the reel effect is not won and the reel effect is not reserved.

  First, at the timing of FIG. 190A, when the value of the inserted number counter provided in the main RAM 303 is “3” and the start switch 10sw is turned on, the “1” game starts. It becomes. At this time, a process for determining the winning combination, a process for determining whether or not to execute the spinning effect, and a process for determining whether or not to execute the reel lock effect are performed. In addition, in the timing (1st game) of FIG. 190 (A), the case where it has not won both a reel lock effect and a rotation effect is shown.

  Next, at the timing of FIG. 190B, when the value of the inserted number counter provided in the main RAM 303 is “3” and the start switch 10sw is turned on, the “2” game is It will start. At this time, a process for determining the winning combination, a process for determining whether or not to execute the spinning effect, and a process for determining whether or not to execute the reel lock effect are performed. It is assumed that the reel lock effect is won at the timing of FIG. 190 (B). In this case, the reel lock effect is executed at the timing of FIG. 190 (C).

(Timing chart at the time of winning the spinning effect)
Next, based on FIG. 191, a timing chart in the case where the spinning effect is won will be described. FIG. 191 shows an example in which the reel effect is not won in a situation where the reel effect is won and the reel effect is reserved.

  First, at the timing of FIG. 191 (A), when the value of the inserted number counter provided in the main RAM 303 is “3” and the start switch 10sw is turned on, the “1” game is started. Become. At this time, a process for determining the winning combination, a process for determining whether or not to execute the spinning effect, and a process for determining whether or not to execute the reel lock effect are performed. Then, it is assumed that it is determined to execute the spinning effect.

  Next, at the timing of FIG. 191 (B), the main CPU 301 makes a reservation for the spinning effect when executing the spinning effect. As a result of this processing, the spinning effect is executed after the start switch 10sw is turned on in the “2” game.

  Next, at the timing of FIG. 191 (C), the sub CPU 401 executes a spinning effect suggestion effect that suggests the possibility of the rotation effect being executed.

  Next, at the timing of FIG. 191 (D), the sub CPU 401 ends the spinning effect suggestion effect because the “1” game has ended.

  Next, at the timing of FIG. 191 (E), the main CPU 301 determines that “2” when the value of the insertion number counter provided in the main RAM 303 is “3” and the start switch 10sw is turned on. The game starts. At this time, a process for determining the winning combination, a process for determining whether or not to execute the spinning effect, and a process for determining whether or not to execute the reel lock effect are performed. At this time, it is determined whether or not there is a reservation for the spinning effect, and if there is a reservation for the spinning effect, a process for executing the spinning effect is performed.

  Next, at the timing of FIG. 191 (F), the main CPU 301 performs a process for executing the spinning effect, and then clears the information related to the spinning effect reserved in the “1” game. Do.

  Next, at the timing of FIG. 191 (G), the main CPU 301 performs a process of executing a spinning effect.

(Timing chart in the case where the reeling effect execution game based on the reservation and the reel lock effect winning game overlap)
Next, based on FIG. 192, a timing chart in the case where a reel lock effect is won in a game with a rotation effect reservation (that is, a game in which the rotation effect is executed) will be described.

  First, at the timing of FIG. 192 (A), when the value of the inserted number counter provided in the main RAM 303 is “3” and the start switch 10sw is turned on, the “1” game is started. Become. At this time, a process for determining the winning combination, a process for determining whether or not to execute the spinning effect, and a process for determining whether or not to execute the reel lock effect are performed. Then, it is assumed that it is determined to execute the spinning effect.

  Next, at the timing of FIG. 192 (B), the main CPU 301 makes a reservation for the spinning effect when executing the spinning effect. As a result of this processing, the spinning effect is executed after the start switch 10sw is turned on in the “2” game.

  Next, at the timing of FIG. 192 (C), the sub CPU 401 executes a spinning effect suggestion effect that suggests the possibility of the rotation effect being executed.

  Next, at the timing of FIG. 192 (D), since the “1” game is over, the sub CPU 401 ends the spinning effect suggestion effect.

  Next, at the timing shown in FIG. 192 (E), the main CPU 301 determines that the value of the insertion number counter provided in the main RAM 303 is “3” and the start switch 10sw is turned “2”. The game starts. At this time, a process for determining the winning combination, a process for determining whether or not to execute the spinning effect, and a process for determining whether or not to execute the reel lock effect are performed. At this time, it is determined whether or not there is a reservation for the spinning effect, and if there is a reservation for the spinning effect, a process for executing the spinning effect is performed. It is assumed that the reel lock effect is won at the timing shown in FIG. In this case, the reel lock effect is executed at the timing of (G) in FIG.

  Next, at the timing of FIG. 192 (F), the main CPU 301 performs processing for clearing the information related to the spinning effect reserved for the “1” game in order to preferentially execute the selected reel lock effect. .

  Next, at the timing of FIG. 192 (G), the main CPU 301 performs processing for executing the selected reel lock effect. In other words, when there is a reservation for the spinning effect, if the reel lock effect is won, execution of the spinning effect is restricted and the reel lock effect is executed with priority.

  In addition, each said embodiment can also be used in arbitrary combinations. For example, the third embodiment may be used in combination with the first embodiment, or the fourth embodiment may be used in combination with the first embodiment. Further, the third embodiment and the fourth embodiment may be used in combination with the first embodiment. Further, the fifth embodiment may be used in combination with the first embodiment. Further, the first embodiment may be used in combination with the third embodiment and the fifth embodiment. Further, the fourth embodiment and the fifth embodiment may be combined with the first embodiment. Moreover, you may use combining 3rd Embodiment, 4th Embodiment, and 5th Embodiment with 1st Embodiment.

  In the present embodiment, the number of games in which the first rotation effect is executed can be any number of games from the game for which the first rotation effect is determined. For example, the first spinning effect may be executed in a game next to the game for which the first spinning effect is determined, or three games have elapsed since the game for which the first spinning effect was determined. You may make it perform a 1st rotation effect in a game.

  In the present embodiment, the left reel 18, the middle reel 19, and the right reel 20 constitute the symbol display means of the present application.

  In the present embodiment, the start lever 10, the start switch 10sw, the status board 100, and the main control board 300 (particularly the main CPU 301) constitute start operation detecting means of the present application.

  In the present embodiment, the main control board 300 (particularly the main CPU 301) that performs the process of determining the winning combination by performing the internal lottery process constitutes the winning combination determining means of the present application.

  In the present embodiment, the main control board 300 (particularly the main CPU 301) that performs the process of determining whether or not to execute the spinning effect by performing the effect determination process is the first control effect determining unit of the present application. Configure.

  In the present embodiment, the main control board 300 (particularly the main CPU 301) that performs the process of determining whether or not to execute the reel lock effect by performing the effect determination process is the second cylinder effect determination means of the present application. Configure.

  In the present embodiment, the main control board 300 (particularly the main CPU 301) that controls the execution of the first spinning effect constitutes the first spinning effect execution control means of the present application.

  In the present embodiment, the main control board 300 (particularly the main CPU 301) that controls the execution of the second spinning effect constitutes the second spinning effect execution control means of the present application.

  In the present embodiment, when the game for controlling the execution of the first spinning effect overlaps with the game for controlling the execution of the second spinning effect, the execution control of the first spinning effect is limited. The main control board 300 (particularly the main CPU 301) that performs processing for giving priority to execution control of the second spinning effect constitutes priority means of the present application.

Other technical ideas that can be grasped from the above-described embodiment are as follows.
(A) Based on the fact that the start operation is detected by the start operation detecting means, the start operation detecting means for detecting the start operation by the player, the symbol display means for variably displaying and stopping a plurality of symbols, The winning combination determining means for determining the winning combination, the first winding effect determining means for determining whether or not to execute the first winding effect, and whether or not to execute the second rotating effect. When it is determined by the second torso effect determining means and the first torso effect determining means to execute the first torso effect, the game after the game determined to execute the first torso effect In the game, when it is determined by the first timeline effect execution control means for executing and controlling the first timeline effect and the second timeline effect determination means that the second timeline effect is determined to be executed, The game that has been decided to perform the second round effect In the system, a second drum effect execution control means for executing and controlling the second drum effect, a control for executing the first drum effect by the first drum effect execution control means, and the second In a case where it is determined that the execution control of the trunk effect is performed in the same game, a game situation determination means for judging whether the game situation is the first game situation or the second game situation. And the first spinning effect execution control means executes and controls the first spinning effect when the gaming situation determination means determines that the first gaming situation is present, and the second The turning effect execution control means executes execution control of the second turning effect when the gaming situation determination means determines that the second gaming situation is present.

  (B) Based on the fact that the start operation is detected by the start operation detecting means, the start operation detecting means for detecting the start operation by the player, the symbol display means for variably displaying and stopping a plurality of symbols, The winning combination determining means for determining the winning combination, the first winding effect determining means for determining whether or not to execute the first winding effect, and whether or not to execute the second rotating effect. When it is determined by the second torso effect determining means and the first torso effect determining means to execute the first torso effect, the game after the game determined to execute the first torso effect In the game, when it is determined by the first timeline effect execution control means for executing and controlling the first timeline effect and the second timeline effect determination means that the second timeline effect is determined to be executed, The game that has been decided to perform the second round effect A second drum effect execution control means for executing and controlling the second reel effect, a game in which the first drum effect execution control means executes and controls the first reel effect, and the first When a game in which the second-turn effect execution control means overlaps with the game for executing and controlling the second-turn effect, the execution control of one of the second-turn effects is restricted, and the execution control of the other-turn effect is controlled. Priority execution control means for performing control to be preferentially executed, and the first rotation effect determination means for determining that the first rotation effect is to be executed, and the priority execution control means determines the first rotation effect. Even when the execution control of the first torso effect is determined, the second torso effect determining means and the second torso effect determining means that can give a benefit advantageous to the player and the second torso effect determining means. The priority execution control is determined to execute the production. Even when the execution control of the second drum effect is restricted by the stage, a bonus granting means for determining the second drum effect that can give a bonus advantageous to the player is provided. And

  In the present embodiment, a gaming machine used for a spinning machine (slot machine) has been described. However, the gaming machine may be used for a pachinko gaming machine, a sparrow ball gaming machine, or an arrangement ball gaming machine.

1 gaming machine 2 cabinet 3 front door 4 hinge mechanism 5 key hole 6 medal slot 7 BET button 7sw BET switch 8 MAXBET button 8sw MAXBET switch 9 settlement button 9sw settlement switch 10 start lever 10sw start switch 11 left stop button 11sw left stop switch 12 Middle stop button 12sw Middle stop switch 13 Right stop button 13sw Right stop switch 14 Return button 15 Selector 15s Selector sensor 16s Error release sensor 17s Door open / close sensor 18 Left reel 19 Middle reel 20 Right reel 21 Production button 22 Cross key 23 Display window 24 Start lamp 25 1st BET lamp 26 2nd BET lamp 27 3rd BET lamp 28 Stored number display device 29 Discharged number display device 30 Allowable display lamp 31 Replay display Amplifier 32 Bonus display unit 33 ART display unit 34 RUSH display unit 35 stop button operation display unit 35L left stop button operation display section 35C in the stop button operation display unit 35R right stop button operation display unit 36 start lever LED
37 Waist panel 38 Receptacle unit 39 Medal payout opening 40 Upper left speaker 41 Lower left speaker 42 Upper right speaker 43 Lower right speaker 44 Setting display section 45 Setting change button 45sw Setting change switch 46 Liquid crystal display device 47 External concentration terminal board 48 Setting change Key hole 49sw Setting change key switch 50 Production device 51 Base part 52 Handle part 53 Sheath part 100 Status board 150 Reel control board 151 Left stepping motor 152 Middle stepping motor 153 Right stepping motor 154s Left reel sensor 155s Middle reel sensor 156s Right reel sensor 200 power board 201 power button 201sw power switch 202 hopper 203 auxiliary storage 203s auxiliary storage sensor 204 discharge slit 205 hopper guide member 206 guide member 07 dispensing guide member 250 set the switch board 300 the main control board 301 the main CPU
302 Main ROM
303 Main RAM
304 Main random number generator 400 Sub control board 401 Sub CPU
402 Sub ROM
403 Sub RAM
404 Sub-random number generator 450 Backlight relay board 451 Left backlight board 452 Middle backlight board 453 Right backlight board 461 Left backlight 462 Middle backlight 463 Right backlight 500 Amplifier board 600 Production control board 601 Production control CPU
602 Production control ROM
603 Production control RAM
604 CGROM
605 Sound source IC
606 Sound source ROM
650 effect device drive board 651 left effect device motor 652s upper left effect device sensor 653s lower left effect device sensor 654 right effect device motor 655s upper right effect device sensor 656s lower right effect device sensor 657s left liquid crystal lift motor 658s left upper liquid crystal lift sensor 659s lower left liquid crystal lift Sensor 660 Right liquid crystal lift motor 661s Upper right liquid crystal lift sensor 662s Lower right liquid crystal lift sensor 700 Panel LED relay board 701 MAXBET button LED board 702 Stop button LED board 703 Production button LED board 704 Lumbar panel LED board 705 Bonus display LED board 706 ART display LED board 707 RUSH display LED board 708 Stop button operation LED board 709 Start lever LED board 710 Production button sensor 711 Cross key board 72 1 MAXBET button LED
722 Stop button LED
722L Left stop button LED
722C Middle stop button LED
722R Right stop button LED
723 Production Button LED
724 Lumbar panel LED
750 Production device drive relay board 800 Production device control board 801 Upper left production apparatus board 802 Lower left production apparatus board 803 Upper right production apparatus board 804 Lower right production apparatus board 811 Upper left production apparatus 812 Left lower production apparatus 813 Upper right production apparatus 814 Lower right production apparatus 850 LED control board 851 Top LED board 852 Corner LED board 853 Side LED board 854 Receptacle side LED board 855 Receptacle LED board 861 Corner LED
862 Top LED
863 Side LED
864 saucer side LED
865 Receptacle LED
1000 Normal state point display area 1001 Memory display area 1002 Lottery number display area 1003 RUSH remaining game number display area 1004 ART point display area 1005 Acquired number display area

In order to solve such a problem, a gaming machine according to the present invention includes a symbol display means for variably displaying and stopping a plurality of symbols, a start operation detecting means for detecting a start operation by a player, and the start operation. The winning combination determining means for determining the winning combination based on the detection of the start operation by the detecting means, and the first winding effect determining means for determining whether or not to execute the first rotating effect by lottery. And determining whether or not to execute the first spinning effect by second lottery effect determining means for determining whether or not to execute the second rotating effect and by the first torso effect determining means. If, in the first round the first game after the second game of a determination is made to execute the cylinder effect, the not based on the winning combination is won in the second game, advantageous given to the player of the first of the reel-director of the award A 1st cylinder demonstration execution control means for controlling the line, if it is determined to execute the second reel-effect by the 2nd barrel effect determination unit, and executes the second reel-effect determination equipped with a 2nd body demonstration execution control means that you Keru the winning combination in the game is to control the execution of the second of the reel-director to suggest to the player the possibility that a particular winning combination was, the, In the second game, the second torso effect execution control means performs the second torso effect execution control unit in the second game even if it is determined to execute the first torso effect in the first game. When it is determined to execute the second spinning effect, the execution of the second spinning effect is controlled .

Claims (1)

A symbol display means for variably displaying and stopping a plurality of symbols;
Start operation detecting means for detecting a start operation by the player;
Based on the fact that the start operation is detected by the start operation detecting means, a winning combination determining means for determining a winning combination;
First drum effect determining means for determining whether or not to execute the first drum effect;
Second drum effect determining means for determining whether or not to execute the second drum effect;
In the game after the game decided to execute the first spinning effect when the first spinning effect production unit is determined to execute the first spinning effect production, the first spinning device is determined. First torso effect execution control means for executing and controlling the effect;
In the case where it is determined by the second torso effect determining means to execute the second torso effect, the second torso effect is executed in the game determined to execute the second torso effect. Second body effect execution control means for controlling;
The game in which the first torso effect execution control means executes and controls the first torso effect and the game in which the second torso effect execution control means executes and controls the second torso effect. In such a case, the execution control of the first rotation effect execution control unit by the first rotation effect production execution control unit is limited, and the execution control of the second rotation production effect by the second rotation production effect execution control unit is given priority. Priority means,
A gaming machine characterized by comprising: